Home Military Page 5

Military

Prisoners of war 1991

Prisoners of war 1991

TC 27-10-2

PRISONERS
OF
WAR

SEPTEMBER 1991
DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release, distribution is unlimited.
*TC 27-10-2 Training Circular HEADQUARTERS 27-10-2 DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY Washington, DC, 17 September 1991
PRISONERS OF WAR
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

PREFACE ii

CHAPTER 1. LAWS THAT APPLY TO PRISONERS OF WAR 1

International Law 1

US Laws and Guidelines 3

CHAPTER 2. RIGHTS OF PRISONERS OF WAR 5

Protection 6

Proper Transport 6

Separation 6

Camp Inspection 7

Favorable Work Conditions 7

Personal Effects 7

Mail ~ 7

Military Pay 7

Quarters ; 7

Clothing 8

Food 8

Health and Medical Care 8

Religious, Recreational, and
Intellectual Activities , 8

Fair Trial 8

Suitable Disciplinary Punishment 9

Organization 9

CHAPTER 3. GUIDELINES FOR INTERROGATION, COMMUNICATION, AND RESISTANCE … 11

Interrogation ……………….•………………………………………………… 12

Communication 12

Resistance 13

REFERENCES References-14

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved .for pUblic release, distribution is unlimi~ed.

*This publication supersedes TC 27-10-2, 1 September 1980:
PREFACE

The purpose of this circular is to help you as officers and noncommissioned officers to continuously train and educate yourselves and your soldiers in the laws concerning prisoners of war (PWs). This publication covers the following topics:
Rights and duties of PWs. •
Laws governing treatment· of PWs, including standards of conduct for captured United States (US) PWs.


Interrogation, communication, and resistance tactics for PWs.

You should know about laws that apply to PWs for two practical reasons. First, they govern US behavior toward captured enemy personnel. Soldiers in combat must be ready to handle captured enemy troops b~foretheir removal to permanent PW installations. Second, and more personal, they protect captured members ofUS forces. Ifyou become a PW, knowledge ofthe rights guaranteed and duties expected could mean your survival.
Every captured US individual continues to be of special concern to the US. The. US government expresses this concern by­

Continuing your right to promotion, pay and allowances, and dependent care while in captivity.


Employing every available means to establish contact with you and gain your release.


Ensuring in every possible way that you receive the protection and rights afforded you by the Geneva Conventions.


Providing your family members with all available information concerning your whereabouts and condition and providing all the support and care family members are entitled to under US law.

The proponent of this publication is The Judge Advocate General’s School, US Army. Send comments and recommendations on DA Form 2028 directly to Commandant, The Judge Advocate General’s School, ATTN: JAGS-ADI, Charlottesville, VA 22903-1781.
NOTE: In this publication, the terms captor and detaining power are synonymous. J
Unless this publication states otherwise, masculine nouns and pronouns do not refer exclusively to men.
CHAPTER 1
LAWS THAT APPLY TO PRISONERS OF WAR
As a soldier, you may rarely think about being cap­tured. It is not a pleasant subject and assuming that it can happen only to the other guy is easy. Though this attitude is natural, you must seriously consider the possibility of being captured and you must know the laws that apply to you as a PW. Knowing these laws will help you understand your rights and duties as a PW.
INTERNATIONAL LAW

THE GENEVA CONVENTION of War Victims. For the purposes of the dis­cussions in this book, they will be referred to as What You Should Know About the Convention the Geneva Convention or the Convention. The On 12 August 1949 at Geneva, Switzerland, Convention is part of US law as well as inter­representatives of61 nations, including the US, national law. They provide for more humane completedworkonfourintemational agreements treatment for military personnel and civilians
called The Geneva Convention for the Protection in time of war.
LAWS THAT APPLY TO PRISONERS OF WAR
TC 27-10-2 ~—————–CHAPTER 1
Three of the four Convention agreements are revisions of earlier international agree­ments dating back about 100 years. The first deals’with the protection of sick and wounded soldiers oilland. The second covers those atsea or shipwrecked. The third and most familiar covers the treatment of PWs.The fourth deals with the protection of civilians.
The Convention applies not only to a formally declared war but to all forms of armed conflict. All four Convention agreements state that “the present convention shall apply to all cases of declared war or of any other armed conflict which may arise between two or more parties, evenifthe stateofwaris notrecognized by one ofthem.” US policy requires you adhere to the Convention whenever you are engaged in conflict.
The Geneva Convention set up an inspec­tion system that works through protecting powers. Any willing and able neutral country or impartial organization, agreed upon by the parties in a conflict, may act as a protecting power.
Basically, the duty of a protecting poweris to safeguard interests of the parties in conflict. Thus, a protecting power checks on proper application of the Convention rules. It also suggests corrective measures where necessary. For instance, a protecting power must periodic­ally inspect PW camps. The detaining power must do nothing to discourage or hinder the inspections. Prisoners must be permitted to appeal to the inspectors for help in correcting any violations of the Convention.
When no other arrangements exist, an organization such as the International Committee of the Red-Cross assumes the humanitarian functions of a protecting power.
Why You Should Adhere to the Convention
The US and its allies adhere to the Conven­tion becam;je they express humanitarian prin­ciples in harmony with nationalbeliefs and tra­ditions. Our compliance will possibly influence the willingness of all governments to do so.
In addition, you have a duty to defend the Constitution and uphold the laws of the US. Under the Constitution, treaties between the US and other nations are US law. One of those treaties is the Geneva Convention. You must be familiar withtherequirements ofthe Convention and adhere to them. In your hands·is the reputation ofthe US as a law-abidingmemberof the community ofnations.
The Convention can be effective only if governments and citizens abide by their pro­visions. In the past, certain parties to a conflict sometimes refused to acknowledge that the Geneva Convention applied to the conflict. Despite isolated incidents and atrocities that have occurred, an awareness that prisoners’ treatmentshouldbehumaneseemstobegrowing.
Who Is Covered by the Convention
The Geneva Convention establishes those who qualify as PWs and are entitled to PW treatment. ThoseentitledtoPWstatusinclude­

Members of regular armed forces, includ­ing militias and volunteer corps that are part of the armed forces.


Members ofother militia, volunteer corps, and organized resistance movements, provided they meet the following criteria:

–    Have a commander responsible for sub­ordinates. -Have a fixed, distinctive emblem recognizable at a ,distance. -Carry arms openly. -Conductoperations accordingto thelaws laws and customs of war.

Members of regular armed forces of governments not recognized by the de­taining power (the party holding the prisoner). Even if the country capturing a person does not recognize the prison­er’s government, the person still gets PW treatment.


Certain civilians accompanying the armed forces, including civilian members of military aircraft crews, war corre­spondents, supply contractors, and United Service Organization personnel.

LAWS THAT APPLY,TO PRISONERS OF WAR

________________________________ TC 27-10-2
CHAPTER 1

Members of the merchant marines and crews of civil aircraft.


Inhabitants of an unoccupied territory who spontaneously resist invading forces without time to form into regular armed units. Persons belonging (or having be­longed) to the armed forces ofan occupied country, if the occupying forces consider it necessary to intern them.


Military personnel interned in neutral countries.

In past wars, deciding who was a PW was fairly easy, because most captives wore uni­forms thatplainlyidentified them. Whilethis is still generally true in conventional warfare, it may not be true in guerrilla or counterinsur­gency warfare. In Vietnam, for example, a cap­tive might have been dressed as a local civilian rather than in military uniform. Also, women and children were not generally regarded as PWs, but placing them in their proper category proved to be a problem.
In combat, classifying captives as PWs is difficult or impossible. Therefore, treat all cap­tives as PWs until you verify their status.
CUSTOMARY LAWS OF WAR Centuries of warfare have developed un­written laws governing the conduct of war. Known as the customary laws ofwar, they stem from the lessons of history. They attempt to limit human suffering and destruction of non­military targets. They also provide for humane treatment of all individuals under military control. The Geneva Convention adds to the custom­ary laws ofwar but do not replace them. Where the Convention is not specific, the customary laws of war govern actions.
US LAWS AND GUIDELINES
THE UNIFORM CODE OF MILITARY JUSTICE
The Uniform Code of Military Justice (UCMJ), which sets minimum standards of conductfor all US military personnel, continues
LAWS THAT APPLY TO PRISONERS OF WAR
to apply to you if you are captured. The UCMJ provides legal authority to enforce a captured commander’s orsenior-ranking person’s orders.
Article 105 of the UCMJ prohibits a PW from improving his condition at the expense of fellow ‘prisoners. Examples include revealing escape plans or disclosing secret caches offood, equipment, or arms of other PWs. A PW who is in a position of authority and’mistreats other PWs is also chargeable under Article 105. The mistreatment can range from striking a PW to depriving him of benefits without justifiable cause.
Also, Article 104 of the UCMJ prohibits aiding the enemy by giving him intelligence or engagingin unauthorized communication. The offense occurs the moment the service member relays the communication, whether it reaches its destination or not. The means of communi­cation, whether direct or indirect, has no bearing on the issue of guilt.
THE US CODE OF CONDUCT The US Code of Conduct provides a form of mental defense if you are captured during conflict. It is a guide for you to use to resist illegal PW practices. It supports the intent of the Geneva Convention by preventing use of PWs to further the enemy war effort.
The Code applies to all members of the active forces or reserve components. It dates back to the Revolutionary War; however, the current, revised Code stems from the ex;peri­ences ofAmerican prisoners during the Korean and Vietnam Wars. Two influences prompted the revision: isolated incidents of improper actions by US prisoners and the new aspect of PW treatment-exploitation by the enemy.
The US Code of Conduct consists of six articles and accompanying explanations. You should be familiar with the Code and not take it lightly. The Code holds that an American fighting soldier should be ready to give his life for his country. As a US PW, you must follow these guidelines:

Never surrender of your own free will.


Ifcaptured, make every effort to escape.

TC 27-10-2 .-;. _ CHAPTER 1
f


Make no agreements to obtain parole or accept special favors.


Keep faith with fellow prisoners.


If you are the senior-ranking prisoner eligible> for command, whether officer or enlisted, assume command (secretly, if necessary) within a PW camp or within a group of PWs, regardless of service.

• Obey the lawful orders of your superiors, regardless of service.

Followingthese guidelines requires thatyou give only your name, rank, social security number, and date of birth. You must resist, avoid, or evade, to the best of your ability, all enemy efforts to obtain statements or actions which further the enemy’s cause.
LAWS THAT APPLY TO PRISONERS OF WAR

Experience shows that if you are aware of your rights and duties, you get better treatment than other prisoners. Increased awareness also helps end illegal PW pr.actices. Article 13 of the Geneva Convention Relative to the Treatment of PWs, for example, provides that PWs “must at all times be protected, particularly against acts of violence or intimidation, and against insults and public curiosity.”
The detaining power may not ask or force you to give up any rights under the Convention. Further, a party to the Convention can make no agreements or arrangements that deprive its own personnel, or the personnel of any other party to the Convention, of their rights and privileges.
RIGHTS OF PRISONERS OF WAR
TC 27-10-2
PROTECTION

The Convention prohibits the detaining power from holding you in areas exposed to fire In the combat zone. The detaining power must evacuate you from the battle area as swiftly, safely, and. humanely as possible. It may not use your presence to protect areas from military operations. For example, a detaining power cannot keep you in a place as a means of preventing the enemy from bombing it. Itmust tell the enemy the location ofPW,camps. When military considerations permit, the detaining power must mark the camps with letters large enough to be seen clearly from the air.

PROPER TRANSPORT

The detaining power must ensure that you have food, safe drinking water, clothing, and medical attention during a transfer. The transit or screening camps through which you pass must meet the same general requirements as permanent camps.
“‘!””””_
CHAPTfR 2

Within a week after you reach a PW camp, the detaining powermust send a message on the standard capture card (see below). The detain­ing power should also forward a copy of this cardto the Central PrisonerofWarInformation Agency. This is a clearing house operated by the International Committee ofthe Red Cross in Geneva. The detaining power must also notify this agency whenever a prisoner transfers to another camp or hospital.

SEPARATION

The detaining power must separate you along with other PWs in camps or compounds according to your nationality, language, and customs. PWsfrom the same armed forces must remain together unless they agree to the separa­tion. Every camp must have copies of the Conventions, in each PW’s language, posted in places where prisoners can read them. All camp notices, regulations, and orders must be in a language the PWs understand.
RIGHTS OF PRISONERS OF WAR
TC 27-10-2

CHAPTER 2
CAMP INSPECTION

According to the Geneva Convention Rela­tive to the Treatment ofPWs, a protecting power must periodicallyinspectPW camps. Thedetain­ing power must do nothing to discourage or hinder the inspections. They must let you appeal to the inspectors for help in correcting violations of this Convention.
FAVORABLE WORK
CONDITIONS

The working conditions for you as an employed PW must be at least as favorable as those of the detaining power’s forces under similar circumstances. The detaining power’s laws for the safety and protection of workers apply to you.
Ifyou are an officer, you may request work; camp officials may notforce you to work. Ifyou are a noncommissioned officer (NCO), you shall only be required to supervise, but you may request other kinds of work.
As a working prisoner, you get paid for your services. Your work cannot harm your health, and it may not have any military character or purpose. You maynot perform any humiliating or hazardous work such as removing mines or booby traps. Yon mayrestfor onehour during a full work day and may work no more than six days per week. Camp officials should not force you to work when ill or in poor physical condition.
Ifyou are an enlisted prisoner, you may be compelled to perform certain kinds of work as described in the Convention in areas such as­

Administration, maintenance, and con­struction of the camp.


Agriculture.


Industries connected with raw materials and manufacturing (but not metallur­gical, chemical, or machinery industries).


Public works and construction that have no military character or purpose.


Transport and handling ofstores that are not military in character or purpose.


Public utility services having no military character or purpose.

RIGHTS OF PRISONERS OF WAR

Commercial business and arts and crafts.


Domestic service.

PERSONAL EFFECTS

As a PW, you keep all your personal effects, including your clothing and mess gear, insignia of rank or nationality, decorations, identifi­cation cards, and articles of sentimental value, even during transit from one comap to another. Medical personnel can retain aid bags. Only officers may order you to give up your money or valuables. In all such cases, captors must give you receipts. You must keep your protective masks, metal helmets, and other items issued for personal protection. Ofcourse, this does not include arms, military equipment, or military documents.
MAIL

Camp officials must allow you, as soon as possible after your capture, to inform your family of your whereabouts and health. You have the right to send letters as frequently as the captor’s censorship and postal facilities allow. You may also receive letters and relief packages forwarded through neutral agencies.
MILITARY PAY

You continue to accrue your military pay during captivity. Nortnally, the US govern­ment holds it for you until your release. The detaining power must provide you a monthly advance of pay, a stated sum that varies according to rank.
QUARTERS

The Geneva Conventions declare that “prisoners ofwarshallbe quarteredunder con­ditions as favorable as those for the forces ofthe detaining power who are billeted in the same area.” These are the minimum standards of treatment. Camp conditions may never en­danger your health.
TC 27-10-2

CLOTHING

The detaining power must provide clothing, underwear, footwear, and work clothing, and must mend or replace these items regularly. If possible, the detaining power should supply clothing from stocks ofuniforms captured from your own forces.

FOOD

To the extent possible, every camp should establish a canteen where you can buy food­stuffs, soap, tobacco, and ordinary articles in daily use. Prices can be no higher than those charged civilians in the area. Any profits are for the benefit of the prisoners.
The 1929 Prisoner of War Convention pro­vided that prisoI;1ers get the same rations as troops of the detaining power. During World War II,however, this proved unrealistic. For example, American and British prisoners in the Far East could not easily digest the fish head and rice part of the diet that their Japanese captors provided.
In 1949thePrisonerofWarConventionwas revised to state that food must be “sufficient in quantity, quality and variety” to keep the prisoners in good health without loss of weight. Further, the detaining power must con­sider the dietary habits ofall prisoners. It must provde mess halls and kitchens where prison­ers can assist in preparing their own food. Restricting food as a form of mass punishment is forbidden.
The captor must also furnish sufficient safe drinking water and must allow prisoners to use tobacco if they wish.

HEALTH AND MEDICAL CARE
The Geneva Convention include detailed provisions for meeting your health and medical needs. They ensure at least a minimum stand­.ardofhealth. Forexample,campsmustinclude adequate latrines, showers, and laundry facili­ties. According to the Geneva Convention Relative to the Treatment of PWs, the captor “shall be’bound to take all sanitary measures necesSary to ensure the cleanliness and health­
fulness of camps and to prevent epidemics.”
—-.~
CHAPTER 2
iJ
,

Every camp shall have an adequate infirm­ary. In the infirmary, you should receive treat­ment from medical personnel from your own capturedforces, ifpossible. Sick call must occur regularly. Camp officials mustconductmedical inspections of PWs at least monthly. Such inspections will include periodic X-ray exami­nations for tuberculosis and tests for other infections and contagious diseases.
Captors should let captured medical per­sonnel visit prisoners inside and outside en­closures. They fit into the special category of retained persons and must perform only the duties of their profession for the benefit of prisoners.

RELIGIOUS, RECREATIONAL,

AND INTELLECTUAL

ACTIVITIES

Camp officials must allow you to attend services of your faith and otherwise practice your religion. They must allow chaplains, who are consideredretained persons, to perform only the duties of their profession for the benefit of prisoners. Chaplains should have maximum freedom to minister to the religious needs of prisoners.
Camp officials must also allow you the right to exercise, including playing sports and games, and to participate in intellectual and educa­tional activities.
Article 80 of the Geneva Conventions provides for the establishment ofPW organiza­tions for welfare and morale purposes. All PWs should organize for activity such as studies, sports, and other recreation.

FAIR TRIAL

You must be tried in the same court and according to the same procedures as members of the armed forces of the detaining power. Regardless of the charge, you may not get a sentence more severe than .a member of the detaining power’s forces could receive for the same offense. If you are charged with an offenserequiring a trial, a military court hears
RIGHTS OF PRISONERS OF WAR

________________________________ TC 27-10-2
CHAPTER 2
the case. The only exception is if a member of the detaining power’sforces commits an offense and would be tried in civil court, you could also be tried in civil court for a similar offense. You have a right to appeal as provided under laws that apply to the detaining power’s armed forces. You may not be punished more than once for the same act or on the same charges.
Additional safeguards include your right to counsel, advance knowledge ofthe charges, the services of a competent interpreter, and ample time for preparation of the defense. The de­taining power must provide advance notice ofa trialtoa representativeofyourprotectingpower as he is entitled to attend the proceedings.
SUITABLE DISCIPLINARY PUNISHMENT
Wheneverdisciplineis imposed, PWs should know the rights afforded them by the
Convention.

FORMS OF PUNISHMENT
Under the Geneva Convention, whenever possible, you should getthe lightest punishment authorized for a violation. The Geneva Con­vention lists forms of disciplinary punishment suitable for minor offenses. Disciplinary punishment may include­

Fines up to one-half of your advance of pay. and working pay for not more than 30 days.


Withdrawal of any privileges granted beyond those required by the Geneva Convention (no required privilege may be withdrawn).


Not more than two hours a day of fatigue duty such as kitchen police, fire watch, or othertasks performed outsidenormal duty hours for the common welfare of the PWs (officers may not be forced to work).


Simple confinement for not more than 30 days.

LIMITATIONS ON PUNISHMENT
Even when your captors find you guilty of several minor offenses in the same proceedings,
RIGHTS OF PRISONERS OFWAR
the Geneva Convention limits the disciplinary punishment to 30 days. Ifyou receive consecu­tive 30-day sentences, at least 3 days must elapsebetween sentences. Youmustbeinformed ofthe offense and havean opportunitytodefend yourself. You may also call witnesses to testify on your behalf.
In addition, captors cannot give you undue punishment if you escape and get recaptured. The attempt to escape is not a criminal offense and entails only disciplinary punishment. If, when trying to escape, you commit a minor crime to help you escape, such as forging identification papers or stealing civilian clothes, you may be appropriately disciplined. However, the fact that you were trying to escape is not an excuse to impose extra punishment. Ifyou help a fellow prisoner escape, you are subject only to disciplinary punishment, unless your partici­pation includes violence or acts not solely to aid the escape.
Even during disciplinary punishment, you must receive medical attention. The camp commander must also allow you time to read and write and at least two hours of open-air
/ exercise each day.
DISTRIBUTION OF

PUNISHMENT
Only the camp commander or a designated representative can impose disciplinary punish­ment. He cannot delegate this power to a prisoner, regardless of grade. The camp commander records all punishments. He must make these records availablefor the representa­tive of the protecting power to inspect.

ORGANIZATION

PRISONERS’

REPRESENTATIVE
Organization in a PW camp is very im­portant. Prisoners need a solid structure that allows them to be responsible to someone or for something. The Geneva Convention Relative to the Treatment ofPWs authorizes establishment of PW organizations. The organizations normally are responsible to the prisoners’
TC 27-10-2 —;-“””‘;”‘”_
CHAPT~R 2 f

representatives. For USPWs, the senior officer among the PWs becomes the prisoners’ representative.
A detaining power may seek to damage morale or weaken certain PW organizations by trying to install a cooperative prisoner as the prisoners’ representative. In camps with no officers, camp authorities may refuse to accept the senior representative. They may demand more elections until nomination of a weak person appropriate for the d.etaining power’s purposes. They design these tactics to break down the prisoners’ internal control. US policy, however, is that the senior person is always in charge.
Underprovisions ofthe Geneva Convention, the prisoners’ representative monitors the physical, spiritual, and intellectual well-being ofthe prisoners. He represents them before the military authorities ofthe detaining power, the protecting power, the International Committee of the Red Cross, and any other outside organization that may assist the prisoners. Various committees should be established to deal with the general problems of camp administration.
SENIOR RANKING OFFICER According to the US Code of Conduct and for their own benefit, PWs should organize in a military manner under the senior person eligible for command, the seniorranking officer (SRO). He can be either an officer or enlisted soldier. The SRO should assume command within the camp or within a group of prisoners according to rank. He should do so regardless of branch of military service. The US Code of Conduct (Article IV) places clearresponsibility ofcommand squarelyonthe shoulders of the senior ranking person. Sub­
ordinates must obey the orders ofthe SRO. The SRO should ensure proper behavior of those under him. Enlisted prisoners must salute officers of the detaining power and show them the same respect required by their own forces. Officer prisoners must salute higher-ranking officers of the detaining power and the camp commander, regardless of his rank. Prisoners may wear their decorations and rank insignia.
Iffor any reason the senior person is unable to act, the next senior person must assume command. Chaplains and medical personnel are normally ineligible for command because of the nature of their duties and the special protected status accorded them under the
Conventions.
Common sense and camp conditions de­termine how the SRO and other prisoners organize and carry out their responsibilities. The SRO must inform the other prisoners that he is taking command. He must designate the chain ofcommand and inform all prisoners ofit so they can identify the representatives who deal with enemy authorities. He must ensure that PWs in his organization understand their duties and the chain of command.
The enemy probably knows about the US Code of Conduct and the duties and respon­sibilities it imposes on the SRO. Experience shows that PWs most likely can have an SRO and a commandorganization only secretly; that is, the organization will be unknown to camp authorities. Theenemymaynot allow an organ­ization-basedonthe normal militarycommand structure-to form or function openly. In that case, the organization may elect prisoner’s representatives. However, even if such repre­sentatives are elected, the SRO mustcontinue to secretly exercise military command authority over all PW matters.
RIGHTS OF PRISONERS OF WAR

CHAPTER 3
GUIDELINES FOR INTERROGATION, OMMUNICATION, AND RESISTANCE~~~~
You must resist, avoid, or evade, to the best of your ability, all enemy efforts to secure statements or actions which further the enemy’s cause. The Geneva Convention requires that you give only your name, rank, social security number, and date of birth. If you unwillingly or accidentally disclose unauthorized information, you must regroup, renew resistance, and use a fresh approach or an alternate line of mental defense.
GUIDELINES FOR INTERROGATION COMMUNICATION AND RESISTANCE
TC 27-10-2  “””‘:””:’
CHAPTE~ 3
j
INTERROGATION

Ifyou are captured, you must know certain things about the interrogation process. Your captors must question you in a language you understand. They must not use physical or mental torture or other coercion to obtain information nor should they punish you if you fail to respond. Most countries issue identifi­cation cards to members of their armed forces. Although PWs must show them to their captors on demand, as a PW, you have the right to keep your card.
Captors view PWs as valuable sources of military information and propaganda and will use every bit of information for their own purposes. Therefore,duringenemyinterrogation, indoctrination, and otherexploitation attempts, you should follow the guidelines below­

Giveonlyyourname, rank, servicenumber, and date of birth.


Be respectful but not give the impression that you are willing to cooperate through politeness. Such an impression might prolong the interrogation.


Act ignorant of possessing information useful to the enemy.


Be aware of informants such as prison camp medical personnel who may be used to collect information.


Do not reveal knowledge of the enemy’s language; your concealed understanding of their language may help you escape.


Do not believe that fellow prisoners have talked. This is a common procedure to catch prisoners off guard and encourage them to talk.


Avoid looking the interrogator directly in the eye. Your eyes can give information even if you do not answer dIrectly. Select a spot between the interrogator’s eyes or on his forehead and concentrate on it.


Be courteous but firm in refusing to give information during interrogation.


Salute all senior officer interrogators.


Nevergiveinformationaboutotherprisoners. Ifa fellow prisoneris mentioned dur~ngin­terrogation,reportthe circumstancestoyour

superior. The other prisonermay be under
surveillance. Information from one PW
may be used against the other.

Do not try to impress interrogators by boasting of exploits, either true or invented.


Do not be tricked into filling out innocent­looking questionnaires or writing state­ments that require more than name, rank, service number, and date of birth.


Do not attempt to deceive the enemy by volunteering false information. A skilled interrogatoris able to extractneededinfor: mation once you start talking on the subject.


Stay confident of yourself, your family, your unit, your country, and your religion. Above all, keep the will to survive.

COMMUNICATION

As a PW you are not supposed to provide information to your captor. However, to expect you to remain confined for years without some communication with the enemy is unrealistic. Certaintypes ofcommunicationsare acceptable. You should know these exceptions and exercise . great caution when communicating with the enemy.
You may, when appropriate, talk to captors on matters of health and welfar~. Medical personnel may communicate withthe detaining power concerning medical requirements, sani­tary conditions, and related matters. The SRO has a duty to represent prisoners in matters of camp administration, health, welfare, and grievances.
You may also communicate with your families through letters. However, you must understand that the enemy will read them and may distort and use the information to demoral­izeyou, yourfamily athome, and your comrades in the field. Thus, if you become a PW, you should keep personal correspondence brief and general.
GUIDELINES FOR INTERROGATION COMMUNICATION AND RESISTANCE
________________________________ TC 27-10-2
CHAPTER 3
RESISTANCE

Under the Geneva Convention, the detain­ing power cannot subject a prisoner to physical or mental torture, or any other force, to secure information. However, do notrely on the enemy to abide by the Geneva Convention. If you are captured and tortured, you mustresist, avoid, or evade, to the best of your ability, all enemy efforts to obtain statements or actions that will help the enemy. Examples of statements or actions to resist that are harmful to the US, its allies, or other prisoners, include­

Oral or written confessions.


Questionnaires or personal history statements.


Propaganda recordings and broadcasts.


Appeals to other PWs and appeals for surrender or peace.


Engagement in self-criticism.


Oral or written statements or communi­cations on behalfofthe enemy.

The enemy might use any confession or statement to convict you as a war criminal. It prolongs your right to repatriation until you serve a prison sentence.
If as a PW you. unwillingly or accidentally disclose unauthorized information, you must regroup and renew resistance. You must use a fresh approach or a different line of mental defense. Experience shows thata prisoner with the will to resist can withstand intense levels of mistreatment even though enemy interrogation sessions are harsh and cruel.
GUIDELINES FOR INTERROGATION COMMUNICATION AND RESISTANCE

REFERENCES
SOURCES USED
These are the sources quoted or paraphrased in this publication.
JOINT AND MULTISERVICE PUBLICATIONS
NWP 9/FMFM1-10. The Commander’s Handbook on the Law ofNaval Opera­tions. 1989.
ARMY PUBLICATIONS

FM 27-10. The Law of Land Warfare. 1956.
DA Pam 27-1. Treaties Governing Land Warfare. 1956.

FM 27-2. Your Conduct in Combat. November 1984.
NON-MILITARY PUBLICATIONS

Pictet, Jean S. Commentary to IIIGeneva Convention Relative to the Treatment of Prisoners of War. 1960.
Levie, Howard S. Prisoners of War in International Armed Conflict; Interna­tional Law Series, Vol. 59.
Levie, Howard S. Documents on Prisoners of War; International Law Series, Vol. 60.

READINGS RECOMMENDED
These readings contain relevant supplemental information. Shindler/Toman, ed. The Laws of Armed Conflict. 1988.
·u.s.Government Printing OIlIce: 1991 -527·027/40009
~”

TC 27-10-2
17 SEPTEMBER 1991
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
GORDON R. SULLIVAN
General,  United States Anny
Chief of Staff
Official:
PATRICIA P. HICKERSON
Brigadier General,  United States Anny
The Adjutant General

DISTRIBUTION: Active Anny, USAR and ARNG: To be distributed in accordance with Da Fonn 12-11E, requirements for TC 27-10-2, Prisoners of War, (Qty rqr block no. 1373).

 

Rules warfare 1934

Rules warfare 1934

BASIC FIELD MANUAL

Volume VII
MILITARY LAW

PART TWO
RULES OF LAND WARFARE

Prepared under direction of
the Judge Advocate General
UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
WASHINGTON: 1934

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C. -Price 10 cents
WAR DEPARTMENT, WASHINGTON,
January 2, 1934.
Part Two, Rules of Land Warfare, Basic Field Manual, Volume VII, Military Law, is published for the information and guidance of all concerned.

[A.G. 062.11 (5.1033).1
BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY W’AR:
OF
DOUGLAS MAcARTHUR,
General, Chief of Stag.
OFFICIAL:
JAMES F. McICINLEY,

Major General,
The Adjutant General.

I1
i. FOREWORD
Basic Field Manual, Volume VII, Military Law, will be pub- lished in three parts, as follows:
Part One. Manual for Courts-martial.
Part Two. Rules of Land Warfare.
Part Three. Military Aid to Civil Authorities.

Appendixes, such as were included in the prior editions, show- ing the complete French and English texts of the various appli- cable treaties and conventions have been omitted, but, except as hereinafter noted, the official English of every treaty provision obligatory upon the United States, bearing upon the conduct of the forces in the field, is quoted verbatim in the chapter to which it relates. The only exceptions are-
1.
The Red Cross conventions of 1864 and 1906, which! although superseded by the Red Cross convention of 1929, chapter 5, as between parties to the latter, continue in force, respectively, as between the United States and such of the other parties to each of the former, as have not ratified or adhered to the latter;

2.
The Hague Convention of 1899, relating to the laws and customs of war on land (first international peace conference), which, although superseded by Hague Convention No. IV of 1907 (second international peace conference), herein quoted, as between parties to the latter, continues in force as between the United States and such of the other parties to the former as have not yet ratified or adhered to the latter; and

3.
Chapter I1 of the annex to Hague Convention No. IV of October 18, 1907, relating to prisoners of war (excepting arts. 10, 11, and 12 relating to paroles; pars. 149, 155, 156), which, although in effect superseded by the Geneva convention of July 27, 1929, upon the same subject, chapter 4, as between parties to the latter, continues in force as between the United States and such of the other parties to the former as have not ratified or adhered to the latter.

The essential provisions of each of the antecedent conventions mentioned in I and 2 above, and of chapter I1 of the annex to

FORE WORD
Hague Convention No. IV (excepting the thee articles above mentioned), have been substantially reincorporated within the more recent and more comprehensive convention on the same subject, so that observance of the latter practically includes observance of the former. For this reason, and in view of the general rule prescribed by paragraph 5, only the most recent convention on each of these subjects is quoted in this publication, saving the three articles on paroles above mentioned.
Under the general rule last above mentioned, pertinent in-formation concerning ratifications, adherences, reservations, and denunciations (withdrawals) will be specially notified by higher authority to the commanders in the field, as occasions arise, thus rendering unnecessary the inclusion of such data in this text, and avoiding the frequent changes that such inclusion would entail.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Para-
graphs Pages
Abbreviations .–..—.—— – –…–.-.—…—.—–.-.– – ——VI
CHAPTER1. Basic rules and principles -…….-…..—..—-…—1-3

1-7

2. Qualifications of armed forces of belligerents ….-..–..8-13 4-5

3. Hostilities:
SECTION I. Commencement of hostilities ………..-.-..—..-14-21

11. Conduct of hostilities ………—…-….-.—…-

22-70
C~APTER 71-173

4. Prisoners of war ………………………………..

5. Sick, wounded, and dead ……………………….. 174-202

6. Espionage and treason …..-…..-…—…..–….—
203-215

7. Intercourse between belligerents …………..–….–216235

8.     Military passports, safe-conducts, safeguards, and cartels ……………………………………….
236-244

9. Capitulations and armistices ………-.-..–.-..–…-246271

10.     Military occupation and government of enemy ter-
ritory………………………………………..272-349

11. Penalties for violations of the laws of war .–………. 35&364

12. Neutrality……………………………………..

36.5-408
Index-. –..-.. . —. ——————————- — ———
—.–.——.
Y

G.P.W__- Geneva convention of July 27, 1929, relative to the treatment of prisoners of war; Treaty Series No. 846; 47 Stat.* 233.
G.W.S—Geneva (Red Cross) convention of July 27, 1929, for the amelioration of the condition of the wounded and sick of armies in the field; Treaty Series No. 847; 47 Stat.* 286.
H. 111—-    Hague Convention No. 111of October 18, 1907, re-lating to the opening of hostilities; Treaty Series No. 538; 36 Stat.* 2259; Malloy, Treaties, Yol. 11, 2259.
H. IV—-Hague Convention No. IV of October 18, 1907, re-specting the laws and customs of war on land; Treaty Series No. 539s 36 Stat.* 2277; Malloy, Treaties, Vol. 11, 2269.
H. V_..-_- Hague Convention No. V of October     18, 1907, re-specting the rights and.duties of neutral powers and persons in case of war on land; Treaty Series No. 540; 36 Stat.* 2310; Malloy, Treaties, Vol. 11, 2290.
H. VIII-_ Hague Convention     No. VIII of October 18, 1907, relative to the laying of automatic submarine contact mines; Treaty Series No. 541; 36 Stat.* 2332; Malloy, Treaties, Vol. 11, 2304.
H.     Hague Convention No. PX of October 18, 1907, con-cerning bombardment by naval forces in time of war; Treaty Series No. 542; 36 Stat.* 2351; Malloy, Treaties, Vol. 11, 2314.
H.D. XIV- Hague Declaration No.     XIV of October 18, 1907, prohibiting the discharge of projectiles and explo- sives from balloons; Treaty Series No. 546; 36 Stat.* 2439; Malloy, Treaties, Vol. 11, 2366.
H.R—–Annex to Hague Convention No. IV of October 18. 1907, embodying the regulations respecting the laws and customs of war on land adopted by that convention; Treaty Series No. 539; 36 Stat.* 2295; Malloy, Treaties, Vol. 11, 2281.
*United States Statutes at Large.
VT

BASIC FIELD MANUAL
VOLUME VII
MILITARY LAW
PART TWO

RULES OF LAND WARFARE
(The matter contained herein supersedes Rules of Land Warfare, War Department Document No. 467, oripnslly published in 1914, and reprinted with amendments in 1017.)
CHAPTER 1
BASIC RULES AND PRINCIPLES
1.
General.-Among civilized nations the conduct of war is regulated by certain well-established rules known as the rules or laws of war. These rules cover and regulate warfare both on land and sea. Those which pertain particularly to war on land are called the rules of land warfare. Tt is the latter with which this part is concerned.

2.
Written rules.-Many of the rules of war have been set forth in treaties or conventions to which the United States and other nations are parties. These are commonly called the written rules or laws of war.

3.
Unwritten rules.-Some of the rules of war have never yet been incorporated in any treaty or convention to which the United States is signatory. These are commonly called the unwritten rules or laws of war, although they are well defined bv recognized authorities on international law and well estab- lished by the custom and usage of civilized nations.

4.
Basic principles.-Among the so-called unwritten rules or laws of war are three interdependent basic principles that underlie all of the other rules or laws of civilized warfare, both written and unwritten, and form the general guide for conduct where no more specific rule applies, to wit:

a. The principle of military necessity, under which, subject to the principles of humanity and chivalry, a belligerent is justified in applying any amount and any kind of force to compel the com- plete submission of the enemy with the least possible expenditure of time, life, and money;
1

b.
The principle of humanily, prohibiting employment of any such kind or degree of violence as is not actually necessary for the purpose of the war; and

c.
The principle of chivalry, which denounces and forbids resort to dishonorable means, expedients, or conduct.

5. Force of rules.-a. The unwritten rules are binding upon all civilized nations. They will be strictly observed by our forces, subject only to such exceptions as shall have been directed by competent authority by way of legitimate reprisals for illegal conduct of the enemy. (See par. 363.)
b. Technically each of the written rules is binding only be- tween powers that have ratified or adhered to, and have not thereafter denounced (withdrawn from), the treaty or conven- tion by which the rule is prescribed, aud is bindiiig only to the extent permitted by the reservations, if any, that have accom- panied such ratification or adherence on either side. However, the written rules herein quoted in bold-faced type are all pre- scribed by treaties or conventions each of which has been ratified without reservation, and not thus far denounced, by the United States and many other nations. They are in large part but formal and specific applications of general principles of the unwritten rules. While solemnly obligatory as between the signatory powers, they may be said also to represent the con- sensus of modern international public opinion a,s to how bellig- erents and neutrals should conduct themselves in the particulars indicated. As a general rule they will be strictly observed and enforced by United States forces in the field, as far as applicable there, without regard to whether they are legally binding upon all of the powers immediately concerned. It is the responsi- bility of higher authority, as occasions arise, to determine and to instruct the commander in the field, which, if any, of the written rules herein quoted are not legally binding as between the United States and each of the other powers immediately concerned, and which, if any, for that reason are not for the time being to be observed or enforced.
6. Military government and martial law distinguished.- Military government is that form of government which is established and maintained by a belligerent by force of arms over occupied territory of the enemy and over the inhabitants thereof. In this definition the term “territory of the enemy” includes not only the territory of an enemy nation, but also
domestic territory recovered by military occupation from rebels
treated as belligerents.
Martial law is the temporary government of the civil popula-
tion through the military forces as necessity may require in
domestic territory as distinguished from occupied territory of
an enemy recognized as a belligerent.
So far as the United States forces are concerned, military
government and martial law are exercised by the military com-
mander under the direction of the President, as Commander
in Chief of the Army and Navy.
The most prominent distinction between military government and martial law is, that the former is exercised only in the terri- tory of a hostile belligerent and is within the realm of interna- tional law, while the latter is invoked only in domestic territory whose local government and inhabitants are not treated or recognized as belligerents.
7. Military jurisdiction.-Military jurisdiction is of two kinds: First, that which is conferred and defined by statute; second, that which is derived from the common law of war. The character of the courts which have jurisdiction over military offenses depends upon the local laws of each particular country.
In the armies of the United States, military jurisdiction is exercised through the following military tribunals:
a.
Courts-martial.

b.
Military commissions.

c.
Provost courts.

While general courts-martial have concurrent jurisdiction with military commissions and provost courts to try any offender who by the law of war is subject to trial by military tribunals, it has generally been held that military commissions have no jurisdic- tion of such purely military offenses specified in the Articles of War as those articles expressly make punishable by sentence of court-martial (except where the military commission is also given express statutory jurisdiction over the offense (Articles of War 80, 81, 82). In practice, offenders who are not subject to the Articles of War, but who by the law of war are subject to trial by military tribunals, are tried by military commissions or provost courts.
4  BASIC  FIELD  MANUAL
CHAPTER 2
QUALIFICATIONS OF ARMED BELLIGERENTS  FORCES  OF
8. General division  of  enemy population.-The  enemy

population is divided in war into two general classes, known as the armed forces and the peaceful population. Both classes have distinct rights, duties, and disabilities, and no person can belong to both classes at one and the same time.
9. Lawful belligerents.-a. Armies, militia, and volunteer corps.-The laws, rights, and duties of war apply not only to armies, but also to militia and volunteer corps fulfilling the following conditions:
1.
To be commanded by a person responsible for his subor- dinates;

2.
To have a fixed distinctive emblem recognizable at a dis- tance;

3.
To carry arms openly; and

4.
To conduct their operations in accordance with the laws and usages of war. In countries where militia or volunteer corps constitute the army, or form part of it, they are included under the denomination “army” (H.R.,art. 1).

b.
Levee en masse.-The inhabitants of a territory which has not been occupied, who, on the approach of the enemy, spon- taneously take up arms to resist the invading troops without having had time to organize themselves in accordance with article 1, shall be regarded as belligerents if they carry arms openly and if they respect the laws and customs of war (H.R., art. 2).

c.
Combatants and noncombatants.-The armed forces of the belligerent parties may consist of combatants and noncombat- ants. In the case of capture by the enemy, both have a right to be treated as’prisoners of war (H.R., art. 3).

10.
Treatment as brigands, etc., forbidden.-No belJig-erent has the right to declare that he will treat every captured man in arms of a levee en masse as a brigand or bandit.

11.
Deserters, etc., not to enjoy immunity.-Certain classes of those forming part of a levee en masse cannot claim the privileges accorded in 9 b. Among these are deserters from, or subjects of, the invading belligerent, and persons who are known to have violated the laws and customs of war.

12.
Uprisings in occupied territory.-If the people of a country, or any portion thereof, already occupied by an army, rise against it, they are violators of the laws of war, and are not entitled to their protection.

13.
Determination of status of captured troops.-The determination of the status of captured troops is to be left to courts organized for the purpose. Summary executions are no longer contemplated under the laws of war. The officers’ duty is to hold the persons of those captured and leave the question of their being regulars, irregulars, deserters, etc., to the determina- tion of competent authority.

CHAPTER 3
HOSTILITIES Paragraphs 8gcrrON I. Commencementof hostilities .——–.—.—–.———–.—-.
1621

11. Conduct of hostilities .-…-..——–.—.—–..———-.—-
22-70
COMMENCEMENT OF HOSTILITIES
14.
Declaration of war required.-The contracting powers recognize that hostilities between themselves must not com- mence without previous and explicit warning, in the form either of a reasoned declaration of war or of an ultimatum with con- ditional declaration of war (H.ZIZ,art. I).

15.
Surprise still possible.-Nothing in the foregoing rule requires that any particular length of time shall elapse between declaration of war and the commencement of hostilities. It is still possible, therefore, to make a sudden and unexpected declaration of war and thus surprise an unprepared enemy.

16.
Notification to neutrals.-The existence of a state of war must be notified to the neutral powers without delay, and shall not take effect in regard to them until after the receipt of a notification, which may, however, be given by telegraph. Neutral powers, nevertheless, cannot rely on the absence of notification if it is clearly established that they were in fact aware

01. the existence of a state of war (H.ZZZ, art. 2).
17. When articles effective between parties.-Article 1 (see par. 14) of the present convention shall take effect in case of war between two or more of the contracting powers. Article 2 (see par. 16) is binding as between a belligerent power which is
BASIC FIELD MANUAL
a party to the convention and neutral powers which are also parties to the convention (H. IZZ, art. 3).
18. Legal and commercial importance of above arti-cles.-This convention (H. 111) is important from both the legal and commercial points of view since it requires belligerents themselves publicly to announce a definite date for the corn-mencement of hostilities, from which date they become entitled to exercise the rights of belligerency, are themselves required to respect the rights of neutrals, and may exact from neutrals compliance with the obligations of neutrality.
18. Status of civilian population.-lt is now universally recognized that hostilities are restricted to the armed forces of belligerents. Inhabitants who refrain from acts of hostility and pursue their ordinary vocations must bc distinguished from the armed forces of the belligerent; must be treated leniently; must not be injured in their lives or liberty, except for cause and after due trial; and must not, as a rule, be deprived of their private property.
20.
Detention and internment.-Enemy subjects located or resident in our territory are not made prisoners en masse on the breaking out of hostilities. Persons known to be active or reserve officers, or reservists, of the hostile army, as well as per- sons suspected of communicating with the enemy, will be detained and, if deemed advisable, interned on the ground of self-preserva- tion in the exercise of the right of control.

21.
Expulsion.-In modern practice the expulsion of the citizens or subjects of the enemy is generally decreed from sea- ports, fortresses, defended areas, and the actual or contemplated theaters of operation. The practice as to expulsion from other territory is not uniform, expulsion being resorted to usually for grave reasons of state only. When decreed, the persons expelled should be given such reasonable notice, consistent with public safety, as will enable them to arrange for the collection, disposal, and removal of their goods and property.

CONDUCT OF HOSTILITIES
MILITARY NECESSITY
22.
Object of war.-The object of war is to bring about the complete submission of the enemy as soon as possible by means of regulated violence.

23.
Military necessity.-Military necessity justifies a resort to all the measures which are indispensable for securing this object and vhich are not forbidden by the modern laws and customs of war.

24.
Measures justified by miLitary necessity.-Military necessity admits of-

a.
All direct destruction of life or limb of a~medenemies, and of other persons whose destruction is incidentally unavoidable in the armed contests of war.

b.
The capturing of every armed enemy, and of every enemy of importance to the hostile government, or of peculiar danger to the captor.

c.
The destruction of property, and obstruction of ways and channels of traffic, travel, or communication, and withholding of sustenance or means of life from the enemy.

d.
The appropriation of whatever the enemy’s country affords that is necessary for the subsistence and safety of the army.

e.
Such deception as does not involve the breaking of good faith, ebther positively pledged, regarding agreements entered into during the war, or supposed by the modern law of war to exist.

25. Measures not justified by military necessity.-Mili- tary necessity does not admit of cruelty-that is, the infliction of suffering merely for spite or revenge; nor of maiming or wounding except in combat; nor of torture to extort confessions. It does not admit of the use of poison in any way, nor of the wanton devastation of a district. It admits of deception, but disclaims acts of perfidy. The practice of recent years has been to regard the prohibition against the use of poison as not appli- cable to the use of toxic gases. (See par. 29.)
PROHIBITIONS AND LIMITATIONS
26. Means of injuring the enemy limited.-The right of belligerents to adopt means of injuring the enemy is not un- limited (H.R., art. 22).
The means employed are definitely restricted by international declarations and conventions and by the laws and usages of war.
27. Discharging explosives from balloons.-The contract-ing powers agree to prohibit, for a period extending to the close of the third peace conference, the discharge of projectiles and explosives from balloons or by other new methods of a similar nature (H.D. XZV, 1907).
This rule may be said to be of comparatively slight value because it has been ratified by only two of the great powers, namely, the United States and Great Britain, and because its principal object is substantially accomplished by H.R. article 25 (see par. 46), prohibiting bombardment of undefended places. It is not regarded as imposing any restriction upon the use of modern military aircraft against armed forces or defended places.
28. Poison.-In addition to the prohibitions provided by special conventions, it is especially forbidden * * * to em- ploy poison or poisoned weapons (H.R., art. 23, par. (a)).
Application of rule.-This prohibition extends to the use of means calculated to spread contagious diseases, and includes the deliberate contamination of sources of water by placing therein dead animals or poisonous substances of any kind, but does not prohibit measures being taken to dry up springs or to divert rivers and aqueducts from their courses. Concerning treaty pro- visions in regard to the use of toxic chemicals see paragraph 29.
29.
Gases andchemicals.-The United States is not a party to any treaty, now in force, that prohibits or restricts the use in warfare of toxic or nontoxic gases, or of smoke or incendiary materials, etc. A treaty signed at Washington, February, 6 1922, on behalf of the United States, the British Empire, France, Italy, and Japan (Malloy, Treaties, vol. 111,p. 3116), contains a provision (art. V) prohibiting “The use in war of asphyxiating, poisonous or other gases, and all analogous liquids, materials, or devices”, but that treaty was expressly conditioned to become effective only upon ratification by all of the signatory powers, and, although heretofore ratified by all of the signatories except France, having never been ratified by the latter, has never become effective. The protocol “for the prohibition of the use in war of asphyxiating, poisonous, or other gases, and of bac- teriological methods of warfare”, signed at Geneva June 17, 1925, on behalf of the United States and many other powers (League of Nations Official Journal, Aug. 1925, p. 1159), although rati- fied or adhered to by, and now effective as between, a considerable number of the signatories, has never thus far been ratified by, and is not in force as to, the United States, Japan, and some other powers.

30.
Treachery.-It is especially forbidden * * * to kill or wound treacherously individuals belonging to the hostile nation or army (H.R., art. 23, par. (b)).

31.
Assassination and outlawry.-The above article is con- strued as prohibiting assassination, proscription, or outlawry of an enemy, or putting a price upon an enemy’s head, as well as offering a reward for an enemy “dead or alive.” Offenders have no claim to be treated as combatants, but should be tried as criminals.

32.
Injury forbidden after surrender.-It is especially for- bidden * * * to kill or wound an enemy who, having laid down his arms, or having no longer means of defense, has sur- rendered at discretion (H.R., art. 23, par. (c)).

33.
Refusal of quarter.-It is especially forbidden * * * to declare that no quarter will be given (H.R., art. 23, par. (d)).

34.
Employment of arms, etc., causing unnecessary in-jury.-It is especially forbidden * * * to employ arms, projectiles, or material calculated to cause unnecessary injury

(H.R., art. 23, par. (e)).
The foregoing prohibition is not intended to apply to the use of explosives contained in artillery projectiles, mines, aerial tor- pedoes, or hand grenades, but it does apply to the use of lances with barbed heads, irregular-shaped bullets, and projectiles filled with glass, to the use of any substance on bullets that would tend unnecessarily to inflame a wound inflicted by them, and to the scoring of the surface or filing off the ends of the hard cases of bullets.
35.
Train wrecking, etc.-Train wrecking and burning of camps or military depots are legitimate means of injuring the enemy when carried out by the members of the armed forces. Wrecking of trains should be limited strictly to cases which tend directly to weaken the enemy’s military forces.

36.
Subjects not to be compelled to take part in opera-tions against their own country.-A belligerent is likewise forbidden to compel the nationals of the hostile party to take part in the operations of war directed against their own country, even if they were in the belligerent’s service before the com- mencement of the war (H.R., art. 23, East par.).

With respect to the impressment of guides see paragraph 310.
STRATAGEMS
37. Stratagems permissible.-Ruses of war and the em-ployment of measures necessary for obtaining information about the enemy and the country are considered permissible (H.R., art. 24).
10 BASIC FIELD MANUAL
38.
Good faith.-Absolute good faith with the enemy mast be observed as a rule of conduct; but this does not prevent measures such as using spies, or inducing the enemy’s soldiers tc desert, surrender, or rebel. In general, a belligerent may resort to those measures for mystifying or misleading the enemy against which the enemy ought to take measures to protect himself. (See pars. 39, 441, and 41.)

39.
Treachery or perfidy.-The ruses of war are legitimate so long as they do not involve treachery or perfidy on the part of the belligerent resorting to them. They are, however, for- bidden if they contravene any generally accepted rule.

The line of demarcation between legitimate ruses and forbidden acts of treachery and perfidy is sometimes rather indistinct, but thc following essmplcs x7ill indicatc thc correct principles. It would be an improper practice to secure an advantage of the enemy by deliberate lying which involves a breach of faith, or when there is a moral obligation to speak the truth, such as declaring that an armistice had been agreed upon when such is not the case. On the other hand, it is a perfectly proper ruse to summon a force to surrender on the ground that it is surrounded and thereby induce such surrender with a small force.
40.
Legitimate ruses.-Among legitimate ruses may be counted surprises, ambushes, feigning attacks, retreats or flights, simulating quiet and inactivity, giving large outposts or a strong advance guard to a small force, constructing works, bridges, etc., which it is not intended to use, transmitting false or misleading signals and telegraph messages, and sending false dispatches and newspapers, with a view to their being intercepted by the enemy, lighting campfires where there are no troops, making use of the enemy’s signals, bugle and trumpet calls, watch words, and words of command, pretending to communicate with troops or reinforcements which have no existence, moving landmarks, putting up dummy guns or laying dummy mines, removing badges from uniforms, clothing the men of a single unit in the uniform of several different units so that prisoners and dead may give the idea of a large force.

41.
Misuse of flags, insignia, military uniforms of enemy.-It is especially forbidden * * * to make improper use of a flag of truce, of the national flag, or of the military insignia and uniform of the enemy, as well as of the distinctive badges of the Geneva convention (H.R., art. 23, par. (f)).

42.
Flags of truce.-Flags of truce must not be used surrep- titiously to obtain military information or merely to obtain time

to effect a retreat or secure reinforcements gr to feign a surrender in order to surprise an enemy. An officer receiving them is not on this account absolved from the duty of exercising proper precautions with regard to them.
43.
National flags, insignia, and uniforms as a ruse.-In practice it has been authorized to make use of these as a ruse. The foregoing rule (par. 41) does not prohibit such use, but does prohibit their improper use. It is certainly forbidden to make use of them during a combat. Before opening fire upon the enemy they must be discarded.

44.
Practice as to enemy uniform in this country.-In this country, it has always been authorized to utiHze uniforms captured from the enemy, provided some striking mark or sign is attached to distinguish the American soldier from the enemy. All distinctive badges or marks of the enemy should be removed before making use of them.

45.
Improper use of distinctive emblem of Geneva con- vention.-The use of the emblem of the Red Cross must be limited to the protection and designation of sanitary formations and establishments and the personnel and matdriel which the Geneva convention providcs shall be respected. As examples of the improper use of the emblem may be cited the following: Using a hospital or other building accorded such protection as an observatory or military office or store; firing from a building or tent displaying the emblem of the Red Cross; using a hospital train to facilitate the escape of combatants; displaying the emblem on wagons containing ammunition cr nonmedical stores; and in general, using it for cloaking acts of hostility. (See pars. 197, 199.)

BOMBARDMENTS, ASSAULTS, AND SIEGES

46.
Bombardment of undefended places forbidden.- The attack or bombardment, by whatever means, of towns, villages, dwellings, or buildings which. are undefended is pro- hibited (H.R.,art. 25).

47.
Use of balloons.-The addition of the words “by what- ever means” was for the purpose of making it clear that the bombardment of these undefended localities from balloons or airplanes is prohibited.

48.
Defended place defined.-Investment, bombardment, assault, and siege have always been recognized as legitimate

12 BASIC FIELD MANUAL
means of warfare, but under the foregoing rule (par. 46) their use is limited to defended places which certainly will include the following:
a.
A fort or fortified place.

b.
A town surrounded by detached forts, which is considered jointly with such forts as an indivisible whole.

c.
A place that is occupied by a combatant military force or through which such a force is passing. The occupation of such a place by sanitary troops alone is not sufficient to make it a defended place.

49.
Throwing projectiles from aircraft on combatants and defended places.-There is no prohibition of general application among the great powers against the discharge of nuthorizcd projectiles from aircraft against combatant troops or defended places. (See H.D. XIV (par. 27).)

50.
Notice of bombardment.-The officer in command of an attacking force must, before commencing a bombardment, except in cases of assault, do all in his power to warn the authorities (H.R., art. 26).

This rule is understood to refer only to bombardments of places where parts of the civil population remain.
51.
American rule.-It is no infraction of the common law of war to omit thus to inform the enemy. Nevertheless, even when belligerents are not subject to the above treaty, the commanders of American forces, when admissible, will inform the enemy of their intention to bombard a place, so that the noncombatants, especially the women and children, may be removed before the bombardment commences.

52.
Permitting population to leave besieged place.- There is no rule of law which compels the commander of an investing force to permit the population, including women, children, aged, sick, wounded, subjects of neutral powers, or temporary residents, to leave the besieged locality, even when a bombardment is about to commence. It is entirely within the discretion of the besieging commander whether he will permit them to leave and under what conditions.

53.
Diplomatic agents of neutrals.-Diplomatic agents of a neutral power should not be prevented from leaving a besieged place before hostilities commence. This privilege cannot be claimed while hostilities are in progress. The same privileges should properly be accorded to a consular officer of a neutral

power. Should they voluntarily decide to remain, they must undergo the same treatment as other inhabitants.
I
54.
Persons in aone between troops.-Persons dwelling in the zone between the opposing forces in the first stages of siege are treated as inhabitants of the invaded locality.

55.
Individuals leaving without permission.-Individuals who attempt to leave or enter a besieged place without obtaining the necessary permission are liable to be fired on and may be sent back into the besieged place or detained and put on trial.

56.
Expelled persons forced to return.-When a com-mander of a besieged place expels the noncombatants, in order to lessen the number of those who consume his stock of provisions, it is lawful, though an extreme measure, to drive them back, so as to hasten the surrender.

57.
Population expelled under fire.-It is not necessary to cease or relax fire because the enemy sends women and children out of his lines in order to get them to a place of safety, but fire must not be intentionally opened in their direction.

58.
Communication with besieged place.-The com-niander of the investing force has the absolute right to forbid dl communication between the besieged place and the outside. The application of this rule to diplomatic envoys of neutral powers is unsettled.

59.
Buildings dedicated to religious works, etc., to be spared.-In sieges and bombardments all necessary steps must be taken to spare, as far as possible, buildings dedicated to religion, art, science, or charitable purposes, historic monu- ments, hospitals, and places where the sick and wounded are collected, provided that they are not being used at the time for military purposes.

It is the duty of the besieged to indicate the presence of such buildings or places by distinctive and visible signs, which shall be notified to the enemy beforehand (H.R., art. 27).

60.
Above buildings, etc., to display sign specified in naval treaty.-It is the duty of the inhabitants to indicate such monuments, edifices, or places by visible signs, which shall consist of large stiff rectangular panels divided diagonally into two colored triangular portions, the upper portion black, the lower portion white (H. ZX,art. 5, par. 2, 1907).

The foreging rule adopted in this convention for naval warfare should be adopted for protecting buildings under bombardment in land warfare.
61.
Forfeiture of inviolability.-The besieging forces are not required to observe the signs indicating inviolability ctf buildings that are known to be used for military purposes, such as quarters for officers and men, observatories, or signaling stations.

62.
Pillage forbidden.-The pillage of a town or place, even when taken by assault, is prohibited (H.R., art. 28).

AUTOMATIC SUBMARINE CONTACT MINES
63. Kinds of mines.-There are three general classes of mines:
a.
Observation mines which are anchored along the coast and connected therewith by wires by which they can be exploded electrically.

b.
Unanchored automatic con~act mines which explode by contact.

c.
Anchored automatic contact mines which are attached to heavy weights, and which can be placed at any required depth below the surr’ace; these mines are exploded automatically by contact with heavy bodies such as ships.

These rules do not deal with the first class of mines, since they are innocuous to peaceful shipping.
64.
Unanchored automatic contact mines.-It is forbid- den to lay unanchored automatic contact mines, except where they are so constructed as to become harmless one hour at most after the person who laid them ceases to control them (H. VIII, art. 1, par. 1).

65.
Commercial navigation.-It is forbidden to lay auto- matic contact milies 08the coast and ports of the enemy, with the sole object of intercepting commercial shipping (H. VIII, art. 2).

It is not probable that a belligerent resorting to the use of these contact mines off the coast and ports of his enemy will hesitate to disavow the intention of intercepting commercial navigation. In its present form this rule permits the use of such mines so as to cause great risks to neutral navigation.
66. Anchored automatic contact mines.-It is forbidden to lay anchored automatic contact mines which do not become harmless as soon as they have broken loose from their moorings
(H. VIII, art. 1,par. 2).
I

1
I

BASIC FIELD MANUAL 15
67. Precautions to be taken.-When anchored automatic contact mines are employed, every possible precaution must be taken for the security of peaceful shipping.
The belligerents undertake to do their utmost to render these mines harmless within a limited time and, should they cease to be under surveillance, to notify the danger zones as soon as military exigencies permit, by a notice addressed to shipowners which must also be communicated to the governments through the diplomatic channel (H. Vdll, art. 3).
68. Mines of neutral powers.-Neutral powers which lay automatic contact mines off their coasts must observe the same rules and take the same precautions as are imposed on bellig- erents.
The neutral powers must inform shipowners, by a notice issued in advance, where automatic contact mines have been laid. This notice must be communicated at once to the governments through the diplomatic channel (IP. VIII, art. 4).
69. Mines to be removed at close of war.-At the close of the war the contracting powers undertake to do their utmost to remove the mines which they had laid, each power removing its own mines.
As regards anchored automatic contact mines laid by one of the belligerents off the coast of the other, their position must be notified to the other party by the powers which laid them, and each power must proceed with the least possible delay to remove the ‘mines in its own waters (H. T7111,art. 5).
70. Torpedoes.-It is forbidden to use torpedoes which do not become harmless when they have missed their mark (W.VIII, art. I, par. 3).
CHAPTER 4
PRISONERS OF WAR
71.
Definition.-Except as otherwise hereinafter indicated, every person captured or interned by a belligerent power because of the war is, during the period of such captivity or internment, a prisoner of war, and is entitled to be recognized and treated as such under the laws of war.

72.
Geneva convention of 1929-relation to Hague Regulations.-In the relations between powers bound by the Hague convention respecting the laws and customs of war on land, whether it is a question of that of July 29, 1899, or that of October 18, 1907, altd who participate in the present convention.

this latter shall complete chapter I1 (Prisoners of War) of the
Regulations annexed to the said Hague conventions (G.P.W.,
art. 89).
However, as indicated in the foreword, page 111, the only parts of chapter I1 of the Hague Regulations, not in effect superseded by substantial reincorporation in the present Geneva convention, are comprised in H.R. 10, 11, and 12, dealing with paroles and hereinafter quoted (pars. 149, 155, and 156).
73. Application of the convention.-The present conven- tion shall apply, without prejudice to the stipulations of title VII (see par. 77 b):
(1)
To all persons contemplated in articles 1,2, and 3 of the Regulations annexed to the Hague convention of October 18, 1907, respecting the laws and customs of war on land, and captured by the enemy. (See pars. 9 a, b, c.)

(2)
To all persons belonging to the armed forces of the bellig- erent parties, captured by the enemy in the course of military operations at sea or in the air, except for such derogations as might be rendered inevitable by the conditions of capture. However, such derogations shall not infringe the fundamental principles of the present convention; they shall cease when the persons captured have entered a prisoners of war camp (G.P.W., art. 1).

74. In power of enemy power; treated with humanity; reprisals prohibited.-Prisoners of war are in the power of the enemy power, but not of the individuals or bodies of troops who capture them.
They must at all times be treated with humanity and pro- tected, particularly against acts of violence, insults, and public curiosity.
Measures of reprisal against them are prohibited (G.P.W., art. 2).
75.
Persons and honor to be respected; retain civil status.-Prisoners of war have the right to have their persons and their honor respected. Women shall be treated with all the regard due to their sex. Prisoners retain their full civil status (G.P.W., art. 3).

76.
Maintained by captor; discriminations.-The power detaining prisoners of war is bound to provide for their maintenance.

Discriminations in treatment between prisoners are lawful only when they are based on the military rank, state of physical
or mental health, professional qualifications, or the sex of those who profit by such discriminations (G.P.W., qrt. 4).
77. Who may become prisoners of war.-a. The armed forces.-The armed forces of the belligerent parties may consist of combatants and noncombatants. In the case of capture by the enemy, both have a right to be treated as prisoners of war (H.R., art. 3).
b. .Individuals who follow the army.-Individuals who follow armed forces without directly belonging thereto, such as corre-spondents, newspaper reporters, sutlers, contractors, who fall into the enemy’s hands and whom the latter thinks expedient to detain, shall be entitled to be treated as prisoners of war, pro- vided they are in possession of a certificate from the military authorities of the armed forces which they were accompanying
(G.P.W., title VZI, art. 81).
c. Wounded and sick.-Subject to the care that must be taken of them under the preceding article (art.1, G.W.S. par. 475); the wounded and sick of an army who fall into the power of the
other belligerent shall be prisoners of war, and the general rules of international law in respect to prisoners shall be applicable to them (G. W.S., art. 2).
d.
Levee en muse.-The citizens who rise en masse to defend their territory or district from invasion by the enemy, if captured, are entitled to be treated as prisoners of war.

e.
High civil functionaries.-High civil functionaries such as the sovereign and members of the royal family, the president or head of a republican state, and the ministers who direct the policy of a state are liable to be made prisoners of war whether accompanying an army or not.

f.
Civil oficials and diplomatic agents.-Civil officials and diplomatic agents attached to the army may be made prisoners of war.

g.
Inhabitants.-Persons whose services are of particular use to the hostile army or its government, such as the higher civil officials, diplomatic agents, couriers, guides, etc., also all persons who may be harmful to the opposing state while at liberty, such as prominent and influential political leaders, journalists, local authorities, clergymen, and teachers, in case they incite the people to resistance, may be made prisoners of war.

h.
Hoslages.-when a hostage is accepted he is treated as a prisoner of war.

78.
Military attach& and agents of neutrals.-Military attaches and diplomatic agents of neutral powers, accompanying an army in the field or found within a captured fortress, are not ordinarily held as prisoners, provided they have proper papers of identification in their possession and take no part in the hostilities. They may, however, be ordered out of the theater of war, and, if necessary, handed over by the captor to the ministers of their respective countries.

79.
Must give name and rank; coercion to obtain mili-tary information prohibited.-Every prisoner of war is bound to give, if he is questioned on the subject, his true names and rank, or else his serial number.

In case he infringes this rule, he shall be liable to restriction of the privileges accorded to prisoners of his category.
No coercion may be used on prisoners to obtain information relative to the state of their army or country. Prisoners who refuse to answer may not be threatened, insulted, or exposed to unpleasant or disadvantageous treatment of any kind whatever.
If, because of his physical or mental condition, a prisoner is unable to identify himself, he shall be turned over to the medical authorities (G.P.W., art. 5).
80. Effects thet may be retained by prisoners.-All effects and objects of personal use-except arms, horses, mili- tary equipment, and military papers-shall remain in the posses- sion of prisoners of war, as well as metal helmets and gas masks.
Sums in the possession of prisoners may not be taken away from them except by order of an officer and after the amount is determined. A receipt shall be given. Sums thus taken away shall be credited to the account of each prisoner.
Identiscation tags and cards, insignia of rank, decorations and objects of value, may not be taken from prisoners (G.P.W., art. 6).
81. Evacuation.-Prisoners of war shall be evacuated within the shortest possible period after their capture, to depots located in a region far enough from the zone of combat for them to be out of danger.
IOnly prisoners who, because of wounds or sickness, would
run greater risks by being evacuated than by remaining where they are, may be temporarily kept in a dangerous zone. Prisoners shall not be needlessly exposed to danger while awaiting their evacuation from a combat zone.
Evacuation of prisoners, on foot, may normally be effected only by stages of 20 kilometers a day, unless the necessity of reaching water and food depots requires longer stages (G.P.W., art. 7).
82. Notification of capture of prisoners; correspondence with family.-Belligerents are bound to notify each other re- ciprocally as soon as possible, through the intermediary of the information bureaus as organized under article 77 (see par. 164) of every capture of prisoners. They are likewise bound to inform each other of the official addresses to which the cor-respondence from the families to prisoners of war may be sent.
As soon as possible, every prisoner must be enabled to cor- respond with his family himself, under the conditions provided in article 36 (see par. 110) and following.
As regards prisoners captured sat sea, the provisions of the present article shall be observed as soon as possible after arrival at port (G.P.W., art. 8).
83. Internment.-Prisoners of war may be interned in a town, fortress, or other place, and bound not to go beyond certain fixed limits. They may also be interned in enclosed camps; they may not be confined or locked up except as an indispensable measure of safety or sanitation, and only while the circumstances which necessitate this measure contillue to exist.
Prisoners, captured in unhealthful regions or where the cli- mate is injurious for persons coming from temperate regions, shall be transported, as soon as possible, to a more favorable climate.
Belligerents shall, so far as possible, avoid assembling in a single camp prisoners of different races or nationalities.
No prisoner may, at any time, be sent back into a region ‘ where he might be exposed to the fire of a combat zone nor used to give protection from bombardment to certain points or certain regions by his presence (G.P.W., art. 9).
84. Installation of camps.-Prisoners of war shall be lodged in buildings or in barracks affording all possible safeguards as to hygiene and healthfulness.
The quarters must be fully protected from dampness, suffi- ciently heated and lighted. All precautions must be taken against danger of fire.
As to the dormitories, the total area and minimum air space of dormitories, accommodations and bedding therein, shall be the same as those provided for the troops at base camps of the detaining power (G.P.W., art. 10).
85. Rations; collective disciplinary measures affect-ing.-The food ration of prisoners of war shall be equal in quantity and quality to that of troops at base camps.
Furthermore, prisoners shall receive facilities for preparing, themselves, additional food which they may have.
A sufficiency of potable water shall be furnished them. The use of tobacco shall be permitted. Prisoners may be employed in the kitchens.
All collective disciplinary measures affecting the food are prohibited (G.P.W., art. 11).
86. Clothing; canteens.–Outer clothing, underwear, and footwear shall be furnished prisoners of war by the detaining power. Replacement and repair of these articles must be assured regularly. In addition, workers must receive work clothes wherever the nature of the work requires it.
Canteens shall be installed in all camps where prisoners may obtain, at the local market price, food products and ordinary articles.
Profits obtained by the management of the camps from the operation of the canteens shall be used for the benefit of the prisoners (G.P.W., art. 12).
87. Hygiene.-Belligerents shall be bound to take all sani- tary measures necessary to assure the cleanliness and health- fulness of camps and to prevent epidenaics.
Prisoners of war shall have at their disposal, day and night, installations conforming to sanitary rules and constantly main- tained in a state of cleanliness.
Furthermore, in addition to baths and showers with which the camps shall be as well provided as possible, prisoners shall be furnished a sufficient quantity of water to permit of their bodily cleanliness.
They must be enabled to take physical exercises .and enjoy the open air (G.P.W., art. 13).
88. Infirmaries.-Every camp shall have an infirmary, where prisoners of war shall receive every kind of attention they need. If necessary, isolation quarters shall be reserved for the sick affected with contagious diseases.
Expenses of treatment, including thereh those of temporary prosthetic equipment, shall be borne by the detaining power.
Upon request, belligerents shall be bound to deliver to every
prisoner treated an official statement showing the nature and
duration of his illness as well as the attention received.
It shall be permissible for belligerents reciprocally to author-
ize, by means of special arrangements, the retention in the camps
of physicians and hospital attendants to care for prisoners of
their own country.
Prisoners affected with a serious illness or whose condition
necessitates a major surgical operation must be admitted, at
the expense of the detaining power, to any military or civil
medical establishment qualified to treat them. (G.P.W.,
art. 14).
89.
Medical inspections.-Medical inspections of prisoners of war shall be held at least once a month. Their purpose shall be to determine the general state of health and cleanliness, and to detect contagious diseases, particularly tuberculosis and venereal diseases (G.P.W., art. 15).

90.
Religious freedom.-Prisoners of war shall enjoy com- plete liberty in the exercise of their religion, including attendance at the services of whatever religion they may belong to, on the sole condition that they comply with the measures of order and police issued by the military authorities.

Ministers of a religion, prisoners of war, whatever their reli- gious denomination, shall be allowed to minister fully to their coreligionists (G.P.W., art. 16).
91.
Recreation.-Belligerents shall encourage as much as possible intellectual recreations and sports organized by prison- ers of war (G.P. W., art. 17).

92.
Camps to be commanded by officers; salutes.- Every prisoner of war camp shall be placed under the command of a responsible officer.

Besides the external marks of respect provided by the regula- tions in force in their armies with regard to their nationals, prisoners of war must salute all officers of the detaining power.
Officers who are prisoners of war are bound to salute only officers of a higher or equal rank of the detaining power
(G.P.W., art. 18).
93.
Insignia and decorations.-The wearing of insignia of rank and of decorations shall be authorized (G.P.W., art. 19).

94.
Regulations, orders, etc., to be communicated to prisoners.-Regulations, orders, notices, and proclamations of every kind must be communicated to prisoners of war in a

language which they understand. The same principle shall be applied in interrogations (G.P.W., art. 20).
95. Offlcers and persons of assimilated status (assi-milds); belligerents to notify each other of titles and rank; rank and age to be respected.-Upon the beginning of hostili- ties, belligerents shall be bound to communicate to each other reciprocally the titles and ranks in use in their respective armies, with a view to assuring equality of treatment between officers and assirnilds of equivalent rank.
Officers and assirnil4s who are prisoners of war shall be treated with the regard due their rankand age (G.P.W., art. 21).
96. OfRcers’ camps; food and clothing.-In order to as- sure service in officers’ camps, soldiers of the same army who are prisoners of war and, as far as possible, who speak the same language, shall be assigned thereto, in sufficient numbers, con- sidering the rank of the officers and assimil6s.
The latter shall procure their food and clothing from the pay which they shall receive from the detaining power. The management of the mess by the officers themselves should be facilitated in every way (G.P.W., art. 22).
97. Pay of officers and assirnil6.s; rate of exchange; reimbursement.-Subject to special arrangements between the belligerent powers, and particularly those provided in article 24 (see par. 98), officers and assimil4s who are prisoners of war shall receive from the detaining power the same pay as officers of corresponding rank in the armies of that power, on the con- dition, however, that such pay does not exceed that to which they are entitled in the armies of the country which they have served. They shall receive such pay in full, once a month if possible, without any deduction being made for expenses charge- able to the detaining power, even if these expenses were made in favor of the said prisoners.
An agreement between the belligerents shall fix the rate of exchange applicable to such payment; in the absence of such an agreement, the rate adopted shall be that in force at the opening of hostilities.
All disbursements made to prisoners of war as pay must be reimbursed, at the end of hostilities, by the power which they have served (G.P.W., art. 23).
98.Maximum amount of money retained; balance credited or deposited in bank.-Upon the outbreak of hostili- ties, the belligerents shall, by common agreement, fix the mari- mum amount of ready money which prisoners of war of various
ranks and categories shall be allowed to keep in their possession.
Any surplus taken or withheld from a prisoner as well as any
sum deposited by him shall be credited to his account, and may
not be converted into another currency without his consent.
The balance credited to their accounts shall be paid to
prisoners of war at the end of their captivity.
During their imprisonment, facilities shall be granted them
for the transfer of these amounts, in whole or in part, to banks or
private persons in their country of origin (G.P.W., art. 24).
99.
Transfer; sick and wounded.-Unless the conduct of military operations so requires, sick and wounded prisoners of war shall not be transferred as long as their recovery might be endangered by the journey (G.P.W., art. 25).

100.
Transfer; notification of destination; retention of effects; accounts; expenses.-In case of transfer, prisoners of war shall be officially notified of their new destination in advance; they shall be allowed to take with them their personal effects, their correspondence and packages which have arrived addressed to them.

All due measures shall be taken that correspondence and packages addressed to their former camp may be forwarded to them without delay.
Sums deposited to the account of transferred prisoners shall be transmitted to the competent authority of the place to which they have been transferred.
The expenses occasioned by the transfer shall be charged to the detaining power (G.P.W., art. 26).
101.Work authorized; exceptions; accidental injuries.- Belligerents may employ as workers, according to their rank and aptitude, all able-bodied prisoners of war with the exception of officers and assimills.
However, if officers or assinzil&s request suitable work, it shall be secured for them so far as is possible.
Noncommissioned officers who are prisoners of war shall only be required to do supervisory work, unless they expressly request a remunerative occupation.
Belligerents shall be bound, during the whole period of captivity, to allow to prisoners of war who are victims of accidents in c~nnection with their work the enjoyment of the benefit of the provisions applicable to workers of the same category according to the legislation of the detaining power. With regard to prisoners of war to whom these legal provisions might not be applied by reason of the legislation of that power, the latter undertakes to recommend to its legislative body all proper measures equitably to indemnify the victims (G. P. W., art.27).
102.
Maintenance while working for private persons.- The detaining power shall assume entire responsibility for the maintenance, care, treatment, and payment of wages of prisoners of war working for private individuals (G.P.W., art. 28).

103.
Work for prisoner physically unfit prohibited.-No prisoner of war may be employed at work for which he is physically unfit (G.P.W., art. 29).

104.Length of day’s work.-The length of the day’s work of prisoners of war, including therein the trip going and returning, shall not be excessive and must not, in any case, exceed that allowed for the civil workers in the region employed at the same work. Every prisoner shall be allowed a rest of 24 consecutive hours every week, preferably on Sunday (G.P. W., art. 30).
105. Work related to war operations prohibited; protests for violations.-Work done by prisoners of war shall have no direct relation with war operations. It is forbidden in particular to employ prisoners for manufacturing and transporting arms or munitions of any kind, or for transporting materiel intended for combatant units.
In case of violation of the provisions of the preceding para- graph, prisoners, after executing or beginning toexecute the order, shall be free to have their protests presented through the agents whose functions are set forth in articles 43 and 44 (see pars. 117, 118), or, in the absence of an agent, through the intermediary of representatives of the protecting power (G.P. W.,
art. 31).
106. Unhealthful or dangerous work; aggravation of working conditions as disciplinary measure forbidden.- It is forbidden to use prisoners of war on unhealthful or danger- ous work.
Any aggravation of the working conditions as a disciplinary measure is forbidden (G.P.W., art. 32).
107. Work detachments: sanitary conditions, food, etc.-The regime of work detachments must be similar to that of prisoners of war camps, particularly with regard to sanitary conditions, food, attention in case of accident or sickness, correspondence, and the receipt of packages.
Every work detachment shall be attached to a prisoners’ camp. The commandant of that camp shall be responsible for the observance, in the work detachment, of the provisions of the present Convention (G.P.W., art. 33).
108. Wages; fixed by agreements; rules for determining payments.-Prisoners of war shall not receive wages for work connected with the administration, installation, and maintenance of the camps.
Prisoners employed for other work shall be entitled to wages to be fixed by agreements between the belligerents.
These agreements shall also specify the part which the camp administration may retain, the amount which shall belong to the prisoner of war and the msnaer in which that amount shall be put at his disposal during the period of his captivity.
Whiie awaiting the conclusion of the said agreements, pay- ment for work of prisoners shall be determined according to the rules given below:
a.
Work done for the state shall be paid for in accordance with the rates in force for military personnel of the national army doing the same work, or, if none exists, according to a rate in harmony with the work performed.

b.
When the work is done for the account of other public administrations or for private persons, conditions shall be regulated by agreement with the military authority.

The balance remaining to the credit of the prisoner shall be delivered to him at the end of his captivity. In case of death. it shall be forwarded through diplomatic channels to the heirs of the deceased (G.P. W., art. 34).
109.
External relations-publication of measures.-Upon the outbreak of hostilities, belligerents shall publish the measures provided for the execution of the provisions of this section (G.P.W., art. 35). The provisions referred to are those comprised in paragraphs 110 to 115.

110.
Correspondence.-Each of the belligerents shall peri- odically determine the number of letters and postal cards which prisoners of war of the various categories shalI be allowed to send each month, and shall inform the other belligerent of this number. These letters and cards shall be transmitted by post by the shortest route. They may not be delayed or retained for disciplinary reasons.

Within a period of not more than one week after his arrival at the camp, and likewise in case of sickness, every prisoner shall be enabled to write his. family a postal card informing it of his capture and of the state of his health. The said postal cards shall be forwarded as rapidly as possible and may not be delayed in any manner.
As a general rule, correspondence of prisoners shall be written in their mother tongue. Belligerents may allow corre- spondence in other languages (G.P.W., art. 36).
11 1. Postal parcels containing food or clothing.-Prisoners of war shall be allowed individually to receive parcels by mail, containing food and other articles intended to clothe or feed them. Packages shall be delivered to the addressees upon a receipt (G.P.W., art. 37).
112. Letters, postal parcels, gifts, etc., exempt from postal charges, import duties; telegrams.-Letters and con- signments of money or valuables, as well as postal parcels in- tended for prisoners of war or dispatched by them, either di- rectly, or through the information bureaus provided for in article 77 (see par. 164), shall be exempt from all postal charges in the countries of origin and destination, as well as in the countries they pass through.
Gifts and relief in kind for prisoners shall be likewise exempt from all import and other duties, as well as from payments for carriage by the state railways.
Prisoners may, in case of acknowledged urgency, be allowed to send telegrams, paying the usual charges (G.P.IV., art. 38).
113. Books received subject to censorship.-Prisoners of war shall be allowed to receive shipments of books individually which may be subject to censorship.
Representatives of the protecting powers and dnly recognized and authorized aid societies may send works and collections of books to the libraries of prisoners’ camps. The transmission of these shipments to libraries may not be delayed under the pretext of censorship difficulties (G.P. W., art. 39).
114. Censorship of correspondence.-Censorship of cor- respondence must be effected within the shortest possible time. Furthermore, inspection of parcels post must be effected under proper conditions to guarantee the preservation of the articles which they may contain and, if possible, in the presence of the addressee or an agent dnly recognized by him.
Prohibitions of correspondence promulgated by the belliger- ents for military or political reasons, must be of a temporary nature only and of the shortest duration possible (G.P.W., art. 40).
115. Transmission of documents; authentication of signatures.-Belligerents shall assure all facilities for the trans- mission of instruments, papers or documents intended for prisoners of war or signed by them, particularly of powers of attorney and wills.
They shall take the necessary measures to assure, in case of necessity, the authentication of signatures made by prisoners
(G.P.W., art. 41).
116. Complaints.-Prisoners of war shall have the right to inform the military authorities in whose power they are, of their requests with regard to the regime of captivity to which they are subjected.
They shall also have the right to address themselves to repre- sentatives of the protecting powers to indicate to them the points on which they have complaints to formulate with regard to the regime of captivity.
These requests and complaints must be transmitted imme- diately. Even if they are found to be baseless, they shall not occasion any punishment (G.P.W., art. 42).
117. Agents; intermediaries.-In every place where there are prisoners of war, they shall be allowed to appoint agents entrusted with representing them directly with the military authorities and the protecting powers.
This appointment shall be subject to the approval of the military authority.
The agents shall be entrusted with the reception and distri-bution of collective shipments. Likewise, in case the prisoners should decide to organize a mutual assistance system among themselves, this organization would be within the competence of the agents. Further, they may lend their services to prisoners to facilitate their relations with the aid societies mentioned in article 78. (See par. 165.)
In camps of officers and assirnil&, the senior officer, prisoner of war, in the highest grade shall be recognized as intermediary between the camp authorities and the officers and assimil6s who are prisoners. For this purpose, he shall have the power to appoint an officer prisoner to assist him as an interpreter during the conferences with the camp authorities (G.P.W., art. 43).
118. Employment of agents as workers; intercourse with authorities; transfer of agents.-When the agents are employed as workers, the time spent on their duties as representatives of prisoners of war shall be included in the compulsory working hours.
All facilities shall be accorded the agents for their intercourse with the military authorities and with the protecting power This intercourse shall not be limited.
No representative of the prisoners may be transferred without the necessary time being allowed him to acquaint his successors with current matters (G.P.W., art. 44).
119. Prisoners subject to laws and regulations of de- taining power.-Prisoners of war shall be subject to the laws, regulations, and orders in force in the armies of the detaining power.
Any act of insubordination shall justify the adoption towards them of the measures provided by such laws, regulations and orders.
The provisions of the present chapter, however, are controlling
(G.P.W., art. 45).
The provisions here indicated are those quoted in paragraphs 120 to 141.
120. Punishments; limitations; corporal; collective.-Punishments other than those provided for the same acts for soldiers of the national armies may not be imposed upon prison- ers of war by the military authorities and courts of the detaining power.
Officers, noncommissioned officers or soldiers who are prisoners of war undergoing disciplinary punishment, shall not receive less favorable treatment than that provided in connec- tion with the same punishment for those of equal rank in the army.
Any corporal punishment, any imprisonment in quarters without daylight, and, in general, any form whatever of cruelty, is forbidden.
Collective punishment for individual acts is also forbidden
(G.P.W., art. 46).
121. Verification of offenses; preliminary judicial proceedings; imprisonment pending trial deducted.-Acts constituting an offense against discipline, and particularly. attempted escape, shall be verified immediately; for all prisoners of war, commissioned or not, preventive arrest shall be reduced
to the absolute minimum.
Preliminary judicial proceedings against prisoners of war
shall be conducted as rapidly as the circumstances permit.
Imprisonment pending trial shall be restricted as much as
possible.
In all cases, the period of imprisonment pending trial shall
be deducted from the disciplinary or the judicial punishment
inflicted, in so far as such deduction is allowed for national
soldiers (G.P.W., art. 47).
122. Treatment after punishment; attempted escape.-
Prisoners of war may not be treated differently from other
prisoners after having suffered the judicial or disciplinary
punishment which has been imposed on them.

Nevertheless, prisoners punished as a result of attempted escape may be subjected to special surveillance, which, how- ever, may not entail the suppression of the guaranties granted prisoners by the present convention (G.P.W., art. 48).
123. Not to be deprived of rank; offlcers and assimil6s undergoing punishment not to be confined with enlisted men.-No prisoner of war may be deprived of his rank by the detaining power. )
Prisoners given disciplinary punishment may not be deprived of the prerogatives attached to their rank. In particular, officers and assimilds who suffer punishment inbolving deprivation of liberty shall not be placed in the same quarters as noncom- missioned officers or privates undergoing punishment (G.P.W., art. 49).
124. Escaped prisoners recaptured, subject to punish- ment.-Escaped prisoners of war who are retaken before being able to rejoin their own army or to leave the territory occupied by the army which captured them shall-be liable on!y to disciplinary punishment.
Prisoners who, after having succeeded in rejoining their army or in leaving the territory occupied by the army which captured them, may again be taken prisoners, shall not be liable to any punishment on account of their previous flight (G.P.W., art. 50). 1-
125. Attempted escape as incident to other offenses; assisting in escape.-Attempted escape, even if it is not a first offense, shall not be considered as an aggravating circum- stance in case the prisoner of war should be given over to the courts on account of crimes or offenses against persons or property committed in the course of that attempt.
After an attempted or accoinplished escape, the comrirdes of the person escaping who assisted in the escape, may incrur only disciplinary punishment on this account (G.P.W., art. 56).
126.
Leniency in deciding whether judicial or summary punishment be imposed; dual punishment forbidden.- Belligerents shall see that the competent authorities exercise the greatest leniency in deciding the question of whether an infraction committed by a prisoner of war should be punished summarily or judicially.

This shall be the case especially when it is a question of deciding on facts in connection with escape or attempted escape. A prisoner may not be punished more than once because of the same offense or on the same charge (G.P.W., art. 52).

127.
Summary punishment not to delay repatriation; penal prosecution, contra; lists of latter cases to be ex-changed by belligerents.-No prisoner of war on whom a summary punishment has been imposed, who might be eligible for repatriation, may be kept back because he has not undergone the punishment.

Prisoners to be repatriated who may be undergoing a penal prosecution may be excluded from repatriation until the end of the proceedings and, if necessary, until the completion of the punishment; those who may be already imprisoned by virtue of a sentence may be detained until the end of their imprison- ment.
Belligerents shall communicate to each other the lists of those who for the reasons given in the preceding paragraph, cannot be repatriated (G.P. W., art. 53).
128. Maximum summary punishments.-Arrest is the most severe summary punishment which may be imposed on a prisoner of war.
The duration of a single punishment may not exceed 30 days.
Furthermore, this maximum of 38 days may not be exceeded in -the case of prisoner subjected at one time to summary punish- ment for several acts. whether these acts be connected or not.
When, during or after the end of a period of arrest, a prisoner shall have a new summary punishment imposed upon him. a space of at least 3 days shall separate each of the periods of arrcst, if one of them is 10days or more (G.P.W., art. 54).
120,Food restrictions as punishment.-Subject to the provision which is the subject of the last paragraph of article I I (see par. 85), food restrictions allowed in the armies of the de- taining power are applicable, as an increase of punishment, to prisoners of war given summary punishment.
However, these restrictions may be ordered only if the state of health of the prisoners punished permits it (G.P.W., art. 55).
130. Transfer to penitentiaries, convict prisons, etc., prohibited; sanitary requirements; exercise.-In no case may prisoners of war be transferred to penitentiary establish- ments (prisons, penitentiaries, convict prisons, etc.) there to undergo summary punishment.
The quarters in which summary punishment is undergone shall conform to sanitary requirements. Prisoners punished shall be enabled to keep themselves in a state of cleanliness. These prisoners shall be allowed to exercise or to stay in the open air at least 2 hours every day (G.P.W., art. 56).
131. Correspondence; delivery of packages.-Prisoners of war given summary punishment shall be allowed to read and write, as well as to send and receive letters.
On the other hand, delivery to the addressees of packages and money sent may be withheld until the expiration of the punish- ment. If the packages not delivered contain perishable prod- ucts, these shall be turned over to the camp infirmary or kitchen
(G.P.W., art. 57).
132.
Medical inspection.-Prisoners of war given sum-mary punishment shall be allowed, on their request, to be present at the daily medical inspection. They shall receive the care considered necessary by the doctors and, if necessary, shall be evacuated to the camp infirmary or to hospitals (G.P.W.,art, 58).

133.
Summary punishment to be imposed only by officers vested with disciplinary authority.-Under reserva-tion of the rights to courts and superior military authorities to exercise their legitimate functions, summary punishment shall only be pronounced by an officer vested with disciplinary authority in his capacity as commander of a camp or of a de- tachment, or by the responsible officer replacing him (G.P.w., art. 59).

134.
Judicial prosecutions; notice to protecting power.- At the opening of a judicial proceeding directed against a prisoner of war, the detaining power shall advise the representa-

tive of the protecting power thereof as soon as possible, and always before the date set for the opening of the trial. This advice shall contain the following information:
(a)
Civil status and rank of prisoner;

(b)
Place of sojourn or imprisonment;

(c)
Statement of the charges and specifications, with notice of the legal provisions applicable.

If it is not possible to indicate in such notice the court which will pass upon the matter, the date of opening of the trial and the place where it will take place, this information must be furnished to the representative of the protecting power later, as soon as possible, and at all events, at least 3 weeks before the opening of the trial (G.P.W., art. 60).
135. Right to defend; not compelled to admit guilt.- No prisoner of war may be sentenced without having had an opportunity to defend himself.
No prisoner may be compelled to admit himself guilty of the act of which he is accused (G.P.W., art. 61).
136. Right to counsel; interpreter; representative of protecting power may attend trial; exception.-The pris-oner of war shall have the right to assistance by a qualified counsel of his choice and, if necessary,to have recourse to the services of a competent interpreter. He shall be advised of his right by the detaining power, in due time before the trial.
In default of a choice by the prisoner, the protecting power may obtain a counsel for him. The detaining power shall deliver to the protecting power, on its request, a list of persons qualified to present the defense.
Representatives of the protecting power shall be entitled to attend the trial of the case.
The only exception to this rule is the case where the trial of the case must be secret in the interest of the safety of the State. The detaining power shall so advise the protecting power
(G.P. W., art. 62).
137.
What courts to pronounce sentence; procedure.- Sentence may be pronounced against a prisoner of war only by the same courts and according to the same procedure as in the case of persons belonging to the armed forces of the detaining power (G.P.W., art. 63).

138.
Right to appeal.-Every prisoner of war shall have the right of appeal against any sentence rendered with regard to him, in the same way as individuals belonging to the armed forces of the detaining power (G.P. W., art. 64).

139.
Notice of sentence to protecting power.–Sentences pronounced against prisoners of war shall be communicated to the protecting power immediately (G.P.W., art. 65).

140.
Death penalty; notice of; not to be executed for 3 months after notice.-If the death penalty is pro-nounced against a prisoner of war, a communication setting forth in detail the nature and circumstances of the offense shall be sent as soon as possible to the representative of the protect- ing power for transmission to the power in whose armies the prisoner served.

The sentence shall not be executed before t.he expiration of a period of at least 3 months after this communication (G.P. W.,
art. 66).
141.
Provisions of article 42 not affected by sentence.- No prisoner of war may be deprived of the benefit of the pro- visions of article 42 (see par. 116) of the present convention as a result of a sentence or otherwise (G.P.W., art. 67).

142.
Seriously sick or wounded to be returned to their own country; model agreement regarding repatriation or hospitalization in neutral country.-Belligerents are bound to send back to their own country, regardless of rank or number, seriously sick and severely wounded prisoners of war, after having brought them to a condition where they can be trans- ported.

Agreements between belligerents shall accordingly settle as soon as possible the cases of disability or of sickness, involving direct repatriation, as well as the cases involving possible hos- pitalization in a neutral country. While awaiting the conclusion of these agreements, belligerents may follow the model agree- ment annexed, as an exhibit, to the present convention (scc par. 173) (G.P.W., art. 68).

143.
Mixed medical commissions.-Upon the outbreak of hostilities, belligerents, shall come to an agreement to name mixed medical commissions. These commissions shall be composed of three members, two of them belonging to a neutral country and one appointed by the detaining power; a physician of the neutral country shall preside. These mixed medical commis- sions shall proceed to the examiliation of sick or wounded prisoners and shall make all necessary decisions regarding them.

Decisions of these commissions shall be by majority and carried out with the least possible delay (G.P. W., art. 69).
144. Inspection of prisoners with view to direct repatria. tion.-Besides those who are designated by the camp physician the following prisoners of war shall be inspected by the mixec medical commission mentioned in article 69 (see par. 143), wit1 a view to their direct repatriation or their hospitalization in 2 neutral country:
a.
prisoners who make such a request directly of the cam1 physician.

b.
prisoners who are presented by the agents provided for in article 43 (see par. 117), acting on their own initiative or at thc request of the prisoners themselves.

c.
prisoners who have been proposed by the power in whose armies they have served or by an aid society duly recognized and authorized by that power (G.P.W., art 70).

145. Prisoners victims of accidents.-Prisoners of war who are victims of accidents in connection with work, except those who have deliberately injured themselves, shall enjoy the benefit of the same provisions, as far as repatriation or pos- sible hospitalization in a neutral country is concerned (G.P.W.,
art. 71).
146.
Able-bodied prisoners held captive for long period.- Throughout the duration of hostilities and from humane consider- ations, belligerents may conclude agreements with a view to the direct repatriation or hospitalization in a neutral country of able- bodied prisoners of war who have undergone a long period of captivity (G.P.W., art. 72).

147.
Expenses of repatriation.-The expenses of repatriation or of transportation to a neutral country of prisoners of war shall be borne, from the frontiers of the detaining power, by the power in whose armies the prisoners have served (G.P.W., art. 73).

148.
Repatriated persons not eligible for active military service.-No repatriated person may be utilized in active military service (G.P.W., art. 74).

149.
Parole permitted if laws of their country allow.- Prisoners of war may be set at liberty on parole if the laws of their country allow and, in such cases, they are bound, on their personal honor, scrupulously to fulfill, both toward their own government and the government by whom they were made prisoners, the engagements they have contracted.

In such cases their own government is bound neither to require of nor accept from them any service incompatible with the parole given (W.A., art. 10).
150.
Form and substance of parole.-The parole should be in writing and signed by the prisoner. It should state in clear and unequivocal language exactly what acts the prisoner is obligated not to do, particularly as to whether he is bound to refrain from all acts against the captor or only from taking part directly in nlilitary operations.

151. Parole of enlisted men.-No noncommissioned officer or private can give his parole except through an officer of his own army. The only admissible exception is where an individual properly separated from his command has suffered long confine- ment without the possibility of being paroled through an officer.

152.
Parole of commissioned officers.-Commissioned offi-cers can give their paroles only with the perinission of a military superior as long as such superior is accessible.

153.
Parole ineffectual.-No paroling on the battlefield, no paroling of entire bodies of troops after a battle, and no dismissal of large numbers or prisoners, with a general declaration that they are paroled, is permitted or of any value.

154.
Paroling discretionary with belligerent govern-ment.-A belligerent government may declare, by a general order, whether it will allow paroling, and on what conditions it will allow it. Such order is communicated to the enemy.

155.
Not compelled to accept parole.-A prisoner of war can not be compelled to accept his liberty on parole; similarly the hostile government is not obliged to accede to the request of the prisoner to be set at liberty on parole (H.R., art. 11).

156.
Violation of parole.-Prisoners of war liberated on parole and recaptured bearing arms against the government to whom they had pledged their honor, or against the allies of that government, forfeit their right to be treated as prisoners of war, and can be brought before the courts (H.R., art. 12).

157.
Exchange of prisoners not obligatory.-The exchange of prisoners is an act of convenience to both belligerents. If no general cartel has been concluded, it cannot be demanded by either of them. No belligerent is obliged to exchange prisoners of war.

158.
When exchange made.-No exchange of prisoners shall be made except after cornplete capture, and after an accurate account of them and a list of the captured officers have been taken.

159.
Conditions of exchange.-Exchanges of prisoners take place, number for number, rank for rank, disability for disability,

36 BASIC FIELD MANUAL
with added condition for added condition-such, for instance, as not to serve for a certain period.
160.Substitutions.-In exchanging prisoners of war such numbers of persons of inferior rank may be substituted as an equivalent for one of superior rank as may be agreed upon by cartel which requires the sanction of the government or of the commander of the army in the field.
161.Spies, war traitors, and war rebels.-Spies, war traitors, and war rebels are not exchanged acrcording to the common law of war. The exchange of such persons would re- quire a special cartel, authorized by the government, or, at a great distance from it, by the chief commander of the army in the field.
162.Armistice convention to include stipulations re-garding repatriation of prisoners; prisoners undergoing punishment; commissions to search for dispersed prison- ers.-When belligerents conclude an armistice convention they must as a rule include therein stipulations regarding the repa- triation of prisoners of war. If it has not been possible to insert stipulations in this regard in such convention, belligerents shall nevertheless come to an agreement in this regard as soon as possible. In any case, repatriation of prisoners shall be effected with the least possible delay after the conclusion of peace.
Prisoners of war against whom a penal prosecution may be pending for a crime or an offense of municipal law may, however, be detained until the end of the proceedings and, if necessary, until the expiration of the punishment. The same shall be true of those sentenced for a crime or offense of municipal law.
On agreement between the belligerents, commissions may be established for the purpose of searching for dispersed prisoners and assuring their repatriation (G.P. W., art. 75).
163. Wills of prisoners; death certificates; burial.-Wills of prisoners of war shall be received and drawn up in the same way as for soldiers of the national army.
The same rules shall be observed regarding death certificates.
Belligerents shall see that prisoners of war dying in captivity are honorably buried and that the graves bear all necessary information, are respected and properly maintained (G.P. W., art. 76).
164.Official inf ormation bureau; notification of capture of prisoners; mutual exchange of information, etc.-Upon the outbreak of hostilities, each of the belligerent powers, as
well as the neutral powers which have received belligerents.
shall institute an official information bureau regarding prisoners
of war within their territory.
Within the shortest possible period, each of the belligerent
powers shall inform its information bureau of every capture of
prisoners effected by its armies, giving it all available informa-
tion regarding identity, thereby permitting prompt notification
to the families concerned, and informing it of the official ad-
dresses at which families may write to prisoners.
The information bureau shall immediately forward all this
information to the interested powers, through the intervention,
on one hand, of the protecting powers and, on the other, of the
central agency provided for in article 79. (See par. 166.)
The information bureau charged with replying to all inquiries
about prisoners of war, shall receive from the various services
concerned full information respecting internments and transfers,
releases on parole, repatriations, escapes, stays in hospitals,
deaths, as well as other information necessary to enable it to
make out and keep up to date an individual record for each
prisoner of war.
The bureau shall state in this return, insofar as is possible and subject to the provisions of article 5 (see par. 79), the serial number, given names and surname, date and place of birth, rank and unit of the interested party, the given name of the father and the name of the mother, the address of the person to be advised in case of accident, wounds, date and place of capture, internment, wounding and death, as well as any other important information.
Weekly lists containing all new information likely to facilitate the identification of each prisoner shall be transmitted to the interested powers.
At the conclusion of peace the individual record of the prisoner of war shall be delivered to the power which he served.
The information bureau shall further be bound to receive all articles of personal use, valuables, letters, pay vouchers, identification marks, etc., which are left by prisoners of war who have been repatriated, released on parole, have escaped or died, and to transmit them to the countries interested (G.P. W., art. 77).
166. Belligerents to extend to relief societies facilities for efficient performance.-Relief societies for prisoners eP war, which are properly constituted in accordance with the laws of their country and with the object of serving as channels for charitable effort, shall receive from the belligerents, for them- selves and their duly accredited agents, every facility for the efficient performance of their humane task within the bounds imposed by military necessities. Agents of these societies may be admitted to the camps for the purpose of distributing relief, as also to the halting places of repatriated prisoners, if furnished with a personal permit by the military authorities, and on giving an undertaking in writing to comply with all measures of order and police which the latter may issue (G.P.W., art. 78).
166. Central agency for information in neutral coun- tries.-A central agency for information regarding prisoners of war shall be created in a neutral country. The international committee of the Red Cross shall propose the organization of such an agency to the interested powers, if it considers it neces- sary.
The function of this agency shall be to centralize all informa- tion respecting prisoners, which it may obtain through official or private channeis; it shall transmit it as quickly as possible to the country of origin of the prisoners or to the power which they have served.
These provisions must not be interpreted as restricting the humanitarian activity of the international committee of the Red Cross (G.P.W., art. 79). .
167. Information bureaus exempt from postal charges a.nd import and other duties.–Information bureaus shall en- joy the privilege of free postage on postal matter, as well as all exemptions provided in article 38 (see par. 112) (G.P.W., art. 80).
188. Reservation of right to conclude special conven- tions.-The high contracting parties reserve the right to con- clude special conventions on all questions relative to prisoners of war which it seems to them expedient to regulate by special agreement. .
Prisoners of war shall receive the benefit of these agreements until the completion of repatriation, except in the case of express stipulations to the contrary contained in the above-mentioned agreements or in later agreements, or likewise, except in the case of more favorable measures taken by one or the other of the belligerent powers respecting the prisoners held by them.
In order to assure the application, on both sides, of the stipu- lations of the present convention, and to facilitate the conclusion of the special conve~~tions
provided for above, belligerents may, upon the commencement of hostilities, authorize meetings of representatives of the respective authorities charged wit11 the administration of prisoners of war ( G.P. W., art. 83).
, 169. Text of convention to be posted.-The text of the present convention and of the special conventions contemplated in the foregoing article, shall be posted, whenever possible in the mother tongue of the prisoners of war, in places where it may

be consulted by all the prisoners.
The text of these co~lventions shall be communicated to prisoners who find it impossible to get the information from the posted text, upon their request (G.P. W., art. 84).
170. Representatives of the protecting powers allowed to see prisoners.-The high contracting parties recognize that the regular application of the present convention will find a guaranty in the possibility of collaboration of the protecting powers charged with safeguarding the interests of belligerents; in this respect, the protecting powers may, besides their dipli- matic personnel, appoint delegates from among their own ma-tionals or from among the nationals of other neutral powers. These delegates must be subject to the approval of the belliger- ent near which they esercise their mission.
Representatives of the protecting power or its accepted dele- gates shall be permitted to go to any place, without exception, where prisoners of war are interned. They shall have access to all places occupied by prisoners and may converse with them, as a general rule without witnesses, personally or through interpreters.
Belligerents shall, to the widest extent possible, facilitate the task of representatives or accepted delegates of the protecting power. The military autlzoritios shall be inrormed of their visit.
Belligerents may come to an agreement to allow persons of the same nationality as the prisoners to be permitted to take pzrl in inspection trips (G.P.IV., art. 86).
171. Protecting powers to aid in settling differences.- In case of disagreement between the belligerents as to the appli- cation of the provisions of the present convention, the protecting powers must. insofar as possible, lend their good offices for the purpose of settling the diKerence.
For this purpose, each of the protecting powers may, in partic- ular, suggest lo the interested belligerents a meeting of repre- sentatives thereof, possibly upon a neutral territory suitably
40 BASIC FIELD MANUAL
chosen. Belligerents shall be bound to accede to proposals i~ this sense which are made to them. The protecting power may if occasion arises, submit for the approval of the powers con. cerned a person belonging to a neutral power or a person dele. gated by the international committee of the Red Cross, whc shall be summoned to take part in this meeting (G.P. W., art, 87).
172.
International committee of the Red Cross, aotivi- ties not to be affected by foregoing provisions.-The foregoing provisions are not an obstacle to the humanitarian activity which the international committee of the Red Cross may display for the protection of prisoners of war, with the consent of the interested belligerents (G.P. W., art. 88).

173.
Annex to the Convention of July 27, 1929, relative to the treatment of prisoners of war. -~ddelagreement concerning the direct repatriation and the hospitalization in a neutral country of prisoners of war for reasons of health. (See par. 142.)

I.     Governing principles for direct repatriation and hos- pitalization in a neutral country.
A. Governing principles for direct repatriation.
There shall be directly repatriated:
1.
Sick and wounded who, according to medical opinion, are not likely to recover in one year, their condition requiring treat- ment and their mental or physical fitness appearing to have suffered considerable diminution.

2.
Incurable sick and wounded whose mental or physical fitness appears to have suffered considerable diminution.

3.
Cured sick and wounded whose mental or physical fitness appears to have suffered considerable diminution.

B.     Governing principles for hospitalization in a neutral country.
There shall be hospitalized:
1.
Sick and wonnded whose cure within a period of one year is to be expected, such cure appearing more certain and more rapid if the sick and wounded are given the benefit of the resources offered by the neutral country than if their captivity proper is prolonged.

2.
Prisoners of war whose mental or physical health appears, according to medical opinion, to be seriously menaced by eon- tinuance in captivity, while hospitalization in a neutral country would probably remove this danger.

C. Governing principles for the repatriation of prisoners
hospitalized in a neutral country. There shall be repatriated, the prisoners of war hospitalized in a neutral country, who belong to the following categories:
1.
Those whose state of health appears to be or to be becoming such that they fall within the categories of persons eligible to repatriation for reasons of health.

2.
The recovered whose mental or physical fitness seems to have suffered a considerable diminution.

11.     Special principles for direct repatriation or hospitaliza- tion in a neutral country.
A. Special principles for repatriation.

There shall be repatriated:
1.
All prisoners of war who, as the result of organic injuries, have the following impairments, actual or functional: Loss of a member, paralysis, articular or other defects, provided that the loss is at least a foot or a hand, or is equivalent to the loss of a foot or a hand.

2.
All wounded or injured prisoners of war whose condition is such that it renders them invalids whose cure, within a period of 1year, cannot be anticipated from a medical standpoint.

3.
All the sick whose condition is such that it renders them invalids whose cure, within a period of 1 year, cannot be anticipated from a medical standpoint. The following, in particular, belong to this category:

a.
Progressive tuberculosis of any organs which, according to medical opinion, can no longer be cured or at least considerably improved by a course of treatment in a neutral country.

b.
Nontubercular affections of the respiratory organs presumed incurable such as, above all, strongly developed pulmonary emphysema, with or without bronchitis, bronchial dilations, serious asthma, gas poisoning, etc.

c.
Serious chronic affections of the organs of circulation (for example: Valvular affections with tendencies to disorders of compensation, relatively serious affections of the myocardium, pericardium and of the vessels, especially inoperable aneurisms of the large vessels, etc.).

d.
Serious chronic affections of the digestive organs.

e.
Serious chronic affections of the urinary and sexual organs, particularly, for example: All cases of confirmed chronic ne- phritis with complete semeiology, and most especially when

42 BASIC FIELD MANUAL
cardiac and vascular impairments already exist; likewise, pyelitis and chronic cystitis, etc.
f.
Serious chronic diseases of the central and peripheral nervous system, such as particularly, serious neurasthenia and hysteria, all unquestionable cases of epilepsy, serious cases of Basedow’s disease, etc.

g.
Blindness in both eyes, or in one eye when the vision of the other remains below 1in spite of the use of corrective glasses. Reduction in acuteness of vision in case it is impossible to restore it by correction lo the acuteness of for one eye at least. Other ocular affections coming in the present class (glaucoma. iritis, choroiditis, etc.).

h.
Total deafness in both ears, as well as total deafness in one ear in case the partially deaf ear does not discern the ordinary spoken voice at a distance of one meter.

i.
All unquestionable cases of mental affections.

k.
All serious cases of chronic poisoning by metals or other causes (saturnism, hydragyrisn~, morphinism, cocainism, alco- holism, gas poisoning, etc.).

1. Chronic affections of the organs of locomotion (arthritis deforinans, gout, rheumatism with impairments clinically dis- coverable), provided they are serious.
m.
All malignant neoplasms, if they are not amenable to relatively minor operations without endangering the life of the patient.

n.
All cases of malaria with noticeable organic changes (im- portant chronic increase in size of the liver, of the spleen, cachexia, etc.).

D.
Serious chronic cutaneous affections, insofar as their nature does not constitute a medical indication for hospitalization in a neutral country.

p.
Serious avitaminoses (beri-beri, pellagra, chronic scurvy).

B.
Bpekial principles for hospitalization. Prisoners of war mzrst be hospitalized if they have the following affections:

1.
All forms of tuberculosis of any organs whatever if, accord-ing to present medical knowledge, they may be cured, or at least considerably improved by methods applicable in a neutral country (altitude, treatment in sanatoria, etc.).

2.
All forms, necessitating treatment, of affections of the respiratory, circulatory, digestive, genito-urinary, and nervous mgans, of organs of the senses, of the locomotor and cutaneous

apparatus, brovided, however, that the forms of these affections do not belong to the categories requiring direct repatriation, or ate not acute diseases properly so-called with a tendency to a complete cure, The affections contemplated in this paragraph are those which offer really better chances of cure for the patient by the application of means of treatment available in a neutral country than if he were treated in captivity.
Nervous troubles, the efficient or determinant causes of which are the events of the war or even of the captivity itself, such as the psychasthenia of prisoners of war and other analo- gous cases, should be given special consideration.
All duly verified cases of this kind should be hospitalized, provided that the seriousness or constitutional character thereof does not make them cases for direct repatriation.
Cases of psychasthenia of prisoners of war which are not cured after 3 months of hospitalization in a neutral country or which, after this period has expired, are not obviously on the road to final recovery, should be repatriated.
3.
All cases of wounds, of lesions and their results which offer better chances of cure in a neutral country than in cap- tivity, provided that these cases are not either eligible for exchange or else are insignificant.

4.
All cases of malaria, duly verified and not presenting organic changes clinically discoverable (chronic increase in size of liver, of the spleen, cachexia, etc.), if the stay in a neutral country offers particularly favorable prospects of final cure.

5.
All cases of poisoning (particularly by gases, metals, alkaloids) for which the prospects of cure in a neutral country are especially favorable. There shall be excluded from hospitalization:

1.
All duly verified cases of mental affections.

2.
All organic or functional nervous affections reputed to be incurable. (These two categories belong to those giving a right to direct exchange.)

3.
Serious chronic alcoholism.

4.
All contagious affections during the period in which they are transmissible (acute infectious diseases, primary and secondary syphilis, trachoma, leprosy, etc.).

111. General observations.
The conditions given above should, generally speaking, be interpreted and applied in as broad a spirit as possible.
44 BASIC FIELD MANUAL
This breadth of interpretation should be especialfy applied to neuropathic or psychopathic conditions caused or brought to a head by the events of the war or even of the captivity itself (psychasthenia of prisoners of war), and also to cases of tubercu- losis in all degrees.
It is needless to state that camp physicians and the mixed medical commission may find themselves confronted with a great number of cases not mentioned among the examples given under 11, or cases not fitting in with these examples. The ex- amples mentioned above are given only as typical examples; an analogous list of examples of surgical alterations has not been drawn up because, with the exception of cases incontest- able by their very nature (amputations), it is difficult to make a list of particular types; experience has shown that a recital of these particular cases was not without disadvantages in practice.
All cases not fitting exactly into the examples cited shall be de- cided by invoking the spirit of the above governing principles.
CHAPTER 5
SICK,WOUNDED, AND DEAD
174.
Prior conventions superseded.-The present conven- tion shall replace the conventions of August 22, 1864, and of July 6, 1906, in the relations between the high contracting parties (G. W.S., art. 34).

175.
Protected and treated with humanity.-OfEcers, soldiers, and other persons officially attached to armies who are wounded or sick shall be respected and protected under all cir- cumstances; they shall be treated with humanity and cared for, without distinction of nationality, by the belligerent in whose power they are.

A belligerent, ]however, when compelled to leave wounded or sick in the hands of his adversary, shall leave with them, so far as military exigencies permit, a portion of the personnel and matdriel of his sanitary service to assist in caring for them
(G. W.S., art. 1).
176. General rules of international law in respect of war applicable; special agreements.-Subject to the care that must be taken of them under the preceding article, the wounded and sick of an army who fall into the power of the other belligerent shall be prisoners of war, and the general rules
BASIC FIELD MANUAL 45
of international law in respect to prisoners shall be applicable to them.
The belligerents shall remain free, however, to agree upon such clauses to the benefit of the wounded and sick prisoners as they may deem of value over and above already existing obli- gations (G. W.S., art. 2).
177. Search for and removal; punishment of maraud-ers.-~. Search for wounded and dead; local armistice.-After every engagement, the belligerent who remains in possession of the field of battle shall take measures to search for the wounded and the dead and to protect them from robbery and ill-treatment.
Whenever circumstances permit, a local armistice or cessation of fire to enable the removal of wounded left between the lines shall be arranged (G. W.S., art. 3).
b. Punishment of marauders.–Robbery and maltreatment of the wounded or dead on a battlefield are outrageous offenses against the laws of war. It is the duty of the commanders to see that such offenders, whether members of the armed forces or civilians, are promptly apprehended and brought to trial before competent military tribunals. Like other serious offenders against the laws of war they may be sentenced to death or such other punishment as the trial tribunal may be legally authorized to impose. (See par. 362.)
178. Mutual exchange of information.-a. Death certiji- cates; collection and return of personal effects; graves service.-Bel- ligerents shall mutually inform each other as soon as possible of the names of the wounded, sick, and dead collected or discovered by them, as wall as all indications which may serve for their identification.
They shall draw up afid forward to each other death certifi- cates.
They shall collect and likewise send to each other all articles of personal use found on the field of battle or on the dead, espe-cially one half of their identity tag, the other half remaining attached to the body.
They shall see that a careful examination, medical if possible, is made of the bodies of the dead prior to their interment or cremation, in order to verify their death, establish their identity, and furnish a report thereon.
They shall further see that the dead are honorably buried and that the graves are respected and may always be found again. For this purpose, and at the outbreak of hostilities, they shall officially organize a graves service in order to render any later exhumation possible and to make certain of the identity of bodies whatever changes may be made in the location of the graves.
Upon the termination of hostilities, they shall exchange lists of graves and of dead buried in their cemeteries and elsewhere
(G.W.S., art. 4).
b. Interpretation.-Obviously, as to each belligerent, the pro- visions of the foregoing article relate only to the wounded, sick, and dead of the other belligerent or belligerents engaged, because the duties of each belligerent concerning its own wounded, sick, and dead are fixed by its own laws and regulations.
179.
Appeal to inhabitants to care for sick and wounded permitted.-Military authorities may appeal to the charitable zeal of the inhabitants to receive and, under the supervision of the former, to care for, the wounded or sick of the armies, grant- ing to persons responding to such appeal special protection and certain facilities (G.W.S., art. 5).

SANITARY FORMATIONS AND ESTABLISHMENTS

180.
Mobile sanitary formations and fixed establish- ments of sanitary service to be respected and protected.- Mobile sanitary formations, i.e., those which are intended to accompany armies in the field, and the fixed establishments belonging to the sanitary service shall be respected and protected by the belligerents (G.W.S., art. 6).

181.
When protection ceases.-The protection due to sani- tary formations and establishments shall cease if they are used to commit acts injurious to the enemy (G.W.S., art. 7).

182.Forfeiture of protection.-a. Acts permitted.-A sanitary formation or establishment shall not be deprived of the protection accorded by article 6 (see par. 150) by the fact-
1.
That the’personnel of a formation or establishment is armed and uses its arms in self-defense or in defense of its wounded and sick.

2.
That in the absence of armed hospital attendants the forma- tion is guarded by an armed detachment or by sentinels.

3.
That hand arms and munitions taken from the wounded and sick and not yet turned over to the proper service are found in the formation or establishment.

4.
That there is found in the formation or establishment per- sonnel or matlriel of the veterinary service which does not integrally belong to it (G.W.S., art. 8).

b.
Self-defense defined.–Although the sanitary personnel may carry arms for self-defense, they shall not employ such arms against the legitimate enemy forces. These arms are for their personal defense and for protection of the wounded ~nd sick under their charge against marauders and the like.

c.
Guards for sanitary units protected.-Soldiers from other branches employed as orderlies or guards for sanitary units are treated as sanitary personnel if they carry written orders of com- petent authority showing such status and have not during such status acted as combatants.

d.
Arms and ammunition taken from the wounded and sick.–As provided in substance by the foregoing article, the presence of such arms and ammunition in a sanitary formation or establish- ment does not of itself alone forfeit the protection to be accorded sanitary units under this convention. However, such arms and ammunition should be turned in as soon as practicable, and, in any event, are subject to confiscation.

PERSONNEL OF SANITARY FORMATIONS AND ESTABLISHMENTS
183. Respect and protection.-a. Privileges of personnel.- The personnel charged exclusively with the re’moval, transporta- tion, and treatment of the wounded and sick, as well as with the administration of sanitary formations and establishments, and the chaplains attached to armies, shall be respected and protected under all circumstances. If they fall into the hands of the enemy they shall not be treated as prisoners of war.
Military personnel which has received special instructions to be used when necessary as auxiliary attendants or litter bearers in the removal, transportation, and treatment of the wounded and sick, and bearing identification documents, shall benefit by the same regime as the permanent sanitary personnel if captured while performing these functions (G.W.S., art. 9).
b. What is meant bu respect and protection.-The respect and protection accorded personnel of certain categories by articles 6 (par. 180) and 9 (a above) mean that they must not knowingly be attacked, fired upon, or unnecessarily prevented from dis- charging their proper functions. The accidental killing or wounding of such personnel, due to their presence among or proximity to combatant elements actually engaged, by fire directed at the latter, affords no just cause for complaint.
48 BASIC FIELD MANUAL
184.Personnel of voluntary societies; names of those authorized to be exchanged.-The personnel of volunteer aid societies duly recognized and authorized by their government, who may be employed in the same functions as the personnel contemplated in article 9, paragraph 1 (see par. 183a), shall be assimilated to that personnel upon condition that the personnel of the said societies shall be subject to military laws and regu- lations.
Each high contracting party shall notify the other, either in time of peace or at the opening or during the progress of hostili- ties, and in any case before actual employment, the names of the societies which it has authorized to render assistance, under its responsibility, in the official sanitary service of its armies
(G. W.S., art. 10).
185.
The American National Red Cross.-The American National Red Cross is, under the proclamation of the President, the only such volunteer society now authorized by this Govern- ment to render aid to its land and naval forces in time of war, and any other society desiring to render similar assistance can do so only through the American National Red Cross. Such portion of the society as may render aid to the land and naval forces will constitute a part of the sanitary service thereof. Their employment must be under the responsibility of the Government and they must be assigned to duties in localities designated by competent military authority (AR 850-75).

186.
Volunteer societies of neutrals.-A recognized society of a neutral country may only lend the services of its sanitary personnel and formations to a belligerent with the prior consent of its own government and the authorities of such belligerent.

The belligerent who has accepted such assistance shall be required to notify the enemy before making any use thereof
(G.W.S., art. 11).
187. Personnel in power of enemy.-a. Personnel not to be detained; service may be used pending return.-The persons described in articles 9, 10 and 11 (see pars. 183, 184, 186) may not be detained after they have fallen into the power of the enemy.
Unless there is an agreement to the contrary, they shall be sent back to the belligerent to whose service they are attached as soon as a way is open for their return and military esigencies permit.
While waiting to be returned, they shall continue in the exer- cise of their functions under the direction of the enemy; they shall be assigned preferably to the care of the wounded and
, sick of the belligerent to whose service they are attached. At the time of their departure they may carry with them such effects, instruments, arms, and means of transport as belong to them (G.W.S., art. 12).
b. Interpretations.-Nothing in the foregoing article precludes reasonable measures to prevent such personnel, upon their return to their own army, from carrying information of strategic or tactical value. Their movements and activities may be restricted as far as reasonably necessary to prevent their acquisi- tion of such information, and if they should become possessed thereof, their return to their own army may be delayed until the information has ceased to be of substantial value.
188. Maintenance, quarters, pay, and allowances.-Belligerents shall assure to the personnel indicated in articles 9, 10, and I1 (see pars. 183, 184, and 186), who are in their power, the same maintenance and quarters, pay and allow- ances, as to the corresponding personnel in their own armies.
At the outbreak of hostilities the belligerents shall reach an understanding on the corresponding grades of their sanitary personnel (6.W.S., art. 13).
189.Captured mobile sanitary formations to retain mat6riel and personnel; may be employed to care foa sick and wounded.-If mobile sanitary formations, whatever may be their nature, fall into the power of the enemy, they shall retain their matgriel, their means of transportation, and their conducting personnel.
The competent military authority, however, shall have the right to employ them in caring for the wounded and sick; their. return shall take place in accordance with the conditions pre- scribed for the sanitary personnel and as far as possible at the same time (G.W.S., art. 14).
, 190. Fixed sanitary establishments not to be diverted from their use, exception.-Buildings and matgriel pertain-ing to fixed sanitary establishments of the army shall remain subject to the laws of war, but may not be diverted from their use so long as they are necessary for the wounded and sick.
50 BASIC FIELD MANUAL
However, commanders of troops engaged in operations may use them in case of urgent military necessity if, before such use, the wounded and sick treated there have been provided for
(G. W.S., art. 15).
191. Buildings and matkiel of aid societies to be re-garded as private property; right of requisition.-The buildings of the aid societies admitted to the benefits of the con- vention shall be regarded as private property.
The mat6riel of these societies, irrespective of its location, shall likewise be regarded as private property.
The right of requisition recognized to belligerents by the laws and customs of war shall be exercised only in case of urgent necessity and after the wounded and sick have been provided for (G. W.S., art. 16).
SANITARY TRANSPORTATION
192. Convoys of evacuation.-Vehicles equipped for sani- tary evacuation traveling singly or in convoy shall be treated as mobile sanitary formations subject to the following special provisions:
A belligerent intercepting sanitary transportation vehicles, traveling either singly or in convoy, may, if required by military necessity, stop them and break up the convoy, taking charge in all cases of the care of the wounded and sick whom it contains. He may only utilize such vehicles in the sector wherein they were intercepted and exclusively for sanitary needs. When their local mission is at an end, these vehicles must be returned under the conditions stipulated in article 14. (See par. 189.)
Military personnel charged with transportation and provided for this purpose with a regular order shall be returned under the conditions stipulated in article 12 (see par. 187) for sanitary personnel, and subject to the provisions of the last paragraph of article 18. (See par. 193.)
All means of transportation especially organized for evacua-tion purposes, as well as the mat6riel for organizing them, attached to the sanitary service, shall be returned in conformity with the provisions of chapter IV. (See pars. 189, 190, 191.)
Military means of transportation, other than those belonging to the sanitary service, and their teams, may be captured.
The civil personnel and all means of transportation obtained by requisition shall be subject to the general rules of interna- tional law (G. W.S., art. 17).
193. Aircraft used as sanitary transportation.-Aircraft used as a means of sanitary transportation shall enjoy the protection of the Convention during such time as they are ex- clusively reserved for the evacuation of wounded and sick and for the transportation of sanitary personnel and matgriel.
They shall be painted in white and shall bear, conspicuously, the distinctive sign mentioned in article 19 (see par. 194) along-side of the national colors on their upper and lower surfaces.
Excepting with special and express permission, a flight over the firing-line, as well as over the zone situated in front of the major medical collecting stations, and in general over any terri- tory under the control of or occupied by the enemy shall be forbidden.
Sanitary aircraft must comply with ally summons to land.
In the case of a landing thus required or made accidentally upon territory occupied by the enemy, the wounded and sick, as well as the sanitary personnel and matgriel, including the aircraft, shall benefit by the provisions of the present Convention.
The pilot, mechanics, and wireless operators who have been captured shall be returned on condition of only being utilized in the saiiitary service until the termination of hostilities

(G. W.S., art. 18).
THE DISTINCTIVE EMBLEM
194. The Red Cross; emblem of sanitary service.-Out of respect to Switzerland the heraldic emblem of the Red Cross on a white ground, formed by the reversal of the Federal colors, is continued as the emblem and distinctive sign of the sanitary service of armies.
However, for countries which already use, as a distinctive sign, in place of the red cross, the red crescent, or the red lion and suh on a white field, these emblems shall likewise be recognized within the meaning of the present convention
(G.W.S., art. 19).
195. Emblem to appear on flags and materiel of sanitary service.-The emblem shall appear on flags and brassards, as well as upon all matgriel, appertaining to the sanitary service, with the permission of the competent military authority
(G.W.S., art. 20).
196. Brassards, protected personnel to wear; certificate of identity.-The perronnel protected in virtue of the first paragraph of article 9 (see par. 153), and articles 10 and 11
(see pars. 184, 186), shall wear attached to the left arm a brassard
bearing the distinctive sign, issued and stamped by a competent
military authority.
The personnel indicated in article 9 (see par. 183), paragraphs
1 and 2, shall be furnished with proof of identity consisting
either of an entry in their military handbook or a special docu-
ment.
Persons contemplated in articles 10 and 11 (see pars. 184, 186),
who do not wear military uniform shall be furnished by the com-
petent military authority with a certificate of identity containing
their photograph and attesting to their sanitary status.
Identification documents must be uniform and of the same
type in each army.
The sanitary personnel may in no ease be deprived of their
insignia nor of their own identification papers.
In case of loss they shall have the right to obtain duplicates
(G.W.S., art. 21).
197. The distinctive flag; where and how displayed.- The distinctive flag of the convention may only be displayed over the sanitary formations and establishments which the convention provides shall be respected, and with the consent of the military authorities. In fixed establishments it shall, and in mobile formations it may, be accompanied by the national flag of the belligerent to whose service the formation or establish- ment is attached.
Sanitary formations which have fallen into the power of the enemy, however, shall fly no other flag than that of the con-vention as long as they continue in that situation.
The belligerents, insofar as military exigencies allow, shall take such measures as may be necessary to render the distinc- tive emblems marking sanitary formations and establishments plainly visible to the land, air, and sea forces of the enemy, with a view to preventing the possibility of any aggressive action
(6.W.S., art. 22).
198. Flags of sanitary formations of neutral countries.- The sanitary formations of neutral countries which, under the conditions set forth in article 11 (see par. 156), have been author- ized to render their services, shall fly with the flag of the convention, the national flag of the belligerent to which they are attached.
They shall have the right during such time as they are render- ing service to a belligerent to fly their own national flag also.
The provisions of the second paragraph of the preceding article are applicable to them (G.W.S., art. 23).
199. Red Cross emblem authorized in peace or war to designate materiel and personnel protected by the con- vention.-The emblem of the Red Cross on a white ground and the words “Red Cross ” or “Geneva Cross “may only be used, whether in time of peace or war, to protect or designate sanitary formations and establishments, the personnel and mat6riel protected by the convention.
The same shall apply with respect to the emblems mentioned in the second paragraph of article 18 (see par. 193), for such countries as use them.
Moreover, the volunteer aid societies provided for under article 10 (see par. 184) may, in conformity with their national legislation, employ the distinctive emblem for their humanitarian activities in time of peace.
As an exceptional measure and with the specific authorization of one of the national Red Cross societies (Bed Crescent, Red Lion and Sun), the use of the emblem of the convention may be allowed in peace time to designate the location of relief stations reserved exclusively to giving free assistance to wounded or sick (G.W.S., art. 24).
EXECUTION OF ARTICLES OF THE CONVENTION
200. Duty of commanders in chief of belligerent armies to provide in detail for execution of the foregoing articles.- It shall be the duty of the commanders in chief of the belligerent armies to provide for the details of execution of the foregoing articles as well as for unforeseen cases, in accordance with the
‘     instructions of their respective governments and conformably to the general principles of this convention (G.W.S., art. 26).
201.Publication of provisions of Geneva convention.- The high contracting parties shall take the necessary steps to acquaint their troops and particularly the protected personnel, with the provisions of this convention, and to make them known to the people at large (G. W.S., art. 27).
202. Investigation of violations.-At the request of a bel- ligerent, an investigation must be held, in such manner as shall be agreed upon by the interested parties, concerning any alleged
54 BASIC FIELD MANUAL
violation of the convention; whenever such a violation is proved, the belligerents shall put an end to it and repress it as promptly as possible (G. W.S., art. 30).
CHAPTER 6

ESPIONAGE AND TREASON
203. Spies.-a. General.-A person can only be considered a spy when, acting clandestinely or on false pretenses, he obtains or endeavors to obtain information in the zone of operations of a belligerent, with the intention of communicating it to the hostile party.
Tnus, soldiers not wearing a disguise who have penetrated into the zone of operations of the hostile army, for the purpose of obtaining information, are not considered spies. Similarly, the following are not considered spies: Soldiers and civilians, carrying out their mission openly, intrusted with the delivery of dispatches intended either for their own army or for the enemy’s army. To this class belong likewise persons sent in balloons for the purpose of carrying dispatches and, generally, of maintaining communications between different parts of an army or a territory (H.R., art. 29).
b. American statutory definition.-The first paragraph of the foregoing Hague regulation has been in effect somewhat modified, as far as American practice is concerned, by the subsequently enacted eighty-second article of war (act of June 4, 1920, chap. 11,art. 82; 41 Stat. 804), as follows:
Art. 82. Spies.-Any person who in time of war shall be found lurking or acting as a spy in or about any of the fortifica- tions, posts, quarters or encampments of any of the armies of the
United States, or elsewhere, shall be tried by a general court- martial or by a military commission, and shall, on conviction thereof, suffer death.
c. Article of war 82 governs.–Insofar as H.R. 29 and article of war 82 are not in conflict with each other, they will be con-strued and applied together. Otherwise the article of war governs American practice.
204. Employment of spies lawful.-The foregoing H.R. 29 (par. 203 a) and H.R. 24 (par. 37) tacitly recognize the well- established right of belligerents to employ spies and ‘other secret agents for obtaining information of the enemy. Resort to that practice involves no offense against international law. Spies are punished, not as violators of the laws of war, but to render that method of obtaining information as dangerous, difficult, and ineffective as possible for the enemy.
205. Who included in definition.-The definition em-bodied in The Hague regulation (par. 203 a) and that contained in article of war 82 (par. 203 b) both include persons of all
.     classes, whether military or civilian, without regard to citizen- ship or sex. Both likewise apply only where the acts are com- mitted in time of war. The Hague definition applies only where the information is obtained or sought “in $he zone of opera-tions”, while the statutory definition is not so limited. The latter, however, includes only persons “found lurking or acting as a spy in or about any of the fortifications, posts, quarters, or encampments of any of the armies of the United States, or elsewhere”, and the phrase “or elsewhere”, as here employed, has been held not to justify trial by military tribunals of “per- sons charged with acts or offenses committed outside of the field of military operations or territory under martial law or other peculiarly military territory, except members of the military or naval forces or those immediately attached to the forces such as camp followers.” (Ops. Atty. Gen. U.S., vol. 31, pp. 356, 361.) Persons charged with espionage committed in the United States, outside military jurisdiction, are nevertheless liable to trial and punishment by the civil courts under the espionage laws. (United States Code, title 50, chap. IV.)
206. Treason.-a. Ame~.ican statutory definition.-Whoso-ever relieves or attempts to relieve the enemy with arms, am- munition, supplies, money, or other thing, or knowingly harbors or protects or holds correspondence with or gives intelligence to the enemy, either directly or indirectly, shall suffer death or such punishment as a court-martial or military commission may direct (eighty-first article of war; act of June 4,1920, chap. 11, 41 Stat. 804).
b. Interpretations.-As in the case of the eighty-second article of war relating to spies (pars. 203 b and 205), it is believed that this statute, when subject to judicial interpretation, will be held to authorize the trial of civilians by military tribunals, only when the offense has been committed within territory under martial law or military government, or within the zone of military operations, or within a military reservation, post, or camp, or in a place otherwise especially subject to military jurisdiction.
56 BASIC FIELD MANUAL
Cases occurring in the United States outside military jurisdic- tion are triable by the civil courts under the espionage laws above mentioned (par. 205). In time of war, within territory under military control for any of the reasons above indicated, the rule is general in its application to persons of all classes, without regard to citizenship, or military or civil status.
c. Extraterritorial force of the rule.-Although the eighty-first article of war, as an enactment of the Congress, technically ap- plies of its own force only within territory of the United States and to persons subject to American military law elsewhere, it substantially embodies principles of the unwritten laws of war applicable to occupied enemy territory, and will be enforced by American troops occupying such territory.
207.
War traitors.-Violators of the foregoing rule are called “war traitors.”

208.
Subject giving information to own government.- If the citizen or subject of a country or place invaded or con- quered gives information to his own government, from which he is separated by the hostile army, or to the army of his govern- ment, he is a war traitor.

209.
Guide to the enemy.-If a citizen of a hostile and invaded district voluntarily serves as a guide to the enemy, or offers to do so, he is deemed a war traitor.

210.
Punishment of spies.-The spy is punishable with death whether or not he succeeds in obtaining the information or in conveying it to the enemy.

211.Punishment for treason.-The war traitor is always severely punished. If his offense consists’in betraying to the enemy anything concerning the condition, safety, operations, or plans of the troops holding or occupying the place or district, his punishment is death.
212.
Spy must be tried.-A spy taken in the act shall not be punished *without previous trial (H.R., art. 30).

213.
Spy immune from punishment after joining his own army.-A spy who, after rejoining the army to which he belongs, is subsequently captured by the enemy, is treated as a prisoner of war, and incurs no responsibility for his previous acts of espionage (M.R., art. 31).

214.
Immunity not applicable to treason.-This immun-ity does not extend to persons guilty of treason who may be arrested at any place or any time within the jurisdiction; and it

is not necessary for traitors to be caught in the act in order that they may be punished.
215. Assisting espionage punishable.-Assisting or favor- ing espionage or treason and knowingly concealing a spy may be

made the subject of charges; and such acts are by the customary laws of war equally punishable.
CHAPTER 7
INTERCOURSE BETWEEN BELLIGERENTS
2 16. Nonintercourse, the rule.-All intercourse between the territories occupied by belligerent armies, m-hether by traffic, by letter, by travel, or in any other way, ceases. This is the general rule to be observed without special proclamation.
217.Exceptions to rule.-Exceptions to this rule, whether by safe-conduct, or permission to trade 011 a small or large scale, or by exchanging mails, or by travel from one territory into the other, aan take place only according to agreement ap- proved by the government or by the highest military authority. Contraventions of this rule are highly punishable.
218. Good faith essential.-It is absolutely essential in all uonhostile relations that the most scrupulous good faith shall be observed by both parties, and that no advantage not intended to be given by the adversary shall be taken.
219.Ambassadors and diplomatic agents.-Ambassadors and other diplomatic agents of ncutral poli-crs, accredited to the enemy, may receive safe-conducts through the territories occu- pied by the belligerents, unless there are military reasons to the
.     contrary, and unless they maj reach the place of their destina- tion conveniently by another route. It implies no international affront if the safe-conduct is declined. Pucll passes are usually given by the suprerr,e authority of the State and not by the subordinates.
220.Rules, where found.-These nonhostile relations are usually comprised under the headings of parlementaires, and flags of truce, armistices, capitulations, passports, and safe-con- ducts, safeguards, and cartels.
221.Definition of par1ementaires.-Parlementaires are agents employed by commanders of belligerent forces in the field, to go in person within the enemy lines, for the purpose of com- municating or negotiating openly and directly with the enemy commander.
58 BASIC FIELD MANUAL
222. Inviolability of par1ementaire.-A person is regard- ed as a parlementaire who has been authorized by one of the belligerents to enter into communication with the other, and who advances bearing a white flag. He has a right to inviola- bility, as well as the trumpeter, bugler, or drummer, the flag bearer, and interpreter who may accompany him (H.R., art. 32).
223.
Instruction of soldiers concerning parlementaire. -All soldiers, of whatever grade, should be thoroughly acquaint- ed with the qualifications and privileges accorded parlementaires, and with the proper method of receiving them when they present themselves.

224.
Signification of white flag.-The white flag, when used by troops, indicates a desire to communicate with the enemy. The hoisting of a white flag has no othcr signification in interna- tional law. It may indicate that the party hoisting it desires to open communication with a view to an armistice or a surrender. If hoisted in action by an individual soldier or a small party, it may signify merely the surrender of that soldier or party. It is essential, therefore, to determine with reasonable certainty that the flag is shown by actual authority of the enemy commander before basing important action upon that assumption.

225.
Fire during display of white flag.-The enemy is not required to cease firing whcu a white flag is raised. To indicate that the hoisting is authorized by its commander, the appearance of the flag should be accompanied or followed promptly by a complete cessation of fire from that side. The commander au- tthorizing the hoisting of the flag should also promptly send a parlementaire.

226.Fire not to be directed on the par1ementaire.-The fire should not be intentionally directed on the person carrying the flag or upon those with him; if, however, the parlementaire or those near him present themselves during an engagement and are killed or wounded, it furnishes no ground for complaint. It is the duty of the parlementaire to select a propitious moment for displaying his flag, such as during the intervals of active operations, and to avoid the dangerous zone by making a detour.
227. Credentials of par1ementaire.-The parlementaire, in addition to presenting himself under cover of a white flag, must be duly authorized in a written instrument signed by the com- mander of the forces.
228.No communication at night.-No provision is made for opening communicatiol~ with an enemy during the hours of darkness when a white flag cannot be seen. An attempt to send a parlementaire at night is very dangerous, and at best uncertain.
229.Reception of par1ementaire.-The commander to whom a parlementaire is sent is not obliged to receive him under all circumstances. He may take all the necessary steps to pre- vent the parlementaire from taking advantage of his mission to obtain information. In case of abuse, he has the right to detain the envoy temporarily (H.R., art. 33).
230.
May prescribe formalities.-The commander may declare the formalities and conditions upon which he will receive a parlementaire and fix the hour and place at which he must appear. The present rule is that a belligerent may not declare beforehand, even for a specified period–except in case of reprisal for abuses of the flag of truce-that he will not receive parle- mentaires. An unnecessary repetition of visits need not be allowed.

231.
Who may accompany the par1ementaire.-Only three persons are authorized to accompany the parlementaire. These, under the rule, are entitled to the same immunity. In case he is to have more than these, authority for the same should be previously obtained. He may be accompanied by a less number, and may even go alone with the flag of truce. It is advisable to have at least a trumpeter, bugler, or drummer with him in order more readily and surely to make known his status, thereby avoiding danger as much as possible.

232.
Formalities in the reception of par1ementaires.-

a.
The parlementaire, with necessary authorization and with his duly authorized attendants, should approach the enemy’s outpost or lines at a slow pace. When he arrives near enough to be recog- nized-that is, seen and heard-he causes his trumpet or bugle to be sounded or drum to be beaten and his flag to be waived.

b.
He then advances at a slow pace toward the line, carefully obeying all instructions signaled or given him by any party of the enemy sent out to meet or conduct him.

c.
He will then proceed to the point and by the route designated for receiving him. He may be furnished an escort for this by the enemy.

d.
On arriving at the post of admittance the bearer and his escort dismount, and, leaving the escort at a convenient distance in rear, he proceeds on foot to the commander or senior officer of the post and states his mission.

15889″-34-5

60 BASIC FIELD MANUAL
e.
The escort should not attempt to enter the lines with the parlernentaire, and must obey all instructions or signals given them.

f.
Marked courtesy must be observed on both sides. Conver-sation should be prudent and not touch upon the military opera- tions. Great care will be exercised not to ask for nor to impart information.

g.
The parlementaire will be treated with all the honors due to his rank and station and furnished an escort or guard in case of necessity.

h.
A parlementaire cannot of strict right claim to pass the outpost, nor can he demand to be conducted into the presence of the commanding officer. His message, if written, may be transmitted to the comnianding officer; if verbal, he may be required to reduce it to writing or deliver it orally to such person as may be designated to receive it. If he is sent to the rear for any reason what eve^, he should be blindfolded and sent by a circuitous route.

i.
In cases where resort is had to a decision from higher suthor- ity, the parlementaire must wait until same is returned.

j.
The parlementaire will be permitted to retire and return with the same formalities and precautions as upon arrival.

233.
Detention of par1ementaire.-In addition to right of detention for abuse of his position, a parlementaire may be de- tained in case he has seen anything or obtained knowledge which may be detrimental to the enemy, or if his departure should reveal information of the movement of troops. He should be detained only so long as circumstances imperatively demand, and infor- mation should be sent at once to his commander as to such deten- tion, as well as of any other action taken against him or against his party.

234.
Inviolability, loss of.-The parlementaire loses his right of invidlability if it is proved in a clear and incontestable manner that he has taken advantage of his privileged position to provoke or commit an act of treachery (H.R., art.34).

235.
Abuse of flag of truce.-It constitutes an abuse of the flag of truce, forbidden as an improper use under H.R., article 23

(f) (see par. 41), for an enemy not to halt and cease firing while the parlementaire sent by him is advancing and being received by the other party; likewise, if the flag of truce is made use of for the purpose of inducing the enemy to believe that a parle-mentaire is going to be sent when no such intention exists. It
is also an abuse of a flag of truce to carry out operations under the
protection accorded by the enemy to it and those accompanying
it. An abuse of a flag of truce may authorize a resort to reprisals.
(See pars. 352 and 363.)

CHAPTER 8 p-.—–
MILITARY PASSPORTS, SAFE-CONDUCTS, SAFE-
GUARDS, AND CARTELS

236.
Military passport.-A military passport is a document issued by order of a commander of belligerent forces, authorizing a person or persons named therein, residing or sojourning within territory occupied by such forces, to travel unmolested within such territory, with or without permission to pass, or to pass and return, by designated routes, through the lines, subject to such further conditions and limitations as the commander may prescribe.

237.
Safe-conduct for persons.-Documents like passports, issued by the sa.me authority and for similar purposes, to persons residing or sojourning outside of the occupied areas, who desire to enter and relnain within or pass through such areas, are called safe-conducts.

238.
Safe-conduct for goods.-Similar documents, issued by the same authority, to persons residing within or without the occupied areas, to permit them to carry specified goods to or from designated places within those areas, and to engage in trade otherwise forbidden by the general rule of nonintercourse, are also called safe-conducts. (See also par. 241.)

239.
Passports and safe-conducts; use of terms; forms; transferability.-The difference hetareen military passports and safe-conducts as to persons has not heretofore been clearly defined, the two terms having been employed more or less indiscriminately. The distinctions above indicated are based upon analogous customs with relation to civil passports and are adopted in the present text to avoid further confusion in this respect. Printed forms for these documents will be supplied in time of war by The Adjutant General. Passports and safe- conducts as to persons are individual and nontransferable. A safe-conduct for goods, although restricted to the articles therein designated, may be carried by any agent of the person or firm to which it is issued, who is designated by that person or firm by written indorsement upon the document to accompany

62 BASIC FIELD MANUAL
the goods, unless the person to accompany the 1;oods is named in the document. In the latter event the document will be honored only in the hands of the person so named. When passports and safe-conducts are granted by arrangement with the enemy, or with a neutral power, they must be issued and honored precisely according to the terms of the arrangement.
240.
Passports and safe-conducts; revocation and lapse.-Any passport or safe-conduct may be revoked by the commander issuing it, or by his superiors, for reasons of military expediency, but, until revoked, it is binding upon the grantor and his successors. When a ti~ne is specified in the document, it is valid only during such time. These documents should not be revoked for the purpose of securing the persons of the holders, who should be given time to withdraw in safety. In case of violation of their terms the privilege will be withdrawn and the case investigated.

241.
Licenses to trade.-Safe-conducts for goods in which the grantee is qiven a continuing right for a prescribed period, or until further orders, to engage in the specified trade, are some- times called licenses to trade.

242.
Safeguard.-A safeguard is a detachment of soldiers posted or detailed by a commander of troops for the purpose of protecting some person or persons, or a particular village, building, or other property. The term “safeguard” is also used to designate a written order by a commander of belligerent forces for the protection of an enemy subject or enemy property. It is usually directed to the succeeding commander requesting the grant of protection for such individuals or property. Written safeguards may be delivered to the parties whose persons or property are to be protected, or they may be posted on the property. The violation of a safeguard is a grave offense against the laws of waF. (See also the seventy-eighth article of war.)

243.
Inviolability of soldiers as safeguards.-Soldiers on duty as safeguards are guaranteed against the application of the laws of war, and it is customary to send them back to their army when the locality is occupied by the enemy, together with their baggage and arms, as soon as military exigencies permit.

244.
Cartels.-In the customary military sense a cartel is an agreement entered into by belligerents for the exchange of prisoners of war. In its broader sense it is a ccnvention con-cluded between belligerents for. the, purpose of arranging or regulating certain kinds of nonhostile intercourse otherwisa

prohibited by reason of the existence of the war. Both parties to a cartel are in honor boulld to observe its provisions with tlie most scrupulous care, but it is voidable by either party upon definite proof that it has been intentionally violated in an important particular by the other party.
CHAPTER 9
CAPITULATIONS AND ARMISTICES
CAPITULATIONS
245.
Definition.-A capitulation is an- agreement entered into between commanders of belligerent forces for the surrender of a body of troops, a fortress, or other defended locality, or of a district of the theater of operations.

246.
Military honor in.-Capitulations agreed upon be-tween the contracting parties must take into account the rules of military honor.

I
Once settled, they must be scrupulously observed by both parties (H.R., art. 35).
247.
Powers of commanders.-Subject to the limitatio~ls hereinafter indicated, the commander of a fort or place, or the commander in chief of an army, is presumed to be duly author- ized to enter into capitulations. If he capitulates unnecessarily and shamefully, or in violation of orders from higher authority, he is liable to trial and punishment by his own government (see article of war 75), but the validity of the capitulation remains unimpaired. His powers are not presumed to extend beyond tlie forces and territory under his own command. He is not presumed to possess power to bind his government to a perma-nent cessiou of tlle plaoe or places under his command, or to any surrender of sovereignty over territory, or to any cessation of hostilities in a district beyond his command, or generally to make or agree to terms of a political nature, or such as will take effect after the termination of hostilities.

248.
Forms of capitulations.-There is no specified form for capitulations. They may be concluded either orally or in writing, but in order to avoid disputes which may arise as to the terms thereof, it is bcst, whenever possible, that they be reduced to writing. The convention should contain in precise terms every condition to he observed on either side, excepting such conditiolis

64 BASIC FIELD MANUAL
as are clearly imposed by the laws of war. Details of time and procedure should be prescribed in the most exact and unequivocal language. Even in case of an unconditional surrender following an assault, when the terms are practically dictated by the victor, they should nevertheless be embodied in a written capitulation as soon as practicable.
249. Subjects usually regulated.-In the terms of capitula- tion the following subjects are usually determined:
a.
Cessation of hostilities.-If hostilities have not already been suspended, the date, hour, and minute when they are to cease should be specified.

b.
The fate o,f the garrison, including those persons who may have assisted them..-It is usually agreed that these are to become prisoners of war. In that event, if both belligerents are parties to the Geneva convention of 1929 (ch. 4), concerning the treat- ment of prisoners of war, little or nothing more on that subject need be included in the capitulation. However, special circum- stances, such as the bravery of the defense, the strategic or tactical importance of immediate occupation of the place or area to be surrendered, the probable losses that would be involved in forcing an unconditional surrender, inability of the victor to guard, evacuate, and maintain so many as prisoners of war, or other considerations, may justify the victorious commander in agreeing to allow the defeated force sirnply to evacuate, or to march out with the “honors of war”, or to disperse after disarming and giving paroles, providing in the latter case the laws of their country do not forbid, and they are willing to give paroles.

c.
The disarming of the place and of the defenders.-The officers are sometimes allowed to retain their side arms besides the articles which they are cntitled to keep under GPW., article 6, paragraph 80.

d. The turning over of the arms and mathriel, and, in a proper case, the locating 8jthe mine defenses, etc.
e. The evacuation of and ta.king possession of the surrendered place.-The provisions relative to the withdrawal of the de-fenders and the entering into possessioli of the besiegers are fixed in advance with absolute precision, according to the circum- stairces of each case. Commissions mag be named for the delivery and taking possession, respectively.
f.
Provisions relative to the medical personnel, sick, and wounded.

g.
Provisions for taking over the civil govern.ment and property of the place, with regard to the peaceable population.

h.
Stipulations with regard to the immediate handing over to the victor of certain forts or places, or other similar provisions, as a pledge for the fuljillment of the capitulation.

250.Damage or destruction of property prohibited after capitulation.-From the moment of the signing of a capitulat,ion, the capitulator has no right to demolish, destroy, or injure the works, arms, stores, or ammunition in his possession during the time which elapses between the signing and the execution of the capitulation, unless otherwise stipulated in same.
251.Denunciation of capitulation.-A capitulation can be denounced and hostilities i~nrnediately resumed for failure to execute any clause which has been agreed upon or in case it was obtained through a breach of faith.
ARMISTICES
252.
Definition.-An armistice is the cessation of active hostilities for a period agreed on between belligerents. It should, if possible, be agreed upon in writing and duly ratified by the highest authorities of the contending parties.

253.
Effect of armistice.-An armistice suspends military operations by mutual agreement between the belligerent parties. If its duration is not defined, the belligerent parties may resume operations at any time, provided always that the enemy is warned within the time agreed upon, in accordance with the terms of the armistice (H.R., art.36).

254.
Nature of armistice.-An armistice is not a partial or a temporary peace; it is only the suspension of military operations to the extent agreed upon by the parties.

255.
When binding.-An armistice is binding upon the belligerents from the time of the agreed commencement, but the officers of the armies are responsible only from the time when they receive official information of its existence.

266. Importance of fixing time.-In all armistices it is of the utmost importance that the exact moment for the commence- ment and for the termination of same shall be fixed in the terms thereof beyond any possibility of mistake or misconception.
257.
Activities authorized during an armistice.-An armistice need not in terms prohibit actual hostilities. Any-thing else may be done during an armistice that is not in express terms prohibited by the agreement.

258.
Form of armistice.-No special form for an armistice is prescribed. It should, if possible, be reduced to writing, in order to avoid misunderstandings and for purposes of reference should differences of opinion arise. It should be drafted with the greatest precision and with absolute clearness.

259.
Kinds of armistice.-An armistice may be general or local. The first suspends the military operations of the bellig- erent States everywhere; the second only between certain fractions of the belligerent armies and within a fixed radius (H.R., art. 37).

260.
General armistices.-General armistices are of a combined political and military character. They usually precede the negotiations for peace, but may be concluded for other purposes. Due to its political importance, a general armistice is concluded by the governments concerned or by their com-manders in chief, and is subject to ratification by the govern- ments in every case. General armistices are frequently arranged by diplomatic representatives.

261.
Local armistice.-A local armistice suspends opera- tions between certain portions of the belligerent forces, or within a designated district of the theater of operations. A local armistice may be co~lcluded by the military forces only, or by the naval forces only, or between a less number than all of the belligerents at war.

262.
Suspension of arms.-A suspension of arms is a form of armistice concluded between commanders of armies, or even of detachments, for some local military purpose; such as to bury the dead, to collect the wounded, to arrange for exchange of prisoners, to enable a commander to communicate with his government or superior officer.

263.
Notification of armistice.-An armistice must be notified officially and in good time to the competent authorities and to the troops. Hostilities are suspended immediately after the notification, or at the time fixed (If.R., art. 38).

264.Intercourse in theater of operations.-It rests with the contracting parties to settle, in the terms of the armistice, what intercourse may be held in the theater of war with and between the populations (If.R., art. 39).
265.
Rule in absence of stipulation.-If nothing is stip- ulated, the intercourse remains suspended, as during actual hostilities.

266.
What stipulations en armistice should contain.- Stipulations covering the following matters should be incor- porated in an armistice:

a.
Precise date, day, and hour of the commencement of the armistice.-These may be different in different parts of the army.

b.
Duration of the armistice.-The duration may be for a definite or indefinite period. In case it is indefinite, a bellig- erent may resume operations at any time after due notice given. If a term is fixed and no agreement has been made for prolong- ing it, hostilities may be resumed without notice at the expira- tion of the term in the absence of positive agreement to the contrary. An armistice commences, in the absence of express mention to the contrary, at the moment it is signed.

c.
Principal lines and all other marks or signs necessary to determine the locations of the belligerent troops.-For this purpose maps with the lines indicated thereon may be attached to and made part of the convention. Provision may be included for a neutral zone between the two armies. It is usually agreed that these lines are not to be crossed or the neutral zone entered except by parlementaires or other parties by special agreement for specified purposes, such as to bury the dead and collect the wounded.

d.
Relation oj the armies with the people.-If it is desired to make any change during the armistice in the relations between the opposing forces and the peaceable inhabitants, this must be accomplished by express provision. Otherwise these relations remain unchanged, each belligerent continuing to exercise the same rights as before, including the right to prevent or control all intercourse between the inhabitants within his lines and persons within the enemy lines.

e.
Acts to be prohibited during the armistice.-In the absence of stipulations to the contrary, each belligerent is authorized to make movements of troops within his own lines, to receive and instruct recruits, to construct intrenchments, to repair bridges, to establish new batteries, and, in general, to take advantage of the time and means at his disposal to prepare for resuming hostilities. This includes the right to continue espionage, but does not include the right to introduce supplies into a besieged fortress unless specially stipulated in the agreement.

267. Denunciation of armistice.-Any serious violation of the armistice by one of the parties gives the other party the
68 BASIC FIELD MANUAL
right of denouncing it, and even, in cases of urgency, of recom- mencing hostilities immediately (H.R., art. 40).
268.
Denunciation must not involve perfidy.-An armi-stice, like other formal agreements between belligerents, engages the honor of both parties for the exact and complete fulfillment of every obligation thereby imposed. It would be an outrageous act of perfidy for either party, without warning, to resume hostilities during the period of an armistice, with or without a formal denunciation thereof, except in case of urgency and upon convincing proof of intentional and serious violation of its terms by the other party. Nevertheless, under the article last above quoted, upon definite proof of such a violation of the armistice, if the delay incident to formal denunciation and warning seems likely to give the violator a substantial advantage of any kind, the other party is free to resume hostilities without warning and with or without a formal denunciation.

269.
Armistice no excuse for lack of vigilance.-The existence of an armistice does not warrant relaxation of vigilance in the service of security and protection, or in the preparedness of troops for action, or exposing positions to the enemy.

270.
Violations by individuals.-A violation of the terms of the armistice by private individuals acting on their own initiative only entitles the injured party to demand punish-ment of the offenders or, if necessary, compensation for the losses sustained (H.R., art. 41).

“Private individuals”, as employed in the foregoing article, is understood to mean persons within the enemy lines other than members of the armed forces.
271. Soldiers captured while violating armistice.-Ene- my soldiers captured in the abt of breaking an armistice are treated by the captor as prisoners of war. If acting upon their own initiative alone, they may be tried and punished for the offense, but not otherwise. Subordinate officers who, upon their own initiative, order soldiers to commit acts in violation of an armistice, if captured by the offended party, are also liable to trial and punishment. Such acts by individual soldiers or subordinate officers do not justify denunciation of the armistice unless they are proved to have been committed with the knowl- edge and actual or tacit consent of their own government or commander in chief, which may, however, be inferred in event of a persistent failure to punish such offenders.
CHAPTER 10
MILITARY OCCUPATION AND GOVERNMENT OF ENEMY TERRITORY
272. Military occupation.-Territory is considered occu-pied when it is actually placed under the authority of the hostile army.
The occupation extends only to the territory where such authority has been established and can be exercised (H.R., art. 42).
273.
Occupation, question of fact.-Military occupation is a question of fact. It presupposes a hostile invasion as a result of which the invader has rendered the invaded govern- ment incapable of publicly exercising its authority, and that the invader is in positioil to substitute and has substituted his own authority for that of the legitimate government in the territory invaded.

274.
Does not transfer sovereignty.-Being an incident of war, military occupation confers upon the invading force the right to exercise control for the period of occupation. It does not transfer the sovereignty to the occupant, but simply the authority or power to exercise some of the rights of sovereignty. The exercise of these rights results from the established power of the occupant and from the necessity for maintaining law and order, indispensable to both the inhabitants and to the occupying force.

275.
Distinguished from invasion.-The state of invasion corresponds with the period of resistance. Invasion is not necessarily occupation, although it precedes it and may fre-quently coincide with it. An invader may push rapidly through a large portion of enemy country without establishing that effec- tive control which is essential to the status of occupation. He may send small raiding parties or flying columns, reconnoitering detachments, etc., into or through a district where they may be temporarily located and exercise control, yet when they pass on it cannot be said that such district is under his military occupation.

276.
Distinguished from subjugation or conquest.-Military occupation in a foreign war, being based upon the fact of possession of enemy territory, necessarily implies that the sovereignty of the occupied territory is not vested in the occupy-, ing power. The occupation is essentially provisional.

On the other hand subjugation or conquest implies a transfer of sovereignty. Ordinarily, however, such transfer is effected by a treaty of peace. When sovereignty passes, militai-y occu- pation, as such, must of course cease; although the territory may, and usually does for a period at least, continue to be governed through military agencies which have such powers as the Presi- dent or Congress nlay prescribe.
277. Occupation must be effective.-It follows from the definition that military occupation must be both actual and effective; that is, the organized resistance must have been over- come and the forces in possession must have taken measures to establish law and order. It is sufficient that the occupying army can, within a reasonable time, send detachments of troops to make its authority felt within the occupied district. It is immaterial by what methods the authority is exercised, whether by fixed garrisons or flying columns, small or large forces.
278.Presence of invested fort, immaterial.-The exist-ence of a fort or defended area within the occupied district, provided such place is invested, does not render the occupation of the remainder of the district ineffective, nor is the consent of the inhabitants in any manner essential.
279.Proclamation of occupation.-In a strict legal sense no proclamation of military occupation is necessary. On ac- count of the special relations established between the inhabitants of the occupied territory and the occupant by virtue of the pres- ence of the invading force, the fact of military occupation, with the extent of territory affected, should be made known. The practice of this Government is to make this fact known by proclamation.
280.
Commencement of occupation.–In the absence of a proclamation or similar notice the exact time of commencement of occupation may be difficult to fix. The presence of a sufficient force to disarm the inhabitants or enforce submission and the cessation of local resiitance due to the defeat of the enemy’s forces determine the commencement of occupation.

281.
Cessation of occupation.-Occupation once acquired must be maintained. In case the occupant evacuates the dis- trict or is driven out by the enemy, or by a levee en masse,and the legitimate government actually resumes its functions, the occupation ceases. It does not cease, however, if the occupant, after establishing his authority, moves forward against the enemy, leaving a smaller force to administer the affairs of the

district. Nor does the existence of a rebellion or the operations of guerrilla bands cause it to cease unless the legitimate govern- ment is reestablished or the occupant fails promptly to suppress such rebellion or guerrilla operations.
ADMINISTRATION OF OCCUPIED TERRITORY
282.
Necessity for military government.-Military gov-ernment is the organization through which a belligerent exercises authority over the territory of the enemy invaded and occupied by him. The necessity for such government arises from the failure or inability of the legitimate government to exercise its functions on account of the military operations or occupation.

283.
Duty to restore law and order.-The authority of the legitimate power having in fact passed into the hands of the occupant, the latter shall take all measures in his power to restore, and insure, as far as possible, public order and safety, while respecting, unless absolutely prevented, the laws in force in the country (H.R., art. 43).

284.
Functions of government.-All the functions of the hostile government-legislative, executive, or administrative whether of a general, provincial, or local character, cease under military occupation, or continue only with the sanction, or, if deemed necessary, the participation of the occupier or invader.

285.
Nature of government.-It is immaterial whether the government established over an enemy’s territory be called a military or civil government. Its character is thc same and the source of its authority is the same. It is a government imposed by force, and the legality of its acts is determined by the laws of war. During the military occupation it may exercise all the powers given by thc laws of war.

286.
The laws in force.-The principal object of the occupant is to provide for the security of the invading army and to contribute to its support and efficiency and the success of its operations. In restoring public order and safety he will continue in force the ordinary civil and criminal laws of the occupied territory which do not conflict with this object. These laws will be administered by the local officials as far as practicable. All crimes not of a military nature and which do not affect the safety of the invading army are left to the jurisdiction of the local courts.

287.
Power to suspend and promulgate laws.-The military occupant may suspend existing laws and promulgate

72 BASIC FIELD MANUAL
new ones when the exigencies of the military service demand such action.
288. Nature of laws suspended.-The’a,cupant will naturally alter or suspend all laws of a political natur’e-as well as political privileges and all laws which affect the welfare anesafety of his command. Of this class are those relating to recruitment in occupied territory, the right of assembly, the right to bear arms, the right of suffrage, the freedom of the press, the right to quit or travel freely in occupied territory. Such suspensions should be made known to the inhabitants.
289.Nature of laws promulgated.-An occupant may create new laws for the government of a country where none exits. He will promulgate such new laws and regulations as military necessity demands. In this class will be included those laws which come into being as a result of military rule; that is, those which establish new crimes and offenses incident to a state of war and are necessary for the control of the country and the protection of the army.
290.
Prohibition as to rights and rights of action.-It is especially forbidden * * * to declare abolished, suspended, or inadmissible in a court of law the rights and rights of action of the nationals of the hostile party (H.R., art. 23, last par.).

291.
General restrictions imposed; commercial rela-tions.-The occupant has the unquestioned right to regulate commercial intercourse in the occupied territory; that is, he may prohibit entirely or place such restrictions and limitations upon such intercourse as he considers desirable for military purposes.

292.
Censorship of press and correspondence.-The military occupant may establish censorship of the press and of telegraphic and postal correspondence. He may prohibit entirely the publication of newspapers or prescribe regulations for their publication and,circulation especially in unoccupied portions

,of the territory and in neutral countries. He is not required to furnish facilities for postal service, but may take charge of them himself, especially if the officials of the occupied district fail to act or to obey his orders.
293.
Means of transportation.-The military occupant exercises authority over all means of transportation, both public and private within the occupied district, and may seize and utilize them and regulate their operation.

294.
Regulation as to taxes.-If, in the territory occupied, the occupant collects the taxes, dues, and tolls imposedfor the benefit of the state, he shall do so, as far as is possible, in accordance with the rules of assessment ahd incidence in force, rind shall in consequence be bound to defray the expenses of the administration of the occupied territory to the same extent as the legitimate government was so bound (H.R., art. 48).

296.New taxes not to be levied.-The imposition of taxes being an attribute of sovereignty, no new taxes should be imposed by the occupant. The occupant may, however, requisition property and levy contributions. (See pars:34@347.)
296.
When existing rules may be disregarded.-If, due to the flight or unwillingness of the local officials, it is imprac- ticable to follow the rules of incidence and assessment in force, then the total amount of the taxes to be paid may be allotted among the districts, towns, etc., and the local authorities be required to collect it as a capitation tax or otherwise.’

297.
Surplus may be used.-The first charge upon the State taxes is for the cost of local maintenance. The balance may be used for the purposes of the occupant.

298.
What included in taxes, tolls, etc.-The words “for the benefit of the state” were inserted in the article to exclude local dues collected by local authorities. The occupant will supervise the expenditures of such revenue and prevent its hostile use.

EFFECTS OF OCCUPATION ON THE POPULATION
299.Right to enforce obedience.-The occupant can demand and enforce from the inhabitants of occupied territory such obedience as may be necessary for the security of his forces, for the maintenance of law and order, and the proper administra- tion of the country.
300.
Oath of allegiance forbidden.-It is forbidden to compel the inhabitants of occupied territory to swear allegiance to the hostile power (H.R., art. 45).

301.
Must respect persons, religious convictions, etc.- Family honor and rights, the lives of persons, * * * as well as religious convictions and practice, must be respected (H.R., art. 46).

302.
United States rule.-The United States acknowledges and protects, in hostile countries occupied by them, religion and

morality; the persons of inhabitants, especially those of women; and the sacredness of domestic relations. Offenses to the contrary shall be rigorously punished.
303.
Reciprocal obligations of inhabitants.-In return for such considerate treatment, it is the duty of the inhabitants to carry on their ordinary peaceful pursuits; to behave in an absolutely peaceful manner; to take no part whatever in the hostilities carried on; to refrain from all injurious acts toward the troops or in respect to their operations; and to render strict obedience to the officials of the occupant. As to neutrals resident in occupied territory see paragraphs 402-404.

304.
Limitation as to services of inhabitants.-* * * Services shall not be demanded from * * * in-habitants except for the needs of the army of occupation. Theyshall be ” :I: ::: of such a nature as not to involve the in- habitants in the obligation of taking part in military operations against their own country.

Such * * * services shall only be demanded on the authority of the commander in the locality occupied * * *
(H.R.,art. 52).

305.
General right to requisition services.-Services of the inhabitants of occupied territory may be requisitioned for the needs of the army. These will include the services of professional men and tradesmen, such as surgeons, carpenters, butchers, bakers, etc.; employees of gas, electric light, and water works, and other public utilities; and of sanitary boards in connection with their ordinary functions. The officials and employees of railways, canals, river or coastwise steamship companies, tele- graph, telephone, postal, and similar services, and drivers of transport, whether employed by the State or private companies, may be requisitioned to perform their professional duties solong as the duties required do not directly concern the operations of war against their own country.

306.
Restorat$on of general conditions.-The occupant can requisition labor to restore the general condition of the public works of the country to that of peace; that is, to repair roads, bridges, railways, and as well to bury the dead and collect the wounded. In short, under the rules of obedience, they may be called upon to perform such work as may be neces- sary for the ordinary purposes of government, including police and sanitary work.

307.
Construction of forts by inhabitants, etc.-The prohibition against forcing the inhabitants to take part in opera- tions of war against their own country precludes requisitioning their services upon works directly promoting the ends of the war, such as construction of forts, fortifications, and entrench- ments; but there is no objection to their being employed vol- untarily, for pay, in this class of work, except the military reason of preventing information concerning such work from falling into the hands of the enemy.

308.
Information about enemy by inhabitants.-A bel-ligerent is forbidden to force the inhabitants of territory occu- pied by it to furnish information about the army of the other belligerent, or about its means of defense (H.R., art. 44).

309.Interpretation of the foregoing article.-This article was reserved by Germany, Austria, Japan, Montenegro, and Russia, because it was believed that it wollld contravene the preexisting general rule and practice of the nations permitting impressment of guides.
310.Impressment of guides.-Article 44 (par. 308) is generally construed as prohibiting the impressment of guides from the inhabitants in an occupied territory. This is the con- struction placed upon it by the United States. In a war against any power reserving the article the impressment of guides is not prohibited.
OFFICIALS IN OCCUPIED TERRITORY
311. Oath of officials.-The occupant may require such officials as are continued in their offices to take an oath to perform their duties conscientiously and not to act to his preju- dice. Every such official who declines to take such oath may be expelled; but, whether they do so or not, they owe strict obedi- ence to the occupant.
312.Retention of officials.-It is to the best interest of the occupant, and more especially to that of the population, that at least some of the civil officials should remain in their offices in order to assist in the maintenance of order, as well as for the safety of the inhabitants themselves and of their property.
313.Municipal officials should remain.-Municipal of-ficials, including the judges and magistrates, sanitary and police authorities, as well as the staffs of museums, libraries, and all establishments entitled to special protect.ion during hostilities, should remain and be retrained in office if consistent with the safety of the army. The political officials, as well as railway, postal, telegraph, and telephone officials, will probably cease work.
314.
Salaries of officials.-The salaries of civil officials of the hostile government who remain in the invaded territory and continue the work of their offices, especially those who can properly continue it under the circumstances arising out of the war-such as judges, administrative or police officers, officers of city or communal governments-are paid from .the public revenues of the invaded territory, until the military government has reason wholly or partially to dispense with their services. Salaries or incomes connected with purely honorary titles are always suspended.

315.
Resignation of officials.-An official of the hostile government who has accepted service under the occupant should be permitted to resign and should not be punished for exercising such privilege. Such official should not be forced to exercise his functions against his will.

316.
Removal of civil officials.-By virtue of his powers of control the occupant is duly empowered to remove officials of every character. He will on principle remove political officials. Any official considered dangerous to the occupant may be removed, made a prisoner of war, or expelled from the occupied territory.

317.
Punishment of civil officials.-Acts of civil officers that are harmful or injurious to the occupant will be dealt with under the laws of war. Other wrongs or crimes committed by them will be punished according to the law of the land.

TREATMENT OF ENEMY PROPERTY

318.
Destruction and seizure of.-It is especially forbid- den * * * to destroy or seize the enemy’s property, unless such destruction or seizure be imperatively demanded by the necessities of war (H.R., art. 23, par. (g)).

319.
General rule as to war right to seize and destroy property.-The rule is that in war a belligerent may destroy or seize all property of whatever nature, public or private, hostile or neutral, unless such property is specifically protected by some definitive law of war, provided such destruction or seizure is imperatively demanded by the necessities of war.

PUBLIC PROPERTY
320.
Real property of a State.-The occupying State shall be regarded as administrator and usufructuary of public buildings, real estate, forests, and agricultuml estates belong- ing to the hostile State, and situated in the occupied territory. It must safeguard the capital of these properties, and administer them in accordance with the rules of usufruct (H.R., art. 55).

321.
Occupant’s disposition of such property.-The oc-cupant does not have the absolute right of disposal or sale of enemy real property. As administrator or usufructuary he should not exercise his rights in such wasteful and negligent manner as seriously to impair its value. He may, however, lease or utilize public lands or buildings, selI the crops, cut and sell timber, and work the mines. A lease or contract should not extend beyond the conclusion of the war.

322.
State real property susceptible of direct military use.-Real property of a State which is of direct military use, such as forts, arsenals, dockyards, magazines, barracks, rail- ways, canals, bridges, piers, and wharves, remains in the hands of the occupant until the close of the war, and may be destroyed or damaged, if deemed necessary, in military operations.

323.
Property of municipalities, etc.-The property of municipalities, that of institutions dedicated to religion, charity and education, the arts and sciences, even when State property, shall be treated as private property.

All seizure of, destruction or willful damage done to institu- tions of this character, historic monuments, works of art, sci- ence, is forbidden, and should be made the subject of legal proceedings (H.R., art. 56).
324.
Authorized treatment.-The property included in the foregoing rule may be utilized in case of necessity for quar- tering the troops, the sick and wounded, horses, stores, etc.,and generally as prescribed for private property. Such property must, however, be secured against all avoidable injury, even when located in fortified places which are subject to seizure or bombardment.

325.
Movable property.-An army of occupation can only take possession of cash, funds, and realizable securities which are strictly the property of the State, depots of arms, means of transport, stores and supplies, and, generally, all movable property belonging to the State which may be used for military operations (H.R., art. 53, par. I).

PUBLIC PROPERTY
320.
Real property of a State.-The occupying State shall be regarded as administrator and usufructuary of public buildings, real estate, forests, and agricultural estates belong- ing to the hostile State, and situated in the occupied territory. It must safeguard the capital of these properties, and administer them in accordance with the rules of usufruct (H.R., art. 55).

321.
Occupant’s disposition of such property.-The oc-cupant does not have the absolute right of disposal or sale of enemy real property. As administrator or usufructuary he should not exercise his rights in such wasteful and negligent manner as seriously to impair its value. He may, however, lease or utilize public lands or buildings, sell the crops, cut and sell timber, and work the mines. A lease or contract should not extend beyond the conclusion of the war.

322.,State real property susceptible of direct military use.-Real property of a State which is of direct military use, such as forts, arsenals, dockyards, magazines, barracks, rail- ways, canals, bridges, piers, and wharves, remains in the hands of the occupant until the close of the war, and may be destroyed or damaged, if deemed necessary, in military operations.
323. Property of municipalities, etc.-The property of municipalities, that of institutions dedicated to religion, charity and education, the arts and sciences, even when State property, shall be treated as private property.
All seizure of, destruction or willful damage done to institu- tions of this character, historic monuments, works of art, sci- ence, is forbidden, and should be made the subject of legal proceedings (H.R., art. 56).
324.
Authorized treatment.-The property included in the foregoing rule may be utilized in case of necessity for quar- tering the troops, the sick and wounded, horses, stores, etc.,and generally as prescribed for private property. Such property must, however, be secured against all avoidable injury, even when located in fortified places which are subject to seizure or bombardment.

325.
Movable property.-An army of occupation can only take possession of cash, funds, and realizable securities which are strictly the property of the State, depots of arms, means of transport, stores and supplies, and, generally, all movable property belonging to the State which may be used for military operations (H.R., art. 53, par. I).

326.
Two classes of movable property.-All movable property belonging to the State directly susceptible of military use may be taken possession of as booty and utilized for the benefit of the invader’s government. Other movable property, not directly susceptible of military use, must be respected and cannot be appropriated.

327.
Property of unknown ownership treated as public property.-Where the ownership of property is unlmown- that is, where there is any doubt as to whether it is public or private, as frequently happens-it should be treated as public property until ownership is definitely settled.

PRIVATE PROPERTY
328.
Must be respected.-Private property * * * must be respected (H.R., art. 46, par. 1).

329.
Devastation.-The measure of permissible devastation is found in the strict necessities of war. As an end in itself, as a separate measure of war, devastation is not sanctioned by the law of war. There must be some reasonably close connection between the destruction of property and the overcoming of the enemy’s army. Thus the rule requiring respect for private property is not violated through damage resulting from opera- tions, movements, or combats of the army; that is, real estate may be utilized for marches, camp sites, construction of trenches, etc. Buildings may be used for shelter for troops, the sick and wounded, for animals, for reconnaissance, cover, defense, etc. Fences, woods, crops, buildings, etc., may be demolished, cut down, and removed to clear a field of fire, to construct bridges, to furnish fuel if imperatively needed for the army.

330.
American rule.-This rule (respect for private prop- erty, etc.) does not interfere with the right of the victorious invader to tax the people or their property, to levy forced loans, to billet soldiers, -or to appropriate property, especially houses, boats or ships, and lands, for temporary and military use.

331.
Confiscation.-Private property cannot be confiscated

(H.R., art. 46, par. 2).
332. Booty.-All captures and booty belong, according to the modern law of war, primarily to the government of the captor.
Prize money whether on land or sea can now be claimed only under local law.
333.
Private gain by officers and soldiers prohibited.- Neither officers nor soldiers are allowed to make use of their position or power in the hostile country for private gain, not even for commercial transactions otherwise legitimate.

334.
Pillage.-Pillage is formally forbidden (H.R., art. 47).

335.
Seizure and devastation of private property.-Private property can be seized only by way of military necessity for the support or other benefit of the army or of the occupant. All destruction of property not commanded by the authorized officer, all pillage or sacking, even after taking a town or place by assault, are prohibited under the penalty of death, or such other severe punishment as may seem adequate to the gravity of the offense.

336.
Private property susceptible of direct military use.-All appliances, whether on land, at sea. or in the air, adapted for the transmission of news, or for the transport of persons or things, exclusive of cases governed by naval law, depots of arms, and, generally, all kinds of ammunition of war, may be seized, even if they belong to private individuals, but must be restored and compensation fixed when peace is de- clared (H.R., art. 53, par. 2).

337.
What included in rule.-The foregoing rule includes everything susceptible of direct military use, such as cables, telephone, and telegraph plants, horses, and other draft and riding animals, motors, bicycles, motorcycles, carts, wagons, carriages, railways, railway plants, tramways, ships in port, all manner of craft in canals and rivers, balloons, airships, airplanes, depots of arms, whether military or sporting, and in general all kinds of war material.

338.Destruction of such property.-The destruction of the foregoing property aud all dalriage to the same is justifiable if it is required by the exigencies of the war.
339. Submarine cables.-Submarine cables connectiiig an occupied territory with a neutral territory shall not be seized or destroyed except in the case of absolute necessity. They must likewise be restored and compensation fixed when peace is made (H.R., art. 54).
REQUISITIONS
340.Requisitions.-Requisitions in kind and services shall not be demanded from municipalities or inhabitants except for the needs of the army of occupation. They shall be in propor- tion to the resources of the country, and of such a nature el not to involve the inhabitants in the obligation of taking part in military operations against their own country.
Such requisitions and services shall only be demanded on the authority of the commander in the locality occupied.
Contributions in kind shall as far as possible be paid for in cash; if not, a receipt shall be given and the payment of the amount due shall be made as soon as possible (H.R., art. 52).
341.What may be requisitioned.-Practically every-thing may be requisitioned under this article that is necessary for the maintenance of the army and not of direct military use, such as fuel, food, clothing, wine, tobacco, printing presses, type, leather, cloth, etc. Billeting of troops for quarters and subsist- ence is also authorized.
342. Method of requisitioning.-Requisitions must be made under the authority of the commander in the locality. No prescribed method is fixed, but if practicable requisitions should be accomplished through the local authorities by sys- tematic collection in bulk. They may be made direct by detachments if local authorities fail for any reason. Billeting may be resorted to if deemed advisable.
343.The amount taken.-The expression “needs of the army” was adopted rather than “necessities of the war” as more favorable to the inhabitants, but the commander is not thereby limited to the absolute needs of the troops actually present. The object was to avoid reducing the population to starvation.
344.Fixing prices.-The prices of articles requisitioned to be paid for can and should be fixed by the commander. The prices of commodities on sale may also be regulated and limits placed on the hours and places of trading. All authorities agree that it is good policy to pay cash if possible and to take up receipts as soon as possible.
345.Method of enforcing.-If cash is paid coercion will seldom be necessary. The coercive measures adopted will be limited to the amount and kind necessary to secure the articles requisitioned.
CONTRIBUTIONS
346.
Contributions.-If, in addition to the taxes men-tioned in the above article (art. 48, see par. 294), the occupant levies other money contributions in the occupied territory, this shall only be for the needs of the army or of the administration of the territory in question (H.R., art. 49).

347.
Methods of levying contributions.-No contribution shall be collected except under a written order, and on the responsibility of a commander in chief.

The collection of the said contribution shall only be effected , as far as possible in accordance with the rules of assessment and incidence of the taxes in force. For every contribution a receipt shall be given to the con- tributor (H.R.,art. 51).
COLLECTIVE PUNISHMENTS
348.
Penalty for individual acts of ‘inhabitants.–No general penalty, pecuniary o; otherwise, shall be inflicted upon the population on account of acts of individuals for which they cannot be regarded as jointly and severally responsible (H.R.,art. 50).

349.
Above article does not prevent reprisals.-Repris- als by the occupant for violations of the laws of war or breach of the occupant’s proclamations or regulations by enemy indi- viduals not belonging to the armed forces are not prohibited by the above article. (See par. 363.)

CHAPTER 11
PENALTIES FOR VIOLATIONS OF THE LAWS OF WAR
350.
Liability of offending belligerent.-A belligerent party which violates the provisions of the said regulations (H.R.) shall, if the case demands, be liable to pay compensa- tion. It shall be responsible for all acts committed by persons forming part of its armed forces (H. ZV, art. 3).

351.
Remedies of injured belligerent.-In the event of clearly established violation of the laws of war, the injured party may legally resort to such remedial action as may be deemed appropriate and necessary within the following classes, to wit:

a.
Publication of the facts, with a view to influencing public opinion against the offending belligerent;

b.
Protest and demand for punishment of individual offend- ers, sent to the offending belligerent through neutral diplonlatic channels, or by parlementaire direct to the commander of the offending forces;

c.
Punishment of captured individual offenders; and

d.
Reprisals.

352.
Offenses by armed forces.-The principal offenses of this class are: Making use of poisoned and otherwise forbid- den arms and ammunition; killing of the wounded; refusal of quarter; treacherous request for quarter; maltreatment of dead bodies on the battlefield; ill-treatment of prisoners of war; breach of parole by prisoners of war; firing on undefended localities; abuse of the flag of truce; firing on the flag of truce; misuse of the Red Cross flag and emblem; and other violations of the Geneva Convention; use of civilian clothing by troops to conceal their military character during battle; bombardment of hospitals and other privileged buildings; improper use of privi- leged buildings for military purposes; poisoning of wells and streams; pillage and purposeless destruction; ill-treatment of inhabitants in occupied territory. Individuals of the armed forces will not be punished for these offenses in case they are committed under the orders or sanction of their government or commanders. The commanders ordering the commission of such acts, or under whose authority they are committed by their troops, may be punished by the belligerent into whose hands they may fall.

353.
Hostilities committed by individuals not of armed forces.-Persons who take up arms and commit hostilities without having complied with the conditions prescribed by the laws of war for recognition as belligerents, are, when captured by the injured party, liable to punishment as war criminals.

354.
War rebels.-War rebels are persons within territory under hostile military occupation who rise in arms against the occupying forces, or against the authorities established by the same. If captured they may be punished with death, whether they rise singly or in small or large bands, whether or not they have been called upon to do so by their own expelled govern- ment, and, in event of conspiracy to rebel, whether or not such conspiracy shall lqrtve matured by overt act of hostility.

355.
War treason.-Examples of acts which, when com-mitted by inhabitants of territory under hostile military occu- pation, are punishable by the occupying belligerent as treasonable under laws of war, are as follows: Espionage; supplying informa- tion to the enemy; damage to railways, war material, telegraphs or other means of communication; aiding prisoners of war to escape; conspiracy against the occupying forces or members thereof; intentional misleading of troops while acting as guides; voluntary assistance to the enemy by giving money or acting as

guides; inducing soldiers of the occupying forces to act as spies for the enemy, to desert, or to surrender; bribing soldiers in the interest of the enemy; damage or alteration to military notices and signposts in the interest of the enemy; fouling sources of water supply and concealing animals, vehicles, supplies, and fuel in the interest of the enemy; knowingly aiding the advance or retirement of the enemy; and circulating propaganda in the interests of the enemy.
356.
Highway robbers and pirates of war.-Men and bod- ies of men, who, without being a part of the organized hostile army and without sharing continuously in the war, nevertheless, commit hostile acts, by fighting or by inroads for destruction or plunder or by raids of any kind, intermittently returning to their homes and vocations, assuming the semblance of peaceful pursuits, and divesting themselves of the character or appearance of soldiers, are not entitled to the privileges of prisoners of war, but are to be regarded and treated as highway robbers or what might be termed pirates of war.

357.
Armed prowlers.-Armed prowlers, by whatever names they may be called, or persons of the enemy territory who steal within the lines of the hostile army for the purpose of robbing, killing, or of destroying bridges, roads, or canals, or of robbing or destroying the mail, or of cutting the telegraph wires, are not entitled to be treated as prisoners of war.

368. Marauders.-Marauders are individuals, either civil- ians or soldiers who have left their corps, who follow armies on the march or appear on battlefields, either singly or in bands, in quest of booty, and who rob, maltreat, or murder stragglers or wounded, or pillage the dead. Their acts are considered atrocities, and the severest punishment is imposed after trial and conviction.
359.
Other crimes.-There are many other crimes or of-fenses incident to war, and which a belligerent may forbid and punish, such, for example, as evasion of censorship regulations; making false claims for damage; making false accusations against. the troops; furnishing liquor to soldiers; being in possession of animals, stores, or supplies pertaining to the army; and, gen- erally, neglect or disobedience of orders or regulations of a mili- tary government. All such offenses should be defined and the liability to punishment therefor made known to the inhabitants.

360.
Crimes punishable by penal codes.-Crimes punish-able by all penal codes, such as arson, murder, maiming, assaults.

84 BASIC FIELD MANUAL
highway robbery, theft, burglary, fraud, forgery, and rape, if committed by an American soldier in a hostile country against its inhabitants, are not only punishable as at home, but a more severe punishment, if legally imposable, shall be preferred in cases in which the death penalty is not inflicted.
361.
Right of trial.-No individual should be punished for an offense against the laws of war unless pursuant to a sentence imposed after trial and conviction by a military court or com- mission or some other tribunal of competent jurisdiction desig- nated by the belligerent.

362.
War crimes subject to death penalty.-All war crimes are subject to the death penalty, although a lesser penalty may be imposed. The punishment should be deterrent, and in imposing a sentence of imprisonment it is not necessary to take into consideration the end of the war which does not necessarily limit the imprisonment to be imposed.

363.
Reprisals.-a. DeJinition.-Reprisals are acts of retalia- tion resorted to by one belligerent against the enemy individuals or property, for illegal acts of warfare committed by the other belligerent, for the purpose of enforcing future compliance with the recognized rules of civilized warfare.

b.
When and how employed.-Reprisals are never adopted merely for revenge, but only as an unavoidable last resort to induce the enemy to desist from illegitimate practices. They should never be employed by individual soldiers except by direct orders of a commander, and the latter should give such orders only after careful inquiry into the alleged offense. The highest accessible military authority should be consulted unless immedi- ate action is demanded as a matter of military necessity, but in the latter event a subordinate commander may order appropriate reprisals upon his own initiative. Hasty or ill-considered action may subsequently be found to have been wholly unjustified, subject the responsible officer himself to punishment as for a violation of the laws of war, and seriously damage his cause. On the other hand, commanding officers must assume responsi- bility for retaliative measures when an unscrupulous enemy leaves no other recourse against the repetition of barbarous outrages.

c.
Who may commit acts justifying reprisals.-Illegal acts of warfare justifying reprisals may be committed by a government, by its military commanders, or by a community or individuals thereof, whom it is impossible to apprehend, try, and punish.

d.
Subjects of reprisals.-The offending forces or populations
generally may lawfully be subjected to appropriate reprisals.
Hostages taken and held for the declared purpose of insuring
against unlawful acts by the enemy forces or people may be

,     punished or put to death if the unlawful acts are nevertheless committed. Reprisals against prisoners of war are expressly forbidden by the Geneva convention of 1929. (See par. 74.)
e.
Form of reprisal.-The acts resorted to by way of reprisal
need not conform to those complained of by the injured party,
but should not be excessive or exceed the degree of violence
committed by the enemy. Villages or houses, etc., may be burned
for acts of hostility committed from them, where the guilty
individuals cannot be identified, tried, and punished. Collec-
tive punishments may be inflicted either in the form of fines or
otherwise.

f.
Procedure.–The rule requiring careful inquiry into the real
occurrence will always be followed unless the safety of the
troops requires immediate drastic action and the persons who
actually committed the offense cannot be ascertained.

364. Hostages.-Hostages have been taken in war for the
following purposes: To insure proper treatment of wounded and
sick when left behind in hostile localities; to protect the lives of
prisoners who have fallen into hands of irregular troops or whose
lives have been threatened; to protect lines of communication by
placing them on engines of trains in occupied territory; and to
insure compliance with requisitions, contributions, etc. When a
hostage is accepted he is treated as a prisoner of war.

CHAPTER 12     7-
NEUTRALITY
365. Definition.-Neutrality on the part of a state not a
party to the war consists in refraining from all participation in
the war, and in exercising absolute impartiality in preventing,
tolerating, and regulating certain acts on its own part by its
subjects and by the belligerents. It is the duty of belligerents to
respect the territory and rights of the neutral states.

366.Notification of state of war and effect upon neu-
trals.-The existence of a state of war must be notified to the
neutral power without delay, and shall not take effect with
regard to them until after the receipt of a notification, which

may, however, be given by telegraph. Neutral powers, never- theless, cannot rely on the absence of notification if it is clearly established that they were in fact aware of the existence of a state of war (H. III, art. 2).
367.Inviolability of territory.-The territory of neutral powers is inviolable (H. V, art. I).
368.Movements of troops and convoys of aupp1ies.- Belligerents are forbidden to move troops or convoys of either munitions of war or supplies across the territory of a neutral power (H. V, art. 2).
369.
Neutral can resist violations of neutrality by force.-The fact of a neutral power resisting, even by force, attempts to violate its neutrality cannot be regarded as a hostile act (H. V, art. 10).

370.
Patrolling the frontier.-It is quite usual, frequently necessary, and therefore the duty of a neutral power whose terri- tory is adjacent to a theater of war, to mobilize a portion of its

C forces to enforce its neutrality along the frontier; that is, to prevent troops of either belligerent from entering its territory, to intern such as may be permitted to enter, and generally to enforce its neutrality duties.
371.
Effect of failure to prevent violation of neutrality by belligerent troops.-Should the neutral state be unable, or fail for any reason, to prevent violations of its neutrality by the troops of one belligerent entering or passing through its territory, the other belligerent may be justified in attacking the enemy forces on this territory.

372.
Convoys of munitions and supplies.-A distinction must be drawn between the official acts of the belligerent state in convoying or shipping munitions and supplies through neutral territory as part of an expedition and the shipment of such sup

plies commercially.  The former is forbidden while the latter
is not.
RECRUITING

373.Forming corps of combatants and recruiting for- bidden.-Corps of combatants cannot be formed nor recruiting agencies opened on the territory of a neutral power to assist the belligerents (H. V, art. 4).
374. What is prohibited.-The establishment of recruiting agencies, the actual recruiting of men, the formation and organi- zation of hostile expeditions on neutral. territory, and the passage
across its frontiers of organized bodies of men intending to enlist are prohibited.
375.
Personnel of voluntary aid societies.-This prohibi-tion does not extend to the medical personnel and units of a recognized voluntary aid society duly authorized to join one of the belligerents.

376.
Responsibility as to individuals.-The responsibility of a neutral power is not engaged by the fact of individuals crossing the frontier separately to offer their services to one of the belligerents (H. V, art. 6).

377.
The test.-The prohibition in the two foregoing rules (see pars. 373 and 376) is directed against organized bodies which only require to be armed to become an immediate fighting force. Individuals crossing the frontier singly or in small bands that are unorganized create no obligation on the neutral state.

378.Nationals of belligerent not included.-Nationals of a belligerent state are permitted freely to leave neutral territory to join the armies of their country.
379. Ofacers on active list.-Officers of the land forces of l~eutralpowers on the active list should not be permitted to join a belligerent, and having joined such belligerent forces should be recalled.
SUPPLIES
380.
Neutral not bound to prevent shipment of sup-plies.-A neutral power is not called upon to prevent the export or transport, on behalf of one or other of the belligerents, of arms, munitions of war, or, in general, of anything which can be of use to an army or a fleet (H. V, art. 7).

381.
Obligations of neutral state as to supplies.-A ileutral state, as such, is prohibited from furllislling supplies or munitions of war and from making loans to a belligerent. It is also forbidden to permit the use of its territory for the fitting out of hostile expeditions.

382.
Commercial transactions not prohibited.-Com-inercial transactions with belligerents by neutral companies, citizens, or persons resident in neutral territory, are not pro- hibited; that is, a belligerent may purchase from neutral com- panies, citizens, or persons within neutral territory, supplies, munitions of war, or anything that may be of use to an army or fleet, which can be exported or transported without involvi~~g

383.
Means of communication.-A neutral power ie not called upon to forbid or restrict the use, on behalf of the bellig- erents, of telegraph or telephone cab!es or of wireless telegraph apparatus belonging to it or to companies or private individuals

the neutral state.
(H. V, art. 8).
384.
Neutral power not to assist one belligerent.-The liberty of a neutral state to transmit dispatches by means of its telegraph lines on land, its submarine cables, and wireless appa- ratus does not imply the power to use them or permit their use to lend a manifest assistance to one of the belligerents.

385.
Impartiality.-Ever y measure of restriction or prohibi-tion taken by a neutral power in regard to the matters referred to in articles 7 and 8 (see pars. 380, 383) must be impartially applied by it to both belligerents.

A neutral power must see to the same obligation being ob- served by companies or private individuals owning telegraph or telephone cables or wireless telegraph apparatus (H. V, art. 9).

386.
Use of neutral territory to establish wireless telegraphy.-Belligerents are likewise forbidden to:

(a)
Erect on the territory of a neutral power a wireless teleg- raphy station or other apparatus for the purpose of communicat- ing with belligerent forces on land or sea.

(b)
Use any installation of this kind established by them before the war on the territory of a neutral power for purely military purposes, and which has not been opened for the service of public messages (H. V, art. 3).

387. Neutral state must prohibit acts on its own terri- tory.-A neutral power must not allow any of the acts referred to in articles 2 to 4 (see pars. 368, 373, 386) to occur on its territory.
It is not called upon to punish acts in violation of its neutrality unless the said acts have been committed on its own territory
(H. V, art. 5).
BELLIGERENTS INTERNED IN NEUTRAL TERRITORY
388.Internment.-A neutral power which receives on its territory troops belonging to the belligerent armies shall intern them, as far as possible, at a distance from the theater of war.
It may keep them in camps and even confine them in for- tresses or in places set apart for this purpose.
It shall decide whether officers can be left at liberty on giving their parole not to leave the neutral territory without permission
(H. V, art. 11).
389.
Duty of neutral state.-A neutral is not bound to permit belligerent troops to enter its territory. On the other hand it may permit them to do so without violating its neutrality, but they must be interned or confined in places designated by the neutral. They will naturally be disarmed and placed under the necessary guard, thereby occupying in many respects the same status as prisoners of war.

390.
Neutral can impose terms.-If troops or soldiers of a belligerent are permitted to seek refuge in neutral territory, the neutral can impose the terms upon which they may do so. In case of large bodies of troops seeking refuge in neutral territory, these conditions will usually be stipulated in a convention drawn up by and between the duly authorized representative of the neutral power and the senior officer of the troops.

391.
Parole of 05Icers.-Beyond the right of deciding which, if any, of the officers are to be paroled, no conditions are specified and no penalties are prescribed for breach of parole given to a neutral state.

392.Disposition of arms, equipment, etc.-The muni-tions, stores, and effects which the interned troops bring with them should be restored to their government at the termination of the war.
393. Maintenance.-In the absence of a special convention to the contrary, the neutral power shall supply the interned with the food, clothing, and relief required by humanity.
At the conclusion of peace the expenses caused by the intern- ment shall be made good (H. V, art. 12).
394.Prisoners of war.-A neutral power which receives escaped prisoners of war shall leave them at liberty. If it allows them to remain in its territory it may assign them a place of residence.
The same rule applies to prisoners of war brought by troops taking refuge in the territory of a neutral power (H. V, art. 13).
395.Sick and wounded.-A neutral power may authorize the passage into its territory of the sick and wounded belonging to the belligerent armies, on condition that the trains bringing them shall carry neither personnel or war material. In such a case, the neutral power is bound to take whatever measures of safety and control are necessary for the purpose.
90 BASIC FIELD .MANUAL
The sick or wounded brought under these conditions into neutral territory by one of the belligerents, and belonging to the hostile party, must be guarded by the neutral power so as to insure their not taking part again in the military operations. The same duty shall devolve on the neutral state with regard to wounded or sick of the other army who may be committed to its care (H. V, art. 14).
Direct repatriation for reasons of health of prisoners of war, hospitalized in a neutral country, is provided for in the annex to the Geneva convention of July 27, 1929 (model agreement). (See pars. 142, 173.)
396.
Obligations of neutral state.-The neutral power is under no obligation to permit the passage of a convoy of evacua- tion of sick and wounded through its territory, but when per- mitted to pass, the neutral must exercise control; must see that neither personnel nor materiel other than that necessary for the care of the sick and wounded is carried, and generally must accord impartiality of treatment to the belligerents.

397.
Consent of other belligerent.-There is no indicated necessity for obtaining the consent of the other belligerent before granting authority for the passage of the convoy, but this action seems advisable, especially where the passage of a considerable body of sick and wounded is contemplated.

398.
Sick and wounded of belligerent convoying same.- The sick and wounded of the belligerent convoying them may be carried through to their own territory. If, however, they are left in the neutral’s territory they must be interned so as to insure their not taking part again in the war.

399.
Sick and wounded prisoners of war.-Sick and wounded prisoners of war brought into neutral territory as part ” of a convoy of evacuation granted right of passage through neutral territory cannot be transported to their own country nor liberated, as are prisoners of war escaping into or brought by troops seeking asylum in neutral territory, but must be detained by the neutral power, subject to the provisions contained in the a.nnex to the Geneva convention of July 27, 1929 (model agree- ment). (See par. 173.)

400.
Medical personnel.-The medical personnel belonging to belligerent forces, who have sought asylum and are interned under article I1 (see par. 388), can be released by the neutral and permitted to return to their own state or army. Medical personnel and matdriel necessary for the care of the sick and

wounded of a convoy of evacuation, permitted to pass through neutral territory under article 14 (see par. 393, may be per- mitted to accompany the convoy. The neiltral state map retail:
,     the necessary medical personnel and mathriel for the care of the sick and wounded left in its care, and, failing this, may furnish same and will have expense of same refunded by the belligerent concerned after the termination of the war.
401. Neutral persons.-The nationals of a state which is not taking part in the war are considered as neutrals (H. V, art. 16).
408. Neutral persons resident in occupied territory.- Neutral persons resident in occupied territory are not entitled to claim different treatment, in general, from that accorded the other inhabitants. They must refrain from all participation in the war, from all hostile acts, and observe st.rictly the rules of the occupant.
403.
Diplomatic agents in occupied territory.-Diplo- matic agents of neutral sovereigns and governments must be treated with all courtesy, and be permitted such freedom of action as is possible to allow, with due regard to the necessities of the war.

404.
Punishments.-All subjects of neutral powers whether resident or temporarily visiting in occupied territory may be p~~nished

for offenses committed by them to the same extent and in the same manner as enemy subjects.
405. Forfeiting rights by neutrals.-A neutral cannot avail himself of his neutrality:
(a)
If he commits hostile acts against a belligerent.

(b)
If he commits acts in favor of a belligerent, particularly if he voluntarily enlists in the ranks of the armed force of one of the parties.

In such a case, the neutral shall not be more severely treated by the belligerent as against whom he has abandoned his neu- trality than a national of the other belligerent state could be for the same act (H. V, art. 17).
406. Acts not favorable to one belligerent.-The follow-ing acts shall not be considered as committed in favor of one belligerent in the sense of article 17 b (see par. 405):
(a) Supplies furnished or loans made to one of the belligerents, provided that the person who furnishes the supplies or who makes the loans lives neither in the territory of the other party
92 BASIC FIELD MANUAL
nor in the territory occupied by him, and that the supplies do not come from these territories.
(b) Services rendered in matters of police or civil adminis- tration (H. V, art. 18).
RAILWAY MATERIAL
407. Railway material.-Railway material coming from the territory of neutral powers, whether it be the property of the said powers or of companies or private persons, and recognizable as such, shall not be requisitioned or utilized by a belligerent except where and to the extent that it is absolutely necessary. It shall be sent back as soon as possible to the country of origin.
A neutral power may likewise, in case of necessity, retain and utilize to an equal extent material coming from the territory of the belligerent power.
Compensation shall be paid by one party or the other in pro- portion to the material used, and to the period of usage (H. V, art. 19).
NEUTRALITY STATUTES OF THE UNITED STATE6
408. Certain offenses against neutrality defined by statute.-Supplemel~ti~~gthe foregoing rules of interrlatiollal lam, there arc certain statutes of the United States that define offenses against neutrality and prescribe penalties therefor, some of ~hich are cffective only during a war in which the United States is neutral, and others effective at all times (United States Code, title 18, ch. 2). The enforcement of these statutes de- volves primarily upon the civil authorities. Troops employed to aid the civil authorities in such enforcement will be governed by AR 500-50, pai’c thee of this volume (Military Aid to Civil Authorities), and the orders of competent authority.
INDEX
Aid societies (see Relief societies) . Pars-
Aircraft. use of: graphs ‘Pages
Authorized generally in hostilities ……………………….. 27, 49 7.12
For transportation of sick and wounded …………………… 193 51
To bombard undefended places, forbidden… ……………… 4647 11

American National Red Cross …………………….. 1………. 172, 185 40, 48
See also Relief societies .
Appropriation of supplies in enemy country ……………………. 24 d 7
See also Occupied territory; property, requisitions .

Armed forces:
Consist of combatants and noncombatants ……………….. 9 c 4
Hostilities restricted to …………………………………. 19 6
Qualifications for recognition as lawful. …………………… 9 d

Armed prowlers …………………………………………….. 357 €3

Arnlistice:
Activities authorized’and prohibited during …………… 257, 266 e 65, 67
Commencement and termination of …………………….255-256 . 65
Defined……………-……………………………….. . 252 65
Denunciation of ……………………………………… 267-268 . 67-68
Etiect of …………………………………………….. 263-254 65
Form of; should be written ……………………………… 258 66
General; defined; how concluded. ……………………… 259-260 60
Intercourse in theater of war during ……………………. 266265 66
Local; dehed; how concluded …………………………. 259-261 66

For search of battlefield …………………………… 177 45
Matters that should be covered by …………………….. 162, 266 36, 37
Notification of …………………………………………. 263 66
Repatriation of prisoners, must provide for ……………….. 162 36
Suspension of arms …………………………………….. 282 6fi
Vigilance not relaxed during …………………………….. 269 68
Violations by enemy soldiers ……………………………. 271 68
Violations by nonmilitary persons ……………………….. 270 68

Arms:
Causing u~ecessary injury forbidden. …………………… 34 … 9
Found with sanitary formalions …………………………. 182 46
Of interned belligerents, disposition of ……………………. 392 89
Suspension of ………………………………………….. 282 86

Ariny of occupation (see Occrlpied territory) .
Art, buildings devoted to, protected ……………………. 59-61,32 3.324 13.14, 77
Assassination forbidden- …………………………………….. 31 9
Assaults, bombardments, and sieges …………………………… 46-61 11-14
Asylum (see Neutrality; belligerent troops) .
Attachb, neutral, accompanying captured troops ……………….. 78 18
Automatic submarine mines (see Mines) .

93

Para-
graphs Pages
Balloons. bombardment of undefended places from ………………. 4647 11
Bnsic rules and principles (ch . 1) ……………………………… 1-7 1-3
Chivalry, principle of …………………………………… 4 c 2
Humanity, principle of …………………………………. 4 6 2
Military government and martial luw distinguished ……….. 6 2
Military jurisdiction defined ……………………………… 7 3
Military necessity, principle of ………………………….. 4 a 1
Rules or laws of war defined …………………………….. 1-3 1
Force of …………………………………………. 5 2
Unwritten, defined ……………………………….. 3 1
Written, defined ………………………………….. 2 1

Belligerent populations, how generally divided …………………. 8 4

Belligerent powers:
Armed forces of, who may comprise- …………………….. 9 4
Duties of (see particulur subtopics) .
Intercourse between (see Intercourse between belligerents) .
Must not compel enemy subjects to take part.. …………… 36 9
Must notify neutral powers of state of war ………………… 18-18 543
Responsible for acts of armed forces ………………………. 360 81

Belligerent troops:
Lfoslilities restricted to …………………………………. 19 6
Internment of by neutral powers ………………………. 388-400 88-90
Qualifications for recognition as… ……………………….. 9 4
Status of captives as, left to courts ……………………….. 13 5

Besieged place (see Sieges).
Billeting authorized in occupied territory ……………… 324,330,34 1.342 77,78, 80
Bombardments……………………………………………… 46-81 11-14

Certain buildings to be spared from. …………………….. 5W1 13-14
Of undefended places forbidden ………………………….. 46-47 11
Warning required; American rule ………………………… 50-51 12

Booty and captures belong to Government …………………….. 332 78
Buildings and monuments, certain, to be spared from bombard-

ment ………………………………………… 5%61,32 3-324 13-14, 77
Bullets, use of certain kinds forbidden …………………………. 34 9
Bureaus of iniormation for prisoners ……………………… 164,166- 167 36-38
Burial ……………………………………………………. 177-178 45
Cables, submarine …………………………………………… 339 79
Camp followers, captured, treated as prisoners of war ……………. 77 17
Camps and depots, destruction of authorized ……………………. 35 9
Capitulations……………………………………………… 245-271 63-68
Defined………………………………………………. 245 63
Denunciation of ……………………………………….. 251 . G.5
Destruction of property after signing …………………….. 250 65
Forms; contents in general ………………………………. 248 63
Legal power of colnmanders to make- ……………………. 247 63
Military honor involved in ……………………………… 246 63
Should be reduced to writing ……………………………. 248 63
Subjects usually covered by …………………………….. 249 64

Captives:
Status determined by courts …………………………….. 13 5
Summary execution of, forbidden ………………………… 13, 32 49

Para-
Captures: graphs Pages
And booty belong to Government ……………………….. 332 78
What authorized ………………………………………. 24 6 7
Cartels, defined; force of ……………………………………… 244 62
Censorship:
Evasion of, punishable as war crime ……………………… 359 83
Of mail of prisoners of war ………………………………. 114 26
Of press and mail in occupied territory …………………… 292 72
Cessation of arms (truce) (see Armistice) .
Chaphins, captured, treatment of ……………………….. 183,18 7.188 47, 4849
Charity, buildings devoted to, protected …………………… 59,32 3.324 13, 77
Chivalry, principle of, defined ………………………………… 4 c 2
Churches, protection of ………………………………… 5%61,32 3.324 13.14, 77
Civilians:
Between the lines, treatment of ………………………….. 54 13
Following army, status when captured …………………… 77 17
Hostilities must not be directed against …………………… 19 6
Collective punishments:
Of inhabitants of occupied territory …………………….. 348-349 R1
Of prisoners of war …………………………………….. 85 20
Combatants and noncombatants, treated alike in case of capture ….. 9 c 4
Commanders liable for illegal acts ordered ……………………… 352 62
Commencement of hostilities (see Hostilities) .
Communications:
Between:

Belligerents
………………………………?..

. 216-235 57-60

Beseiged and outside ……………………………… 58 13
Occupied territory and outside ……………. 215217,23 6.241 57, 61-62
Means of, in neutral countries …………………………. 383-387 88

Conduct of hostilities (see Hostilities) .
Confiscation of enemy property forbidden ……………………… 331 i8

Contributions in occupied territory ………………… 295,340.34 6.347 73.79.80-81

Convoys:
Of evacuation of sick and wounded …………………….. 192-193 5C-51
Of munitions through neutral territory …………………. 368, 372 86
Of sick and wounded through neutral territory ………….. 395-399 8%90

Courts-martial……………………………………………… 7 3

Crimes against the laws of war (see Violations of the lams of war) .
Cruelty:
Defined; military necessity does not permit ……………….. 25 7
Toward prisoners of war, forbidden ………………………. 120 25

Customs of war (see Laws 01 war) .
Dead:
Burial, graves service …………………………………. 163, 178 36, 45
Death certificate, belligerents to forward ………………….. 178 45
Examination of bodies required ………………………….. 178 45
Graves, lists to be exchanged ……………………………. 178 45
Identillcation tags, disposition of ………………………… 178 45
Information to be exchanged …………………………….. 178 45
Personal effects of, disposition oL ………………………… 178 45
Robbery and ill.treatment, protected from ………………… 177 45
Search of battlefield; local armistice ………………………. 177 46

Para-graphs Pages Deception. justified by military necessity ………………………. 24 e See also Ruses of war .
Declaration of war:
May be sudden and unexpected …………………………. 15
Must be notified to neutrals…………………………….. 16
Must precede hostilities ………………………………… 14.17

Defended place, defined ……………………………………… 48

DeBnitions:
Armed prowlers ……………………………………….. 357
Armistice……………………………………………… 252

General……………………………………….. 259-260
Local………………………………………….. 269-263
Capitulation …………………………………………. 245
Cartel………………………………………………… 244
Chivalry, principle of ………………………………… 4 c
Cruelty ……………………………………………… 26
Defended place ………………………………………… 48
Highway robbers ………………………………………. 356
Humanity. principle of …………………………………. 4 6
Laws of war …………………………………………… 1-3
In general ……………………………………….. 1
Unwritten ……………………………………….. 3
Written …………………………………………. 2
License to trade ……………………………………….. 241
Marauders ……………………………………………. 358
Martial law …………………………………………… 8
Military govetnment …………………………………… 6
Military iurisdiction ……………………………………. 7
Military necessity, principle of ………………………….. 4a
DIilitary occupation ……………….-………………….. 372
Neutral persons- ………………………………………. 401
Neutrality…………………………………………….. 365
Parlementaires………………………………………. 221-222
Pots military …………………………………….. 236
Pirates of war …………………………………………. 356
Prisoners of war ……………………………………….. 71
Reprisals……………………………………………… 363
Rules of war…………………………………………… 1-3
In general: ………………………………………. 1
Unwritten……………………………………….. 3
Written …………………………………………. 2

Safe-conduct for goods ………………………………….. 238
Safe-conduct for persons ………………………………… 237
fad …………………………………………….. 242
Spies……………………………………………….. 203, 205
Suspension of r ……………………………………. 262
Treason………………………………………………. 206
War rebels ……………………………………………. 354
War traitors …………………………………………. 206-207

Para-
Deserters. captured: graphs
Cmnot claim privileges of levee en masse …………………. 11
Status of, left to courts …………………………………. 13
Destruction:
Enemy property in occupied territory . (See Occupied terri-

tory; property, enemy.)
Of camps and depots authorized …………………………. 35
Of enemy life or limb authorized …………………………. 24a
Of enemy property authorized …………………………… 24c
Of institutions, monuments, etc., forbidden ……………….. 323

Detention of enemy nationals …………………………………. 20

Devastation:
In occupied territory restricted ………………………….. 321)
Wanton, prohibited ……………………………………. 25

Diplomatic agents:
Enemy, may be made prisoners …………………………. 77 f
Neutral, accompanying army ……………………………. 78
Neutral,. in besieged place- ……………………………… 53.58

Neutral, in occupied territory …………………………… 403
Distinctive emblem of Geneva convention ……………………. 19P199
Emblem, distinctive, of Geneva convention …………………..194-199
Enemy:

.bed forces, destruction and capture authorizeti …………. 24
Flags, misuse of forbidden ………………………………. 41, 43
Insignia, misuse of forbidden ……………………………. 41, 44
Nationals may be interned ………………………………. 20
Nationals must not be compelled to lake part ……………… 36
OBcials may be made prisoners of war ………………… ii e, iif
Population, how generally divided ………………………. 8
Property (see Occupied territory; property, enemy) .
Soldiers, may be induced to desert, etc.. …………………. 38
Territory (see Occupied territory) .
Uniform, nlisuse of forbidden ……………………………. 41, 44

Escapes of prisoners of war; punishments …………………….. 124-126

Espionage and treason (ch . 6)……………………………….. W3-215
Acoe;sories lo, equally punishnble ……………………….. 215
Spies:

Belligerents may lawfully employ …………………..38, 204
Defined……………………………………….. 203, 205
Excluded in exchange of prisoners ………………….. 181
Immune after rejoining own army ……._’……………213
Punishment of L……………………………. 204,210, 212

War treason and traitors:
Defined; rules relating to ………………………… 2WUM
Examples of ……………………………………… 354
Having rejoined no defense ………………………… 214
Punishment……………………………………… 211

Executions, summary, prohibited …………………………….. 13, 32
Expulsion of enemy nationals from localities ……………………. 21

Pages
4

5

98 INDEX
Para-Flags: ‘ graph? Pages
Enemy. misuse of forbidden …………………………….. 41.43 10, 11
Geneva Convention (Red Cross), misuse of ……………… 41.45 10, 11
Use of ……………………………………… 195,19 7.198 51, 52
National, misuse of forbidden ……………………………. 41, 43 10, 11
Shown with Geneva flag, when …………………… 197-198 59
Sanitary service, distinctive emblem ……………………. 195-198 51-52
r11ruce, abuse of, forbidden ………………………………. 41-42 10
What constitutes …………………………………. 235 60
White, significance and treatment of ……………………. 222-232 58-59
Qain, private, by officers and soldiers in occupied territory ………. 333 79
Gases and chemicals, use of authnrizcd ………………………… 29 8
Geneva Convention of 1929 relative to prisoners of war . (See Prisoners
of war.)
Geneva Convention of 1929 relative to the sick and wounded . (See
Sick and wounded.)
Geneva Cross (see Red Cross) .
Good faith must be observed ………………………………… 38, 218 1457
Government, military, defined ……………………………….. 6 2
Rules relating to (see Occupied ter~itory) .
Qraves service (see Dead) .
Grenades, use of authorized …………………………………… 34 9
Guides:
Impressment from enemy nationals forbidden- ……….. 36,30 8310 19, 75
War treason by voluntary service as- ………………….. 209, 355 56, 82
Highway robbery, deflned …………………………………… 356 83
Hospitals, spared in sieges and bombardments ………………….. 59-81 13-14
Hostages:
Amtaken for what purposes …………………………….. 364 85
Are treated as prisoners of war ………………………. 77 h, 364 17.85
Eostilities (ch . 3) ……………………………………………. 14-70 5-15
Acts expressly prohibited:
Arms, etc., causing unnecessary injury ……………… 34 9
Assassination and outlawry ………………………… 31 9
Attsckinp or ill-treating peaceful population …………. 19 6
Bad .aith………………………………….. 25,3840, 218 7,10, 57
Bombardment-
Of certain structures, etc ……………… 59-61,32 3.324 13-14, 77
Of undefended places ………………………… 4647 11
Collective punishments, certain …………………… 85, 348 20, 81
Commencing hostilities without declaration of war …… 14, 17 5
Compelling enemy subject totake part ……… 36,304,30 7.309 9,74, 75
Compelling prisoners of war:
To i t i t……………………………… 135 32
To do certain work ………………………… 103, 106 24
To give information …………………………. 79 18
Confinement of prisoners of war, with certain exceptions .8,123 19, 29
Confiscation of enemy private property ……………. 318, 331 76, 78
Contamination of water …………………………… 28 8
Cruelty………………………………………… 25, 120 7, 28

INDEX

Hostilities-Continued
Acts expressly prohibited.Continued . Para-
Destruction of: graphs
Enemy property. unnecessary ………………… 318
Own property after capitulation ………………. 250
Devastation, wanton ……………………………… 25
Discharging explosives from balloons ……………….. 27
Discrimination against prisoners of war ……………… 122
Distinctive badges and emblems, misuse of ………….. 4145
Exposing prisoners of war to combat or insanitary condi-
tions………………………………………….. 83
Firing on parlementaires ………………………….. 226
Flags, misuse of …………………………………..4144
Impressment of guides ………………………… 36, 308310

Insignia and uniforms, misuse oL ……………… 11.13,41,44

Killing or wounding captives ………………………. 32
Mines, use of certain kinds or without certain precautions- 64, 66

Perfldy……………………………………. 25,39.40, 268

Pillage……………………………………… 62,33 4.335
Poison or poisoned weapons ……………………….. 28
Prisoners of war, ill-treatment of (see Prisoners of war) .
Quarter, refusal of ………………………………… 33
Reprisals against prisoners of war ………………… 74, 363 d
Revenge………………………………………. 25, 363 b
Sick and wounded, ill-treatment of (see Sick and wounded) .
Spreading contagious diseases ………………………. 28
Summary executions ………………………….. 13,32, 140
Torpedoes, use of certain kinds …….:……………… 70
Torture…………………………………………. 25
Treachery………………………………….. 3iF31.3940
Violation of safeguard …………………………… 242-243

Bombardments, assnults, and sieges ……………………… 48-82
By persons not of armed forces ………………………….. 353
Commencement of …………………………………….. 14-21

Belligerenls-
Agree on grades of sanitary personnel ……….. … 188
Agree on money retained by prisoners …………. 98
Appoint medial commissions ………………… 143
Establish information bureaus ………………… 16.1
Exchange names of aid societies ……………….. 184
Exchange of titles and ranks ………………….. 95
Notify neutrals ……………………………… 16, 17
Organize graves service ………………………. 178
Publish measures for correspondeuce ………….. 109

Declaration of war must precede ……………………. 1.1

Enemy nationals may be-
Expelled……………………………………. 21
Interned ……………………………………. 20

Notification of to neutrals-importance ……………… 18
Notificntion of to neutrals required …………………. 10-17
Surprise, sudden, still possible ………………………

15

Pages
76
65
7
7
29
10-11

1.00     INDEX
Para-
Hostilities.Continued . graphs Pages
Oonduct of ……………………………………………. n-70 6-15
Acts of perfidy prohibited ………………………… 26, 39 7. 10

‘     Aerial torpedoes authorized..+ ……………. -1 ……… 34 9
Against civil population prohibited …………………. 19 6
Aircraft, use of authorized …………………………. 27 7
Appropriation of supplies permittad ………………… % d 7
Ams, etc., causing unnecessary injury ………………. 34 9
Assassination and outlawry forbidden ………………. 31 9
Assaults…………………………………………. 46-82 11-14
Attack restricted to defended places. ……………….. 46-48 11-12

Basic principles ………………………………….. 4 1
Battlefield, search of required ………………………. 177 45
Bombardments, assaults, and sieges.. ………………. 46-62 11-14
Br~llets,use of certain kinds forbidden ………………. 34 9
Burning of camps and depots authorized …………….. 35 9
Captures permitted ……………………………….. 24 b 7
Confiscation of private property forbidden …………… 331 78
Contamination of water sources prohibited ………….. 28 8
Cruelty prohibited- ………………………………. 25 7
Dead (see Dead).
Deception permitted… …………………………. 24 e, 38
Defended place defined ……………………………. 48
Destruction of life or limb permitted ………………… 24 a
Destruction of property permitted ………………….. 24 c
Discharging explosives from balloons prohibited ……… 27
Drying or diverting water sources authorized- ……….. 28
Enemy nationals not to be compelled to take part- ….. 36.304
Enemy soldiers may be induced to desert, etc ……….. 38
Enemy territory (see Occupied territory) .
Executions, summary, forbidden …………………… 13, 32
Flags, misuse of forbidden …………………………. 41-43
Oases and chemicals, use of authorized ………………. 29
Good faith must be observed …………………… 38,39, 218
Hand grenades authorized …………………………. 34
Information, measures to obtain authorized ………….. 37
Injuring enemy, means limited …………………….. 26
Lnsignia, enemy, misuse of forbidden ………………… 41, 44
Rilling or wounding captives forbidden ……………… 32
Lanoes with barbs forbidden ……………………….. 34
Miliky necessity does not justify what …………….. z5
Military neoessity justifies what generally. ………i …. 23
Military necessity justifies what specifically.. ……….. 24
Military necessity, principle of …………………… 4,22.25
Mimes, automatic submarihe ……………….. -1…… 63-70
Mines, explosive, authorized ……………………….. 34
Object of war …………………………………….. 22
Obstruction of ways and channels permitted …………. 24 c
Offenders against the laws of war, treatment of (see Viola-

tions of the laws of war) .
Pillage of towns and places forbidden ……………….. 62

. .
INDEX
Hostilities.Continued . Para-
Conduct of–Continued . graphs Pages
Poison, use of prohibited ………………………….. 25, 28 7. 8
Prisoners of war (see Prisoners of war) .
Projectiles, artillery, may contain explosives …………. 34
Projectiles causing unnecessary injury forbidden ……… 34
Property, enemy (see Occupied territory) .
Quarter, refusal of forbidden ……………………….. 33
Red Cross, misuse of insignia ……………….. dl, 45,197, 199
Ruses of war-

Authorized…………………………………. 37
Legilimale …………………………………. 39, 40
Limited ……………………………………. 39

Sick and wounded (see Sick and wounded) .
Spies, use and punishment of (see Espionage and treason) .
Spreading contagious diseases prohibited ……………. 28
Strategems authorized …………………………….. 37-45
Torpedoes, use of certain kinds forbidden ……………. 70
Train wrecking authorized …………………………. 35
Treachery forbidden ………………………………. 30, 39
Undefended places, attack on forbidden ……………… 46-47
Uniform, enemy, misuse of forbidden ……………….. 41, 44
Wanton devastation prohibited …………………… 25
Withholding of sustenance permitted ……………. 24 c

Must not be direcled against civilians ……………………. 19
Occupalion and government (see Occupied terrilory) .

Restricted to the armed forces …………………………… 19
Kumanity, principle of, defined ………………………………. 4 6
Information, memures to obtain authorized …………………….. 37
Inhabitants of occupied territory (see Occupied territory) .
lnjury to surrtrndered enemy forbiddeu ………………………… 32
Insi~nia, enemy, ulisuse of forbidden. ………………………….. 41
Institutions, religious, etc., damage to forbidden ………………… 323
Intercourse hetween belligerents (ch . 7) ………………………. 216-235

Allowed only upon approval of highest authority ……….. … 217
Complete cessation the gonera! rule ………………………. 216
Good faith essenlial on both sides ………………………… 218
Neutral diplomats may receive safe.conducts ……………… 219
Parlementaires (see Parlementeires).
Rules for compronlised under wlial headings ………………. 220
White Rag, rules relating to ……………………………. 222-228

Internment:
Of belligerent t.roops by neutral …………………………. 388400
Of enemy nationals by belligerent ……………………….. 20

Jurlsdiction, military, defiued ………………………………… 7

Killing or wounding:
dccidentnl, of parlementaires, no ground for con~plainl ……… 236
Of armed enemies in combat authorized ………………….. 24 a
Of enemies after surrender forbidden ………………… 32

Lances, with barbs, forbidden ………………………………… 34
Lawful belligerents, who are …………………………………… 9
Laws, neutrality, of the United States ……………………….. 408

102 INDEX
Para-
Laws of war: graphs Pages
Basic rules and principles ……………………………….. 1-7 1-3
Definitions ……………………………………………. 1-3 1

Force of ………………………………………………. 5 2
Unwritten, defined …………………………………….. 3 1
Violations and penalties (see Violations of the laws of war) .

Written, defined ……………………………………….. 2 1

Levee en masse:
Defined; treated as belligerents ………………………….. 9 b 4
Deserters, etc., cilnnol claim privileges ……………………. 11 4
Members captured are-

Not treated as brigands……………………………. 10 4

Prisoners of war ………………………………….. 77 d 17

Rebellion in occupied territory does not constitute …………. 12 5
Licenses to trade, defined …………………………………….. 241 62
Loans, by neutral powers to belligerents, forbidden ……………… 381 87
Marauders:

Defined………………………………………………. 358 83

Robbing wounded or dead, punishment of ………………… 177 b 45
Martial law, defined …………………………………………. 6 2
Means of injuring enemy (see Hostilities) .
Medical personnel (see Sick and wounded; sanitary for~nations and

personnel).
Military wmmissions… …………………………………….. 7 3
Military government, defined. ……………………………….. 6 6

Rules relating to (see Occupied territory) .
Military jurisdiction, defined ………………………………….. 7 3

Military necessity:
As affecting treatment of enemy property ……………….. 318-346 76-80
Basis of military government ……………………………. 282 71
Defined………………………………………………. 4 a 1
Does not permit what ………………………………….. 25 7
Permits what measures generally ………………………… 23 7
Permits what measures specifically ………………………. 24 i

Military occupation (see Occupied territory) .
Military passports (see Passports, military) .
Militia may be part of armed forces ……………………………. 9 a 4

Mines:
Automatic submarine:
Certain types forbidden …………………………… 66 14
Kinds of …………………………………………. 63 14
Must be removed at end of war …………………….. 69 15
Neutral powers may lay …………………………… 68 15
Precautions required in use of ……………………… 67 15
Unanchored forbidden …………………………….. 64 14
Use against commercial shipping forbidden ………….. 65 14

I Explosive, use of authorized …………………………….. 34 9
Model agreement, for treatment of prisoners ……………………. 173 40

Monuments, damage to forbidden ……………………… 54-61,323-324 13.14, 77
Municipalities, in occupied territory …………………………. 323-324

INDEX 103
Para-
graphs Pages
Munitions:
Convoys of. not to cross neutral territory …………………368, 387 86, 88
May be purchased in neutral territory ………………….. 382 87
Seizure of authorized in occupied territory ………………. 33€-338 79
National Red Cross, American …………………………… 172, 185 40, 48
See also Relief societies .
Necessity, military (see Military necessity) .
Neutral persons . (See Neutrality.)
Neutral powers . (See Neutrality.)
Neutrality (ch . 12):
Belligerent troops:
May be denied asylum ……………………………. 389 89
May be granted asylum on conditions ………………. 390 89
Officers, interned, may be paroled ………………….. 391 89
Reception and treatment of ………………………. 388400 88-91
Commercial shipments do not violate ……………….. 372,380, 382 86.87
Defined ………………………………………………. 365 85
Failure of neutrals to preserve, effect of …………………… 371 86
Internment of belligerent troops ……………………….. 38W 88-91
Laws of the United States ………………………………. 408 92
Means of communication:
Belligerent, not to be erected on neutral territory ……… 386 88
Neutral, belligerents may use ……………………..383-385 88
Neutral persons:
Defined …………………………………………. 401 91
Forfeit rights when ……………………………… 405-406 91
In occupied territory, rights of ……………………. 402406 91
Neutral powers:
Complaints of belligerents sent through ……………… 351 81
Diplomatic agents of:
In besieged place ……………………………. 53 12
hoccupied territory ………………………… 403 91
Duties concerning prisoners of war ………………….. 394 89
Duties toward belligerents ……………………….. 365-408 85-92
Duties toward sick and wounded …………………. 395-399 8%90
Failure to preserve, effect of ……………………….. 371 86
Internment of belligerent forces ……………….. 370,388 400 86,s 8.91
May lay autom~tic submarine mines ………………… 68 15
May use force to preserve neutrality ………………… 369 86
Mobilization to enforce neutrality ………………….. 370 86
Must not allow certain acts ………………………… 3117 88
Must not themselves supply belligerents ……………. 381 87
Not bound to grant nsylum ………………………… 389 89
Not bound to prevent commercial shipments ………… 380 87
Notiflcation of state of war …………………….. 16.18, 366 5-13~85
O5cers of, joining belligerents ……………………… 379 87
To intern belligerent troops when ………………….. 388 88
Neutral territory:
Aid societies may be formed within …………………. 376 87
Convoys of evncuat.ion, rules for ………………….. 396400 89-91
Convoys of munitions forbidden ……………………. 388 86
Hostile expeditions from forbidden …………………. 374 86

INDEX
Neutrality-Continued Para-
Neutral territory.Continued . graph~ Pages
Individuals may leave to join belligerents . ……….. $76-377 87
Inviolable ……………………………………….. 367 80
Movements of troops and supplies across forbidden.—., 388 86
Nationals of belligerents may leave …………………. 378 87
Recruiting within forbidden ……………………… 373-379 88-87
Use for radio stations, otc., forbidden ……………….. 386 88
Prisoners of war, escaped, treatment of …………………… 394 89
Railway material, rules concerning ………………………. 407 92
Statutory offenses against ………………………………. 408 (n
Supplies may be sold to belligerents. …………………….. 380 87
Violations may be resisted by force………………………. 369 88
Newspaper reporters, captured, status of.. …………………….. 77 b 17
Newspapers, in occupied territory …………………………….. 282 72
Noncombatants, part of armed forces. …………………….. 9 c 1
Occupation and government . (See Occupied territory.)
Occupied territory (ch . 10) …………………………………. 272349 6%81
Administration of . (See Qovernmeut of.)
Billeting within authorized ……………………………… 342 80
Censorship of press and mail ……………………………. 292 72
Commercial intercourse within ………………………….. 291 72
Contributions:
Can be levied by occupant- ……………………….. 285 73
In kind, payment for ……………………………… 340 79
Limited to needs oI.4rmy, etc ……………………… 346 80
Methods of levy and collection …………………….. 347 81
Courts, local, jurisdiction of ……………………….. 286 71
Crimes by American soldiers in ………………………….. 360 83
Crimes of inhabitants; punishments . (See Violations of the
laws of war.)
Devastation, rules relating to ………………………….. 319, 329 76, 78
Diplomatic agents residing in ……………………………. 403 91
Foreign resident in, may commit treason …………………. a06 55
Government of:
Functions of …………………………………….. 284 71
Hostile, ceases; exceptions ……………………….. 282-284 71
Law and order, duty to restore …………………….. 283 71
Military, defined …………………………………. 6 2
Nature of ………………………………………… 285 71
Necessity for …………………………………… 282-283 71
Obligated to defray expenses ……………………… 294, 287 73
Guides, impressment of, forbidden ……………………… 309-310 75
Iuhabitants:
Acts of constituting war treason ………………. 206.209, 355 5b56,s.J
Collective punishments restricted. …………………. 348 81
Commercial intercourse regulated ………………….. 291 72
Communicating with enemy.. …………………… 206-208 5556
Duties toward occupant …………………………… 303 74
Forts, etc., forcing to construct forbidden ……………. 307 75
Guides, forcing to serve as, forbidden……………….. 310 75
Information, forcing to give forbidden …………….. 308-309 75

Occupied territory–Continued . . : , . pap-~
,Inha.bitantsContinued. . graphs Pages
Labor of. may be requisitioned …………………… 304-307 74-75
Lives, honor, religion, rights, respected ……………..30 1-30:! 73
Neutral, rights and liabilities oL ………………….. 402906 91
Oath of allegiance forbidden ……………………….. 300 73
Obedience may be enforced ………………………. 299.303 73, 74
Offenses of; punishments . (See Violations of the laws
of war.)
Operations against own count.ry ……………. 36,304,30 7-310 9,74, 75
Reprisals against, authorized ………………………. 345 81
Requisitions for services of ……………………….. 304-310 74-75
Rights and rights of action preserved ……………….. 290 72
Rising in arms as war rebels ……………………….. 354 82
Services that may be demanded ………………….. 304-310 7575
Uprisings not levee en mmse ………………………. 12 5
Intercourse during armistice …………………………… 264-266 66
Institutions, religious, etc., damage to forbidden …………… 323 77
Labor of inhabitants may be requisitioned ………………. 304-307 74-75
Laws:
Existing, may be continued or suspended ………….. 286-288 71-72
In force, to be respected …………………………… 283 71
New, may be promulgated ………………………… 289 72
Military government of. (See Oovernment of, )
Neutrals resident in, rights and duties of- ………………… N2-406 91
Newspapers, occupant cont.101~. …………………………. 292 72
Occupation:
Beginning of ……………………………………… 280 70
Cessation of ……………………………………… 281 70
Consent of inhabit. ants unnecessary …………………. 278 70
Defined; extent of ………………………………… 272 69
Existence a matter of fact- …………………………. 273 60
Invasion distinguished froui ………………………. 275 69
Invested fort immaterial …………………………… 278 70

Must be actually effective
………………………?…

277 70

Procation of ………………………………… 0 70

Sovereignty not tra~isferred by …………………….. 274 69

Subjugation or conquest distinguished ………………. 276 89

Officials:
Municipal, etc., should remain …………………… 312-313 75
Oath, may be required to give ……………………… 311 75
Owe strict obedience ……………………………… 311 75
Punishment of …………………………………… 317 76
Removal authorized ………………………………. 316 76
Resignation permitted …………………………….. 315 76
Retention in ow ………………………………. 32-33 75
Salaries of ……………………………………….. 314 76

Plllage forbidden ……………………………………. 334-336 79

Population. (See Inhabitants.)
Postal service …………………………………………… 282 72

Private gain by offlcers and soldiers forbidden …………….. 333 79

. .
106 INDEX
Occupled territory–Continued . Para-
Property. enemy: graphs
Cannot be confiscated. ……..-I ……………… 331
Captured, belongs to government …………………….. 332
Destruction, necessary, authorized ………………… 318-319
Destruction, unnecessary, forbidden ………………… 318
Devastation, rules relating to ………………………. 329
Municipal, religious, charitable, etc ……………….. 323-324
Ownership unknown, treated as public ……………… 327
Private, American rule ……………………………. 330
Private, must be respected ………………………… 328
Private, treatnlent of ……………………………. 328-339
Seizure, necessary, authorized ……………………. 318-319
Seizure, unnecessary, forbidden …………………….. 318
State, buildings, and lands ……………………… 320-321
State, movable …………………………………. 325-32C
Reprisals against inhabitants ……………………………. 349
Requisitions:
Can be imposed …………………………………. 295
Enforcement of …………………………………… 345
For services- …………………………………… 304-307
Hague rule ……………………………………. 340
HOW authorized and accomplished …………….. 342
Pricas, how fixed; payments ……………………….. 344
Quantities, limitation as to ………………………… 343
What may be obtained by …………………………. 341
Sovereignty does not pass to occupant ……………………. 274
Submarine cables ………………………………………. 339
Taxes:
Applied fist to cost of government …………………. 294
Existing rules disregarded when ……………………. 296
Existing rules observed generally …………………… 294
Local, subject to supervision ……………………….. 298
New, should not he imposed ……………………….. 295
Surplus, may be appropriated ……………………… 297
Telegraph and postal services ……………………………. 292
Transportation, may be seized or regulated ……………….. 293
Officers:
Active, neutral, must not join belligerents ………………… 379
Captured (see Prisoners of war) .
Gain; private, forbidden in occupied territory ……………… 333
Interned by neutrals, parole of …………………………. 388, 391
Liubility of, for ordering war crimes ……………………… 352
dpening of hostilities (see Hostilities) .
Outlawry forbidden …………………………………………. 51
Parlementaires……………………………………………. 221-235
dbuse of flag of truce, what constitutes …………………… 235
Accompanying party, composition of …………………….. 2.31
Authorization, written, must be carried …………………… 227
Belligerent sending, must cease flring …………………….. 235
: Darkness, attempts to send during ………………………. 228
Defined…………………………………………….. 221-222

Pages
78
78
76
76
78
77
78
78
78
78-79
70
70
77
77-78
81

Para-
Parlementaires.Continued  .  graphs
Detention of, when authorized. etc ……………………..  229.233
Escorts for ……………………………………………  292, 231

Fire not to be directed on ……………………………….. 226
Flag, white, to be borne by ……………………………. 222.231
Formalities for reception of ………………………… 229,230, 232
inviolability, forfeited how ……………………………. 234
Inviolability, right to …………………………………… 222
Reception of …………………………………………. 22%232
Soldiers should know rules concerning ……………………. 223
White flag, cessation of fire ……………………………… 225
White flag, significance oL ………………………………. 224 .
White flag to be carried by ……………………………… 222

Paroles (see Prisoners of war) . Passports, military:
Defined ………………………………………………. 235

Distinguished from safe.conducts ………………………… 239

Nontransferable……………………………………….. 2’311

Revocation and lapse …………………………………… 240
Peaceful population:
Distinguished from armed forces …………………………. 8
Must not be i d etc ………………………………… 10

Penalties (see Violations of the laws of war) .
Perfidy, acts of, forbidden …………………………………… 25, 268
Pillage:

In occupied territory forbidden ………………………… 334, 335

Of 8 town or place forbidden …………………………….. 62
Pirates ofwar ………………………………………………. 350
Poison, use of prohibited …………………………………….. 25.28
Police of battlefield ………………………………………….. 177
Prisoners of war (ch . 4) ……………………………………… 71-173

Accused, not compelled to admit guilt ……………………. 135

Addresses of, belligerents to inform each other of …………… 82

Agents:
Facilities to be accorded to ………………………… 118

Right to appoint; duties …………………………… 117
Are in power of enemy power ……………………………. 74
Armed prowlers not treated as …………………………… 357
Attaches, neutritl, not held as ……………………………. 78
Authentication of signatures of ………………………….. 115
Belligerents must notify each other of captures …………….. 82
Rooks, may receive shipments of ………………………… 113
Bureaus of information for …………………………. 164,16 8.167
Burial of deceased; death certificates……………………… 183
Camps:

Canteens in ……………………………………… 86
Hygiene in………………………………………. 87
Infirmaries ………………………………………. 88
Installation of ……………………………………. 84
Officers’, personnl services in ……………………….. 96
To be commanded by officers ………………………. 92

16WYo-34-6
Pages
59. 60

58. 59
58

60. 50
59
t10
58

59

58
58

nu

58

28
27

Ili
%I
18

27

10

211

30. 36
3(1

Para-
Prisoners of war–Continued . graphs
Canteens to be installed in camps ……………………….. 86
Censorship of correspondence ……………………………. 114
Central agency for information …………………. ……… 166
Civil officials may be made ……………………………… 77 e, /
Civilians following armies may become ………………….. 77 b
Clothing to be supplied …………………………………. 86
Coercion to obtain information forbidden …………………. 79
Collective punishments forbidden ……………………….. 85
Complaints, right to make …………………………….. 116, 141
Confinement of forbidden; exceptions …………………….. 83
Correspondence oT:
Censorship and suspension of ………………………. 114
Exempt from postal charges etc ……………………. 112
eel rule ecling ………………………….. 110
Measures for, to be published ………………………. 10Y
Parcels, may receive by mail ………………………. 111
Telegrams, are allowed to send ……………………… 112
With families, to be permitted ……………………… 82
Deat.h penalty; notice ol; stay of execution …………………. 140
Deceased; burial; death certificates ………………………. 163
Definition…………………………………………….. 71
13iscipline(see Punisliment of) .
Discriminations between based on what ………………….. 76
Dispersed, commissions to search for ……………………… 162
Documents, etc., transmission, etc ……………………….. 115
Effects and money of …………………………………… 80
Entering ncutral territory, treatment of ………………….. 301
Escapes; attempting and assisting; punishment ………….. 124-J25
Evacuation of …………………………………………. 81
Exchange:

Cannot be demanded; cartel ……………………….. 157
Condilions of ……………………………………… 159
Made only after complete capture ………………….. 158
Spies, war traitors, and war rebels e~cluded ………….. 161
Substitutions arranged by cartel ……………………. 160
Exposure to combat 6re forbidden ……………………….. 83

External relations:
Publication of measures …………………………… 109
Rules affecting ………………………………….110-115

Food ration to equal that of troops ……………………….. 85
Forcing to take part in operations, forbidden ……………… 36
From sanitary units, maintenance, pay, etc ……………….. 188
Funds belonging to, disposition of ……………………….. 98
Geneva Convention of 1929:

Applies to what persons ……………………………

73

Relation to Hague Regulations …………………….. 72

Text to be posted in camps, etc …………………….. 169

Gifts for, postage and duly free ………………………….. 112

Graves of ……………………………………………… 163
Eighway robbers not treated as ………………………….. 366
IIospitalization in neutral country ……………………… 142-146

Pages
20
26
38
17
17
20
18
20

27. 33
19

Paara-
Prisoners of war–Continued . graphs  Pages
Hospilalieation to be provided ……………………………. R8  20
Hostages are treated as……………………………….. 77 h, 364  17.85
Humanity, must be treated with ………………………… 74  16
I  ……………………..Hygienic measures required of captor 87 Imprisonment of:  20
During trial to be deducted from sentence …………… 121
Forbidden except for safety and sanitation ………….. 83
Infirmaries to be established for ………………………….. 86
Information bureaus; establishment; dulies ……………… 164, 166
Information bureaus exempt from postage and duties ………. 167
Inhabitants, certain, may bemade ……………………….. 77g
Injuries while at work; compensation …………………….. 101
Insignia and decorations, may he worn by ………………… 93
Insults, must be protected against ……………………….. 74
International Committee of Red Cross ……………………. l6G
Internment of …………………………………………. 83
Judicial prosecutions of (see Punishments of) .
Kitchen, may be employed in …………………………… 85
Labor of (see Work).
Language they understand to be used …………………….. 94
Laws and regulations of captor, subject to ………………… 119
Letters of (see Correspondence of) .
Levee en masse, members of, may become ………………… 77d
Lodgings of, requirelnents for ……………………………. 84
Maintenance, captor must provide for ……………………. 76
Maintenance while working for private persons ……………. 102
Medical inspection to be held monlhly …………………… 89
Medical treatment to be provided ……………………….. 88
Ministers of religion allowed to minister to ………………… 90
Money accounts of …………………………………….. 98
Must not be kept in unhealthlul region …………………… 83
Names and ranks, bound to give …………………………. 79
Neutral attachds nnd agents are not ………………………. 78
Noncon~u~issionedofficers, do supervisory work ………… …. 101
Offenses 01, verification; procedure ……………………….. 121
See also Punishment ol.
Oflieers and assimil6s:
May be given work if they ask it …………………… 101
Not to be confined wit11 enlisted men ……………….. 123
t  Notification of titles and ranks required ……………… 95
Pay; rat. e of exchange; reimbursement ……………….. 97
Personal service, food and clotbing ………………….. 90
Senior recognized as intermediary …………………… 117
To be treated with regard to rank and age …………… 95
Parcels by mail, may receive ……………………………. 111
Paroles……………………………………………… 140-156
Allowance of discretionary with governments ………… 154
Commissioned officers ……………………………. 152
……………..Enlisted men must give throlkgh officers 151
Form nrld substance; in writing …………………….. 150

110 INDEX
Prisoners of war–Continued . Para-
Paroles–Continued . graphs Pages
General order regarding, communicated to enemy …….. 154 35
Ineffectual when ………………………………….. 153 35
Liberty on, must be accepted voluntarily ……………. 155 35
May be liberated on; conditions …………………….. 149 34
Violation 01 forfeits rights; trial …………………….. 166 35
Personal effects to be retained by ……………………….. 80 18
Persons and honor to be respected ……………………….. 75 16
Pirates of war not treated as …………………………….. 356 83
Potable water to be provided for …………………………. 85 20
Protecting power:
Notice to, of death sentences; stay ………………….. 140
Notice to, of judicial proceedings ……………………. 134
Notice to, of sentence imposed ……………………… 139
Representatives of, to be facilitated. ………………… 170
Right to complnin to ……………………………… 116
To aid iu settling diiferences ……………………….. 171
Trials, may be represented at ………………………. 136
Puuishments of:
Aggravation of working conditions forbidden ………… 106
Auth~ri~ed 120

and forbidden …………………………..
Cannot affect right of complaint ……………………. 141
Collective and corporal forbidden ………………….. 85, 120
Discrimination after, forbidden …………………….. 122
For attempting or assisting escape ………………….. 125
For escape, authorized and forbidden ……………….. 124
For insubordination authorized …………………….. 119
Judicial:

Courts and procedure ……………………….. 137
Death sentences; notice; stay …………………. 140
Imprisonment pending trial …………………… 121
Notice of sentence to protecting power …………. 139
Notice of trial to protecting power …………….. 134
Right of appeal ……………………………… 138
Right of counsel, etc …………………………. 136
Rig of defense …………………………….. 135

Not to exceed those in army of captor ……………….. 120
Offenses to be verified; procedure …………………… 121
Officers not confined with enlisted men ……………… 123
Rank, deprivation of, forbidden- …………………… 123
Repatriation not to be delayed by summary …………. 127
Second for same offense forbidden ………………….. 126
Summary:

Food restrictions a…………………….. 129
Further restrictions on ……………………….. 130
Imposable only by commanders ………………. 133
Maximum limits of ………………………….. 128
Medical care during ……………………….. 132
Or judicial, lenience in deciding_- …………….. 126
Withholding mail as …………………………. 131

Para-
Prisoners of war–Continued . graphs Pages
Rank. deprivation of. forbidden ………………………….. 123 29
Rations of …………………………………………….. 85 20
Ready money they are allowed to keep …………………… 98 22
Recreation and sports- ………………………………….. 91 21
Relief societies, belligerents to assist. …………………….. 165 37
Relief societies may send books to camps …………………. 113 26
See also Relief societies .
Religious privileges to be accorded ……………………….. 90
Repatriated, use in active service forbidden ……………….. 148
Repatriation:
Able-bodied long in captivity ………………………. 146
Armistice to include provisions for ………………….. 162
Expenses of, by whom borne ……………….. …….. 147
Inspections with view to. ……………………….. 144-145
Mixed medical commissions ……………………… 143-144
Model agreement for sick and wounded ……………. 142, 173
Punishment, judicial, may delay ………………….. 127. 162
Punishment, summary, not to delay ………………… 127
Seriously sick and wounded ……………………… 142, 173
Victims of industrial accidents ……………………… 145
Reprisals against prohibited ……………………………. 74, 363
Retain full civil status ………………………………….. 75
Saluting by, rules concerning ……………………………. 92
Sanitary personnel, captured, treatment of.. ……………. 187-18b
Segregation of, according to race …………………………. 83
Seriously sick and wounded to be sent back …………….. 142, 173
Sick and wounded (see Sick and wounded) .
Soldiers captured while violating armistice are …………….. 271
Special conventions concerning ………………………. 168
Spies captured after rejoining own army ………………….. 213
Status of captives left to courts ………………………….. 13
Subject to laws, regulations, etc., of captor. ……………….. 119
Summary execution of captives forbidden …………………. 13
Tobacco, are permitted to use …………………………… 85
rI> ransfer; rights upon ………………………………….. 90-100
Trwtment of, in ~eneral ………………………………… 74-76
Unable to identify se!ves, procedure ……………………… 79
Violence, must be protected against. …………………….. 74
War rebels not treated as ……………………………….. 354
Who have right to be treated as …………………………. 77

Wills; death certificates; burial ………………………….. 163
With troops taking refnge in neutral territory ……………… 394
Women, to be treated with regard due sex ………………… 75
Work:

Authorized; care while working …………………….. 101
Detachments; sanitary conditions; food, etc ………….. 107
For which unflt prohibited ……………………….. 103
In kitchens, may be required …………………….. 85
Length of day; weekly day of rest ………………….. 104
Omcers and noncommissioned officers ………………. 101

Prisoners of war-Continued. Par& W orb-Continucd. graphs Pagee Related to war operations prohibited …–.–.—-.—…24
105 Unhealthful or dangerous forbidden. -……..-..—–..-24
106 Wages and payment.-. .-..-…. —–108 25
.—–.——-.—-
Wounded and sick, captured, are ……-….-.—————–
77 c 17 Projectiles: Artillery, may contnin explosives .-…-..———————-
34 9
Causing unnecessary injury forbidden. …—.——.—..—–
34 9 Property: Captured belongs to Government –….-.——-.—-..–.—-
332 78
Enemy, destruction of authorized– ..-..-..-..-.-.—..–.—-7

24 c
Enemy, in occupied territory (see Occupied territory). Protecting powers (see Prisoners of war). Provost courts ..-….-…-..——–.—-.—–..-.–.—-.———-
3 Prowlers 367 83 Punishments: 7
Of inhabitanls of orc~~pircllerrilorp (see Occupied Lenito~y;
inhabitants).
Of prisoners of war wee Prisoners of war).
Of spies (see Espionage and treason).
Of war criminals (see Violations of laws of war).

Qualifications of the armed forces (ch. 2) –.-.-……—_–.———-
8-13 4-5
Quarter, refusal of, forbidden ..-..–…-.-…-.–.–.-..———–.
33 9
Radio, in neutral states –.–..—..–.–.-..–..–.——….
383,386-387 88
Railway material, neutrality rules concerning– –.-..—–.-.–.—-
407 92 Rebels, war-. . ……..—. -.-.————.-.-161,354 36,82
..-.-.-.. -.. Red Crescent, emblem of sanitary service .—.–.-.-.–.–.–.–.–
194-199 51-53
Red Cross: Emblem, distinctive; use of 194-199 51-53 Insignia, misuse 01, forbidden .-..-.—.-..–.-.—-10,11,52,53
41,45,197,199
Society, American National —–.-.-..—–.——–.——-
172,185 40.48 See also Relief societies. Red Lion and Sun, emblem of sanitary service.-. ….-.-..——–51-53
194-199
Re!ief societies: Buildings and material of, private property …..-.-..———-50
191
For prisoners, to be facilitated …………………………… 37

165
Of neutral countries- ……..-..–..-..–…-.—.–.——-186

—48
Personnel assimilated to sanitary personnel .–.-..-.–.—.—-

1% 48
Prisoners camps, may send books to –..–..-…-.-.——-.–.2(1

113
ILecruiting lor, permitted in neutral territory ….–……–.-..376 87
Red Cross, International Committee …–..–…-.-..-.–.—-40

172
Red Cross, only authorized American 185 48

.-….-…..-.—.-..-e–

Use of distinctive emblem by ……-…_–.-…—-.–.–..–.199 53

Volunteer, for sick and wounded– .–.—–.—-.-….–.-.-

184-186 48 Religion, buildings devoted to, protected .——…-.—.—-13-14,77
5-1,323-324
Religious freedom: Accorded: Inhabitants of occupied territory –..–._..————
301-302 73 Prisoners of War. ………-.;…….———————
90 21 Repatri~tion(see Prisoners of war),
INDEX
Para-
Reprisals: graphs Pages
Against inhabitants of occupied territory …………………. 349 81
Against prisoners of war forbidden ………………………. 74, 363 16,84
For violations of laws of war …………………………… -. 363 84
Requisitions (see Occupied tetrit.ory).
Revenge:
Acts of, prohibited ……………………………………. 26 7
Reprisals never adopted for ………………………………363 b 84
Reward, for enemy “dead or alive”, forbidden ………………….. 31 9
Robbers, highway, defined. ………………………………….. 356 83
Rules of war:
Basic rules and principles ……………………………….. 1-7 14
Definitions……………………………………………. 1-3 1
Force of ………………………………………………. 6 2
Unwritten, defined …………………………………….. 3 1
Violations and penalties (bee Violations of the laws of war) .
Written, defined ……………………………………….. 2 1
Ruses of war:
Authorized …………………………………. 37 9
Legitimate and forbidden, examples of ……………………. 39, 40 10
Must not involve treachery or perfidy ……………………. 39 10
Use of flags, insignia, and uniforms as …………………….. 43 11
Safe-conducts:
For goods, defined ……………………………………… 238 61
For goods, in whwe hands honored ………………………. 239 61
For persons, defined ……………………………………. 237 GI
For persons, distinguished Irom passports- ……………….. 239 61
For persens, nontransferable …………………………….. 239 61
Licenses to trade- ……………………………………… 241 62
Neutral diplomats may be given …………………………. 219 57
Revocation and lapse ………………………………….. 240 62
Safeguards:
Deflned………………………………………………. 242 63
Soldiers acting as, inviolability of ………………………… 243 62
Sanitary formations and establishments (see Sick and wounded) .
Science, buildings devoted to, protected ………………… 5941,323 .324 13,14, 77
Sick and wounded (ch . 6) …………………………………… 174-202 H-54
Abandoned, sanitary personnel to be left with ……………… 175 44
American National Red Cross …………………………. 172, 185 40, 48
Bombardments and sieges, spared in.. …………………… 5940 13
Captured, are prisoners of war ………………………… 77 c, 170 17,44
Care and treatment of, in general ………………………… 175 44
Convoys of evacuation ……………………………….. 192-193 W51
Death of, duties of captor ………………………….. 103,17 7.178 30, 45
Distinctive emblems, use of …………………………… 194-199 51-53
Duties of neutral powers toward ……………………….. 395-389 80-90
Entering neutral state, rules conceruing …………………. 395-399 89-90
Evacuation:
Co~lvoys ol; vehicles; how Lrealed …………………. 192-193 54-51
Geneva Convention of 1929:
Belligerents to provide lor execution oL ……………… 200 1

Sick and wounded–Continued . Pm-
Geneva Conveutioa of 1929-Continued . graphs Pages
Infractions; investigations; action …………………… 202 53
Publication to troops and peoples …………………… 201 53
Replaces prior conventions.. ………………………. 174 44
Hostages to insure prolectiou of ………………………….. 364 85
Humanity, to be treated with ………………………….. 175 44
Information to be exchanged …………………………….. 178 a 45
Inhabitants may be asked to care for …………………….. 179 48
International law, applicable to ………………………….. 176 44
Interned in neutral state …………………………… 173,39 5.399 40.84-80
Marauders robbing, punishment of ………………………. 177 b 45
Neutral powers, duties with relation to …………………. 395-399 8Q-90
Red Cross distinctive emblem …………………………. 194-198 51-53
Red Cross Society, American National.. ……………….. 172, 185 40, 48
Robbery and ill.treatment, protected from ……………….. 177 45
Sanitary buildings and materiel, use of. ………………….. 190 49
Sanitary establishments, Exed …………………………… 190 49
Sanitary formations:
Aircraft as sanitary transport ………………………. 193 51
Arms and alnnlunition found with. ………………… I82 46
Arms, may carry for self-defense ……………………. 182 46
Buildings and mat6riel of, captured ………………. 190-191 44-50
Convoys of evacuation treated as…………………… 192 50
Distinctive emblem, use of ………………………. 194-199 51-53
Distinctive flag …………………………………… 197 52
Fixed establishments ……………………………… 190 49
Guards for, treated as members …………………….. 182 46
May he employed by captor ……………………….. 189 49
Neutral, flags of ………………………………….. 198 52
Protection, acts which do not forfeit ………………… 182 46
Protection, ceases when ……………………………. 181 46
Self.defense, meaning of …………………………… 182 b 47
To be respected and protected ……………………… 180 46
To retain materiel and personnel …………………… 189 49
Sanitary personnel:
Brassards with distinctive emblem.. ……………….. 196 51
Captured; maintenance, pay, etc …………………… 188 49
Captured, to be returned to own army- …………….. 187 48
Distinctive emblem, use of ………………………. 194-199 51-53
Entering neutral territory.. ……………………….. 400 90
Identity, to carry proof of- ………………………… 196 51
Must be left with abandoned ………………………. 175 44
To he respected and protected ……………………… 183 47
Transportation personnel treated a.. ……………… 192-193 50-51
Search of battlefields; local armistice ……………………… 177 45
Spared in bombardments and sieges ……………………… 59-60 13
Special agreements for benefit of …………………………. 176 44
Transfer of ……………………………………….. 99,142, 173 23,33, 40
Transportation, vehicles used for.. …………………….. 192-193 50-61
Treatment of, in general………………………………… 175 44
Volunteer aid societies ………………………………… 184-186 48

INDEX
Para-
graph
Sieges……………………………………………………… 52-61

Besieged place:
Attacker may forbid communication with …………… 58
Certain buildings to be spared ……………………… 59-61

Permitting neutral diplomats to leave.. …………….. 53
Permitting population to leave …………………….. 52-53
Persons expelled from, firing upon ………………….. 57
Persons expelled may be driven back ……………….. 58
Persons leaving or entering without permission ………. 55

Persons dwelling between opposing forces …………………. 54
Signs, to distinguish protected buildings, etc ……………………. 60-61
Soldiers:

Captured (See Prisoners of war) .
Captured while violating armistice ………………………. 271
Comprising safeguard, inviolable …………………………. 243
Reprisals by, forbidden …………………………………. 363 b
Sick and wounded (See Sick and wounded) .

Spies (See Espionage and treason) .
Stratagems, authorized ………………………………………. 37
Submarine cables ……………………………………………. 339
Submarine mines (See Mines) .
Summary executions, prohibited ………………………………. 13, 32
Summary punishments (See Prisoners of war; punishments) .
Supplies, appropriation of in enemy country …………………….. 24 d

See &so Occupied territory .
Surrender (Eke Capitulations) .
Suspemion of arms (See Armistice) .
Sutlers, captured, status of …………………………………… 77
Telegraph and telephone, id neutral states ………………… 383,388- 387
Territory, enemy, occupation and government of (See Occupied

territory) .
Torpedoes:
Aerial, authorized ……………………………………… 34
Use of certain kinds forbidden …………………………… 70

Tot forhidden ………………………………………….. 25
Train wrecking, authorized …………………………………… 35
Treachery, forbidden ………………………………………… 30
Treason (See Espionage and treason) .
Trial, for war crimes, right of …………………………………. 361
Troops (See particular subtopics) .
Truce (See Armistice) .
Undefended places, attack npon forbidden ……………………… 46-47
Uniform, enemy, misuse of forbidden ………………………….. 41, 44
Violations of the laws of war (ch . 11)…………………………. 350-363

Armed forces, principal ofienses of ……………………….. 352
Armed prowlers ……………………………………….. 357
Belligerents:

Injured, remedies ol ………………………………. 351
Offending, liability of ……………………………… 350
Responsible for acts of armed forces …………………. 350

116 INDEX
Para-
Violations 01 the laws of wars–Cot~tinued . graphs  Pages
Collective punishments for ………………………. 348.349, 363 d  81. 85
Crimes punishable hy penal codes ……………………….. 360  53
Miscellaneous …………………………………….. 359  83
Death penalty may be imposed for ………………………. 362  84  I
Execution, summary, forbidden …………………………. 13  5
Highway robbers and pirates of war ……………………… 356  83
Hostages may be taken to insure against ………………….. 364  85
Hostile acts by persons not of armed forces ………………… 353  82
Individual offenders:
Liable to sentence of death ………………………… 362
Right of trial …………………………………….. .361
Marauders……………………………………………. 358
Miscellaneous crimes and offenses- ………………………. 359
Yimtes of mar …………………. 350
Prolest and demand for punishment ……………………… 351
Yubliealio~~of the facts …………………………………. 351
Punishment for, may be death …………………………… 362
Reprisals for …………………………………………… 363
‘ria or right of ………………………………………. 361
War rebels, defined; punishment ………………………… 354
War treason; examples ot………………………………. 355
Volunteer aid societies ……………………………………… 184-186
See also Relief societies .
Volunteers, may be part of armed lorces ………………………… 9 a
War:
Declaration 01 …………………………………………. 14-16
Object of ……………………………………………… 22
War crimes (See Violat. ions of the laws of war) .
Warfare, memures authorized and prohibited (See Hostilities).
War rebels:
Are not exchanged ……………………………………… 161
Defined ………………………………………………. 354
War traitors (See Espionage and Lreason) .
Wireless, in neutral state ……………………………….. 383, 38G387
Works of art, damage to forbidden …………………………….. 353
Wounded (See Sick and wounded) .

 

Procedure June-1944

Procedure June-1944

0
WAR DEPARTMENT PAMPHLET .’ NO. 27-4
I
OCE OR JP4q3-lYJ’
@p;95-
MILITARY
Return to Army libraryRoom 1A522, PentagM

WAR DEPARTMENT 12 JUNE 1944
RESTRICTED. DISSEMINATION OF RESTRICTED MATTER-The Infor-mation contained in restricted documents and the essential characteristics of restricted material may be given to any person known to be in the service of the United States and to persons of undoubted loyalty and discretion who are cooperating in Government work, but will not be communicated to the public or to the press except by authorized military public relations agencies. (See also par. 236,AR 380-5/15 Mar 1944.)
WAR DEPARTMENT, WASHINGTON
25, D. C., 12 June 1944. , , War Department Pamphlet No. 274, Procedure for Military Executions, is published for the&forr,lation aid guidance of all concerned.
! [A. G. 250.47 (8 Mar 441.1 , .
BYORDEW OF THE SECRETARY
OF WAR:
G. C. MARSHALL,
Chief of Staf.
OFFICL~L
:
J. A. ULIO,
Major General,
The Adjutant General.

DISTRIBUTION
:

T of Opns (10);Sv C (10) ;Base Comds (10) ;Island Comds (10); Def Comds (Overseas) ( 10) ;Sectors (Overseas) ( 10);Depts ( 18) ; Armies (10); Corps (10)’; D (2); Posts, Camps, Sta (1); Arm & Sv Boards (2) ;Stf Div (2) ;Tech Sv (2).
For explanation of s~mbols,see FM 2 1-6.
CONTENTS
Paragraphs

SECTION I.
General………………………………………. 1-1 1

II.
Execution by Musketry………………………….. 12-14

III.
Execution by Hanging………………………… —15-1 7

IV.
Proceedings After Execution ……………………….. 18-20

V.
Departures——————————21

VI.
S:ructures——————————22-24

VII.
Equipment ……………………………………. 25-28

SECTION I
GENERAL

Authority—————————————
Time and Place …………………………… h Delegation of Authority…………………….. 3 Insanity—————————_—4 Pregnancy——————————-5 Witnesses ………………………….. 6 Multiple Executions ………………………… 7 Escort———————————-8 Chaplain————————9 Medical Officer…………………………… 10 Miscellaneous……………………… 11
1. Authority
Military executions will be by musketry or by hang- ing as designated by a court martial in imposing the sentence of death. (Manual for Courts-Martial, 103a, page 93.)
2. Time and Place
a.
The authority ordering the execution of a sen- tence of death designates or causes to be designated the time and place for such execution, any designa- tion made by the court as to such matters being disregarded. (Manual for Courts-Martial, 87b, page 76.)

b.
Where it is found to be impracticable to pro- ceed with the execution at the time named or at the place selected, the officer designated by the confirming authority to execute the sentence will designate at the earliest opportunity another time or place, and the execution will proceed according

. to the new designation.
3. Delegation of Authority
a.
The officer designated by the confirming au- thority to execute the approved sentence of death will be responsible for its execution. He may dele- gate to a subordinate ofFicer the duties connected with the carrying out of the execution.

b.
The subordinate officer named will be one under the direct control of the delegating authority. He will be duly and officially named by an order of the officer designated to execute the sentence and directed therein to carry out the execution.

4. Insanity
If, after issuance of order of execution, the prisoner shows signs of having become insane, the officer designated to execute the sentence may cause a board to be convened under the provisions of AR 600-500 to determine the sanity of the prisoner. If the board finds the prisoner to be sane, the execu- tion will proceed as ordered; but in the event he shall be found to be insane, notice of the findings of the board, including, if practicable, its report, will be transmitted to the confirming authority if other than the President, or to The Adjutant Gen- eral if the sentence was confirmed by the President, and the execution willbe stayed pending the receipt of further instructions.
5. Pregnancy
If the prisoner is a woman and medical examina- tion reveals that she is pregnant, immediate report of the fact will be made to the confirming authority or to The Adjutant General, as prescribed in para- graph 4, and the execution will be stayed pending Lhe receipt of further instructions.
6. Witnesses
The officer desiqnated to execute the sentence will prescribe whether the execution will be public or private, rules of secrecy as to time, place, and the presence of witnesses, military or civilian, including members of the press if the presence of the latter is deemed proper. If troops are designated to ob- serve an execution by musketry, these troops will be paraded and formed into the three sides of a hollow rectangle, facing inward and toward the site on which the prisoner is to be placed. In executions by hanging, the trooDs, if designated to witness the execution, will be paraded and formed in a square around the gallows. No photographs nor motion pictures of the actual execution will be permitted except for official purposes. The en- virons of the place of execution will be closely and securely guarded to prevent the intrusion of un-authorized persons. All persons in attendance will be cautioned that no demonstrations or unseemly conduct will be tolerated. Troops will assume the position of attention upon the approach of the escort and will remain at attention until the con- clusion of the ceremony.
7. Multiple Executions
In multiple executions by musketry, a separate ex- ecution party will be provided for each of the prisoners. The latter will be placed in line at an interval of 10 paces and executed simultaneously. When a multiple execution by hanging is required, the officer designated to execute the sentence will prescribe the number of gallows to be erected, and the prisoners will be hanged from the gallows simultaneously or by groups.
8. Escort
The escort for execution may be mounted, dis-mounted, or motorized, but upon arrival at the scene of execution, mounted or motorized escorts will form in the manner prescribed for dismounted escorts. The minimum escort will consist of com- ponents as prescribed in paragraph 13b.
9. Chaplain
In all executions, a chaplain of the prisoner’s choice will be provided if practicable. If no chaplain of the prisoner’s choice or of his particular denomina- tion is available, the officer charged with the execu- tion of the sentence will take all reasonable meas- ures to provide a civilian clergyman from that denomination.

10. Medical Officer
A medical officer will be officially designated to be in attendance upon the execution. It will be his duty to determine the extinction of life in the pris- oner and to rriake pronouncement thereof. He will furnish a death certificate to accompany the report of execution.
11. Miscellaneous
a.
The prisoner will be notified of the time of execution no less than 24 hours prior thereto if prac- ticable, at which time the order directing the execu- tion will be read to him by the officer charged with the execution of the sentence or by some officer at his direction.

b.
If practicable, due notice will be given to the next of kin of the prisoner and an opportunity pro- vided for the claiming of the body following the execution.

c.
A prisoner in the Armed Forces of the United States will be dressed in regulation uniform from which all decorations, insignia, or other evidences of membership therein have been removed. Likewise, no such evidences will appear on any clothing used in burial. Similar procedures may be dispensed with, in the discretion of the officer responsible for carrying out the execution (or higher authority), in the case of a prisoner in the armed forces of another nation. A prisoner not within the foregoing cate- gories may be dressed in any clothing available.

SECTION I1
EXECUTION BY MUSICETRY
Paragraph

Officer Charged with Execution——————-12
Assembly of Escort………………….. 13

Execution———-_-__——_————–14
12. Officer Charged with Execution
The officer charged with the execution will com- mand the escortand make the necessary arrange- ments for the conduct of the execution. He will-
a.
Instruct the escort and the execution party in hkir duties.

b.
Arrange for the receipt of the prisoner by the prisoner guard.

c.
Arrange for an execution party of twelve men and one sergeant.

d.
Arrange for a chaplain to accompany the prisoner.

e.
Arrange for the presence of a medical officer at the scene of the execution.

f.
Cause a post with proper rings placed therein for securing the prisoner in an upright position to be erected at the place of execution.

g.
Cause twelve rifles to be loaded in hispresence. Not more than four nor less than one will be loaded with blank ammunition. He will lace the rifles at random in the rack provided for that purpose.

h.
Provide a black hood to cover the head of the

i.
Provide a 4-inch, round, white target.

j.
Cause the prisoner’s armsto be secured behind his back, before or immediately after his receipt by the prisoner guard.

k.
Arrange for an ambulance or other conveyance with sufficient personnel to be in attendance upon the execution to receive and care for the body. In the event a contract undertaker is used bv the quartermaster, his services may be substituted. See

AR 30-1820.
13. Assembly of Escort
a. The band will be formed in accordance with section V, FM 28-5, will proceed to the exterior door of the place of imprisonment at which the prisoner is to be received by the prisoner guard, and halt near the door, facing in the direction of the scene of the execution. The presence of the band is optional at executions where the presence of troops is not required.
b.
The prisoner guard will consist of twelve men armed with rifles, under the command of a sergeant armed with a pistol. The prisoner guard will form in double ranks and at the proper time will proceed to the place of imprisonment to receive the prisoner.

c.
The main guard will consist of one or more platoons and will form in the rear of the band.

d.
The execution party will be formed unarmed and proceed to a previously prepared rack of rifles, secure arms,and move to the scene of the execution, halting 15 paces from and facing the position to be taken by the prisoner. At close interval, and at order anns, the party will await the arrival of the prisoner and escort.

e.
At the designated time the prisoner, with his arms bound securely behind his back, accompanied by the chaplain, will be received by the prisoner guard and placed between the ranks. The escort will then proceed toward the scene of the execution, the band playing the “Dead March.”

f.
The escort will approach the scene of the exe- cution on line with the open side of the rectangle formed by the witnessing troops. The band will move past the point at which the prisoner is to be ~laced, and will take position on the opposite side of the rectangle, facing the scene of the execution. The prisoner guard, prisoner, and chaplain will proceed directly to the prisoner’s post, halt, and face the execution party. The main guard will proceed to a point 5 paces behind the execution party and form a line facing the scene of execution.

14. Execution
a. The officer charged with the execution will take position in front of the execution party and face the prisoner. He will then read the charge, finding, sentence, and orders aloud to the prisoner. He will then no* the prisoner and the chaplain that a brief time will be allowed the prisoner for any last statement. After a reasonable time, he will order the sergeant of the execution party to secure the prisoner to the post and to place the hood over his head. Then the medical officer will place the target over the prisoner’s heart. The prlsoner prepared, the officer charged with the ex- ecution will order the prisoner guard to join the main guard; the chaplain and medical officer will retire to the flank taken by the band. The oficer charged with the execution will take position 5 paces to the right of and 5 paces to the front of the execution party.
b. Commands for the execution may be given by a combination of manual and oral signals as prescribed.
( 1) When the officer charged with the execu- tion raises the right arm vertically overhead, palm forward, fingers extended and joined, the execution party will come to the “Ready” position as pre-scribed for firing a volley, and will unlock rifles.
(2)
When the officer charged with the execution lowers his arm to a horizontal position in front of his body, the execution party will take the position of “Aim.”

(3)
When the officer charged with the execu- tion drops his arm directly to his side and orally commands: FIRE, the execution party will fire simultaneously.

(4)
The officer charged with the execution will then bring the execution party to “Order Arms.”

c.
When the use of manual signals is not prac- tical, the following oral commands are prescribed:

(1)
At the command READY, the execution party will take that position and unlock rifles.

(2)
At the command AIM, the execution party will take that position with rifles aimed at target on the prisonei’s body.

(3)
At the command FIRE, the execution party will fire simultaneously.

d.
The officer charged with the execution will join the medical officer who will examine the pris- oner and, if necessary, direct that the “coup de grace” be administered. Should the medical offi- cer so decide, the sergeant of the execution party will administer the “coup de grace,” with a hand weapon, holding the muzzle just above the ear and one foot from the skull.

e.
Under exceptional circumstances, the officer charged with the execution, with the permission of the commanding officer, may detail an extra file of six men to administer the “coup de grace.” This file will form the rear rank of the execution party, and if it is necessary to administer the “coup de grace,” will move in front of the execution party and fire, at the command of the officer charged with the execution.

f.
Upon pronouncement of the death of the prisoner by the medical officer, the execution party will proceed to the racks from which the rifles were originally obtained, and replace the rifles in the racks at random. The execution party will then be dismissed.

g.
The escort, with the band playing a lively air, will return to their parade ground and be dismissed.

h.
The witnessing troops will parade in column ‘ in front of the body and proceed to their respective parade grounds where they will be dismissed.

i.
The officer charged with the execution will direct the burial party in the disposal of the body as prescribed by AR 2 10-500 and 30-1820.

SECTION I11
EXECUTION BY HANGING
Paragraph Officer Charged with Execution……………….. 15 Assembly——————————–16
Execution————————————–17
15. Officer Charged with Execution
The officer charged with the execution will com- mand the escort and make the necessary arrange- ments for the conduct of the execution. He d-
a.
Instruct components of the escort in their duties.

b.
Arrange for the receipt of the prisoner by the prisoner guard.

c.
Arrange for a chaplain to accompany the prisoner.

d.
Arrange for the presence of a medical officer at the scene of the execution.

e.
Provide a proper gallows.

f.
Provide a black hood to cover the head of the prisoner.

g.
Provide a collapse board for use if necessary.

h.
Cause the prisoner’s arms to be secured be- hind his back, before or immediately upon his re- ceipt by the prisoner guard.

i.
Arrange for a burial party as prescribed in paragraph 12k.

16. Assembly
a.
The band will be formed in accordance with section V, Chapter 2, FM 28-5, will proceed to the exterior door of the place of imprisonment at which the prisoner is to be received bv the prisoner guard, and halt near the place of imprisonment, facing in the direction of the scene of the execution. The presence of the band is optional at executions where the presence of troops is not required.

b.
The ~risoner mard will consist of twelve men

armed with rifles, under the command of a sergeant armed with a pistol. The prisoner guard will form in double ranks and at the proper time will proceed to the door to receive the prisoner.
c. The main guard will consist of one or more platoons and will form in the rear of the band.
d.
At the designated time the prisoner, with his arms bound securely behind his back, accompanied by the chaplain, will be received by the prisoner guard and placed between the ranks. The escort will then proceed toward the scene of the execution, the band playing the “Dead March.”

e.
Upon the arrival of the escort, consisting of the band, prisoner guard, main guard, prisoner and chaplain within the square formed by the witness- ing troops before the gallows, the sergeant of the prisoner guard and a sergeant from the main guard will conduct the prisoner to the platform of the gallgws, the officer charged with the execution and the chaplain preceding the prisoner.

17. Execution
a.
The officer charged with the execution will face the prisoner and read aloud to him the charge, finding, sentence and orders. He will then notify the chaplain and the prisoner that a brief time will be allowed the prisoner for any last statement. After a reasonable time he will have the sergeant from the main guard place the hood over the pris- oner’s head and bind his ankles. The sergeant of the execution party will then adjust the noose around the prisoner’s neck. The sergeant of the execution party will then place himself in position at the trigger and, upon a signal from the officer charged with the execution, will spring the trap. The officer char~ed with the execution and the medical officer wil then examine the body for time of death.

b.
Upon the pronouncement of the death of the prisoner, the escort, with the band playing a lively air, will return to the parade ground and be dismissed.

c.
The witnessing troops will move to their re-spective areas where they will be dismissed.

d.
The officer charged with the execution will direct the burial party in the disposal of the body as prescribed by the commanding officer.

SECTION IV
PROCEEDINGS AFTER EXECUTION

Paragraph
. ..
Dlspos~honof Remains……………………… 18
Disposition of Effects………………………. 19
Notification and Reports …………………….. 20

18. Disposition of Remains
If the next of kin or other relatives of the deceased desire the body, the officer designated to execute the sentence will, if practicable, permit its delivery to them for burial. If no such claim is made, he will cause it to be buried in a post or civilian ceme- tery or at the place of death, whichever may be deemed proper and is authorized by pertinent regulations. (See AR 210-500 and 30-1820.)
19. Disposition of Effects
See Article of War 112 and sections V, VI and VII, AR600-550.
20. Notification and Reports
The officer designated to execute the sentence will notify The Adjutant General immediately follow- ing the execution, by fastest available method of communication, of the carrying out of the sentence of death, the time, place and any unusual circum- stances attendant thereon. He will likewise, in addition, comply with the requirements of section 11,AR 600-550. The quartermaster or other offi- cer in charge of burial will furnish report as provided in AR 30-1815.

SECTION V
DEPARTURES

if the exigencies of the situation require it, the offi-
Limited facities 21
cer designated to execute the sentence may make
21. Limited Facilities the necessary departures from the provisions herein If the facilities are not available for the carrying contained, except that he may not change the mode ‘ out of each of the provisions of this pamphlet or of execution.
SECTION VI

STRUCTURES

Paragraph Permanent Scaffold—————————— 22

j Semipermanent Scaffold…………………….. 23 Emergency Structures………………………. 24
22. Permanent Scaffold
A permanent type, demountable scaffold, with a metal trigger mechanism, will be erected when the need for such a structure is determined by the com- manding officer. (See fig. 1.) Where available, troops belonging to the Corps of Engineers will be employed in the constructing of the scaffold, but where not available, or where it is more practicable, other troops or civilians may be employed. Pre-liminary tests will be made to insure the strength of the. rope in the stability of the scaffold’s con- struction. If facilities are limited, a trap door on the second floor of the building may be constructed to effect the execution, or a similar improvising employed.

23. Semipermanent Scaffold
A semipermanent scaffold which requires no special inetal fittings may be used in executions by hanging when deemed expedient by the commanding officer. (See fig. 2.)
24. Emergency Structures
When the exigencies of the field so dictate, emer- gency type gallows may be used. (See fig. 3.)
SECTION VII
EQUIPMENT

Paragraph
25

Collapse Board and Binding Strap—————–26 Rope———————————-27
25, Hood
The hood will be of black sateen material, split at the open end so that it will come well down on the prisoner’s chest and back. A draw string will be attached to secure the hood snugly around the neck.
26. Collapse Board and Binding Strap
a. A collapse board will be provided for use in case of the collapse of the prisoner. (See fig. 4.)

b. A strap will be provided for binding prisoner’s arms to his side. (See fig. 5.) A plain strap will be provided for securing the prisoner’s legs.
27. Ro~e The rope will be of manila hemp, 1% inches in diameter and approximately 20 feet in length. The rope will be stretched to eliminate any spring. After the hangman’s knot is tied, the rope will be
treated with wax, soap, or grese to insure a smooth sliding action through the knot.
28. Post.
Design for post used in execution by musketry as mentioned in paragraph 14a, is shown in figure 6.
PLAN OVER BEAM

t
10′-0.
PLATFORM AND STAIR PLAN AT SECTION A-A SCALE l/,If=l’-Of’
FIGURE 1 CONT’D  Pf x ~PCARRIAGEBOLTS 4% CARRIAGE BOLTS h”Qx8″GARRIAGE BOUS
OF  SCAFFOLD
~  v  x  8  ” ~BOLTS  ~  ~  ~  ~
x 12-CARRIAGE  BOLTS

f” t S~CARRIAGE BOLTS

FRONT ELEVATION SCALE ‘/2″=1′-Of’

FIGURE 1 CONT’D

FIGURE 2

FIGURE 2 CONT’D

211×8 Spiked All Around Top Oi 6″x 6″ To Form Plate or Ribbon

Framing For Floor vs 12~~  Plan  of4″Platform = 12″-
END
2″x 6″
2I1x4 ‘I Flooring  —.
Plan of Underside Trap Door One Half f ;12″. 2″x 6″ C

FiGURE 2 CONT’D 3jA T aG Floor
LI

Section A -A
y=12″

Elevation of Trigger Post t*= 12~ Heavy Strap Hinge
I

4″x4 ” 9′-6″ Long Cot In Two Pieces At Centar.
Hinged . To Stand with I-Inch Bow At Center
2 -pcs 6″x 8″-22′ Long Gallows Posts 4 6″x6″-12′ Plotform Posts
2 a’ 21°x10″-16′ II Step Stringers 4 ” 2″x 10″-10′ ‘ Cross Bar -Beam
3 2″x8″ -141 a Joist -Extend for stair landing
a&
1′

1 2″x$”-12′ ” Joist-Short
7 ” 10’ ” Joists- Regular
2(ln811-
‘I

$ ” 2″x6″-X Braces 4 a# 211×6″-10′ ” Gallows Braces I a# 4″x4″-10′ ” Knee Braces Ccut to 5′-0″l 4 ” 4″x4’1-4′ Newels
I’

lI 211×4~-‘I Stalr Roil
I ” 2″x 41’-‘I Stair Rolf
3 n 21*x411-10 ” Stair Roll 8L Trap Door RailFpcs2″x8″-12′ ~ong) If 2’ thlck ” 2Ux.8″ -10 ‘ Long” 2″~8~-8’Long I pcs 2″x6′” 8’ Long Trap Door Rolls

I ‘ 2″x63/4’8′ 140 BM3/4″ T8G PineFlooring
11

4 2″x1~”-141 q Cut Into 3″6″ lenglhs. Step Tread I 4ux411-10’ 18 Trlgger
FIGURE 3

FIGURES 4, 5 AND 6

I-,.
-40.c
0. 5. COVERHMENT PRINTING OFFICiz 19.4

 

Procedure Dec-1947

Procedure Dec-1947

PROCEDUR~FOR
MILITARY E$ECUTIONS

1
i
1
i
DEPARTMENT OF T~E DECEMBER 1947
ARMY

RESTRICTED. DISSEM/N~TION
OF RESTRICTED MATTER.-NO
person is entitled by virtue of his grade or position to of classified matter. Such matter individuals whose official duties possession. (See also AR 380-5.1
*’.
This pampl~let supersedes WD Panzphlet 27-4, 12 June 1944, including C I, ” ‘ 11 August 191.4
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY Washington 25, D. C., 9 December 1947
Department of the Army Pamphlet 27-4, Procedure for Military Executions, is published for the information and guidance of all concerned.
[AG 250 (17Sep 47)1
BYORDER OF THE SECRETARY

OF THE ARMY:
OFFICIAL: DWIGHT D. EISENHOWER . EDWARD F. WITSELL Chief of Staff, Major General United States Army The Adjutant Gene~al
DISTRIBUTION: USAF (10) ;AGF (10) ;T (10) ;Base Comd (10) ;Def Comd
(10) ;Arm & Sv Bd (2), except 19 (20) ; Adm Sv (2) ; Tech Sv (2) ; FC (1) ;Gen & Sp Sv Sch (2), except 19
(100) ;A (lo) ;CHQ (lo) ;D (2) ;AF (2). For expIanation of distribution formula, see TM 38-405.
C 1
8
PROCEDURE FOR MILITARY EXECUTIONS
CHANGES DEPARTMENTOF THE ARMY
No. 1 WASHINOTON
25, D. C., $4 June 1953
1
b
DAPamphlet No. 274,9December 1947, is changed as follows:
KAuthority
(Superseded) In adjudging the sentence of death a court-martial will not pre-
.
scribe the method of execution. In accordance with para-sraph 126a, Manual for Courts-Martial, United States, 1961, a sentence to death which has been finally ordered executed will be carried into effect by shooting or hanging. (See pertinent Department of the Army letters and re-aulations.)
2. Time and Place
a;(Superseded) The authority ordering the execution of a sentence of death issues instructions concerning the time and place of execu- tion, any desi,pations or instructions in this particular matter by the court or the convening authority being disregarded. -6. (Rescinded.)
flisanity
If, after issuance of order of execution, the prisoner shows si,p of having become insane, the officer designated to execute the sentence may cause a board to be convened under the provisions of SR. 600440-1to determine the sanity of the prisoner. If the board * * * of further instructions.
15. Execution.
a 1 * * * *
k~ e
h officer charged with the execution will direct the burial party in the disposal of the body as prescribed by AR 210-190 and AR
30-1820.

27. Executioner
Bnofficial experienced executioner mill be appointed. If one isnot available to the command, a professional civilian executioner may be obtained and appointed; payment at the local rate, but not to exceed one hundred dollars ($100.00) per execution, may be authorized and paid from Contingencies of the Army, Project 416, Maintenance
TAQO 4601E-June 200499*-53 I
DA PAMPHLET 27-4

. . . .
Z
and Operations, Project 1554. In the event * * * and appointed esecntioner.
Nbisposition of Remains
If the nest * * ‘by pertiilei~t regulations. (See AR 210-190 and
AR 30-1820.)
a.cDisposition of Effects
J See Section 6, The Act of 5 May 1950 (PL 506, 81st Congress) and SR 600-560-5. TVar criinirlals and * * * disposition of effects.
p<Notifieation and Reports
r
Tlle officer desigilnted * * :Qircul~lstances attendant thereon. He will lilcen-ise, in ndclition, coinply with the requirements of section VI, SR 600-400-10. The quarterillaster or * * * in AR 30-1815.
[AG 2.30 (19 31ay 83) 1
BYORDER OF THE SECRETARY :
Of THE ARMY
OFFICIAL: J. LAWTON COLLINS
M7M.E. EEEGIS Chief of Staff, United States Army ~llajorGene?*al.USA The Adjutant General
~rsT~~nrrr?os
: ,
Actize di’m~/:
GSUSA (3;SSUSA (2);Tech Svc (2) ;Bdmin & Tech SVCBd (2), 19 (10) ;BFF (5) ;OS Maj Comd (10) ;Base Co~ncl(10) :JIDW (2) ;A (lo) ;CHQ (lo) ;Div (2) ; FT (1);Sch (2) escept 19 (100).
NG: Xone.
dm7 y Re.serce: Xone.
For esplunatio~l of ciistribution forlllula, see SR 310-90-1.

. . .,
..
,. .
._.2.. ‘: . a6-bik
U. i.DOYEZSHENT PRINTING OFFICI: 1953
CONTENTS

Authority ……………………………………………………………….. 1

Time and Place ………………………………………………………. 2

Delegation of Authority ……………………………………. 1 ….. 3

Insanity …………………………………………………………………. 4

Pregnancy …………………………………………………………….. 5

Witnesses ……………………………………………………………….. 6

Multiple Executions ……………………………………………….. 7

Escort …………………………………………………………………….. 8

Chaplain ……………………………………………………………….. 9

Medical Officer ………………………………………………………. 10

Interpreter …………………………………………………………….. 11

Miscellaneous ………………………………………………………… 12

II. EXECUTION BY MUSKETRY
Officer Charged with Execution ……………………………… 13 5

, Assembly of Escort ……………………………………………….. 14 6

Execution ………………………………………………………………… 15 6

Ill. EXECUTION BY HANGING
Officer Charged with Execution …………………………….. 16 9

Executioner ……………………………………………………………. 17 10

Assembly ……………………………………………………………….. 18 10

Execution ……………………………………………………………….. 19 10

IV. PROCEEDINGS AFTER EXECUTION


Dsposton of Remains ………………………………………….. 20 12

Disposition of Effects ……………………………………………. 21 12

Notification and Reports …..r …………………………………… 22 12

V. DEPARTURES
. .Lim~ted Facilities …………………………………………………… 23 13

In Time of War ………………………………………………………. 24 13

VI. STRUCTURES
Permanent Scaffold ……………………………………………….. 25 14

Semipermanent Scaffold ………………………………………… 26 14

Emergency Structures ……………………………………………. 27 14

Vll. EQUIPMENT
Hood .. 28 15

Collapse Board and Binding Strap 29 15

30 15

Rope ………………………………………………………………………. Pot 31 15

RESTRICTED

This pamphlet szipevsedes WD Pamphlet 27-4, 12 June 1944, including C 1,
‘>
12 August 1944
SECTION I
GENERAL

1. Authority
L

Military executions\ill be by musketry or by hanging as desig- nated by a court imposing the sentence of death. (Man-ual for
2. Time and Place
the execution of a sentence of death
the time and place for such execution, any designathn made by the court as to such matters being disregarded. (~a&%-courts-~artial, 87b, page 76.)
impracticable to proceed with the
or at the place selected, the officer
authority to execute the sentence
opportunity another time or place,
acfording to the new designation.
h’–I4
3. Delegation of Authority
a.
The officer designated by the confirming authority to execute the approved sentence of death will be responsible for its execution. He may delegate to a subordinate officer the duties connected with the carrying out of the execution.

b.
The subordinate officer named will be one under the direct control of’the delegating authority. He will be duly and officially named by &n order of the officer designated to execute the sentence and directed therein to carry out the execution.

4. Insanity
If, after issuance of order of execution, the prisoner shows signs of having become insane, the officer designated to execute the sentence may cause a board to be convened under the provisions of AR 600-500 to determine the sanity of the prison&. If the board finds the prisoner to be sane, the execution will proceed as ordered ;but in the event he shall be found to be insane, notice of the findings -of the board, including, if practicable, its report, will be transmitted to the confirming authority if other than the Presi-
dent, or to The Adjutant General if the sentence was confirmed by the President, and the execution will be stayed pending the receipt of further instructions.
5. Pregnancy
If the prisoner is a woman and medical examination reveals that she is pregnant, immediate report of the fact will be made to the confirming authority or to The Adjutant General, as prescribed in paragraph 4, and the execution will be stayed pending the receipt of further instructions.
6. Witnesses
The officer designated to execute the sentence will prescribe whether the execution will be public or private, rules of secrecy as to time, place, and the presence of witnesses, military or civilian, including members of the press if the presence of the latter is deemed proper. In the case of the execution of a foreign national, the officer designated to execute the sentence will prescribe whether persons of the same nationality as the condemned may be present. If troops are designated to observe an execution by musketry, these troops will be paraded and formed into the three sides of a hollow rectangle, facing inward and toward the site on which the prisoner is to be placed. In executions by hanging, the troops, if designated to witness the execution, will be paraded and formed in a square around the gallows. No photographs nor motion pictures of the actual execution will be permitted except for official purposes. The environs of the place of execution will be closely and securely guarded to prevent the intrusion of unauthorized persons. All persons in attendance will be cautioned that no demonstrations or unseemly conduct will be tolerated. Troops will assume the posi- tion of attention upon the approach of the escort and will remain at attention until the conclusion of the ceremony.
7. Multiple Executions
In multiple executions, the prisoners may be executed either simul- taneously or in succession. Where two or more prisoners are to be executed in succession, the same execution party or gallows may be used for each execution. Where two or more prisoners are to be executed simultaneously by musketry, a separate execution party will be provided for each of the prisoners. The latter will be placed in line at an interval of ten paces. Where two or more prisoners are to be executed simultaneously by hanging, the officer
designated to execute the sentence will prescribe the number of gallows to be erected, and the prisoners will be hanged from the gallows simultaneously or by groups.
8. Escort
The escort for execution may be mounted, dismounted, or motor- ized, but upon arrival at the scene of execution, mounted or motor- ized escorts will form in the manner prescribed for dismounted escorts. The minimum escort will consist of components as pre- scribed in paragraph 14b.
9. Chaplain
In all executions, a chaplain of the prisoner’s choice will be pro- vided if practicable. If no chaplain of the prisoner’s choice or of his particular faith and/or race is available, the officer charged with the execution of the sentence will take all reasonable measures to provide a civilian clergyman of that faith and/or race. The chaplain should be available at all times after the prisoner is noti- fied of the time of execution.
10. Medical Officer
A medical officer will be officially designated to be in attendance upon the execution. It will be his duty to determine the extinction of life in the prisoner and to make pronouncement thereof. He will furnish a death certificate to accompany the report of exe-cutioh.
11. Interpreter
In the event that the prisoner does not speak English, an interpre- ter will be officially designated to be in attendance at the notifica- tion of the prisoner (par. 12a) and the execution. It is his duty to interpret the charge, finding, sentence orders and any last state- ment made by the prisoner. Before entering upon his duties, the interpreter will take the oath of affirmation required of an inter- preter for a court-martial.
12. Miscellaneous
a. The prisoner will be notified of the time of execution no less than 24 hours prior thereto if practicable at which time the order directing the execution will be read to him by the officer charged with the execution of the sentence or by some officer at his direc- tion. The chaplain should be present.
b.
‘If practicable due notice will be given to the next of kin of the prisoner and an opportunity ‘provided for the claiming of the body following the execution.

c.
A prisoner in the Armed Forces of the United States will be dressed in regulation uniform from which all decorations, insignia, or other evidences of membership therein have been removed. Likewise, no such evidences will appear on any clothing used in burial. Similar procedures may be dispensed with, in the dis- cretion of the officer responsible for carrying out the execution

(or higher authority) in the case of a prisoner in the armed forces of another nation. A prisoner not within the foregoing categories may be dressed in any clothing available.
cl. After the prisoner is notified of the time of execution (a above) the commanding officer of the place of confinement will, where practicable, approve any reasonable special request of the ~risoner, including special request for food, and permission to have in his possession a Bible, Rosary, or similar religious articles during the execution. Sufficient writing paper and envelopes should be furnished and no limit placed on the number of letters which may be written. All letters are subject to censorship and may or may not be forwarded.

SECTION II
EXECUTION BY MUSKETRY

13. Officer Charged with Execution
The officer charged with the execution will command the escort
and make the necessary arrangements for the conduct of the exe-
cution. He will-
a. Instruct and rehearse the escort and the execution party in

their duties, insuring that all members of the execution party are qualified in the weapon to be used.
b.
Arrange for the receipt of the prisoner by the prisoner guard.

c.
Arrange for an execution party of eight men and one ser- geant.

d.
Arrange for a chaplain to accompany the prisoner.

e.
Arrange for the presence of a medical officer at the scene of the execution.

f.
Cause a post with proper rings placed therein for securing the prisoner in an upright position .to be erected at the place of execution.

g.
Cause eight rifles to be loaded in his presence. Not more than three nor less than one will be loaded with blank ammunition. He will place the rifles at random in the rack provided for that purpose.

h.
Provide a black hood to cover the head of the prisoner.

i.
Provide a 4-inch round target, white or black as appropriate ; ablack target will be used when light colored clothing is worn.

j.
Cause the prisoner’s arms to be secured either behind his back or in front at the waist (fig. I),before or immediately after his receipt by the prisoner guard.

k.
Arrange for an ambulance or other conveyance with suffi- cient personnel to be in attendance upon the execution to receive and care for the body. In the event a contract undertaker is used by the quartermaster, his services may be substituted. See AR

30-1820.

1. Provide straps to secure the prisoner to the post at waist and ankles. (See par. 29b.)
14. Assembly of Escort
a.
If a band is prescribed, it will be formed in accordance with chapter 3, FM 12-50, proceed to the exterior door of the place of imprisonment at which the prisoner is to be received by the pris- oner guard, and halt near the door, facing in the direction of the scene of ,the execution.

b.
The prisoner guard will consist of twelve men armed with rifles, under the command of a sergeant armed with a pistol. The prisoner guard will form in double ranks and at the proper time will proceed to the place of imprisonment to receive the prisoner.

c.
The main guard will consist of one or more platoons and will form in the rear of the band.

d.
The execution party will be formed unarmed and proceed to a previously prepared rack of rifles, secure arms, and move to the scene of the execution, halting 15 paces from and facing the posi- tion to be taken by the prisoner. At close interval, and at order arms, the party will await the arrival of the prisoner and escort.

e.
At the designated time the prisoner, with his arms bound securely behind his back or in front at the waist (fig. I), accom- panied by the chaplain, will be received by the prisoner guard and placed between the ranks. The escort will then proceed toward the scene of the execution, the band playing the “Dead March.”

f.
The escort will approach the scene of the execution on line with the open side of the rectangle formed by the witnessing troops. The band will move past the point at which the prisoner is to be placed, and will take position on the opposite side of the rectangle, facing the scene,of the execution. The prisoner guard, prisoner, and chaplain will proceed directly to the prisoner’s post, halt, and face the execution party. The main guard will proceed to a point 5 paces behind the execution party and form a line facing the scene of execution.

15. Execution
a. The officer charged with the execution will take position in front of the execution p&ty and face the prisoner. If troops are present, he will read the charge, finding, sentence, and orders aloud to the prisoner. He will then notify the prisoner and the chaplain that a brief time will be allowed the prisoner for any last state- ment. ‘After a reasonable time, he will order the sergeant of the execution party to secure the prisoner to the post and to place the hood over his head. Then the medical officer will place the target over the prisoner’s heart. The prisoner prepared, the officer
charged with the execution will order the prisoner guard to join the main guard ;the chaplain and medical officer will retire to the flank taken by the band. The officer charged with the execution will take position 5 paces to the right of and 5 paces to the front of the execution party.
b. Commands for the execution will, when practical, be given by a combination of manual and oral signals as prescribed.
(1)
When the officer charged with the execution raises the right arm vertically overhead, palm forward, fingers extended and joined, the execution party will come to the “Ready” position as prescribed for firing a volley, and will unlock rifles.

(2)
When the officer charged with the execution lowers his arm to a horizontal position in front of his body, the execution party will take the position of “Aim.”

(3)
When the officer charged with the execution drops his arm directly to his side and orally commands: FIRE, the execution party will fire simultaneously.

(4)
The officer charged with the execution will then bring the execution party to “Order Arms.”

c.
When the use of manual signals is not practical, the following oral commands are prescribed :

(1)
At the command READY, the execution party will take that position and unlock rifles.

(2)
At the command AIM, the execution party will take that position with rifles aimed at target on the prisoner’s body.

(3)
At the command FIRE, the execution party will fire simul- taneously.

d.
The officer charged with the execution will join the medical officer who will examine the prisoner and, if necessary, direct that the “coup de grace” be administered. Should the medical officer SO decide, the sergeant of the execution party will administer the “coup de grace,” with a hand weapon, holding the muzzle just above the ear and one foot from the skull.

e.
Under exceptional circumstances, the officer charged with the execution, with the permission of the commanding officer, may detail an extra file of six men to administer the “coup de grace.” This file will form the rear rank of the execution party, and if it is necessary to administer the “coup de grace,” will move in front of the execution party and fire, at the command of the officer charged with the execution.

f.
Upon pronouncement of the death of the prisoner by the medical officer, the execution party will proceed to the racks from which the rifles were originally obtained, and replace the rifles in the racks at random. The execution party will then be dismissed.

g.
The escort, with the band playing a lively air, will return to their parade ground and be dismissed.

h.
The witnessing troops will parade in column in front of the body and proceed to their respective parade grounds where they will be dismissed.

i.
The officer charged with the execution will direct the burial party in the disposal of the body as prescribed by AR 210-500 and

EXECUTION BY HANGING
16. Officer Charged with Execution
The officer charged with the execution will command the escort and make the necessary arrangements for the conduct of the execution. He will- .
a.
Instruct components of the escort in their duties.

b.
Arrange for the receipt of the prisoner by the prisoner guard.

c.
Arrange for a chaplain to accompany the prisoner.

d.
Arrange for the presence of a medical officer at the scene of the execution.

e.
Provide a proper gallows.

f.
Provide a black hood to cover the head of the prisoner.

g.
Provide a collapse board for use if necessary.

h.
Cause the prisoner’s arms to be secured before or immedi- ately upon his receipt by the prisoner guard. The arms may be secured either behind the back or in front, fastened to the belt mr. 1).

i.
Arrange for a burial party as prescribed in paragraph 13k.

j.
Determine the proper amount of drop of the prisoner through the trap door. A standard drop chart for normal men of given weights is given below. Variation of the drop because of physical condition may be necessary. A medical officer should be consulted to determine whether any factors, such as age, health, or muscular condition will affect the amount of drop necessary for a proper

k.
Rehearse the execution within 24 hours prior to the scheduled time for the execution. A sandbag or similar object approximat-

execution.
120 lbs or less  170 lbs  6′  0″
125 lbs  175 lbs  5′  11″
130 lbs  180 Ibs  5′  9″
135 lbs  185 lbs  5′  7″
140 lbs  190 lbs  5′  6″
145 lbs  195 lbs  5′  5″
150 lbs  200 lbs  5′  4″
155 lbs  205 lbs  5′  2″
160 lbs  .  210 lbs  5′  1″
165 lbs  220 1bs and over 5’  0″

ing the prisoner’s weight may be used to insure proper fuhctioning of the gallows, trap door, and hangman’s noose.
17. Executioner
An official experienced executioner will be appointed. If one is not available to the command, a professional civilian executioner may be obtained and appointed ;payment at the local rate, but not to exceed one hundred dollars ($100.00) per execution, may be authorized and paid from Contingencies of the Army, Project 416. In the event a professional executioner is not available, a suitable emotionally stable member of the command will be selected and appointed executioner.
18. Assembly
a.
If a band is prescribed, it will be formed in accordance with chapter 3, FM 12-50, proceed to the exterior door of the place of imprisonment at which the prisoner is to be received by the pris- oner guard, and halt near the place of imprisonment, facing in the direction of the scene of the execution.

b.
The prisoner guard will consist of twelve men armed with rifles, under the command of a sergeant armed with a pistol. The prisoner guard will form in double ranks and at the proper time will proceed to the door to receive the prisoner.

c.
The main guard will consist of one or more platoons and will form in the rear of the band.

d.
At the designated time the prisoner, with his arms bound securely behind his back, accompanied by the chaplain, will be received by the prisoner guard and placed between the ranks. The escort will then proceed toward the scene of the execution, the band playing the “Dead March.”

e.
Upon the arrival of the escort, consisting of the band, pris- oner guard, main guard, prisoner and chaplain within the square formed by the witnessing troops before the gallows, the sergeant of the prisoner guard and a sergeant from the main guard will conduct the prisoner to the platform of the gallows, the officer charged with the execution and the chaplain preceding the pris- oner.

19. Execution
a. If troops are present, the officer charged with the execution will face the prisoner and read aloud to him the charge, finding, sentence and orders. He will then notify the chaplain and the
.prisoner that a brief time will be allowed the prisoner for any last statement. After a reasonable time he will have the execu- tioner place the hood ovep the prisoner’s head and bind his ankles. The executioner will then adjust the noose around the prisoner’s neck and remain beside the prisoner. The sergeant of the pris- oner guard or other individual designated-by the officer charged with the execution will then place himself in position at the trigger and, upon a signal from said officer, will spring the trap. The medical officer will then examine the body for time of death and report to the officer charged with the execution.
b. Upon the pronouncement of the death of the prisoner, the escort, with the band playing a lively air, will return to the parade ground and be dismissed.
.     c. The witnessing troops will move to their respective areas where they will be dismissed.
d. The officer charged with the execution will direct t.he burial party in the disposal of the body as prescribed by the commanding officer.

SECTION IV PROCEEDINGS AFTER EXECUTION
20. Disposition of Remains
If the next of kin or other relatives of the deceased desire the body, the officer designated to execute the sentence will, if practicable, permit its delivery to them for burial. If no such claim is made, he will cause it to be buried in a post or civilian cemetery or at the place of death, whichever may be deemed proper and is author- ized by pertinent regulations. (See AR 210-500 and AR 30-=.) e-,\
21. Disposition of Effects
See Articles of War 112 and sections V, VI, and VII, AR 600-550. War criminals and civilian resident criminals convicted by a Mili-
‘Led cx* itary Tribunal and executed by military authorities are considered
i’ as subject to military law for the purpose of disposition of effects.
22. Notification and Reports
I
The officer designated to execute the sentence will notify The Ad- jutant General immediately following the execution, by fastest available method of communication, of the carrying out of the sentence of death, the time, place and any unusual circumstances attendant thereon. He will likewise, in addition, comply with the \ requirements of section 11, AR 600-550 The quartermaster or
c, ‘
other officer in charge of burial will furnish report as provided in AR 30-1815.

SECTION V
DEPARTURES

23. Limited Facilities
If the facilities are not available for the carrying out of each of the provisions of this pamphlet or if the exigencies of the situation require it, the officer designated to execute the sentence may make the necessary departures from the provisions herein contained, except that he may not change the mode of execution. Any de- parture will be reported in writing to the authority ordering the execution.
24. In Time of War
In time of war :
a.
Only the minimum number of troops necessary to accomplish the execution need be employed.

b.
All instructions pertaining to the use of a band are inoper- atiae.

SECTION VI
STRUCTURES

25. Permanent Scaffold
A permanent type, demountable scaffold, with a metal trigger mechanism, will be erected when the need for such a structure is determined by the commanding officer. (See fig. 2.) Where available, troops belonging to the Corps of Engineers will be em- ployed in the constructing of the scaffold, but where not available, or where it is more practicable, other troops or civilians may be employed. Preliminary tests will be made to insure the strength of the rope in the stability of the scaffold’s construction. If facil- ities are limited, a trap door on the second floor bf the building may be constructed to effect the execution, or a similar improvising employed.
26. Semipermanent Scaffold
A semipermanent’ scaffold which requires no special metal fittings may be used in executions by hanging when deemed expedieni by the commanding officer. (See fig. 3.)
27. Emergency Structures
When the exigencies of the field so dictate, emergency type gallows may be used. (See fig. 4.)

SECTION VII -. EQUIPMENT
28. Hood
The hood will be black, the outer surface of rough materials, split at the open end so that it will come well down on the prisoner’s chest and back.
29. Collapse Board and Binding Strap
a. A collapse board will be provided for use in case of the col- lapse of the prisoner. (See fig. 5.)
30. Rope
The rope will be of manila hemp, at least 3/4, inch and not more than 1% inches in diameter and approximately 30 feet in length. The rope will be boiled and then stretched while drying to elim- inate any spring, stiffness, or tendency to coil. The hangman’s knot (figure 7) will be used in the preparation of the noose. That portion of the noose which slides through the knot will be treated with wax, soap, or grease to insure a smooth sliding action through the knot. The noose will be placed snugly around the prisoner’s neck in such a manner that the hangman’s knot is directly behind his left ear.
31. Post
Design for post used in execution by musketry as mentioned in paragraph 15a, is shown in figure 6.
A= Body Strop 8= Arm Strops l”x9″
Figure 1. Binding strap.
TRAP DOOR
PLAN OVER BEAM
PLATFORM AND STAIR PLAN AT SECTION A-A SCALE B1′-1′ Figure 2 0. Permanent scaffold.
f
V)
W
w

9

3a
I,W
Q)
I
?
Gw
FRONT ELEVATION SCALE I’
Figure 2 0. Permanent scaffold, front elevation.
I-P 861
Figure 2 @. Permanent scafold, side elevation.
EVENLY SPACED
-SPLIT TYPE PILLOW BLOCKS SPRING STEEL DOOR CATCH /
CONTINUOUS WELD
PLAN VIEW OF BELL CRANK
PLlT TYPE
LLOW BLOCKS

Figure 2 @. Parm.anent scaffold, bell crank.
Figure 3 – Semipermanent scaffold
Plan  of  Plat form  bW=12″  ==z==T
E1i8″Spiked All  Around  Top  of  – END
6″x 6″ To  Form  Plote  or  Ribban
2″x 6″

..-
_—
2″x4

Flooring
-2″x 6″
– Framing  For  Floor  p=12’14  Plan Trap  of Underside Door, One Half

Fiy7ire 3 0.Sernipev?nc~nentscaffold, details.
3/4” T 8G Floor
Section A -A
Elevation of Trigger Post $”= 12″
Heavy Strop Hinge
r 1
@ screw Eye
4″x4 ” 9′ 6″ Long Cut In Two Pieces At Center
Hinged To Stond with I-Inch Bow At Center
MATERIALS
2 pcs 6″r 8″- 22′ Long Gollows Posts 4 6″x6″-12′ Platform Posts 2 2% 10″-16′ Step Stringers 4 2″nlO”-10′ Cross Bor -Beam 3 2’n8″ -14′ Joist- Extend for stair landing I 2uxeu-1 2′ Joist-Shorl 7 2nx8v~-10′ Joists- Regular
8 2″x6″-14′ X races 4 2″r6″-10′ GoIIows Braces I 41i4″-10′ Knee Braces (cut to 5′ 0″) 4 ,,nx4″-4′ Newels 2 2″x4″-16′ Stair Roil
I 2″x4″-14′ Stair Roil 3 2-nx4–10 Stair Roil 8 hop Door Rail
3 2’k8″ 8′ Long I pc L”a6″-8′ Long Trap Door Roils I 2-11 6 3~4’8′ 140 BY 3/4″ T 8G Pine Floon’rq
4 2″1110″-14′ Cut into 3′ 6″ lengths Step Tread I S”r4″-10′ Trigger
Figure 3 @. Sewtipermanent sea,fold, details (Continued).
3 POLES SECURELY TIED AT TOP AND SUNK 18″ IN GROUND
Tripod Lashing
I     G-5

lo’     ;Excavate
I

1 I     I

I

I     1 I
I

1

4. ‘. I I I
. I 1

‘-.A—/-#
Figzi7.e 4. Emergency gallows, ~Jos~
type and tripod tyl~e.
A-&oce Boord 8 B B = i Inch strops
123
Figure 5. Collapse board.
RING AND BOLTS ON TWO OPPOSITE
Figuve 6. Post used in execution by mnusket9.y.
STANDING PART
Length of loops: from A to B should be approximate:^ 18 inches, and from C to Running End should be approximately 35 inches to 108 inches depending upon diameter of the rope. Wrap Runnine End around for six turns. No extra rope should remain.
knot.

Fiy~~9.e7 8ancl @. Hc~~zymun’s
Tighten loops by pulling at Running End. Lock loops and form knot by pulling down at point D. Slide knot up or down on Standing Part to adjust size of loop.

Figzi9.e 7 @ and 0.
Au.5. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1947-J. 751637-105

 

Rules warfare 1940

Rules warfare 1940

WAR DEPARTMENT FIELD MANUAL
RULESOF
LANDWARFARE

Cover page
WAR DRIPAXTM~NT,
WABHINQTON,
October 1, 1940. FM 27-10, Rules of Land Warfare, is published for the infor- mation and guidance of all concerned.
[A. G. 062.11 (6-17-40).]
BYORDER OF THE SBCXETSYOF WAR :

6.C. MARSHALL, Ohiep of Btaff.
OFFICIAL:
E.S. ADAMS,
Major General,
The Adjutant General.

II

FOREWORD
Except as hereinafter noted, the official English text or trans- lation of every treaty provision obligatory upon the United States, bearing upon the conduct of the forces in the field, is quoted verbatim in the chapter to which it relates. The only exceptions
are-
1.
The Red Cross conventions of 1864 and 1906, which, although superseded by the Red Cross convention of 1929, chapter 5, as between parties to the latter, continue in force, respectively, as between the United States and such of the other parties to each of the former, as have not ratified or adhered to the latter ;

2.
The Hague Convention of 1899,relating to the laws and customs of war on land (first international peace conference), which, although superseded by Hague Convention No. IV of 1907 (second international peace conference), herein quoted, as between parties to the latter, continues in force as between the United States and such of the other parties to the former as have not yet ratified or adhered to the latter; and

3.
Chapter I1 of the annex to Hague Convention No. IV of October 18, 1907, relating to prisoners of war (excepting arts. 10, 11,and 12 relating to paroles ;pars. 148,154, 156), which, although in effect superseded by the Geneva convention of July 27, 1929, upon the same subject, chapter 4, as between parties to the latter, continues in force as between the United States and such of the other parties to the former as have not

I
ratified or adhered to the latter.
The essential provisions of each of the antecedent conventions mentioned in 1and 2 above, and of chapter I1 of the annex to Hague Convention No. IV (excepting the three articles above mentioned), have been substantially reincorporated within the
more recent and more comprehensive conventions on the same subject, so that observance of the latter practically includes observance of the former. For this reason, and in view of the
FOREWORD
general rule prescribed by paragraph 5, only the most recent convention on each of these subjects is quoted in this publi- cation, saving the three articles on paroles above mentioned.
Under the general rule last above mentioned, pertinent in- formation concerning ratifications, adherences, reservations, and denunciations (withdrawals) will be specially notified by higher authority to the commanders in the field, as occasions arise. thus rendering unnecessary the inclusion of such data in this text, and avoiding the frequent changes that such inclusion would entaiL
TABLE OF CONTENT8

Paragraphs Page
Abbreviations —–. —-VI

CHAPTER 1-7 1

1. Basic rules and principles .-..-…—-….————-
2. Qualilications of armed forces of belligerents —-.­—-4
8-13

3. Hostilities:

SECTIONI. Commenccmeut of hostilities .-_-.——­–.-.—–
14-21

11. Conduct ofhostilities. -.–.-.–..— – —–.——-22-69

–.———-..——————-
OEAPTER4. Prisoners of WBI—70-172

6. Sick, wounded, and dead .-.-.–.–­..–­.–.——–173-201

6. Espionage and treason .—­..——–­———–.—2432-214

7. Intercourse between belligercnts-. .-­..—-…..—–
215-234

8. Military passports, safe-conducts, sabguards, and
mtels-.——.–..———-.————-.——–
235-243

9. Capitulationsandmisti~~s~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~244-270

10.     Military occupation and government of enemy terri-

tory.—–­..-.-.-.—…——…..-.——–…..
211-344
11. Penalties for violations of the laws of war .–.–­–._.345-369

12. Neutrality-.-­..———..–­—.—–.————-360-403

Index—- – -_—–.

ABBREVIATIONS
G.p.W—-Geneva convention of July 27, 1929, relative to the treatment of prisoners of war; Treaty Series No. 846; 47 Strat.* 233; Treaties, etc., between the U. S. , and other Powers, 1923-1937, Vol. BV, 5224. G.W.S—-Geneva (Red Cross) convention of July 27, 1929, for the aanelioration of the condition of the wounded and sick of armies in the field; Treaty Series No. 847; 47 Stat.* 266; Treaties, etc., beOween the U.S. and other Powers, 1923-1937, Vol. IV, 5209.
H.1[II—–Fl[ague Convention No. 111 of October 18, 1907, re-lating to the opening of hostilities; Treaty Series No. 538; 36 Stat.* 2259; Malloy, Treaties, Vol. 11, 2259.
H.IV—–Hague Convention No. IV of October 18, 1907, re-specting the laws and customs of war on Isnd; Treaty Series No. 539; 36 Stat? 2277; MaUoy, Treaties, VoE. If, 2269.
H.8——Hague Convention No. V of October 18, 1907, re-specting the rights and duties of neutral powers and persons in case of war on land; Treaty Series No. 540; 36 Stat.* 2320; Mallog, Treaties, Vol. 11, 2290.
H.VIII—Hague Convention No. VIII of October 18, 1907, relative to the laying of automatic subn~arine contact mines; Treaty Series No. 541; 36 Stat.* 2332; Malloy, Treaties, VoL II, 2304.
H. IX—–Hague Convention No. IX of October 18, 1907, con-cerning bombardment by naval forces in time of war; Treaty Series No. 542; 36 Stat.* 2351; Malloy, Treaties, Vol. If, 2316
H.D.XIV-Hague Declaration No. XW of October 16, 1907, prohibiting the discharge of projectiles and explo- sives from balloons; Treaty Series No. 546; 36 Stat.* 2439; Malloy, Treaties, Vol. 11,2366. H.R——Annex to Hague Convention No. JT of October 18, 1907, embodying the regulations respecting the laws and customs of war on land adopted by that convention; Treatg Series No. 539; 36 Stat* 2295; Malloy, Treaties, Vol. 11,2281.

*United States Statutes at Large.
V;i
BASIC FIELD MANUAL
RULES OF LAND WARFARE

(The matter contained herein supersedes BN,Vol. VII, part tw’o, January 2, 1934).
CEAPTER 1
BASIC RULES AND PRINCIPLES

1.
General.-bong civilized nations the conduct of war is regulated by certain well-established rules known as the rules or laws of war. These rules cover and regulate warfare both on land and sea. Those which pertain particularly to war on land are called the rules of land warfare. It is the latter with which this manual is concerned.

2.
Written rules.-Many of the rules of war have been set forth in treaties or conventions to which thc United States and other nations are parties. These are commonly called the written rules or laws of war.

3.
Unwritten rules.-Some of the rules of war have never yet been incorporated in any treaty or convention to which the United States is signatory. These are commonly called the unwritten rules or laws of war, although they are well defined by recognized authorities on international law and well estab- lished by the custom and usage of civilized nations.

4.
Basic principles.-Among the so-called unwritten rules or laws -of war are three interdependent basic principles that underlie all of the other rules or laws of civilized warfare, both written and unwritten, and f~rm the general guide for conduct where no more specific rule applies, to wit :

a, The principle of military necessity, under which, subject to the principles of humanity and chivalry, a belligerent is justified in applying any amount and any kind of force to- compel the complete submission of the enemy. with the lea& possible expenditure of time, life, and money ;
RULES OF LANC WARFARE
ZI. The principle of hurnamitv, prohibiting employment of any such kind or degree of violence as is not actually necessary for the purpose of the war ;and
c. The ,principle 07 chivalrg, which denounces and forbids resort to dishonorable means, expedients, or conduct.
5. Force of rules.-+. The unwritten rules are binding upon all civilized nations. They will be strictly observed by our forces, subject only to such exceptions as shall have been di- rected by competent authority by way of legitimate reprisals for illegal conduct of the enemy. (See par. 358.)
b. Technically each of the written rules is binding only be- tween powers that have ratified or adhered to, and have not thereafter denounced (withdrawn from), the treaty or conven- tion by which the rule is prescribed, and is binding only to the extent permitted by the reservations, if any, tha.t have accom- panied such ratification or adherence on either side. However, the written rules herein quoted in bold-faced type are all pre-scribed by treaties or conventions each of which has been rati- fied without reservation, and not thus far denounced, by the United States and many other nations. They are in large part but formal and specific applications of general principles of the unwritten rules. While solemnly obligatory as between the signatory powers, they may be said also to represent the con- sensus of modern international public opinion as to how bellig- erents and neutrals should conduct themselves in the particulars indicated. As a general rule they will be strictly observed and enforced by United States forces in the field, as far as appli- cable there, without regard to whether they are legally binding upon all of the powers immediately concerned. It is the respon- sibility of higher authority, as occasions arise, to determine and to instruct the commander in the field, which, if any, of the written rules herein quoted are not legally binding as between the United States and each of the other powers immediately concerned, and which, if any, for that reason are not for the time being to be observed or enforced.
6. Military government and martial law distinguished.-Military government is that form of government which is established and maintained by a belligerent by force of arms over occupied territory of the enemy and over the inhabitants thereof. In this definition the term “territory of the enemy”
RULES OF LAND WBRFAR.E
6-7
includes not only the territory of an enemy nation, but also domestic territory recovered by military occupation from rebels treated as belligerents.
Martial law is the temporary government of the civil popula- tion through the military forces as necessity may require in domestic territory as distinguished from occupied territory of an enemy recognized as a belligerent.
So far as the United States forces are concerned, military government and martial law are exercised by the military com- mander under the direction of the President, as Commander in Chief of the Army aid Navy.
The most prominent distinction between military government and martial law is, that the former is exercised only in the ter- ritory of a hostile belligerent and is within the realm of interna- tional law, while the latter is invoked only in domestic territory whose local government and inhabitants are not treated or recognized as belligerents.
7. Military jurisdiction.-Military jurisdiction is of two kinds: First, that which is conferred and defined by statute; second, that which is derived from the common law of war. The character of the courts which have jurisdiction over mili- tary offenses depends upon the local laws of each particular country.
In the armies of the United States, military jurisdiction is exercised through the following military tribunals :
a.
Courts martial.

b.
Military commissions.

c.
Provost courts.

While general courts martial have concurrent jurisdiction with military commissions and provost courts to try any offender who by the law of war is subject to trial by military tribunals, it has generally been held that military commissions have no jurisdiction of such purely military offenses specified’ in the Articles of War as those articles expressly make punishable by sentence of court martial (except where the military commis- sion is also given express statutory jurisdiction over the offense
(A W. 80, 81,82)). In practice, offenders who are not subject to the Articles of War, but who by the law of war are subject to trial by military tribunals, are tried by military commissions or provost courts.
IPULES OF LAND WBRFARF:
CHAPTER 2
QUALIFICATIONS OF ARMED FORCES OF
BELLIGERENTS

8. Genera1 division of enemy population.-The enemy popu- lation is divided in war into two general classes, known as the armed forces and the peaceful population. Both classes have distinct rights, duties, and disabilities, and no person can belong to both classes at one and the same time.
% Lawful belligerents.-+. Armies, militia, and aoZunteer corps.-The laws, rights, and duties of war apply not only to armies, but also to militia and volunteer corps fulfilling the following conditions :
1.
To be commanded by a person responsible for his subor- dinates;

2.
To have a fixed distinctive emblem recognizable at a dis-t ance ;

3.
To carry arms openly; and

4.
To conduct their operations in accordance with the laws and usages of war. In countries where militia or volunteer corps constitute the army, or form part of it, they are included under the denomination ‘hrmy” (H.R., art. I).

6. Lede en masse.-The inhabitants of a territory which has not been occupied, who, on the approech of the enemy, spon- taneously take up arms to resist the invading troops without having had time to organize themselves in accordance with article 1, shall be regarded as belligerents if they carry arms openly and if they respect the laws and customs of war (H. R., art. 2).
c. Combatants and noncombatants.-The armed forces of the belligerent parties may consist of combatants and noncombat-ants. In the case of capture by the enemy, both haves right to be treated as prisoners of war (H.R, art. 3).
10.
Treatment as brigands, etc., forbidden.-No belligerent has the right to declare that he will treat every captured man in arms of a Zevde enmasse as a brigand or bandit.

11.
Deserters, etc., not to enjoy immunity.-Certain classes of those forming part of a levee en, mmse cannot claim the priv- ileges accorded in paragraph 9b, hng these are deserters

RULES OF LAND WARFARE
11-16

from, or subjects of, the invading belligerent, and persons who are known to have violated the laws and customs of war.
32. Uprisings in occupied territory.-If the people of a coun- try, or any portion thereof, already occupied by an army, rise against it, they are violators of the laws of war, and are not entitled to their protection.
13. Determination of status of captured troops.-The deter-mination of the status of captured troops is to be left to higher military authority or to military tribunals. Summary execu- tions are no longer contemplated under the laws of mar. The officer’s duty is to hold the persons of those captured and leave the question of their being regulars, irregulars, deserters, etc., to the determination of competent authority.
CHAPTER 3
HOSTILITIES Paragrapha S~CTION 14–21
I. Commencement of hostilities ———————-
11. Conduct of hostilities ………………………. 22-69

COMMENCEMENT OF HOSTILITIES
14.
Declaration of war required.-The contracting powers recognize that hostilities between themselves must not corn-, mence without presious and explicit warning, in the form either of a reasoned declaration of war or of an ultimatum with conditional declaration of war (H. III,art. I).

15.
Surprise still possible.-Nothing in the foregoing rule requires that any particular length of time shall elapse between declaration of war and the commencement of hostilities. It is still possible, therefore, to make a sudden and unexpected declaration of war and thus surprise an unprepared enemy.

16.
Notification to neutrals.-The existence of a state of war must be notified to the neutral powers without delay, and shall not take effect in regard to them until after the receipt of . a notification, which may, however, be given by telegraph Neutral powers, nevertheless, cannot rely on the absence of notification if it is clearly established that they were in fact aware of the existence of a state of war (H. IZi, art. 2).

17-21 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
17.
When articles effective between parties.-Article 1 (see par. 14) of the present convention shall take effect in case of war between two or more of the contracting powers. Article 2 (see par. 16) is binding as between a belligerent power which is a party to the convention and neutral powers which are also parties to the convention (H. ZII,art. 3).

18.
Legal and commercial importance of above articles.- This convention (H. 111) is important from both the legal and commercial points of view since it requires belligerents themselves publicly to announce a definite date for the com- mencement of hostilities, from which date they become entitled to exercise the rights of belligerency, are themselves required to respect the rights of neutrals, and may exact from neutrals compliance with the obligations of neutrality.

19.
Status of civilian population.-It is now universally recognized that hostilities are restricted to the armed forces of belligerents. Inhabitants who refrain from acts of hostility and pursue their ordinary vocations must be distinguished from the armed forces of the belligerent; must be treated leniently; must not be injured in their lives or liberty, except for cause and after due trial; and must not, as a rule, be deprived of their private property.

20.
Detention and internment.-Enemy subjects located or resident in our territory are not made prisoners en rnasse on the breaking out of hostilities. Persons known to be active or reserve officers, or reservists, of the hostile army, as well as per- sons suspected of communicating with the enemy, will be detained and, if deemed advisable, interned on the ground of self-preservation in the exercise of the right of control.

21.
Expulsion.-In modern practice the expulsion of the citizens or subjects of the enemy is generally decreed from sea- ports, fortresses, defended areas, and the actual or contemplated theaters of operation. The practice as to expulsion from other territory is not uniform, expulsion being resorted to usually for grave reasons of state only. When decreed, the persons expelled should be given such reasonable notice, consistent with public safety, as will enable them to arrange for the collection, dis-posal, and removal of their goods and property.

RULES OF LAND WARFARE
CONDUCT OF HOSTILITIES
MILITARY NECESSITY
22.
Object of war.-The object of war is to bring about the complete submission of the enemy as soon as possible by means of regulated violence.

23.
Military necessity.-Military necessity justifies a resort to all the measures which are indispensable for securing this object and which are not forbidden by the modern laws and customs of war.

24.
Measures justified by military necessity.-Military neces-sity admits of-

a.
All direct destruction of life or limb of armed enemies, and of other persons whose destruction is incidentally unavoidable in the Brmed contests of war.

b.
The capturing of every armed enemy, and of every enemy of importance to the hostile government, or of peculiar danger to the captor.

c.
The destruction of property, if demanded by the necessities of war ;the obstruction of ways and channels of traffic, travel, or communication ; and the withholding of sustenance or means of

&/Life from the enemy.
d.
The appropriation of whatever the enemy’s country affords that is necessary for the subsistence and safety of the army.

e.
Such deception as does not involve the breaking of g 6

od faith, either positively pledged, regarding agreements entered into during the war, or supposed by the modern law of war to exist.
25. Measures not justified by military necessity.-Military necessity does not admit of cruelty-that is, the infliction of suffering merely for spite or revenge ;nor of maiming or wound- ing except in combat; nor of torture to extort confessions. It does not admit of the use of poison in any way, nor of the wanton devastation of a district. It admits of deception, but disclaims acts of perfidy. The practice of recent years has been to regard the prohibition against the use of poison as not appli- cable to the use of toxic gases. (See par. 29.)
26-29 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
PROHIBITIONS AND LIMITATIONB
26. Means of injuring the -enemy limited.-The right of belligerents to adopt means of injuring the enemy is not unlim-ited (H.P.R.? art. 22).
The means employed are definitely restricted by international declarations and conventions and by the laws and usages of war.
27. Discharging explosives from balloons.-The contracting powers agree to prohibit, for a period extending to the close of .the third peace conference, the discharge of projectiles and explosives from balloons or by other new methods of a similar nature (11. 63. XZV, Z907).
This rule may be said to be of comparatively slight value because it has been ratified by only two of the great powers, namely, the United States and Great Britain, and because its principal object is substantially accomplisl~ed by I1.R. article 25 (see par. 45),prohibiting bombardment of undefended places. It is not regarded as imposing any restriction upon the use of modern military aircraft against armed forces or defended places.
28. Poison.-In additioal, to the prohibitions provided by special conventions, it is especially’forbidden * * * to em-ploy poison or poisoned weapons (H.R., art. 23, par. (a)).
Application of rule.-This prohibition extends tb the use of means calculated to spread contagious diseases ;but does not pro- hibit measures being taken to dry up springs, to divert rivers and aqueducts from their courses, or to contaminate sources of water by placing dead animals therein or otherwise, provided such contamination is evident or the enemy is informed thereof. Con-cerning trezty provisions in regard to the use of toxic chemicals see paragraph 29.
29. Gases and chemicals.–The United States is not a party to any treaty, now in force, that prohibits or restricts the use in warfare of toxi’c or nontoxic gases, or of smoke or incendiary materials, etc. A treaty signed at Washington, February 6, 1922, on behalf of the United States, the British Empire, France, Italy, and Japan (Malloy, Treaties, POI. 111,p. 3116),contains a provision (art. V) prohibiting “The use in war of asphyxiating, poisonous or other gases, and all analogous liquias, niaterials. or devices,” bnt that treaty was expressly conditioned to become
RULES OF LAND WARFARF,
29-34
effective only upon ratification by all of the signatory powers, and, although heretofore ratxed by all of the signatories except Prance, having never been ratified by the latter, has never become effective. The protocol “for the prohibition of the use in war of asphyxiating, poisonous, or other gases, and of bac- teriological methods of warfare,” signed at Geneva June 17, 1925, on behalf of the United States and many other powers
(League of Nations Official Journal, Bug. 1925, p. 1159), al- though ratified or adhered to by, and now effective as between, a considerable number of the signatories, has never thus far been ratilied by, and is not in force as to, the United States, Japan, and some other powers.
30.
TreachesysIt is especially forbidden * * * to kill or wound treacherously individuals belonging to the hostile nation or army (HA.,art. 23, par. (b)).

31.
Assassination and outlawry.-!Ehe above article is con- strued as prohibiting assassination, proscription, or outlawry of an enemy, or putting a price upon an enemy’s head, as well as offering a reward for an enemy “dead or alive.” Offenders have no claim to be treated as combatants, but should be tried as criminals.

32.
Injury forbidden after surrender.-It is especially for- bidden * * * to kill or wound an enemy who, having laid down his arms, or having no longer means of defense, has sur- rendered at discretion (H. R., art. 23, pcrr. (c)).

33.
Refusal of quarter.-It is especially forbidden * * * to declare that no quarter will be given (If.R, art.23, par. (ti)).

34.
Employment of arms, etc., causing unnecessary injury.- It is especially forbidden * * * to employ arms, projec- tiles, or material calculated to cause unnecessary injury (H. R., art. 23, par. (e)).

The foregoing prohibition is not intended to apply to tho use of explosives contained in artillery projectiles, mines, aerial tor- pedoes, or hand grenades, but it does apply to the use of lances with barbed heads, irregular-shaped bullets, and projectiles filled with glass, to the use of any substance on bullets that would tend unnecessarily to inflame a wound inflicted by them, and to the scoring of the surface or filing off the ends of the hard cases of bullets.
35-30
RULES OF LAND WARFARE
35.
Train wrecking, etc.-Train wrecking and burning of camps or military depots are legitimate means of injuring the enemy when carried out by the members of the armed forces. Wrecking of trains should be limited strictly to cases which tend directly to weaken the enemy’s military forces.

36.
Subjects not to be compelled to take part in operations against their own country.-A belligerent is likewise forbidden to compel the nationals of the hostile party to take part in the operations of war directed against their own country, even if they were in the belligerent’s service before the commencement of the war (H. R., art. 23, last par.).

With respect to the impressment of guides see paragraph 308.

37.
Stratagems permissible.-Ruses of war and the employ- ment of measures necessary for obtaining information about the enemy and the country are considered permissible (8.R.,

art. 24).
38.
Good faith.-Absolute good faith with the enemy must be observed as a rule of conduct; but this does not prevent measures such as using spies, or inducing the enemy’s soldiers to desert, surrender, or rebel. In general, a belligerent may resort to those measures for mystifying or misleading the enemy against which the enemy ought to take measures to protect himself. (Seepars. 39, 40, 41.)

39.
Treachery or perfidy.-The ruses of war are legitimate so long as they do not involve treachery or perfidy on the part of the belligerent resorting to them. They are, however, for- bidden if they contravene any generally accepted rule.

The line of demarcation between legitimate ruses and forbid- den acts of treachery and perfidy is sometimes rather indistinct, but the following examples will indicate the correct principles. It would be an improper practice to secure an advantage of the enemy by deliberate lying which involves a breach of faith, or when there is a moral obligation to speak the truth, such as declaring that an armistice had been agreed upon when such is not the case. On the other hand, it is a perfectly proper ruse to summon a force to surrender on the ground that it is surrounded and thereby induce such surrender with a small force.
RULES OF LAND WARFARE &&44
40.
Legitimate ruses.-among legitimate ruses may be counted surprises, ambushes, feigning attacks, retreats, or flights, simulating quiet and. inactivity, giving large outposts or a strong advance guard to a small force, constructing works, bridges, etc., which it is not intended to use, transmitting false OP misleading signals and telegraph messages, and sending false dispatches and newspapers, with a view to their being inter- cepted by the enemy, lighting campfies where there are no troops, making use of the enemy’s signals, bugle and trumpet calls, watch words, and words of command, pretending to com- municate with troops or reinforcements which have no exist- ence, moving landmarks, putting up dummy guns or laying dummy mines, removing badges from uniforms, clothing the men of a single unit in the uniform of several different units so that prisoners and dead may give the idea of a large force.

41.
Misuse of flags, insignia, military uniforms of enemy.- It is especially forbidden * * * to make improper use of a flag of truce, of the national flag, or of the military insignia and uniform of the enemy, as well as of the distinctive badges of the Geneva convention (H. R., art. 43, par. (f)).

42.
Flags of truce.-Flags of truce must not be used surrep- titiously to obtain military information or merely to obtain time to effect a retreat or secure reinforcements or to feign a sur-render in order to surprise an enemy. An officer receiving them is not on this account absolved from the duty of exercising proper precautions with regard to them.

43.
National flags, insignia, and uniforms as a ruse.-In practice it has been authorized to make use of these as a ruse. The foregoing rule (par. 41) does not prohibit such use, but does prohibit their improper use. It is certainly forbidden to make use of them during a combat. Before opening fire upon the enemy they must be discarded.

44.
Improper use of distinctive emblem of Geneva conven- tion.-The use of the emblem of the Red Cross must be limited to the protection and designation of sanitary formations and establishments and the personnel and rnatSrieZ which the Geneva convention provides shall be respected. As examples of the improper use of the emblem may be cited the following: Using a hospital or other building accorded such protection as an observatory or military office or store ;firing from a build-

44-50
RULES OF LAND WARFARE
ing or tent displaying the emblem of the Red Cross; using a hospital train to facilitate the escape of combatants; displaying the emblem on wagons containing ammunition or nonmedical

stores; and in general, using it for cloalcing acts of hostility. (See pars. 196, 198.).
BOXBARDMENTR, ASSAULTS, AND BIEGEB
45. Bombardment of undefended places forbidden.-The attack or bombardment, by whatever means, of towns, villages. dwellings, or buildings which are undefended is prohibited
(H. R., art. 25).
46.
Use of ba1loons.-The addition of the words “by what-ever means” was for the purpose of making it clear that the bombarament of these undefended localities from balloons or nirplnnes is prohibitecl.

47.
Defended place defined.-Investment, bombardment, assault, and siege have always been recognized as legitimate means of warfare, but under the foregoing rule (par. 45) their use is limited to defended places which certainly will include the following :

a.
A fort or fortified place.

b.
A town surrouncled by detached forts, which is considered jointly with such forts as an indi~~isible

whole.
G. A place that is occupied by a combatant military force or through which such a force is passing The occupation of such a place by sanitary trcops alone is not suacient to make it a defended place.
48.
Throwing projectiles from aircraft on combatants and defended places.-There is no prohibition of general applica- tion among the great powers against the discharge of author- ized projectiles from aircraft against combatant troops or defended places. (See H. D. XIV (par. 27).)

49.
Notice of bombardment.-The officer in command of an attacking force must, before commencing a bombardment, except in cases of assault, do all in his glower to warn the authorities (H. Be., art 26).

This rule is understood to refer only to bombardments of places where parts of the civil population remain.
50. American rule.-It is no infraction of the unwritten law of war to omit thus to inform the enemy. Nevertheless, even
when belligerents are not subject to the above treaty, the comL manders of American forces, when admissible, will inform the enemy of their intention to bombard a place, so that the noncombatants, especially the women and children, may be removed before the bombardment commences.
I
51. Permitting population to leave besieged plac&-mere is no rule of law which compels the commander of an investing force to permit the population, including women, children, aged, sick, wounded, subjects of neutral powers, or temporary resi-
dents, to leave the besieged locality, even when a bombardment is about to commence. It is entirely within the discretion of the besieging commander whether he will permit them to leave and under what conditions.
52.
Diplomatic agents of neutrals.-Diplomatic agents of a neutral power should not be prevented from leaving a besieged place before hostilities commence. This privilege cannot be claimed while hostilities are in progress. The same privileges should properly be accorded to a consular officer of a neutral power. Should they voluntarily decide to rem8ain, they must undergo the same treatment as other inhabitants.

53.
Persons in zone between troops.-Persons dwelling in the zone between the opposing forces in the first stages of siege are treated as inhabitants of the invaded locality.

54.
Individuals leaving without permission.-Individuals who attempt to leave or enter a besieged place without obtaining the necessary permission are liable to be fired on and may be seat back into the besieged place or detained and put on trial.

55.
Expelled persons forced to return.-When a commander of a besieged place expels the noncombatants, in order to lessen the number of those who consume his stock of provisions, it is lawful, though an extreme measure, to drive them back, so as to hasten the surrender.

56.
Population expelled under fire.-It is not necessary to cease or relax fire because the enemy sends women and children Out of his lines in order to get them to a place of safety, but fire must not be intentionally opened in their direction.

57.
Communication wit11 besieged place.-The commander of the investing force has the absolute right to forbid all comL munication between the besieged place and the outside. The application of this rule to diplomatic envoys of neutral powers b unsettled.

13
58-62
RULES OF LAND WARFARE
58.
Buildings dedicated to religious works, etc., to be spared.-In sieges and bombardments all necessary steps must be taken to spare, as far as possible, buildings dedicated to religion, art, science, or charitable purposes, historic monu- ments, hospitals, and places where the sick and wounded are collected, provided that they are not being used at the time for military purposes.

It is the duty of the besieged to indicate the presence of such buildings or places by distinctive and visible signs, which shall be notified to the enemy beforehand (H.R., art. 27).

59.
Above buildings, etc., to display sign specified in naval treaty.-It is the duty of the inhabitants to indicate such mon- uments, edifices, or places by visible signs, which shall consist of large stiff rectangular panels divided diagonally into two colored triangular portions, the upper portion black, the lower portion white (H. IX, art. 5, par. 2,1907).

The foregoing rule adopted in this convention for naval war- fare should be adopted for protecting buildings under bombard- ment in land warfare.
60.
Forfeiture of inviolability.-The besieging forces are not required to observe the signs indicating inviolability of build- ings that are known to be used for military purposes, such as quarters for officers and men, observatories, or signaling stations.

61.
Pillage forbidden.-The pillage of a town or place, even when taken by assault, is prohibited (H. R., art. 28).

AUTOMATIC SUBMARINE CONTACT MINES
62. Kinds of mines.-There are three general cIasses of mines :
a.
Observation mines which are anchored along the coast and connected therewith by wires by which they can be exploded electrically.

b.
Unanchored automatic contact mines which explode by contact.

c.
Allchored automatic contact mines which are attached to heavy weights, and which can be placed at any required depth below the surface ; these mines are exploded automatically by contact with heavy bodies such as ships.

RULES OF LAND WARFARE
62-68
These rules do not deal with the first class of mines, since they are innocuous to peaceful shipping.
63.
Unanchored automatic contact mines.-It is forbidden to lay unanchored automatic contact mines, except where they are so constructed as to become harmless one hour at most after the person who laid them ceases to control them (H. VIII, art. I, par. I).

64.
Commercidl navigation-It is forbidden to lay automatic contact mines off the coast and ports of the enemy, with the sole object of intercepting commercial shipping (H. VIII, art. 2).

It is not probable that a belligerent .resorting to the use of these contact mines off the coast and ports of his enemy will hesitate to disavow the intention of intercepting commercial navigation. In its present form this rule permits the use of such mines so as to cause great risks to neutral navigation.

65.
Anchored automatic contact mines.-It is forbidden to lay anchored automatic contact mines which do not become harmless as soon as they have broken loose from their moor- ings (H. VIII, art. I, par. 2).

66.
Precautions to be taken.-When anchored automatic contact mines are employed, every possible precaution must be taken for the security of peaceful shipping.

The belligerents undertake to do their utmost to render these mines harmless within a limited time and, should they cease to be under surveillance, to notify the danger zones as soon as military exigencies permit, by a notice addressed to shipowners which must also be communicated to the governments through the diplomatic channel (H. VIII, art. 3).
67.
Mines of neutral powers.-Neutral powers which lay automatic contact mines off their coasts must observe the same rules and take the same precautions as are imposed on bellig- erents.

The neutral powers must inform shipowners, by a notice issued in advance, where automatic contact mines have been laid. This notice must be communicated at once to the gov- ernments through the diplomatic channel (A?. VIII, art. 4).

68.
Mines to be removed at close of war.-At the close of the war the contracting powers undertake to do their utmost to remove the mines which they had laid, each power removing its own mines.

15

68-72
RULES OF LAND WARFARE
As regards anchored automatic contact mines laid by one of the belligerents oE the coast of the other, their position must be notified to the other party by the powers which laid them, and each power must proceed with the least possible delay to remove the mines in its own waters (H. VVPII, art. 5).
69. Torpedoes.-It is forbidden to use torpedoes which do not become harmless when they have missed their mark (H. VIII, art. 1, par. 3).
CHAPTER 4
PRISONERS (3FWAR
70.
Definition.-Except as otherwise hereinafter indicated, every person captured or interned by a belIigerent power be- cause of the war is, duri~g the period of such captivity or internment, a prisoner of war, and is entitled to 52 i’eeogilized and treated as such under the laws of mar.

71.
Geneva convention of 1929-relation to Hague Regula- tions.-In the relations between powers bound by the Hague conventions respecting the 1an.s and customs of war on land, whether it is a qaestion of that of July 29, 1899, or that of October 18,1907, and who participate in the present convention, this latter shall complete chapter I1 (Prisoners of War) of the Regulations anilexed to the said Haye conventiorls (G. P. W., art. 89).

However, as indicated in the foreword, page 111, the only parts of chapter I1 of the Hague Regulations, not in effect superseded by substantial reincorporation in the present Geneva convention, are comprised in I-I. R. 10,11,and 12, dealing with paroles and hereinafter quoted (pars. 148, 154, 155).

72.
Application of the convention.-The present collvention shall apply, without prejudice, to the stipulations of title VII (see par. 76b) :

(1)
To all persons contemplated in articles 1,2, and 3 of the Regulations annexed to the Hague convention of October 18, 1907, respecting the laws and customs of war on Band, and captured by the enemy. (See par. 9a, b, c.)

(2)
To all persons belonging to the armed forces of the bel- ligerent parties, captured by the enemy in the course of military operations at sea or in the air, except for such derogations as

RULES OF LAND WAF33AFtE 72-76 ,
might be rendered inevitable by the conditions of capture. However, such derogations shall not infringe the fundamental principles of the present convention; they shall cease when the persons captured have entered a prisoners of war camp
(G.P. Wo,art. 1).
73. In power of enemy power; treated with- humanity; re-prisals prohibited.-Prisoners of war are in the power of the enemy power, but not of the individuals or bodies of troops who capture them.
They must at a11 times be treated with humanity and pro- tected, particularly against acts of violence, insults, and public curiosity.
Measures of reprisal against them are prohibited (G.P. W., art. 2).
74. Persons and honor to be respected; retain civil status.- Prisoners of war have the right to have their persons and their honor respected. Women shall be treated with all the regard due to their sex. Prisoners retain their full civil status
(G.F. W., art. 3).
75. Maintained by captor; discriminations.-me power de- taining prisoners of war is bound to provide for their main- tenance.
Discriminations in treatment between prisoners are lawful only when they are based on the military rank, state of physical or mental health, professional qualifications, or th.e sex of those who profit by such discriminations (G. P. W., art. 4).
76. Whomay become prisoners of war.-+.. Thearmed forces.-The armed forces of the belligerent parties may consist of combatants and noncombatants. In the case of capture by the enemy, both have a right to be treated as prisoners of war
(H.R., art:%).
b. I~zdividzcalsw7to follow tke Army.-Individuals who follow armed forces without directly belonging thereto, such as corre- spondents, newspaper reporters, sutlers, contractors, who fall into the enemy’s hands and whom the latter thinks expedient to detain, shall be entitled to be treated as prisoners of war, provided they are in possession of a certificate from the military authorities of the armed forces which they were ac-companying (G.P. W., title VII, art. dl).
76-78 RULES OF LAND WARFA-
o.
Wounded cc~dsick.-Subject to the care that must be taken of them under the preceding article (art. 1,G. W.S., par. 175); the wounded and sick of an army who fall into the power of the other belligerent shall be prisoners of war, and the gen- eral rules of international law in respect to prisoners shall be applicable to them (G. W. S., art. 2).

d.
LevSe en masse.-The citizens who rise en masse to defend their territory or district from invasion by the enemy, if cap-tured, are entitled to be treated as prisoners of war.

e.
High civil functionaries.-High civil functionaries such as the sovereign and members of the royal family, the president or head of a republican state, and the ministers who direct the policy of a state are liable to be made prisoners of war whether accompanying an army or not.

f.
CizjiZ officials and diplomatio agents.-Civil officials and diplomatic agents attached to the army may be made prisoners of war.

g.
Inhabitants.-Persons whose services are of particular use to the hostile army or its government, such as the higher civil officials, diplomatic agents, couriers, guides, etc., also all persons who may be harmful to the opposing state while at liberty, such as prominent and influential political leaders, journalists, local authorities, clergymen, and teachers, in case they incite the people to resistance, may be made prisoners of war.

h.
Hostages.-When a hostage is accepted he is treated as a prisoner of war.

77.
Military attaches and agents of neutrals.-Military at-tach& and diplomatic agents of neutral powers, accompanying an army in the field or found within a captured fortress, are not ordinarily held as prisoners, provided they have proper papers of identification in their possession and take no part in the hostilities. They may, however, be ordered out of the theater of war, and, if necessary, handed over by the captor to the ministers of their respective countries.

78.
Must give name and rank; coercion to obtain military information prohibited-Every prisoner of war is bound to give, if he is questioned on the subject, his true names and rank, or else his serial number.

In case he ,infringes this rule, he shall be liable to restriction of the privileges accorded to prisoners of his category.
RUJXS OF LAND WARFARE
78-81

No coercion may be used on prisoners to obtain information relative to the state of their army or country. Prisoners who refuse to answer may not be threatened, insulted, or exposed to unpleasant or disadvantageous treatment of any kind what- ever.
If, because of his physical or mental condition, a prisoner is unable to identify himself, he shall be turned over to the medical authorities (G. P. W., art 5).
79. Effects that may be retained by prisoners.-All effects and objects of personal use–except arms, horses, military equipment and military papers–shall remain in the possession of prisoners of war, as well as metal helmets and gas masks.
Sums in the possession of prisoners may not be taken away from them except by order of an officer and after the amount is determined. A receipt shall be given. Sums thus taken away shall be credited to the account of each prisoner.
Identification tags and cards, insignia of rank, decorations, and objects of value may not be taken from prisoners (G. P. W., art. 6).
80. Evacuation.-Prisoners of war shall be evacuated within the shortest possible period after their capture to depots lo- cated in a region far enough from the zone of combat for them to be out of danger.
Only prisoners who, because of wounds or sickness, would run greater risks by being evacuated than by remaining where they are may be temporarily kept in a dangerous zone.
Prisoners shall not be needlessly exposed to danger while awaiting their evacuation from a combat zone.
Evacuation of prisoners, on foot, may normally be effected only by stages of 20 kilometers a day, unless the necessity of reaching water and food depots requires longer stages
(G. P. W., art. 7).
81. Notification of capture of prisoners; correspondence with family.-Belligerents are bound to notify each other re- ciprocally as soon as possible, through the intermediary of the information bureaus as organized under article 77 (see par. 163) of every capture of prisoners. They are Iikewise bound to inform each other of the official addresses to which the cor- respondence from the families to prisoners of war may be sent.
81-84 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
As soon as possible, every prisoner must be enabled to cor- respond with his family himself, under the conditions provided in article 36 (see par. 109) and following.
As regards prisoners captured at sea, the provisions of the present article shall be observed as soon as possible after arrival at port (G. P. W., art. 8).
82. Internment.-Prisoners of war may be interned in a town, fortress, or other place, and bound not to go beyond certain fixed limits. mey may also be interned in enclosed amps; they may not be confined or locked up except as an indispensable measure of safety or sanitation, slid only while the circumstances which necessitate this measure continue to exist.
Prisoners, captured in unhealthful regions or where the cli- mate is injn~rious for persons coming from temperate regions, shall be transported, as soon as possible, to a more favorable climate.
Belligerents shall, so far as possible, avoid assembling in a single camp prisoners of different races or nationalities.
No prisoner may, at any time, be sent back into a region where he might be exposed to the fire of a combat zone nor used to give protection from bombardment to certain points or certain regions by his presence (G. F. W., art. 9).
83. Installation of camps.-Prisoners sf war shall be lodged in buildings or in barracks affording all possible safeguards as to hygiene and healthfulness.
The quarters must be fully protected from dampness, suffi- ciently heated and lighted. A11 precautions must be taken against danger of fire.
As to the dormitories, the total area and minimum air space of dormitories, accommodatioas and bedding therein, shall be the same as those provided for the troops at base camps of the detaining power (G.P. W., art. 10).
84. Rations; eollecthe disciplinary measures affecting.-The food ration of prisoners of war shall be equal in quantity and quality to that of troops at base camps.
Furthermore, prisoners shall receive facilities for preparing, themselves, additional food which they may have.
20
\
RULES OF LAND WARFARE 84-87′
A sufficiency of potable water shall be furnished them. The use of tobacco shall be permitted. Prisoners may be employed in the kitchens.
All collective disciplinary measures affecting the food are prohibited (G. P. W., art. 11).
85. Clothing; canteens.-Outer clothing, underwear, and foot- wear shall he furnished prisoners of war by .the detaining power. Replacement and repair of these articles must be assured regularly. In addition, workers must receive work clothes wherever the nature of the work requires it.
Canteens shall be installed in all camps where prisoners may obtain, at the local market price, food products and ordinary articles.
Profits obtained by the management of the camps from the operation of .the canteens shall be used for the benefit of the prisoners (G. P. W., art. 12).
86. Hygiene.-Belligerents shall be bound to take all sani- tary measures necessary to assure the cleanliness and health- fulness of camps and to prevent epidemics.
Prisoners of war shall have at their disposal, day and night, installations conforming to sanitary rules and constantly main- tained in a state of cleanliness.
Furthermore, in addition to baths and showers with which the camps shall be as well provided as possible, prisoners shall be furnished a sufficient quantity of water to permit of their bodily cleanliness.
They must be enabled to take physical exercises and enjoy the open air (G. P. W.,art. 13).
87. Infirmaries.-Every camp ehall have an infirmary, where prisoners of war shall receive every kind pf attention they need. If necessary, isolation quarters shall be reserved for the sick affected with contagious diseases.
Expenses of treatment, including therein those of temporary prosthetic equipment, shall be borne by the detaining power.
Upon request, belligerents shall be bound to deliver to every prisoner treated an offic~ai statement showing the nature and duration of his illness as well as the attention received.
It shall be permissible for belligerents reciprocally to author- ize, by means of special arrangements, the retention in the
87-93 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
camps of physicians and hospital attendants to care for prison- ers of their own country.
Prisoners affected with a serious illness or whose condition necessitates a major surgical operation must be admitted, at the expense of the detaining power, to any military or civil medical establishment qualified to treat them (G. P. W., art 14).
88.
Medical inspections.-Medical inspections of prisoners of war shail be 11,eld at least once a month. Their purpose shall be to determine the general state of health and cleanliness, and ,to detect contagious diseases, particularly tuberculosis and venereal diseases (G. P. W., art. 15).

89.
Religious freedom.-Prisoners of war shall enjoy com-plete liberty in the exercise of their religion, including attend- ance at the services of whatever religion they may belong to, on the sole condition that they comply with the measures of order and police issued by the military authorities.

Ministers of a religion, prisoners of war, whatever their re- ligious denomination, shall be allowed to minister fully to their coreligionists (G. P. W., art. 16).
90.
Recreation.-Belligerents shall encourage as much as possible intellectual recreations and sports organized by prisoners of war (G. P. W., art 17).

91.
Camps to be commanded by officers; salutes.-Every prisoner of war camp shall be placed under the command of a responsible officer.

Besides the external marks of respect provided by the regula- tions in force in their armies with regard to their nationals, prisoners of war must salute all officers of the detaining power.
Officers who are prisoners of war are bound to salute only officers of a higher or equal rank of the detaining power
(G.P. W., art. 18).
92.
Insignia and decorations.-The wearing of insignia of rank and of decorations shall be authorized (6. P. W., art. 19).

93.
Regulations, orders, etc., to be communicated to prison- ers.-Regulations, orders, notices, and proclamations of every kind must be communicated to prisoners of war in a language which they understand. The same principle shall be applied in interrogations (6.P. W., art. 20).

RULES OF LAND WARFARE 94-97
94. Officers and persons of assimilated status (~ssimills); belligerents to notify each other of titles and rank; rank and age to be respected.-Upon the beginning of hostilities, betlig- erents shall be bound to communicate to each other recipro- cally the titles and ranks in use in their respective armies, with a view to assuring equality of treatment between oficers and assirnil6s of equivalent rank.
Officers and assirnil& who are prisoners of war shall be treated wit11 the regard due their rank and age (G. P. W.,
art. 21).
95.
Officers’ camps; food and clothing–In order to assure service in officers’ camps, soldiers of the same army who are prisoners of war and, as far as possible, who speak the same language shall be assigned thereto, in sufficient numbers, con- sidering the rank of the oficers and assirnil6s.

The latter shall procure their food and clothing from the pay which they shall receive from the detaining power. The management of the mess by the officers themselves should be facilitated in every way (6.P. W., art. 22).

96.
Pay of officers and assirnil&; rate of exchange; reim-bursement.-Subject to special arrangements between the belligerent powers, and particularly those provided in article 24

(see par. 97),officers and assirnil s who are prisoners of war shall receive from the detaining power the same pay as officers of corresponding rank in the armies of that power, on the con- dition, however, that such pay does not exceed that to which they are entitled in the armies of the country which they have served. They shall receive such pay in full, once a month if Possible, without any deduction being made for expenses chargeable to the detaining power, even if these expenses were made in favor of the said prisoners.
An agreement between the belligerents shall fix the rate of exchange applicable to such payment; in the absence of such an agreement, the rate adopted shall be that in force at the open- ing of hostilities.
All disbursements made to prisoners of war as pay must be reimbursed, at the end of hostilities, by the power which they have served (6. P. 1% art. 23).
97. Maximum amount of money retained; balance credited or deposited in bank.-Upon the outbreak of hostilities, the
97-100 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
belligerents shall, by common agreement, fix the maximum amount of ready money which prisoners of war of various ranks and categories s!iall he a!iowed to keep in their posses- sion. Any surplus takeo or withheld from a prisoner as well as any sum deposited by him shall be credited to his account, and may not be converted into another currency without his consent.
The balance credited to their accounts shall be paid to prisoners of war at the end of their captivity.
During their imprisonment, facilities shall be granted them for the transfer of these amounts, in whole or in part, to banks or private persons in their country of origin (6;P. W., art. 24).
98.
Transfer; sick and wounded.-Unless the conduct of military operations so requires, sick and wounded prisoners of war shall not be transferred as long as their recovery might be endangered by the journey (G. P. W., art. 25).

99.
Transfer; notification of destination;retention of effects; accounts; expenses.-In case of transfer, prisoners of war shall be offcially notified of their new destination in advance; they shall be allowed to take with them their personal effects, their correspondence, and packages which have arrived addressed to them.

All due measures shall he taken that correspondence and paclrages addressed to their former camp may be forwarded to them withont delay.
Sums degasited to the account of transferred prisoners shall be transmitted to the competent authority of the place to which they have been transferred.
The expenses occasioned by the transfer shall be charged to tile detaining power (G.F. W., art. 26).
100. Work authorized; exceptions; accidental injuries.-$el- ligerents may en~ploy as workers, according to their rank and aptitude, all able-bodied prisoners of war with the exception of oEcers and assimiE6s.
However, if ogficers and assimiE&sreqcest suitable work, it shall be secured for them so Ear as is possible.
Noncommissioned officers who are prisoners of war shall only be required to do supervisory work, unless they expressly re-quest. a remunerative accupation.
RULES OF LANDWARFARE IOQ-105
Belligerents shall be bound, during the whole period of cap- tivity, to allow to prisoners of war who are victims of accidents in connection with their work the enjoyment of the benefit of the provisions applicable to workers of the same category according to the legislation of the detaining power. With re- gard to prisoners of war to whom these legal provisions might not be applied by reason of the !egislation of that power, the latter undertakes to recommend to its legislative body all proper measures equitably to indemnify the victims (G.P. W.,
art 27).
101.
Maintenance while working for private persons.-The detaining power shall assume entire responsibility for the maintenance, care, treatment, and payment of wages of prison- ers of war working for private individuals (G. P. W., art. 28).

102.
Work for prisoner physically unfit prohibited.-No prisoner of war may be employed at work for which he is physically unfit (G. P. W., art. 29).

103.
Length of day’s workh’l?re length of the day’s work of prisoners of war, including therein the trip going and re- turning, shall not be excessive and must not, in any case, exceed that allowcd for the civil workers in the region em-ployed at the same gvork. Every prisoner shall be allowed a rest sf 24 censecutive hours every week, preferably on Sunday

(G.P. W., art. 30).
104. Work related to war operations prohibited; protests for violations.-Work done by prisoners of war shall have no direct relation with war operations. It is forbidden in par-ticular to employ prisoners for manufacturing and transport- ing arms or munitions of any kind, or for transporting inateriel intended for combatant units.
In case of violation of the provisions of the preceding para- graph, prisoners, after executing or beghning to execute the order, shall be free to have their protests presented through the agents whose functions are set forth in articles 43 and 44
(see pars. 116,117),or, in the absence of ail agent, through the intermediary of representatives of the protecting power
(G.P. W., art. 31).
105. Unhealthful or dangerous work; aggravation of working conditions as disciplinary measure forbidden.-It is forbidden to use prisoners of war on unhealthful or dangerous work.
ko5-108 RlJLES OF LAND WARFARE
Any aggravation of the working conditions as a disciplinary measure is forbidden (G. P. W., art. 32).
106. Work detachments; sanitary conditions, food, etc.-The regime of work detachments must be similar to that of prison- ers of war camps, particularly with regard to sanitary condi- tions, food, attention in case of accident or sickness, corre-spondence, and the receipfi of packages.
Every work detachment shall be attached to a prisoners’ camp. The commandant of that camp shall be responsible for the observance, in the work detachment, of the provisiolls of the present Convention (G. P. W., art. $3).
107. Wages; fixed by agreements; rules for determining payments.-Prisoners of war shall not receive wages for work connected with the administration, installation, and mainte- nance of the camps.
Prisoners employed for other work shall be entitled lo wage; to be fixed by agreements between the beI!igerents.
These agreements shall also specify the part which the camp administration may retain, the amount which shall belong to the priso~er of war, and the manner in which that amount shall be put at his disposal during the period of his captivity.
While awaiting the conclusion of the said agreements, pay- ment for work of prisoners shall be determined according to the rules given below:
a.
Work done for the. state shall be paid for in accordance with the rates in force for military personnel of th,e national army doing the same work, or, if nene exists, according to a rate in harmony with the work performed.

b.
When the work is done for the account of other public administrations or for private persons, conditions shall be regulated by agreement with the military authority.

Thebalance remaining to the credit of the prisoner shall be delivered to him at the end of his captivity. In case of death, it shall be forwarded through diplomatic channels to the heirs of the deceased (G. P. W., art. 34).
108. External relations-publication of measures.-Upon the outbreak of hostilities, belligerents shall publish the measures provided for the execution of the provisions of this section
(G.P. W., art. 35). The provisions referred to are those com- prised in paragraphs 109 to 114, inclusive.
RmS OF LAND WARFARE 109-112
109. Correspondence.-Each of the belligerents shall peri- odically determine the number of letters and postal cards which prisoners of war of the various categories shall be al- lowed to send each month!, and shall inform the other bellig- erent of this number. These letters and cards shall be trans- mitted by post by the shortest route. They may not be delayed or retained for disciplinary reasons.
Within a period of not more than one week after his arrival at the camp, and likewise in case of sickness, every prisoner shall be enabled to write his family a postal card informing it of his capture and of the state of his health. The said postal cards shall be forwarded as rapidly as possible and may not be delayed in any manner.
As a general rule, correspondence of prisoners shall be written in their mother tongue. Belligerents may allow corre- spondence in other languages (G. P. W., art. 36).
110.
Postal parcels containing food or clothing.-Prisoners of war shall be allowed individually to receive parcels by mail, containing food and other articles intended to clothe or feed them. Packages shall be delivered to the addressees upon a receipt (G. P. W., art. 37).

111.
Letters, postal parcels, gifts, etc., exempt from postal charges, import duties; telegrams.-Letters and consignments of money or valuables, as well as postal parcels intended for prisoners of war or dispatched by them, either directIy or through the information bureaus provided for in article 77 (see par. 163),shall be exempt from all postal charges in the coun- tries of origin and destination, as well as in the countries they Pass through.

Gifts and relief in kind for prisoners shall be likewise exempt from all import and other duties, as well as from payments for carriage by the state railways.
Prisoners may, in case of acknowledged urgency, be allowed to send telegrams, paying the usual charges (G. P. W., art. 38).
112. Books received subject to censorship.-Prisoners of war shall be allowed 60 receive shipments of books individually which may be subject to censorship.
Representatives of the protecting powers and duly recognized and authorized aid societies may send works and collections of
112-116 BULES OF LAND WARFARE
books to the libraries of prisoners camps. The transmission
of these shipments to libraries anay not be delayed under the
pretext of censorship difficulties (G. P. W., art. 33).
113. Censorship of correspondence.-Cei~sorship of corre-spondence must be effected within the shortest possible time. Furthermore, inspection of parcels post must be effected under proper conditions to gnarantee the preservation of the articles which they may contain and, if possibie, in the presence of the addressee or an agent duIy recognized by him.
Prohibitions of correspondence promulgated by the belliger- ents for military or political reasons must be of a temporary nature only and of the shortest duration possible (G. P. W., art. 40).
114. Transmission of documents; authentication of signa-tures.-Belligerents shall assure all facilities for the trans-mission of instruments, pagers, or documents liltended for prisoners of war or signed by them, particularly of powers of attorney and wills.

They shall take the necessary measures to assure, in case of necessity, the authentication of signatures made by prisoners
(G. P. W., art. 41).
115. Complaints.-Prisoners of war shall have the sight to inform the military authorities in whose power they are, of their requests with regard to the regime of captivity to which they are subjected.
They shall also have the right to address themselves to repre- sentatives of the protecting powers to indicate to them the points on which they have complaints to formulate ivith regard to the rggime of captivity.
These requests and complaints must be transmitted imme- diately. Even if they are found to be baseless, they shall not occasion any punishment (G. P. Wa9art. 42).
116. Agents; intermediaries.-In every place wherz there are prisoners of war, they shall be allowed to appoint agents en- trusted with representing them directly with the military authorities and the protecting powers.
This appointment shall be subject to the approval of the military authority.
RULES OF LAND WARFARE 1-16-119
The agents shall be entrusted with the reception and distri- bution of collective shipments. Likewise, in case the prisoners should decide to organize a mutual assistance system among themselves, this organization would be within the competence of the agents. Further, they may lend their services to prison- ers to facilitate their relations with the aid aocieties mentioned in article 78. (See par. 164.)
In camps of officers and assimilt?s, the senior oEcer prisoner of war in the highest grade shall be recognized as inter-mediary between the camp authorities and the officers and assirnil& who are prisoners. For this purpose he shall have the power .to appoint an officer prisoner to assist him as an interpreter during the conferences with the camp authorities
(G. P. W.,art. 43).
117. Employment of agents as workers; intercourse with authorities; transfer of agents.-When the agents are em-ployed as workers, the time spent on their duties as representa- tives of prisoners of war shall be included in the compulsory working hours.
All facilities shall be accorded the agents for their inter- course wit11 the military authorities and with the protecting power. This intercourse shall not be limited.
No representative of the prisoners may be transferred with- out the necessary time being allowed him to acquaint his successors with current matters (G.9.W., art. 44).
118. Prisoners subject to laws and regulations of detaining power.-Prisoners of war shall be subject to the laws, regula- tions, and orders in force in the armies of the detaining power.
Any act of insubordination shall justify the adoption towards them of the measures provided by such laws, regulations, and orders.
Tl~eprovisions of the present chapter, however, are control- ling (G.P. W., art 45). The provisions here indicated are those quoted in paragraphs 119 to 140, inclusive.
119. Punishments; limitations; corporal; collective.-Punish- I ments other than those provided for the same acts for soldiers 1 of the national armies may not be imposed upon prisoners of I war by the military authorities and courts of the detaining 1, power.
119-122 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
Officers, noncommissioned officers, or soldiers who are prisoners of war undergoing disciplinary punishment shall not receive less favorable treatment than that provided in connec- tion with the same punishment for those of equal rank in the army.
Any corporal punishment, any imprisonment in quarters without daylight, and, in general, any form whatever of cruelty is forbidden.
Collective punishment for individual acts is also forbidden
(G. P. W., art. 46).
120. Verification of offenses; preliminary judicial proceed- ings; imprisonment pending trial deducted.-Acts constituting an offense against discipline, and particularly, attempted escape, shall be verified immediately; for all prisoners of war, commissioned or not, preventive arrest shall be reduced to the absolute minimum.
Preliminary judicial proceedings against prisoners of war shall be conducted as rapidly as the circumstances permit. Imprisonment pending trial shall be restricted as much as possible.
In all cases the period of imprisonment pending trial shall be deducted from the disciplinary or the judicial punishment inflicted, in so far as such deduction is allowed for national soldiers (G. W. P., art. 47).
121.
Treatment after punishment; attempted escape.-Prison- ers of war may not be treated differently from other prisoners after having suffered the judicial or disciplinary punishment which has been imposed on them.

Nevertheless, prisoners punished as a result of attempted escape may be subjected to special surveillance, which, how- ever, may not entail the suppression of the guaranties granted prisoners by the present convention (G. P. W., art. 48).

122.
Not to be deprived of rank; officers and assimilBs under-going punishment not to be confined with enlisted men.-No prisoner of war may be deprived of his rank by the detaining power.

Prisoners given disciplinary punishment may not be deprived of the prerogatives attached to their rank. In particular, officers and assimil8s who suffer punishment involving depri-
.
I
1

,

1
I
RULES OFLAND WARFARE ;I22-196
vation of liberty shall not be placed in the same quarters as non-commissioned officers or privates undergoing punishment
(G.P. W., art. 49).
123. Escaped prisoners recaptured, subject to punishment.- Escaped prisoners of war who are retaken before being able to rejoin their own army or to leave the territory occupied by the army which captured them shall be liable only to disciplinary punishment.
Prisoners who, after having succeeded in rejoining their army or in leaving the territory occupied by the army which captured them, may again be taken prisoners shall not be liable to any punishment on account of their previous flight (G.P. W.,
art. 50).
124.
Attempted escape as incident to other offenses; assist- ing in escape.-Attempted escape, even if it is not a first of- fense, shall not be considered as an aggravating circumstance in case the prisoner of war should be given over to the courts on account of crimes or offenses against persons or property committed in the course of that attempt.

After an attempted or accomplished escape, the comrades of the person escaping who assisted in the escape may incur only disciplinary punishment on this account (G. P. W., art. 51).

125.
Leniency in deciding whether judicial or summary pun- ishment be imposed; dual punishment forbidden.-Belligerents shall see that the competent authorities exercise the greatest leniency in deciding the question of whether an infraction committed by a prisoner of war should be punished summarily or judicially.

This shall be the case especially when it is a question of deciding on facts in connection with escape or attempted escape. A prisoner may not be punished more than once because of
the same offense or on the same charge (G.P. W., art. 52).
126. Summary punishment not to delay repatriation; penal prosecution, contra; lists of latter cases to be exchanged by belligerents.-No prisoner of war on whom a summary punish- ment has been imposed, who might be eligible for repatriation, may be kept back because he has not undergone the punish- ment.
Prisoners to be repatriated who may be undergoing a penal Prosecution may be excluded from repatriation until the end of
126-129 EUL3.S OF LAND WARFARE
the proceedings and, if necessary, until the completion of the punishment; those who may be already imprisoned by virtue of a sentence may be detained until the end of their imprison- ment.
Belligerents shall communicate to each other the lists of those who for the reasons given in the preceding paragraph cannot be repatriated (G. P. W.,art. 53).
127. Maximn~ln summary punishments.-Arrest is the most severe summary punishment which may be imposed on a prisoner of war.
The duration of a single punishment may not exceed 30 days.
Furthermore, thii maximum of 30 days may not be exceeded in the case of a prisoner subjected at one time to summary pun- ishment for several acts, whether these acts be connected or not.
When, during or after the end of a period of arrest, a prisoner shall have a new summary punishment imposed upon him, a space of at least 3 days shall separate each of the periods of arrest, if one of the~rr is 10 days or more (G. P. JY., art. 54).
128. Fond restrictions as punis!ament7Saabject to the pro-vision which is the slibject of the last paragraph of article 11 (see par. 84), food restrictions allowed in the armies of the detaining power are applicablq as an increase of punishment, to prisoners of war given summary punishment.
However, these restrictions may be ordered only if the state of health of the prisoners punished permits it (G. P. W., arb. 55).
12% Transfer to penitentiaries, co~~victprisons, etc., pro-hibited; sanitary requirements; exercise.-in no case may prisoners of war be transferred to penitentiary establishments (prisons, penitentiaries9 convict prisons, etc.) there to ilndergo summary punishment.
The quarters in which wmmary punishment is undergone . shall conform to sanitary requirements. Prisoners punished sha!l be enabled to keep themselves in a state of cleanliness. These prisoners shall be allowed to exercise or to stay in the open air at least 2 hours every day (G. P. W., art 56).
RULES OF LANDWARFARE 130-134
130. Correspondence; delivery of packages.-Prisoners of war given summary punishment shall be allowed to read and write, as well as to send and receive letters.
On the other hand9 delivery to the addressees of packages and money sent may be withheld until the expiration of the punishment. If the packages not delivered contain perishable products, these shall be turned over to the camp infirmary or kitchen (G.P. W., art. 57).
131.
Medical inspection.-Prisoners of war given summary punishment shall be allowed, on their request, to be present at the daiIy medical inspection. ‘I’hey shall receive the care considered necessary by the doctors an$ if necessary, shall be evacuated to the camp infirmary or to hospitals (6;. P. W., art. 58).

132.
Summary punishment to be imposed only by oacers vested with disciplinary authority.-Under reservation of the rights to courts and superior military authorities to exercise their legitimate functions, summary punishment shall only be pronounced by an officer vested with disciplinary authority in his capacity as commander of a camp or of a detachment, or by the responsible officer replacing him (G.P.W., art. 59).

133.
Judicial prosecutions; notice to protecting power.-At the opening of a judicial proceeding directed against a prisoner of war, the detaining power shall advise the representative of the protecting power thereof as soon as possible, and always before the date set for the opening of the trial.

*
This advice shall contain the following information:
(a)
Civil status and rank of prisoner;

(b)
Place of sojourn or imprisonment;

(c)
Statement of the charges and specifications, with notice of the legal provisions appllirablle.

If it is not possible to indicate in such notice the court which will pass upon the matter, the date of opening of the trial and the place where it will take place, this information must be furnished to the representative of the protecting power later, as soon as possible, and at all events, at least 3 weeks before
the opening of the trial (G.P.W., art. 60).
134. Right to defend; not compelled to admit guilt.-No pris-I oner of war may be sentenced without having had an opportn. 1 nity to defend himself.
134-139 RULES OF LAND WARFARFA
No prisoner may be compelled to admit himself guilty of the act of which he is accused (G.P.W., art. 61).
135. Right to counsel; interpreter; representative of protect- ing power may attend trial; exception.-The prisoner of war shall have the right to assistance by a qualified counsel of his choice and, if necessary, to have recourse to the services of a competent interpreter. He shall be advised of his right .by the detaining power, in due time before the trial.
In default of a choice by the prisoner, the protecting power may obtain a counsel for him. The detaining power shall deliver to the protecting power, on its request, a list of persons qualified to present the defense.
Representatives of the protecting power shall be entitled to attend the trial of the case.
The only exception to this rule is the case where the trial of the case must be secret in the interest of the safety of the State. The detaining power shall so advise the protecting power (G.P.W., art. 62).
136.
What courts to pronounce sentence; procedure.-Sen-tence may be pronounced against a prisoner of war only by the same courts and according to the same procedure as in the case of persons belonging to the armed forces of the detaining power (G.P.W., art. 63).

137.
Right to appeal.-Every prisoner of war shall have the right of appeal against any sentence rendered with regard to him, in the same way as individuals belonging to the armed forces of the detaining power (GQ.W., art. 64).

138.
Notice of sentence to protecting power.-Sentences pro-nounced against prisoners of war shall be communicated to the protecting power immediately (G.P.W., art. 65).

139.
Death penalty; notice of; not to be executed for 3 months after notice.-If the death penalty is pronounced against a prisoner of war, a communication setting forth in detail the nature and circumstances of the offense shall be sent as soon as possible to the representative of the protecting power for transmission to the power in whose armies the prisoner served.

The sentence shall not be executed before the expiration of a period of at least 3 months after this communication (G.P.W., art. 66).
RULES OF LAND WARFARE 140-143
14d Provisions of article 42 not affected by sentence.–No prisoner of war may be deprived of the benefit of the pro- visio~zsof article 42 (seepar. 115) of the present convention as a result of a sentence or otherwise (G.P.W., art. 67).
141. Seriously sick or woun~ded to be returned to their own country; model agreement regarding repatriation or hospitali-zation in neutral country.-Belligerents are bound to send back to their own country, regardless of rank or number, seriously sick and severely wounded prisoners sf war, after having brought them to a condition where they can be transported.
Agreements between belligerents shall accordingly settle as Boon as possible the cases of disability or of sickness, involving direct repatriation, as well as the cases involving possible hos- pitalization in a neutral country. While awaiting the conclu- sion of these agreements, belligerents may follow the model agreement annexed, as an exhibit, to .the present convention (see par. 172) (G.P.W., art. 68).
142. Mixed medical commissions.-Upon the outbreak of hos- tilities, belligerents shall come to an agreement to name mixed medical commissions. These commissions shall be composed of three members, two of them belonging to a neutral country and one appointed by the detaining power; a physician of the neutral country shall preside. These mixed medical commis- sions shall proceed to the examination of sick or wounded prisoners and shall make all necessary decisions regarding them.
Decisions of these commissions shall be by majority and carried out with the least possible delay (G.P.W., art. 69).
143. Inspection of prisoners with view to direct repatria- tion.-Besides those who are designated by the camp physician, the following prisoners of war shall be inspected by the mixed medical commission mentioned in article 69 (see par. 142), with a view to their direct repatriation or their hospitalization in a
1
neutral country:
a. Prisoners who make such a request directly of the camp
physician.I b. Prisoners who are presented by the agents provided for in
article 43 (see par. 116), acting on their own initiative or at the request of the prisoners themselves. ,
r
343-150 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
c. Prisoners who have been proposed by the power in whose armies they have served or by an aid society duly recognized and authorized by that power (G.P.W., art. 70).
144.
Prisoners victims of accidents.-Prisoners of war who –are victims of accidents in connection with work, except those who have deliberately injured themselves, shall enjoy the benefit of the same provisions, as far as repatriation or pos- sible l~ospitdization in a neutral country is concerned (G.P.W., art 71).

145.
Able-bodied prisoners held captive for long period.- Throughout the duration of hostilities and from humane con- siderations, belligerents may conclude agreements with a view to the direct repatriation or hospitalization in a neutral conn- try of able-bodied prisoners of war who have undergone a long period of captivity (G.P.W., art. 72).

146.
Expeases of repatriatiom.-The expenses of repatriation or of transportation to a neutral country of prisoners of war shall be borne, from the frontiers of the detaining power, by the power in whose armies the prisoners have served (G.P.W., art. 73).

147.
Repatriated persons not eligible fod active military service.-No repatriated person may be utilized in active mili- tary service (G.P.W., art. 74).

148.
Parole permitted if laws of their country allowhPr’rts- oners of war may be set at liberty on parole if the laws of their country allow, and, in such cases, they are bound, on their personal honor, scrupulously to fulfill, both toward their own government and $he government by whom they were made prisoners, the engagements they have contracted.

In such eases their own government is bound neither to require of nor accept from them any service incompatible with the parole given (H.R., art. PO).
149.
Form and substance of parole.–The parole should be in writing and signed by the prisoner. It should state in clear and unequivocal language exactly what acts the prisoner is obli- gated not to do, particularly as to whether he is bouad to re-frain from all acts against the captor or only from taking part directly in military operations.

150.
Parole of enlisted menn-No noncommissioned officer or private can give his parole except through an officer of his own

RULE@ OF LAND WARFARE 150-159
=my. fie only admissible exception is where an individual
properly separated from his command has suffered long conhe-
ment without the possibility of being paroled through an officer.
151.
Parole of commissioned officers.-Commissioned officers can give their paroles only with the permission of a military superior as long as such superior is accessible.

152.
Parole ineffectual.-No paroling on the battlefield,, no paroling of entire bodies of troops after a battle, and no dis- missal of large numbers of prisoners, with a general declaration that they are paroled, is permitted or of any value.

153.
Paroling discretionary with belligerent government.- A belligerent government may declare, by a general order. whether it will allow paroling, and on what conditions it will allow it. Such order is communicated to the enemy.

154.
Not compelled to accept parole.-A prisoner of war can- not be compelled to accept his liberty on parole; similarly the hostile government is not obliged to accede to the request of ,the prisoner to be set at liberty on parole (H.R., art. 11).

155.
Violation of parole.-Prisoners of war liberated on parole and recaptured bearing arms against the-government to whom they had pledged their honor, or against the allies of that government, forfeit their right to be treated as prisoners of war, and can be brought before the courts (W.R.,art. 12).

156.
Exchange of prisoners not obligatory.-The exchange of prisoners is an act of convenience to both bellige~ents. If no general cartel has been concluded, it cannot be demanded by either of them. No belligerent is obliged to exchange prisoners Of war.

157.
When exchange made.-No exchange of prisoners shall be made except after complete capture, and after an accurate account of them and a list of the captured officers have been taken.

158.
Conditions of exchange.-Exchanges of prisoners take place, number for number, rank for rank, disability for disabil- ity, with added condition for added condition-such, for in- Stance, as not to serve for a certain period.

159.
Substitutions.-In exchanging prisoners of war such 1 numbers of persons of inferior rank may be substituted as an i equivalent for one of superior rank as may be agreed upon by

159-163 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
cartel which requires the sanction of the government or of the commander of the army in the field.
160.
Spies, war traitors, and war rebels.-According to the unwritten lam of war, spies, war traitors, and war rebels are not exchanged. The exchange of such persons would require a special cartel, authorized by the government, or, at a great distance from it, by the chief commander of the army in the field.

161.
Armistice convention to include stipulations regarding repatriation of prisoners; prisoners undergoing punishment; commissions to search for dispersed prisoners.-When belliger-ents conclude an armistice convention they must as a rule include therein stipulations regarding the repatriation of prisoners of war. If it has not been possible to insert stipula- tions in this regard in such convention, beIligerents shall nevertheless come to an agreement in this regard as soon as possible. In any case, repatriation of prisoners shall be effected with the least possible delay after the conclusion of peace.

Prisoners of war against whom a penal prosecution may be pending for a crime or an offense of municipal law map, how-ever, be detained until tbe end of the proceedings, and, if neces-sary, until the expiration of the punishment. The same shall be true of those sentenced for a crime or offense of municipal law.
On agreement between the belligerents, commissions may be established for the purpose of searching for dispersed pris- oners and assuring their repatriation (G.P.W., art. 75).
162. Wills of prisoners; death certificates; burial.-Wills of prisoners of war shall be received and drawn up in the same way as for soldiers of the national army.
The same rules shall be observed regarding death certilcates.
Belligerents shall see that prisoners of war dying in captivity are honorably buried and that the graves bear all necessary information, are respected and properly maintained (h:ZZW., art. 76).
163. Official information bureau; notification of capture of prisoners: mutual exchange of information, etc.-Upon the outbreak of hostilities, each of the belligerent powers; as well as the neutral powers which have received belligerents, shall
RULES OF LAND WARFARE 163-164
institute an o5cial information bureau regarding prisoners of war within their territory.
Within the shortest possible period, eacn of the belligerent powers shall inform its information bureau of every capture of prisoners effected by its armies, giving it all available informa- tion regarding identity, thereby permitting prompi notification to the families concerned, and informing it of the ofiicial ad- dresses at which families may write to prisoners.
The information bureau shall immediately forward all this information to the interested powers, through the intervention, on one hand, of the protecting powers and, on the other, of the central agency provided for in article 79. (See par. 165.)
The information bureau charged with replfiilg to all inquiries about prisoners of war, shall receive from the various services coilcerned full information respecting internments and trans- fers, releases on parole, repatriations, escapes, stays in hos- pitals, deaths, as well as other information necessary to e~ableit to make out and keep up to date an individual record for each prisaner of war.
The bureau shall state in this return, insofar as is possible and subject to the provisions of article 5 (see par. 7S), the serial number, given names and surname, date and place of birth, rank and unit of the interested party, the given name of the father and the name of the mother, the address of the persen to be advised inn case of accideat, wounds, date and place of capture, internment, wounding and death, as well as any other important information.
Weekly lists containing all new information likely to facili- tate the identification of each prisoner shall be transmitted to the interested powers.
At the conclusion of peace the individual record of the pris- oner of war shall be delivered to the power which he served.
The information bureau shall further be bound to receive all artic!es of personal use, valuables, letters, pay vouchers, identification marks, etc., which are left by prisoners of war who have been repatriated, released on parole, have escaped or died, and to transmit them to the countries interested (G.P.W., art. 77).
164. Belligerents to extend to relief societies facilities for efficient performance.-Relief societies for prisoners of war,
164-167 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
which are properly constituted in accordance with the laws of their country and with the object of serving as channels for charitable effort, shall receive from the belligerents, for them-selves and their duly accredited agents, every facility for the efficient performance of their humane task within the bounds imposed by military necessities. Agents of these societies may be adrnittcd to the camps for the purpose of distributing relief, as also to the halting places of repatriated prisoners, if fur-nished with spersona! permit by the military authorities, and on giving an undertaking in writing to comply with all meas-ures of order and police which the latter may iss’ae (G.B.W, art. 18).
165. Central agency for information in ne~tral countries.-A central agency Car information regarding prisoners of war shall be created in a ~teu~laii’aaol~itry. The inf~~rlationslcom-mittee of the Red Cross shall propose the organization of such an agency to the interested powers, if it considers it neces-sary.
Tie fci~ctionof titis agency shali be locentraiize all informs- tion respecting prisoners, which it may obtain throrlgk aflicial or private channels; it shall transmit it as quicqi!y as possible to the country of origin of the prisoners or to the power which they have served.
These pro~ininns nwet not be interpreted as restricting the humanitarian activity of the international committee of the Bed Cross (G.P.W., art. 79).
166.
Infcrmetioi~ bureaus exempt fr~mpostal charges and import and other duties.–Information brzreans shzlI enjoy the p~ivilege of free postage on postal matter, 8s well as all ex-em2tions provided in artide 38 (see r~ai-.111) (G.P.PJJ,art. 80).

167.
Reservation of sight to eonclrtde special conventions.- The high contracting parties reserve the right to condude spe- cial conventions cn a13 qluestisns relative to prisoner3 of war which it seems to them expedient to regulate by special agreement.

Prisoners of war shall receive the benest of these agree- ments mtil the completion of repatriation, except in the case of express 8tipulatior.s to the contrary contailred in the above-mentioned agrecaents or in later agreements, or like- wise, except in the case of more favorable measures taken by
RULES OF LAND WARFARE 16Y-160
one or the other of the belligerent powers respecting the pris- oners held by them.
111 order to asslve the application, on both sides, of the stipulations of the present convention, and to facilitate the conclusion of the special conventions provided for above, bel- ligerents nay, upon the commencement of hostilities, authorize meetings of representatives of the respective authorities charged with the administration of prisoners of war (G.P.Wn, art. 8%).
168. Text of convention to be posted.-The text of the pres- ent convention and of tlae special conventions contemplated In the foregoing article, shall be posted, whenever possible in the mother tongue of the prisoners of war, in places where it may be consulted by all the prisoners.
The text of these conventions shall be communicated to prisoners who find it impossible to get the information from the posted text, upon their request (G.P.W., art. 84).
169. Representatives of the protecting powers allowed to see prisoners.-The high contracting parties recognize that the regular application of the present convention will find a guar- anty in the possibility of colIaboration of the protecting powers charged with safeguarding the interests of belligerents; in this respect, the protecting powers may, besides their diplo- matic personnel, appoint delegates from among their own na- tionals 01-from among the nationals of other neutral powers. These delegates must be subject to the approval of the bdliger-ent near which they exercise their mission.
Representatives of the protecting power or its accepted dele- gates shall be permitted to go to any place, without exception, where prisoners of war are interned. They shall have access to all places occupied by prisoners and may converse with them, as a general rule without witnesses, personally or through interpreters.
Belligerents shall, to the widest extent possible, facilitate the
task of representatives or accepted delegates of the protecting
power. The military authorities shall be informed of their
visit.
Belligerents may come to an agreement to allow persons of the same nationality as the prisoners to be permitted to take part in inspection trips (G.P.W., art. 86).
1’?’0-172 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
170. Protecting powers to aid in settling differences.-In case of disagreement between the belligerents as to the appliea- tion of the provisions of the present convention, the protecting powers must, insofar as possible, lend their good offices for the purpose of settling the difference.
For this purpose, each of the protecting powers may, in par- ticular, suggest to the interested belligerents a meeting of representatives thereof, possibly upon a neutral territory suit- ably chosez. Belligerents shall be bound to accede to proposals in this sense which are made to them. The protecting power may, if occasion arises, submit for the approval of the powers concerned a person belonging to a neutral power or a person delegated by the international committee of the Red Cross, who shall be summoned to take part in this meeting (G.P.W., art. 87).
171.
Irrternational commfttee of the Red Cross, activities not to be affected by foregoing provisions.-The foregoing provi- sions are not an obstacle to the humanitarian activity whicx the international committee of the Bed Cross may display for the protection of prisoners of war, with the consent of the interested belIigerents (G.P.W., art. 88).

172.
Annex to the Convention of July 1929, relative to the treatment of prisoners of war. Model agreement concerning the direct repatriation and the hospitalization in a neutral country of prisoners of war for reasons of health. (See par. 141.)

I. Governing principles for direct repatriation and hos- pitalization in a neutral country.
A. Governing principles for direct repatriation.
There shall be directly repatriated:
1.
Sick and wounded who, according to medical opinion, are not likely to recover in one year, their condition requiring treatment and their mental or physical fitness appearing to have suffered considerable diminution.

2.
Incurable sick and wounded whose mental or physical fit-ness appears to have suffered considerable diminution.

3.
Cured sick and wounded whose mental or physical fitness appears to have suffered considerable diminution.

B.     Governing principles for hospitalization in a neutral country.
RULES OF LBWD WARFARE
TItsre shall be hospitalized:
1.
Sick and wounded whose cEre within a period of one year is to be expected, such cure appearing more certain and more rapid if the sick and wounded are given the benefit of the resonrces offered by the neutral country than if their captivity proper is prolonged.

2.
Prisoners of war whose mental or physical health appears, according to medical opinion, to be seriously menaced by con- tinuance in captivity, while hospitalization in a neutral country would probably remove this danger.

C. Governing principles for the repatriation of prisoners
hospitalized in a neutral country. There shall be repatriated, the prisoners of war hospitalized in a neutral country, who belong to the following categories:
1.
Those whose state of health appears to be or to be becom-ing such that they fall within the categories of persons eligible to repatriation for reasons of health.

2.
The recovered whose mental or physical fitness seems to have suffered a considerable diminution.

11. Special principles for direct repatriation or hospitali- zation in a neutral country.
A. Special principles for repatriation.
There shall be repatriated:
1.
All prisoners of war who, as the result of organic injuries, have the following impairments, actual or functional: Loss of a member, paralysis, articular or other defects, provided that the loss is at least a foot or a hand, or is equivalent to the loss of a foot or a hand.

2.
All. wounded or injured prisoners of war wltose condition is such that it renders them invalids whose cure, within a period of 1 year, cannot be anticipated from a medical stand- point.

3.
All the sick whose condition is such that it renders them invalids whose cure, within a period of 1year, cannot be antici- pated from a medical standpoint. The following? in particular, belong to this category:

a. Progressive tuberculosis of any organs which, according to medical opinion, can no longer be cured or at least consider- ably improved by a course of treatment in a neutral country.
br
17.2

RUXES OF LAND WARFARE
b.
Nontubercmlar affections of the respiratory organs gre- sumed fcura.ble such as, above all, strongly developed pul- monary emphysema, with or without bronchitis, bronchial dilatio~s, serious asthma, gas poisoning, ete.

c.
Serious chronic affections of the organs of circulation (for example: Valvular affections with tendencies to disorders of compensation, relatively serious affections of the myocardium, pericardium and of the vessels, especially inoperable aneurisms of the large vessels, ete.).

d.
Serious chronic affections of the digestive organs.

e.
Serious chronic anections of the urinary and sexual organs, particularly, for example: All cases of con5rmed chronic ne- phritis with complete semeiology, and most especially when cardiac and vascular impairments already exist; likewise pye- litis and chronic cystitis, etc.

f.
Serious chronic diseases of the central and yvipheral nervous system, such as particularly, serious neurasthenia and hysteria, all unquestionabIe cases of epilepsy, serious cases of Basedow’s disease, etc.

g.
Blindness in both eyes, or in one eye when the vision of the other remains below l in spite of the use of corrective glasses. Redaction in acuteness of vision in case it is impos-sible to restore it by correction to the acuteness of ‘/2 for one eye at least. Other ocular affections coming in the present class (glaucom .,iritis, choroiditis, ete.).

h.
Total deafness in both ears, as well as total deafness in one ear in case the partially deaf ear does not discern the ordi- nary spoken voice at a distance of one meter.

i.
All unquestionable eases of mental affections.

k.
All serious cases of chronic poisoning by metals or other causes (saturnism, hydragyrism, morghinism, cocainism, alco- holism, gas poisoning, etc.)

1. Chronic affections of the organs of locomotion (arthritis deformans, gout, rheumatism with impairments clinically dis- coverable), provided they are serious.
m. All malignant neoplasms, if they are not amenable to rela- tively minor operations without endangering the life of the patient,
RD’LES OF LAND WARFARE a79
8. Ali eases of malaria with noticeable organic changes (im-portant chronic increase in size of the liver, of the spleen, cachexia, etc.).
o.
Serious chronic cutaneous affections, insofar as their na-ture does not constitute a medical indication for hospitalization in a neutral country.

p.
Serious avitaminoses (beri-heri, pellagra, chronic scurvy).

B.
Special principles for hospitalization. Prisoners of warmust be hospitalized if they have the following a@ ections :

1.
AII forms of tuberculosis of any organs whatever if, ac- cording to present medical knowledge, they may be cured, or at least considerably improved by methods applicable in a neutral country (altitude, treatment in sanatoria, etc).

2.
All forms, necessitatihg treatment, of affections of the respiratory, circulatory, digestive, genito-urinary, and nervous organs, of organs of the senses, of the locomotor and c~xtaneous apparatus; provided, however, that the forms of these affec- tioes do not belong to the categories requiring direct repatria- tion, or are not acute diseases properly so-called with a tendency to a complete cure. The affections c~ntemplated in this paragraph are those which offer really better chances of cure for the patient by the application of means of treat-ment available in a neutral country than if he mere treated in czptivity.

Nervous troubles, the efficient or determinant causes of which are the events of the war or even of the captivity itself, such as the psychasthenia of prisoners of mar and other anallo- mms cases, should be given sgeeial consideration.
All duly verified eases of this kind should be hospitalized, provided that the seriousness or constitutionaA character thereof does not malre them cases for direct repatriation.
Cases of psychasthenia of prisoners of war which are not cured after 3 months of hospiializatim in a neutral country Or which, after this period has expired, are not obviously on the road to final recovery should be repatriated.
3. All cases of wounds, of lesions, and their results which Offer better chances of cure in a neutral country than in cap- tivity, provided that these cases are not either eligible for exchange or else are insignificant.
172

RULES OF LAND WARFARE
4.
All cases of malaria, duly verified and not presenting organic changes clinically discoverable (chronic increase in size of liver, of the spleen, cachexia, etc.), if the stay in a neutral country offers particularly favorable prospects of final cure.

5.
A!1 cases of poisoning (particularly by gases, metals, alltaloids) for which the prospects of cure in a neutral country are especiaily favorable. , There shall be excluded from hospitalization:

1.
All duly verified cases of merdal affections.

2.
All organic or functional nervous affections reputed to be incurable. (Thesc two categories belong to those giving a right to direct exchange.)

3.
Serious chronic alcoholism.

4.
A11 contagious affections during the period in which they are transmissible (acute infectious diseases, primary and secondary syphilis, trachoma, leprosy, etc.).

1×1. General observations. The conditior~s given above silould, generally speaking, be interpreted a:d applied in as broad a spirit as possible.
This Breadth oP interpretation should be especially applied to neuropathic or psychopathic conditions caused or brought to a head by the events of the war or even of the captivity itself (psychasthenia of prisoners of war), and also to cases of tuberculosis in a11 degrees.
It is needless to state thst camp physicians and thc mixed medical ccmmission may find themselves conafronted with a great number of cases not mefitioned among the examples given under I& or cases not fitting in with these examples. The examples mentioned ab~eare given only as typical examples; an andogons iist of examples of surgical alterations has not bcea Gram up because, with the exception of cases incontestable by their very nature (amputations), it is diffi-cult to mal:e a Bist of particular types; experience has shorn thst a recital of these particular cases was not without disadvantages in practice.
All cases not fitting exactly into the examples cited slxaI1 be decided by invoki~g the spirit of the above governing principles.
RULES OF LAND WARFAFCE 173-176
CHAPTER 5
SICK, WOUNDED, AND DEAD
173.
Prior conventions superseded.-The present convention shall replace the conventions of August 22,-1864, and of July 6, 1906, in the relations between the high contracting parties (G.W.S., art. 34).

174.
Protected a~dtreated with humanity.-Officers, sol-diers, and other persons officially attached to armies who are wounded or sick shall be respected and protected under all circumstances; they shall be treated with humanity and cared for, without distinction of nationality, by the belligerent in whose power they are.

A belligerent, however, when compelled to -cave wounded or sick in the hands of his adversary, shall leave with them, so far as military exigencies permit, a portion of the personnel and mntBrieE of his san.itary service to assist in caring for them (G.W.S., art. 1).
175. General rules of international law in respect of war applicable; special agreements.-Subject to the care that must be taken of them under the preceding article, the wounded and sick of an army who fall into the power of the other belligerent shall be prisoners of war, and the general rules of international law in respect to prisoners shall be applicable to them.
The belligerents shall remain free, however, to agree upon auch clauses to the benefit of the wounded and sick prisoners as they may deem of value over and above already existing obligations (G.W.S.,art. 2).
176. Search for and removal; punishment of marauders.-
a. Search for wounded and dead; local armistice.-After every engagement, the belligerent who remains in possession of the field of battle shall take measures to search for the wounded and the dead and to protect them from robbery and ill-treatment.
Whenever circumstances permit, a local armistice or cessa- tion of fire to enable the removal of wounded left between the lines shall be arranged (G.W.S., art. 3).
1’76-17’7 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
b. Pzcnish9:zent of ma~auders.-Robbery and mnltreatment of the mounded or dead on a battlefield are outrageous offenses against the laws of war. It is the duty of the commanders to see that such offenders, whether members of the armed forces or civilians, are promptly apprehennded and brought to trial before competent military tribunals. Like other sedoi~s offend- ers against the laws of war they may be sentencecl to death or wch other punishment as the trial tribunal may be legally authorized to impose. (See par. 357.)
977. Mutual exchange of information.-a. Death cel-L,ificlctes; co2lection an.d return, of perso?lal efrects; graves service.-Eel- ligerents shall mutually inform each other as soon as possible of the names of the wounded, sick, and dead collected or discovered by them, as well as all indications which may serve for th~iridentification.
They shall dram up and forward to each other death certifi- cates.
They shall collect and likewise send to each ~tller sl! nrlleIes of personal use found on the field of battie or oil the dead, especially one half 06 their identity tag, the other half re-maining attached to the body.
They shall see that a careful examination, medical if pos- sible, is made of the bodies of the dead prior to their interment or cremation, in order to verify their death, estshlish their identity, and furnish a report thereon.
They shall further see that the dead are honorably buried and that the graves are respected and may always be found again. Far this purpose, and at the outbreak of hostilities, they shall officizlly organize a graves service in order to render any lrster exhumation possible and to maice certain of the identity of bodies, whatever changes may be made in the ioca- tion or’ the graves.
Upon the termication of hostilities, they shall exchange lists of graves and of dead buried in their cemeteries and elsew-here
(G. ‘rV. So,art. 4).
b. I?zterpretcction.-Obviously, as to each beliigerent, the pro- visions of the foregoing article relate only to the wounded, sick, and dead of the other beiligerent or belligerents engaged, be-cause the duties of each belligerent concerning its own wounded, sick, aril dead are fixed by its own laws and regulatio~s.
RULES OF LAND WARFARE 178-181
178. Appeal to inhabitants to care for sick and wounded permitted.-Military authorities may appeal to the charitable zeal of the inhabitants to receive and, under the supervision of the former, to care for the wounded or sick of the armies, granting to persons responding to such appeal special protec- tion and certain facilities (G. W. S., art. 5).
SANITARY FORMATIONS AND ESTanLISHMENTE
179.
Mobile sanitary formations and fixed establishments of sanitary service to be respected and protected-Mobile sani-tary formations, i e., those which are intended to accompany armies in the field, and the fixed establishments belonging to the sanitary service shall be respected and protected by the belligerents (G.W. S., art. 6).

180.
When protection ceases.-TRe protection due to sanitary formations and establishments shall cease if they are used to commit acts injurious to the enemy (G. W.S., art. 7).

181.
Forfeiture of protection.-a. Acts permitted.-A sani-tary formation or establishment shall not be deprived of the protection accorded by article 6 (see per. 179) by the fact-

1.
That the personnel of a formation or establishment is armed and uses its arms in self-defense or in defense of its wounded and sick.

2.
TRat in the absence of armed hospital attendants the forrnati~r~

is guarded by an armed del.achment or by sentinels.

3.
That hand arms and munitions taken from the wounded and sick and not yet turned over to the proper service are found in the formation or establishment.

4.
That there is found in the formation or establishment personnel or ~nat&rielof the veterinary service which does not integrally belong to it (G. by. S, art. 8).

b.
Self-defense dej+rzed,.-Although the sanitary personnel may carry arms for self-defense, they shall not employ such arms against the legitimate enemy forces. These arms are for their Personal defense and for protection of the wounded and sick under their charge against marauders and the like.

c.
GUa~dsfor sanitary units protected.-Soldiers from other branches employed as orderlies or guards for sanitary unies are treated as sanitary personnel if they carry written orders d

181-183 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
competent authority showing such status and have not during such status acted as combatants.
d. Arms and am?nzlnitiontaken,from the wounded and sick.-As provided in substance by the foregoing article, the presence of such arms and ammunition in a sanitary formation or estab- lishment does not of itself alone forfeit the protection to be accorded sanitary units under this convention. However, such arms and ammunition should be turned in as soon as practicable, and, in any eve~t,are subject to confiscation.
PERSONNEL OF SANITARY FORXA’I’ISONB AND ESTABLISHMENTS
182. Respect and protection.-a. Privileges ol pcrscmae1.-The personnel charged exclusively with the removal, trans-portation, and treatment of the wounded and sick, as well as with the administration of sanitary formations and establish-ments, and the chaplains attached to armies, shall be respected and protected under all circumstances. If they fall into the hands of the enemy they shall not be treated as prisoners ~f war.
Military personnel which has received special instructions to be used when necessary as auxiliary attendants or litter bearers in the removal, transportation, and treatment of the wounded and sick, and bearing identification documents, shall benefit by the same regime as the permanent sanitary per- sonnel if captured while performing these functions (G.W.S.,
b. What is meant by respect aml protecticrn.-The respect and protection accorded personnel of certain categories by articles 6 (par. 179) and 91 (a above) mean that they must not knowingly
be attacked, fired upon, or unnecessarily prevented from dis- charging their proper functions. The accidental killing or wounding of such personnel, due to their presence among or proximity to combatant elements ahalllpl engaged, by fi’re directed at the latter, affords no just cause for complaint.
183. Personnel of voluntary societies; names of those au-thorized to be exchanged.-The personnel of volunteer aid societies duly recognized and authorized by their government, who may be employed in the same functions as the personnel contemplated in article 9, paragraph 1 (see par. 182a), shall be
4)). art.
RUlXY OF LAND WARFARE 183-186
assimilated to that personnel upon condition that the per- sonnel of the said societies shall be subject to military laws and regulations.
Each high contracting party shaII notify the other, either in time of peace or at the opening or during the progress of hostilities, and in any case before actual employment, the names of the societies which it has authorized to render assistance, under its responsibility, in the official sanitary service of its armies (G. W. S., art. 10).
184.
The American National Red Cross.-The American National Red Cross is, under the proclamation of the President, the only such volunteer society now authorized by this Govern- ment to render aid to its land and naval forces in time of waq and any other society desiring to render similar assistance can do so only through the American National Red Cross. Such portion of the society as may render aid to the land or naval forces will constitute a part of the sanitary service thereof. Their employment must be under the responsibility of the Government, and they must be assigned to duties in localities designated by competent military authority (AR 850-75).

185.
Volunteer societies of neutrals.-A recognized society of a neutral country may only lend the services of its sanitary personnel and formations to a belligerent with the prior con- sent of its own government and the authorities of such belligerent.

The belligerent who has accepted such assistance shall be required to notify the enemy before making any use thereof
(G. W. S., art. 11).
186. Personnel in power of enemy.-a. PersonneZ not to be detained; service may be used pending return.-The persons described in articles 9,10, and 11(see pars. 182a, 183,185)may not be detained after they have fallen into the power of the enemy.
Unless there is an agreement to the contrary, they shall be sent back to the belligerent to whose service they are attached as soon as a way is open for their return and military exi- gencies permit.
While waiting to be returned, they shall continue in the exercise of their functions under the direction of the enemy;
186-189 RULES OF LAND WAFKFARE
they shall be assigned preferably to the care of the wounded and sick of the belligerent to whose service they are attached.
At the time of their departure they may carry with then1 such eaects, instruments, arms, and means of trans2ort as belong to them (GeFVY8,art 12).
6. I?~terpretations.-Nothing in the foregoing article precludes reasonable measures to prevent such personnel, upon their re-turn to their own arolg, from carrying inforination of strategic or tactical value. Their movements and activities may be restricted as far as reasonably necessary to prevent their acquisition of such information, and if -1hey should become possessed thereof, their return to their own army may be de-layed until the information has ceased to be of substantial value.
187. Maintenance, quarters, pay, and allowances.-Belllig-erents shall assure to the persomd indicated in articles 9, 10, and 11 (see pars. 182, 183, la),who are in their power, the same maintenance and quarters, pay, and allowances as to the corresponding personnel in their own armies.
the outbreak sf hostilities the belligerents shall reach an understanding on the corresponding grades of their sanitary
(G.W.S., art. 13).
188. Captured mobile sanitary formations to retain mat6riel and personnel; niay be employed to care for sick and
wounded.-If mobile sanitary formations, whatever may be their nature, fall into the power of the enemy, they shall retain their mt&a’el, aheh means of transportation, and their conducting personnel.
The competent military authority, however, shdl have the right to employ them ir. caring for the wounded and sick; their return shall take place in accordance with the conditions
for the sanitary personnel and as far as possible at the same time (G.W.S., arte1Q.
189. Fixed sanitary establishments not to be diverted from thdr use, exceptio11.-Bnildhgs and mab&riel pertaining to fixed sanitary establishments of the army shall remain subject to the laws of war, but may not be diverted from their use 60 long as they are necessary for the wounded and sick.
If
;
j

,
I
However, conlmanders of troops engaged in operations may use them in case of urgent military necessity, if, before such use, the wounded and sick treated there have been provided for (G.W.S.,art. 15).
190. Buildings and mat6riel of aid societies to be regarded as private property; right of requisition.-The buildings of the aid societies admitted to the benefits of the convention shall be regarded as private property.
The mat6riel of these societies, isrespective of its location, shall likewise be regarded as private property.
The right of requisition recognized to belligerents by the laws and customs of war shall be exercised only in case of urgent necessity and after the wounded and sick have been provided for (G.W.S., art. 16).
SAN ITBRY TUNSPORTATION
191. Convoys of evacuation.-Vehicles equipped for sanitary evacuation traveling singly or in convoy shall be treated as mobile sanitary formations subject to the following special provisions:
A belligerent intercepting sanitary transportation vehicles, traveling either singly or in convoy, may, if required by mili- tary necessity, stop them and break up the convoy, taking charge in all cases of the care of the mounded and sick whom it contains. He may only utilize such vehicles in the sector wherein they were intercepted and exclusively for sanitary needs. When their local mission is at an end, these vehicles must be returned under the conditions stipulated in article
14. (See par. 188.)
Military personnel charged with transportation and pro- vided for this purpose with a regular order shall be returned under the conditions stipulated in article 12 (see par. 186) for sanitary personnel, and subject to the provisions of the last paragraph of article 18. (See par. 192.)
All means of transportation especially organized for evacua- tion purposes, as well as the nzat6riel for organizing them, attached to the sanitary service, shall be returned in con-formity with the provisions of chapter IV. (See pars. 1% 1s9,190.)
991-193 RDLEB OF LAND WARFARE
Military means of transportation, other than those belong- ing to the sanitary service, and their teams, may be captured. The civil personnel and all means of transportation obtained by requisition shall be subject to the general rules of interna-
tional law (G.W.S., art. 17).
102. Aircraft used as sanitary transportation-Aircraft used as a means of sanitary transportation shall enjoy the protec- tion of the Convention during such time as they are exclusively reserved for the evacuation of wounded and sickand for the transportation of sanitary personnel and mat6rieZ.
They shall be painted in white and shaU bear, conspicuously, the distinctive sign mentioned in article 19 (see par. 193) alongside of the national colors on their upper and lower surfaces.
Excepting with special and express permission, a flight over the firing line, as well as over the zone situated in front of the major medical collecting stations, and in general over any territory under the control of or occupied by the enemy shall be forbidden.
Sanitary aircraft qust comply with any summons to land.
In the case of a landing thus required or made accidentally upon territory occupied by the enemy, the wounded and sick, as well as the sanitary personnel and matgriel, including the aircraft, shall benefit by the provisions of the present Con-vention.
The pilot, mechanics, and wireless operators who have been captured shall be returned on condition of only being utilized in the sanitary service until the termination of hostilities
(G.WS., art. 18).
193. The Red Cross; emblem of sanitary service.-Out of respect to Switzerland the heraldic emblem of the Red Cross on a white ground, formed by the reversal of the Federal colors, is continued as the emblem and distinctive sign of the sanitary service of armies.
However, for countries which already use, as a distinctive sign, in place of the red cross, the red crescent, or the red lion and sun on a white field, these emblems shall likewise be
1

1
;
RULESOFLANDWARJ?ARE 993-196
recognized within the meaning of the present convention (G.W.S., art. 19).
194.
Emblem to appear on flags and materiel of sanitary service.-The emblem shall appear on flags and brassards, as well as upon all materiel, appertaining to the sanitary service, with the permission of the competent military authority (CAWS., art. 20).

195.
Brassards, protected personnel to wear; certificate of identity.-The personnel protected in virtue of the first para- graph of article 9 (see par. 182) and articles 10 and 11 (see pars. 183, 185) shall wear attached to the left arm a brassard bearing the distinctive sign, issued and stamped by a com-petent military authority.

The personnel indicated in article 9 (see par. I=), para-graphs 1 and 2, shall be furnished with proof of identity consisting either of an entry in their military handbook or a special document.
Persons contemplated in articles 10 and 11 (see pars. 183, 185) who do not wear military uniform shall be furnished by the competent military authority with a certificate of identity containing their photograph and attesting to their sanitary status.
Identification documents must be uniform and of the same type in each army. The sanitary personnel may in no case be deprived of their insignia: nor of their own identification papers. In case of loss they shall have the right to obtain duplicates
(G.W.S., art. 21).
196. The distinctive flag; where and how displayed.-The distinctive flag of the convention may only be displayed over the sanitary formations and establishments which the con-vention provides shall be respected, and with the consent of the military authorities. In fixed establishments it shall, and in mobile formations it may, be accompanied by the national flag of the belligerent to whose service the formation or establishment is attached.
Sanitary formations which have fallen into the power of the enemy, however, shall fly no other flag than that 0; the Con-vention as long as they continue in that situation-
196-198 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
The belligerents, insofar as military exigencies allow, shall Cake such measures as may be necessary to render the distinc- twe emblems m~terlcing sanitary fo-in~alions and establishments pIa;nly visible to the iland, air, and sea forces of the enemy, with a view to preventing the possibility of any aggressive action (G.W.S., art. 22).
197. Flags of sanitary formations of nentral countries.-The sanitary formations of neutral countries which, under the conditions set forth in article 11 (see pnr. 1% j , have been authorized to render their services, shall 5y pith the flag of the convent:,on, the national Blag of the bdligerent to which they are atiached.
They shall Irme tile riqht during such time as they are rendering sel vkc ;s :, Eef!;t.–~nt to fiv rheir own natio~aal flag also. The provisions of the second pzragraph of the preceding artic!e are applicable to ~hcra(G.?V.S,art. 23).
193. Red Cross emblem autinorizcd iil peace or war to desfg- Date mat&riel and perso-~nelprbtectcd by the eonvention.- ‘J’l2e emb’iezn of the Red Crass on a whits ground arid the words “Red Crass9’ or ‘%edcevce Cross” may only be used, whether in time of pes;ce or war, to protect or designate sailiiary formstions and establishments, the personnel and ma&&riclprotected by the conventior..
T1:e same shall arply vaith respect 19 the emble~ns mentfoaed in the secoraci pGrasragbof asaide “a (see par. 193). for such countries as use ther13~
raoreoyer, tho volunteer aid societies provided for under article 10 (see par. 183) stay, ia eonS3ri3ity with llaeir national IIegisiziticn, empicy the distinctive eniblem for their hnmani-tarian activities in time of peaee.
As 2n exce9.tional measire and witla the speci6c antho+fza-
1.-
.,,n of one of the national Red Cross sacicties (Bed Crescent, Ked Lion, arid Bun), the use of the emblem of th.e convention jsay be al’iowed in peace time to designate the location of relief stations reserved exclnsiveIy to giving free assistance to wonzded or sick (5;. W. S., art. 24).
I
i, 1
1

.
RULES OF LBND WARFARE 199-202
199.
Duty of commanders in chief of belligerent armies to provide in detail for execution of the foregoing articles.-It shall be the duty of the commanders in chief of the belligerent armies to provide for the details of execution of the foregoing articles, as well as for unforeseen cases, in accordance with the instructions of their respective governments and conformably to the general principles of this convention (G.W.S., art. 26).

200.
Publication of provisions of Geneva convention-The high contracting parties shall take the necessary steps to acquaint their troops, and particularly the protected personnel, with the provisions of this convention, and to make them known to the people at large (G. I+’. S, art. 27).

201.
Investigation of violations.-At the request of a bel-ligerent, an investigation must be held, in such manner as shall be agreed upon by the interested parties, concerning any alleged violation of the convention; whenever such a violation is proved, the belligerents shall put an end to it and repress it as promptly as possible (G.W.S., art 30).

ESPIONAGE AND TKEASON
202. Spies.-a. GensmZ.-A pnrson can only 62 considered a spy when, acting clandestinely or on faise pretenses, he obtains or endeavors t~ obtain information in the zone of operations of a belligerent with the intention of communicating it to the hostile party.
Thus, soldiers not wearing a disguise who have penetrated into the zone of operations of the hostile army for the pnr- pose of obtaining information 2re not considered spies. Simi-larly, the following are not considered spies: Soldiers and civilians, carrying out their mission openly, intrusted with the delivery of dispatches intended either for their own army or for the enemy’s army. To this dass helong, likewise, persons sent in balloons for the purpose of carrying dispatches and,
202-204 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
generally, of maintaining communications between different parts of an army or a territory (H.R., art. 29).
b. American statutory definition.-The first paragraph of the foregoing Hague regulation has been in effect somewhat modi- fied, as far as American practice is concerned, by the subse- quently enacted eighty-second article of war (act June 4, 19W. ch. 11,art. 82; 41 Stat. 804), as follows:
Art. 82. Spies.-Any person who in time of war shall be found lurking or acting as a spy in or about any of the fortifi- cations, posts, quarters, or encampments of any of the armies of the United States, or elsewhere, shall be tried by a general court martial or by a military commission, and shall, on con-viction thereof, suffer death.
G. Eighty-second artdcle of war gouerws.–Insofar as H. R. 28 and the eighty-second article of mar are not in conflict with each other, they will be construed and applied together. Otherwise the Article of War governs American practice.
203.
Employment of spies lawful.-The foregoing H. R. 29 (par. 20%) and H. R. 24 (pal: 37) tacitly recognize the well-established right of belligerents to employ spies and other secret agents for obtaining information of the enemy. Resort to that practice involves no offense against international law. Spies are punished, not as violators of the laws of war, but to render that method of obtaining information as dangerous, difficult, and ineffective as possible for the enemy.

204.
Who included in definition.-The definition embodied in The Hague regulation (par. 20%) and that contained in the eighty-second article of war (par. 2026) both include persons of all classes, whether military or civilian, without regard to citizenship or sex. Both likewise apply only where the acts are committed in time of war. The Hague definition applies only where the information is obtained or sought “in the zone of operations,” while the statutory definition is not so limited. The latter, however, includes only persons “found lurking or acting as a spy in or about any of the fortications, posts, quar- ters, or encampments of any of the armies of the United States, or elsewhere,” and the phrase “or elsewhere,” as here employed, has been held not to justify trial by military tribunals of “per- sons charged with acts or offenses committed outside of the Eeld

RULFB OF LAND WARFARE 206206
of military operations or territory under martial law or other peculiarly military territory, except members of the military or naval forces or those immediately attached to the forces, such as camp followers.” (Ops. Atty. Gen. U. S., vol. 31, pp. 356,361). Persons charged with espionage committed in the United States, outside military jurisdiction, are nevertheless liable to trial and punishment by the civil courts under the espionage laws
(United States Code, title 50, ch. IV).
205. Treason.-a. Americm statutory deMiti0n.-Whosoever relieves or attempts to relieve the enemy with arms, ammuni- tion, supplies, money, or other thing, or knowingly harbors or protects or holds correspondence with or gives intelligence to the enemy, either directly or indirectly, shall suffer death or such punishment as a court-martial or military commission may direct (eighty-first article of war; act June 4, 1920, chap. 11, 41 Stat. 804).
b.
Imterpretatims.-As in the case of the eighty-second article of war, relating to spies (pars. ZWb, 204). it is believed that this statute, when subject to judicial interpretation, will be held to authorize the trial of civilians by military tribunals, only when the offense has been committed within territory under martial law or military government, or within the zone of mili- tary operations, or within a military reservation, post, or camp, or in a place otherwise especially subject to military jurisdiction. Cases occurring in the United States outside military juridic tion are triable by the civil courts under the espionage laws above mentioned (par. 204). In time of war, within territory under military control for any of the reasons above indicated, the rule is general in its application to persons of all classes, without regard to citizenship or military or civil status.

o.
lmtraterritoriaz force of the rule.-Although the eighty-first article of war, as an enactment of the Congress, technically ap plies of its own force only within teyitory of the United States and to persons subject to American militbry law elsewhere, it substantially embodies principles of the unwritten laws of war applicable to occupied enemy territory, and will be enforced by American troops occupying such territory.

206. War traitors.-Violators of the foregoing rule are called “war traitors.”
20’7-215 RlJIJ3S OF LAND WARFaRPl
207.
Subject giving information to own government.-If the citizen or subject of a country or place invaded or conquered gives information to his own government, from which he is separated by the hostile army, or to the army of his government, he is a war traitor.

208.
Guide to the enemy.-If a citizen of a hostile and in- vaded district voluntarily serves as a guide to the enemy, or offers to do so, he is deemed a war traitor.

209.
Punishment of spies.-The spy is punishable with death whether or not he succeeds in obtaining the information or in conveying it to the enemy.

210.
Punishment for treason.-The war traitor Is always severely punished. If his offense consists in betraying to the enemy anything concerning the condition, safety, operations, or plans of the troops holding or occupying the place or district, his punishment is death.

211.
Spy must be tried.-A spy taken in the act shall not be punished without previous trial (H. R., art. 30).

212.
Spy immune from punishment after joining his own army.-A spy who, after rejoining the army to which he be- longs, is subsequently captured by the enemy, is treated as a prisoner of war, and incurs no responsibility for his previous acts of espionage (8.R, art. 31).

213.
Immunity not applicable to treason-This immunity does not extend to persons guilty of treason who may be arrested at any place or any time within the jurisdiction; and it is not necessary for traitors to be caught in the act in order that they may be punished.

214.
Assisting espionage punishable.-Assisting or favoring espionage or treason and knowingly concealing a spy may be made the subject of charges; and such acts are by the customary laws of war equally punishable.

CHAPTER 7
INTERCOURSE BETWEEN BELLIGERENTS
215. Nonintercourse, the rule.-All intercourse between the territories occupied by belligerent armies, whether by traffic, by letter, by travel, or in any other way, ceases. This is the general rule to be observed without special proclamation.
BULEB OF LANDWARFARE 216-222
216.
Exceptions to rule.-Exceptions to this rule, whether by safeconduct, or permission to trade on a small or large scale, or by exchanging mails, or by travel from one territory into the other, can take place only according to agreement approved by the government or by the highest military authority. Contra-ventions of this rule are highly punishable.

217.
Good faith essential.-It is absolutely essential in all ponhostiie relations that the most scrupulous good faith shall be observed by both parties, and that no advantage not intended to be given by the adversary shall be taken.

218.~Ambassadors and diplomatic agents.-Ambassadors and other diplomatic agents of neutral powers, accredited to the enemy, may receive safe-conducts through the territories occu- pied by the belligerents, unless there are military reasons to the contrary, and unless they may reach the place of their destina- tion conveniently by another route. It implies no international affront if the safeconduct is declined. Such passes are usually given by the supreme authority of the State and not by the subordinate&
219.
Rules, where found.-These noahostile relations are usually comprised under the headings of parlementaires, flags of truce, armistices, capitulations, passports, safe-conducts, safe guards, and cartels.

220.
Definition of par1ementaires.-Parlementaires are agents employed by commanders of belligerent forces in the fleld, to go in person within the enemy lines, for the purpose of com- municating or negotiating openly and directly with the enemy commander.

221.
Inviolability of par1ementaire.-A person is regarded as a parlementaire who has been authorized by one of the bellig- erents to enter into communication with the other, and who advances bearing a white flag. He has a right to inviolability, as well as the trumpeter, bugler or drummer, the flag bearer, and interpreter who may accompany him (H.R., art. 32).

222.
Instruction of soldiers concerning par1ementaire.-All soldiers, of whatever grade, should be thoroughly acquainted with the qualifications and privileges accorded parlementaires, and with the proper method of receiving them when they present themselves.

283-228 RULES OF’ LAND WARFARE
223.
Signification of white flag.-The white flag, when used by troops, indicates a desire to communicate with the enemy. The hoisting of a white flag has no other signification in inter- national law. It may indicate that the party hoisting it desires to open communication with a view to an armistice or a sur-render. If hoisted in action by an individual soldier or a small party, it may signify merely the surrender of that soldier or party. It is essential, therefore, to determine with reasonable certainty that the flag is shown by actual authority of the enemy commander before basing important action upon that assumption.

224.
Fire during display of white flag.-The enemy is not required to cease firing when a white flag is raised. To indicate that the hoisting is authorized by its commander, the appearance of the flag sholild be accompanied or followed promptly by a complete cessation of fire from that side. The commander au- thorizing the hoisting of the flag should also promptly send a parlementaire.

225.
Fire not to be directed on the par1ementaire.-The fire should not be intentionally directed on the person carrying the flag or upon those with him; if, however, the parlementaire or those near him present themselves during an engagement and are killed or wounded, it furnishes no ground for com-plaint. It is the duty of the parlementaire to select a propitious moment for displaying his flag, such as during the intervals of active operations, and to avoid the dangerous zone by making a detour.

226.
Credentials of par1ementaire.-The parlementaire, in addition to presenting himself under cover of a white flag, must be duly authorized in a written instrument signed by the com- mander of the forces.

227.
No communication at night.-No provision is made for opening communication with an enemy during the hours of darkness when a white flag cannot be seen. An attempt to send a parlementaire at night is very dangerous, and at best uncertain.

228.
Reception of par1ementaire.-The commander to whom a parlementaire is sent is not obliged to receive him under all circumstances. He may take all the necessary steps to pre- vent the parlementaire from taking advantage of his mission to

RULES OF LAND WAFWARE 228-231
obtain information. In case of abuse, he has the right to detain the envoy temporarily (H.R., art. 33).
229.
May prescribe formalities.-The commander may declare the formalities and conditions upon which he will receive a parlementaire and fix the hour and place at which he must appear. The present rule is that a belligerent may not decIare beforehand, even for a specified period–except in case of re-prisal for abuses of the flag of trucethat he will not receive parlementaires. An unnecessary repetition of visits need not be allowed.

230.
Who may accompany the par1ementaire.-Only three persons are authorized to accompany the parlementaire. These, under the rule, are entitled to the same immunity. In case he is to have more than these, authority for the same should be previously obtained. He may be accompanied by a Iess num- ber, and may even go alone with the flag of truce. It is advisable to have at least a trumpeter, bugler, or drummer with him in order more readily and surely to make known his status, thereby avoiding danger as much as possible.

231.
Formalities in the reception of par1ernentaires.-a. The parlementaire, with necessary authorization and with his duly authorized attendants, should approach the enemy’s outpost or lines at a slow pace. When he arrives near enough to be recog- nized-that is, seen and heard-he causes his trumpet or bugle to be sounded or drum to be beaten and his flag to be waved.

b.
He then advances at a slow pace toward the line, carefully obeying all instructions signaled or given him by any party of the enemy sent out to meet or conduct him.

o.
He will then proceed to the point and by the route desig- nated for receiving him. He may be furnished an escort for this by the enemy.

d.
On arriving at the post of admittance the bearer and his escort dismount, and, leaving the escort at a convenient dis- tance in rear, he proceeds on foot to the commander or senior officer of the post and states his mission.

e.
The escort should not attempt to enter the lines with the parlementaire, and must obey a11 instructions or signals given then!.

1. Marked courtesy must be observed on both sides. Conver-sation should be prudent and not touch upon the military opera.
63

1
/
I
I
231-234 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
tions. Great care will be exercised not to ask for nor to impart information.
g.
The parlementaire will be treated with all the honors due to his rank and station and furnished an escort or guard in case of necessity.

h.
A parlementaire cannot of strict right claim to pass the outpost, nor can he demand to be conducted into the presence of the commanding officer. His message, if written, may be transmitted to the commanding officer; if verbal, he may be required to reduce it to writing or deliver it orally to such per- son as may be designated to receive it. If he is sent to the rear for any reason whatever, he should be blindfolded and sent ‘by a circuitous route.

i.
In cases where resort is had to a decision from higher au- thority, the parlementaire must wait until same is returned.

j.
The parlementaire will be permitted to retire and return with the same formalities and precautions as upon arrival.

232.
Detention of par1ementaire.-In addition to right of de- tention for abuse of his position, a parlementaire may be de- tained in case he has seen anything or obtained knowledge which may be detrimental to the enemy, or if his departure should reveal information of the movement of troops. He should be detained only so long as circumstances imperatively demand, and information should be sent at once to his commander as to such detention, as well as of any other action taken against him or against his party.

233.
Inviolability, loss of.-The parlementaire loses his right of inviolability if it is proved in a clear and incontestable manner that he lias taken advantage of his privileged position to provoke or commit an act of treachery (RB.,art. 34).

234.
Abuse of flag of truce.-It constitutes an abuse of the flag of truce, forbidden as an improper use under H.R.,article 23 (f) (see par. 411,for an enemy not to halt and cease firing while the parlementaire sent by him is advancing and being received by the other party; likewise, if the flag of truce is made use of for the purpose of inducing the enemy to believe that a parlementaire is going to be sent when no such intention exists. It is also an abuse of a flag of truce to carry out operations ucder the protection accorded by the enemy to i:

RULES OF LAND WARFARE 234-238
and those accompanying it. An abuse of a flag of truce may authorize a resort to reprisals. (See par. 358.)
CHAPTER 8
MILITARY PASSPORTS, SAFE-CONDUCTS, SAPE-
GUARDS, AND CARTELS

235.
Military passport.-A military passport is a document lssued by order of a commander of belligerent forces, authoriz- ing a person or persons named therein, residing or sojourning within terrdtoqi occupied by such forces, to travel unmolested within such territory, with or without permission to pass, or to pass and return, by designated routes, through the lines, subject to such further conditions and limitations as the com- mander may prescribe.

236.
Safe-conduct for persons.-Documents like passports, issued by the same authority and for similar purposes, to persons residing or sojourning outside of the occupied areas, who desire to enter and remain within or pass through such areas, are called safe-conducts.

237.
Safe-conduct for goods.-Similar documents, issued by the same authority, to persons residing within or without the occupied areas, to permit them to carry specified goods to or from designated places within those areas, and to engage in trade otherwise forbidden by the general rule of nonintercourse, are also called safe-conducts. (See also par. 240.)

238.
Passports and safe-conducts; use of terms; forms; transferability.-The difference between military passports and safe-conducts as to persons has not heretofore been clearly debed, the two terms having been employed more or less indis- criminately. The distinctions above indicated are based upon analogous customs with relation to civil passports and are adopted in the present text to avoid further confusion in this respect. Printed forms for these documents will be supplied in time of war by The Adjutant General. Passports and safe- conducts as to persons are individual and nontransferable. A safe-conduct for goods, although restricted to the articles therein designated, may be carried by any agent of the person or firm to which it is issued, who is designated by that person

238-243 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
or Erm by written indorsement upon the document to accom- pany the goods, unless the person to accompany the goods is named in the document. In the latter event the document will be honored only in the hands of the person so named. When passports and safe-conducts are granted by arrangement with the enemy, or with a neutral power, they must be issued and l\onored precisely according to the terms of the arrangement.
239.
Passports and safe-conducts; revocation and lapse.-by passport or safe-conduct may be revoked by the commander issuing it, or by his superiors, for reasons of military expedi- ency, but, until revoked, it is binding upon the grantor and his successors. When a time is specified in the document, it is valid only during such time. These documents should not be revoked for the purpose of sec~lring the persons of the holders, who should be given time to withdraw in safety. In case of violation of their terms the privilege will be withdrawn and the case investigated.

240.
Licenses to trade.-Safe-conducts for goods in which the grantee is given a continuing right for a prescribed period, or until further orders, to engage in the specMed trade, are sometimes called licenses to trade.

241.
Safeguard.-A safeguard is a detachment of soldiers posted or detailed by a commander of troops for the purpose of protecting some person or persons, or a particular village, building, or other property. The term “safeguard” is also used to designate a written order by a commander of belligerent forces for the protection of an enemy subject or enemy property. It is usually directed to the succeeding commander requesting the grant of protection for such individuals or property. Writ-ten safeguards may be delivered to the parties whose persons or property are to be protected, or they may be posted on the property. The violation of a safeguard is a grave offense against the laws of war. (See A. W. 7%)

242.
Inviolability of soldiers as safeguards.-Soldiers on duty as safeguards are guaranteed against the application of the laws of war, and it is customary to send them back to their army when the locality is occupied by the enemy, together with their baggage and arms, as soon as military exigencies permit.

243.
Cartels.–In the customary military sense a cartel is an agreement entered into by belligerents for the exchange of

RULES OF LAND WARFARE 243-247
prisoners of war. In its broader sense it is a convention con- cluded between belligerents for the purpose of arranging or regulating certain kinds of nonhostile intercourse otherwise prohibited by reason of the existence of the war. Both parties to a cartel are in honor bound to observe its provisions with the most scrupulous care, but it is voidable by either party upon definite proof that it has been intentionally violated in an important particular by the other party.
CHAPTER 9
CAPITULATIONS AND AEKISTICES
CAPITULATIONS

244.
Definition.-A capitulation is an agreement entered into between commanders of belligerent forces for the surrender of a body of troops, a fortress, or other defended locality, or of a district of the theater of operations.

245.
Military honor in.-Capitulations agreed upon between the contracting parties must take into account the rules of military honor.

Once ~ettled, they must be scrupulously observed by both parties (HA., art. 36).

246.
Powers of commanders.-Subject to the limitations here- inafter indicated, the commander of a fort or place, or the commander in chiel of an army, is presumed to be duly author- ized to enter into cspitulations. if he capitulates unnecessarily and shamefully, or in violation of orders from higher authority, he is liable to trial and punishment by his own government (see

A.W. 75), but the validity of the capitulation remains unim~ paired. His powers are not presumed to extend beyond the forces and territory under his own command. He is not pre- sumed to possess power to bind his government to a perma-nent cession of the place or places under his command, or to any surrender of sovereignty over territory, or to any cessation of hostilities in a district beyond his command, or generally to make or agree to terms of a political nature, or such as will take effect after the termination of hostilities.
247. Forms of capitulations.-There is no specified form for capitulations. They mar be concluded either orally or in writ-
247-248 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
ing, but in order to avoid disputes which may arise as to the terms thereof, it is best, whenever possible, that they be re- duced to writing. The convention should contain in precise terms every condition to be observed on either side, excepting such conditions as are clearly imposed by the laws of war. Details of time and procedure should be prescribed in the most exact and unequivocal language. Even in case of an uncon- ditional surrender following an assault, when the terms are practically dictated by the victor, they should nevertheless be embodied in a written capitulation as soon as practicable.
248. Subjects usually regulated.-In the terms of capitula-tion the following subjects are usually determined:
a.
Cessation of hostilities.-If hostilities have not already been suspended, the date, hour, and minute when they are to cease should be specified.

b.
The fate of the firrison, inczuding those persons who may have assisted them.-It is usually agreed that these are to be- come prisoners of war. In that event, if both belligerents are parties to the Geneva convention of 1929 (ch. 4), concerning the treatment of prisoners of war, little or nothing more on that subject need be included in the capitulation. However, special circumstances, such as the bravery of the defense, the strategic or tactical importance of immediate occupation of the place or area to be surrendered, the probable losses that would be involved in forcing an unconditional surrender, inability of the victor to guard, evacuate, and maintain so many as prison- ers of war, or other considerations, may justify the victorious commander in agreeing to allow the defeated force simply to evacuate, or to march out with the “honors of war,” or to dis- perse after disarming and giving paroles, providing in the latter case the laws of their country do not forbid, and they are willing to give paroles.

c.
The disarming of the place and of the defenders.-The officers are sometimes allowed to retain their side arms besides the articles which they are entitled to keep under (G.P. W., art 6), paragraph 79.

d.
The turning over of the arms and matdriel, and, in, a proper case, the locating op the mine defenses, etc.

e.
The evacuation of and taking possession of the surrendered glace.-The provisions relative to the withdrawal of the de-

RmS OF LAND WABFARE 248-254
fenders and the entering into possession of the besiegers are . bed in advance with absolute precision, according to the cir-cumstances of each case. Commissions may be named for the delivery and taking possession, respectively.
f’. Provisions relative to the medical personnel, sick, and wounded. g! Prwisions for taking over the civil government and Drop- erty of the place, with regard to the peaceable population.
h. 8tipulations with regard to the immediate handing over to the victor of certain forts or places, or other similar provisions, as a pledge for the fulfillment of the capitulation.
249.
Damage or destruction of property prohibited after capitulation-From the moment of the signing of a capitula-tion, the capitulator has no right to demolish, destroy, or injure the works, arms, stores, or ammunition in his possession during the time which elapses between the signing and the execution of the capitulation, unless otherwise stipulated in same.

250.
Denunciation of capitulation.-A capitulation can be denounced and hostilities immediately resumed for failure to execute any clause which has been agreed upon or in case it was obtained through a breach of faith.

ARMISTICES

251.
Definition.-An armistice is the cessation of active hos- tilities for a period agreed on between belligerents. It should, if possible, be agreed upon in writing and duly ratified by the highest authorities of the contending parties.

252.
Effect of armistice.-An armistice suspends military op- erations by mutual agreement between the belligerent parties. If its duration is not defined, the belligerent parties may re- sume operations at any time, provided always that the enemy is warned within the time agreed upon, in accordance with the terms of the armistice (H.R.,art. 36).

253.
Nature of armistice.-An armistice is not a partial or a temporary peace; it is only the suspension of military opera- tions to the extent agreed upon by the parties.

254.
When binding.-An armistice is binding upon the bel- ligerents from the time of the agreed commencement, but the

254-261 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
officers of the armies are responsible only Prom the time when they receive official information of its existence.
255.
Importance of fixing time.-In all armistices it is of the utmost importance that the exact moment for the commence- ment and for the termination of same shall be fixed in the terms thereof beyond any possibility of mistake or miscon-ception.

256.
Activities authorized during an armistice.-An armis-tice need not in terms prohibit actual hostilities. Anything else may be done during an armistice that is not in express terms prohibited by the agreement.

257.
Form of armistice.-No special form for an armistice is prescribed. It should, if possible, be reduced to writing, in order to avoid misunderstandings and for purposes of reference should differences of opinion arise. It should be drafted with the greatest precision and with absolute clearness.

258.
Kinds of armistice.-An armistice may be general or local. The first suspends the military operations of the bellig- erent States everywhere; the second only between certain fractions of the belligerent armies and within a fixed radius (H.R., art. 37).

259.
General armistices.-General armistices are of a com-bined political and military character. They usually precede the negotiations for peace, but may be concluded for other purposes. Due to its political importance, a general armistice is concluded by the governments concerned or by their com-manders in chief, and is subject to ratification by the govern- ments in every case. General armistices are frequently ar-ranged by diplomatic representatives.

260.
Low1 armistice.-A local armistice suspends operations between certain portions of the belligerent forces, or within a designated district of the theater of operations. A local armistice may be concluded by the military forces only, or by the naval forces only, or between a less number than all of the belligerents at war.

261.
Suspension of arms.-A suspension of arms Is a form of armistice concluded between commanders of armies, or even of detachments, for some local military purpose; such as to bury the dead, to collect the wounded, to arrange for exchange

RULES OF LAND WBRFARE 861-265
of prisoners, to enable a commander to communicate with his government or superior officer.
262.
Notification of armistice.-An armistice must be noti- fied officially and in good time to the competent authorities and to the troops. Hostilities are suspended immediately after the notification, or at the time fixed (R.R., art. 38).

263.
Intercourse in theater of operations.-It rests with the contracting parties to settle, in the terms of the armistice, what intercourse may be held in the theater of war with and between the populations (HA., art. 39). /

264.
Rule in absence of stipulation.-If nothing is stipu- lated, the intercourse remains suspended, as during actual hostilities.

265.
What stipulations an armistice should contain.-Stipu- lations covering the following matters should be incorporated in an armistice :

a.
Precise date, day, and hour op the commencement of the mistice.-These may be different in different parts of the army.

b.
Duration op the adstice.-The duration may be for a definite or indefinite period. In case it is indefinite, a bellig-erent may resume operations at any time after due notice given. If a terin is Exed and no agreement has been made for prolong-

ing it, hostilities may be resumed without notice at the expira- tion of the term in the absence of positive agreement to the contrary. An armistice commences, in the absence of express mention to the contrary, at the moment it is signed.
c.
Principal lines and all other marks or signs necessary to determine the locations of the belligerent troops.-For this pur- pose maps with the lines indicated thereon may be attached to and made part of the convention. Provision may be included for a neutraI zone between the two armies. It is usually agreed that these Iines are not to be crossed or the neutral zone entered except by parlementaires or other parties by special agreement for specified purposes, such as to bury the dead and collect the wounded.

d.
Relation of the amies with the people.-If it is desired to make any change during the armistice in the relations between the opposing forces and the peaceable inhabitants, this must be

265-269 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
accomplished by express provision. Otherwise these relations remain unchanged, each belligerent continuing to exercise the same rights as before, including the right to prevent or control all intercourse between the inhabitants within his lines and persons within the enemy lines.
e. Acts to be prohibited during the armistice.-In the absence of stipulations to the contrary, each belligerent is authorized to make movements of troops within his own lines, to receive and instruct recruits, to construct intrenchments, to repair bridges, to establis-h new batteries, and, in general, to take advantage of the time and means at his disposal to prepare for resuming hostilitiei This includes the right to continue espionage, but does not include the right to introduce supplies into a besieged fortress unless specially stipulated in the agreement.
266.
Denunciation of armistice.–Any serious violation of the armistice by one of the parties gives the other party the right of denouncing it, and even, in cases of urgency, of recom- mencing hostilities immediately (H.R., art. 40).

267.
Denunciation must not involve perfidy.-An armistice, like other formal agreements between belligerents, engages the honor of both parties for the exact and complete fulfillment of every obligation thereby imposed. It would be an outrageous act of perfidy for either party, without warning, to resume hostilities during the period of an armistice, with or without a formal denunciation thereof, except in case of urgency and upon convincing proof of intentional and serious violation of its terms by the other party. Nevertheless, under the article last above quoted, upon definite proof of such a violation of the armistice, if the delay incident to formal denunciation and warning seems likely to give the violator a substantial advantage of any kind, the other party is free to resume hostilities without warning and with or without a formal denunciztion.

268.
Armistice no excuse for lack of wance.-The exist-ence of an armistice does not warrant relaxation of vigilance in the service of security and protection, or in the preparedness of troops for action, or exposing positions to the enemy.

269.
Violations by individuals.-A violation of the terms of the armistice by private individuals acting on their own initia- tive only entitles the injured party to demand punishment of

RDLES OF LAND WARFBRE 269-273
the offenders or, if necessary, compensation for the losses sustained (H.R.,art. 41).
“Private individuals,” as employed in the foregoing article, is understood to mean persons within the enemy lines other than members of the armed forces.
270. Soldiers captured while violating armistice.-Enemy soldiers captured in the act of breaking an armistice are treated by the captor as prisoners of war. If acting upon their own initiative alone, they may be tried and punished for the offense, but not otherwise. Subordinate officers who, upon their own initiative, order soldiers to commit acts in violation of an armistice, if captured by the offended party, are also liable to trial and punishment. Such acts by individual soldiers or subordinate officers do not justify denunciation of the armistice unless they are proved to have been committed with the knowl- edge and actual or tacit consent of their own government or commander ,in chief, which may, however, be inferred in event of a persistent failure to punish such offenders.
MILITARY OCCUPATION AND GOVERNMENT OF ENEMY TERRITORY
(This chapter deals primarily with the legality of military govern-ment. FM 27-5 deals with its policy and administration.)
271. Military occupation.-Territory is considered occupied when it is actually placed under the authority of the hostile army.
The occupation extends only to the territory where such authority has been established and can be exercised (H.R., art. 42).
272.
Occupation, question of fact.-Military occupation is a question of fact. It presupposes a hostile invasion as a result of which the invader has rendered the invaded govern- ment incapable of publicly exercising its authority, and that the invader is in position to substitute and has substituted his own authority for that of the legitimate government in the territory invaded.

273.
Does not transfer sovereignty.-Being an incident of war, military occupation confers upon the invading force the

273-276 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
right to exercise control for the period of occupation. It does not transfer the sovereignty to the occupant, but simply the authority or power to exercise some of the rights of sovereignfy. The exercise of these rights results from the established power of the occupant and from the necessity for maintaining law and order, indispensable to both the inhabitants and to the occupy- ing force.
274.
Distinguished from invasion.-The state of invasion corresponds with the period of resistance. Invasion is not necessarily occupation, although it precedes it and may fre- quently coincide with it. An invader may push rapidly through n large portion of enemy country without establishing that effec- tive control which is essential to the status of occupation. He may send small raiding parties or flying columns, reconnoitering detachments, etc., into or through a district where they may be temporarily located and exercise control, yet when they pass on it cannot be said that such district is under his military occupation.

275.
Ijistinguished from subjugation or conquest.-Military occupation in a foreign war, being based upon the fact of pos- session of enemu territory, necessarily implies that the sov-ereignty of the occupied territory is not vested in the occupying power. The occupation is essentially provisional.

On the other hand subjugation or conquest implies a transfer of sovereignty. Ordinarily, however, such transfer is effected by a treaty of peace. When sovereignty passes, military occu- pation, as such, must of course cease; although the territory may, and usually does for a period at least, continue to be gov- erned through military agencies which have such powers as the President or Congress may prescribe.

276.
Occupation must be effective.–It follows from the defi- nition that military occupation must be both actual and effective ;that is, the organized resistance must have been over- come and the forces in possession must have taken measures to establish law and order. It is suflicient that the occupying army can, within a reasonable time, send detachments of troops to make its authority felt within the occupied district. It is immaterial by what methods the authority is exercised, whether by fixed garrisons or flying columns, small or large forces.

RmS OF LAND WARFARE 277-282
277.
Presence of invested fort immaterial.-The existence of a fort or defended area within the occupied district, pro- vided such place is invested, does not render the occupation of the remainder of the district ineffective, nor is the consent of the inhabitants in any manner essentiaL

278.
Proclamation of occupation.-In a strict legal sense no proclamation of military occupation is necessary. On ac- count of the special relations established between the inhabi- tants of the occupied territory and the occupant by virtue of the presence of the invading force, the fact of military occupation, with the extent of territory affected, should be made known. The practice of this Government is to make this fact known by proclamation.

279.
Commencement of occupation.-In the absence of a proclamation or similar notice the exact time of commencement of occupation may be difficult to fix. The presence of a sufficient force to disarm the inhabitants or enforce submission and the cessation of local resistance due k the defeat of the enemy’s forces determine the commencement of occupation.

280.
Cessation of occupation.-Occupation once acquired must be maintained. In case the occupant evacuates the dis- trict or is driven out by the enemy, or by a Zede em masse, and the legitimate government actually resumes its functions, the occupation ceases. It does not cease, however, if the occupant, after establishing his authority, moves forward against the enemy, leaving a smaller force to administer the affairs of the district. Nor does the existence of a rebellion or the operations of guerrilla bands cause it to cease unless the legitimate govern- ment is reestablished or the occupant fails promptly to suppress such rebellion or guerrilla operations.

ADMINISTRATION OF OCCUPIED TERRITORY

281.
Necessity for military government.-Military govern-ment is the organization through which a belligerent exercises authority over the territory of the enemy invaded and occupied by him. The necessity for such government arises from the failure or inability of the legitimate government to exercise its functions on account of the military operations or occupation.

282.
Duty to restore law and order.-The authority of the legitimate power having in fact passed into the hands of the

282-288 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
occupant, the latter shall take all measures in his power to restore, and insure, as far as possible, public order and safety, while respecting, unless absolutely prevented, the laws in force in the country (H.R., art. 43).
283.
Functions of government.-All the functions of the hostile government-legislative, executive, or administrative- whether of a general, provincial, or local character, cease under military occupation, or continue only with the sanction, or, if deemed necessary, the participation of the occupier or invader.

284.
Nature of government.-It is immaterial whether the government established over an enemy’s territory be called a military or civil government. Its character is the same and the source of its authority is the same. It is a government imposed by force, and the legality of its acts is determined by the laws of war. During the military occupation it may exer- cise all the powers given by the laws of war.

285.
The laws in force.-The principal object of the occu- pant is to provide for the security of the invading army and to contribute to its support and efficiency and the success of its operations. In restoring public order and safety he will con- tinue in force the ordinary civil and criminal laws of the occu- pied territory which do not conflict with this object. These laws will be administered by the local officials as far as prac- ticable. All crimes not of a military nature and which do not affect the safety of the invading army are left to the jurisdic- tion of the local courts.

286.
Power to suspend and promulgate laws.-% military occupant may suspend existing laws and promulgate new ones when the exigencies of the military service demand such action.

287.
Nature of laws suspended.-The occupant will naturally alter or suspend all laws of a political nature as well as political privileges and all laws which affect the welfare and safety of hi command. Of this class are those relating to recruitment in occupied territory, the right of assembly, the right to bear arms, the right of suffrage, the freedom of the press, the right to quit or travel freely in occupied territory. Such suspensions should be made known to the inhabitants.

288.
Nature of laws promulgated.-An occupant may create new laws for the government of a country. He will promul-

RULEIS OFLAND WARFARE
gate such new laws and regulations as military necessity de- mands. In this class will be included those laws which come into being as a result of military rule; that is, those which establish new crimes and offenses incident to a state of war and are necessary for the control of the country and the protection of the army.
289.
Prohibition as to rights and rights of action.-It is espe-cially forbidden * * * to declare abolishedy suspended, or inadmissible in a court of law the rights and rights of action of the nationals of the hostile party (H.R., art. 23, last par.).

290.
General restrictions imposed; commercial relations.- The occupant has the unquestioned right to regulate commer- cia1 intercourse in the occupied territory; that is, he may pro- hibit entirely or place such restrictions and limitations upon such intercourse as he considers desirable for military purposes.

291.
Censorship of press and correspondence;-The military occupant may establish censorship of the press and of tele-graphic and postal correspondence. He may prohibit entirely the publication of newspapers or prescribe regulations for their publication and circulation especially in unoccupied portions of the territory and in neutral countries. He is not required to furnish facilities for postal service, but may take charge of them himself, especially if the officials of the occupied district fail to act or to obey his orders.

292.
Means of transportation.-The military occupant exer- . cises authority over all means of transportation, both public and private within the occupied district, and may seize and uti- lize them and regulate their operation.

293.
Regulation as to taxes.-If, in the territory occupied, the occupant collects the taxes, dues, and tolls imposed for the benefit of the state, he shall do so, as far as is possible, in accordance with the rules of assessment and incidence in force, and shall in consequence be bound to defray the expenses of the administration of the occupied territory to the same extent as the legitimate government was so bound (R.R, art. 48).

294.
When existing rules may be disregarded.-If, due to the flight or unwillingness of the local officials, it is impracticable to follow the rules of incidence and assessment in force, then the total amount of the taxes to be paid may be allotted among

894402 RDLES OF LAND WARFARE
ihe districts, towns, etc., and the local authorities be required to collect it as a capitation tax or otherwise.
295.
Surplus may be used.-The first charge upon the State taxes is for the cost of local maintenance. The balance may be used for the purposes of the occupant.

296.
What included in taxes, tolls, etc.-The words “for the benefit of the state” were inserted in the article to exclude local dues collected by local authorities. The occupant will supervise the expenditures of such revenue and prevent its hostile use.

EFFECTS OF OCCUPATION ON THE POPULATION
297.
Right to enforce obedience.-The occupant can demand and enforce from the inhabitants of occupied territory such obedience as may be necessary for the security of his forces, lor the maintenance of law and order, and the proper adminis- tration of the country.

298.
Oath of allegiance forbidden.-It is forbidden to compel the inhabitants of occupied territory to swear allegiance to the hostile power (H.R., art. 45).

299.
Must respect persons, religious convictions, etc-Fam- ily honor and rights, the lives of persons, * * * as well as religious convictions and practice, must be respected (H.R., art. 46).

300.
Unitsd States rule.-The United States acknowledges and protects, in hostile countries occupied by them, religion and inorality ;the persons of inhabitants, especially those of women ; and the sacredness of domestic relations. Offenses to the contrary shall be rigorously punished.

301.
Reciprocal obligations of inhabitants.-In return for such considerate treatment, it is the duty of the inhabitants to carry on their ordinary peaceful pursuits; to behave in an absolutely peaceful manner; to take no part whatever in the hostilities carried on; to refrain from all injurious acts toward the troops or in respect to their operations; and to render strict obedience to the offldals of the occupant. As to neutrals resident in occupied territory, see paragraphs 397399.

302.
Limitation as to services of inhabitants.-* * * Serv-ices shall net be demanded from * * * inhabitants except for the needs of the army of occupation. They shall be * * *

‘ RULES OFLAND WARFARE 302-306
of such a nature as not to involve the inhabitants in the obli- gation of taking part in military operations against their own country.
Such * * * services shall only be demanded on the authority of the commander in the locality occupied * * *
(H.R.,art. 52).

303.
General right to requisition services.-Services of the inhabitants of occupied territory may be requisitioned for the needs of the army. These will include the services of profes- sional men, and tradesmen, such as surgeons, carpenters, butch- ers, bakers, etc.; employees of gas, electric light, and water works, and other public utilities; and of sanitary boards in connection with their ordinary functions. The orncials and employees of railways, canals, river or coastwise steamship companies, telegraph, telephone, postal, and similar services, and drivers of transport, whether employed by the State or private companies, may be requisitioned to perform their pro- fessional duties so long as the duties required do not directly concern the operations of war against their own country.

304.
Restoration of general conditions.-The occupant can requisition labor to restore the general condition of the public works of the country to that of peace; that is, to repair roads, bridges, railways, and as well to bury the dead and collect the wounded. In short, under the rules of obedience, they may be called upon to perform such work as may be necessary for the ordinary purposes of government, including police and sanitary worlr.

305.
Construction of forts by inhabitants, etc.-The prohibi-tion against forcing the inhabitants to take part in operations of war against their own country precludes requisitioning their services upon works directly promoting the ends of the war, such as construction of forts, fortifications, and entrenchments ; but there is no objection to their being employed voluntarily, for pay, in this class of work, except the military reason of preventing information concerning such work from falling into the hands of the enemy.

306.
Information about enemy by inhabitants.-A belliger-ent is forbidden to force the inhabitants of territory occupied by it to furnish information about the army of the other belligerent, or about its means of defense (H.R.,art. 44).

307412 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
307.
Interpretation of the foregoing article.-This article was reserved by Germany, Austria, Japan, Montenegro, and Russia, because it was believed that it would contravene the pre-existing general rule and practice of the nations permitting impressmenl; of guides.

308.
Impressment of guides.-Article 44 (par. 308) is gen- erally construed as prohibiting the impressment of guides from the inhabitants in an occupied territory. This is the construc- tion placed upon it by the United States. In a war against any power reserving the article the impressment of guides is not prohibited.

OFFICIALS IN OCCUPIED TERRITORY

309.
Oath of officials.-The occupant may require such offi- cials as are continued in their offices to take an oath to per- form their duties conscientiously and not to act to his prejudice. Every such official who declines to take such oath may be ex- pelled; but, whether they do so or not, they owe strict obedience to the occupant.

310.
Salaries of officials.-The salaries of civil officials of the hostile government who remain in the invaded territory and continue the work of their offices, especially those who can properly continue it under the circumstances arising out of the war-such as judges, administrative or police officers, officers of city or communal governments-are paid from the public revenues of the invaded territory, until the military government has reason wholly or partially to dispense with their services. Salaries or incomes connected with purely honorary titles are always suspended.

311.
Removal of civil officials.-By virtue of his powers of contcol the occupant is duly empowered to remove officials of every character. He will on principle remove political officials. Any official considered dangerous to the occupant may be removed, made a prisoner of war, or expelled from the occupied territory.

312.
Punishment of civil officials.-Acts of civil officers that are harmful or injurious to the occupant will be dealt with under the laws of war. Other wrongs or crimes committed by them will be punished according to the law of the land.

RnS OF LAND WARFARE 313-318
TREATMENT OF ENEMY PROPERTY
313.
Destruction and seizure of.-It is especially forbid-den * * * to destroy or seize the enemy’s property, unless such destruction or seizure be imperatively demanded by the necessities of war (H.R., art. 23, par. (g)).

314.
General rule as to war right to seize and destroy prop- erty.-The rule is that in war a belligerent may destroy or seize all property of whatever nature, public or private, hostile or neutral, unless such property is specifically protected by some definitive law of war, provided such destruction or seizure is imperatively demanded by the necessities of war.

PUBLIC PROPEBTY
315.
Real property of a State.-The occupying State shall be regarded as administrator and usufructuary of public buildings, real estate, forests, and agricultural estates belong- ing to the hostile State and situated in the occupied territory. It must safeguard the capital of these properties and adminis- ter them in accordance with the rules of usufruct (H.R., art. 55).

316.
Occupant’s disposition of such property.-The occupant does not have the absolute right of disposal or sale of enemy real property. As administrator or usufructuary he should not exercise his rights in such wasteful and negligent manner as seriously to impair its value. He may, however, lease or utilize public lands or buildings, sell the crops, cut and sell timber, and work the mines. A lease or contract should not extend beyond the conclusion of the war.

317.
State real property susceptible of direct military use.- Real property of a State which is of direct military use, such as forts, arsenals, dockyards, magazines, barracks, railways, canals, bridges, piers, and wharves, remains in the hands of the occupant until the close of the war, and may be destroyed or damaged, if deemed necessary, in military operations.

318.
Property of municipalities, etc-The property of mu-nicipalities, that of institutions dedicated to religion, charity, and education, the arts and sciences, even when State prop- erty, shall be treated as private property.

318334 RULES OFLAND WARFARE
All seizures of, destruction, or willful damage done to instid tutions of this character, historic monuments, works of art, science, is forbidden and should be made the subject of legal proceedings (H1,art. 56).
319.
Authorized treatment.4Ce property included in the foregoing rule may be utilized in case of necessity for quar- tering the troops, the sick and wounded, horses, stores, etc., and generally as prescribed for private property. Such property must, however, be secured against all avoidable injury, even when located in fortified places which are subject to seizure or bombardment

320.
Movable property-An army of occupation can only take possession of cash, funds, and realizable securities which are strictly the property of the State, depots of arms, means of transport, stores and supplies, and, generally, all movable property belonging to th,e State which may be used for mili- tary operations (H.R, art. 53, par. 1).

321.
Two classes of movable property.-All movable property belonging to the State directly susceptible of military use may be taken possession of as booty and utilized for the benefit of the invader’s government. Other movable property, not directly susceptible of military use, must be respected an8 cannot be appropriated.

322.
Property of unlrnown ownership treated as public prop- erty.-Where the ownershipr of property is unknown-that is, where there is any doubt as to whether it is public or private, as frequently happens-it should be treated as public property until ownership is definitely settled.

323.
Must be respected-Private property * * * must be respected (H.R., art. 46, par. I).

324.
Devastation–The measure of permissible devastation is found in the strict necessities of war. As an end in itself, as a separate measure of war, devastation is not sanctioned by the law of war. There must be some reasonably close connec- tion between the destruction of property and the overcoming of the enemy’s army. Thus. the rule requiring respect for private property is not violated through damage resulting from operations, movements, or combats of the army; that is, real

RULES OFLAND WARFARE 8W31
estate may be utilized for marches, camp sites, construction of trenches, etc. Buildings may be used for shelter for trows, the sick and wounded, for animals, for reconnaissance, cover de- fense, etc. Fences, woods, crops, buildings, etc., may be demolished, cut down, and removed to clear a field of flre, to construct bridges, to furnish fuel if imperatively needed for the army.
325.
American rule.-This rule (respect for private prop erty, et~) does not interfere with the right of the victorious invader to tax the people m their property, to levy forced loans, to billet soldiers, or to appropriate property, especially houses, boats or ships, and lands, for temporary and military use.

326.
Confiscation.-Private property cannot be confiscated (H.R., art. 46, par. 2).

327.
Booty.-All captures and booty belong, according to the modern law of war, primarily to the government of the captor.

Prize money whether on land or sea can now be claimed only under local law.
328.
Private gain by officers and soldiers prohibited.-Neither officers nor soldiers are allowed to make use of their position or power in the hostile country for private gain, not even for commercial transactions otherwise legitimate.

329.
Pillage.-Pillage is formally forbidden (H&., art. 47).

330.
Seizure and devastation of private property.-Private property can be seized only by way of military necessity for the mppmt or other benefit of the army or of the occupant. All destruction of property not commanded by the authorized officer, all pillage or sacking, even after taking a town or place by assault, are prohibited under the penalty of death or such other severe punishment as may seem adequate to the gravity of the offense.

331.
Private property susceptible of direct military use.-All appliances, whether on land, at sea, or in the air, adapted for the transmission of news, or for the transport of persons or


things, exclusive of cases governed by naval law, depots of arms, and, generally, all kinds of ammunition of war, may be seized, even if they belong to private individuals, but must be restored and compensation fixed when peace is declared [H.R,art. 53, par. 2). .
332-337 RULES OF LAND WARFBRE
332.
What included in rule.-The fmegoing rule includes everything susceptible of direct military use, such as cables, telephone and telegraph plants, horses and other draft and riding animals, motors, bicycles, motorcycles, carts, wagons, carriages, railways, railway plants, tramways, ships in port, all manner of craft in canals and rivers, balloons, airships, air- planes, depots of arms, whether military or sporting, and in general all kinds of war material.

333.
Destruction of such property.-The destruction of the foregoing property and all damage to the same is justifiable if it is required by the exigencies of the wat.

334.
Submarine cables.-Submarine cables connecting an oe- cupied territory with a neutral territory shall not be seized or destroyed except in the case of absolute necessity. They must likewise be restored and compensation fixed when peace is made (H.R., art. 54).

REQUIi31TIONS
‘/d”335. Requisitions.-Requisitions in kind and services shall not be demanded from municipalities or inhabitants except for the needs of the army of occupation. They shall be in propor- tion to the resources of the country, and of such a nature as not to involve the inhabitants in the obligation of taking part in military operations against their own country. Such requisitions and services shall only be demanded on the authority of the commander in the locality occupied. Contributions in kind shall as far as possible be paid for in cash; if not, a receipt shall be given and the payment of the amount due shall be made as soon as possible (Ha.,art. 52).
336.
What may be requisitioned.-Practically everything may be requisitioned under this article that is necessary for the maintenance of the army, such as fuel, food, forage, clothing, tobacco, printing presses, typb, leather, cloth, etc. Billeting of troops for quarters and subsistence is also authorized.

337.
Method of requisitioning.-Requisitions must be made under the authority of the commander in the locality. No prescribed method is iixed, but if practicable requisitions should be accomplished through the local authorities by systematic collection in bulk. They may be made direct by detachments

RULE23 OF LAND WARFARE 337-343
if local authorities fail for any reason. Billeting may be resorted to if deemed advisable.
338.
The amount taken.-The expression “needs of the army” was adopted rather than “necessities of the war” as more favorable to the inhabitants, but the commander is not thereby limited to the absolute needs of the troops actually present. The object was to avoid reducing the population to starvation.

339.
Fixing prices-The prices of articles requisitioned will be tked by agreement if possible, otherwise by military authority. The prices of commodities on sale may also be regulated and limits placed on the hours and places of trading. All authorities agree that it is good policy to pay cash if possible and to take up receipts as soon as possible.

340.
Method of enforcing.-If cash is paid, coercion will seldom be necessary. The coercive measures adopted will be limited to the amount and kind necessary to secure the articles requisitioned

CONTBIBUTIONS

341.
Contributions.-If, in addition to the taxes mentioned in the above article (art. 48 ;see par. 294), the occupant levies other ntoney contributions in the occupied territory, this shall only be for the needs of the army or of the administration of the territory in question (E.R., art. 49).

342.
Methods of levying contributions-No contribution shall be collected except under a written order and on the responsibility of a commander in chief.

The collection of the said contribution shall only be effected as far as possible in accordance with the rules of assessment and incidence of the taxes in force.
For every contribution a receipt shall be given to the con- tributor (H.R., art. 51).
343. Penalty for individual acts of inhabitants.-No general penalty, pecuniary or otherwise, shall be inflicted upon the population on account of acts of individuals for which they cannot be regarded as jointly and severally responsible (H.R., art. 50).
344-347 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
344. Above article does not prevent reprisals.-Reprisals by the occupant for violations of the laws of war or breach of the occupant’s proclamations or regulations by enemy individuals not belonging to the armed forces are not prohibited by the above article. (See par. 358.)
CHAPTER 11
PENALTIES FOR VIOLATIONS OF THE LAWS OF WAR
345.
Liability of offending belligerent.-A belligerent party which violates the provisions of the said regulations (H.R.) shall, if the case demands, be liable to pay compensation. It shall be responsible for all acts committed by persons forming part of its armed forces (H. IS.’, art. 3).

346.
Remedies of injured belligerent.-In the event of clearly established violation of the laws of war, the injured party may legally resort to such remedial action as may be deemed appropriate and necessary within the following classes, to wit:

a.
Publication of the facts, with a view to influencing public opinion against the offending belligerent.

b.
Protest and demand for punishment of individual offend- ers, sent to the offending belligerent through neutral diplomatic channels, or by parlementaire direct to the commander of the offending forces.

c.
Punishment of captured individual offenders.

d.
Reprisals.

347. Offenses by armed forces.-The principal offenses of this class are: Making use of poisoned and otherwise forbidden arms and ammunition; killing of the wounded; refusal of quarter ; treacherous request for quarter ; maltreatment of dead bodies on the battlefield; ill-treatment of prisoners of war; breach of parole by prisoners of war; firing on unde-fended localities; abuse of the flag of truce; firing on the flag of truce; misuse of the Red Cross flag and emblem and other violations of the Geneva Convention; use af civilian clothing by troops to conceal their military character during battle; bombardment of hospitals and other privileged buildings; im- proper use of privileged buildings for military purposes ;pdson-ing of wells and streams ;pillage and purposeless destruction ;
RUJiES OF LAND WARFARE 347-351′
348.
Hostilities committed by indiv forces.-Persons who take up arms and commit hostilities without having complied with the conditions prescribed by the laws of war for recognition as belligerents are, when captured by the injured party, liable to punishment as war criminals.

349.
War rebels.-War rebels are persons within territory under hostile military occupation who rise in arms against the occ.upying forces or against the authorities established by the same. If captured they may be punished with death, whether they rise singly or in small or large bands, whe6her or not they have been called upon to do so by their own expelled govern- ment, and, in event of conspiracy to rebel, whether or not such conspiracy shall have matured by overt act of hostility.

350.
War treason.-Ekamples of acts which, when committed by inhabitants of territory under hostile military occupation, are punishable by the occupying belligerent as treasonable under laws of war, are as follms: Espionage; supplying in-formation to the enemy; damage to railways, war material, telegraphs or other means of communication ;aiding prisoners of war to escape; conspiracy against the occupying forces or members thereof; intentional misleading of troops while acting as guides; voluntary assistance to the enemy by giving money or acting as guides; inducing soldiers of the occupying faces to act as spies for the enemy, to desert, or to surrender; brib- ing soldiers in the interest of the enemy; damage or alteration to military notices and signposts in the interest of the enemy; faling sources of water supply and concealing animals, vehi- cles, supplies, and fuel in the interest of the enemy ;knowingly aiding the advance or retirement of the enemy ;and circulating propaganda in the interests of the enemy.

351.
Unauthorized belligerents.-Men and bodies of men, who, without being lawful belligerents as defined in paragraph 9, nevertheless commit hostile acts of any kind, are not entitled to

351-356 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
the privileges nf combatants. If captured, they have no right to be treated as prisoners of war. They may not, however, after being captured, be summarily put to death or otherwise punished, but may be brought to trial before a military commission or other tribunal, which may sentence them to death or such other punishment as it may consider proper.
352.
Armed prowlers.-Armed prowlers, by whatever names they may be called, or persons of the enemy territory who steal within the lines of the hostile army for the purpose of robbing, killing, or of destroying bridges, roads, or canals, or of robbing or destroying the mail, or of cutting the telegraph wires, are not entitled to be treated as prisoners of war.

353.
Marauders.-Marauders are individuals, either ci~ilians or soldiers who have left their corps, who follow armies on the marah or appear on battlefields, either singly or in bands, in quest of booty, and who rob, maltreat, or murder stragglers or wounded, or pillage the dead. Their acts are considered atrocities, and the severest punishment is imposed after trial and conviction,

354.
Other crimes.-There are many other crimes or offenses incident to war, and which a belligerent may forbid and pun- ish, such, for example, as evasion of Censorship regulations; making false claims for damage; making false accusations against the troops; furnishing liquor to soldiers; being in pos-session of animals, stores, or supplies pertaining to the army; and, generally, neglect or disobedience of orders or regulations of a military government. All such offenses should be defined and the liability to punishment therefor made known to the inhabitant%

355.
Crimes punishable by penal codes–Crimes punishable by all penal codes, such as arson, murder, maiming, assaults, highway robbery, theft, burglary, fraud, forgery, and rape, if committed by an American soldier in a hostile country against its inhabitants, are not only punishable as at home, but a more severe punishment, if legally imposable, shall be preferred in cases in which the death penalty is not inflicted.

356.
Right of trial-No individual should be punished for an oftense against the laws of war unless pursuant to a sentence imposed after trial and cmviction by a military court or com-

RULE8 OF LAND WARFARE 356-358
mission or some other tribunal of competent jurisdiction desig- nated by the belligerent.
357.
War crimes subject to death penalty.-All war crimes are subject to the death penalty, although a lesser penalty may be imposed. The punishment should be deterrent, and in im-posing a sentence of imprisonment it is not necessary to take into consideration the end of the war, which does not neces-sarily limit the imprisonment to be imposed.

358.
Reprisals.-a. Defin.itim~.-Reprisals are acts of retalia- tion resorted to by one belligerent against the enemy indi- viduals or property for illegal acts of warfare committed by the other belligerent, for the purpose of enforcing future com- pliance with the recognized rules of civilized warfare.

b.
When and how employed.-Reprisals are never adopted merely for revenge, but only as an unavoidable last resort to induce the enemy to desist from illegitimate practices. They should never be employed by individual soldiers except by di- rect orders of a commander, and the latter should give such orders only after careful inquiry into the alleged ofeense. The highest accessible military authority should be consulted unless immediate action is demanded as a matter of military necessity, but in the latter event a subordinate commander may order appropriate reprisals upon his own initiative. Hasty or ill-considered action may subsequently be found to have been wholly unjusmed, subject the responsible officer himself to punishment as for a violation of the laws of war, and seriously damage his cause. On the other hand, commanding officers must assume responsibility for retaIiative measures when an unscrupulous enemy leaves no other recourse against the repetition of barbarous outrages.

c.
Who-may commit aats justifging reprisals.-Illegal acts of warfare justifying reprisals may be committed by a govern-ment, by its military commanders, or by a community or individuals thereof, whom it is impossible to apprehend, try, and punish.

d.
Kubjects of reprisals.-The offending forces or populations generally may lawfully be subjected to appropriate reprisals. Hostages taken and held for the declared purpose of insuring against unlawful acts by the enemy forces or people may be punished or put to death if the unlawful acts are nevertheless

89

858-361 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
committed. Reprisals against prisoners oP war are express12 forbidden by the Geneva convention of 1929. (See par. In.)
e.
Pmm of reprisaZ.-The acts resorted to by way of reprisd need not conform to those complained d by the injured party, but should not be excessive or exceed the degree of violence committed by the enemy. Villages or houses, etc., may be burned for acts of hostility co,mmitted from them, where the guilty individuals cannot be identified, tried, and punished. Collective punishments may be inflicted either in the form of fines or otherwise.

f.
Procedzcre.-The rule requiring careful inquiry into the real occurrence will always be followed unless the safety of the troops requires immediate drastic action and the persons who actually committed the offense cannot be ascertained.

359. Hostages.-Hostages have been taken in war for the following purposes: To insure proper treatment of wounded and sick when left behind in hostile localities; td protect the lives of prisoners who have fallen into hands of irregular troops or whose lives have been threatened; to protect lines of com-munication by placing them on engines af trains in occupied territory ; and to insure compliance with requisitions, contribu- tions, etc. When a hostage is accepted he is treated as a prisoner of war.
CHAPTER 18
360.
Definition-Neutrality on the part of a state not a party to the war consists in refraining from all participatim in thf: war, and in exercising absolute impartiality in preventing, tolerating, and regulating certain acts on its own part by its subjects and by the belligerents. It is the duty of belligerents to respect the territory and rights of the neutral states.

361.
Notification of state of war and effect upon neutrals.- The existence of a state of war must be notified to the neutral power without delay, and shall not take effect with regard to them until after the receipt of a notification, which may, how- ever, be given by telegraph Neutral powers, nevertheless, cannot rely on the absence of notification if it is elearly established that they were in fact aware of the existence of a Istate of war (H. 111, art. 2).

90
RULES OF LAND WARFARE 362-369
362.
Inviolability of territory.-The territory of neutral powers is inviolable (H.V,art. I).

363.
Movements of troops and convoys of supplies.-Bellig- erents are forbidden to move troops or convoys of either munitions of war or supplies across the territory of a neutral power fH. V7art. 2).

364.
Neutral can resist violations of neutrality by force.- The fact of a neutral power resisting, even by force, attempts to violate its neutrality cannot he regarded as a hostile act

(a.v,art. 10).
365.
Patrolling the frontier.-It is quite usual, frequently necessary, and therefore the duty of a neutral power whose territory is adjacent to a theater cff war to mobilize a portion of its forces to enforce its neutrality along the frontier; that is, to prevent troops of either belligerent from entering its territory, to intern such as may be permitted to enter, and generally to enforce its neutrality duties.

366.
Effect of failure to prevent violation of neutrality by belligerent troops.-Should the neutral state be unable, or fail for any reason, to prevent violations of its neutrality by the troops of one belligerent entering or passing through its terri- tory, the other belligerent may be justified in attacking the enemy forces on this territory.

367.
Convoys of munitions and supplies.-A distinction must be drawn between the oficial acts of the belligerent state in convoying or shipping munitions and supplies through neutral territory as part of an expedition and the shipment of such supplies commercially. The former is forbidden while the latter is not.

368.
Forming corps of combatants and recruiting forbid-

I     den.-Corps of combatants cannot be formed nor recruiting agencies opened on the territory of a neutral power to assist the belligerents (H. V, art. 4).
369. What is prohibited.-The establishmrnt of recruiting agencies, the actual recruiting of men, the farmation and
i
organization of hostile expeditions on neutral territory, and the passage across its frontiers of organized bodies of men intending tc enlist are prohibited.
370-5’17 RCLES OF LAND WARFARE
370.
Personnel of voluntary aid ~ocic?ties.-This prohibiticn? docs not extend to thc mcclical person~lel and units of a recog nizeij voluntary aid society ciniy authorized to join one of tlic belligerents

371.
Responsibility as to individuals.-The responsibility of a neutral power is not engaged by the fact of individuals crossicg the frontier spearately to offer their services tu one of the belligerents (H. V, crt. 6).

372.
The test.-The prohibition in the two foregoing rules (see pars. 368 and 371) is directed against organized bodies which only require to be armed to become an immediate fight- ing force. Individuals crossing the frontier singly or in small bands that are unorgallized create no obligation o’n the neutral state.

373.
Nationals of beliigerent not Snc1aded.-Nationals of a belligerent state are permilled freely to leave neutral territory to join the armies of their country.

374.
Officers on active list.-Officers of the land forces of neutr~l powers on the active list sho+uld not be permitted to join a belligerent, and, haring joined s~xchbelligerent forces, shonlcl. be recalled.

375.
Neutral not bound to prevent shipment of supplies.- A neutral power is not called upon to prevent the export or transport, an behalf of one or other of the belligerents, of arms, munitions of war, or, in general, of anything which can be of use to an army or a fleet (a.V, art. 7).

376.
Obligations of neutral state as to supplies.-A neutral state, as such, is prohibited from furnishing supplies or muni- tions of war and from making loans to a belligerent. It is also forbidden to permit the use of its territory for the fitting out of hostile expeditions.

377.
Commercial transactions not prohibited.-Commercial transactions with belligerents by neutral companies, citizens, or persons resident in neutral territory are not prohibited; that is, a belligerent may purchase from neutral companies, citizens, or persons witlUn neutral territory supplies, muni-

RULES OF LAND WARFARE 377.-353
aeet, which can be exported or transported without involving the neutral state.
378.
Means of communication.-lb neutral power is r.ot called upon to forbid or restrict the use, on behalf of the belligerents, of telegraph or telephone cables or of wireless telegraph apparatus belonging to it or to companies or private individuals-(8.V, mt. 8).

379.
Neutral power not to assist one belligerent.- he liberty of a neutral state to transmit dispatches by means of its telegraph lines on land, its submarine cables, and wireless apparatus dues not imply the power to use them or permit their use to lend a manifest assistance to one of the bel- ligerents

380.
Impartiality.-Every measure of restriction or prohibi- tion taken by a neutral power in regard to the matters re- ferred to in articles 7 and 8 (see pars. 375, 378) must be impartially applied by it to both belligerents.

A neutral power must see to the same obligation being ob- served by companies or private individuals owning telegraph or telephone cables or wireless telegraph apparatus (8.V, art. 9).

381.
Use of neutral territory to establish wireless tdeg-raphy.-Belligerents are likewise forbidden to:

(a)
Erect on the territory of a neutral power a wireless telegraphy station or other apparatus for the purpose of communicating with belIigerent forces on land ur sea.

(b)
Use any installation of this lcind established by them before the war on the territory of a neutral power for purely military purposes, and which has not been opened for the service of public messages (H. V,art. 3).

382.
Neutral state must prohibit acts on its own territory.- A neutral power must not allow any of the acts referred to in articles 2 to 4 (see pars. 363, 368, 381) to occur on its territory.

It is not called upon to punish acts in violation of its neutrality unless the said acts have been committed on its own territory (H.V9art. 5).

383.
Internment-A neutral power which receives on its territory troops belonging to the belligerent armies shall in-

383480 RULES OF LAND WARFARHI
tern them, as far as possible, at a distance from the theater of war. It may keep them in camps and even confine them in for- tresses or in places set apart for this purpose.
It shall decide whether officers can be left at liberty on giving their parole not to leave the neutral territory without permission (H. V,art. 11).
384.
Duty of neutral state.-A neutral is not bound to permit belligerent troops to enter its territory. On the other hand, it may permit them to do so without violating its neutrality, but they nust be interned or confined in placcs designated by the neutral. They will naturally be disarmed and placed under the necessary guard, thereby occupying in many respects the same status as prisoners of war.

385.
NeutraI can impose terms.-If troops or soldiers or^ a belligerent are permitted to seek refuge in neutral territory, the neutral can impose the terms upon which they may do so. In case of large bodies of tro’ops seeking refuge in neutral territory, these conditions will usually be stipulated in n con-vention drawn up by and between the duly authorized repre- sentathe of the neutral power and the senior officer of the troops

386.
Parole of officers.-Beyond the right of deciding which, if any, of the officers are to be paroled, no conditions are speci- fied and no penalties are prescribed for breach of parole given to a neutral state.

387.
Disposition of arms, equipment, etc.-a’he munitions, stores, and effects which the interned troops bring with them sho~ld be restored to their government at the termination of the war.

388.
Maintenance.-In the absence of a special convention to the contrary, the neutral power shall supply the interned with the food, clothing, and relief required by humanity.

At the conclusion of peace the expenses caused by the internment shall be made good (H.V, art. 12).

389.
Prisoners of war.-A neutral power which receives escaped prisoners of war shall leave them at liberty. If it allows them to remain in its territory it may assign tfiem a place of residence.

RULES OF LAND WARFARE 3894394
The same rule applies to prisoners of war brought by troops taking refuge in the territory of a neutral power
(H. V, art. 13).
390. Sick and wounded.-A neutral power may authorize the passage into its territory of the sick and wounded belong- ing to the belligerent armies, on condition that the trains bringing them shall carry neither personnel or war material. In such a case, the neutral power is bound to take whatever measures of safety and control are necessary for the purpose.
The sick or wounded brought under these conditions into neutral territory by one of the belligerents, and belonging to the hostile party, must be guarded by the neutral power so as to insure their not taking part again in the military opera- tions. The same duty shall devolve on the neutral state with regard to wounded or sick of the other army who may be committed to its care (H. V, art. 14).
Direct repatriation for reasons of health of prisoners of war, hospitalized in a neutral country, is provided for in the annex to the Geneva convention of July 27, 1929 (model agreement). (See para 141,172.)
391.
Obligations of neutral state.-The neutral power is under no obligation to permit the passage of a convoy of evacuation of sick and wonnded through its territory, but when permitted to pass, the neutral must exercise control; must see that neither personnel nor rmatt%eZ other than that necessary for the care of the sick and wounded is carried, and generally must accord impartiality of treatment to the belligerents.

392.
Consent of other belligerenL-There is no indicated necessity for obtaining the consent of the other belligerent be- fore granting authority for the passage of the convoy, but this action seems advisable, especially where the passage of a con- siderable body of sick and wounded is contemplated.

393.
Sick and wounded of belligerent convoying same.-The sick and wounded of the belligerent convoying them may be carried through to their own territory. If, however, they are left in the neutral’s territory they must be interned so as to insure their not taking part again in the war.

394.
Sick and wonnded prisoners of war.-Sick and wounded prisoners of war brought into neutral territory as part of a

394400 RULES OF LAND WARFARE
convoy of evacuation granted right of passage through neutral territory cannot be transported to their own country nor liber- ated, as are prisoners of war escaping into or brought by troops seeking asylum in neutral territory, but must be detained by the neutral power, subject to the provisions contained in the annex to the Geneva convention ok July 27, 1929 (morlel agree ment). (See par. 172.)
395.
Medical personnel.-!l3e medical personnel belonging to belligerent forces, who have sought asylum and are interned under article ll (see par. 3831, can be released by the neutral and permitted to return to their own state or army. Medical personnel and mt6rkZ necessary for the care of the sick and wounded of a convoy of evacuation, permitted to pass through neutral territory under article 14 (see par. 390), may be per- mitted to accompany the convoy. The neutral state may retain the necessary medical personnel and mat&&Z for the care of the sick and wounded left in its care, and failing this, may furnish same and will have expense of same refunded by the belligerent concerned after the termination of the war.

396.
Neutral persons.-The nationals of a state which is not taking part in the war are considered as neutrals (8. V, art. 16).

397.
Neutral persons resident in occupied territory.-Neu- tral persons resident in occupied territory are not entitled to claim different treatment, in general, from that accorded the other inhabitants. They must refrain from all participation in the war, from all hostile acts, and observe strictly the rules of the occupant.

398.
Diplomatic agents in occupied territory.-Diplomatic agents of neutral sovereigns and governments must be treated with all courtesy and be permitted such freedom a9 action as

is possible to allow, with due regard to the necessities of the war.

399.
Punishments.-All subjects of neutral powers, whether resident or temporarily visiting in occupied territory, may be punished for offenses committed by them to the same extent and in the same manner as enemy subjects.

400.
Forfeiting rights by neutrals.-A neutral cannot avail himself of his neutrality-

(a) If he commits hostile acts against a belligerent.
RULE5 OF LAND WARFARE 400-403′
(B) If he commits acts in favor of a belligerent, particularly if he voluntarily enlists in the ranks of the armed force of one of the parties.
In such a case, the neutral shall not be more severely treated by the belligerent as against whom he has abandoned his neutrality than a national of the other belligerent state could be for the same act (8.V, art. 17).
481. Acts not favorable to one belligerent.-The following acts shall not be considered as committed in favor of one belligerent in the sense of article 17 b (see par. 400) :
(a)
Supplies furnished or loans made to one of the bellig- erents, provided that the person who furnishes the supplies or whf .makes the loans lives neither in the territory of the other pa* nor in the territory occupied by him, and that the supplies do not come from these territories.

(b)
Services rendered in matters of police or civil adminis- tration (a.V, art. 18).

402. Railway material.-Railway material coming from the territory of neutral powers, whether it be the property of the said powers or of companies or private persons, and recog- nizable as such, shall not be- requisitioned or utilized by a belligerent except where and to the extent that it is abse- lutely necessary. It shall be sent back as soon as possible to the country of origin
A neutral power may likewise, in case of necessity, retain and utilize to an equal extent material coming from the territory of the belligerent power.
Compensation shall be paid by one party or the other in proportion to the material used, and to the period of usage
(H. V, art. 19).
-TP STATUTES OF THBI UNITED STATICS
403. Certain OtTenses against neutrality defined by statute- Supplementing the foregoing rules of international law, them are certain statutes of the United States that dehe offenses against neutrality and prescribe penalties therefor, some of which are &e&ive only during a war in which the United
403 RULES OF LAND WARFARE b
States is neutral, and others effective at all times (United States Code, title 18, ch. 2). The enforcement of these statutes devolves primarily upon the civil authorities. Troops employed to aid the civil authdties in such enforcement will be gov- erned by AR 600-60,FM 27-15 (now published as part three, BFM, vol. VII), and the orders of competent authority.
Ld societies (see Relief societies). lircraft, use: Paragraphs Fages Authorized generally in hostilities–_-..————.-.–.——-
!27,48 8,12
For transportation of sick and wounded– ………………….. 192 64
To bombard undefended places, forbidden ………………….. 4E-46 12

Amerim National Red Cross ——————-.—————–
171,185 42-51
See also Relief societies. Appropriation of supplies inenemy country -_——–.————–
24d 7 See olao Occupied territory; property, requisitions. Armed form: Consist of combatants and noncombatants -_.——————–
Qc 4
Hotiti d to . . 19 6
QuaMcations for recognition as lawful_-.–.———————

9 4
Armed prowlers -.—–.————–.——————————
352 88 Armistice: Activities authorized and prohibited during- –.–.-.———
256,265e 70.72
Commencement and termination .–.————————–

254,255 69,70
Deed 251 69
Denunciation————————.—–.——-.———–

266,267 72
Effect. .252,253 69
Form of; should be written —-.———————————

257 70
General; de5ed; how concluded .——..———————-

258,259 70
Intercourse in theater of war during- —.—–.-.————–
263,264 71
Local; deked; how concluded ——-._–..——..—….—..

258-260 70 For search of battlefield ——.——————————-
176 47
Matters that should be covered by _—–.—-..——-.—–.-

161,265 38.71
Nottion 263 71
Repatriation of prisoners, must provide for .——.————–

161 38
Suspension of arms ——————————.-261

————–70
Vigilance not relaxed during ———.-..—.——–.———–

268 72
Violations by enemy soldiers _—.—_-..—.._—–.—-.——-
270 73
Violations by nonmilitary persons —–..————————
269 72
Arms:

Causing unnecesssry injury forbidden- ————–.———–
34 9
Found wlth sanitary formations -.——.————————

181 40
Of interned belligerents, disposition —…————————

387 94
Seion–261 90 Army of occupation (see Occupied territory). Art, buildings devoted to, protected ._—-..—————–
6840,318,319 14,81,82
Assassination forbidden -.———–………………………. 9

–.–31 Assaults, bombardments, and siege8 -.—.—————————
4Cr60 12 Asylum (see Neutrality; belligerent troops). Attaches, neutral, accompanying captured troops –.–..,,,….—-.-18
77 Automatic submer’se mines (see Mines).
99
Paragraphs Pages Balloons, bombardment of undefended places from ..-…-.—–..—-12
45,46
Basic rules and principles (ch. 1) ——– — -.-…– – – – -.– – ———-1-7 1

Chivalry, principle .—-.-.—.—­—–.-… 4 c
…. ….—–.—.-2

Humanity, principle —.—–.————–.——4 b –.———-
2

Military government and martial law distinguished.. -…-.–..-6 2

7 a
Military necessity, principle…–…——-…-..-.-4 a
-….—–.–1

Military jurisdiction defined —-.———..—.-.—–.———

Rules or laws of war defined–. .-.-.–­…–..—-……———1-3 1

Force——————-..—-.-.—.-. —-.–..-. …—–­—-2
5

Unwritten, detlned ——.-.-.-.——-­….-..-..—-.3 ——
1

tn d e d 2 1

Belligerent populations, how generally divided– -.—­..—-.—-8 .–
4

Belligerent powers:
Armed forces of, who may comprise -.­…-.————–9 ——–
4

Duties of (see particular subtopics).
Intercourse between (see Intercourse between belligerents).
Must not compel enemy subjects to take part- ——–.­..——10
36

Must notify neutral powers of state of war.­..-.–.__..-.—–16-18 —
6

Responsible for acts of armed forces ——..–.. …..-.—..-a45 86

-…
Belligerent troops:
tties rtted to . ………. I9 6

Internment of by neutral powers ._­..-.-..-… 383-395
….–..——.-93

QuaMcations for recognition 3s-.———-….-..-.-..–9
–..—-4
Status of captives as, left to courts .-.-.-.-­..-……-..——-13 —
6

Besieged plam (see Sieges). Billeting authorized in occupied territory .—….-..——-82,83,
319,325,336,337 84,85
Bombardments..4SO 12

Certain buildings to be spared from- –.—­..-.—–.—–68-60 ——14

Of undefended places forbidden -.————-.—-.-45,46 ——–.-.-
12

Warning required; American rule —.——–.. .—.——–12.13

.–.. 49,50
Booty and captures belong to Government…………………….. 327 83

Buildings and monuments, certain, to be spared from bombard-

ment.–.~.-~-~-.-…—–~———..
68-60,318,310 14,81,82
Bullets, use of certain kids forbidden —–.——-.-.-34.-.———–0

Bureaus of information for prisoners —-.–.—..————–
IG3,165,166 38,38,40 Burial.—.-.-.–.——176,177 47,48
.————-……..

Cables, submarine .——–.————-334 ——…..
84
Camp followers, captured, treated ns prisoners of war .-_—.—–.76 —
17
Camps and depots, destruction of authorized- —_..–….———..-
31 la

Capitulations %270 67
Defined~-.—~–.–~–~——————…..
244 67

Dencation 250 69

–.—.—.————-
Destruction of property after signing-_.-249 69,

Forms;contents in general ——._-_.—.. 247 67
..-.-..—-..—.——

Legal power of commanders to make- –..-.–.——­-.—..-.-.67
246

Military honor involved in -.-­…—..–..——.—.-246 ———-
67

Should be reduced to writing- -.–.—.-.–..-.. -67

. — – —247
Subjects usuallycovered by -__.-~—..-~__.-usUusUusUusUusUusUusUusUusUusUusUusUusUusUusUusUusUusUusUusU 248 68.

INDEX
Paragraphs Pages
Osptives:
Status determined by courts ..–.-…————–.————-ti

13
Summaryexecution of, forbidden –.-..–.–…——–…——-
13.32 6,s
Captures:
And booty belong to Qovernment -….–.——-…–.——.—

327 83
What authorized ———-_..–.-.——–.——————-
.-24 b 7
Cmtels, defied; force 243 86

——–~.—-BB…BB——BBBBBB….BBBBBBBB.
Censorship:
Evasion of, punishable a3war crime .-..——-.-.-.-…———

354 88
Of mail of prisoners of war —_.–.. 113 28

..——….——…——–
Of press and mail in occupied territory- —.–. 291 77

.—..-….——–
Cessation of arms (truce) (see Armistice).
Chaplains, captured, treatment ——.._.——…———.—

182,186,187 50,51,52
Charity, buildings devoted to, protected .–.—…————–
58,318,319 14,81,82
Chivalry, principle of, defined ——.-…——..—— — –…-.-4c

—-2
Churches, protection -.-.———–.-.———..———–

58-60,318,319 14,81,82
Civilians: Between the lines, treatment _—-.-.——–..————–.—
53 13
Following army, status when captured–. ..-…….-.———–17

76
Hostilities must not be directed against -….-……..——–.—6

19
Collective punishments: Of inhabitants of occupied territory -.-.–..—-…-.———–
343,344 85,813
Of prisoners of war –.———-__.———–…——-84

——–20 Combatants and noncombatants, treated alike in case of capture—- 9 e 4 Commanders liable for illegal acts ordered -.——–.-.-.–.———
347 86
Commencement of hostilities (see Hostilities). Communications: Between: Belligerents 216-234 60
—-.-.tststststststststststs.ts.tststststststststststststststststststststststststststs
Besieged and outside —-………….——–…..———-

57 13
Occupied temtory and outside –.–.—-.——–.60,61,66

215,216,235-240
Means of, in neutral countries —————-.37e-382

..—-.–.——93
Conduct of hostilities (see Hostilities).
Confiscation of enemy property forbidden ——-.———–.——-

326 83
Contributions in occupied territory ..———————-..–
336,341,342 84,85
Convoys: Of evacuation of sick andwounded–.—-.–.—————–
191,192 63,54
Of munitions through neutral territory .–..-.-.———.—–
363,307 91
Of sick and wounded through neutral territory –.—_-_—.-.-
390-304 96 Courts-martial………………………………………………. 7 3 Crimes against the laws of war (see Violations of the laws of war). Cruelty:
Defined; military necessity does not permit ..——–.-….——7
25
Toward prisoners of war, forbidden .-.-.-.———.————-
119 28
Customs of war (see Laws of war). Dead: Burial, graves service .—–.-.-.——-.————-.-.–.—-
162,177 38.48
Death cerltficate, belligerents to forward -.–.—-.—————
177 48
Examination of bodies required -.-….-.————————-

177 48
INDEX
Paragraphs Pages Dead-Oontinued. Graves, lists to be exchanged .-.-….-.-.—..-.—————–
177
Identiilcation tags, disposition —-.——————————177
Information to be exr.banged_ —–.——————–

———-177
Personal dects, disposition –.—_.—————————–

177
Robbery and ill-treatment, protected from .-.–..-.—-.———
176
Search of battlefield; local armistim -…———-176

..: .—.—.-.–Decaption, justified by military necessity..-.–.———————
24e See alno Ruses of war. Declaration of war: May be sudden and unexpected .——-.————————
15
Must be notifled to neutrals ——.–.—————————
16
Must precede hostilities.- -.–.–.———–.–.-.————–
14,17 Defended place, dehed —————*—————————-47 DWtions: Armed prowlers —.—.————————————.—
352
ti———–.
251
General-_.—–.-..—-..—..–..—..————.——-
258,259
Local——–.–.———.———————-.–..—-

258-2130 capitation—————— – –244 Cartel.—~~-~.—————————————-~~——–
243
OhivalrJl,principle 4e

lrJllrJl-lrJl-lrJllrJl—-lrJllrJllrJl-lrJl-lrJl-lrJllrJllrJllrJl–lrJllrJl.-lrJllrJllrJllrJllrJllrJllrJllrJllrJllrJllrJllrJllrJllrJllrJllrJl
Celt.. 25
Dee pa –47
H a b e–361
Humanity, principle -.–.-..——.——..———————-

4b
Laws of war_-.——————–.-.———

——————1-3
In general—–.—–.————-.1
unwritten—————.————– – —

——-.—-..-..-3
Writtan~~-~————-~———~—–~—~-~—-~-~…–~

2
into tad .–…….240
Made.. 353
Maiw 6
Mtarygovee .. 6
Military jurisdiction ———..—._.-..—….–_-_..-.———

7
Military necessity, principle .__–_.-…–.——-
——-….—.-44
Military occupation .——————.—–.
..—-.–.__-._—-
271
Neutral persons —————–.-.—.—–.—
–.—.–366
—–.-
Neutrality 360
Parlementaires. -.———————-

—–.—..–..–.–220,221
Po, i t–236
P 0 w . ..-256
one of war.. 70
Reps.. 358
Rules of war–…-.-.—-.————————————-1-3

.-
I general——-. 1
Unwritten-.—————–…-….————————
3
Written..-..-.-.–a

———-………………………….

INDEX
Paragraphs Definitions-Oontinued. Safe-conduct for goods.– —.————————————
~i?
Baf4conduct for persons-.————— 236
–4CO4CO4CO4CO–4CO4CO4CO4CO4CO4CO4CO4CO4CO4CO4CO4CO.4CO4CO4CO
Safeguard—————–………………………………… 241
Spies———.———— — .—–.—-

———.————-202,!m4
Suspensionofarms———————- ………………….. 261
Tmson–.—-.—205

————.—————————.—-
Wsr rebels.——-.————–.-.-349
—.–.——————–
War traitors ——–.—————————————
ms,m
Deserters, captured: Cannot clslm privileges of levee en masse .-.-__–_—————
11

Status of, left to oourts.———-.———.———-
.———
la
Destruction: Enemy property in occupied territory (see Occupied territory; Property, enemy). Of campaanddepots authorized. –35
——–pspspspspspspspspspspspspspspspspspspspspsps
Ofenemy life or limb authorized —————.—————–
24,
Ofenemy property authorized —————-.—-24c
Ofinstitutions, monuments, etc., forbidden …………………. 318

Detention of enemy nationals -.—20
—-.——————————
Devastation: In occupied territory restricted-. –.—————_-totototototototototo ax Wanton, prohibited -.——————————————-
26

Diplomatic agents: Enemy, may be made prisoners —-.—————————-
76f

Neutral, accompanying army —.–.——..———————
77

Neutral, in besieged place-. ———–.—-.——————–
62,67 Neutral, inompied territory ……………………………… 388 Distinctive emblem of Geneva convention —-.————
–.-193-198
Emblem, distinctive, of Geneva convention- ——.———_—–
193-198

Enemy: Armed form, destruction and capture authorized- -..———–
29

Flags, misuseof forbidden ..–.—.——–.———————
41,43
Insignle, misuseof forbidden 41

.-.—..—.—.——USBUSBUSBUSBUSBUSBUSBUSBUSBUSBUSBUSBUSBUSB
Nationals may be interned-. -.——————————–
–m
Nationals must not be compelled to take part .———-.–.—–

36
O~cialsmay be made prisonem of war —-. 7&, f

–.——————-
Population, howgenerallydivided–.—-..~~-tititititititititititititititititititi 8
Property (aOccupied territory; property, enemy).
Soldiers, may be induced todesert, etc ———-.-.–_———–

38
Territory (see Occupied territory).
Uniform, misuseof forbidden -.—-..—————————-

41
Escapesof prisoners of war; punishments —–.-.–_——.—-.-.-
123,126

Espionage and treason (ch. 6)————-.———————-
–U)2-214
Amriesta,equallypunlshable ..——-ririririri—————–214

Boles:
Belligerents may ladfully employ. -..——————–38,203
Dehed———.————-.————-

———–+–
m,m

Excluded in exchange of prisoners- —–..——-
.———–180
INDEX

Paragraphs Pages Esponage and treason-Continued. Spies-Continued. Immune after rejoining own army.. ..——.-.—.-_—-.—
212 60
Punishment of ….———.-.——-.—————–
208,209,211 68,60
War treason and traitors:
Defined; rules relating to .——20E-208 59

—.—-.——————-Examplesof.-.–.———-.——————————–
349 87
Having rejoined no defense. –..-.—-.—-.——..-213 60

-..-..-.
Punishment .——-.———-.—-.———-..–.—.-…
210 80 Executions, summary, prohibited …….-..-.——.—….——…-
13,32 6,9 Explusion of enemy nationals from localities ——-.-…-.—–.—.-
21 6
Flags: Enemy, misuse of forbidden ————.——.——-.——-.-
41.43 11
Geneva Convention (Red Cross):
Misuse 41.44 11.12
Use 194,198,197 65,56
National, misuse of forbidden .—-.——————————

41,43 11
Shown with Geneva flag, when .—————————

190,197 55.56
Sanitary service, distinctive embl9m ………………………394-197 55
Truce, abuse of, forbidden ———.—————————-

41-42 11
What constitutes ..-.——–.-.——-.-.-.—.————-
234 84
White, significance and treatment ————————–..-

221-231 61 Gain, private, by officers and soliders in occupled territory- —–..328 83
.. Gases and chemicals, use of authorized _..-.————–.——-..-
29 8 Geneva Convention of 1929 relative to prisoners of war (see Pris- oners of war). Geneva Convention of 1928 relative to the sick and wounded (see
Sick and wounded). Geneva Cross (sea Red Cross). Good faith must be observed ………………………………… 38,217 10,61 Qovernment, military, defined —–..-.–.———-.—.———–
6 a
Rules relating to (see Occupied territory). Graves service (see Dead).
—————————.-.-
Grenades, use of authorized -..——–34 9 Guides: Impressment from enemy nationals forbidden -_-.——…-10,79
36,306308
War treason by voluntary serviee as-.—.———————

208,350 60,87 Highway rob defined . . 361 87 Hospitals, spared in sieges and bombardments ————-.-.——-
58-60 14 Hostages: Are taken for what purposes .—.————.————–….
359 90
Are treated asprisoners of war –_—————.————–
76h. 369 18,90 Hostilities (ch. 3) ——~———~~-~-~———.
14-68 6
Acts expressly prohibited:
Arms, etc., causing unnecessary injury —.-.-.——.——–

34 9
Miation and outlawry –…–..————————-

31 9
Attacking or ill-treating peaceful population .———…..–6

19
Bad faith –..——–.—————–.
25,3340,217 7,10,61
Bombardment-
Of certain structures, etc .——-.–.———-..

6&60,318,319 14,81,82
Ofundeiendod places …-..~-..—–~—~——-
4546 12
I04

Paragraphs Pages Hostilities-Oontinned. dots expressly prohibited-Oontinued. Collective punishments, certain– .-.—…—————–
84,343 20,s
Oommencing hostilities without declaration of war- ———14,17 6,6
Oompelling enemy subject to take part -.———.-

36,302,305-307 10,78,79

Oompelling prisoners of war: To admit guilt ————.——————————
134 34
TO do c3ltain work .——————-.———.-7—25
102,105

To give information ——-_—-.—–.—-.———.-.-
78 18
Oo~~nt 20,30

of prisoners of war, with certain exceptions._– 82,122
ConBsoation of enemy private property .——–.———-

313,326 81,83
Oontamination of water 28 8

—.-._—–.-ti..titi….tititititititititititititi
1 .—.    .5 119 7,29
Destruction:
Enemy property, unnecessary —-.-..—————-..-

313 81
Ownproperty after capitulation ———————.—

249 69

Devastation. wanton .——–.———————-.——-
25 7

Discharging explosives from balloons- –_-.—.——-27
— —- 8
Discrimination against prisoners of war —–.—-.———-_

121 30

Distinctive badges and emblems, misuse -.—–..—–.—-.-
41-44 11
Exposing prisoners of war to combat or insanitary wndltions.. 82 20
g o parementa ——-225 62
1 e ..4 11
Impressment of guides .——–.-.——–..-..—.—.-

36,306308 1479
Insignia and uniforms, misuse. —-.—4,5,11

.————-.-.–
11,13,41

EiUing or wounding captives -..-…–…—-.—-..-.—.—
32 9 Mines, useof cartain kinds or without certain precautions..–. 63,65 15 Perfldy.——.—-.—————————–.—-
25,39,40,267     7.10,
11,72

Pillage~…~..~.~~…-~~….~…..~~-……….

GI, 329,330 14,83

Poison or poisoned weapons. ———.————-. 28 8
—-.—
Prisoners of war, ill-treatment (see Prisoners of war).
Quarter, refusal .—-.—————–.—–.–..———–

33 R
Reprisals against prisoners of war —.–.-…-… 73,3688

.—-..—. 17,89
even..25, 35 7,89
Sick and wounded, ill-treatment (aceSick and wounded).
Spreading contagious diseases— .-_.——-.—- – —–28 8

-. -..–
Summary executions -.—–.——…—–.———-.–5,9,34
13,32,139
Torpedoes, useof certain kinds- .–.-.—.——————-

68 16

Torture.–.———————————–.—..—.-..
25 7
Treachw—————————————–.—

30,31,39,40 9,lO. 11
Violation ofsafeguard.——.-. ————.-241,242 66

———–.–
Bombardments, sssaults, and sicges- -.–_—-.———-..——

45-61 12

By persons not of armed forces .—-.—.-..———————-
348 87

Oommencament of -.-.–.————-.——.——————-
14-21 5

Belligerents–
Agree on grades of sanitary personnel …—…———–

187 52

Agree on money retained by prisoners .————-.–.-
97 23

Appoint medical commissions –.—-.—-.————–
142 35
Establish information bureaus –.–..-..—————–163 38
Exchange names of aid societies ..–.——.–.———–

183 50

105
Paragraphs ~osti~tieg-Oontinued. Oommencement of-Continued. Belligerents-Continued. Exchange of titles and ranks -.—..–.——————.
94

Notiiy neutrals ——-.—————-.—————–
16,17

Organize graves service ———… –. .——–
.-.. —–. 177
publish measures for correspondence —.—–.———–

108

Declaration of war must precede ,—–.-….-…————-
14

Enemy nationals may be-
e 21
Interned—-.——————-..—.
20

NotBcation of to neutrals-importance– ——————-.
18

Notitlcation of to neutrals required. – — —-.—————–
lb17

Surprise, sudden, still possible ————————-.—–
16

Oonduct of .—————.—————-.
..22-69
Acts of peffidy prohibited —-.——–.—-.—————-
25,39
Aerial torpedoes author=& .–.–34

————————..-
Against civil population prohibited– —-.-19
.—.——-.-.-.-
Aircraft, use of authorized ———————-..—–.—-
27

Appropriation of supplies permitted —.—.——.——–.-
24d
Arms, etc., causingunnecessary injury –..—.—-_—-
——34
Assassination and outlawry forbidden. – – –.—.—-..—–.-

31

Assaults~–~——~~—————..
45-61

Attack restricted to defended places- ——.–.—.-.—.—-
45-47
Bc pcpl … . .–. –4
Battlefield, search of required .–_—–.—-.——–.–.–..-

176
Bombardments, sssaults, and sieges —-. —-.–45-61

–.—-..—.
Bullets, uso of certain Bidsforbidden—————– — — – 34
Burning of campsand depots authorized ———-..—–.—

35

Captures permitted……………….. ————–.—-..

24b
Conttscation ofprivate property forbidden -_——-….—-..

328

Contamination of water sources prohibited– —..—..-.-.–
28
m y prohibited .. 25
Dead (see Dead).
Deception permitted -.—.—.—————————..

24e, 38

Defended place defied ———————————-..–
47

Destruction of life or limb permitted .————————
24a
Destruction of property permitted ——.-.—-..————
24e
Dischsrging explosiveffrom balloons prohibited. .——.—-
27
Drying or diverting’water sources authorized ———–…–

28
Enemy nationals not to be compelled to take part- –.–.—

36,302

Enemy soldiers may be induced to desert, etc —..——.—-
38
Enemy territory (see Occupied territory).
Executions, summary, forbidden —.————————

13,32

Flags, misuse of forbidden .–.————————–+—-41-43
Gases and chemicals, use of authorized —.——-.-.—-…–

29
Gwd faith must be observed.- .—-.—–.———–…

33,39,217

Hand grenades authorized ——–.——-.–34
–.————.
Information, measures to obtain authorized ,–.————–
37
INDEX
Paragraphs Pages
Hostilities-Continued. Conduct of-Continud. Injuring enemy, means limited-. —-.-.———————
28 g
Insignia, enemy, misuse of forbidden- – – ————-.——-
41 11
Killing or wounding captives forbidden ——.—32

——-.—-9
Lances with barbs forbidden -.-.———————–..—-

34 9
Military necessity does not justify what ———–.–..—–
25 7
Military necessity justifies what generally – – ——._-23 7
-_.–.–
Military necessity justifies what specscally —–.—._–_—

24 7
Military neeessity, principle of ———–.-.-.————

4,22-25 1,7
Mines, automatic submarine–. ..—-.——-_—_—-.—–
62-69 14

Mines, explosive, authorized -_-_—-.————————
% 9 Object of wax —————————————-.——
22 7
Obstruction of ways and channels permitted ——-._——–

24c 7
Offenders against the laws of war, treatment of (seeViolations
of the laws of war).
Pillage of towns and places forbidden ——–.—————

61 14 Lawsof war: Basic rules and principles —–1-7 1 Dens–1-3 1 For of ——-b a Unwritten, deked –.–.—————————————-
3 1
Violations and penalties (seeViolations of the laws of war).
Written, deflned .-.——.————————————–

1 Levee en masse: Debd; treated ESbelligerents.—–.————————–
9b 4
Deserters, eto., cannot claim privileges .–.———————–

11 4
Members captured are-
Not treated as brigands-.—.—————————–

10 4
Prisoners of war- —.—-.—–.——..—–18

—-….–….–76d
Rebellion in occupied territory does not constitute —————12 6 Licenses to trade, deflned ………………………………. 240 88 Loans, by neutral powers to belligerents, forbidden —-.————-
376 02
Marauders: Deed——363 88 Robbing wounded or dead, punishment .————————
176b 48

Martial law, de5ed ——–.—————————————
6 a Means of injuring enemy (seeHostilities). Medical personnel (see Sick and wounded; sanitary formations and personnel). Militmy commissions 7 a
——–BTBTBTBTBTBTBTBTBTBTBTBTBTBTBTBTBTBTBTBTBTBTBTBT-BTBTBTBTBTBTBTBTBT
MUtary government, deflned ..————————————-
6 a Rulesrelatlng to (seeOccupied territory). Mar jdiction deed 7 hlilitarynecmity: As &ecting treatment of enemy property …–.—————-
313-341

Bash of military government —..—.—————————
281
Den———-4a
Does not permit what —.—..-.—-*———–.—————

26 7
Paragraphs Pages Military necessity-Continued. Permits what measures generally ——–.——————-.—
23 7
Permits what measures speciflcslly- -.————–.——–.—

24 7 Military occupation (seeOccupied territory). Military passports (seePassports, military). Militia may be part of armed forces ..——————————–
9a 4
Mines:

Automatic submarine:
Certain types forbidden -.-.———.—-..–…—.-.—-.-

65 15
i n of ————–62 14
Must be removed at end of war —-_-.-.–..-..-..–..—.—

69 16
Neutral powers may lay —.-.—————-15

————–. 68
Precautions required in use of ————.-.-.—————66 15
Unanchored forbidden —.——-…————..——–

—63 15
Use against commercinl shipping forbidden -.-.._.–.—…–15

64
Explosive, use of authorized–. ————————-.——.-9

34 Model agreement, for treatment of prisoners —.—–.—————
172 42 Monuments, damage to forbidden -.–……. ——..59-60,318,319 14,81,82 Municipalities, inoccupied territory —….–.—————-.—
318,319 81.82
Poison, use of prohibited ——–.—-.~———-.——–…

25,28 7,8
Prisoners of war (seePrisoners of war).
Projectiles, artillery, may contain explosives ————–34 9
Projectiles causing unnecessary injury forbidden.. ………–34 9
Property, enemy (seeOccupied territory).
Quarter, refusal of forbidden ——————.-..-33 9

—..-…-
Red Cross, misuse of insignia ..——————.-.-
41,44,196,198 11,55,56
Ruses of war-
Authorized —-_-_.——…—-.—-. -…-37

– – -. — — -..—10 Leqitimate—~—.—————————-~-~—–~~
39,40 10,Il Limited ———————————————–.
39 10
Dick and wounded (seeSick and wounded).
Spies, use and punishment of (seeEspionage and trcwon).
Bpreading contagious disesses prohibited- –._—..–… 28

–._-8
Strategems authorized .————————-…-…–..–

37-44 10
Torpedoes, use of certain Binds forbidden —-.-._-…—..—16

6g
Train wrecking authorized- 35 10
———————rainrain–rainrainrainrain-rainrain.
Treacheryforbidden —————————————–30,39 9,10
Undefended places, attack on forbidden —-…….-.—-..–12

45,46
Uniform, enemy, misuse of forbidden ——–…—41 11

nn..nnnnnnnn..nn
Wanton devastation prohibited –..———-..–..—.-.-.–26 7 Withholding of sustenance permitted —————-..—…
24c 7
Must not be directed against civilians —..————…..-.19 6

.–
Occupation md government (seeOccupied territory).
Restricted to the Cirmed forces——-_——–.—–..–.——–

19 6 Humanity, principle of, defined —–..–4h 2
-.—–…——-.———–
Information, measures to obtain authorized –…-….——–.-……
37 10 Inhsbitants of occupied territory (seaOcmpied territory).
INDEX
Paragraphs Pagw
—-.—…—
Injury to surrendered enemy forbidden .-..———–.-32 Insignia, enemy, misuse of forbidden —–.—41 11
———-.—…—–.-
Institutions, reliyious, etc., damaqe to forbidden ..—–..–…——.
318 81 Intercourse between belligerents (ch. 7)——————–..——
215-224 60

Allowed only upon approval of highest authority –.—___–..-.-
216 61

Complete cessation the general rule —–.—-.————…–.-
215
Good faith essential on both sides 217

…es.eseseseseseseseseseseses..
Neutral &plomats may receive safe-conducts .-.—–._–.._-…-
218 61

i!
Parlementaires (see Parlementaires).
Rules for, comprised under what headings ——..——.-.–…–

219 61

White flag, rules relating to —.——–.-.—-.—-.—-.—.–
221-227 61

Internment: Of belligerent troops by neutral ..——.-..—-….–..—-….
383-395 93

Of enemynationals by belhgerent -.-..—–.——-…—-…-.-
20 6

Jurisdiction, raihtary, defined -.—-.–.-..—-..—…..-…—-..–
7 3 Killing or wounding: Accidental,of parlementaires, no ground for complaint-. -.—–_ 62
225

Of armed enemies in combat authorized———…———–_.240 7
Of enemies after surrender forbidden——–..—..—-.—

32 9 Lances,with barbs, forbidden .——–.-..—.—-.—–..——–
34 9

Lawful belligerants, who are ..—.———.-.———————–
9 4 Laws, neutrality, of the United Stab .——-.—.——————
403 97

Munitions: Convoys of, not to cross neutral territory -..-.———-.–.—
363,382 91,93

May be purchased in neutral territory .———————–.-
377 92

Seizure of authorized in occupied territory ——-.———–.-
331-333 83

National Red Cross. American …———————————
171,184 42,61

See also Relief societies. Necessity, military (see Military necessity). Neutral persons (see Neutrality). Neutral powers (see Neutrality). Neutrality (ch. 12):
Belligerent troops:
May be denied asylum —-…—-..————————-

384 94

May be granted esylum on conditions –_-.——————
386 94

Officers, interned, may be paroled ..—–.——————-
386 94

Reception end treatment of ——-.——-.—————-
383-396 93

Commercial shipments do not violate .–.-…..————
367,376,377 91,92,93

Deflned———-~-.———————-
360 90

Fadure of neutrals to preserve, effect -…——.——————
366 91
Internment of belligerent troops .-.—.————————

383-395 03

Laws of the United States ..—————.–.——.———–
403 97
Means ofcommunication:
Belligerent, not to be erected on neutral territory ——-.–_.93

381

Neutral, belugerents may use —–.-.——-.————–
378-380 93

Neutral persons: Deflned—–..———————————————
396 96
Forfeit its wen 4 0 06,97
In occupied territory. rights .-.—.-.—.—.—-.—..-..-

397-401 88

Paragraphs Pages Neutrality-Oontinued. Neutral powers: Complaints of belligerents sent through -.—-.—————
348 86
Diplomatic agent8 of: In besieged plsce -.-.-..-..-.-.————————–
63 13
Inoccupied territory- —-.-..—.————–388 96

—. —–
Duties concerning prisoners of war .–…-.—.–.————389 94
Duties toward belligerents .————–.—-…

860403 90
Duties toward si& and wounded —.-.——————.-
390-394 96

Failure to preserve, effect .——–…——-. 91
——–.-366
Internment ofbelligerent force3 —.—.-.——-.-.-…
365,383-395 91,93
May lay automatic sobmarine mines. .———–.———-

67 16 May use force to preserve neutrality ———————–.-91
3M
~ob~tionto eniorca neutrality’. –.——–.-365

.—-.—–. 91
Must not allow oartain acts —.-…-.-.————-

.——382 93
Must not themselves supply belligerents- —–.——..-376 92

-.–Not bound to grant asylum .–.——-.———————-
384 94
Not bound to prevent commercial shipments ——–..——

375 92

Notification of state of war- -..—-.–.———–.—.–
1618.361 690
Officersof, joining belligerents —–.—————-92

374

To intern belligerent troops when– —-.—.–.-.—.—–.-
383 93

Neutral territory:
Aid societies may be formed within -.—-.—.—————

370 92 Convoys of evacuation, rulesfor————.-.———- — 36Q-386 95 Convoys of munitions forbidden —.————————-
363 91

Hastile expeditions from forbidden- —–.——–.–..——
368 91 Indfvidusls may leave to join belligerents ——————371,372 92 Inviolable-.———~—————–..-.
362 91
Movements of troops and supplies acrms forbidden———-363 91
Nationals of belligerents any leave-.–.——.–.———–

373 92
Recruiting within forbidden _—————.————–91

368-374

Use for radiostations, etc,, forbidden …………………… 381 83
Prisoners of war, escaped, treatment .———————-.

388 94
Railway material, rules concerning ………………………… 402 97
Btatntory offenses against –~—————-.——-

403 97
Supplies may be sold to belligerents -..————————-92

375
Violations may beresisted by force—–.————————

364 91

Newspaper reporters, captured, status ………………………… 76b 17 Newspapers, inoccupied territory- –.—-.————————–
291 77

Noncombatsnts, part ofmedforcescescescescescescescescescescescescescescescescescescescescescescescescescescescescescescescesces Lk d
Occupationand government (see Occupied territory).
Ompied tedto~ (a.10) 271-344 73 Administration of (see QovernIUent of). Billeting within authorizfd ..——-……………………….. 337 84
Censorship of press and mail .——-.-.————————–
291 77

Commercial intercourse within-. –.—.———————-
280 77
Oontributions:
Can be levied by occupant. -.—–.–.———————-
294 77
Inkind,payment for .—-.——–.—————-

—–336 84
INDEX
Paragraphs Pages
Occupied tarritoiy-Oontinued. Contributions-Oontinued. Limited to needs of Amy, etc -.—-.–..-.—-.——–.–.-
341 85
Methods of levy and collection-_ -..–..–..–.—-.–_-.–.-86

342 Courts, local, jurisdiction of. -__-.._——.——————
285 76
Crimes by American soldiers in.———…..——-.–.——–

356 88

Crimes of inhabitants; punishments (see Violations d the laws
of war).
Devastation, rules relating to –.-..-.—–..——314,324

-..–..—–. 81,82
Diplomatic agents residing in .-.-..—-..-.-..——–.—.—.–

397 98

Foreign resident in, may commit treason .——-.-.-_—._——
205 69 Government of: Functions-.-.————–..————————-.—-
283 76
Hostile, esases; excaptions. -..-.——~–..—8888888888888 281-283 76
Law and order, duty to restoro –.–.-.-.–.—–.–…—-.-

282 76

Military, defined -.—-_.-..——-.——–.—.————
8 2
at.. 284 76
Necessity for-. .——.-.–.—–.–…-….—————74 76

281,282

Obligatsd to defray expenses .—-..–.–.——————
293,295 77.18

Guides, impressment of, forbidden —–…———————
307,308 80

Inhabitants:
Acts of constituting war treason——-…——–.—-

205-208.350 69.87
Collective punishments restricted— –.-. ——-.-.—343 86
Commercial intercourse regulated— —–.—.———–.–77

280
Oommwiicsting with enemy. ——–.——–. –20MO7 69

. .—.—
Duties towad occupant ——–.——————-.—.—-
301 78

Forb, etc., forcing to construct forbidden ——-.————
305 79
Guides, forcing to serve as, forbiddcn.——-.—————

308 80
Information, forcing to give forbidden—–…-.-. 306,307

-…-..–79,80
Labor of, may be requisitioned– -.—-.——.-.-.——..
302-306 78

Lives, honor, religion, rights, respected ——.————-
299,300 78

Neutral, rights and liabilities of .——-.—_—-.———-
397-401 96
08th of allegiance forbidden ——. —————–78

–.——298
Obedience may l~ enfomd—297,301 78
Offenses of; punishments (see Violations of the laws of war).
Operations against own country.-…—————

30,302,306-308 10.78.79

Reprisals against, authorized —-..-..—————–.—.-
344 86
Requisitions for services —_–..–. -.—-.——.

..–:—-302,308 78.80
Rights and rights rf action prescrvcd- -.—-..-….-_ 77

7.89
Rising inarms as war rebels ——–.-.—.—.————.-87

349
Bervlcasthat may be demanded—-.—-..——..——–

30Z308 78

Uprisings not levee en mssse ———-.———————
la 6
Intercom during armistice .–.-.—-71

–UISe..UISeUISe UISeUISeUISeUISeUISeUISeUISeUISe-2&284
UISeUISeUISeUISeUISeUISeUISeUISeUISe
Institutions, religious, etc., damage to forbidden .————.—81
318
Labor of inhabitants may be requisitioned…-.—————-302-306 78
Laws:

Exihtiig, may be continued or suspended ..-.–.-..——–76
7.85-287
In force, to be respected.. .–.——————————-73
282
New, may bo promulgated ..—-..-..———————–
288 76
111
Paragraphs Pages Oconpied tealtory-Oontinued. Military government of (see Government of). Neutralsresident in, rights and duties -_—-.-_—————-
397-401 96
Newspapers, occupant controls —–……———291

..-.-.–.—–77 Occupation: Beginning–.-.-.———….-.—————-.-.–….—
279 75 Cessation——-.—————…———-.—-..-….—-
280 76
Consent of inhabitants unnecessary ….–.. -……. 277 75

. . –..-.-.
Deflned;extent.——-.-.———…—.–……..-.-..-.–

271 73
Existence a matter of fact …..—..—-….-.-. 272 73
Invasion distinguished from .._..———–.-…-………–

274 74 Invested fort immaterial _—.——.————————-
277 75
Must be acttmlly effective ……-..—-.-..-..——-..-..–.

276 74
P an……………..27279 75
Sovereignty not transferred by —-._–.——-.-.-..–.—–

273 73
Subjugation or conquest distinguished .——-.—. 275

.———74
Officials:
Oath, may be required to give .-..–.—……–.-.-. 80

….–.-308
Owe strict obedience —–… 309 80

.—…..————————Pent.. 312 80 Removal authorized –.-..-..—–.—-…–.–.————-
311 80
Salaries………………………………………………80

310
Pillage forbidden ………………………………………. 83

328,330
Population (see Inhabitants).
Postal e m-:. . 281 77
Private gain by oflcers and soldiers forbidden ——.–.—.—–

328 83
Property, enemy:
Cannot be confiscated 326 83

—–..-nfisnfisnfisnfisnfisnfisnfisnfisnfis.nfisnfisnfis.nfis….nfisnfisnfisnfisnfisnfis..nfisnfisnfisnfis
Captured, belongs to government .–_—-.-.—–…–.——
327 83
Destruction, necessary, authorized —–…—……—-.—81

313,314
Destruction, unnecessary, forbidden —.-.–..—..———-

313 81
Devastation, rules relating to .————……….–.——

324 82
Municipal, religious, charitable, etc .–.—–…–.-…—-.

318,319 81,82
Ownership unknown, treated ar public.—–.–..-.—–…-322 82
Private, American rule ——.—–.-…….-…-.—-….-..

325 83
Private, must be respected –.–.———-…–..—-.—..-

323 82 Private, treatment ——-…–.————–..–…-.—–
323-334 82
Seizure, necessary, authorized –..—.———-.—–.—.

313,314 81
Seizure, unnecessary, forbidden ——–.-.—..—.—–.–..

313 81 State, buildings, and lands ————.—…-.—.—.—
315,316 81 State, movable -.-..——-…-…—–.-.–..————-
320,321
Reprisals against inhabitants …..L 344 ”

.~..insinsinsinsinsinsins..ins..insins….insinsinsinsinsinsinsins
Requisitions:
Enforcement————–.-..–..-..-..–.–…-.—….—

340 85 For services —————–.-…———-….-.-.——-
302-305
H a rule . ………… 335
How authorized and accomplished .–……–.—…-.-.—.-

337
Prices, how ked; payments .—–.._.—–.———–.—–

339
Quantities, limitation as to-.–……-..-.-.-..————–

338 86
What may be obtained by ..—–…..–.——————–

336 84
INDEX
Paragraphs Pags
Occupied territory-Continued.
Sovereignty does not pass fo occupant —-.–.———-273 ———
73
Submarine cables —-.—-­..————–.-….—————-84
334
Taxes:
77
Applied first to cost of government —.——-.-._-­-293
…..—
Existing rules disregmded when- —-­asasasasas
..-.——….. 294 77

Existing rules observed generally- ..-.–_———-.293 .–.—–
77

Local, subject to supervision ——.—­…——-.296 -.–….–
78
Surplus, may be appropriated .———-.——–296 —–.—–
78

Telegraph and postal services —.———-.—.-281 —————-77

Ransportation, may be seized or regulated ­..–.-..-.-.-­-.-.—77
292

Officers:
Active, neutral, must not join belligerents —-.———-374 ——–
92

Captured (see Prisoners of war).

Gain, private, forbidden in occupied territory–. –.–­..—-.-328 —
83

Interned by neutrals, parole of —–.—.-.—–.-.——

383,386 93,94

Liability of, for ordering war crimes —–.—–.-.—–.347 -…—–
86

Opening of hostilities (see Hostilities).
Outlay forbidden . . 31 9

Plmentas. .22&234 61

Abuse of flag of truce, what constitutes –­..—-..——-.-..234 —-
64

Accompanying party, composition of —–.–­…….——.230 -.—
63

Autholization, written, must be carried …–.–…—-… 226
..——62

Belligerent sending, must cease firing —–­…——-.-.-234 ——–
64

Darkness, attempts to send during –__-.-.­….—–…–227 ——-
62

DeBned_-.—-­..—.——-.——–.–220,221 —-…—-.-…—–
61

221,230 61,63

Fire not to he directed on .-.-~~..~–~..——226 ———–
62

Detention 01, when authorized, etc- -…-.-…—.–..-.——-228,232 62.64
Escorts for ——–.-.-.————-…—–

..—-.———–
Flag, white, to be borne hy —-..-….-..-.—-..————–

221,230 61,63
Foimalities for reception ..—–…..—–.-.———.—–

228,229,231 62,63.64

violabit, foeited ow . . 233 64

Inviolability, right to -.–.-.——-­..-.-.–..—-221 –.-.———-
61

Reception. .228-231 62

Soldiers should know mlos concerning –.–.-.—.—-.—.-61
222
White flag, cessation of flre —.———­…..——224 ———
62

White flag, sigdcance .–.-.—~–~~~~223 ~–~~——–
62
White flag to be carried by.-.————-­..—221 ————-
61

Paroles (8eePrisoners of war).
Pasports, military:
De 236 66

Distinguished from safe-conduds –.—————238 ——–
66

Nanerabl 238 66

Revocation and lapse ~—–~-~-.—~–239 ————————-
86
Peaceful population:
Distinguished from armed forms –.——.-.—-­—————
8

Must not be injured, etc–~ .—.——-.——-­————6
19
Penalties (see Violations of Iue lax of war). PerEdy, acts of, forbidden-. —————-……….7.m
24 UPI
Paragraphe Pages
Fie: In occupied territoryforbidden 328,330
-..——-rrirrirrirrirrirrirrirri—–
Of town or place forbidden —–.—-.———-.—————-
61 Pirates of war .———-351
-…—————-Poison, use of prohibited- -..——-.-.-.————————.-.-
928
Police of battlefield …………………….. 176 e m of w (ch. 4 ) 70-172 Accused, not aompelled to admit guilt —–.———–.-.–.—-
134

81

Addresses of, belligerents to inform each other of ———-.——
Agents:
Facilities to he accorded to .———..-.————-.

117

1IG

Right to appoint; duties –~-.-.——-~~~——–…
73
Armed prowlers not treated as-.——.————–352

Are Inpower of enemy power .—..-.———-.——-
— — —…
Attach&, neutral, not held as.-.—————————-

77
Authentication of signatures ——-…-114

————-..
BeUigerests must notify each other of captures .——-.—-.-..-

81

112

Books, may receive shipments .—–~.—————–.
Bureaus of information for —-……—..———–…
163,165,166 Burial of deceased; death certiilutes .-…——————.162 Camps: Canteens in–~——~~—.~~———————.
85

Hygiene in —~.—~-~~—–~…———-.—–
86

Infirmaries—~——-.——–.——-
87

Installation.—.———-..—–.——–
83
O0icers’, personal services in——.————.-..———

95
To be commanded by o5cers ————————.

——-91
Clanteens to be installed in camps –.————-.——–..-.-

85
Censorship of correspondence –.———.———-. 113
Central agency for information –.—-.—~———..

165

Civil ofticials may be made —————————.–.—
76e, f
Civilians following armies may become .———–.—-.-.——

76 b
Clothing to be supplied .–.————————–

85

Coercion to obtain information forbidden .———-.-.1111 —–78
…-
Collective punishments forbiddw ————.–.——-.—-
84

Complaints, right to make ———————-..———.–.
115,140

Confinement of forbidden; exceptions —.–.———.———–
82

Correspondence:
Censorship and suspension ————————-113
Exempt frompostal charges, etc ..—.———-..———–

111

General des affecting .————————–..
–109 Measuresfor, to be published .——–.——————
108

Parcels, may receive by mail– .-.—————.—.——-
110 Telegrams, are allowed to send-. .—–.——-.————-
111
With families,to be permittad— —.-_.—-81

———–. Death penalty; notice of; stay of execution ………………….. 139 Deceased; burial;death certificates—-.-.-.–, 162 Dehition —–~—~————-.—–
70
Discipline (see Punishments of).

Paragraphs Prisoners of war-Continued. Dfsorldmtions between based on what 75
–.—-..—–.titititititititi..

Dispersed, commissions to search for ———.-.—-.—-.—–.-
161

Documents, etc., transmission, etc ——-.——.—-.——–..-
114

Effects and money of .——–._—.-.———————–.—
79

Entering neutral territory, treatment .-.-….-…-..—.——–.
389

Escapes; attempting and assisting; punishment ….—.-.——
123,124

Evacuation————————————-.——.———
80

Exchange:
Cannot be demanded; cartel -..——————————

156
Cod…….. 158
Made only after complete capture —-…—-.—–..-..—..

157

Spies, war traitors, and war rebels excluded -.—–.—-.—..
160

Elubstitutions arranged by cartel ——-.—-.—.—…—–
159

Exposure to combat ftre forbidden ———_—————.—–
82
External relations:
Publication of measures —-.—–108

————-.———.—
Rubefhting—……………….. –.———-.—–.-

109-114

Food ration to equal that of troops -.—–.——-..—…—.—-
84
Forcin~to take part in operations, forbidden- ——————-36
From sanitary units, maintenance, pay, etc ———–.———.

187

Funds belonging to, disposition .-.—.—————————
87
Geneva Oonvention of 1929:
Applies to what persons -.–.—-.—————————

72
Relation to Hague Regulations —.————-.——-..—

71

Text to be posted in camps, etc -.—–..—-..——-.——-
168

Gifts for, postage and duty free ——-.———————.—
111

Graves———–.—————————————-.—-
162
Highway robbers not treated as..————————-.——

351
Hospitalization inneutral country– -.-… ……141-145
Hos~itslizationto be provided .-.——.-.———————–

87

Hostaga are treated as——–.———..——–.———–
76h, 359
Humanity, must be treated with —._—–..——————.-
73

Hygienic measures required of captor —-.-.-.——————-
86

Imprisonment:
During trial to be deducted from sentence. ——.-.-.——-

120
Forbidden exmpt for safety andsanitation——-.———–

82
Infirmaries to be established for -.———-87

…………………
Information bureaus; establishment; duties -.-.-..——..-.—

163,165

dnformation bureaus exempt from postage and duties .-.–.–.—
166

inhabitants, certain, may be made .—.-.—–..–.————-
76g
Injuries while at wore compensation ………………………. 100
Insignia and decorations, may be worn by -..-.——————

92

Insults, must be protected against.. .-.—.—–..—–.-..–.—
73
International Committee of Red Cross. –… 165

–.—————–
Internment of –.—–.–..—.———————————–

82

Judicial prosecution of (see Punishments of).
Kitchea, may be employed In ….-.-….—.——————–
84
Labor of (see Work).

Paragraphs Pages prisoners of war-Continued. Language they understand to be used …-.—…-..-22
93
Laws and regulations of captor, subject to.. . 118

–.-.-.-..–..-….-29
Letters of (see Correspondence of).
Levee en masse. members of, may become -.-…-…-…-..-.-.-18

. 76d
Lodgings of, requirements for –.————- – —-. 83 20

—-.-.-.—.-
Maintenance, captor must provide for —-..-.—.—..-.—-17

-.-. 75
Maintenance while working for private persons.. ………..-.-.-101 25
Medical inspection to be held monthly– -..-.-.-…–. -22

…–..–88
Medical treatment to be provided -..—-..——–..—.-.-..-.-
87 21
Ministers of religion dowed to minister to–. ..-.-.-…-.-.-.-.-89 22
Money accounts —.—————-97 23

.—–…—.——.—
Must not be kept in unhealthful region .-.—.–.—..-.-82 20
Names and ranks, bound to give– -.-.–.—.–..——.-.-18

—–78
Neutrd attach& and agents are not –.–… -..-.—.—18

…..-.—77
Noncommissioned officers, do supervisory work -.—.-..-..-….-21

100

Offenses of, veraeation; procedure —–.-.-.—-..—————
120 30

See also Punishments of.
Officers and assirnil&
May be given work ifthey ask it..—–.-…——.—–.–.

100 24 Not to be confined with enlisted men ..—.——.—.——-
122 30
NotiEcation of titles and ranks required.. -.—.-94

.. -.—-.-.-23
pay; rate of exchange; reimbursement —-..—–.–.–.—–
96 23

Personal service, food and clothing ——.—-..—–.——-
95 23
Senior recognized asintermediary—-.-.–.–.-.—28

——–.-116
To be trested with regard to rank and age–..—.-.-.–..—23

94

Parcels by mail, may receive-. ———..—–.—–.-.-.—.—
110 Z7 Paroles..148-155 36 Allowance of discretionary with governments. –.—…——I53 37 Commissioned officers .—.—-.—.————-.—…—.-
151 37

Enlisted men must give through officers —-..——-…—–
150 36

Form and substance; in writing-.—-.–.—-.-.—.—…–.
149 36
General orderregarding, communicated to enemy ——-.–.37

153

Ineffectual when- -..———–.–…
-152 37
Liberty on, must be accepted voluntarily .-.-.—.-.———

154 37

May beliberated on; conditions ——..—-.——.—.—–
148 38

Violation of forfeits rights; trial -_–…-.—–.—–.———
155 37

Personal effects to be retained by —-.-.-.————-.———
79 19

Persons and honor to be respected —-.–..—–.—-.—-.—-.-
74 17 Pirates of war not treated as.———-.–..—.———.——-
351 87
‘Potable water to be provided for …………………………… 84 20
Protecting Power:
Notice to, of death sentences; stay ——.-….-.-.———–

139 34 Notice to, of judicial proceedings. -.-.-..–.—–.—-.——33
133 Notice to, of sentence imposed ..——–.–..—–138 34 Representatives of. to be facilitated -..–.-.——.———–
169 41 Right to complain to.- —-…————————–.—-28
115

To aid in settling differences.-. ….–.-..—..—.—..—-.-
170 42
Trials, may be represented at ..—-…–….—————–135 34

Paragraphs Pages Prisoners of wr-Continued. Punishments of: Aggravationofworking conditions forbidden- ——–_.-_.–25
106

Authorized and forbidden. .—..–…———————–
119 28

Cannot affect right of complaint -….—.–.-.—–.———
140 36

Collective and corporalforbldden -.-.——…—–..——-
84,119 %,29

Discrimination after, forbidden ..–….—..——.-..—–.-
121 30

For attempting or assistin5 escape -…——.-.————–
124 31
For escape, authorized and iorbidden —-….-_———–..-
123 31

For insubordination authorized –.-…-.—————-.-.–
118 29

Judicial:
Courts and procedure —.-…..-.—-..–.———-.—34

136

Death sentences; notice; stay —_——.-.————–
139 34
Imprisonment pending trial.. .–.-_…_–.–.——–..-30

120

Notice of sentence to protecting power -..—————-
138 34

Notice of trial to protecting power .——–.————.
133 33
Right of appeal ..–..–+———————–137 34
Right ofcounsel, etc –.—-……..———————-

135 34
Rig of defense ……… 134 33
Not to exceed those in army of captor ———-.-.—-…….

119 29

Offenses to be verified; procedure —–.——————–.-
120 30
Officersnot confined with enlisted men —..-..——-.——

121 30

Rank, deprivation of, forbidden –…..—-.————–.–
122 30

Repatriation not to be delayed by summary -.—-.-.–_—–
126 31
Second for same offense forbidden. -.—–.–..–_..——_–31

125

Summary:
Food restrictions as—-. 128 32

–.-..———.—————–
Further trictio o n -. -129 32
Imposable only by commanders -.———————–

132 33

Mamumlimits .-.—127 32
Medical care during -.-….—_–…—–.————-..

131 33

Or judicial, lenience in deciding ———-.—.——–..
125 31
Withholding mail as..—-.——–.—————-.-.-.

130 33

Rank, deprivation of, forbidden.—.——-.——.————-
122 30

Rations of ———–.——————————————
84 20
Ready money they are dlow~d to keep –_-.—.-_—————23

97

Recreation and sports .——-..——————————-.
90 2a
Relief societies, belligerents to assist.. .–.-.—–_———–.—

164 38

Relief societies may send books to camps -..———-.———-
112 27

See also Relief societies.
Religious privileges to be accorded -.————————.—-

89 21
Repatriated, use in active service iorbidden .——–.——-.—-
147 36

Repatriation:
Able-bodied long in captivity.——————————-

146 36

Armistice to include provisions for —.-.————.–.—–
161 38
Expenses of, by whom borne– -140 36

—-e——-e—–e———

Inspections with view to ….—..–.————–+——–143,144 %,36
Mixed medical commissions –.—————————-
142,143 36
Model agreement for sick nnd wounded …—-.—.——–
111,172 36,42

117
INDEX
Paragraphs Pages prisoners of war–0ontinued. Repatriation-Continued. Ybnishment, judicial, mny delay -.—.–.–.—–.——–
128,161

Punishment, summary, not to delay ……—.—————
128

Seriously sick and wounded .—.-.—..-.——.-.-..-.—
141,172
Victims of industrial accidents —–. — — —-144

-.-.———.-
Reprisals against prohibited —————..———–.——-
73,358 Retain full civilstatus—–.———–.———.—————
74
Saluting by, rules concerning —–.-.—-.. 91

…..—…-.——-__
Sanitary personnel, captlu’ed, treatment of …..-.——…-.—

186,187

Segregation of, according to race —-.–.–…———-..–.-.—
82

Seriously sick and wounded to be sent back ….-.—..——.-
141,172

Sick and wounded (see Sick and wounded).
Soldiers captured while violating armistice are —–.————-270
Special conventions concerning- ———–.—..-.—– — .—

—167
Spies captured after rejoining own army -.—…..-…..—-.—-

212

Gtatus of captives left to courts —,——————.-.——-.-
13

Subject to laws, regulations, etc., of captor —_—._-_–.-.——-
118

Summary execution of captives forbidden .—_-13 Tobacco, are permitted to use —.———-.———–.–.—–
84
Transfer; rights upon.———–.——-98,99
.——.-.-.—-.–.—–
Treatment of, in general ———————-.-..-.-.—-.–.—
73,74

Unable to identify selves, procedure. .—–.——–.–.———
78
Violence, must be protected against —-.—.-.—-.-.—-.—–.-
73
War rebels not treated as–.—————-.———.–.—–.-
349

Who have right to be treated as———.—-..-.—————
76
1 death ; bur.. 162
With troops taBing refuge in neutral territory .-…-.—–.-.-.—

389
Women, tobe treated with regard due sex .—_–.—–…——-

74

Work:
Authorized; care while working——-..———————

100

Detachments; sanitary conditions; food, etc .—–.——-.—
108

For which unIit prohibited —.——–.———.———–
102

In kitchens, may be required ————.—————–.-
84
Length of day; weekly day of rest …-.—–.—.—–.—-.-.

103
O5cers and noncommissioned officers. -.—-.-.——-.—–

100
Related to war operations prohibited-. …………………. 104
Unhealthful or dangerous forbidden– –.—-..—–..——-

105

Wages and payment .–_—-.———-.-.—-.——….—-
107

Wounded and sick, captured ———-.———–.————-
76c

Projectiles: ArtilIery, may contain explosives –.—–34
.—————.——-
Causing unnmaryinjury forbidden .–.–.——————–
34
Property: Captwed belongs to Government .—.—..———————-
327
Enemy, destruction of authorized .–.–.-……–24c
-. ——-.-.-.-.
Enemy, in occupied territory (see Occupied territory). Protecting powers (see Prisoners of war).
Paragraphs Pagw
Provost conrts .-..—————————————————

!f 1
ROW~WS .—————-.—————————–.————-
a62 ~3
Punishments:
Of inhabitants of occupied territory (see Occupied territory;
inhabitants).
Of prisoners of war (see Prisoners of war).
Of spies (see Espionage and treason).
Of war criminals (see Violations of laws of war).
Qualifications of the armed forces (ch. 2)-..———————–.–
&W, 4
Quarter, refusal of, forbidden ——-._-nartnartnartnartnartnart..nartnartnartnartnartnartnartnartnartnartnartnartnartnartnartnartnartnartnartnartnart 33 9
Radio, in neutral states —————————–.———-
378,381,382 93
Railway material, neutrality rules concerning ……..—–..——.–97

402
Rebels, war_ ——–.——— – 38,87

—.-163,348
Red Crescent, emblem of sanitary service –.—…—————–

193-198 64
Red Cross:
Emblem, distinctive, use———…—-..——.-.–.——–

193-198 64

Insignia, misuse of, forbidden .–.———.—–..—–..
41,44,196,19s 11,65,66

Society, American National —.._-._—-…—–.——….—
171,184 42,61

See also Relief societies.
Bed Lion and Sun, emblem of sanitary service ….—_———–.-64

193-198

Relief societies:
Buildings and material of, private property -.————.-.—–

190 53
For prisoners, tobe facilitated ———.———-..—–…—–

184 39

Of neutralcountries ~~.eseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseses.–eseseseses.eseseseses…eseseses 185 61
Personnel assimilated to sanitary personnel ..–.—.—–.——-
183 60
Prisoners camps. may send books to –….—–.-.._————-
112 27
Recruitingfor, permitted in neutral territory- .——–.———
370 92
Red Cross. International Committee —.-..——————–.. 42

171
Red Cross, only authorized American.. –..—184

——————51
Use of distinctive emblem by ..–.———.———————
198 68
Volunteer, for sick and wounded ..-..————————–

183-185 53
Religion, buildings devoted to, protected ..————————–
68-80 14
Religious freedom:
Accorded:
Inhabitants of occupied territory 289,300 78

–..——-tstststststststststststststststs

Prisoners o w——————80 22
Repatriation (see Prisoners of war).
lleprisals:
Against inhabitants of occupied territory ———.————–
344 86 ‘b Against prisoners of war forbidden ..—————————-17.89
73,368

For violations of laws of war ….–.——————————
31 89

Requisitions (see Occupied territory).
Revenge:
Acts of, prohibited —.—.————————————–

25 7
Reprisals never adopted for -..–.-..-.-….———————-

36% 88
Reward, for enemy “dead or dive”, forbidden ….—–…—–….–
a1 9
Robbers, highway, defined …-…-.-..———–.——.——–.-

361 87
Rulea of war:
Basic rules and prinaiples..—-M 1

.—-.–.—-.——-.—.-.—–
Definitions……..-…….—-.-..—.—-…-.-…..-……-.. 1-3 1

119
INDEX
Paragraphs Pages Rules of war-Continued. Force of. .——–.—-.—-.————————————
6 a

Unitte, deed .. 3 1

Violations and penalties (see Violations of the laws of war).
Written, defined ~..-.~~-.-~..————-.
2 1

Bllses of war:

Authorized——–.~-~——37 —-..
10
Legitimate and forbidden, examples -..——–..——–..
……39,40 10,11

Mustnot involve treachery or perlldy -.-_————-39 -.-.—-.-
10
Use of ms, insignia, and uniforms as -.-.——-.-.–.—-43 —….
11

Bafe-wnducts:
For goods, deflned ——~­..-~–~-237 ———–.
65

For goods, in whose hands honored -.—.—­——.. ..–65
238
For porsons, deflned —–.—–~~——236 ———…
65

For persons, distinguished from passports .­….—.-.-…­—–.-66
238
For persons, nontransferable -~..—..——-238 –..
65

Licenses to trade -~————-­..–241 -….
66

Neutral diplomats may be given —.-.-……–216 61

–.——…——
Revocation and lapse ——–.—–.–­…—239 —-.—-
66
Bafeguards:
Defined-~-~..~——~——–241 ———-….
66
Soldiers acting as, inviolability-. ——.——­..—–242 —…—–
66
Banltarp formations and establishments (see Sick and wounded).
Bcience, buildings devoted to, protected- –..–.-..–.—..–14,81,82

58-60,318,319

sick and wounded (ch. 5) ………………….. -.—–..-… 47
173-201
Abandoned, sanitary personnel to be left with .-.—-.-.—–.174 —
47

American National Red Cross —–..–….—-.-.–.-42,bl

—….—171,184

Bombardments and sieges, spared in ­….-._…..–.——-..-68,69 —
14
Captured, are prisoners of war -.—-.–.—–.-..—.–.-…–.-
76c, 175 18,47
Care and treatment of, in general –._.-.–­…..-.—-.174 –.——-
47
Oonvoys of evrmstion .———–..—–..–.
191,192 53,54
Death of, dutiw of Captor ——–.–.—-..–.-…..—–
162,176,177 38,47,48

Distinctive emblems, use———.-.—­….–..-…193-198 -.—-..
54

—–.Duties of neutral powers toward-. ….——-.-. .—.39C-304
..–95

Entering neutral state, rules Con~rning 3W94 95

.—–.-.rin.rinrinrinrinrin…rinrinrinrinrin
Evacuation:
Convoys oI; vehicles; how treated .—-.——–.-.-

——-191,192
Geneva Convention of 1928:
Belligerents to provide for execution of –.———-.—.—–

l9Q
Infractions; investigations; action..——.—…–
——.. 201
208
publication to troops and peoples -._.—–.——-..–…
Replaces prior conventions- ——— — –.-….–. 178

Hostages to insureprotection of ————.– – … ….. 369

Humanity, to be treated with- ———–….—-..—….. 174

-.-..–..
Information to be exchanged ————-.——-177a

Inhabitants may be asked to care for–. ——–. . -178
.——-.
International law, applicable to ­..—–.—…—————….
175

lnterned in neutral state —————-..————

—172,3*394
Marmders robbing, punishment ——-.———1765
Paragraphs Biekand wounded-Continued. Neutral powers, duties with ralation to–. -.————.—-
.-390-394

Red Cross distinctive emblem …………………………… 193-198
Red Cross Society, American National._ —-.——-.–.—-_-

171,184
Robbery and ill-treatment, protected from ………………….. 178
Sanitary buildings and matbriel, use.. -.—._—___—-..—..–

189
Sanitary establishments, fixed —-.——————-189

—..-..—
Sanitary formations:
Aircraft as sanitary transport ………………………….. 192
Arms and ammanition found with ……………………… 181
Aims, may carry for self-defense. ………………………. 181
Buildings and materiel of, captured ……………………189,190
Convoys of evacuation treated as………………………. 191
Distinetive emblem, use ……………………………..193-198
Distinctiveflag………………………………………. 196
Bed t e n…………………………………. 189
Guards for, treated as members………………………… 181
May be employed by captor …………………………… 188
Netr fls……….. …………………………… 197
Protection, acts which do not forleit ……………………. 181
Protection, ceases when ..—–.——.——-.–

f~-.
.-.-..——-180
Self-defense, meaning …………………………………. 181b
To be respected and protected. ——-.–.—-..—-.—.—.179
To retain materiel and personnel- ……………………… 188

Banitaw personnek
Brassards with distinctive emblcm …………………….. 196
Captured, maintenance, pay, eta ………………………. 187
Captured, to be retuned to own army ………………….. 186
Distinctive emblem, use.-. ………………………….. 193-198
Entering neutral territory- ……………………………. 396
Identity, to camy proof of ……………………………… 196
Must be left with abandoned ………………………….. 174
To be respected and protected …………………………. 182
Transportation persome1 treatcd ………………… 191,192

Bearch of battleflelds; lod armistice..-.————.————
176
Spared in bombardment and siegcs ………………………… 68,69
Special agreements for beneflt ……………………………… 176
Transfer……………………………………………. 98,141,172
Transportation, vehicles used for- ……………………….. 191,1Q.2
Treatment of, ingeneral………………………………… 174
Volunteer aid societies …………………………………..183-186

Biegea……………………………………………………… 61-60

Besieged place:
Attacker may forbid communication with. ……………… 67
Certain buildings to be spared ………………………….68-60
Permitting neutral diplomats te leave– ………–………. 62
Permitting population to Iwve- ……………………….-81,62
Persons expelled from, flrlng upon. —.-.——–.——-.–.

66

Paragraphs Blege~Oontinued. Besieged pl-Oontinued. Persons expelled may be driven back. .—–..–..-..——..
55
64
Persons leaving or entering without permission -.—–.——
53
Persons dwelling between opposing forces ……-.–.————-
Signs, to distinguish protected buildings, etc —.———.——-.—
59,BO
soldiers: Captured (see Prisoners of war). Captured while violating armistice –.-.———————–.-
270
Comprising safeguard, inviolable- —–.———————242
–.-
Reprisals by, forbidden .——.—-~~-.~-.——-.
358b
Sick and wounded (see Sick and wounded). Bpiw (see Espionage and treason). Stratagems, authorized -.—————–. 37
.—– —
Submarine cables.-. ——-~~-~—————-…
334
Submarine mines (see Mines).
Summary executions, prohibited –.——-.——.-

.——13,32 Summary punishments (see Prisoners of war; punishments). Supplies, appropriation of in enemy country .————————
24d
See also Occupied territory. Surrender (see Capitulations). Suspension of arms (see Armistice). Sutlers, captured, status ..—~~-~—~—————–
76 Telegraph and telephone, inneutral states- ——————-. 378,381,382 Territory, enemy, occupation and government of (see Occupied
territory).
Torpedoes:
Aerial, authorized .~~.-.-~–~——————

31
Use of certain kinds forbidden.—..———–.———-
69
Tome, forbidden ~-~~—~–~———-.——-..
25 Train mecking, authorized ~—~—–.———–.—
36
Treachery, forbidden ———–~–.————–.
30
Treason (see Espionage and treason).
Trial, for wsr crimes, right —..-.-.———————–

356
Troops (see particular subtopics).
Truce (see Armstiee).
Undefended places, attack upon forbidden .—-.–..——~–.

44 46
uni(orm, enemy, misuse of forbidden .-.—. —.—.—44
-.——–.
,Violations of the laws of war (ch.11) 345-368 Armed forces, principal offenses –.-.-.———————-
347
Armed prowlers .–~-.—.———————
352
Belligerents:
Injured, remedies —~.~-~.———————
346
Offending, liability ———-.——– — ———-.
-.. 345
Responsible for acts of armed form ——.-..—————-
345 86
Oollective punishments for —————–343,344,358d 85,86,89

punishable by penal codes. -.–.——-.—————.-
355 88
Miscellaneous————.–..–.—–.
.. 354 88 Death penalty may be imposed for- -..—.—————–. 89
.. 367
Paragraphs Pages Violations of the laws of wa~–Continued. Execution, summary, forbidden -..——————————
13 6

Highway robbers and pirates of war- -.——-.—–.-..-.——-
351 87

Hostages may be taken to insure against -.–.—–.————–
359 90
Hostile acts by persona not of armed forces 348 87

-.———–D9D9D9D9D9D9D9D9D9D9
Individual offenders:
Liable to sentence of death .-.-.——————————

357 80

Bight of trial —————————-.
356 88

Marauders–~~~——————……….

353 88
Miscellaneous crimes and offenses-. – – -…….— — -… 354 88
Piratesof war-~——-~——-~.———-………

351 87
Protest and demand for punishment ….——……-.———–86

346

Publication of the facts -.–.—–…-.-.-.———…..
346 86

Punishment for, may be death -.—–.-…-.———..-……
357 80

Reprisalsfor-.~.-~—————~-~-~-~-…………

358 80
Trials for, right ..—. –.———.. 356 88

-.——-.-.-.—.
War rebels, defined; punishment– ————.———.–…..
349 87

War treason; examples ………………………………….. 87

350

Volunteer aid societies .—~-,-..~.~~~———–
183-185 60

See also Relief societies. Volunteers, may be part of armed forces —————–.———–
9a 4

War:
Declaration 14-15 8
Object 22 7

War crimes (see Violations of the lam of war).
Warfare, measures authorized and prohibited (see Hostilities).
War rebels:

Are not exchanged ——….——–38

———.180

Defined—-.-.——–~~———-.———-
349 87
Wartraitors (see Espionage and treason).
Wireless, in neutral state.. .- — — — – – –.——-93

. 378,381,382 Works of art, damage to forbidden -…-.-.———————-
-318 81
Wounded (see 8idi and.wounded).

0

 

Selected problems 1979

Selected problems 1979

_________TC 27-10-1
__

SELECTED PROBLEMS
IN THE
cover page
logo
JUNE 1979
TRAINING CIRCULAR  TC 27-10-1
NO. 27-10-1
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
Washington. DC. 26 June 1979

SELECTED PROBLEMS

IN THE

LAW OF WAR
PREFACE
Every soldier must understand the law of war and its I significance. Both com­manders and members of their command must secure this knowledge through forrpal instruction and field training exercises.
This text provides supplemental and follow-up instructional material on the Hague Convention No. IV and the Geneva Convention of1949 (see AR 350-216 and ASUBJSCH 27-1).
These materials serve three purposes. First, they help the training manager to present a clearer explanation of the law of war. Second, they help to insure that an area of essential knowledge for the individual soldier has been thoroughly addressed. And, finally, they help the commander insure that members of his command have a basic knowledge of the law of war and its significance.
The guide is divided into three sections. Section I discusses the training requirements ofAR 350-216 and gives general guidance on the use ofthe case studies in section II. It also discusses educational techniques, givingexamples ofhow to train soldiers in thelaw of war (the most critical aspect of the training manager’s task). Section II presents typical combat situations in which many of the laws of warfare are applied. The discussion of these situations supports understanding of the basic law of war. More important, though, discussion demonstrates the realistic applications and implementation of the rules in combat. Finally, section III contains an index to the case studies to help the training manager select material appropriate to his training objectives.
Users of this publication are encouraged to submit recommended changes and comments. Comments should be keyed to the specific page, paragraph, and line of the text in which the change is recommended. Reasons are required for each comment to insure understanding and completeevaluation. Comments should be prepared using DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Public~tionsand Blank Forms) and forwarded direct to the Commandant, The Judge Advocate General’s School, Charlottesville, Virginia 22901.
Table of Contents
Page

SECTION I         TRAINING REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL GUIDANCE, AND TECHNIQUES OF FORMAL INSTRUCTION .
SCOPE         ···· .
TRAINING REQUIREMENTS         .
GENERAL GUIDANCE         2
TECHNIQUESOFFORMALINSTRUCTION…………………..
2
TESTING…………………………………………….
6
KEYTO CITATIONS. … . .. …. ……. . …. .. . .. . .. .. .. . . . .. . .. 6
SECTION II     CASE STUDIES….. .. .. …. … .. .. .. .. .. … … .. .. .. … .. … 7
1.
PROTECTION OF WOUNDED AND MEDICAL PERSONNEL:

PROTECTIVE INSIGNIA, RECOVERYOFWOUNDED 7
2.
FEIGNING SURRENDER; TREATMENT OF WOUNDED:
PUNISHING AND REPORTING LAW OF WAR VIOLA­

TIONS………………………………………..
9
3.
TREATMENT OF WOUNDED AND MEDICAL PERSON­
NEL; STATUS OF MEDICALVEHICLES AND MATERIAL:

MISUSE OF PROTECTED STATUS AND PROTECTIVE

INSIGNIA,PUNISHMENT………………………… 10
4.
STATUS AND TREATMENT OF MEDICAL FACILITIES

AND ARMED MEDICAL PERSONNEL: CONFISCATION

OFWEAPONS 12
5.
STATUS AND USE OF CAPTURED MEDICAL VEHICLES

AND OTHER MATERIAL: REMOVAL OF PROTECTIVE

AND NATIONAL INSIGNIA.. .. . … .. . . .. .. .. … .. .. . . .. 13
6.
CAMOUFLAGING PROTECTIVE EMBLEMS… .. .. .. .. .. . 14
7.
CONCEPT, STATUS, AND TREATMENT OF SHIP­
WRECKED PERSONNEL: THE PERMISSIBILITY OF

FIRING ON ENEMY PERSONNEL OF SUNKEN LANDING
CRAFT……………………………………….
15
8.
STATUS AND TREATMENT OF OCCUPANTS OF

DISABLEDCOMBATVEHICLES
16

9.
SURRENDER OF ENEMY PERSONNEL: PRECAUTIONARY
MEASURES IN THE SURRENDER OF ,PPROACHING
ARMED ENEMY PERSONNEL
17
I. ••••••••••••••••
10.
KILLING OR WOUNDING OF ,sURRENDERING ENEMY

PERSONNEL; THE DEFENSE OF SELF-DEFENSE:

PUNISHMENT OF PRISONERS OF WAR FOR PRIOR

CRIMINAL ACTS ………………………………. 18
Page

11.
STATUS AND TREATMENT OF PRISONERS OF WAR: CONFISCATION OF PAPERS, PERSONAL EFFECTS AND IDENTIFICATION, KILLING OR WOUNDING PRISONERS OFWAR, PREVENTING ATIEMPTED ESCAPES. . . .. .. . . . 19

12.
TREATMENT OF PRISONERS OF WAR: CONFISCATION OF SUPPLIES AND EQUIPMENT FOR MILITARY PURPOSES, INTERROGATION BY THREAT, FORCED LABOR, EVACUATIONOFPRISONERS…. …… .. ….. …. .. .. 20

13.
TREATMENT OF PRISONERS OF WAR: QUARTERS, SEGREGATION, EVACUATION, INTERROGATION, BONDAGE……………………………………. 22

14.
MISTREATMENT OF PRISONERS OF WAR: CONFISCA­TION OF PERSONAL ARTICLES AND EQUIPMENT, INTERROGATION BY FORCE, REPRISALS, SUMMARY PUNISHMENT ‘” .. ……… … …. …… ….. 23

15.
CONDUCT IN CAPTIVITY: DISPOSAL OF ITEMS POTENTIALLY USEFUL TO THE ENEMY WAR EFFORT, CONFISCATION OF EQUIPMENT, PAPERS AND PERSONAL EFFECTS, INTERROGATION BY FORCE, PROTESTING MISTREATMENT…….. …… ….. ………… …… 24

16.
CONDUCT IN CAPTIVITY: RESISTING ENEMY INTERROGATION ATIEMPTS, PROVIDING INFORMATION TOTHEENEMY………………………………… 25

17.
PROTECTED STATUS OF CIVILIANS: CIVILIAN PARTICIPATION IN RELIEF AND RESCUE EFFORTS, THE PERMISSIBILITY OF FORCEFUL MEASURES TO IMPLEMENT AND ENFORCE OCCUPANT ORDERS; COLLECTIVE PUNISHMENT, CURFEWS, FORCEFUL EVACUATION…… …. ……. …… …………. …. 26

18.
CIVILIAN EVACUATION FROM COMBAT AREAS: IMPLEMENTING ORDERS AND PROCEDURES, PUNISHMENT FOR NONCOMPLIANCE 29

19.
TREATMENT OF CIVILIAN POPULATION IN OCCUPIED AREAS: CIVILIAN RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACTS OF RESISTANCE FIGHTERS, COLLECTIVE PUNISHMENT, REPRISALS ” .. …. …. . 31

20.
STATUS AND TREATMENTOF CIVILIAN PARTICIPATION IN COMBAT ACTIVITIES: RESISTING INVADING FORCES, COLLECTIVE PUNISHMENT, REPRISALS, HOSTAGES…… …………… . .. .. 32

21.
TREATMENT OF CIVILIANS IN OCCUPIED AREAS: CIVILIAN PARTICIPATION IN COMBAT ACTIVITIES, TEMPORARY FORCEFUL EVACUATION FOR SEARCH PURPOSES, HIDING ENEMY WEAPONS AND PERSONNEL, PUNISHMENT, REPRISALS, DESTRUCTION OF PROPERTY. 33

Page

22.
RESISTANCE MOVEMENTS: STATUS OF MEMBERS,

TREATMENT OF CIVILIAN SUPPORTERS, PUNISHMENT 34
23.
LAWFUL COMBATANTS; THE STATUS AND TREATMENT OF

THIRD COUNTRY NATIONALS AND CITIZENS WHO

PARTICIPATE IN MILITARY ACTiViTIES…………… 36
24.
THE DETERMINATION AND TREATMENT OF LAWFUL

COMBATANTS 38
25.
COMPARISON OF ESPIONAGE AND LAWFUL

INTELLIGENCE-GATHERING PROCEDURES: RUSES

OF WAR, CAMOUFLAGING, USE OF CIVILIAN CLOTHING,

WEARING THE ENEMY’S UNIFORM DURING RECONNAIS­

SANCE MiSSiONS……………………………..
40
26.
STATUS AND TREATMENT OF PARLEMENTAIRES:

MISUSE OF STATUS 41
27.
FIRING ON RESIDENTIAL AREAS: THE SIGNIFICANCE OF

WHITE FLAG DiSPLAyS………………………… 43
28.
FIRING ON TOWNS AND CITIES: MILITARY NECESSITY.. . 44
29.
DISPOSITION OF LAW OF WAR VIOLATORS: BAN ON

SUMMARY PROCEEDINGS TO DETERMINE GUILT OR

PUNISHMENT, BAN ON REPRISALS, RUSES OF WAR,

DECEPTIVE STATEMENTS, USE OF ENEMY’S LANGUAGE,

PASSWORDS, WEAPONS, EQUIPMENT AND UNIFORM. . 45
30.
THE STATUS, USE, AND MARKING OF CAPTURED

MILITARYAIRCRAFT ..”.. ….. … .. …. . . . .. .. .. . .. . 47
31.
THE DISSEMINATION OF PROPAGANDA AS A MEANS

OF WARFARE: BAN ON SUMMARY PUNISHMENT FOR

ALLEGEDLAWOFWARVIOLATORS 48
32.
THE STATUS, TREATMENT AND RULES OF ENGAGE­

MENT RELATING TO PARACHUTING CREWS OF
DISABLED AIRCRAFT…………………………
49
33.
STATUS AND TREATMENT OF PARATROOPS:

SABOTAGE TEAMS……………………………. 50
34.
RULES OF BOMBARDMENT: MILITARY TARGETS AND

OBJECTIVES, PROTECTED PERSONS, AREAS, FACILITIES,

INSTITUTIONS, AND OBJECTS…………………… 52
35.
RULES OF BOMBARDMENT: MILITARY TARGETS AND

OBJECTIVES, PROTECTION OF CULTURAL AND RELIGIOUS

INSTITUTIONS AND OBJECTS, PROTECTED PROPERTY

USED FOR MILITARY PURPOSES………………… 54
36.
WAR CRIMES: COMMAND RESPONSIBILITY, DUTY TO
DISOBEY CRIMINAL ORDERS, DUTY TO REPORT WAR

CRIMES……………………………………… 55
37.
CHEMICAL WEAPONS: LEGALITY AND RESTRICTIONS

ON USE……………………………………… 57
SECTION III INDEXTO CASE STUDIES         ” 59
iv

blank space
Section I
TRAINING REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL GUIDANCE, AND TECHNIQUES OF FORMAL INSTRUCTION
SCOPE. This section outlines formal training requirements in the law of war and provides general guidance on integrating the case studies in section II into training progl-ams. It also explains many educational techniques that may be used to develop in the soldier the desired knowledge of the law of war and its impact on him.
TRAINING REQUIREMENTS.
Army Regulation 350-216 requires that formal training in the law of war be provided each soldier periodically and that a permanent record be kept of such training. This training is requir~d at the training base and within the school system. Formal unit training is also required for soldiers not trained earlier. The training manager must become thoroughly familiar with these requirements.
The regulation further requires the commander to insure that each member of his command has a practical working knowledge of the Geneva and Hague Conventions and their significance. Practical training (which follows formal training and should be continuous) will be integrated in all tactical training and related subjects. Such practical training should be realistic within the bounds of safety.
Army Regulation 350-216 also requires that formal law of war instruction be presented by officers of The Judge Advocate General’s Corps (JAGC) or other legally qualified personnel together with officers with com ma nd experience, preferably in combat. A legally qualified person is one graduated from an accredited law school and admitted to practice before a Federal court or the highest court of a state. Where legally qualified personnel are not available, AR 350-216 provides alternative methods of instruction.

GENERAL GUIDANCE.
This text is designed as a casebook and guide for the training manager in developing programs for practical application of the law of war. The case studies in section II can be integrated into those training programs. Because of the different levels of training for which the studies will be used, they are not intended as a verbatim text or lesson plan for any specific training program. The training manager will tailor his programs to the needs of his audience and to the training problems or requirements peculiar to a given unit, mission, or group. The case studies should be integrated into these programs wherever possible.
The manner of developing training programs using the case studies in section II is left to the judgment and resourcefulness of the training manager. Such development depends largely upon his requirements, preparation, and evaluation. Remember, though, that the material contained in section II is not to be used in place of basic or refresher instruction in the law of war. Such instruction is provided in Army Subject Schedule 27-1 (The Geneva Conventions of 1949 and The Hague Convention No. IV of 1907). This text should be used to supplement or follow up basic or refresher instruction.
The training manager should be familiar with the principles and techniques defined and discussed in FM 21-6, How to Prepare and Conduct Military Training, the training requirements of AR 350-216, and the material contained in Army Subject Schedule 27-1, to include the training course at appendix C.
If formal law of war training is given at the beginning of the training cycle, the training manager tan integrate it with other training. He can use the teaching techniques of practice exercises and infomal discussion to stimulate interest in and retention of the subject matter.
Too often, though, law of war training is given at the end of a training cycle. One cannot integrate what does not exist; one cannot practice what has not been taught; and one cannot discuss what one does not know. Early presentation of this training in the training cycle provides a basis for effective integration and retention of the subject.

TECHNIQUES OF FORMAL INSTRUCTION.
The education techniques, as they apply to this discussion, are:
LECTURE
CONFERENCE

LECTURE WITH CONFERENCE
PRACTICAL EXERCISE
INFORMAL DISCUSSION
Formal instruction involves, at a minimum, lecture, conference, or lecture with conference, and should be supplemented with practical exercises and informal discussions.
Lecture. The lecture technique is appropriate for teaching new material to large groups. An effective lecture has a logical organization, illustrations and examples, specific and vivid expressions, relevant personal experiences, rhetorical questions, and appropriate training aids.
image
The lecture is effective for exposing a large number of soldiers to the law of war. Since the initial exposure most likely will occur during basic training, the speaker should make every effort to insure that trainees receive a positive first impression of the law of war. This can be accomplished by an interesting, effective presentation. If time and facilities permit, one of several short films dealing with the law of war
can be used. Other training aids include skits or demonstrations, such as MPs searching and securing a group of PWs, and transparencies that highlight the major points of the lecture. Remember, an imaginative speaker can develop other means of making the presentation interesting without detracting from the subject matter.
Conference. The conference technique involves a leader and generally a small group (if the technique is to be effective). The leader directs and controls the group toward a predetermined goal, with most of the ideas developed by the group. The conference allows the soldier to participate directly by asking questions and answering those asked by the leader. The chief difference between conference and lecture is the emphasis on student participation in the former.
The conference can be particularly effective in teaching the law of war when soldiers have a basic knowledge of the subject. The conference should stimulate student thinking, make learning permanent, pool the knowledge of the students, and increase student interest by having the soldier answer the following questions with respect to the law of war:
What to do?
Why do it?
When to do it?

Where to do it?
How to do it?

Lecture with Conference. The lecture with conference encourages the soldier to participate in the presentation by asking questions when he doesn’t understand the material presented. This technique combines the positive points of both the lecture and the conference.
One of the potential problems in presenting
the law of war is maintaining student interest. The lecture and the conference may be inappropriate under some circumstances. If time allows, the lecture with conference can be the most efficient technique to present formal law of war instruction. New material can be presented to large groups with an opportunity for student participation.
Practical Exercises. The practical exercise technique presents a real-life situation in which the soldier can apply knowledge gained through format training.
The effectiveness and nature of practical exercises which demonstrate the law of war are limited only by the imagination and creativity of the training manager. Examples include:
DO NOT FIRE ON A WHITE FLAG.
A whIte flag can be anached to several pop-up targets on a !raml’ra range A mtSS, or even a double mISS, can be scored tf atratnee f,res at It pop·up target that has a whtle flag
“~

—&3
“~J
-,

DO NOT FIRE ON NONCOMBATANTS.
.
,

During an ex.erCtse. a sllhoueue target or aggressor soldiers can be clearly marked as medtcal personnel
TREAT CAPTURED ENEMY PERSONNELFIRMLY, BUT HUMANELY.
Introduce PWs into a f,eld ex.erc’se and reqUire members of the unit to applV proper procedures for processing PWs to tha rear.
EXERCISE COMMAND DISCRETION ON USING THE
RED CROSS EMBLEM.
,
,j

When on a night exercise, mstruct medical aid
‘. …

personnel 10 remove Red Cross armbands and
camouflage Ihe emblem on ambulances. This is nol lI9ainsllhe lew of war. However, lhere is a danger thaI bolh Ihe medical aid personnel and Ihe ambulances will be anacked. Withoul diSlinctive proleclive markings, it is difficult 10 dlSlingulsh between legitimale mililary largels and prOlecled objecls and personnel.
DO NOT UNNECESSARILY DESTROY CIVILIAN PROPERTY.
ReconSlrUct a house lhal conlains $Imulaled booby Iraps. Then have ,ralnees conduct a search of Ihe house 10 learn and apply the COncepl of respect for property.
The case studies in section II cover the laws ofwarlarethat are most peninent to the combat soldier. The above examples of practical exercises were derived from the studies. A training manager must. of course, adapt an.J1 change the studies to fit the situation, the level of training,
and the mission of the personnel involved.
Informal Discussion. Informal discussion between the commander and his soldiers is an important and effective technique of education. It is the best method of testing the effectiveness of prior training and determining future needs. Informal discussion includes “rap” sessions, discussion groups, commander’s time, and simple random questions.
A commander can ask a few soldiers, on a random basis, their understanding of a particular rule of war. It could be a general question to determine what they remember from the formal instruction. For example. he could ask their opinion of a film that was shown. or what they recall best about the JA’s talk on the law of war. Such questions will readily reveat the points remembered. The questions could also be more specific. For example, an airborne soldier can be asked if he would shoot at a descending paratrooper; or a medic can be asked for what purposes he may use his weapon; or a demolition specialist can be asked if he is a saboteur when he goes out to blow up a bridge.
However, informal discussion does not have to be initiated by the commander. The opportunity can be created by the soldier himself. For example. a soldier may ask how he should determine jf a female detainee is armed. This would prompt a demonstration of the law of war pertaining to female detainees.
TESTING.
Purpose. Testing is necessary to insure accomplishment of the training mission. aswell as to provide information for developing a more effective program for the future.
Methods. The written examination is a method of formal testing. It can be developed with the assistance of a judge advocate, or the training manager can model questions on all or
partofDAPam 27·200. ThelawofW8r.ASelf~
Instructional Text. Additionally. the questions in appendix HI of Army Subject Schedule 27-1 arB ready-made for a formal quiz.
Formal testing should always be followed by a thorough critique and discussion of correct responses. Practical exercises and random questioning are informal testing methods. Informal testing does not require as much administrative preparation and follow-up as formal testing.
KEY TO CITATIONS. The following terms and abbreviations are used in this guide:
DA Pam 27-1 Department of the Army Pamphlet No. 27-1. TREATIES GOVERNING LAND WARFARE. 7 December 1956.
DA Pam 27-161-2 Department of the Army Pamphlet No. 27·161·2. INTERNATIONAL LAW Volume
II. 23 October 1962.
FM 27-10 Department of the Army Field Manual No. 27·10. THE LAW OF LAND WARFARE. 18 July 1956.
GWS Geneva Convention for the Amelioration of the Condition of the Wounded and Sick in Armed Forces in the Field. 12August 1949.
GWS Sea Geneva Convention for the Amelioration of the Condition of the Wounded. Sick. and Shipwrecked Members of Armed Forces at Sea, 12 August 1949.
GPW Geneva Convention Relative to the Treatment of Prisoners of War. 12 August
1949.

GC Geneva Convention Relative to the Protection of Civilian Persons in Time of War. 12 August 1949.
H.1I1

Hague Convention No. III Relative to the Opening of Hostilities, 18 October 1907.
H.IV Hague Convention No. IV Respecting the Laws and Customs of War on Land. 18 October 1907.
H.R. Annex to Hague Convention No. IV. 18 October 1907. embodying the Regulations Respecting the Laws and Customs of War on Land.
H.V Hague Convention No. V Respecting the Rights and Duties of Neutral Powers and Persons in Case of War on Land, 18 October
1907.

UCMJ UNIFORM CODE OF MILITARY JUSTICE.
Sectio
CASE STUDIES
O
PROTECTION OF WOUNDED PERSONNEL: PROTECTIVE COVERY OF WOUNDED
PROBLEM:
A machinelfUDoer in a forward poIIition

report8: to hia company commander: ·’1 see

about 10 enemy soldie” at the edge of the

(orest. They are wearina armband. and are

carryina off their wounded. Should I open

fire?” The company commander then

determines: The obeerved soldiers are

….earinl’ armbands with. red crescent on a

white backgroun~they aredisplaying.n••

with the same symbol and evacuating dead

and wounded.
AND MEDICAL

INSIGNIA, RE-

What actions should the company commander take and why?
DISCUSSION:
The company commander should order the machinegunner not to fire on the enemy soldiers. If the situation permits. he should order a general cease-fire so long as the enemy is recovering dead and wounded and not trying to gain a tactical advantage or otherwise improve his position.
The enemy soldiers wearing armbands are medical personnel. The red crescent on a white background is recognized by the terms of the 1949 Geneva Convention on Wounded and Sick (GWSj as the protective emblem and distinctive sign of the medical service of an armed force. The Convention also recognizes both the red cross and the red lion and sun on a white background as equivalent protective emblems. While the Red Shield of David is not recognized by the Convention,lsrael uses this symbol as the emblem of its medical service. The protective symbol may be displayed on all medical service flags and equipment and may be worn by medical personnel as an armband.
Generally, medical personnel and the wounded they are assisting may not be attacked if they are recognized as such, even if the protective emblem is not displayed. However, a rescue effort does not normally require a general cease·fire. Military targets, (i.e., other enemy soldiers engaged in combat) may be fired upon, even if recovery efforts are jeopardized. However, whenever circumstances permit, a cease-fire or truce should be agreed upon to allow the recovery, exchange, and evacuation of wounded from the battlefield. A commander may also declare a cease-fire on a unilateral basis.
REFERENCES:
DA Pam 27·1. pp. 31, 33 (GWS arts. 19,24·25).

DA Pam 27-161-2, pp. 110-112.

FM 27-10, paras 220-225.
M. GREENSPAN, THE MODERN LAWOF LAND WARFARE 72-7S, 88-9D(1959}(he,ein­after cited as GREENSPAN).
TC 27-1, Your Conduct in Combat, pp. 8-9.
o
FEIGNING SURRENDER; TREATMENT OF WOUNDED: PUNISHING AND REPORTING LAW OF WAR VIOLATIONS
PROBLEM:
[n close combat, infantryman C wounds an enemy soldier who falls to theground and, by raising his hands slightly, indicates that he is incapable of fighting. C turns from the wounded soldier to find cover from hostile fire close to the wounded soldier. The latter suddenly fires on C, misses, and then raises his hands and surrenders. C determines that the captured soldier had only a minor grazing wound, had been capableoffigbting. and had only feigned incapacity in order to continue fighting when a more favorable opportunity presented itself.
Did the enemy soldier violate the law of war? Explain. How shouldthis soldierbetreatedifheviolatedthelawofwar?What action should infantryman C take in regard to the violation?
DISCUSSION:
The enemy soldier committed a violation of infantryman C. In claiming this protection, the law of war by pretending to be disabled and however, he must refrain from further combat. If then continuing to fight when the opportunity he continues the fight, he acts treacherously, arose. The Hague Convention on the laws and provided the deception was intended from the usages of land warfare does permit ruses. outset. However, they may not take the form of trickery such as pretending to be defenseless white planning to make a surprise attack on someone, Although the wounded soldier apparently
who, complying with the law of war, has violated the law of war, he must be treated as a stopped fighting. In the case above, the prisoner of war. He may be tried, however, wounded soldier indicated, by raising his hands, under the Uniform Code of Military Justice that he had Quit fighting and claimed protection (UCMJ) for violating the lawof war. Infantryman from further injury under the law of war. C should follow routine PW procedures and Accordingly, he could no longer be fired upon by report the incident as required.
REFERENCES:
DA Pam 27-1, pp. 12, 97 (HR art. 23, GPW art. 82).
DA Pam 27·161·2, pp. 56·57, 88-89.
FM 27-10, para 50.
GREENSPAN, pp. 320-322.
TREATMENT OF WOUNDED AND MEDICAL PERSONNEL; STATUS OF MEDICAL VEHICLES AND MATERIAL: MISUSE OF PROTECTED STATUS AND PROTECTIVE INSIGNIA, PUNISHMENT
“,

PROBLEM:
A platoon leader reports to his commander: HAs my platoon was moving down the road, we overtook an enemy medical convoy displaying the Red Cross emblem. The convoy suddenly fired on my platoon. We immediately overcame the resistance and then determined that in addition to the seriously wounded. thetrucks in the convoy carried artil1ery ammunition. According to the captured medical personnel. they had attacked the platoon fearing that they would be punished if the ammunition was discovered.”
How s/wuld the following be treated and why: (1) The enemy medical personnel; (2) The wounded; (3) The captured material from the medical convoy; (4) The medical vehicles?
DISCUSSION:
Medical personnel who participate in combat transporting, or treating the sick and wounded. activities lose their protected status. In this Participating in combat activities inconsistent case, they become prisoners of war with no with their medical duties nullifies this claim to the special protection provided under protection. the Geneva Convention on Wounded and Sick (GWS). This protection is given only to soldiers Medical personnel can also be punished for who are exclusively searching for, collecting, misusing the Red Cross symbol which, under the GWS, signifies protected status. In the case above, there has been misuse of the Red Cross emblem both in the transporting of artillery ammunition by marked medical vehicles and in firing at the overtaking platoon. Thus, the captured medical personnel can be tried before a military court for both violations of the law of war.
The enemy wounded apparently have not participated either in the combat activities or in the transportation of ammunition. Consequently, they are not guilty of punishable conduct. As wounded, they must continue to be cared for and protected. They become prisoners of war, and their needs must be provided for by the capturing forces. Punishment based on the behavior of the medical personnel in violation of the law of war may not be directed against the wounded. The wounded should be taken under guard to the nearest aid station, given medical attention, and then evacuated from the battlefield.
Medical vehicles and other medical material in the convoy are protected from attack or misuse under the GWS. This protection is forfeited only if such property’s use is inconsistent with its humanitarian purpose. Small quantities of small arms and ammunition taken from the wounded, but not yet removed from the medical convoy, would not cause a loss of protected status. In the case above, however, large quantities of artillery ammunition were deliberately being transported. This was not merely incidental to the evacuation of the enemy wounded.
When medical transport or facilities are being misused, it is usually necessary to issue a warning to stop such misuse and to set a reasonable deadline for compliance prior to attacking the protected property. This requirement would ordinarily apply in the case of the transport of ammunition by medical vehicles before protection is forfeited. This protection, however, is lost immediately if, as in the present case, enemy fire is received from a protected facility, vehicle, or convoy. In such cases, a prior warning is impractical. Therefore, to promptly return the fire is permissible even though the nonparticipating wounded are thereby endangered. Responsibility for this risk lies with the party which has misused the protected property and protective emblem.
The material of mobile medical units will continue to be used to assist the sick and wounded. This applies even though a medical unit has forfeited its protection against attack. The ban on destroying or using such material for purposes other than originally intended has been declared in the interest of all sick and wounded and is not affected by the unit’s forfeiture of its protection. Accordingly, the medical material which was found in the case above must continue to be used for the care of the enemy wounded until such time as their medical needs are adequately provided for from other sources.
On the other hand, the captured medical transport vehicles become property of the capturing forces and may be used by them for any purpose. But before they are employed for other purposes, the wounded found in the vehicles must either be taken to a military hospital or aid station, or be transferred to other vehicles. In the present case, since seriously wounded personnel are involved, their transfer to other vehicles is inadvisable. They should be transported directly to an aid station or hospital in the captured vehicles. These vehicles may then be used by the captor for his own purpose.
REFERENCES:

DA Pam 27-1. PP. 12, 31-35 (HR art. 23(f), GWS arts. 19-22,24-25,28-29).

DA Pam 27-161-2, pp,. 53, 106-107.

FM 27·10, paras 55,215,217,222-223,226,230,236.

GREENSPAN, pp. 72-75, 82-90.
O
STATUS AND TREATMENT OF MEDICAL FACILITIES AND ARMED MEDICAL PERSON­NEL: CONFISCATION OF WEAPONS
.

PROBLEM:
A company commander reports to his battalion commander: •• One of my platoons overran an enemy medical clearing station. Terrain conditions caused them to 88sume positions near the clearingstation. A number of armed enemy medical personnel asked my platoon leader to leave the vicinity of the clearing station. The platoon leader had the clearing station searched. Several small arms were found. Some belonged to the medical personnel and some apparently bad been taken (rom tbe wounded. All weapons were confiscated. Can my platoon remain in position near the clearing station? What is tbe status of the armed enemy medical personnel?”
‘l •
How should the battalion commander respond?
OISCUSSION:
A medical clearing station must be spared and protected by all parties involved in conflict. The placement of combat positions near the clearing station exposes it to the risk of being hit during combat operations. For this reason, a certain distance should be maintained between combat positions and the protected facility. Only for reasons of military necessity, (J:e., closing a gap in the front lines or the tactical need to occupy a section of terrain), may the vicinity of the medical clearing station be occupied for combat purposes. It is a violation of the law of war to take positions near a medical clearing station for protection from the enemy because of the station’s protected status.
A medical clearing station does not lose its protected status because its personnel are armed or because weapons taken from the wounded have not yet been removed from the facility. Medical personnel do not forfeit their protected status because they carry weapons.
+

Such weapons may be used by the medical personnel to defend themselves, the wounded, and the medical facility against attack by anyone violating the law of war. They may not be used to resist capture by lawful combatants. However, any weapons found in a medical facility can be confiscated.
In the case above, it is apparent that there is a tactical need to occupy terrain near the clearing station. Therefore, unless the situation permits its relocation, it will be necessary to accept a risk that the clearing station may be hit during combat activities. The battalion commander should direct his platoon to remain in position near the clearing station so long as it is tactically necessary. He should direct that all confiscated weapons be retained by the capturing unit and that medical personnel be permitted to continue their duties. Finally, he should tell the company commander that a number of soldiers will be
assigned  from  the  battalion  to  guard  the  battalion  to  remove  the  wounded  through
clearing station and its occupants, Also. as soon  normal  medical  channels  and  the  medical
as possible. arrangements will be made by the  personnel through PW channels.

REFERENCES:
DA Pam 27-1. pp. 12. 31-33 (HR art. 23(f). GWS arts. 19. 22. 24).

FM 27-10. paras. 220. 223. 225.
GREENSPAN, pp. 83-84.
STATUS AND USE OF CAPTURED MEDICAL•
VEHICLES AND OTHER MATERIAL: REMOVAL OF PROTECTIVE AND NATIONAL INSIGNIA
PROBLEM:
A company occupies a village which contains an enemy military hospital. The company commander orders one platoon leader to reconnoiter beyond the village. The platoon leader takes an ambulance from tbe hospital, superficially covers its protective Red Cross emblems with mud. and uses the vehicle to carry out his mission.
Howslwuldtheplatoonleader’s actions bejudgedunderthelaw ofwar?
DISCUSSION:
Captured medical transport vehicles become transport whose protective emblem has only the property of the captor and can be used at his been soiled during normal use. This impression discretion. provided he supplies the needs of would be supported by the usually distinctive any captured enemy sick and wounded. The use design of such vehicles. of such vehicles for combat purposes is only permissible if the protective emblem has first In the above case, it is apparent that the Red been removed. To do otherwise would be Cross emblems on the captured medical vehicle considered misuse of the protective emblem. were not properly covered or eliminated before The removal must be done so that no part of the its use for a combat-related purpose. Therefore, protective emblem remains visible orcan still be the platoon leader could be found in violation of recognized under any camouflage.If not, the the law of war for misusing a protective vehicle could be thought to be a medical emblem.
REFERENCES: DA Pam 27-1. pp. 12. 41 (HR art. 23, GWS art. 53). DA Pam 27·161-2. pp. 173. 176-177. FM 27-10, paras 234.236. GREENSPAN, pp. 85, 318-321.
o
CAMOUFLAGING PROTECTIVE EMBLEMS
PROBLEM:
A division is to be moved at night (rom the rear to a stagingarea. The chiefofstaffhas reservation. about moving medical facilities, transport vehicles. and mobile units withthedivision, since tbeconspicuoU8 protective emblem (red er08S on a white background) makes it easier (or enemy air reconnaissance to detect movement. Nevertheless. the division commander insists upon taking medical support and orders tbe protective emblem to be camouflaged on all such facilities, transport vehicles, and mobile units.
Is the commander’s action permissible under the law ofwar? If so, whnt, ifany, risks are involved? Expfuin your answers.
DISCUSSION:
The division commander may camouflage the Be aware, though, that the risk of attack on medical facilities, vehicles. and mobile units the medical facilities, equipment, and material which will accompany the division. Normally. may be increased. Medical facilities, equipment, these objects are marked to indicate their material. and personnel recognized as such, protected status. However, if it is likely that the may not be attacked even if not marked with a enemy wilt gain intelligence from the visible conspicuous protective emblem. However. this presence of medical facilities, equipment, and protection, as a rule, can only be achieved by the material. then camouflaging the protective display of these distinctive markings. Without emblem is permissible. In the case above, there them, it is difficult to distinguish between is a reasonable chance that the division’s legitimate military targets and protected movement to the staging area will be more objects. In the present case, there is a danger easily detected if the protective emblems are not that the camouflaged medical convoy will be camouflaged. considered 8 combat unit subject to attack.
REFERENCES:
DA Pam 27-1, pp. 37-39 (GWS arts. 39, 42).
DA Pam 27·161·2, p. 109.
FM 27·10, para 242.
GREENSPAN, 00. 347-348n. 137.
CONCEPT, STATUS, AND TREATMENT OF
o SHIPWRECKED PERSONNEL: THE PERMIS­SIBILITY OF FIRING ON ENEMY PERSONNEL OF SUNKEN LANDING CRAFT
PROBLEM:
DISCUSSION:
The order to fire on the enemy swimming toward the beachhead from the sunken landing craft is lawful.
A shipwreck can result from any cause (e.g.• ocean conditions. enemy action). It includes forced landings at sea by or from aircraft. The term “shipwrecked personnel” assumes that such personnel are helplessly exposed to the natural forces of the seas and that they require aid from others in order to overcome their defenseless state. Accordingly, shipwrecked personnel have a protected status and may not be attacked.
However. as in the case of wounded combatants. the protection given to shipwrecked soldiers depends on their stopping combat activities. The protected status is given only to soldiers who surrender or cease to fight because of wounds, illness. or shipwreck. If the soldier continues to fight, he loses his protected status and may be attacked.
In the present case, a decision must be made. Are the soldiers of the sunken landing crah swimming solely to rescue themselves? Or, like the enemy in the landing craft not sunk, are they attempting to continue their combat mission by reaching their beachhead? Enemy paratroops may be fired upon while descending during a combat operation, despite their relatively defenseless position; enemy soldiers may be engaged if they are trying to carry out their mission of reaching a beachhead by swimming ashore after their landing crah has been sunk.
The fact that the enemy soldiers were swimming towards the beachhead. instead of waiting to be rescued or swimming to vessels in the area, strongly indicates that they were trying to join their comrades already ashore and continue the fight. Moreover. the soldiers’ proximity to, and advance toward, their beach­head demonstrates they were not defenseless and in need of help. On the contrary. it is very closeness to the beachhead and their comrades. likely that they would resist any attempt by the Under the law of war. therefore. these soldiers enemy to rescue them considering their do not represent shipwrecked personnel.
REFERENCES:

DA Pam 27-1, pp 12,48-49.52 (HR art 23(c). GWS SEA arts 3.12).
FM 27-10, paras 29. 31.
GREENSPAN. pp 72n. 24. 73.

STATUS AND TREATMENT OF OCCUPANTS OF
o DISABLED COMBAT VEHICLES
PROBLEM:
Sergeant K di••bled an enemy ta.nlL The tan..k. crew climbed out and bel’aD runniDI’ toward their own liDee, t•..Id.D1′ with them. wounded eoldier. Sergeant K rll’ed on the fleeinl’ enemy -.nd innicted eNualtin. A. Sergeant K advanced on the enemy, tbe survivors raised their banm,. Only tben.did Sergeant K cease firinl’. _.~…­
J'””‘~1f:;’-‘”‘.

~…….

A
1′,,…. ~.’ <I,Y~..’tIW. I ‘.. I··
HasSergeantKactedinviolationofthelawofwar? Why,orwhynot?
DISCUSSION:
Sergeant K has not violated the law of war. It is not apparent that Sergeant K directed his fire at the wounded soldier. The presence of the wounded soldier does not prevent one from firing on the unwounded enemy soldiers. A wounded soldier in a combat area continues to be exposed to the risks and effects of the fire directed at other enemy.
Unwounded soldiers are not protected from further attack merely because their vehicle became disabled. It is true that the enemy who becomes shipwrecked by the sinking of his vessel during combat or one who parachutes from a disabled aircraft in an emergency may not be fired upon. However, until the contrary is indicated. a soldier may assume that the crew of a combat vehicle will continue to fight when outside their vehicle. The disabling of a military vehicle does not generally indicate that the crew is defenseless. Only the enemy who clearly indicates his desire to surrender is protected from further attack. In the present case, the tank crew continued 10 resist capture by trying to flee to their own lines. Therefore, they could be fired on until they raised their hands to surrender.
REFERENCES:

DA Pam 27-1. p 12 (HR an 23{c)).

FM 27-10, para 225b.

GREENSPAN. pp 72·73.
SURRENDER OF ENEMY PERSONNEL: PRE·
o CAUTIONARY MEASURES IN THE SURRENDER OF APPROACHING ARMED ENEMY PERSONNEL
PROBLEM:
While on guard duty. Private L is ap­proached by two armed enemy soldiers who wave pieces of white cloth and signal not to [!Te. He commands the enemy soldiers to throwaway their weapons and raise their hands. They do not obey the command, although they evidently understand iL Private L then (“Ires a warning shot and again gives the command. When the enemy soldiers do not obey but continue to advance, hefires andwoundsoneofthesoldiers.Then the other obeys his command.
Has Private L acted lawfully? Explain.
In the present case, despite the display of a
DISCUSSION:
Private l has acted lawfully under the circumstances. The killing or wounding of an enemy who is trying to surrender is a serious violation of the law of war. Normally, the enemy may be fired on without warning.  Showing a white flag in conjun acts (e.g.. throwing indicates surrender.  down  weapons) ction with  other also

However, once a soldier has stopped fighting white flag, the intentions of the approachingbecause of wounds. illness, or shipwreck, or has enemy soldiers were not clear, as they did not surrendered, he is protected. The soldier discard their weapons. Private L acted correctly becomes a prisoner of war as soon as he in commanding them to throw down theirsurrenders or otherwise comes under the weapons and raise their hands. Since thecontrol of the enemy. As SUCh. he acquires a enemy soldiers continued to advance withspecial status which must be respected in all weapons in hand and then disregarded a
circumstances.
warning shot and a second command. it may
Surrender is not required to take any specific be reasonably assumed that they did not wish to form. Usually. a surrendering soldier will surrender. Private L could. and did. use that discard his weapon and raise his hands. amount of force necessary to stop their advance.
REFERENCES:
OA Pam 27·1, p 12 (HR art 23 lc. fl).
FM 27-10. paras SO, 52-53, 84, 467. 478.
KILLING OR WOUNDING OF SURRENDERING ENEMY PERSONNEL; THE DEFENSE OF SELF­DEFENSE: PUNISHMENT OF PRISONERS OF WAR FOR PRYOR CRIMINAL ACTS
PROBLEM:
A prisoner i. accused by the detaining power of violating the law of war. An investigation revealed the following: The prisoner, a seaman, was stationed aboard a torpedo boat which had engal’ed an enemy minesweeper and disabled it. The captain of the minesweeper ordered hi. men to surrender and raised a white flag 8S 8signof the surrender. The enemy vessel was boarded by a party from the torpedo boat. The accused seaman, who wu a member of the boardingparty, was ordered tocbeck the captured vessel’s engine room. He
discovered an enemy seaman who was
attempting to scuttle the captured vessel. The accused twice ordered the enemy seaman to stop and surrender. Although he understood the orders, the enemy seaman continued his attempt to scuttle the vessel. The accused then shot and killed the enemy seaman. A month later the accused was captured during a landing operation.
Can the detaining power lawfully try the prisoner for a killing committed prior to his capture? If so, does the accused lose his prisonerofwar status?Has theprisonerviolatedthe lawofwar? Explain.
DISCUSSION:
If there is sufficient evidence, a prisoner can surrender and displayed the white flag, his crew be tried by the detaining power for a criminal act was no longer authorized to engage in combat committed before his capture. However, the activities. The torpedo boat was under a prisoner does not lose his protected status. He corresponding obligation to cease combat must be treated as a prisoner of war, even if activities against the enemy minesweeper. found guilty of a crime and punished. Nevertheless. the crew of the torpedo boat
In the present case the accused seaman has might defend against further combat activities not violated the law of war. From the moment carried out by the members of the crew of the the captain of the minesweeper ordered minesweeper in spite of the surrender. The enemy seaman’s attempt to scunle the minesweeper was such an activity. The attempt, whether authorized or not, may be suppressed by all lawful means, including the use of deadly force, if necessary. Thus, the accused could fire on the enemy seaman, especially since the latter continued despite being twice warned to cease.
REFERENCES: OA Pam 27-1. pp 12, 98 (HR art 23(f), GPW art 851.
FM 27-10, para 50, 161 c.
GREENSPAN. pp 320-321.
STATUS AND TREATMENT OF PRISONERS OF WAR: CONFISCATION OF PAPERS, PERSONAL EFFECTS, AND IDENTIFICATION, KILLING OR WOUNDING PRISONERS OF WAR, PREVENTING ATTEMPTED ESCAPES
PROBLEM:
An NCO reports: “I have captured five enemy soldien and have taken from them all papen and identification. Two or the pri80nen attempted escape. One wu killed, and the other wu wounded and recaptured. According to another prisoner, the wounded prisoner shot six PWs two days ago.”
“­” ••

What melUlures should the commander take? Explain.
DISCUSSION:
The commander should have the prisoners’ identification and personal papers returned to them after inspection. Purely personal eHects may not be confiscated from prisoners of war. However, the seizure of documents and other papers having an intelligence value is permissible. In order to separate such material from purely personal eHects. all items may be seized temporarity for inspection. A prisoner’s idontification may not be confiscated. Normally, he need only show it and should be in possession of it at all times. However, if an identity document is not simply an 10 and contains additional information of an intelligence value, it may be seized. In such a case, a replacement identity document must be prepared and issued to the prisoner as soon as possible.
The commander should also initiate an investigation into the attempted escape. Such an investigation must be conducted whenever a prisoner of war is killed or seriously wounded. The killing or wounding of prisoners of war, normally aserious violation of the laws of war, is justified when absolutely necessary to prevent escape, provided the force used is not excessive given the circumstances.
The commander should investigate the alleged killing of PWs by the recaptured wounded prisoner. Although this prisoner must be treated as a prisoner of war. he may be tried by a court-martial for a war crime committed before his capture. A report of this investigation should then be forwarded through channels for action.
REFERENCES:
DA Pam 27-1. pp 9. 73-75. 98. 100. 110-111 (HR art8. GPW arts 17-18. 85. 92-93. , 20·121).
FM 27-10, paras 85.94.
GREENSPAN, pp 105-106, 131-142.
~    TREATMENT OF PRISONERS OF WAR: CONFIS­W     CATION OF SUPPLIES AND EQUIPMENT FOR MILITARY PURPOSES, INTERROGATION BY
THREAT, FORCED PRISONERS

,~~.~~
.,,—~ ~-=:::..
.. -~–. ,
:~–. :.~
–,­

.I
LABOR, EVACUATION OF
PROBLEM:
A company commander reports to bat­talion: liMy company has captured 78 enemy soldiers. I intend to confiscate personal field rations, winter coat.s, shelter halves, and first-aid kits. These items are urgently needed by my troops. Our own medical and food suppliesareexhausted, and we have no winter coats or shelter halves to protect us from the cold. The prisoners have ample food supplies and will soon be moved to the rear where they will have their housing and other needs provided by our forces, It seems that my company’ssituation could be eased without making the prisoners’ condition appreciably more difficult.
“I also need information regarding troop strength in my sector. The prisoners are not willing to give any information beyond their name, rank, date of birth. and service number. The desired information might be obtained by threatening to send the prisoners back to theirown forces, since the enemy threatens capital punishment for soldiers who allow themselves to be captured.
“I intend to use prisoners in constructing reserve fortifications in the rear of my defensive position.
“Request instructionson how to proceed in the above·mentioned matters.”
How s/wuld the battalion commander respond?
DISCUSSION:
The battalion commander should prohibit the confiscation of winter coats from the prisoners at this time. He should prohibit the taking of shelter halves until the prisoners are actually moved to the rear and placed in housing. As a rule. prisoners of war must remain in possession of all effects and articles of personal use (e.g.. clothing, food. and personal protection). This is true even though such articles are regularly issued mititaryequipment. Although the captor may have a need for such items. confiscation is prohibited unless the prisoners have no need for the articles or satisfactory substitutes are provided.
The battalion commander may permit the taking of some of the first-aid kits. Normally. items of this nature cannot be confiscated because they are considered to be articles used for the personal protection of prisoners of war. However, if medical aid can be provided by other means, or if some lesser quantity of the first-aid kits would provide adequate protection under the circumstances, then it is permissible to use a number of the kits to attend to friendly wounded. In the present case, once evacuation of the prisoners to a camp outside the combat zone begins, only a supply of the kits which would be adequate to cover emergencies during the evacuation need be left with the prisoners. The excess may be used in the treatment of the captor’s wounded.
The battalion commander should also only permit the confiscation of excess food supplies. An adequate supply of field rations must be left with the prisoners until such time as these provisions are supplied from other sources.
The battalion commander should not allow any threats to be made against the prisoners to determine the size of the enemy force in the company’s sector. Prisoners of war may not be forced by any means to give information to the enemy. They are required to give only their name, rank, service number. and date of birth. In the case above. a threat to send them back to their own forces if the desired information is not given would represent interrogation by Threat, which is unlawful.
Finally, the battalion commander should prohibit the use of a prisoner of war work force to construct the company’s reserve fortification. Such employment would violate the law of war as prisoners of war must not be needlessly exposed to danger while awaiting evacuation from a fighting zone. They must be evacuated as soon as possible to camps situated in an area far enough from a combat zone forthem to beout of danger. Moreover. digging fortifications (except shelters for their own protection) is not one of the classes of work which, under the provisions of GPW Article 50, prisoners of war may be compelled to perform. In no event may they be compelled to perform work of a military character or purpose against their own armed forces. Finally, a prisoner of war may not be
employed in unhealthy or dangerous labor unless he volunteers for such work. In the present case, the construction of field fortifications in a combat zone would constitute dangerous work.
REFERENCES: DA Pam 27-1, pp 72·76(GPW arts 13,15,17-20.23.49.50, and 53). FM 27-10, paras 93-96, 125·138. GREENSPAN, pp ’02·’07, ‘1’-1 ‘3.
TREATMENT OF PRISONERS OF WAR: QUARTERS, SEGREGATION, EVACUATION, INTERROGATION, BONDAGE
PROBLEM:
A platoon leader report. the foUowinlJ to his company commander: “My platoon captured (our enemy soldiers. I bad them placed in • baeement under pard. A fight erupted amona the pri80DeJ’~ and ] had to order the pardi to break it up. One prisoner had accuaed another of beiD” a ‘major on a special miNion’ and insisted that the individual had recently been a prisoner of war. The accused prisoner carried no insignia of rank and refused to state his rank. In an attempt to get him to talk, I ordered that he be separated (rom the other prisoners, bound, and isolated in anotber part ofthe basement. I will shortly begin my interrogation of him. [ also intend to evacuate the prisoners tothe rear afterdark. The route i. under enemy observation by day, and any movement cornea under immediate enemy fire.”
-. .»)
.;:; )
C_I )
~·C
Is theplatoon leader’s conductproperaccordingto thelaw ofwar?
DISCUSSION:
The temporary confinement of the prisoners is permissible. The laws of warfare concerning the housing of prisoners of war only apply to quartering in a prisoner of war camp. In the combat zone, immediately after capture, the primary consideration is to house the prisoners so they are protected from the effects of combat operations and cannot escape. As long as the type of temporary quarters does not endanger either the lives or the health of the prisoners, or represent a form of punishment, it is not objectionable under the law of war. In the above case, the quartering in a basement was both practical and lawful.
It was also permissible to detain the prisoners until dark, since moving them to the rear by day would expose them to great danger.
Fights among prisoners of war are to be prevented in order to maintain discipline and to preserve their health and safety. Prisoners of war can be isolated to prevent fights. In the present case, it is likely that such fights would occur.
No threat or force of any kind can be applied to prisoners to obtain information from them. This includes information which a prisoner is required to give under the law of war (I:e., name, rank., service number. and date o( birth).
In the case above, the prisoner who refused to give his rank is only subject to the loss of advantages to which he would otherwise be entitled because of rank and position. Binding and interrogating him in order to obtain his rank is an impermissible act of force. Since he had it was necessary to prevent another escape. been identified as being a prior escapee. binding However. this was not the reason given for the him temporarily would have been permissible if restraint.
REFERENCES:
DA Pam 27·1, pp 72·75 (GPW arts 13. 17. 19.20).
FM 27-10. paras 89. 93.
MISTREATMENT OF PRISONERS OF WAR: CONFISCATION OF PERSONAL ARTICLES AND EQUIPMENT, INTERROGATION BY FORCE, REPRISALS, SUMMARY PUNISHMENT
PROBLEM:
Soldier Jones was captured by the enemy. However. before being transported to a prisoner o( war collecting point, he escaped and made his way back to his unit. He reported that he was mistreated by the enemy. ]n particular, all his personal possessions were confiscated, and he was beaten in an attempt to force him to yield information on troop strength and equip­menL Later, when enemy soldiers are taken prisoner, members of Jones’ unit take the (ollowing actions:

Treat the prisoners with equal

harshneu,

Confiscate the prisoners’ personal

pos8e88ions, food, and luxury items,

Force the prisoners to yield

information on enemy troop strength

and equipment, using physical

mistreatment when necessary.
What measures slwuld the commander ofJones’ unit take? Why? Whatfurther action,ifany, slwuldhetakeiftheprisonersinclude tlwse wlw had mistreated Jones?
DISCUSSION:
The commander should prohibit the members higher headquarters. It is apparent that the of his unit from carrying out the acts listed above enemy treated Jones in violation of the law of against the prisoners and order the immediate war. As a prisoner of war. Jones should have evacuation of the prisoners to a collecting point been allowed to retain those personal articles in the rear. He should also initiate appropriate and effects which served to clothe. feed. and disciplinary action and report the incident to protect him. Moreover. no forcible measures
should have been taken aRainst Jones to obtain channels a detailed report of the violations. information from him. Nevertheless, this Prisoners who violate the law of war before conduct in violation of the law of war may not capture may be tried for such violations by the be retaliated against with one’s own unlawful detaining power before a court-martial. treatment of prisoners of war. Reprisals against However, these prisoners continue to retain prisoners of war are specifically prohibited. their protected status as prisoners of war. even if convicted and sentenced. Independent or If the prisoners include those who have summary actions directed against them by the mistreated Jones, then the commander should captors are expressly prohibited by the law of
also prepare and forward through military war.
REFERENCES: DA Pam 27-1. pp 72-75, 98 (GPW arts 13, 17·18, 85).
DA Pam 27-161-2, pp 85-90.
FM 27-10. paras 93,161, 497c.
CONDUCT IN CAPrIVITY: DISPOSAL OF ITEMS POTENTIALLY USEFUL TO THE ENEMY WAR EFFORT, CONFISCATION OF EQUIPMENT, PAPERS, AND PERSONAL EFFECTS, INTERROGATION BY FORCE, PROTESTING MISTREATMENT
PROBLEM:
Lieutenant X is captured by the enemy. The following items are taken from him: weapons; binoculars; a message-form pouch containing mission orders. a number of messages and situation diagrams; personal correspondence; family photos, a private war diary; wristwatch; engagement ring; identification tags; and money. The prisoner is questioned about the designation. breakdown. strength, armament, and position of his unit. He is ordered to give information concerning his own mission and to state the namesofhis brigade anddivision
,-••
commanders. The prisoner states that he is a member of the 24th Infantry Battalion and gives information on the breakdown and strength ofhis platoon. A threat isthen made to chop offhis fingers if he does not give the names of his brigade and division commanders. The threat is followed by several knife pricks to one of his arms,
~ ( ••• ‘” j,         causin-g it to bleed. Lieutenant X then gives two wrong names and complains of his mistreatment.
24

Has Lieutenant X conducted himself properly under the circumstances? Explain. What protests, if any, should be made concerning the treatment he has received?
DISCUSSION:
Before being captured, Lieutenant X should including that which he is required to give under have tried to destroy, or otherwise dispose of. the laws of war (i,e” name, rank, service his weapons and any equipment. documents, number, and date of birth), He should further and papers (e.g., his mission orders, messages, protest that personal items and effects, such as situation diagrams. private war diary), or other his ,.-..ristwatch, family photos, personal items which would be useful to the enemy’swar correspondence, and engagement ring, as well effort. When interrogated, he should have given as his identification tags, may not be only his name, rank, service number. and date of confiscated. Such items should have been birth. Though the enemy acted unlawfully in returned to him after being inspected for any forcing him to give additional information, military intelligence which they might have Lieutenant X may have. by giving some of the contained. additional information. violated the criminal
On the other hand, to confiscate his weapons, laws of his own country. As such, he may be binoculars, message-form pouch and itssubject to punishment upon repatriation.
contents, the war diary, and his money was
Lieutenant X should protest. As a prisoner of permissible. The money, however, should have war, he may not be physically mistreated or been taken only when ordered by an oHicer and forced in any way to yield any information, after receipt had been given for it.
REFERENCES: DA Pam 27-1, pp 72-75 (GPW arts 13, 17-18). FM 27-10, paras 93-94a.
CONDUCT IN CAPTIVITY: RESISTING ENEMY INTERROGATION ATTEMPTS, PROVIDING INFORMATION TO THE ENEMY, BOMBARDMENT OFVIUAGES
PROBLEM:
Sergeant M is captured. The interrogating

,

enemy officer. to whom Sergeant M gave his
name, rank, date of birth, and service

number, wants more information and

threatens to send him before a military court …

for violating tbe law of war if he does not ~,~,,~.~o..l~

comply, He accuses Sergeant M offiring into .”

a defended village with his tank. destroying ~}J.

houses and killing civilians in the process, ~I

The enemy officer considers Sergeant M’s II

behavior to be in violation oithe law ofwar.
Has the interrogating officer acted in w:cordance with the law of war? Has Sergeant M violated the law of war? How should Sergeant M conduct himself under the circumstances? Explain all an.swers.
DISCUSSION:
The interrogating officer has not acted in destruction does not make the bombardment accordance with the laws of war. A prisoner of unlawful, provided the fire is directed at, and is war only must give his name, rank, service intended for, military targets. number, and date of birth. Neither physical nor
Sergeant M should not give any additional mental coercion may be used against him to information to the enemy, regardless of theobtain any information. In the present case, the threats made against him. This obligation is not threat of a criminal trial represents an attempt to affected by any Question concerning theforce information and is prohibited. This is so lawfulness of the Sergeant’s action against theeven assuming the accused actually committed village. For a US serviceman, any statements an act in violation of the law of war.
which provide the enemy with military
It does not appear that Sergeant M has acted information, or otherwise aid in their war effort, in violation of the law of war. The village was are offenses punishable under the Uniform defended and could therefore be fired upon. The Code of Military Justice. Sergeant M should killing of civilians and the destruction of their only point out that he has acted in compliance homes are generally unavoidable when military with the law of war and is therefore not subject targets in towns are fired upon. Such killing or to prosecution.
REFERENCES:
DA Pam 27·1, pp 73-74,153 (GPW art 17, GC art 53).
FM 27-10, paras 42. 93.
UCMJ art 104{2).

PROTECTED STATUS OF CIVILIANS: CIVILIAN PARTICIPATION IN RELIEF AND RESCUE EFFORTS, THE PERMISSIBILITY OF FORCEFUL MEASURES TO IMPLEMENT AND ENFORCE OCCUPANT ORDERS, COLLECTIVE PUNISHMENT, CURFEWS, FORCEFUL EVACUATION
PROBLEM:
A battalion penetrates a city durin, a heavy engagement. The enemy i. .till offeringtough rni.tancein isolatedpocket8. The battalion has many wounded and not enough medical peraonnel ormaterial tocare for them. Therefore, the battalion com­mander orden the civilian population to collect the wounded and give them shelter, care, and medical attention. The residents, ineluding a physician, refuse to comply with theorder.Theysayongoingcombataetivities would make collection of the wounded dangeroWi and cause further losses among the civilian population. Moreover, there are many wounded among the civilian popula· tion to becared for. Thebattalioncommander intends to implement strong me88ures against members of the civilian population who do notcomply. Healsointendsto impose a curfewandforciblyevacuateportionsofthe city in response to what he considers insubordinate behavior.
,

Arethe battalioncommander’sactions legalunderthelawofwar?
27
DISCUSSION:
In occupied territories, force may be used against civilian populations only to implement lawful orders of the military. Although the city in the present case is still contested and may not be considered an occupied territory, the principle applies to combat areas. Forceful measures that may be taken against insubordinate inhabitants include their internment or detention. However, like reprisals. collective punishment against the civilian population is not permitted.
The forceful evacuation of sections of the city must be excluded from the planned measures from the outset. Though forceful evacuation of portions of a city would be permissible in the interest of the population’s safety or because of pressing military needs. neither of these reasons appears to exist in the case above. Instead, the measure is meant to be a form of collective punishment and is therefore not permissible.
A curfew likewise would be permissible as a temporary security measure. In the present case, however, it is also intended to be a form of collective punishment and is therefore not permissible.
Punishing insubordinate civilians or applying some other form of force presupposes that the order of the battalion commander was lawful. According to Article 18 of the Geneva Convention on Wounded and Sick in the Field, a military authority can call upon local inhabitants to voluntarily participate in the rescue and care of the wounded. Local inhabitants can be used against their will, though, for certain types of work covered by provisions of the Geneva Civilians Convention. Under these provisions, it is permissible to employ civilians over 18 years of age in work which fulfills the medical needs of the military, provided it is not potentially dangerous totheir health or safety. Forexample, the military can require civilians to serve in military hospitals and to participate in the rescue and care of wounded personnel. Such employment does not violate the rule which forbids civilians to take part in all combat or combat-related activities.
In the present case, however, the reasons presented by the local civilian population preclude their employment in rescuing the wounded soldiers. Employing the civilians to rescue the wounded during combat would expose them to great danger. Furthermore, if civilian physicians and other medical personnel are needed to care for the civilian wounded. the military may not prevent them from fulfilling their normal duties. Article 56 of the Civilians Convention specifically requires the military to allow such medical personnel to carry out their tasks in providing medical care for the civilian population. Article 57 of the Civilians Convention gives the civilian population priority in the use of civilian medical facilities.
Therefore, the forcible measures threatened by the battalion commander may not be carried out against members of the civilian population. His acts are not in accordance with the law of war, and he may only call upon the local inhabitants to voluntarily collect, shelter, and care for his wounded.
REFERENCES:

DAPam27-1,pp31, 144-146, 150-153(GWSart18.GCarts27, 31,33,49, 51,55·57).

FM 27-10, paras 266. 270,272.

GREENSPAN, PP 170-171, 267-268.
CIVILIAN EVACUATION FROM COMBAT
AREAS: IMPLEMENTING ORDERS AND PROCEDURES, PUNISHMENT FOR NON· COMPLIANCE
PROBLEM:
In preparingto defend a heavily populated village. a brigade commander desires to clear the battle area ofremaining civilians. The evacuation is necessary for urgent military reasons and for the safety of the local populace. The commander directs his 81 to drofl a suitable order. The latter submits the following draft:
UA Company, 1st Bn, shall immediately dispatch five 2-man teams to announce the evacuation by means of poslers. The A -,”””,./ Company CO shall personally notify the mayor. Notificationofthemayoranddisplay of the announcement shall be completed by 2400 hours today. Evacuation shall begin at 0600 and be completed by 1800 hours tomorrow. The road to city 0 shall be kept clear (or this purpose. Forcible transport shall be implemented if the civilian population refuses to be evacuated. In addition, the houses of individuals who refuse to be evacuated shall be destroyed. Special orders shall be issued at the proper time. Special detachments will be available
..

after 0600 hours tomorrow to carry out punitive measures if necessary.”
What reservations should the company commander have concerning the order as drafted? How should the order be modified?
DISCUSSION:
Generally, all individual or mass evacuations abide by these orders. However, any of civilians by force and the displacement of punishment must be left to the judgment of a protected individuals in a combat area are military court of the occupying forces.
prohibited. However. the military can
Punishment for not obeying lawful
implement complete or partial evacuation of a implementing orders cannot be imposedspecific region for urgent military reasons or for summarily. Measures designed to intimidate or the safety of local inhabitants. The evacuation terrorize the civilian populace are prohibited. In must be coordinated by major command the case above, it is therefore unlawful toauthorities. In the case above. evacuation is threaten the destruction of houses for necessary both for urgent military reasons (ie.,
noncompliance. Moreover, the deliberate
combat preparations, maintenance ofsecrecy).
destruction of civilian homes itself is a violation and for the safety of the local populace (ie.•
of the law of war in the absence of a clear
protection from anticipated combat operations).
showing of a legitimate military necessity.
Civilians and other protected persons may not be detained in an area which is particularly The draft order should be modified to exposed to the dangers of war. In carrying out eliminate all references to the threatened the evacuation, the military must also see that destruction of civilian homes. However, the the needs of the evacuated are supplied and that local inhabitants should still be warned that they have suitable shelter. individuals refusing to obey the evacuation
order will be subject to judicial punishment. The
A lawful evacuation can be implemented by question of evacuation should be coordinated force if the civilian populace does not obey with higher military authorities, and implementing orders. Noncomplying arrangements should be made for the care and inhabitants may also bepunishedforrefusing to relocation of all displaced persons.
REFERENCES:
DA Pam 27-1. pp 15().-151 (GC arts 49, 53).
DA Pam 27·161·2, p 168.
FM 27-10, paras 382, 393.
TREATMENT OF CIVILIAN POPULATION IN OCCUPIED AREAS: CIVIUAN RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACTS OF RESISTANCE FIGHTERS, COLLECTIVE PUNISHMENT, REPRISALS
PROBLEM:
A platoon occupied an enemy village. It found that the village contained no enemy soldiers. The populace was ordered to turn over all weapons. No weapons were turned over and none were found.. Later, a equad leader wu sbot in the back, praumably by • resident of the village. Mem.bere of the platoon immediately conducted a house search and rounded up a number ofcivilians.
3D
It was certain that no one bad been able to escape before or during tbe searcb.
Certain soldiers now urge their platoon leader to order the civilians to point out the perpetrator and threaten them with execution if they refuse. Some demand that three civilians be sbot in retaliation for the murder of tbeir comrade and that the bouse from which the shot came be burned.
Are the denuuuls of the soldiers lawful? What action should the
plutoon leader take?
DISCUSSION:
Even assuming the individual who killed the squad leader is among the civilians collected. punishing all for the act of the one is prohibited. Collective punishment violates the law of war. No one may be punished for an act for which he is not personally responsible. Only if it can be determined that all of the collected civilians were not only concealing the perpetrator but also involved in the killing could they all be held accountable.ln any case, determining the guilty party and his punishment is the responsibility of a properly constituted military court. Executions without trial by a regularly constituted court are in violation of the law of war.
It is unlawful to apply physical or mental coercion to protected civilians to obtain information from them. Just the threat of shooting the civilians who do not comply would be in violation of the law of war.
The execution of the three civilians in retaliation for the ~hooting of the soldier and the burning of the house from which the shot came would also be unlawful. Reprisals in occupied territory against civilians and their property are forbidden under the law of war.
The platoon leader should prohibit all demands and should deliver any persons suspected of commitling or participating in the killing to a collecting point. along with a detailed report of the incident.
REFERENCES:
DA Pam 27-1, PP 137, 145-1461GC arts 5, 31-33}

DA Pam 27-161·2. p 166. FM 27·10, para 248. GREENSPAN, PP 168-171.
STATUS AND TREATMENT OF CIVILIANS PARTICIPATING IN COMBAT ACTIVITIES: RESISTING INVADING FORCES. COLLECTIVE PUNISHMENTS. REPRISALS. HOSTAGES
PROBLEM:
A company commander reports to hi. battalion commander: “My company secured a village in enemy territory immediately after the outbreak orhoatilitie8. Though my unit did not encounter any regular enemy 80Idien in the village, its civilian population offered armed resistance. As we entered the vill••e. a group of uniformed police officer.
–and a large number of fanatical youth. suddenly opened fire on us. After the fire fight,theviUa.ew..aearchedand a number of prisooera were ta.ken. In addition, some re~lIident8 who had not participated in combat activities were taken into custody. The latter were threatened with countermeasures if any surprise attacks were repeated. A number ofbomes were eet

on rue in retaliation for the previous surprise attack. My company has since evacuated the village, takin. along the prisoners and some other residents as , ,–… ~ ,-hosta’e8, and returned to friendly territory. ~ (J,., J-..~ Instructions are requested as to what .l \ ~ ::Ji>1″‘:;~~ disposition should be made of the prisoners”I and the hostages. In my opinion, the
(\ \.. “,’.1 _” • ~Pri80ners should be tried….

l..'” \~ ~I;
.\t

.”, I~’ ,-;\-:’~~~”~
, l”t …….t;~1t~~, ~ .~
”>’~’ L ,,, • ~ . ,,’,…..
“‘-….. L\. “‘j’ . ….. :-…..1: .,
I -_ .’-‘~>:6V-d'””-“,·,! 1111’1″‘ .,~.~. ,-‘ ,”‘. -::~–~~~. <; II~I J “IlI! -.
-‘_ ‘………/ LJl~ J .~C”i;;
Have the company commander and his men lUtedlawfully under circumstances? Explain. What lUtion should the battalion commander take?
DISCUSSION:
The civilian populace of a nonoccupied war. Members of a civilian police force can territory may take up arms against an invading participate in combat activities. as lawful enemy if they have not had time to form regular combatants under the conditions described armed forces. and if they carry their weapons above. Since these conditions were satisfied openly and observe the laws and customs of both for the police officers and for the youths.
their participation in combat activities was The batlalion commander should order the justified. They are not to be treated aspartisans, hostages returned to their village and the police who are underprivileged belligerents, but rather and the youths who participated in combat as prisoners of war. activities delivered to a prisoner of war
Countermeasures. reprisals. collective collecting point. He should report the actions of punishment against civilians and their property, the company commander and other members of and the taking of hostages are prohibited. In the the company who were responsible for taking present case. the company has violated the law hostages. burning homes. and threatening of war by burning down homes, taking hostages. reprisals to the proper military authorities for and threatening civilians with reprisals. appropriate disciplinary action.
REFERENCES:
OA Pam 27·1, pp 68·70, 146(GPW art 4, GC arts 33·341.
DA Pam 27-161-2, pp 166-167.
FM 27-10, paras 64-65, 272·273.
GREENSPAN, pp 407·417.
TREATMENT OF CIVILIANS IN OCCUPIED AREAS: CnnuAN PARTIC~ATION lli COMBAT ACTMTIES. TEMPORARY FORCEFUL EVACUA· TION FOR SEARCH PURPOSES, HIDlliG ENEMY WEAPONS AND PERSONNEL, PUNISHMENT, REPRISALS, DESTRUCTION OF PROPERTY
PROBLEM:
The following i. a report from a company conuriander to his battalion commander: “‘Today we captured the town of C-ville. Suspecting that the residents had planted mines inthetown, [ hadtheareatemporarily evacuated and searched. The search yielded the following: 20 antipersonnel mines in one home, an enemy officer in another home. It was determined that the mines had been delivered to family A by guerrillas and were to be Bet by the family. An enemy officer was concealed by family B in their bome. What is to be done with families A and B, whom [ have taken into custody? I recommended burning their houses as a deterrenL”
Did the company commander exerciseproper conduct according to the law ofwar?
DISCUSSION:
Generally, any displacement of civilians is refrain from active partIcipation in combat prohibited. However, the evacuation of a town activities to retain their protected status. The for pressing military reasons is permissible. In two families should therefore be delivered, the present case, the evacuation of C-ville was along with a detailed report of their conduct, to necessary in order to locate mines which may the proper military authorities for prosecution. have been planted and to prevent similar acts
Burning the homes of famities A and B as afrom occurring in the future. Therefore. the deterrent is prohibited. Civilian property in an temporary evacuation of C-ville was not in occupied enemy area may be destroyed duringviolation of the laws of war.
military operations only if the destruction is for
The arrest of families A and B was justified. pressing military reasons (e.g.• to acquire a field Family A supported the guerrillas ar.d of fire or to eliminate a concealed enemy route participated in hostilities by sloring the mines. of approach). No such reason is apparent in the The family has thus subjected itself to present case. The burning of civilians’ property, punishment and may be tried by a military court. either as a reprisal or for purposes of Family B is subject to punishment forconcealing intimidation or as punishment, is not the enemy officer. Such behavior is a form of permissible. Punishment may only be imposed active support of the enemy. Civilians must by a regularly constituted court.
REFERENCES:
DA Pam 27-1. pp 12, 137, 146. 150. 152 (HR art 23(g), GC arts 5. 33. 49, 53).
DA Pam 27-161-2, pp 75-76.
FM 27-10, paras 248, 272. 382. 393.
RESISTANCE MOVEMENTS: STATUS OF MEMBERS. TREATMENT OF CIVILIAN SUP· PORTERS. PUNISHMENT
PROBLEM:
A battalion ia ordered to search city Ct located in occupied territory, in whiela aD organized resiataDce movement baa been detected. After the search, the oo_paay commander report. the followin. &0 the battalion commander: “The company took into custody 16 penons, pre.u.ably residenta, wearin. civilian clothinl’ aad enemy uniform jacke&8 with broad, aewed­on armband. displaying the enemy’. national emblem. All were equipped. with small arms, but no resistaoce was offered.
They identified themselves as members of a resistance movement which wassupposedto be directed by General Z from enemy territory. I placed the residente of the city under guard since they supported the resistance fighters. What is to be done with these individuals?”
.I ~
I •

I ‘.. ‘.4\r~,” ..~,
What action should the battalion commander take?
DISCUSSION:
The battalion commander should order the resistance fighters to a collecting point for prisoners of war. The residents of the city supporting the resistance fighters should be sent, with a detailed report, to the responsible military authorities for prosecution.
Members of any organized resistance movement are lawful combatants provided they
(1) are led by an individual responsible for his subordinates’ actions and conduct, (2) wear a fixed, distinctive insignia which is recognizable at a distance, (3) carry their weapons openly, and (4) conduct their operations in accordance with the rules and customs of war. Resistance movements can lawfully operate in occupied territory even though they are being directed from elsewhere. In the present case, these conditions have apparently been met. Thus, the 16 who claimed to be resistance fighters must be treated as lawful combatants and prisoners of war.
Members of the civilian population of an occupied territory who give aid to resistance fighters violate criminal regulations of the occupying power, regardless of whether the resisters are lawful combatants or mere terrorists. Only if the residents themselves belong to an organized resistance movement are they then treated as lawful combatants and not held criminally responsible for participation in combat activities. The facts in the case above do not indicate that the residents of the city were members of an organized resistance movement. Therefore, they may be punished if they have participated in aiding the resistance movement. However, punishment may not be summarily imposed. Only a competent court of the occupying power, after a fair and impartial hearing, may impose punishment.
REFERENCES: DA Pam 27-1. pp 68-69. 155-156 (GPW art 4A(21. GC arts 66-681. FM 27·10, paras 64, 436, 428. GREENSPAN. pp 58-62.
LAWFUL COMBATANTS: THE STATUS AND TREATMENT OF THIRD COUNTRY NATIONALS AND CITIZENS WHO PARTICIPATE IN MILITARY ACTIVITIES
PROBLEM:
During an advance by troops ofcountry X into enemy territory (country V), 60 unusual prisoners are captured. Some are citizens of country Z (8 nation which has already surrendered to country X and committed itself to ending a11 military activities). Some are citizens of country X itself. Some are ciliuna of country N. a neutral state. The prisoners state that they belong to the Ulntemational Corps,” a combat unit which was incorporated into the armed forces of country Y, but consists only of citizens of (orei,n nations. A. members of the UInternational Corps,” the prisoners wear popular military headgear and jackets which deviate eomewhat from tbe uniform of the armed forces of country Y. They are otherwise largely equipped with civilian items. All ofthe prisoners wear the national emblem ofcountry Y. underwhich the letters “Ie” for “International Corps” have been added.
.t ~~
•• ‘I

How are the prisoners to be treated?
DISCUSSION:
The prerequisite for treatment as a lawful combatant is membership in a group whose participation in combat activities is authorized by the laws of war (e.g.. membership in the armed forces of a party to the conflict).
Citizenship is not, however, a necessary condition for such status. Individuals who are not citizens of the country on whose side they are fighting are authorized to participate in combat activities, provided they belong to a group which is authorized to participate in the hostilities. The “International Corps” represents a body of foreign volunteers which has been incorporated into the armed forces of country Y. the latter being authorized to participate in combat activities. As such, members of the “International Corps” are considered to be lawful combatants and, therefore, entitled initially to be treated as prisoners of war.
The ultimate disposition of some of these persons will be affected by the following considerations.
The citizenShip of a neutral nation, possessed by several members of the “International Corps”, does not negate their authorization to participate in military activities. However, membership in the armed forces of a party to the conflict does result in the loss of the privileged position which the citizens of neutral countries otherwise enjoy.
Doubts might arise as to whether the citizens of country Z are still authorized to participate in combat activities after their country has surrendered. Its surrender does deprive them of the possibility of participating in combat activities as soldiers of their own country. However, it is not a violation of the taw of war to continue fighting in the armed forces of an ally or an organization which is equivalent to an ally in this respect. If they belong to such an organization of a country which has not yet lost the right to wage war as the result of surrender or a cease-fire, they are entitled to be treated as prisoners of war, but may be subject to trial for their violation. The right of their homeland to punish them for continued participation in military activities is not affected by the above, but the detaining power may not convict those prisoners for violating the laws of their homeland.
Citizens of the detaining power (country X) need not be treated as prisoners of war after their status has been determined. They are subject to trial and punishment under the criminal law of their country (e.g.• treason, aiding the enemy) if they voluntarily participated in combat in the armed forces of the enemy.
REFERENCES: DA Pam 27-1. pp 20-21. 68-70 (H.V. art 17, GPW arts 4, 5). FM 27-10, paras 61, 550a. UCMJ art 104. Johnson v. Eisentrager, 339 US 763, 787 (1948)
P.P. v. Oie Hee Koi, 2 WRL 715 (P.C.) (1968)
THE DETERMINATION AND TREATMENT OF LAWFUL COMBATANTS
PROBLEM:
‘.” .:.
, ..~
1.
Fourteen enemy soldiers in uniform.

2.
Five citizens of a neutral state who are members of a volunteer battalion which had been incorporated into the enemy armed forces.

3.
Ten police officers from a police unit wbich had been incorporated into the enemy armed (orces.

4.
Fourteen members of a resistance group which had committed sabotage activities in the area already occupied by friendly forces.

5.
Three crew members of an enemy civilian aircraftwhich had been forced to land.

6.
One enemy civilian carrying no in.ipja who had. tired. at and wounded a soldier in occupied territory.

7.
Four railroad personnel in uniform who bad been c8l’ryingouttheir business at a railroad station and had not participated in military activities.

DISCUSSION:
The commander must determine who, among the captives, are entitled to treatment as prisoners of war and who are to be treated as civilians. He should also determine against whom criminal proceedings should be initiated.
The following are to be treated as prisoners of war:
1.
The 14 enemy soldiers. as members of the regular armed forces of a party to the conflict.

2.
The 5 members of the volunteer battalion. which represents a corps of volunteers incorporated into the enemy armed forces. Citizens of neutral countries are lawful combatants if they participate in combat operations in a mannerprovided for by the laws of war. Although neutrals lose their claim to neutrality jf they participate in combat activities, they cannot be punished for this.

3.
The 10 police officers. The national laws of the country of origin determine who, from among its nationals, belong to the armed forces and are authorized to participate in military activities. This right is not necessarily limited to soldiers of the regular armed forces. If no such national authorization has been issued, police can omy participate in combat under the same conditions as other civilians.

4.
The members of the resistance movement may be considered prisoners of war, provided they:

a.
are ledby an individual responsible for his subordinates’ conduct and actions,

b.
wear permanent distinctive insignia which can be recognized from a distance,

c.
carry their weapons openly, and

d. observe the laws andusages of war in their combat activities.
Sabotage operations behind enemy lines are lawful combat activities, provided they are carried out by lawful combatanls. If the resistance movement has satisfied the specified conditions, the punishment of the members for sabotage activities is not permitted. However. if at least one of the prerequisites is not fulfilled, members of the resistance group are nol entitled to be treated as prisoners of war. They can be punished for the sabotage activities which they committed in accordance with the criminal and procedural laws which apply to the civilian population in the occupied territory.
5. The crew members of the enemy civilian aircrah, who are treated like members of the Merchant Marine Service and are entitled to prisoner of war status.
The following are not entitled to be treated as prisoners of war:
a.
The civilian who. without being a member of some group authorized to participate in combat activities, hadfiredat and wounded a soldier. He can be punished for his acts by a military court and turned over to the proper military authorities for trial.

b.
The railroadpersonnel. They wouldbe treated as prisoners of war provided they: fal carried out activities as accredited nonmilitary personnel of the armed forces, fbI were authorized to conduct these activities by the armed forces, and reI had appropriate identification documents. Otherwise, they are to be treated as civilians andreleased. unless internment in an internment area for civilians appears to be required for security reasons.

REFERENCES:
OA Pam 27-1, pp 20-21, 68-70 (H.V. art 17. GPW art 4A, GC art 5).

DA Pam 27-161-2, pp 72-76.

FM 27-10. paras 61, 248, 550.

GREENSPAN. pp 97·101.157·160.
COMPARISON OF ESPIONAGE AND LAWFUL INTELLIGENCE-GATHERING PROCEDURES: RUSES OFWAR,CAMOUFLAGING,USEOFCIVILIAN
f’ CLOTHING, WEARING THE ENEMY’S UNIFORM i/ DURING RECONNAISSANCE MISSIONS
/
PROBLEM:
A very ragged soJdier, wearing a camou­flaged uniform ofhis country’. armed forces and carrying a radio, iscaptured in a wooded section near an important railroad bridge in a rear area. When interro••tect. he .tatee that he hid (or 10 day. in the woods after making a parachute jump to scout troop movements over the railroad bridge. He is glad to have become a prisoner o(war since he is hungry and wants to have a roof over hi. bead again. The interrogating officer states thatbewill Dot betreatedasaprisoner ofwar, but will be tried ae aspy. The eoldier replies that he was only carrying out hi.
~ I Ir mis8ion and was not aware of violating the .. I~I, law of war.
‘.’
t .,{ I t “(I’l;{‘”
‘.’ “‘(‘” ,1/.
f,’ ,’,I;~,Iri’ {~, .,.’;?¥4′
What treatment does the law of war prescribe for the capturedsoldier?
DISCUSSION: A spy is one who gathers or attempts to gather reconnaissance is a lawful combat activity. This intelligence within the zone of operations of a applies even though they use a permissible ruse belligerent, secretly or under false pretenses, in their mission. Camouflage is a permitted ruse with the intention of reporting the intelligence provided civilian clothing or the enemy uniform to his superiors. is not used during the intelligence-gathering operation. In the above case, the captured Members of the armed forces in uniform who soldier is not to be treated as a spy. but as a obtain intelligence in the enemy zone of prisoner of war, and is to be sent to a prisoner of operation do not commit espionage; rather, their war camp.
REFERENCES:
DA Pam 27·1. pp 13-14 (HR arts 24, 29)
DA Pam 27-161-2. pp 57-58.
FM 27·10, paras 48,75,
GREENSPAN. pp 318-320. 326-328.
STATUS AND TREATMENT OF PARLE­

MENTAIRES: MISUSE OF STATUS
PROBLEM:
A company commander reportll the foJ· lowing to his battalion commander: uFour parlementairee have approached our lines displaying a white flag. Each wore a broad white armband. Major A, the leader of the parlementaires. carried an identification document. Unknown to Major A, one of the parlementaires also brought along subver­sive pamphlets and materials. When the opportunity arose. be gavethem tooneofour guards. He then urged theguard to distribute the propaganda and to defect. Major A apologized for the incident and attempted to send the soldier back to his own lines. I prohibited this, however. Another member of the party expressed the de8ire to become our prisoner and not return to hisunit. Major A tried to send this soldier back, but I pre­vented him from doing this. I ordered the parlementaires to stay in a large shell crater until called. I directed this to prevent their viewing OW’ defensive positions. Major A DOW proteet. that I prevented him from .ending his men back to their own lines and be wiBhee to speak to you. He claims that he retainsabsolute and complete authorityover tbe parlementaires. He also complains that my order to remain in the shell crater is disrespectful.”

-. ­

How should the battalion commander respond to this situation?
Why?
DISCUSSION:
The battalion commander should reject the protests and complaints of Major A. He should order that the parlementaire who engaged in propaganda activities and the other who desired to become a prisoner both be sent to the fear as prisoners of war. Finally, he should decide wheth~r or not he wants to receive the remaining partemenlaires. If not. he should order that they be returned to their unit unharmed.
The members of the party are authorized parlementaires and are properly identified as such. They have a protected status and are entitled to immunity from capture, injury, or other harm.
One member of the party. however. has exploited his privileged position by urging the enemy to defect and by distributing propaganda material for the purpose of inciting the enemy to commit treason. He has therefore lost his claim to immunity. He may be delained, but must be treated as a prisoner of war since he is a member of the enemy armed forces. He may be punished for violating his privileged position.
By declaring that he no longer wishes to return to his unit. another member of the party has relinquished his status as a parlementaire. He has voluntarily left the area controlled by his armed forces and has put himself under the protection of the enemy who may grant him asylum. 1f detained. he is to be treated as a prisoner of war.
Under the circumstances, the temporary placement of the parlementaires in the shell crater was lawful. The measure was taken in order to prevent the parlementaires from using their special position 10 gather intelligence.
The battalion commander is not required to receive the parlementaires. Only when the latter indicate a desire to negotiate a cease-fire for the recovery of Ihe dead and wounded must they be received, and then only if the circumstances permit such a cease-fire. In this case they have not indicated such a desire. The battalion commander is therefore free to decide if he wishes to receive them.
REFERENCES:
DA Pam 27-1, p 14 (HR arts 32-34).

DA Pam 27-161-2. p 53.

FM 27·10, paras 53. 45B·467.

GREENSPAN. pp 380-385.
~ FIRING ON RESIDENTIAL AREAS: THE W SIGNIFICANCE OF DISPLAYING WHITE FLAGS
PROBLEM: c
A company commander has been ordered

to reconnoiter an enemy village and !:::=~~iIOI

determine if it is occupied by the enemy. A

white flag i8 flyin. from one house, and

enemy occupation cannot be clearly

established. The rlr8t sergeant 8uggests

ruing into the village to aBcertain the

presence of enemy troops.
.’ ~~t.~,.~::;;;_ ;;=_~~
. ~
. ‘. [t;;;;;~””” .,..: . -~t,;..
,

Huw should the commander act in this situation? Explain.
DISCUSSION:
The Cl’mpany commander should not fire on the villal’8. Firing on undefended towns or buildings is not permitted, since this would cause unnecessary destruction. Doubt as to whether a town or building is defended shall not be settled by firing on these subjects. Other means, such as reconnaissance, must be used.
Displaying a white flag does not necessarily mean that a town or building is undefended. All available facts and circumstances must be considered. A white flag may indicate that the enemy wishes to negotiate or surrender.
However, if the white flag is not displayed by individuals but from buildings, it is more reasonable to assume that no resistance is being offered from these buildings. Whether the display applies only to a particular building, a group of buildings, or to an entire town will, likewise, only be determined from all circumstances in the particular case. Therefore, when a white flag is displayed in the manner stated, it is possible that the town or the building displaying the flag is undefended. Thus, the village should not be fired upon so long as no resistance is offered by the village.
REFERENCES:
DA Pam 27-1, p 13 (HA art 25).
DA Pam 27-161-2, pp 47-48
FM 27-10. paras 39. 5048.

FIRING ON TOWNS AND CITIES: MILITARY NECESSITY
PROBLEM: The entire supply line to enemy unit. opposing the division pasBeS through a city. Extensive supplies for these unit8 are stored in thecity’. warehouses. The staffconcludes the enemy mUlt be prevented from using the city … transportation and 8upply center. The chief of staff url’etI that the city be destroyed by combined air and artillery bombardment. He further arpee that since Umilitary neceuity” urgently requiree tm.. destruction, protection of the civilian population may be subordinated.
What decision should be made and why?
DISCUSSION:
Bombardment must be limited to those is called for on military grounds. The means military targets whose elimination is required by chosen for achieving military objectives must the present combat situation. Thus, troop involve the minimum possible destruction of the quarters, supply and transport facilities, and civilian population and property. In the case troop positions can be fired on as military above, the enemy supply line which passes targets. Bombardment of the entire town, through the city and the enemy’s use of a however, is not permissible, unless all of it is number of warehouses in the city do not, by being used for military purposes. themselves, justify the destruction of the entire
city. Only destruction of facilities and routes
Before deciding on the chief of staffs being used by the enemy is justified. Therefore, proposal, it is necessary to determine the extent the division commander should order the attack to which the bombardment of individual targets only against recognized military targets.
REFERENCES:
DA Pam 27-1, pp 12-13, 141, 152 (HR an. 23(91,26-27, GC .n.18-19, 531.
DA Pam 27-161-2, pp 47-50.
FM 27·10, paras 40-41, 43.
GREENSPAN, pp 332-349.
t’P.\     DISPOSITION OF LAW OF WAR VIOLATORS:
W         BAN ON SUMMARY PROCEEDINGS TO DETERMINE GUILT OR PUNISHMENT, BAN ON REPRISALS, RUSES OF WAR, DECEPTIVE STATEMENTS, USE OF ENEMY’S LANGUAGE, PASSWORDS, WEAPONS, EQUIPMENT, AND UNIFORM
PROBLEM:
A bri.ade commander reporta the fol­lowin. to hill diviaion commander: “Lut m.bt, 75 ofthe eDeDlT ….tered my def…..l.. ..-with 10 _ably captured APCa of the…..e cleeip..OURwithoutanynational inaipia. They wore the combat uniform of their country’. army, but could Dot be distinauillhed in the darkne88. They uBedour p888wOrd and claimed that they were returninc from 8 reconnaissance OO88ioo. Later we learned that the enemy team was B88IJDed to take aDd bold aD Important railroad bridge. One ofoar Hotries at tbi. brid&e was shot ill the beek by the enemy team. My troope eventually succeeded in overpowering andcapturin.tbeenemy team. but suffered several casualti.. In their anger over the deaths oftheir C01Dl’ades, my men demanded the immediate execution of thoee responsible. I inteDd to hold an admini_trative beal’in.to try and punUh the reeponaible prUoDen.”
What actwn should the division commander take?Explain. What measures should be taken ifthe prisoners had worn the uniform oftheir enemy oriftheAPCshadtheenemy’smilitaryinsigniaor national {lag affixed to them?
DISCUSSION:
The division commander should prohibit the A summary or administrative hearing to brigade commander from conducting his determine guilt and punishment is not administrative hearing. He should also direct permissible. regardless of whether the that the prisoners be taken immediately to a prisoners have violated the law of war. prisoner of war collecting point. Punishment may be prescribed for a war crime only after conviction in a trial offering all the procedural safeguards provided for by law. This applies regardless of whether the accused persons are prisoners of war or protected
civilians.
The disposition of prisoners depends, first. on their status and. second. on whether they have committed a violation of the law of war. The prisoners in the present case obviously belong to the enemy armed forces. Upon capture, therefore, they must be treated as prisoners of
war.
The use of captured weapons. equipment. and other material is permissible under the law of war. However, the enemy’s uniform, national flag, and national emblem may not be used during combat. The use of captured vehicles to deceive the enemy is a permitted ruse so long as the enemy’s national emblem is removed from the vehicle prior to use. Unlike a situation involving the use of enemy uniforms and insignia, the soldier who is confronted with such a vehicle cannot assume that he is facing friendly troops. Thus, the use of enemy APCs in the present case does not constitute a
treacherous ruse in violation of the law of war. There is no provision in the law of land warfare which requires the national emblem to be displayed on land vehicles during combat operations. Thus the absence of such insignia does not violate the law of war.
As a standard issue uniform of the enemy forces, the combat clothing worn by the prisoners was sufficient to identify them as enemy soldiers. Although a uniform should be designed so that it can be distinguished from that of the enemy. it is not necessary that the differences be easily recognizable at night. The use of the combat clothing in the present case was not in violation of the law of war.
The use of the enemy’s language and password and the deceptive statement that the team was returning from a reconnaissance mission are ruses which are permitted.
The prisoners, therefore. have not committed any violations of the law of war. They cannot be punished, nor can reprisals be taken against them.
With regard to the use of the military insignia, national flag, and the uniform of the enemy, the law is clear that such use is prohibited during actual fighting The principle is considered inviolable that during actual fighting opposing forces ought to be certain of who is friend and who is foe. However, there are two views about such use before combat. One view is that combatants may use such items as a legitimate ruse until actual fighting starts. The other view holds that such use is illegal even before actual fighting commences. The Protocol to the Geneva Convention (which is not yet in force) updating the law of war, provides that the useof of such items is illegal even before actual
fighting begins if used to shield, favor. or impede military operations. In the present case, the prisoners would at least be subject to prosecution if they used their ensmy’s uniform, national flag, or military insignia during actual fighting at the railroad bridge.
The division commander would in such case have the prisoners of war delivered up for prosecution before a military court, accom­panied by a detailed report of the matter. He should, in addition, report the violation to his government for possible countermeasures such as protest and lawful reprisals.
REFERENCES: DA Pam 27-1, pp 12, 17, 68-69, 98, 102-1 OS, 137 (HR arts 23(1), 53, GPW arts 4. 84-85,
99. 102, 105, GC art 51.

DA Pam 27-161·2. pp 53-57.

FM 27-10, paras 51. 54, 160-161. 175. 173a. b. 181,

GREENSPAN, pp 319-321.
J. M. SPAIGHT, WAR RIGHTS ON LAND 105(1911).
THE STATUS, USE, AND MARKING OF CAPTURED MILITARY AIRCRAFr
-+
PROBLEM:
A battalion has captured an enemyaircraft and seized three undamaged helicopters. An enemy counterattack is underway and the helicopters are to be flown out immediately. The helicopters bear the same markings as when they were captured.
What legal consideration must be kept in mind regarding the use
of the captured aircraft?
DISCUSSION:
The captured enemy aircraft are spoils of war. That is. they are immediately the property of the captor and may be used by him for military purposes. In combat. captured aircraft must always show their nationality and military character by means of suitable insignia. Transfer of the helicopters from the enemy airfield to another airfield does not constitute combat activity, which would require the display of new national insignia. Nevertheless, the retention of the old insignia may deceive the enemy and make him refrain from attacking the helicopters. Though this alone would not constitute a treacherous ruse, the enemy insignia should be covered, if possible, in order to avoid misunderstandings and accusations of violations of the law of war. However, if time does not allow such concealment, the helicopters may be transferred in the condition in which they were captured. In such a case, no combat activities are permitted during the transfer flight. If the captured aircraft are used in combat, the national emblem and military insignia of the captor must be affixed.
NOTE: The position taken in the last sentence of the discussion may appear to contradict the conclusion stated in the fourth paragraph of Problem 29 regarding the marking of land vehicles during combat. The view taken on the marking of aircraft is based on the practical demands of aerial warfare. Identifying allied aircraft and protecting them from friendly fire is difficult and has led, in practice, to the adoption of the system of national markings. This practice has developed over the years into a customary rule of international law (see J. Spaight. Air Power and War Rights 76-91 (1947».
REFERENCES:
DA Pam 27-1. pp 12, 17 (HR arts 23(t), 53).

DA Pam 27-161·2, pp 175-176.

FM 27-10, paras 59, 403-404.
J. M. SPAIGHT, AIR POWER AND WAR RIGHTS 76-91 (1947) (hereinafter cited as SPAIGHT).
THE DISSEMINATION OF PROPAGANDA AS A MEANS OF WARFARE: BAN ON SUMMARY PUNISHMENT FOR ALLEGED LAW OF WAR VIOLATORS
PROBLEM:
An enemy aircraft flies over our airfield and drops leaflets urging our soldiers to surrender. Shortly thereafter the enemy aircraft is shot down and the pilot captured. The commander of our airfield wanta to punish the pilot immediately for disseminating the leaflets.
Is such action permissible? Explain. What measures sMuld be taken in the case?
DISCUSSION:
The dissemination of propaganda is a lawful the pilot in the present case may not be means of warfare and must be considered a punished for urging surrender. As a member of permissible fuse, even if the disseminated the enemy armed forces. the captured pilot must statements are untrue. The urging of enemy be treated 8S aprisoner of war. He must be sent troops to rise against their government is to a collecting point and may not bepunishedfor likewise 8 permissible military measure. Thus. his actions.
REFERENCES:
DA Pam 27·1. pp 12·13. 98·99. 105·106. (HR art 23. GPW arts 84·85. 99. 105·106).
FM 27-10. paras 51.160-161.
GREENSPAN. pp 323·325.
l!I!\ THE STATUS, TREATMENT AND RULES OF W ENGAGEMENT RELATING TO PARACHUTING CREWS OF DISABLED-AIRCRAFT
PROBLEM:
A company commander reports the fol­lowing to his battalion commander: U An enemy aircraft W8.8 shot down in my company’. area. Two crew members of the downed aircraft parachuted. They were not fired upon by my men during their de8Cent. Upon landing, however, the crew members opened fire on my company and had to be overcome with force. My company sustained two casualties in the encounter. The … captured fliers carried orders stating that ..~ they were required, if 8bot down, to reach ‘.~ their own lines and to use force to avoid ~,.. capture. 1 consider these orders and the If'” “l
fliers’ actions sufficient grounds to engage ~ …-‘

and fire at parachuting crews of disabled ~

/0

enemy aircraft in the future.” ~.~ ~
, .rc~~-‘-I;;, • •_ ~~&-11 ‘.~ ..~ <!<J.t:! ‘:, .-‘ ‘”
-!. O~ .
” ‘;(
..’ 0

t., ~
r

What are the legal considerations involved in this case?
DISCUSSION:
Generally, parachuting crews of disabled aircraft may not be attacked during their descent because of their defenseless state. This prohibition assumes. however. that the crew will not fight after abandoning their aircraft. If they continue to fight while descending, or intend to do so after landing, they may be fired upon during descent. However. it is often difficult to determine the intentions of parachuting crews of disabled aircraft. In the present case. the company acted correctly in not attacking the two crew members during descent because their intentions, at that time. could not be clearly determined.
It is also permissible to engage descending crews jf the enemy’s previous behavior clearly demonstrates that these crews will continue to fight during descent or after landing. For example, if the enemy has issued a general order that aircraft crews will continue combat activities after being shot down. such crews may be attacked while still airborne, provided they do not indicate during their descent their desire to surrender. Nevertheless, in alldoubtful cases, these crews should not be attacked.
Furthermore, they may not be engaged solely because they are descending over friendly territory or because their escape after landing is likely.
It should also be kept in mind that parachuting crews in an emergency are not obligated to stop fighting once they have jumped. The jump is not a sign of surrender. Thus. the two fliers in the case above can use force to resist capture or otherwise continue the fight.
A different situation arises, however. if the crew making the emergency jump indicates in some manner that they desire to surrender and then renews the fight. Once surrender is indicated, the enemy may assume that they are no longer threatened by the crew. If the latter continue the fight. they then violate the law of war. Such conduct is not a permissible ruse. It is a treacherous ruse. which is prohibited and punishable. In the present case, however, it is not apparent that the parachuting crew members violated the law of war. Like other fliers who are taken captive. they must be treated as prisoners of war.
REFERENCES:
DA Pam 27·1. p 12 (HR art 23(cl).
FM 27·10, paras 29-30, 50.
GREENSPAN. pp 317·318.
STATUS AND TREATMENT OF PARATROOPS: SABOTAGE TEAMS
PROBLEM:
A brigade commander report, to hill division commander: uTen enemy parachutists descended over my sector. Since an aerial enga&,ementwastakingplace in the same area, we assumed that they were pilots from the disabled. aircraft. We did not attack them during their descent. On the ground, however, they offered resi8tance
and could be overcome only after a prolonged fire fight. We captured seven of the parachutists. Each had sabotage material, and we learned that they intended to destroy a bridge along my supply route. How should J treat these prisoners? J consider sabotage a violation of the law of war.”
.J •'” ‘,: .•1/’, ,/~’. :.,”t(~~7,~’k”,”’. “‘”
How should the division comma.nder respond?
DISCUSSION:
Sabotage activities that are carried out by lawful combatants are not a violation of the law of war. On the other hand. such activities are unlawful if they are engaged in by persons who are not authorized to participate in military activities. Those who attempt to engage in such unlawful activity may be tried and punished for theiractions. In thecaseabove. itisapparentthat the paratroops are members of the enemy’s reg· ular armed forces. Therefore. they are lawful combatants and can engage in sabotage activ­ities. They are to be treated as prisoners of war.
In contrast to parachuting crews of disabled aircraft. paratroops may be fired upon during their descent. Their jump is considered part of an attack and combat mission. This rule applies even if the aircraft transporting them is shot down in the combat 20ne. It may always be assumed that paratroops are attempting to carry out their combat mission unless they indicate during a jump the desire to surrender. Then it is no longer permissible to attack them. In the present case. the facts do not indicate that surrender was intended. The fact that the paratroops were not attacked during their descent does not mean that they. themselves. must refrain from futher combat activities upon landing. They may continue to fight and resist capture.
REFERENCES:
DA Pam 27-1. pp 12. 68-69 (HR art 23(c). GPW arts 4, 5).
FM 27-10, paras 29-30, 61A, 63.
GREENSPAN. p 318.
SPAJGHT. pp 313·316.

RULES OF BOMBARDMENT: MILITARY TARGETS AND OBJECTIVES, PROTECTED PERSONS, AREAS, FACILITIES, INSTITUTIONS, AND OBJECTS
rAe Ffl’1·~ S’l1
# ••••• _ ..
….’…… v”
… …~, II ,.M~-:1

rlI~ It ,-+——j ;,-….. ‘\ -:X’ I
I: . V~-I–‘ >­
-\\ ,” ~.) ‘\~ . ~ “i’I-, .:.;:
. .4’ ,.l “‘”vl (“::) ~’.t, “,’
“-i11ll”} 1

PROBLEM:
A win, command is given the foUowin. mission:
1. D..troy military tarlets In city X outaide the zone ofoperations of frOUDd
fo~.
2. Interrupt railroad tranait between city X, city Y. and city Z at pointe in or around city X.
Aerial photoarapbs and other inteUi,ence disclosed the (olJawing:
A large optical plant located at the northeast edce of city X has been converted to produce tele8copes and li,htin. inatrumenu.
Troop billets are located in the southern part or the city.
Another barracb area attheweetern edce of tbe city io marked with the Red er-. emblem OD aU ita baildiDp. It wu Dot determined wbether taa-e barracJu had actuaUy been CODVerted into a hOlipitaJ complex.
There are utiaireraft betteriee, • radio tower. and tr-n..ittiD.. faeiJitiee in the billa 8urrou.odin, the city.
ThreehOlpitala, anoldmonutery. and tlve churches are located within the city, alone with a museum. which contain. valuable art treasures. The museum is marked with the emblem of the Convention OD Cultural Objects.
The railroad station. located in the center of the cityI is surrounded by a large residential area. Altbough the station is not equipped for handling cargo. it is laid out in such a manner that the railroad line could be effectively interrupted at this poinL The railroad line Cro8Ses several bridges outside the city. Destroying the railroad line at one of the bridges would require about the same amount of force and have the same effect 88 de8troying the tracks at the railroad station.
What legalconsiderationsmust betakenintoaccount inattacking and bombarding in and around city X? Which of the above­mentionedobjects can be lawfully attacked? Which shouldnot be attacked?
DISCUSSION:
Air attacks and the bombardment of cities and the troop billets,
towns outside the zone of operations of ground forces may only be directed against military the converted optical factory, targets. These operations must cause the
the railroad bridges, and
civilian population and protected objects as little suffering and damage as possible. Attacks the railroad station. which cause unnecessary suffering and destruction are prohibited. Moreover, the rules of war prohibit attacks directed against the An attack should not be made on the railroad civilian population or against cultural, historical. station if unnecessary damage and suffering religious, and other protected objects. Finally, if would result. The military objective can be a military Objective can be achieved in more accomplished in an alternative manner, since than one manner, the course of action chosen the rail line can be effectively cut by destroying must be that which causes the least amount of the railroad bridges outside the city. suffering and destruction to the civilian population and protected objects.
The barracks area which displays the Red The following may be attacked as military Cross emblem on its buildings should not be targets: attacked until it is established that the area is being used for military purposes, rather than as
the antiaircraft batteries,
a hospital complex. The other hospitals, the the radio tower and other transmitting monastery, the churches. and the museum are facilities, protected objects and may not be bombarded.
REFERENCES:
DA Pam 27-1. pp 12-13 (HR arts 23(g). 25. 271.
DA Pam 27-161-2, pp 46-52,173-175.
FM 27·10, paras 40·43, 45-46.
GREENSPAN. pp 332-349.
RULES OF BOMBARDMENT: MILITARY TARGETS AND OBJECTIVES, PROTECTION OF CULTURAL AND IlEUGIOUS INSTITUTIONS AND OBJECTS, PROTECTED PROPERTY USED FOR MIUTARY PURPOSES
PROBLEM:
Can the monastery be attacked? Explain.

DISCUSSION:
As a rule. religious. historical, and cultural objects may not be attacked. In the case above. the emblems on the monastery are the symbol of the Convention for the Protection of Cultural Objects During Armed Conflicts. This symbol and the entry on the Convention’s official register indicate that the monastery is an immovable cultural object which has been given a protected status and may not be attacked. This is true even though the United States is not a party to the Convention on Cultural Objects.
However. jf such objects are used for military purposes, the protection is forfeited, and the object may be attacked. Nevertheless, whenever possible, a demand must first be made to terminate the misuse of the protected object within a reasonable time. In the present case, the immediate destruction of the observation post is justified. A demand to terminate the misuse would not be feasible under the circumstances, since the setting of any deadline would permit the enemy to continue its bombardment and cause considerable additional destruction and loss. Therefore, the monastery may be attacked immediately. The attack should, however. be limited as much as possible to the area where the observation post is located and be carried out in such a manner that damage to the monastery is kept to a minimum.
REFERENCES:
DA Pam 27-1. pp 12-13. 16-17 (HR ans 23(9). 25. 27. 46. 56).
FM 27-10, paras 393. 405.

GREENSPAN. pp 284-285. 340-345. 655-656.
WAR CRIMES: COMMAND RESPONSIBILITY, DUTY TO DISOBEY CRIMINAL ORDERS, DUTY TO REPORT WAR CRIMES
PROBLEM:
Charlie Company is moving through an area reported to be heavily infested with enemy guerrillas. The company commander orders his first platoon to move into and secure a particular village. No instructions are given in regard to the taking of prilIOners. On entering the village, the platoon encounters hostile fire. The exchange is short, but two members of the platoon are wounded. The persons who fired on the platoon apparently disappear among the villagers. The platoon leader orders his men to bring all the villagers to the central market place. Af’ler the villagers are 8.88embl~he orders his men to shoot all the adult males. He explains that be suspects they are guerrilla fighters. Several members of the platoon carry out his orders. Those who do not participate in the shooting do nothing to try to stop it. Ten male villagers are killed. After the shootings, the platoon leader orders all his soldiers not to say anything about what happened and reports that the ten persons shot were killed during the fighting.
(C~’
~~))
,~
How should the soldiers in the first platoon have reacted to the order to shoot the villagers? How could the incident have been prevented? Is there a duty to report the shootings? Ifso, explain both the duty and the procedures for reporting killings.
DISCUSSION:
The soldiers in the first platoon should have refused to carry out the order to shoot the villagers. The persons whom they rounded up in the market place are either civilian detainees or prisoners of war. In either case, they are protected persons, and it would be a crimelo kill them. An order to commit a crime is not only illegal. but it is a crime itself. The platoon leader is guilty altha murders he ordered. Also. the fact that the murders were commined pursuant to superior orders does not make them any less criminal. The soldiers who carried out the orders are also guilty of the crime of murder and can be prosecuted.
The incident could have been prevented first of all by the company commander who planned the mission. He knew that there had been guerrilla activity in the area and should have planned for the taking of prisoners. He should have given detailed instructions on what todo in regard to the taking of prisoners. He has a responsibility as a commander to prevent war crimes. In this case. he faited to do so. and he can be punished for the omission. Despite this. the soldiers themselves also had the duty to try to prevent the crimes. On being ordered to shoot the male villagers. they should have raised the Question of the legality of the action. In many cases. orders may be thought to be criminal because they are unclear. Where the order is meant to be criminal. the person giving it may change his mind if this is pointed out and the persons who would have to carry it out show reluctance to do so.
Anyone who witnesses the commission of a war crime has a duty to report it at the earliest opportunity. In the present case. therefore. the soldiers who observed the shootings have the obligation to report them the first chance they get. The preferred reporting procedure is through the chain of command. However. if this is not possible or would cause problems. reports may also be made to the military police. to a judge advocate. or even to a chaplain. In the above case. the soldiers who observed the crimes would probably not want to report them to their immediate commander. the platoon leader. since he was involved in their commission. They could. though. report them to the company commander aher returning to the company area or to another appropriate oHicial as suggested above.
REFERENCES:
OA Pam 27-1. pp 40. 72-73. 98. 1461GWS art 50. GPW arts 13. 87. GC art 33}

OA Pam 27-161-2. pp 240-245. 25D-251.

FM 27·10. paras 38. 497d·501. 503. 509.

GREENSPAN. pp 420-421. 440-442. 459-460.
P. TR0080FF. LAWANO RESPONSI81L1TY IN WARFARE 188. 199-210 (1975).
CHEMICAL WEAPONS,  LEGALITY  AND
RESTRICTIONS ON USE
PROBLEM:
Hostilities have commenced. Several
hundred, if not thousands, oC local civilian
nationals are at the front gate of the
installation seeking safety. Many have
worked closely with US authorities, and
most (ear the treatment that they are likely
to receive if they fall into the hands of the
enemy. Demands are made upon the US
authorities. In particular they demand that
they be airlifted away from the battle area.
The crowd i8 rowdy and boisterous. Rioting
is likelyto occur. TheChiefofSecurity Police
requests that he be authorized, ifnecessary.  -­
to use riot control agents in order to control
the crowd. (Note: All US installations have
riot control .genu in their inventories_
These agents include Mace and tear gas
grenade•. This fact is unclassified.) ,.. ,t
III
rrrorr,
rr,
rrorr
cr.

What is the commander’s decision?
DISCUSSION:
On 22 January 1975. the United States that the Protocol prohibited only the first use of ratified the Geneva Gas Protocol. As part of the lethal gases. Nonlethal gases, such as riot ratification process the US made its view crear control agents, were not prohibited by this
57
Protocol. Therefore, the law of armed conflict does not prohibit the use of riot control agents per se in armed conflict.
However, the President of the United States issued an Executive Order unilaterally renouncing certain uses of riot control agents in armed conflict (Executive Order 11850 dated 8 April 1975.) This Executive Order is binding upon the military of the United States as a matter of US law. In this Executive Order the use of riot control agents in armed conflict was restricted to defensive military modes to save lives and included “Use of riot control agents in riot control situations in areas under direct and distinct US military control to include rioting prisoners of war.”
The law of armed conflict does not forbid the use of riot control agents. US law (EO 11850) does not forbid it if used in defensive military modes to save lives and if what is involved is a riot control situation in an area under direct and distinct US military control. However. Executive Order 11850 requires prior Presidential approval of any use of riot control agent or herbicides in war.
REFERENCES:

FM 27-10. para 38 (e1, 15 July 1976).
Sectio INDEX
TO CASE STUDIES
AERIAL BOMBARDMENT
AIDING THE ENEMY
AIRBORNE TROOPS:
Firing on soldiers descending by parachute Prisoner of war status and treatment
AffiCRAFI’: (see also Aerial Bombardment) Status, use and marking of captured aircraft
AMMUNITION:
Transport aCby medical vehicles, storage in medical facilities, effect on protected status
ARMS (see Wespons)
ART TREASURES. buildings devoted to, prole<lion
BOMBARDMENT: (see slso AerisJ Bombardment)
Military targets and objectives
Protected buildings, areas, objects and persons: civilian population cultural, historical, and religious objects identification thereof medical facilities military necessity misuse of protected status residential areas undefended places unnecessary Buffering and damage villages, towns, and cities warning requirements white flag displays, significance of
BUILDINGS. as lawful tsrgel8 or protected objects
(see under Bombardment)
Cas. Study 28,34,35
15, 16
32,33 32,33
30
3, 4
35

16,27,28,34,35
16,28,34 34,35 27,34,35 34 27 35 27,34 16,27 28,34 16,27.28,34 35 27

CAMOUFLAGE: (see also Emblems, Insignia, Ruses of War)
Concealment of protective and national emblems: medical vehicles, equipment and facilities when required:
captured aircraft captured medical vehicles other captured vehicles
Ruses of war

CAPrURED MATERIEL, status, disposition, use and
marking of:
Aircraft Articles and effects ofprisonersofwar Combat vehicles and equipment Medical vehicles, facilities, and equipment Weapons and ammunition
CHEMICAL AND BIOLOGICAL WARFARE (see Weapons)
CITIES (see Aerial Bombardment, Bombardment, Civilian
Property, Prolected Property)
CIVILIANS: (see also Noncombatants, Occupied Territory, Protected Persons) Aiding the enemy, status and treatment
Bombardment and other attacks on the civilian population (see also Aerial Bombardment and Bombardment)
Clothing, civilian, use of as ruse Coercion prohibited
Collective punishment prohibited
Curfews Dispersed families Employment Enemy Forced evacuations Hostages prohibited Hostile acts, consequences Insubonlination,treannentof Internment for security reasons Levee en masse Occupying power, relations Participation in collection, care, and relief of enemy
wounded and sick Case Study

6

30
5
29
6,25,29

30

11,12,14,15
29

3,4,5
4,2,9
17, 19, 20, 21,
22,24
16, 19, 20, 21,

27,28,34
25
17, 18, 19, 20,
21,24
17, 18, 19, 20,
21,22
17
17,21
17

17, 18
20

18,20,21,22,24
17, 18, 19, 22
24
20
17,18,21,22,24

17

Participation in combat activities Prisonerofwar status Property, acts attiainst, use of confiscation (see
Civilian Property)

Protected persons, status Punishment Reprisals prohibited Residential areas Resistance movements, support of
Sabotage by prohibited

Searches (see also Civilian Property) Security measured. by occupying power Taking up arms to repel initial invasion Treatment, responsibility Unnecessary suffering and damage Wounded and sick, recovery of and care for,
participation in

CIVILIAN PROPERTY: (see also Aerial Bombardmen~
Bombardment, Protected. Property) Confiscation of Destruction Medical facilities, use of Search of Unnecessary damage
CLOTHING: (see also Medical Personnel, Prisoners ofWar, Protected Emblems, Ruses ofWar) Civilian, use of as ruse Confiscation from prisoners ofwar Medical personnel, protective insignia, armbands Resistance fighters Uniforms, distinctive character of Wearing the enemy’s uniform prohibited
COERCION PROHIBITED (see Civilians, Prisoners o{War,
Wounded and Sick)
COLLECTIVE PUNISHMENT PROHIBITED
(see Civilians, Prisoners of War)
COMBATANTS:
Civilians, resisting invasion Determination and status of Nationals ofthird countries and own citizens serving with the enemy Persons engaged in intelligence-gathering activities Resistance movements Case Study
17,20,21,24 17,20,21,22,24
17 18,19,21,22 19,20,21 27,34 19,21,22,24 33 19,21 17,18,19,21 20 17,19,20,21 27,34
17
23
21 16,19,26,34,35 17 19,21,27 26,34,35
25
12,14
1
22
25,29
25,29
20
24
23
25
22

CONFISCATION OF ENEMY PROPERTY (Bee Civilian
Property, Medical Facilities, Equipment and Materiel, Medical Vehicles, Prisoners of War)
COMMAND RESPONSIBILITY (Bee War Crimes) CRIMES AGAINST TIlE LAW OF WAR (Bee War Crimes) CRIMINAL ORDERS, duty to disobey (Bee War Crimes) CULTURAL OBJECTS:
Misuseo!

Protective emblem of

Protection of
CURFEWS, against civilian population
DEAD AND WOUNDED, recovery of (see also Wounded and
Sick)

DECEPTION (Bee RUBes ofWar)

DECEPTIVE STATEMENTS: (Bee also RUBeBofWar)
As ruse of war
Use ofenemy’s:

language

password
DEFENDED PLACE

DEFENSE OF SELF-DEFENSE (Bee Surrender)

DESTRUCTION OF PROPERTY (Bee Aerial Bombardment,
Bombardment, Civilian Property, Cultural Objects, Medical Equipment, Facilities and Materiel, Medical Vehicles, Protected Property)
DETAINING POWER (Bee PriBonerB ofWar)
DISABLED AIRCRAFr. status and treatment of crewB
DISABLED COMBAT VEHICLES, Btatus and treatment of
occupants
DISPERSED FAMILIES (see Civilians)
DISPOSITION OF LAW OF WAR VIOLATORS (see War Crimes)
EMBLEMS (see National Insignia, Protective Emblems)

EMPLOYMENT (see Civilians, Medical Personnel, Prisoners
ofWar)
Case Study
35 35 34,35
17
26
29
29 29
16,27
7, 8, 24, 32, 33
8

ENEMY: Flags, misuse of, forbidden Forced participation in hostilities, forbidden Insignia, misuse forbidden Neutrals, status as prisoners of war Population, status
Property (see Captured Materiel, Civilian Property, Cultural Objects, Medical Equipment, Facilities and Materiel, Medical Vehicles, Protected Property)
Territory (See Occupied Territory) Uniform, misuse forbidden
ESCAPE, killing or wounding prisoners ofwar
ESPIONAGE, sabotage, (spies) Definition Lawful intelligence-gathering activities compared Pri80nerofwar, status Punishment Sabotage teams
EVACUATION:
Civilian: for search purpose from combat areas to implement and enforce occupation orders
Prisoner ofwar

EXECUTIONS, summary, prohibited
FLAGS: Misuse forbidden Significance.of:
protective medical emblems white flag displays useofwhiteflag byapproachingenemypersonnel
FORBIDDEN CONDUcr(see Prohibited Acts)
FORCED LABOR: Civilians Prisoners ofwar
GUERRILLAS, prisoner ofwar status
Case Study
25,29 12,17 29,30 23 17, 19, 20, 21, 22,23,24
25
11
25,33
21 18 17 12,13
14,16,29
9, 10, 27
I
10,27 9
17

12
22,24

HOSPITALS: (see also Medical Equipment, Facilities and Materiel, Medical Personnel, Occupied. Territory, Protected
Objects)
Civilian:
protection of

use oCby occupying forces
HOSTAGES, prohibited
IDENTIFICATION CARDS AND TAGS, confiscation from prisoners ofwar
INDUCING ENEMY SOLDIERS TO DESERT
INFORMATION, obtaining by coercion prohibited
INHABITANTS OF OCCUPIED TERRITORY (s.. under
Occupied Territory)
INSIGNIA (see National Insignia, Protective Emblems)
INTERROGATION BY FORCE PROHIBITED:
Civilians

Prisoners ofwar
INVASION. civilian resistance permitted
KILLING OR WOUNDING:
After surrender Civilians Crews ofdisabled aircraft Escaping prisoners of war Medical personnel Occupants of disabled combat vehicles Occupants of disabled landing aircraft Parachutists Paratroops Parlementaires Prisoners ofwar Resistance fighters Shipwrecked personnel Surrendering personnel, Wounded and sick
LABOR (see Forced Labor)
LA WFUL COMBATANTS, determination and treatment of Case Study
17 34
20
11,15
31
12, 13, 14, 15, 16,19
19 12,13,14,15,16
20

2,9,10
19,20,28 7,8,24,32,33, 11 1,3 8 7 7,8,32,33 32,33
26
11 22 7 2,9,10
1,3,8
23,24
Case Study

LEVEE EN MASSE
MEDICAL EQUIPMENT, FACILITIES AND MATERIEL: (see also Medical Vehicles, Protective Emblem, Wounded and Sick)
Ammunition, storage of prohibited Bombardment and other attacks prohibited Camouflaging protective emblem Captured property, status and use of Civilian facilities, use of Clearing stations Convoys Flags First-aid kits, confiscation from prisoners of war Mobile medical units Placement ofcombat positions near Protection of
loss of, misuse warning requirements
Protective emblem:

camouflaging

displays

marking

misuse

removal

significance
Status and treatment ofoccupants Weapons, transport or storage prohibited
MEDICAL PERSONNEL: Misuse ofprotected status Prisoner ofwar status Protection of Protective emblem of Retained personnel, status as Weapons, right to carry
MEDICAL VEHICLES: Camouflaging of Convoys, protection of Disposition of sick and wounded from captured
vehicles Misuse of protective status and emblem Occupants, status of during misuse
4
3,34
6 3,4,5, 17 17 4 3 1 12 3,5,6 4 1,3,4,6 3,4,5,6 3
1 1,3,4,5,34 1,3,4,5,6,34 3,5,6 5,6 1,3,4,34 1,3,4,5 3,4
3 3,25 1,3,4 1,3 3,25 4
6 3
3,5 3 3

Protection of Punishment for misuse Use of captured vehicles Weapons and ammunition, transport of in medical
vehicles

MILITARY NECESSITY:
Bombardment Firing on surrendered enemy personnel Forced prisoner of war labor
MILITARY TARGETS, BOMBARDMENT OF: (see also
Aerial Bombardment; Bombardment)
I\ULITIA, prisoner ofwar status
MISUSE OF PROTECTIVE STATUS AND INSIGNIA
MONEY, confiscation from prisoners ofwar
MONUMENTS, protection of
MUSEUMS, protection of
NATIONAL RED CROSS (see Red Cross)
NONCOMBATANTS: (see also Civilians)
Besieged places

OBLIGATION TO RECEIVE PARLEMENTAIRES
OCCUPIED TERRITORY: (see also Civilians)
Civilians (generally) Curfews Employment of civilians Responsibility to needs of evacuated civilians Treatment ofcivilians in occupied areas
Treatmentof supporters ofresistance fights
PARACHUTISTS AND PARATROOPS:
Aircraft crew in emergency Defense against capture, right of Disabled aircraft, descent from
PARLEMENTAIRES:
Immunityof

Misuse of status
Case Study
3
3
3,5

3

28,34,35
10
12

28,34
24
3
15
35
35

28,34,35
26

17
17
17,18,20
18
17, 18, 19, 20,
21,22
22

7,8,32
32,33
32

26
26

Obligation to receive parlementaires Status and treatment of White flag, significance of
PARTISANS:
Executions ofwithout trial prohibited
Lack ofdistinctive emblem
PENAL AND DISCIPLINARY SANCTIONS (see Civilians, Punishment, Prisoners ofWar)
PERMITIED ACTS, specially mentioned. Bombardment Ruses ofwar Spies
PRISONERS OF WAR:
Acts committed prior to capture
Aiding the enemy
Airborne civilian crews
Civilians (see Civilians)
Coercion of
Commencement of
Conduct in captivity

Confiscation of equipment for military purposes
Confiscation ofmilitary documents
Confiscation ofpersonal effects
Definition:
persons included
persons excluded.

Development of prisoners
Detention in combat zone
Discipline and disciplinary punishment (see
punishment)
Evacuation
Exposure to combat fire
Forced labor

Force used. against (see this title (Coercion 00
Interrogation of
Jurisdiction over

Killing prohibited in certain instances
Levee en masse

Militia and volunteer corps
Persons treated. as prisoners ofwar:
armed. forces
armed. militia
Case Study
26
26
26

21

22

28,34,35
2,25,29
25

10

15

24

12,13,16
8

IS, 16

12

11
11, 12, 14, 15

20,22,23
20,24,25
12

12

12,13
12

12

12
12,13,16
31
11
20
24

24,31
24
civilians resisting invasion crew members of civilian aircraft levee en masse civilians parachutists parlementaires resistance fighters surrendering personnel third country nationals
Persons not treated as prisoners ofwar: civilians in combat partisans spies
Protection:

commencement of

hazards of war
Punishment: (see also Punishment) acta committed. prior to captu:r:.e coercion
Quartering and temporary confinement of Reprisals prohibited Right to protest mistreatment Sick and wounded (see Wounded and Sick) Spies (see Espionage, Sabotage) Uniform, necessity for recognition as belligerent Violence and intimidation prohibited Weapons to be used againstPWs
PROHIBITED Acr8: Abuse on parlementaire’s status Aiding of resistance groups by civilians Bombardment of undefended places Civilians, certain acts towards Civilianclothing, use ofbymembersofenemyarmed
forces Coercion ofcivilians Coercion ofprisoners of war Collective punishment of civilians Combat activities, prohibited civilian participation Confiscation of prisoners’ personal effects Cultural objects, bombardment of Destruction of:
civilian property cultural objects Employmentofcivilians by occupying power, impennissible uses of
Case Study
20 24 20 7,8,32,33 26 22,24 8 23
24 20
8 12
10 12,13,16 13 14 15
22 12,13,16 11
26 22 16,27,34 17,18,19
25 18 12,13,16 17,19 20 11,12,14 34,35
18,21 34,35
17
Evacuation, forced Executions without trial Exposing civilians to dangers ofwar Exposingprisoners ofwarto combatzone Feigning surrender
Firing at:

defenseless parachutists escaping prisoners of war parachuting aircraft crews in emergency residential areas shipwrecked personnel surrendering enemy undefended towns and villages
Forced participation of prisoners of war in combat activities Hostages, taking of
Injury ofenemy after surrender Killing or wounding of surrendering enemy personnel:
generally

ofprisoners ofwar to prevent escape Mistreatment of prisoners of war (generally) Misuse of insignia on captured vehicles Paratroopers, firing on Protected. property, use of for military purposes Providing information to the enemy Punishment ofcivilians by troops Punishment of prisoners of war by troops Red Cross emblem, improper use Reporting the commission of prohibited acts Reprisals Sabotage, unlawful Summary proceedings to determine guilt Summary punishment for alleged laws ofwar
violators prohibited

Surrender, subsequent engagement in hostilities prohibited. Unnecessary destruction and suffering to civilians
and property Wearing the enemy’s uniform
PROPERTY:
Bombardmentof(see Bombardment)
Booty ofwar
Cultural Case Study
17
21
18
12
2,32

32

II

7,8,32
27
17
9
27

12
19
9
9,10,11
10
14
3,30
32
35
15, 16
18,21,22
14
3
2
14,17, 19,29
35
29

31

2,10
34
26

30
34,35
69

Destruction or devastation Prisoner ofwar property Protected property,

civilian medical facilities destruction of as reprisal use of for military purposes
Undefended buildings, bombardment of
PREVENTING PRISONER OF WAR ESCAPES
PROPOGANDA:
Dissemination of as means of warfare Dissemination by parlementaires
PROTECTED PERSONS (see also Civilians, Prisoners of War, Wounded and Sick)
PROTEGrED PROPERTY: (see also Property)
Civilian medical facilities Destruction of as reprisal Use of for military purposes

PROTEGrIVE EMBLEMS:
Camouflaging of
Cultural objects
Natural emblems

removal offrom captured vehicles Misuse of protective emblems Red Cross emblem:
camouflaging marking misuse significance of

Resistance movements, distinctive emblems of
PUNISHMENT:
Ofcivilian combatants Collective punishment prohibited Confiscation of property Destruction ofproperty Execution without trial prohibited Feigning surrender lnsubordinate civilians Ofprisonersofwar for priorcriminal acts Punishment by troops Reprisals against sick and wounded Resistance fighters
Case Study
18,21 11,12,14
17
21
35
27,34,35
11

31
26
7,17,28,34
17
21
35

1,6
35
5,29
5
3,35

1

1,3,4
3
1,3,4
20

21
19,20,25
18,21
18,21
21
2
18
10
13
3
22

Summary punishment of alleged law of war violators prohibited
QUARTERING AND TEMPORARY CONFINEMENT OF PRISONERS OF WAR
RECONNAISSANCE ACTIVITIES:
Lawful reconnaissance

Of undefended towns
RECOVERY OF WOUNDED
RED CROSS EMBLEM:
Camouflaging

Marking

Misuse

Significance of
RELIEF AND RESCUE EFFORTS, civilian participation in
REPRISALS, ban on:
Against civilians

Against prisoners ofwar

Against sick and wounded
RESISTING ENEMY INTERROGATION ATTEMPTS
RESISTING INYADING FORCES
RUSES OF WAR:
Camouflaging Captured vehicles, use of Civilian clothing, use of Enemy’s language, password, weapons, equipment,
and uniform, use of Enemy’s uniform, wearing of Feigning surrender
legal consequences Perfidious conduct and treachery
Permissibility of

SABOTAGE
SHIPWRECKED PERSONNEL:
Concept, status, and treatment of Firing on enemy of sunken landing craft
SIGNS TO DISTINGUISH PROTECTED BUILDINGS
CaseStudy
31

13

25

27

1

1

1,3,4
3
1,3,4

1,3,4
17,19,20,21
14
3
14,15
20

25
29
25

29
25,29
2,10
2
16,29,32
2,25,29

33

7
7

34,35

71

SPIES (see Espionage)
SPOILS OFWAR
SUMMARY EXECUTIONS, prohibition of
SURRENDER:
Elements of

Feigning surrender
legal consequences Killing or wounding of surrendering enemy personnel Precautionary measures during surrender of
approaching enemy personnel
Use ofwhite flag
By wounded personnel

THIRD-COUNTRY NATIONALS, as combatants
TORTURE, forbidden (see Coercion, Interrogation)
TREACHERY (see Ruses of War)
TREASON (see Espionage and Sabotage)
UNDEFENDED PLACES. attacks or bombardment of
UNIFORM, necessity for status as prisoner of war
UNIFORM OF ENEMY. wearing of as ruse of war
VEHICLES: (see also Medical Vehicles)
Disabled combat vehicles Status and treatment of occupants
WAR CRIMES:
Acts which constitute (see Prohibited Acts) ‘Collective punishment (see this title, Punishment) Command responsibility Duty to disobey criminal orders Duty to report war crimes Execution, without trial prohibited Hostages, taking of prohibited Prisoners of war, prior war crimes of Punishment:
collective punishment prohibited execution without trial prohibited
Case Study
30
21

2,9 2,10
2

10,11
9
9
2

23

2,29,32
23

16,27
22, 24
25,29

7
8

36
36
36
21
20
10

19,20, 25

21

summary punishment of alleged law of war violators prohibited
WEAPONS:
Chemical and biological, lawfulness and permitted use Prisoners ofwar, use against Transport of by medical vehicles, storage in medical facilities, effect on protected status
WHITE FLAG: Firing upon enemy displaying white flag Parlementaires Significanceofdisplay in residential areas As sign ofsurrender
WOUNDED AND SICK: Abuse of protected status Ceasefire to allow evacuation of dead and exchange
ofwounded Dispositionofpersonnelofcapturedmedical vehicles Exposure to combat Firing at Medical materiel, use of Participation in combat activities Prisoner ofwar status Protection of Providing medical attention to captured personnel Recovery of Reprisals against prohibited Case Study
31
37 10
3,4
9
26
27 9,10
2
1,26 3,5 8
1,2,8
5
3, 7
1,2,3
1,2
3,5
1,26
3

TC 27-10-1
26 JUNE 1979
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
E. C. MEYER
General. United Stares Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
J. C. PENNINGTON

Major General. United States Army
The Adjut8nt General

DISTRIBUTION:
Active Army, USAR and ARNG: To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-118, Requirements for The Law of Land Warfare (Oly rqr block no. 247).
Additional copies can be requisitioned from the US Army Adjutant General Publications Center, 2800 Eastern Boulevard. Baltimore. MD 21220.
*u.s. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICf:: 1996 406…21/S2181
Masculine pronouns appearing in this TC refer to both genders unless the context indicates another use.
TC 27-10-1
SElECTED PROBLEMS IN THE LAW OF WAR
PIN : 043760 -000

 

TM-8-240 09-1992

TM-8-240 09-1992

TM 8-240

TECHNICAL MANUAL

MILITARY MENTAL HEALTH LAW

APPROVED FOR PUBLIC RELEASE; DISTRIBUTION IS UNLIMITED
H E A 0 QUA R T E R S, 0 EPA R T MEN T 0 F THE ARM Y

29 September 1992

‘TM B-24t
TECHNICAL MANUAL No. 8-240  }  HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY WASHINGTON, DC, 29 September 1992
MILITARY MENTAL HEALTH LAW

This manual will serve to acquaint medical officers with the problems concerning the interface between the law and mental health.
You can help improve this manual. If you find any mistakes or if you know a way to improve procedures, please let us know. Mail your memorandum or DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) to: Walter Reed Army Medical Center, Forensic Psychiatry Service ATTN: HSHL-ROP, Washington, DC 20307-5001. A reply will be furnished to you.
Chapter
Chapter
) Chapter Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
L     INTRODUCTION
General Information ……………………•..
References..
Explanation of Abbreviations and Terms.

2.
THE MILITARY JUSTICE SYSTEM Introduction. . .. . . . . ……… . Sources of the Military Justice System. Background and Development …….. . A Separate System of Military Justice …….. . Jurisdiction of Courts·Martial ………………… . Levels of Court. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ………………………….. .

3.
MILITARY STANDARDS OF RESPONSIBILITY Introduction .. The Forensic Evaluation in the Military Mental Responsibility Standard…… . Definition of Terms. Assessing Criminal Responsibility …. Clinical Examples Partial Mental Responsibility.

4.
COMPETENCY Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . . ……………… . Conducting a Competency to Stand Trial Evaluation. . ……………. . Clinical Examples of Criminal Competency. . ……………….. .

5.
THE CRIMINAL FORENSIC EV f..LUATION Introduction …………. . Preparing for the Forensic Evaluation ….. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . …………. Conducting the Evaluation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . …….. .

6.
APPLICATION OF THE MENTAL RESPONSIBILITY STANDARD General …….. . Substance Use Disorders ….. Intellectual Impairment (Mental Defect). …. Amnesia and Altered States of Consciousness. Seizure Disorders. . ………………… . Organic Mental Disorders ………. . Impulse Control Disorders ………. . Personality Disorders ………………………….. . Sexual Disorders. . . . . …………… . Psychosis……………………………… . Malingering. . . . . …………………………………………… .

7.
PREPARING THE FORENSIC REPORT Introduction …. Structure of the Forensic Report .. Submission of the Report………………………………………….. .

Paragraph
1-1
1-2
1-3
2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6
3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7
4-1 4-2 4-3
5-1 5-2 5-3
6-1 6-2 6-3 6-‘ 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 8-11
7-1
7-2
7-3
Page
1-1 1-1
1-1
2-1 2-1 2-1 2-3 2-3 2-4
3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4
‘-I
4-1 4-3
5-1 5-1 5-2
6-1 6-1 6-2 6-2 6-3 6-3 6-3 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-5
7-1 7-1 7-3

·This monuol supersedes AFR 160-421TM 8-240/NAVMED P-Sl05, 25 September 1981.
1M 8-240

8.     EXPERT TESTIMONY
Introduction.
Courlroom Procedure
The Mechanics of Expert Testimony

Chapter 9. DISPOSITION OF THE MENTALLY ILL ACCUSED General … Notification of Release … Disposition of the Insanity Acquittee. . . ……….. . Disposition of the Service Member Found Incompetent to Stand Trial Chapter 10. DANGEROUSNESS
Introduction.
Assessing the Dangerous Patient
Management of the Dangerous Patient..

Chapter 11.     TORT LIABILITY General. The Basics of Tori Law Minimizing the Risk of Tort Liability Informed Consent .. Federal Tort Claims Act ConfidentialitylPriv:iiege . Speciflc Problem Areas.
ApPENDIX A. REFERENCES INDEX ….
Paragraph
8-1 8-2 8-3
9-1 9-2 9-3 9–4
10-1 10-2 10-3
11-1 11-2 11-3 11-4 11-5 11-6 11-7 Page
8-1 8-1 8-1
9-1 9-1 9-1 8-1
10-1 10-1 10-2
11-1 11-1 11-2 11-3 11-3 11-4 11-4 A-I Index-l
,
‘I
)
)

TM 8-240

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
d. Determination of Legal Issues. The clinician
1-1. General Information
a.
Value of the Clinician. With the expansion of mental health expertise has come increased expo­sure to the legal justice system. Difficult and confusing legal cases become more understandable when clinically evaluated. The clinician can playa valuable role by providing expert opinions to the military justice system. There are a number of diverse areas which the clinician stands to influ­ence. This includes competency determinations and the ability of a trial to progress, responsibility assessments and the impact on criminal culpabil­ity, and even the severity of sentence following a guilty verdict. Quality forensic evaluations require familiarity with the United States military justice system and basic standards of the law relative to responsibility, competency, and certain civil issues.

b.
Pragmatic Training ManuaL This training manual on mental health law is first and foremost designed to be practical. Guidance and explanation of legal concepts and methods of evaluation are focused, as much as possible, on clinical concerns. Numerous clinical examples are provided to eluci­date difficult concepts. A chapter devoted to the military justice system interprets the world the clinician will function within.

c.
Not a Source of Legal Authority. The reader must clearly understand that the discussions relat­ing to psychiatric tenets and opinions are not binding on anyone. This manual offers recommen­dations which must be tempered by the clinical material and unique local considerations. The clin­ical examples cited are for descriptive explanation only and should not be considered “typical” or “standard.”

is an adjunct to the military justice system’s efforts to provide a fair dispensation of justice. The clinician should remember that the legal determi· nation of sanity and other lesser degrees of mental impairment is primarily a question of fact that can only be resolved by the members of a courts­martial. By producing a thorough and impartiaJ forensic evaluation, the clinician aids the difficult task of the fact finder in reaching a verdict.
, -2. References
All publications referenced in this manual are listed in appendix A.
1-3. Explanation of Abbreviations and

Terms
The following abbreviations are used in this publi·
cation:
ADAPCP Alcohol and Drug Abuse Prevention

and Control Program AWOL away without official leave BCD bad conduct discharge CID Criminal Investigation Division FTCA Federal Tort Claims Act IDF installation detention facility IDT inactive duty training JAG Judge Advocate General MCM Manual for Courts-Martial MP Military Police MRE Military Rules of Evidence MTF medical treatment facility PMR partial mental responsibility RCM Rules for Court-Martial SJA Staff Judge Advocate UCMJ Uniformed Code of Military Justice
1M 8-240

CHAPTER 2 THE MILITARY JUSTICE SYSTEM
d_ Army Regulations. In addition to the MCM,
2-1. Introduction
The military justice system serveS the dual pur­poses of justice and discipline. It is complex and multifaceted. The brief overview of the system which follows is not exhaustive. 11 is designed to introduce clinicians, who may he unfamiliar with the system, to some of its important aspects. Among the topics discussed in this chapter are the sources of the military justice system, its back­ground and development, the rationaJe for a sepa­rate system of justice, its jurisdiction, and the levels of the court.
2-2. Sources of the Military Justice System
(/. The Constitll/ion. The basic Source for the separate system of criminal law which prevails in the military is the Constitution of the Unit.ed Stat.es. Art.icle I, Section 8, of t.hat document provides that Congress shall have the power to “make Rules for the Government and Regulation of the land and nuval Forces.”
b. The Un.iformed Code of Military Justice. In 1950, Congress used its constitutional powers to enact the Uniformed Code of Military Justice (uCMJ), which was substantially revised by the Military Justice Acts of 1968 and 1983. This statute provides a separate system of military criminal law for the armed services, much the same as the State of Michigan and the State of Maryland have separate systems of criminal jus­tice to meet their societal needs.
c. The Manual for Courts-Martial. Like most other statutes, the UCMJ requires a detailed set of regulations to supplement and explain its various provisions. Article 36 of the Uniformed Code of Military Justice (UCMJ, Article 36) authorizes the President to issue regulations prescribing the pro­cedure to be followed before military tribunals, including the rules of evidence. In addition, the UCMJ, Article 56, empowers the President to establish limits on punishment for most offenses. These regulations are issued in the form of an Executive Order by the President and are found in the Manual for Courts-Martial (MCM), 1984. Therefore, the MCM has the force and effect of law, and it must be complied with.
AR 27-10 (Military Justice) fine tunes the every­day administration of military justice. This regula· tion announces additional rules and procedures which must be follmved. Furthermore, supplemen· tal military justice relo’ulations have been issued by many local commands. Commanders must also consult and comply with these regulahons.
e. Court Decisions. While regulations supple· ment and explain the statute, the various courts involved with military criminal law interpret the statute and regulations. The Supreme Court of the United States and subordinate Federal courts hear cases involving military criminal law. These cases are usually limited to appeals bnsed upon lack of jurisdiction and appeals based upon a denial of some constitutional right. The United States Court of Military Appeals is the highest appellate court within the military judicial structure_ This court lS composed of five civilian judges appointed by the President. Each of the Services has an intermedi­ate appellate court of review consisting of military appellate judges. The decisions of these courts in interpreting stat.utes and regulations have the force of Jaw and are binding upon commanders_
f The Staff Judge Advocate. The sources of military criminal law are varied. To effectively address most military justice problems, one must refer to one or all of these sources. This is what the staff judge advocate (SJA) is trained to do. The SJA is the command’s legal advisor. Just as corporations consult with their general counsel before making legal decisions, commanders and their subordinates should contact their SJA for advice in dealing with problems of military justice.
2-3. Background and Development
a. Backgroun.d. The UCMJ had its beginnings early in our history. Regulations for the govern­ment of our Army have been in force since the time of the American Revolution, when the Army law consisted of the Articles of War. The first. Articles of War were adopted by the Second Conti­nental Congress on 30 June 1775, just three days before George Washington took command of the Continental Army. These Articles were patterned after the British Army Articles, which were de· rived from earlier European articles traceable to the Middle Ages. Our system of military justice is
~ 6-240
e product of centuries of experience in mnny lr Do not think, however, that the present :1. -‘ an outmoded historical relic. On the ntrary, while retaining the substance of what s proved sound, Congress has periodically recon· lered and revised the military justice system to
in accord with new knowledge, experiences, and anging Jaw,
b. The Uniformed Code of Military Justice, 1950.
significant revision in the military criminal law ,tern occurred with the adoption of the UCMJ. It TIbined the laws formerly governing the Army, IVY, and Air Force into one uniform code which vems all uniformed Services of the United 1te5. :’, The Military Justice Act of 1968. A major ,ision of the UCMJ and the MCM occurred with ;! Military Justice Act of 1968. The revised ;MJ and MCM incm’porated changes in the law Ice 1951 and made substantial modifications in ~ military justice system.
(1)
Among the changes brought about by the 58 Act is a provision which gives soldiers the ht to a qualified lawyer at a special court­Irtial in all but the rarest of circumstances. The litary Justice Act of 1968, Article 27(c) provides It “lceused shall be afforded the representa­

r.
qualified lawyer except where a lawyer mOL be obtained due to physical conditions 01­litary exigencies. AR 27-10, paragraph 5-5a, Ivides further guidance in this area, stating that all special courts-martial the accused must be )rded the opportunity to be represented by ally qualified counseL This right to counsel is addition to the accused’s right to hire a civilian Iyer or request individual military counseL If

accused requests individual military counsel, vever, the detailed military counsel will nor­lly be excused by the detailing authority_
(2) Besides providing for legal counsel at spe­c courts-martial, the Military Justice Act of ;8, as implemented by AR 27-10, provides that nilitary judge be detailed to special courts­rtial whenever possible. In the event that the cial court-martial is empowered to adjudge a I conduct discharge, a military judge must be ailed. The Military Justice Act of 1968 also es an accused the right to request trial by a 1tary judge alone in all cases except those ich are referred to trial as capital cases_ If the llsed elects trial by judge alone, the military
~e  rtetermines  the  guilt  or  mnocel1ce  of the
md,  if there is  a  finding  of guilty,  the
t  The Act also places a  number of added

)onsibilities upon the presiding officer of the rt-martial. The judge makes all legal and proce­
dural rulings at the trial and cannot be overruled by a commander on these decisions.
d. Nev) Developments In the System.
(1) Chnnges /0 the UCMJ_
(a)
Since 1979, Congress has amended the UCMJ several times in order to increase the efficiency of ollr military criminal law system. ln NO\’ember 1979, Public Law 96-107 amended the UCMJ, Article 2, authorizing court-martial juris­diction oyer service members entering the Armed Forces as a result of recruiter misconduct.

(b)
The Military JU5tice Amendment of 1981 became effective in January 1982. One signif­icant change is that the accused is no longer entitled to be represented by more than one military lawyer. Jf the accused requests individual military counsel and that counsel is reasonably available, detailed military counsel shall be ex­cused at the detailing authority’s discretion. Rea­sonable availability is defined by the Secretaries of the Services. A definition of reasonable availabil­ity can be found in AR 27-10, chapter 5.

(c)
Another change resulting from the Mili­tary Justice Amendment allows the commander or convening authority to direct that excess leave may be used by individuals who have been con­victed by court-martial and are awaiting appelJate review. Previously, these individuals could only be placed on excess leave at their request.

(d)
The Military Justice Act of 1983 sub­stantially revised the UCMJ. In an effort to improve the efficiency and administration of our military justice system, several necessary changes have been madc. The Act relieves commanders of the administrative burden connected with person­ally excusing court·members before trial, elimi· nates requirements that commanders make certain legal determinations, and alleviates many redun­dancies that existed in the system. The most significant revisions in the Act provide for direct review of court of military appeals decisions by the United States Supreme Court and authorize Gov­ernment appeal of certain rulings by military judges at the tr1al leveL This major revision was incorporated into the 1984 MCM and took effect on 1 August 1984.

(e)
The Military Justice Amendments of 1986, signed on 14 November 1986, further refine the military Justice system. The most significant change involves the expansion of court-martial jurisdiction to include jurisdiction over reserve component soldiers who commit offenses while in an inactive duty training (lDT) status. In addition, the Act authorizes, in limited circumstances, re­serve component soldiers to be called to active

duty for the purpose of trial by court-martial, investigation under the UCMJ, Article 32, or nonjudicial punishment.
(2) Changes in the Manual (or Courts-MartiaL
In 1980, the Joint Service Committee on Military Justice was given the monumental task of rewrit­ing the MeM. This task was completed in May 1983 and copies of the revision were made avail­able for public comment in the Federal Register. The MCM, 1984, took effect on 1 August 1984, and repJaced the MCM, 1969.
e. The Trend. The trend in military justice Jegislal.ion and court decisions is to increase the efficiency of our criminal justice system while at the same time balancing and protecting the rights of the accused.
2-4. A Separate System of Military Justice
Q. One of the umque features of the United States military society is its separate system of criminal justice. Most justice problems involving military personnel are resolved within this sepa­rate military justice system and only infrequently reach civiJian criminal courts. What justifies our separate justice system?
b.
The first justification for our system is histor­ical and political. The military did not create its own separate system of justice. Throughout our history, and in accordance with the Constitution, the Congress of the United States has recognized the need to provide a separate justice system for the military forces. Congress established the mili­tary justice system by duly·enacted legislation, from time to time modifies this legislation to adopt changing law, and continually oversees and re­views the system.

c.
Numerous factors motivate the Congress to provide a separate military justice system. Many crimes in military society-away without official leave (AWOL), disobedience, disrespect, misbehav· ior before the enemy, malingering-have no coun· terpart in civilian criminal law. Military leader· ship requires command participation in the administration of criminal-law processes which impact on subordinates-both as a reinforcement for leadership and as a control over those factors which influence the fighting capacity of the force. Because of force deployment, military society re­quires world-wide application of its criminal prohi­bitions and jurisdictional reach-unlike civilian criminal systems which are usually localized. The environment and realities of military society are different from those of civilian life, and criminal justice must be administered and cases decided by people sensitive to those differences. Finally, there

1M 8-240

is donbt that the clyilian Justice system could meet these requirements of militury society. Comment· ing on the relationship between civilian and mili· tary criminnl Jurisdiction, the Supreme Court ob· served in Relford v. Commwu/ant, 401 US 355 (197]), “The distinct possibility exists IhM civj] courts … will have Jess thDn complete interest. concern and capacity for all the cases that vindi· cate the military’s disciplinary problems.” In short, mission and location require a separate system.
d. For these reasons, Congress has granted the military a separate criminal law system. It is inevitable in a democratic society such as ours that the milit~lry justice system will be compared with the civilian court system. While there are differences, in almost e\’ery instance military BC· cllsed receive rights and protections equal to or superior to those enjoyed by civilian defendants. Indeed, commanders are responsible fO!-adminis· tering military justice with utmost fairness and efficiency. By doing so, the trust and confidence bestowed upon military leadership by the Ameri· can people and the ConE,’Yess will be preserved.

2-5. Jurisdiction of Courts-Mortial
u. Active Duty Jurisdlction.
(1)
On 25 June 1987, the Supreme Court decided the case of Solorio v. United States, 107 S.Ct. 2924 (1987). This case dramatically changed the rules concerning court·martial jurisdiction. The Court held that jurisdiction of a court·martial depends solely on the accused’s status as a mem· ber of the Armed Forces, and not on whether the offense is service·conneded. The case overruled the “service-connection test” established by the Court in O’CaZZahan v. Parker, 395 U.S. 258 (1969). Now jurisdiction will be established by simply showing that the accused is a member of the Armed Forces.

(2)
SolorIO creates a situation where both the military and civilian authorities may have juris­diction over a soldier and his or her offense; e.g., an offense committed off post. This necessitates SJA coordination with the local civilian prosecutor. Such coordination will ensure that the exercise of UCMJ authority is prudent and consistent with good order and discipline.

(3)
Civilians, including family members, are not tried before courts-martial. If they commit offenses on post, they may be tried in the local State or Federal court. Commanders consuJt \vith their SJA when issues arise involving misconduct by civilians.

b. Jurisdiction Over Reservists.
0) As a part of the Military Justice Amend· ments of 1986, Congress amended the UCMJ,
2-3

TM 8-240
‘\rticles 2 and 3. The new amendments extend
-isdiction over reservists on all types of training; _od, in short, if the reservist is traming, he or she is subject to military jurisdiction for crimes com· mitted during the traiDing period. The most signif­icant change is reflected in the UC11J, Article 2(aX3), which allows the military to exercise au­thority without any threshold over reservists who commit crimes while performing weekend drill in IDT status.
(2) Recognizing that IDT periods are brief, usually lasting only one weekend, the amend­ments to the UCMJ, Article 3, allow reservists to return home at the end of IDT drill without divesting the military of jurisdiction. As a result. nonjudicial punishment administered under the UCMJ, Article 15, may be handled during succes­sive drill periods. Specifically, while punishment can be imposed during one drill period, it can be served during successive drill periods_ In addition, under the UCMJ new Article 2(d), the Government can order to involuntary active duty lhose reserv­ists who violate the UCMJ duying a training period. Reservists can be mvoluntarily ordered to active duty for UCMJ, Article 32 investigations,
‘urts-martial, and nonjudicial punishment.
…;.-6. Levels of Court
a. Summary Court-A-lartial.
(1)
The summary court-martial is the lowest level trial court for disciplinary actions in the military legal system. A summary court-martial is designed for disposition of minor offenses under simple procedures. It is composed of one commis­sioned officer. The law specifies no particular grade for a summary court-martial officer, and the powers are the same regardless of the individual’s grade. Ordinarily, the summary court-martial of­ficer should be a senior captain or a field gmde officer. A neutral judge advocate will be desig· nated as the legal advisor for the summary court­martial officer.

(2)
A summary court·martial is normally con· vened by a battalion commander. It may also be convened by anyone having authority to convene a special or general court-martial. The summary court-martial is detailed by personal direction of the convening authority.

(3)
A summary court-martial may tr.v only ~l1listed soldiers. The soldier may be tried by

mmary court-martial for any non-capital offense ,.tlnishable under the UCMJ; that is, for any offense for which the punishment is something less than death. The summary court-martial should be
limited to relatively minor military olfenses, how­ever, and is often used only after an accused has been offered and refused nonjudicial punishment for the offense.
(4)
An accused may not be tried by summary court-marlial over the accused’s objection. If the accused objects to trial by summary court-martial, the summary court-martial ofEcer will note the objection and return the charge sheet to the convening authority for disposition. If the accused consents to trial by summary court-martial, the summary court-martial officer will proceed with the trial.

(5)
The punishment powers of the summary court-martial are very limited. For example, a summary court-martial may only confine enlisted soldiers who are serving in the rank of corporal or specialist or below.

(6)
]n a trial by summary court·martial, an accused is not entitled to representation by mili· tary counseL If the accused desires to be repre­sented by a civilian attorney (at no expense to the Government), or if the accused has secured the services of a reasonably available individual mili· tary counsel, the summary court-martial officer should allow such counsel to be present.

b. Special Court-Martial (Non-Bad Conduct Dis~
charge).
(1)
The special court-martial is the intermedi· ate court in the system. It has more sentencing power than the summary court-martial, but less than the general court·martial. Unlike the UCMJ, Article 15, and the summary court-martial, an accused may not turn down a special or higher court·martial.

(2)
The punishment powers of the non-bad conduct discharge (BCD) special court-martial in­cludes 6 months confinement, forfeiture of two­thirds pay per month for 6 months, and reduction to private_ A special court-martial may not confine an officer.

(3)
The membership of a non-BCD special court-martial may take anyone of three different forms_ It may consist of at least three members; at least three members and a military judge; or solely a military judge if the accused so requests. Special courts-martial are not presently tried \…..ith­out military judges. In some instances, an accu­sed’s request ror trial by military judge alone may be denied by the military judge; however, special courts-martial are tried by military judge alone in the vast majority of cases when requested_ If an enlisted accused requests that the court have enlisted membership, at least one-third of the court members must be enlisted soldiers.

TM 8-240

(4)
The military judge of a special court­martial is detailed by the U.S. Army Trial Judi­ciary. AR 27-10, chapter 8, covers the detailing of military judges and their administrative and logis­tical support.

(5)
Trial and defense counsel are detailed for each special court-martiaL The trial counsel need not be a lawyer; however, the accused has a right to be represented at the trial by counsel who is a lawyer and certified by the Judge Advocate Gen­eral (JAG). As a matter of practice, both counsel are lawyers. The administrative task of making counsel available is generally handled through the offices of the responsible SJA and senior defense counsel.

(6)
A special court-marlial may try anyone subject to the UCMJ for any non-capital offense made punishable by the UCMJ; that is, for any offense for which the maximum punishment is less than death.

c. BCD Special Court-Martial.

(1)
The BCD special court-martial is basically the same type of court as the special court-martial outlined above except that this court-martial has the power to impose a BCD as punishment. There are certain requirements which must be met be­fore such punishment may be imposed.

(2)
In order for a special court-martial to have the authority to impose a BCD, a qualified defense counsel and a military judge must be detailed (unless a military judge could not be detailed because of physical conditions or military exigen­cies), and a verbatim record must be made_ In addition, AR 27-10 provides that the military judge be assigned to the U.s. Army Legal Services Agency (Trial Judiciary) and that only a general court·martial convening authority may convene a BCD special court-martial. ]n practice, all Army special courts-martial will have a military judge

detailed to them.
(3) The BCD special court”martial option pro­vides a forum for those cases where a convening authority deems a punitive discharge warranted but does not feel that the charges are serious enough to warrant more than 6 months confine­ment. Where the discharge is warranted and the case is referred to a special rather than a general court, the effort that would have been expended by the UCMJ, Article 32 investigation process de· scribed below is saved.
d. General Court-Martial.
(1) The general court-martial is the highest level trial court in the military legal system and must be convened by general court-martial con­
[l

vening authority upon the formal pretrial advice of the SJA. This court·martial tries military per­sonnel for serious offenses.
(2)
The punishment powers of the court are only limited by the maximum punishments for each offense found in Part IV of the MCM and can include confinement for life and even the death penalty.

(3)
The general court-martial may take either of two possible forms. It may consist of a military judge and not less than five members, or solely of a military judge, if the accused so requests. The accused may elect trial by judge alone in all cases except those which are referred to trial as capital cases. ]n all cases a military judge must be detailed to the court. An enlisted soldier is also entitled to at least one”third enlisted membership upon request.

(4)
Trial and defense counsel are detailed for each general court·martial. Both the trial counsel and defense counsel at a general court-martial must be lawyers certified by the ,JAG.

e. UCMJ, Article 32 investigation.
(1)
No charge may be referred to a general court-martial for trial until a thorough and impar­tiaJ investigation has been made in accordance with the UCMJ, Article 32. The officer appointed to conduct this investigation should be a field sfJade officer or an officer with legal training and experience. The purposes of the investigation are to inquire into the truth of the matters set forth in the charge sheet, to determine the correctness of the form of the charges, and to secure information upon which to determine the proper disposition of the case_ The perfecting of a case for the Govern­ment is not a purpose of the investigation. The UCMJ, Article 32 investigating officer perl”orms a judicial function and must obtain legal advice from a source not involved in prosecution or defense functions.

(2)
The investigation will be conducted with the accused present and represented by a defense counsel. The accused is entitled to present evi­dence and to cross-examine witnesses_ Also, the accused is entitled to have witnesses produced when they are reasonably available. After the investigation, a report of investigation wi]] be made to the officer directing the investigation. The recommendations of the UCMJ, Article 32 investi· gating officer are advisory only.

TM 8-240

CHAPTER 3 MILITARY STANDARDS OF RESPONSIBILITY
3-1. Introduction specific questions are asked of the Sanity Board,
Milit3ry regulations define the structure of the forensic evaluation and provide the legal standard to which the clinical information is tested. Knowl­edge of the proper standard is critical to a rea­soned analysis. Improper application of the wrong standard can serve as a ground for appeaJ and eventual retriaL
3-2. The Forensic Evaluation in the
Military
u.
Sanity Board Composition. When an active duty soldier is accused of an offense, and there is a question about the mental responsibility of the accused, a board of one or more medical officers may meet to examine the accused. This panel of medical officers is commonly referred to as a “Sanity Board.” It consists of either physicians or psychologists. There must .be at least one psychia­trist or psychologist on the Board that reports on the soldier’s mental condition at the time of the offense charged as well as hislher mental capacity to stand trial. Thus, issues of mental responsibility (insanity) and competency are addressed.

b.
Dissemination of the Board’s Report. The report may be requested before, during, or after trial by a court-martial. A full copy of the report is given to defense counsel, and the conclusions alone are provided to the trial counsel. Not only does the report assist in determining the proper disposition of charges; it may also influence sentencing.

3-3. Mental Responsibility Standard
u.
The Military Standard. There are a number of legal tests or standards for insanity. The cur­rent military standard dictates a person is not mentally responsible for a criminal offense if the accused can demonstrate by clear and convincing evidence that at the time of the offense, the accused, as a result of a severe mental disease or defect, was unable to appreciate the nature and quality or wrongfulness of his or her conduct. This standard for lack of mental responsibility is set forth in Rules for Court Martial (ReM) 916(kXl).

b.
The Questions Asked. The Sanity Board, which evaluates whether the accused lacked men­tal responsibility, is governed by ReM 706. Three

based on the military mental responsibility stan­dard:
(1)
At the time of the alleged criminal con· duct, did the accused ha\’e a severe mental disease or defect?

(2)
What is the clinicaJ psychiatric diagnosis?

(3)
Was the accused, at the time of the alleged criminal conduct and as a result of such severe mental disease or defect, unable to appreciate the nature and quality or wrongfulness of his or her conduct?

c.
Competency. The Sanity Board is also asked whether the accused has a sufficient mental capac· ity to understand the nature of the proceedings and to conduct or cooperate intelligently in the defense. Additional qnestiollfl may be posed consis· tent with ReM 706.

3-4. Definition of Terms
a.
Introduction. Although a standard for mental responsibility exists, no specific legal clarification for implementation has followed. Thus, a general vagueness and confusion results. Analyzing the mental responsibility standard discloses certain key words and phrases-“severe mental disease OJ” defect,” “unable to appreciate,” and “nature and quality or wrongfulness.” To apply the standard appropriately requires an understanding of the key concepts.

b.
Severe Mental Disease or Defect. A severe mental disease or defect, by legal definition, ex­cludes an abnormality manifested only by repeated criminal or otherwise antisocial conduct, or minor disorders such as nonpsychotic behavior disorders and personality defects. Still, a credible argument can be mounted that an individual who meets criteria for a borderline personality disorder or certain amnestic states, although nonpsychotic, may be quite severe. Although the term “severe” is generally applied to psychotic disorders, nonpsy­chotic behavior with severe impairment in social or occupational functioning might well qualify.

c. Wrongfulness. In addition to requiring a se­vere mental disease or defect, the mental responsi­bility test requires the accused be unable to appreciate the nature and quality or wrongfulness of his or her conduct.
TM 8-240
0) The officer performing the evaluation must
ear in mind that the wrongfulness of conduct is determined by society_ The appraisal of the act within the accused’s private ethical system is not determinative.
(2)
Simply determining whether the conduct was right or wrong or whether the accused under· stands in more general terms the difference be· tween right and wrong is insufficient. It is not appropriate to use one’s own value system as a yardstick by which the accused’s behavior is mea­sured. The evaluating officer should, in essence, specifically address the accused’s state of mind with reference to the criminal conduct.

d.
Collaboratwe Materials. Collaborating data describing the accused’s behavior surrounding the time in question is helpful. Such behavior as flight, attempt to conceal commission of the act, statements of repentance, and voluntary surrender to civil or military authorities may suggest that the accused was aware of consequences attendant to the alleged criminal conduct.

e.
Nature and Quality. The mental responsibil­ity test requires the accused, because of severe mental disease or defect, be unable to appreciate “the nature and quality” or wrongfulness of his or

~r conduct. The phrase “nature and quality” 3sentially restates the wrongfulness or harmful­ness premise.
f. Appreciation. The accused’s “ability to appre­ciate” the nature and quality of wrongfulness of his or her conduct must be addressed. The mere presence of a mental illness, even a severe mental illness, does not necessarily impair the ability to appreciate one’s conduct as wrong. The nature of the behavior must be evaluated as a result caused by the mental disease or defect. The motivation for the behavior and the resultant gain must be explored. For example, an individual with a his­tory of schizophrenia, poorly controlled, burglar­izes a house and steals money and jewelry. The ill-gotten proceeds finance an expensive drug habit. During the burglary, which occurred at night, attempts were made to be furtive. This data suggests appreciation of the wrongfulness of the
act.
g. Inability to Apprectate.
(1) Contrast this scenario with an individual who has a slowly evolving paranoid delusional disorder. As time progresses the individual is “convinced” that his immediate supervisor is spy­.’1g on him both at work and home. He believes
at his supervisor then initiates a series of -.1amaging rumors. At work, he thinks people talk behind his back. Every communication becomes threatening. In order to avoid confrontation, which
the soldier feels is inevitable, he hides in his house with the blind closed, a club at the ready. Life becomes suffocating, all because of one individual.
Finally, the individual perceives that his supervi­sor means to personally injure him_ Fearing for his life, he preempts his supervisor and strikes first. The supervisor is mortally wounded; the accused awaits the police so he can present his case of self-defense.
(2) In this case, the soldier has a severe mental illness, a delusional disorder, paranoid type. The inability of the soldier to appreciate the wrongfulness of his behavior is considered in context with the ment.al disorder. In this elaborate delusional system, the soldier is convinced that while murder is wrong, to have done nothing would have been to forfeit his own life.
3-5. Assessing Criminal Responsibility
a.
Assessing the Mental State. Assessing crimi­nal responsibility requires close adherence to the prevailing mental responsibility standard. A retJ·o­spective analysis of mental state must then be performed. While it may seem an impossible task to determine a person’s past mental state, this same exercise is performed by the jury/fact finder. As an expert on human behavior, the clinician provides guidance in understanding a prior mental state. The clinician’s assessment of criminal re· sponsibility is then best viewed as an adjunct to a lay decision-making process.

b.
Accuracy Required. The opinion rendered by the clinician must be based on the “usual degree of medical certainty” In evaluating the accused’s prior mental state then, the clinician is not held to an unreasonable standard. Where two competing hypotheses are present (was or was not the ac­cused able to appreciate the wrongfulness of his or her behavior, for example), that argument with the most compelling data that simply tips the scales is sufficient to opine “within the limits of medical certainty”; “more probable than not”; or roughly 51% accuracy.

c.
Components of the Responsibility Analysis. When the clinician assesses criminal responsibil­ity, three basic inputs are required: collateral reports; a clinical evaluation, blending current mental status with a retrospective analysis; and the application of the mcntal responsibility stan· dard_ Collateral reports should be sought which describe the accused’s behavior at or about the time of the alleged evcnt(s). Evidence of disordered thinking is sought. The mental responsibility stan· dard also requires an assessment be made of the accused’s ability to appreciate the wrongfulness of hislher behavior. Clues are gathered from investi­

gatlve reports. To appreciate wrongfulness implies the ability to predict consequences. The accused who runs from the crime scene may be avoiding capture. An emotional expression, such as crying, remorse, or guilt suggests the accused was aware of his or her behavior, and this element should be explored The need to confess is a powerful motiva· tor of behavior. Any attempt to conceal aspects of the crime such as hiding a body or a weapon clearly indicates the accused was aware of the wrongfulness of his or her behavior. The manner in which the accused acted is also critical. Was the behavior purposeful, for example, or did it seem erratic? Could gain be predicted from the accused’s action? The clinical evaluation also examines the investigative reports for any evidence consistent with a severe mental disorder. Witness statements can be particularly useful here. Any contradictions between the witness and the accused’s versions of the alleged offense should be explored. The current mental state may also, by inference, be indicative of past mental functioning. The accused who dis· plays the residual characteristics of a psychosis may have had an acute episode earlier. Current borderline personality dynamics may prompt an exploration, through retrospective analysis, of a brief reactive or atypical psychosis.
3-6. Clinical Examples
a. Malingering.
0) An example of feigned mental illness is described first. The clinician received the investi· gative report on the accused who was charged with assault with intent to murder. The accused claimed a voice had ordered him to assault his first sergeant. A thorough review of the investiga· tjve reports and an exhaustive clinical evaluation conc1uded­
(a)
There was no evidence of unusual behav· ior reported by witnesses.

(b)
The accused fled the scene.

(c)
There was no prior history of mental illness.

(d)
The clinical evaluation was normal.

(2)
1t was concluded that no mental disorder was present. The accused later reported that “the voice” was made up. If the presence of a severe mental disease or defect is established, the next step is to examine the ability of the accused to appreciate the wrongfulness of his or her conduct. The mere presence of a severe mental disease or defect is not sufficient. Legally, a causal relation­ship between the severe mental disease or defect and the alleged criminal activity must be estab­lished.

TM 8-240

b. Responsible COl/duel and Severe Mental Ill­ness.
0) An example of an accused with a docu· mented history of a severe mental illness that did not impair responsibility is discussed next. The accused had a long, documented history of schizo· phrenia, paranoid type. He also had a history of episodic violence. The accused was charged with assaulting a girlfriend. The accused cited mental confusion and hallucinations as causaL The foren· sic evaluation established­
(a)
The accused did helVe a severe mental disorder but had just received his periodic intra· muscular neuroleptic.

(b)
Clinically, the accused exhibited no cur· rent signs of psychosis.

(c)
‘rhe accused and his girlfriend had quar· reled over money, and after assaulting her, he fled the scene.

(2)
In this case, there is a severe mental disease, but it had no causal relationship with respect to the criminal behavlOr. The clinician must carefully explore the criminal behavior to determine if any such connection to the mental disease or defect exists.

c. Not Criminally Responsible.
0) An example of a severe mental illness and lack of responsibility is suggested next. The ac­cused was charged with murder. The facts indicate the accused reported to work on time, immediately went into his supervisor’s office and stabbed him. The accused then sat down in the office, looking dazed and confused. The forensic evaluation dis· closed­
(a)
The witness statements described the accused as confused and talking illogically. He kept muttering about a “plot.”

(b)
The clinical evaluation found both cur­rent and past evidence of a psychosis. Specifically, delusional content centered arollnd the accused’s belief that his supervisor was plotting to ki1J him. The accused struck first when a voice told him that his supervisor had hired some “hit men.”

(2)
In this case, the presence of a seVere mental disease, coupled with the markedly illogi. cal reasoning, substantially impaired the accused’s ability to appreciate the full context of his behav­ior. The mental disease or defect was intimately intertwined with the subsequent cri)ninal behav­ior. There was no apparent goal other than “self· defense.”

d. Somnambulism and Responsibility.
(1) A situation where responsibility for crimi­nal conduct was affected involved a newly married sergeant who waS being evaluated after assaulting his wife. The sergeant recalled falling asleep and
\ 8-240

ver81  hours  laler  awakening  because  of  his
(”  reams.  The  intervening  period  was  a
11.  ,Ie wife provideu the missing information.

,e was herself awakened when her husband lrted yelling and then repeatedly struck her. Ie screamed; he finally “awakened” and \vas ofoundly upset at his behavior. Neighbors rc­rted the incident to the police upon hearing the reams. There were no marital problems hut cent job stresses had taken a lolL The sergeant 15 moody and irritable. Similar somnambulistic havior had occurred before.
(2) 8ince the facts of this case satisfy the quirements of the insanity defense, if referred r trial, the defense of insanity could prevail.
e, Amnesia and Responsibility.
(1)
In a different case, an officer was ch’:lrged lth attempted rape. The accused claimed amne· 9;. He could provide no details of his behavior ~fore, during, or after the attempted rape. Collat­al data disclosed the furtive behavior employed r the accused to accost the :victim. During the .tack, he threatened harm if the victim screamed. fter the unsuccessful rape, the accused fled. linical evaluation discovered no mental illness.

(2)
In this case, the court would probably find IP ..,tally responsible for the crime because he ~t if he were doing something wrong. Amne­a ….J itself is insufficient to rebut the necessary ental state. In addition, even if amnesia resulted am a severe mental disorder, the causal relation­lip must be proved.

-7. Portiol Mentol Responsibility
a.
Impact on Criminal Culpability. Partial men­11 responsibility (PMR) does not exonerate crimi­a1 conduct. PMR focuses on intent or that mental .ate whereby the person both knows and wishes lat certain consequences will follow a certain ctivity. All criminal offenses have both a physical nd a cognitive component. The physical compo­ent, or the guilty deed itself, is the actus reus. In lUrder, for example, the actus reliS is homicide. ‘he cognitive element in criminal offenses, the vi! or criminal mind, is referred to as the mens

w.
In murder then, the mens rea is the malice forethought or desire to harm.

b. Degrees of Mens Rea. PMR lies exclusively lithin the domain of the emotional element of riminal offenses, or the mens rea. Different rimes have different mens rea, with the more evil or criminal mind” present, the greater the Ie s. Thus, premeditated murder, which may
a. Je death penalty, requires that the accused pecifically intend to km the victim and consider he act of killing before committing the homicide.
1-4
Unpremeditatell murder requires an “intent to kill or inflict great bodily harm, but does not require consideration of the klJling act. Lesser forms of homicide, such as involuntary manslaughter and negligent homicide,. require no intent to kill.
c. Mitigating and Extenuating Factors.
(1)
PMR can negate the following special states of mind required for some crimes: specific intent, knowledge, willfulness, and premeditation. PMR will not, however, negate a genera] criminal intent. Where an offense requires specific intent, and no lesser included offenses requiring general criminal intent are raised by the evidence at trial, PMR will act as a complete defense.

(2)
Factors that do not exonerate criminal beha\’ior but instead may reduce the accused’s sentence are referred to as mitigating circllm­stances. PMR is generally such a mitigating cir­cumstance. The defense may argue, for example, that a mental disorder impaired the accused’s ability to premeditate or deliberate due to the “fogging” effect of acute alcohol intoxication. Again, the evaluating officer must not perempto­rily conclude that any mental disorder, including substance abuse, necessarily vacates higher cogni­tive functioning. The accused’s behavior must be carefully studied, again using collateral data.

d.
Intent. In some Cllses, the clinician is re­qnestcd to provide opinions regarding specific and general intent. A general intent is an element of virtually all crimes. Specific intent, which is re­quired for some offenses, encompasses general intent and further requires a singular state of mind. Some simple assaults arc general intent crimes. Assault with intent to commit murder is a specific intent crime, requinng that the accused’s assault on the victim be accompanied by the specific intent to murder. The presence of a mental disorder may, thus, negate the specific intent element, but the accused may nonetheless be guilty of a ·lesser included offense requiring only general intent (e.g., assault with a means likely to produce death or grievous bodily harm, a crime requiring no specific intent).

e.
Clinical Example of PMR. An example of PMR, with its exclusive focus on mitigating the degree of mens rea, involves alcohol abuse. The accused was charged with premeditated murder after a barroom brawl left a former friend dead. During the trial, the accused’s extensive alcohol abuse history was described. This information, along with recent marital and job stress, the unplanned nature of the murder, and the accused’s grief after learning of the death, all lessened the “criminal mind” aspect and resulted in conviction for unpremeditated murder.

1M 8-240

CHAPTER 4 COMPETENCY

4-1. Introduction
a.
In the absence of evidence to the contrary, the law presumes that a person is competent to make decisions, conduct business, and stand trial if accused of a crime. The terms “competency” and “responsibility” are, at times, improperly used interchangeably. The major difference between competency and responsibility is a temporal one. The court is concerned with the accused’s mental state at two points in time. The court needs an assessment to determine responsibility when the offense was committed. At the time of the trial, the court is concerned with the mental state of the accused to insure competency.

b.
There are a number of legal areas where competency issues are raised. In the criminal setting, this includes the ability to stand trial, to make a confession, and, in capital sentencing cases, competency to be executed. The major differ­ence between civil and criminal competency lies in meeting more stringent proof requirements for criminal proceedings. This is reflective of the more severe penalties and loss of life and liberty inter· ests that a criminal trial may produce.

(1) Affect on Trial Proceedings. Once an issue of competency is raised and an evaluation ordered, the trial proceedings halt. The trial cannot con· tinue until a judicial decision, based on expert opinion, is reached, concluding that the accused is competent to stand trial.
(2)
Competency to Stand Trial. To ensure fair· ness in the judicial system, a defendant must be capable of participating in hislher own defense. If a mental disorder supervenes, the accused may not be able to logically pursue hislher defense. If the attorney working with the accused suspects a mental disorder is impairing cognitive functioning, the attorney must report the matter and relevant facts to the authority empowered to order a sanity evaluation. Although the concept of competency has been present since the earliest recorded his· tory, an exact definition remained elusive. The controversy reached the Supreme Court in Dusky

v.
United States 362 U.S. 402 (1960). Dusky pro­vides the guiding language for criminal compe· tency. The opinion states that a competency test “must be whether he (the accused) has sufficient present ability to consult with his lawyer with a

reasonable degree of rational understanding-and whether he has a rational as well as factual understanding of the proceedings against him.” In the U.S. Army this has been rephrased by ReM 909 to read-“Does the accused possess sufficient mental capacity to understand the nature of the proceedings against himJher and to conduct or cooperate intelligently in hislher defense?” The cause of the lack of mental capacity must be a mental disease or defect.
(3) Two Purts of Competency. In both stan­dards a vohhonal and a cognitive eJement are present. The military volitional element of the competency standard requires the accused have the ability “to conduct or cooperate intelligently in hislher defense.” The cognitive component requires that “the accused possess sufficient mental capac­ity to understand the nature of the proceedings against himJher.” In other words, a clear mind and emotional stability are important, and distur­bances in either can impair competency.
4-2. Conducting a Competency to
Stand Trial Evaluation
a. The Competency Assessmen.t.
(1)
The competency evaluation will carefully evaluate the accused’s present mental state. Par· ticular emphasis will be placed on the cognitive and volitional elements necessary to traverse the justice system. The competency assessment should evaluate­

(a)
The accused’s understanding of available defenses.

(b)
The risk of unmanagable conduct.

(c)
The ability to relate to the attorney.

(d)
The ability to develop legal strategies.

(e)
Whether the accused has a basic under­standing of the justice system.

(f)
The accused’s understanding of the charges with the possible sanctions.

(g)
The ability to propose a possible outcome of the process.

(h)
The ability to provide information to defense counsel.

(i)
The ability to rebut Government claims.

(j)
The ability to testify appropriately.

(k)
The preSence of significant self·defeating behavior.

TM 8-240
(2) A determination of the degree of impair­
,ent is then made. Deficits should prompt further investigation. It must be remembered that any deficit must be causally related to a mental disor­der. Apathy, indifference, and malingering do not impair competency.
b. Appraising Legal Defenses. The evaluation must determine how capable the accused is of aiding his or her own defense. Useful questions include­
0) What 18 your understanding of the charges?
(2)
How can you best help your attorney help you?

c.
Unmanagablc Conduct. Few things disturb courtroom decorum as much as the noisy, impul­sive, uncontrolled client. The evaluation must determine if inappropriate behavior is the result of a mental disorder that interferes with the accu­sed’s competence. Some defendants are unruly and disruptive yet remain competent. The clinician’s best service is in distinguishing those who cannot appreciate the proceedings or participate in their own defenses. Useful queries to assess this in­

~lude­
(1)
If you find something objectionable in the ucial proceedings, how best can you express your­self?

(2)
What effect will continued disruptive be­havior have on your trial?

d. The Ability to Relate to the Attorney.
(1)
Simple lack of confidence in the attorney is not sufficient. There must be a mental disorder present that impedes cooperative conduct. Useful questions include­

(a)
Can you work with your attorney?

(b)
Is your attorney doing his or her best?

(2)
In assessing this aspect of competency, the ability of the accused to relate to the evaluating officer is a useful yardstick. An example of impair­ment would be the patient with a paranoid delu· sional disorder who can trust no one, save himself or herself. A severe lack of trust in anyone, including the accused’s own lawyer, may so handi­cap cooperation that the legal defense is compro­mised. Medical treatment might be indicated be­fore the accused could stand triaL

e. The Ability to Develop Legal Strategies.
(1) The attorney, in formulating the defense ategy, will often propose various options to the ~used. The ability of the accused to consider this
advice is important. Useful questions include­
(a) Would you accept an administrative sep­aration with less than an honorable discharge
(discharge for the good of the Service, AR 635-200, chapter 10) in lieu of a general court~martial, if offered?
(b)
What will be your response if your attor· ney suggests you do not testify?

(2)
Difficulties arise when the accused is resis· tant to any advice and rigidly pursues a course contrary to his or her best interests. The clini­cian’s assessment will help establish whether such apparent behavior is the result of a mental disor­der. Appropriate medical care will intervene if the condition warrants.

f. Basic Understanding of the Military Justice System. For the accused to effectively participate in hislher own defense, a minimal knowledge of the military justice system IS needed. Areas of assessment might include­
(1)
What are the roles of the trial counsel, defense counsel, military judge, and the function of the court members GUry)?

(2)
Do you understand the basic sequence of trial proceedings, such as who performs the cross­examination, the purpose of this, \vho determines the sentence, and what avenues are available if a guilty verdict is reached?

(3)
What will be the consequences if you are sentenced to confinement?

g.
Understanding the Charges and Ppnalt<es. An appreciation of the seriousness of the charges and the range of possible penalties is important infor­mation to gather. A minimizing of the conse­quences, for example, could impair the accused’s ability to effectively work in his or her own defense. Useful inquiries would include­

(1)
What are you charged with?

(2)
What would be a typical sentence should you be found guilty?

h. Assisting Defense Counsel and Rebutting Prosecution Claims. In the overall assessment of competency, the ability to discuss relevant issues and counter prosecution charges is paramount. In general, the clinician’s detailed review of the accused’s version of the alleged criminal activity may prove helpful in this assessment. The exami­nation m.ay include­
(1)
Having the accused describe in detail the where, what, when, and how of the alleged crimi· nal conduct.

(2)
A careful mental status examination with special attention to potential memory deficits_

i.
The Ability to Testify Appropriately. This par· ticular element is best determined by the ability of the accused to render a logical account of his or her behavior and to respond appropriately to ex­amination and cross-examination by counsel.

Clearly, t.he presence of a psychosis would exclude the ability to testify relevantly_
J. Self-Defeating Behavior. In some mental disor­ders, the drive for expiation is so great. that no attempt is made to defend oneself. Instead, t.he accused eagerly ant.icipates, and desires, the most stringent punishment possible. This is to be con­trasted with t.he truly repent.ant individual, who while acknowledging wrongdoing, does not wish an exaggerated punishment. Useful inquiries in­clude­
(1)
What punishment is sufficient for what you feel you have done?

(2)
Will you accept a lesser penalty if your attorney can anange it?

4-3. Clinical Examples of Criminal Competency
a. Incompetent. An example where the accused’s mental state impaired competency is described first.
(1) The accused had been recently charged with shoplifting. Prior to the arrest, his military career had been exemplary. In fact, a promotion awaited him. The articles taken were of little value, and t.he soldier had more than enough money on his person to pay for the items. When initially consulting with his attorney, the soldier appeared depressed, lethargic, and withdrawn. Questions posed by the attorney were answered
TM 8-240

m01lOsyllabically. The accused did mention he felt he deserved the death penalty. A dingnosis of severe major depression was made.
(2)
In performing the competency evaluation, the evaluating officer opined incompetence due to a mental disorder based 011­

(a)
The inability of the accused to relate to his attorney.

(b)
The lnability to develop a legal strategy.

(c)
The inability to understand the reaSOn· able punishment if found guilty.

(d)
The inability to testify.

(e)
The presence of significant self-defeating behavior.

b.
Competent. A common example where compe­tency is usually unaffected is the emotionally upset pre·trial detainee.

0) A soldier was placed in detention after being AWOL while pending court-martial for drug possession and distribution. Once incarcerat.ed, the soldier was found crying, anxious, and vOlcmg vague suicidal ideations.
(2) The mental status and competency eyalua­tions disclosed no cognitive or volitional ImpaIr­ment. The accused clearly understood his predica­ment and even posited viable defense strategies. His concern arose primarily from n fear of a possibJe guilty verdict. The accused “·.’3S returned to pretrial detention with suicide precautions and mental health followup.
1M 8-240

CHAPTER 5 THE CRIMINAL FORENSIC EVALUATION
reaffirm the limits. If pursued to trial, the accused

5-1. Introduction
a.
Special Defense of Insanity Plea. Under Fed­eral law and the UCMJ, the insanity plea is considered an affirmative or special defense. As such, the accused does not deny the facts which give rise to the charge hut instead provides evi· denee that will excuse criminal culpability. The accused has the burden of proving, by clear and convincing evidence, that helshe is not guilty by reason of insanity. Cooperation in the Sanity Board process must exist with either the accused, defense counsel, or both. If the Sanity Board finds such cooperation lacking with the accused, the presence of a mental disease or defect must first be explored. Lacking this explanation, counsel should be contacted and the situation discussed. In rare cases, the Sanity Board may be unable to render an opinion and should so state in writing.

b.
Impact of Noncompliance. In one example, defense counsel requested a Sanity Board. The order for inquiry into the accused’s mental state was prompted by his unusual behavior during commission of the offense. When instructing his client, counsel advised the accused not to discuss anything concerning the day in question. Although it was apparent the accused could provide vital information to the Sanity Board, he dutifully obeyed counsel’s instructions. The Sanity Board was unable to render an opinion. A statement indicating that the order for inquiry into the mental state of the accused could not be accom­plished, and the reasons were submitted to the convening authority. Subsequently, the defense counsel reversed course and instructed his client to cooperate fully. The Sanity Board eventually opined the presence of a severe mental disease or defect and a resultant inability of the accused to appreciate the nature and quality of his conduct.

5-2. Preparing for the Forensic Evalua­tion
a. Confidentiality. The accused must first be informed of the limits of confidentiality of commu­nications. It is best to have the defense counsel advise the accused of limits of privilege. Subse­quently, at the evaluation the psychiatrist can ask the accused what his or her understanding of the privilege is, and at that time the psychiatrist can
must understand that the clinician may have to testify. As such, the accused’s statements to the clinician may not be protected. The accused should fu)”ther be advised that during the evaluation, notes will be taken. and anything the accused would prefer not to discllss is hislber )”ight. However, lack of information may impede the ability of the Board to render a useful opinion. The accused must be inO’tructed that at the conclusion of tlle evaluation, a written report will be gener· ated. Prior to trial, certain safeguards exist so that the full report generally only goes to defense counsel. Only the Board’s conclusions are Seen by the trial counsel The Fifth Amendment or UCMJ, Article 31 warning should not be given to the accused.
b. Limited Privilege. The Military Rule of Evi· dence (MRE) 302 establishes a privilege in favor of the accused. MRE 302 states:
“(a) General rule. The accused has a privi­lege to prevent any statement made by the accused at a mental examination 0)”­dered under ReM 706 and any derivative evidence obtained through use of such a statement from being received into evi­dence agaInst the accused on the issue of guilt or innocence 0)” during sentencing proceedings. This privilege may be claimed by the accused notwithstanding the fact that the accused may have been warned of the rights provided by MRE 305 at the examination.”
(b) Exceptions. 0) There is no privilege under this rule when the accllsed first introduces into evidence such statements of derivative evidence.
(2) An expert witness for the prosecution may testify as to the reasons for the expert’s conclusions and the reasons therefore as to the mental state of the accused if expert testimony offered by the defense as to the mental condition of the accused has been received in evidence, but such testimony may not extend to state­ments of the accused except as provided in (1).
TM 8-240
(e) Release of evidence. If the defense of­fers expert testimony concerning the men­tal condition of the accused, the military judge, upon motion, shall order the re­lease to the prosecution of the full con­tents, other than any statements made by the accused, of any report prepared pursu~ ant to ReM 706. If the defense offers statements made by the accused at such examination, the military judge may upon motion order the disclosure of such state­ments made by the accused and contained in the report as may be necessary in the interests of justice.
(d) Noncompliance by the accused. The military judge may prohibit an accused who refuses to cooperate in a mental examination authorized under ReM 706 from presenting any expert medical testi­mony as to any issue that would have been the subject of the mental examina­tion,
(e) Procedure. The privilege in this rule may be claimed by the accused only under the procedure set forth in MRE 304 for an objection or a motion to suppress. If the accused invokes the privilege at this court-martial, any direct statements made in the course of the sanity board evalua­
tion may not be testified to at trials unless the door is opened by the accused or his defense team. This right exists regardless of whether the accused received Fifth Amendment or VCMJ, Article 31 warnings
5-3. Conducting the Evaluation
a. General. A request for inquiry into the men­tal capacity and mental responsibility of the ac­cused may be received before, during, or after a trial. That same request must specify the basis for the request. Since the legal system is not expert in determining impairment, a mental evaluation should be requested if the military justice system questions the presence of a mental disease or defect. The hypothesis correlating mental illness with the alleged criminal conduct or lack of compe­tence to stand trial ideally should be described in the initial request.
b. Collateral Data.
(1) Collateral information is imperative. Gen­~ally, defense counsel is the source for these
aterials. At a minimum, the Board should re­ceive­
(a)
The charge sheet.

(b)
Military Police (MP) records.

(c)
Criminal Investigation Division (CID) re­porL

(d)
Sworn statements.

(e)
The VCMJ, Article 32 proceedings (if

done). (fJ Selected military records. (g} Blood alcohol tesUdrug testing results.
(h)
Medical/Alcohol and Drug Abuse Pre­vention and Control Program (ADAPCP) records.

(2)
In addition, the Board may find it useful to interview commanders, co-workers, family mem­bers, and others who know the accused.

c.
Responding When the Order Directs Specific Tests. The request itself may contain specific conditions. Issues such as discrete medical or psychological tests, composition and qualification of the Board members, and requests for recording the evaluation may be present. Any such requests must be evaluated in terms of existing rules as outlined in RCM 706c and proper medical care. For example, RCM 706c does not require: a foren­sic psychiatrist, a Board of three psychiatrists, specific medical tests, specific psychological tests, Or audio/video recordings. In fact, RCM simply states that “Normally, one member of the Board shall either be a psychiatrist or a clinical psycho10­gisL” The tests that should be ordered are the proper province of the Sanity Board, not the legal system. The Board should explain that the diag· nostic tests are not randomly ordered, are expen­sive, and time consuming. The mental status of the accused determines what, if any, tests are needed.

d.
Speedy Trial Rules-The military has a strict requirement for a speedy trial, and violation of this rule can result in dismissal of charges. Rule 707 of the MCM in part, notes:

“The accused shall be brought to trial within 120 days after notice to the ac­cused of preferral of charges or imposition of restraint when the accused is in pre­trial … for the same or related charges. The following periods shall be excluded when determining whether the period of this rule has run, including (a) any exami­nation into the mental capacity or respon­sibili ty of the accused; or (b) any hearing on the capacity of the accused to stand trial and any time during which the ac­cused lacks capacity to stand trial. When the accused is in pretrial arrest or confine­ment, immediate steps shall be taken to bring the accused to triaL No accused shall be held in pretrial arrest or confine­ment in excess of 90 days for the same or related charges.”
In [! similar f[!shion, requests for recording or for the presence of the ~ttorney during the evaluation o:houJd be disconrage(] The Boarel must have the ability to conduct the evaluation as free from artifJci[!1 distraction as possible.
e. Scheduling the Interview. The first appoint­ment with the accused should be scheduled as soon as possible. This is usually cDonlin[!ted with the trial counsel.
f Revielcing the Order (or Inquiry. The clinician should carefully review the request for inquiry into the mental capacity for mental responsibility of the accused. This outlines the specific questions that must be answered. The evaluation should be structured to gather the necessary information.
g. Components o{ the Clinical Intervlew. The basic interview consists of­
0) The accused’s statement, in detail, describ­ing the offense. A discussion of behavior before, during, and after the offense should be examined. The role of substance abuse in the accused’s mental state is reviewed.
(2)
A thorough review of social/family history. The emphasis should be on relationships, school and work performance, past legal and psychiatric history. A sexual history also is done. All of this is reviewed to estabJish the presence of an enduring pattern of maladaptive behavior.

(3)
The mental status examination.

11. The lI,ledical Evaluation.
0) The clinical interview also includes a med­ical evaluation. If a clinical psychologist is the only member of the Sanity Board, then a need exists to request the appropriate consultation from a competent medical authority. Accordingly, such an individual would have to be apprised of the nature of the request far consultation as well as informing the accused of the request. A detailed history of head injuries, convulsions, amnesia, headaches, and general health is taken. When medically indicated, perform­
(a) A physical exam (with a screening neu­rologic exam).
TM 8-240
(b)
Routine laboratory studies.

(c)
A computerized tomogrum scan or mag·

netic resonance imaging. (el) An electroencephalogram.
(2)
Other specialty examinations shouJd be performed when warranted. IVledical consultation should be requested when appropriate.

i.
Psychological Testing. If psychological testing is :indicated, the case may be revie·wed with a clinical psychologist to help determine the tests best suited for clarification of the clinical diagno­sis.

j.
Hospitalization (or Evaluation. If it will aid the examination and help avoid deJays, the patient may be hospitalized in order to facilitate determin­ing mental status. The accused should not rou­tineJy be admitted, but only when circumstances dictate. Some of the conditions walTanting inpa­tient evaluation are if­

(1)
The accused is mentally or physically ill and meets the usual criteria for admission.

(2)
A large battery of testing is planned and an inpatient status would be more efficient. If the patient is admitted both defense counsel and trial counsel should be notified. Obtaining guards, when necessary, is coordinated through the trial counsel, unit commander, or detention facility.

k.
Need (or Expedited Evaluations. The MCM authorizes recesses or adjournments in the trial proceedings when necessary to determine the accu­sed’s mental state. In general, however, unneces­sary delays should be avoided in conducting the examination. The accused is entitled to a speedy trial which, if violated, could result in dismissal of charges.

l.
Responding to a Con{ession. If a confession to the alleged criminal conduct occurS during the evaluation, the evaluator should confer with the defense attorney. If the accused admits culpability for an uncharged offense (such as chiJd abuse) in which the admission must be repeated officially, the evaluator should consult with the defense attorney and trial counsel if he or she reasonably believes that the events may have occurred.

TM 8-240

CHAPTER 6 APPLICATION OF THE MENTAL RESPONSIBILITY STANDARD

6-1. General
This chapter provides clinical guidance for inte­grating the medical diagnosis with legal issues. Specific mental diseases or defects are reviewed with respect to the mental responsibility standard. Obviously, such a review can never be complete. Scientific advances require the clinician to consult authoritative periodicals. ]n addition, the complex­ities of human behavior and the variations that each accused’s alleged crime present require flexi· hility. Furthermore, no specific mental disease or defect automaticaBy equates with lack of mental responsibility. The presence of a severe mental disease or defect is only a portion of the data considered. The remainder concentrates on the impact of mental disease or defect on criminal behavior.
6-2. Substance Use Disorders
Q. Voluntary Use of Intoxicants. Over half of all violent offenses are committed by an accused under the influence of drugs or alcohol. Property offenses (burglary, arson, fraud) have similar rates. Also important are arrests where substance use was the offense, such as drunkenness, disor· derly conduct, driving under the influence, and drug abuse violations. Clearly, society is perme· ated by substance abuse. The line between sub­stance use and disorder is based on clinical judg· ment. At a minimum, substance use must promote some degree of social or occupational dysfunction. Except under certain conditions, social or occupa­tional impairment is not at the level of a severe mental disease or defect. With perhaps one excep­tion, substance abuse will not esculpatc. Intoxica· tion may negate the specific intent requirement for UCMJ, Article 121 offenses of “larceny or wrongful appropriation.” In the absence of this specific intent, voluntary intoxication may be a complete defense. The voluntary use of alcohol embodies the assumption that the drinker or drug· taker is aware of the risks entailed with excess consumption. Drinking beyond personal limits then becomes a matter of choice. Drug use has one potential difference. Illicit drugs may be produced with varying levels of quality controL Although voluntarily used, the exact composition of the
substance could be a partial mystery. Still, the user assumes this risk.
b.
Subsiance Use as a Mitigating Factor. Sub· stance use then is not often legally advanced in hopes of attaining a non·responsibility acquittal. Instead, the substance use is offered as a mitigat· ing fuctor on the intent element or in hope~ of reducing the sentence. Defense counsel may assert that, secondary to the mind·altering effects of drugs or alcohol, specific intent could not be formulated. Thus, the crime of premeditated mur· der may be reduced to unpremeditated murder. It does not follow that substance use always removes the requisite knowledge or special state of mind required by law for premeditated acts. The amount of alcohol or drug used, the social setting, whether the accused had eaten, prior experience with the substance, the time interval between use and criminal act, the presence of purposeful goal· directed behavior such as flight or concealment, environmental factors related to behavioral expres· sian, the relationship between accused and victim, and any potential gains from the criminal conduct must all be explored to determine the effects of substance use on cognitive abilities.

c.
The Effects ofAlcohol. Alcohol is a disinhibit· ing substance. Behavioral controls are relaxed with use. The normally nervous, shy individual may feel emboldened when certain psychological defenses are weakened. In a different fashion, some individuals “drink to forget” seeking the mind and body-numbing anesthetic·Jike properties of alcohol. As drinking continues, a complex inter· play between alcohol, environment, and personal­ity dynamics emerges. The individual, now gener­ally aware of the intoxication, adopts a less socially motivated stance and turns instead to an “I don’t care” attitude. Previous frustrations, not as firmly held in check by social or individual restraints, may now be vented. Thus, an individ· ual prone to depression may become suicidal while the fundamentally angry person becomes the via· lent drunk.

d.
Alcohol and Severe MenIal illness. Certain alcohol-induced conditions may relieve accountabil­ity for criminal behavior. Alcohol hallucinosis, alcohol withdrawal delirium, and dementia associ· ated with alcoholism may qualify as severe mental

TM 8-240
sorders. The clinical examiner must then deter­
line if the alcohol-related mental disorder caused the accused to be unable to appreciate the wrong­fulness of his or her conduct. Alcohol idiosyncratic intoxiCLltion, a pathological intoxication, is an un­usual variation. In people who suffer from this rare disorder, ingestion of small amounts of alco­hol may be associated with violent behavior. A pre-existent brain injury, such as trauma or infec­tion, may be a predisposing factor. The accused is usually amnestic for the episode. This disorder might remove the mens rea or “criminal mind” producing a successful defense. The clinician must still be w.reful 10 elicit the full history since this diagnosis is subject to fabrication. In addition, if the accused knew the effect that alcohol created, the prosecution could argue that he or she should have refrained from its use. In this case, a defense based on alcohol is shallow and might not exoner­ate the accused or mitigate the circumstances.
e. Drug Use and Severe Mental Illness. When drug use induces a psychosis or delirium, as with alcohol, the necessary mental stale required for criminal activity may be absent. A careful history of drug use should include­
0) The types of drugs used.
(2)
The quantity of drugs used.

(3)
The drug cost and source of financing.

(4)
The roule(s) of administration.

(5)
The social setting where use occurs.

(6)
The relationship of accused to victim.

(7) How the accused treats “bad lrips.” f Cnmlnal Case Involving Drug Abuse. A clini­
cal example is a soldier who had been steadily increasing his consumption of amphetamines. His mental state correspondingly deteriorated inlo frank paranoia. While on board an aircraft cnroute to a new assignment, the soldier became convinced that his life was in jeopardy. He sought to hijack the aircraft and avoid a certain deadly fate. The clinician who later evaluated the accused rendered a diagnosis of amphetamine delusional disorder. The soldier was unable to appreciate the wrongful­ness of his behavior, the clinician opined. The jury
agreed and the accused was declared not guilty by reason of insanity.
g. The Importance of External Information. Cer­tain collateral data is helpful in determining the substance user’s mental statc. The military police report con talUs a section on the subject’s behavior. Alcohol on the breath and behavioral observations
uch as slurred speech are also noted. In such .:ases, a toxicology screen is finally performed at a local medical treatment facility (MTF) in some proximity to the arrest location. This information may not initially be included in the investigative reports since results will be pcnding. The clinician “,hould make every effort to review these drug and alcohol reports.
6-3_ Intellectual Impairment (Mental

Defect)
a.
Intellectual Functwning. The complete foren· sic evaluation requires an assessment of intellec­tual functioning. Disturbances in cognitive and social skills may be either developmental as in mental retardation or occur later in life as a dementia. Regardless of etiology, the clinician should look for any significant changes in func­tioning. Severe mental retardation may render the accused not mentally responsible. Severe mental retardation is probably nonexistent in the active duty population. More likely, mild intellectual impairment may qualify as a mitigating factor.

b.
Determining Mental Impatrment. Appraisal of mental deficiency is a multidimensional analysis which combines assessments of general intellec­tual functioning and adaptive skills. The thorough clinical forensic evaluation of the accused allows for a rough estimate of intellectual functioning. The individual’s social and work history is also important. The clinician should also review the General Technical scores from the Army Service Vocational Aptitude Battery. This test, which IS taken by all enlisted soldiers, is a measure of math and English scores.

c.
Sta.ndardized Tests. Psychological testing of intelligence is indicated when evidence of mental deficiency arises in the clinical forensic evaluation. The accused’s case should be discussed with the psychologist and agreement reached on the most appropriate test battery.

d.
Interpreting the Test Data. Care must be taken when relating mental deficiency to issues of responsibility. A man of 23 with a mental age of 8 is much more shrewd and sophisticated and has more worldly experience than a normal 8 year old. Conversely, the crime for which the accused is charged must be within his mental capabilities. The same man of 23 with a mental age of 8 would have difficulty committing computer espionage, for example.

6-4. Amnesia and Altered Stotes of Consciousness
a. Dissociative Disorders. The dissociative disor­den; represent disturbances in identity, memory, or consciousness. The onset and duration is vari­able. The accused who appears to meet criteria for multiple personality, psychogenic amnesia, som· nambulism, or fugue presents a real clinical chal­lenge. The clinical evaluation will be exhaustive,
to eliminate as much as possible the fabricated dissociative event. Most mses of dissociation are preceded by a significant psychosocial stressor. A history of prior episodes is typical. The de novo appearance of a dissociative disorder following illegal activity is highly self·serving. Personality dynamics and psychological testing will aid diag· nosiii.
b.
Amnesia and Criminal Culpability. The law has generally concluded that the accused who experiences amnesia based on a dissociative disor· del’ after commission of an offense is not relieved from criminal responsibility. 1n addition, the ac· cused is NOT unable to stand trial simply because he cannot recall the facts surrounding the offense or antedating its occurrence.

c.
Evaluating the Role of Amnesia. As usual, the nature of the offense should be examined closely. Note any personal gain, evidence of premeditation, relationship between accused and victim, and wit· ness statements characterizing the accused’s be· havior. This wjJl help establish the link between the mental disorder and any causal role played in the alleged criminal activity.

d.
Substance Use and Memory Loss. Blackouts and periods of amnesia are very common in alco· holism. Many drugs, however, including barbitu­rates and benzodiazepines, also impair the ability to register and retain new information. With alcohol, amnesia of Varying degrees may be a symptom but it does not relieve criminal responsi­bility. A more complex issue involves an idiosyn· cratic response to a legal prescription drug. In some cases, intoxication which is the unexpected resuJt of a substance taken pursuant to medical advice or a legal prescription is characterized as “involuntary,” and the accused is relieved of crim­inal responsibility for his or her acts while intoxi­cated.

6-5. Seizure Disorders
The accused may not be held legally responsible for an act consequent to a seizure. An exception would occur if the accused knew, or should have known, of the likelihood that the seizure would occur. Noncompliance with medication is an exam­ple. The clinician must establish that necessary link between seizure and resultant act. The mere history of a seizure is insufficient without this causal connection. In addition, the clinician should be suspicious of any trance state which developed for the first time in the context of criminal behavior. The diagnosis of a seizure disorder is often based on a history of repeated episodes. One would expect to find that prior episodes antedated
TM 8-240
the offense. An electroencephalogram and neurolo· gic cvalulltion may be required in some cases.
6-6. Organic Mental Disorders

There are many medical conditions that may cause acute or chronic impairment in brain function. Trauma, metabolic states, toxins, cerebral vascular injuries, and drugs are a few. Various symptoms suggestive of cognitive impairment may occur such as defects in judgment, memory, and attention. The ability to formulate plans may be compro· mised.

6-7. Impulse Control Disorders

a.
Characteristics. The impulse control disorders represent the failure to resist an impulse, drive, or temptation. A pattern of tension before with relief after the act is characteristic. This category in· cludes the intermittent explosive disorder, klepto· mania, pyromania, and pathological gambling. All have significant legal complications. With the possible exception of intermittent explosive disor· del’, these disorders generally will not exonerate. The defense attorney may offer the mental disease or defect as a mitigating fador, however. The primary reason such disorders will fail is the elimination of the volitional element in the revised insanity defense. In the military, the inability to control conduct, when due to a mental disorder such as pyromania, will no longer vacate responsi· bility.

b.
Intermittent Explosive Disorder. An accused may relate symptoms required for a diagnosiS of intermittent explosive disorder for self·serving pur· poses. The clinician should carefully exclude per· sonality disorders and substance abuse. The possi· bility of an organic basis for the disturbance should likewise be explored. Typically, the vio· lence seen in this disorder is totally out of propor­tion to the provocation. There should be a history of prior episodes if the diagnosis is valid. The nature of the attack, the mental state of the accused, and the behavior immediately afterwards will help decide the issue of responsibility.

6-8. Personality Disorders
a. Definition. In the mental non·responsibility standard, the term “severe mental disease or defect” does not include an abnormality mani· fested only by repeated criminal or otherwise antisocial conduct, or minor disorders such as non·psychotic behavior disorders and personality defects. The attempt is to specifically disallow a defensive strategy that concentrates solely on a pattern of misconduct and which Jacks any evi­dence of significant mental illness.
1M 8-240
b. Differences of Opinion. The medical and legal ‘ofessions view character in different ways. Per­-,nality disorders are considered a mental illness,
with significant subjective distress and functional impairment, by the medical community. Elaborate theories have been advanced to explain charactero­logical development. Since, in most cases, the personality structure does not diminish the cogni­tive ability to appreciate wrongfulness, the person­ality disorder will not meet the military test for insanity. The blaming, rationalizing, prevaricating defenses only strengthen this supposition. When the clinician does assert that mental responsibility or intent is affected by personality dynamics, the well·prepared clinician will anticipate the need to explain the opinion in detail.
c. Personality and Responsibility. In assessing the impact a personality disorder may have on culpability, the clinician must remember that the real question is not one of classification but of effect. It is prejudicial to rigidly assume that individuals with personality disorders in all cir­cumstances are fully responsible for their behav­ior. There may be rare occasions when a particu­larly severe character defect may impair the accused’s ability to form the required mental state <md remove the ability to appreciate the wrongful­
ess of behavior. This would most likely OCcur in Lhe cluster A disorders of paranoid, schizoid, and schizotypal, where cognition is already distorted. Actual psychotic regression may accompany cer­tain personality disorders also. The clinician must make sure that such distinctions are based on specific data. Attacks of frenzy and violent temper frequently punctuate t.he careers of individuals with severe personalit.y disorders and should not be mistaken for a psychosis.
d. Personality and Intent. Sometimes personality disorders will be so severe that they could destroy the required mental state. In those cases, a clear, well-reasoned forensic report that is not based on psychological theory is expected. Personality disor· ders may also be of such severity as to impair the accused’s ability to entertain a specific intent and thus raise t.he issue of partial mental responsibil­ity. As usual, the mere finding of a personality disorder is insufficient in determining whether the required state of mind was present. How the presence of the personality disorder shaped the actual offense, thus affecting the accused’s mental processes, must be explained.

6-9. Sexual Disorders
a. Importance of Objectivity. Many of the sexual disorders never COme to the attention of the men­tal health system until the offender is arrested.
Frequently this results in tension between the medical and legal system. With emphasis on treat­ment, the medical community may clash with the legal system’s interest in punishment and safety. Sexual crimes often arouse much moral indigna· tion and potentially bias the clinician’s evaluation. The clinician, however, should introduce a note of objectivity to ensure a fair forensic review. Of particular importance in this area is child sexual abuse. The emotionality and outrage genemted in these cases markedly impact all the participants in the justice system. The profound affect associ­ated with these types of cases, especially upon reaching the trial stage, tends to overshadow the known scientific aspects of these disorders.
b. Foe-us of Evaluation. In evaluating the ac­cused charged with a sexual crime, the focus should not be exclusively on the sexual aspects. Personality dynamics, mental deficiency, and psy­chosis must be considered. The existence of sexual misconduct alone will not relieve responsibility. Of unique relevance in such cases is the potential for successful treatment and rehabilitation of the of· fender, the victim, and the family involved (if any).
c. Sexual Disorders and Responsibility. In most sexual disorders, except where psychosis or other more severe illness supervenes, the accused knows the particular act is wrong. This is shown by the fact that the accused sought to perform the act in private, or under calculated or clandestine circum­stances. All this suggests a knowledge of wrongful­ness. If the offense occurs only under the influence of drugs or alcohol, criminal responsibility is still not affected.
d. Sexual Crimes and the UCMJ. Celtain crimes have a sexual element as a component. Rape and murder, for example, do not require that the offender be tried only on the sexual issue. The accused may be accused of both rape and murder. Certain sexual behavior (voyeurism, exhibitionism) is not specifically condemned in the UCMJ, but an offender may be brought to trial under Articles 133 (conduct unbecoming an officer and a gentle­man) or 134 (general article).
e. Structure of the Sexual History. The clinician who assesses the sexual offender should consider whether­
(1)
The sexual behavior, particularly the para­philias, are a source of gratification.

(2)
The behavior is covert and furtive.

(3)
The behavior is repetitive.

(4)
The individual is distressed about the sex­ual impulses.

(5)
Family dynamics are present which are suggestive of certain offenses, such as with incest.

TM 8-240

(6)
Child abuse is present in the 3ccused’s developmental history.

(7)
There are problems in relationships with parents, women, sexu~l orientation conflicts, and employment or financial difficulties.

(8)
Pornographic materials have been used by the accused.

(9)
In pedophilia, coercion, threats, and other inducements were used to overcome a victim’s resistance. This is characteristic of the ability to plan and premeditate the pedophilia and thereby minimize detection.

(IO) Sexual sadism, as contrasted to other forms of sexual assault, is present. This is distinc­tive in the degree of violence whlch exceeds that required to gain compliance_ Arousal is purely secondary to inflicting pain.
r. The Evaluation of Children. In forensically evaluating children who are the apparent victims of abuse, the clinician should be skilled in those unique interviewing techniques required. If not, appropriate consultation with a specifically skilled clinician is in the best interests of the child and the legal system.

6-10. Psychosis
Psychosis, a very specific mental state, is charac­terized by disturbances in perception and cogni. tion. In terms of the mental responsibility stan­dard, the clinician should consider a psychosis as “a severe mental disorder.” The details of the offense and witness statements describing the ac­cused in proximity to the offense are needed. Sheer brutality or bizarreness of a crime does not, by itself, provide proof of psychosis. Defense counsel sometimes takes the position that “no sane man would have done a thing like this”-a declaration the clinician cannot accept. To do othenvjse im· plies that anyone can get away with murder by making it seem particularly senseless. In a similar manner, a history of, or even a currently diag· nosed psychosis, does not permit an ipse dixit proclamation of non-responsibility. The usual crite­rion for establishing the necessary mental state, the inability to appreciate the nature or quality or wrongfulness of behavior, is still required.

6-11. Malingering
u. Definition. Malingering is not a mental ill­ness. Malingering is the purposeful simulation or exaggeration of physical or psychological symp· toms. The goal is avoidance of unpleasantries such as certain military duties or legal sanctions. The accused who faces criminal charges may be tempted to fabricate a mental disorder. The clini· cian performing the forensic evaluation must con­sider malingering in the differential diagnosis. Detection of malingering, however, is an inexact arL Cert~in strategies and techniques can aid the scnrrh for ueception. To have considered malinger. ing, analyzed the subject in a methodical manner, and then concluded otherwise, adds signifinlnt credibility to the forensic evaluation.
D_ Detreling MalmgerIng

(1)
The accused feigning an illness must ini­tially overcome hJS or her own anxiety about possible detection. Attempts by the accused to control his or her posture, voice, and motor activ­ity may product a rigid bearing or tightly modu­lated emotions. For example, “leakage” occurs when, despite attempts to control behavior, the anxiety “slips” out. The accused who smiles, yet has an angry voice or denies nervousness while constantly tapping his or her feet, gives mixed signals. This should provide a clue for the clinician to investigate further.

(2)
When deception is suspected, the clinician should concentrate on verbal and hehavioral clues. Visual cues arc mostly distractions and are the most easily manipulated.

(3)
The latency and length of response to questions can provide clues to deception. Long pauses before answering allow time to structure the response. Excessively long or perfunctory an­

swers, particularly jf characteristic of the entire evaluation, may be evasive techniques.
(4)
The accused who is malingering may exag­gerate symptoms. An imprecise knowledge of men­tal illness produces contradictions.

(5)
The degree of cooperatlon may be used to control the content of the interview. The angry accused who takes repeated and unnecessary um­brage effectively limits the evaluation.

(6)
The accused may assume that a simple ipse dixit assertion, “I hear voices,” for example, is a subjective experience incapable of objective veri­fication. In some respects this is true, but accumu· luted clinical experience has identified certain fairly constant attributes of psychiatric symptoms. For instance, auditory hallucinations are the most common perceptual disturbance. Visual hallucina· tions, however, predominate in psychotic disorders with a toxic or physical cause. Psychotic hallucina· tions typically originate “outside the head,” can be differentiated by the sex of the voice, occur regard· less of the presence of other people, and are clear and distinct. The clinician’s experience in mental illness allows the use of discriminating diagnostic details such as these.

(7)
Additional techniques for detecting decep­tion include the use of­

1M 8-240
(a) Open-ended questions which require the

ceused to proceed without benefit of the elini­~i3n’s structured interrogatory.
(b)
Leading questions-while seeking incon­sistencies.

(c)
An extended evaluation session during which malingering becomes more difficult. Inpa­tient observation is a form of extended evaluation

(d)
Collateral data.

(e)
Psychological testing. Certain formal psychological instruments contains subscales de­signed to assess an individual’s attempt to con­sciously appear “bad” from the standpoint of pathology. The clinician again is cautioned to appreciate the validity of the scale used to address the issue of malingering.

TM 8-240

CHAPTER 7 PREPARING THE FORENSIC REPORT
(3) Past Legal History.

7-1. Introduction
a.
Target Audience. At the completion of the forensic evaluation, a complete written report must be generated. It must be remembered that the target audience for the forensic report is not composed of clinicians, but of laymen lawyers, commanders, and jury members with varying de· grees of medical sophistication. As such, the report should be written clearly with as little technical jargon as possible. Complicated terms which are essential to the text should be explained.

b.
Objective. Every effort should be made to make the report objective. Except when answering the questions raised by the order for the Sanity Board, opinions should be absent. Judgmental or prejudicial statements only detract from the credi· bility of the report and thus should be absent. The very manner in which the report is written can convey a certain attitude. Comments such as “I feel” or HI believe” convey less certainty of posi. tion than “In my opinion.” The former should be avoided. Persuasive remarks such as “It is clear” or “It is obvious” as a prologue to a position are rarely convincing.

c.
Specific Language. The precise meaning, in legal terms, of the words “possible” and “prob· able” is a useful distinction. “Possible” implies an almost virtual certainty, i.e., “Anything is possi· ble.” “More likely than not” as a definition of “probably,” however, is more specific and indicates there is at least a 51% chance that a given act will occur.

d.
Completeness. In general, a more complete forensic report results in fewer subsequent re­quests for clarification.

7-2. Structure of the Forensic Report
Q. Suggested Subheadings. The written report should be organized by topical content. The key issue is relevance. In preparing the report, the patient/client should be referred to as the defen­dant, the accused, or by name and rank. The report should contain data which ultimately sup· ports the conclusions. Extraneous data should be omitted. Suggested subheadings for the report include­
(1)
Identifying Information.

(2)
History of the Offense.

(4)
Past Psychiatric History.

(5)
Past Medical History.

(6)
Military Record.

(7)
Social and Family History.

(8)
Mental Status Examination.

(9)
Drug and Alcohol Use.

(10)
Physical Evaluation and Laboratory Stud·

(11)
Psychological Testing.

(2)
Diagnoses.

(13)
Opinions.

b.
Identifying Information. The identifying infor· mation segment of the forensic report should con· tain several elements. In addition to listing the typical medical demographic data, the specific charge for which the defendant stands accused is listed. The reason for the referral is that which is outlined in the order for mental inquiry. The source of the referral is noted, also. The actual time expended in conducting the evaluation is noted. If more than one interview was performed, so indicate. A very important aspect of the forensic report is describing the information the clinician reviewed. The date and times the accused was evaluated, the documents that were reviewed, whether psychological testing was done, and other collateral contacts should be listed. This section should conclude with a statement indicating that the accused was apprised of the nature and pur­pose of the evaluation along with the limits of confidentiality as previously discussed.

c.
History of the Offense. This section should begin with a synopsis of the investigative report, followed by the accused’s version of the offense. In preparing the forensic report, quotations from the accused are more enlightening than the clinician’s inferences drawn from such statements. Any in­consistencies between the investigative report and the accused’s statement should be noted. The use of psychoactive drugs or alcohol at or near the time of the offense is included. The relationship, if any, between the accused and the victim is also noted in the report. This portion of the forensic psychiatric report must be logical and inclusive. The data concerning the charged acts that the clinician uses to form opinions must be present here.

TM 8-240
d_ Past Legal History-The adult and juvenile
imina] history of the accused must be explored. if any doubts persist regarding the adult criminal history, the appropriate arrest records should be sought. At times it maybe necessary to inquire directly regarding certain offenses such as driving under the influence, speeding tickets, and non­support of a spouse. The military record, including any adverse criminal (court-martial or nonjudicial punishment) or administrative action (discharge, letter of reprimand, reduction, etc.), should be noted. The general tenor of counseling statements is often a neglected area.
€. Past Psychiatric History. A careful review of past mental diseases or defects, including sub· stance abuse and treatment, is included in the forensic report.
r Past Medicalllistory. Any condition, such as a severe head injury, which might impact on current mental functioning, is particularly important to include.
g.
Military Record. A list of assignments, awards, and trend of efficiency or evaluation reo ports should be included as relevant. The reason for joining the military is also listed.

h.
Social and Family History. This is an impor. ,t area of the forensic psychiatric report because

. le evidence of many mental diseases or defects which require a longitudinal history may be reo vealed here. Emphasis is placed on relationships throughout life, school performance, charadeI’ of peer /,,’l”OUpS, and substance abuse patterns. An opportunity to explore familiar authority struc· ture, and the accused’s early response is gleaned by inquiring into the typical rewards and punish· ments administered in the family. Further infor­mation in this area can be elucidated by asking, “What is the best and worst thing you did when growing up?” Any collateral contacts with the family, which at times are essential, should be described.
i. Mental Status Examination. The mental sta· tus examination should be thoroughly documented. Direct responses, with the clinician’s assessment following, are far more useful than a conclusory comment such as, “Judgment was impaired.” It is far more compelling to list the accused’s response to the hypothetical question “What would you do if there was fire in a theater?” as “I would quickly leave” as opposed to a summary comment “Judgment was good.” The presence or absence of
‘icidal     or homicidal ideation is indicated. The janie screening component is presented in de· Lail.
J. Drug and Alcohol Use. A thorough history of the patterns of drug and alcohol use must be outlined both in the accused and his family. The clinician should explore all potential drugs of abuse with attention to routes of administration: track marks, for example, may be hidden by clothing.
k. Physical Evaluation (lnd Laboratory Studies. A review of the medical records may suffice if current. Otherwise, appropriate aspects of the physical exam and lab work must be performed.
1. Psychological Testing. If psychometric tests were administered, a summary of the tests per· formed and their results is included. If testing was desired but not able to be performed for a specific reason, this should be indicated in the report. However, it is possible that this may weaken some of the conclusions drawn in the final report. It would be wise for the clinician to suggest to the court that an adequate evaluation should include such additional inquiry and for the court to seek out suitable and qualified psychologists accord· ingly.
m.
Diagnoses. The diagnoses should be listed in accordance with current nomenclature, using the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disor· ders multi·axial system. The report up to this point should provide enough data necessary to sustain the diagnoses.

n.
Opinions. The Sanity Board is asked to reo spond to specific questions. Answers should refer· ence each query directly. In addition to standard questions, the Sanity Board may be asked other questions. If any of these are unclear, written clarification should be received. When responding to the question of responsibility, the exact legal language in the mental responsibility standard should be cited. In other words, if the clinician opines responsible conduct, the response could be: “The accused was able to appreciate the nature and quality of wrongfulness of his or her conduct.” An explanation, buttressed by the forensic report, should follow. All opinions should be qualified by noting, “The opinion set forth is based on ‘reason· able medical certainty’.” This is a legal term addressing the reliability of the opinion. For exam· pIe, if two competing hypotheses could be pro­posed, the one tipping the balance more persua· sively would be an opinion considered reliable to within a “degree of medical certainty.” The clini­cian is not expected to render a conclusory state· ment indicating whether the accused is sane or not. At times it is not possible to formulate an opinion. This may be due to lack of information and should be so indicated. The clinician must remember that all opinions must focus on the presence or absence of a mental disease or defect. There are times when no mental disease or defect

is found in a service member accused of a heinous crime. Prefacing opinions with the proviso “No specific symptoms of a mental disease or defect are currently present” will indicate that not all crimes are committed by individuals ·who are mad. In­stead, the accused may simply be “bad.” The Sanity Board may have been requested to evaluate the capacity of the accused to form that necessary mental state of crime or simply crimil1al intent. Conclusions about capacity for intent are given in the opinion section. Here is an opportunity, when appropriate, for the clinician to disCllSS mental illness as a mitigating circumstance. While not exonerating the accused, it may affect the sen­tence. Finally, as much as possible, avoid using theories of behavior to rationalize criminal activity or buttress clinical opinions.
7-3. Submission of the Report
a.. Abridged Report. The Sanity Board releases
1M 8-240
only the final conclusions to the trial counsel. The order requesting the Sanity Board may also direct this same report be sent to the officer ordering the evaluation, the accused’s commanding officer, the UCMJ, Article 32 investigating officer, the conven· ing authority, and, after referral, to the military judge.
b.
The Full Report. Unless otherwise authorized in the order, the full report may be released only to other medical personnel for medical purposes, the defense counsel, and upon request, the accu­sed’s commanding officer.

c.
Unauthorized Disclosure. Disclosure to the trial counsel of any statement made by the ac­cused to the Board, or any evidence derived from that statement to the trial counsel, is prohibited. Releasing the report to inappropriate personnel, even if done inadvertently, can seriously compro­mise the military justice system’s ability to justly and effectively resolve the accused’s case.

TM 8-240

CHAPTER 8 EXPERT TESTIMONY
8-1. Introduction lawyer should, of course, be clarified before the
a, The opportunity to testify is usually greeted with trepidation by the clinician. The adversarial nature of court proceedings is quite different from the clinician’s usual collegial surroundings. Rarely is the clinician’s judgment challenged as it may be in the courtroom. In a public forum, the clinician explains hislher reasoning and discloses the means by which an opinion was reached. Such exposure is not comfortable. It is important for the expert to understand hislher role in the courtroom. This knowledge, along with certain strategies, will pre­pare the expert for testifying.
b. There are various types of witnesses, all of whom give evidence under oath. The expert wit­ness is a special category. Because the expert possesses knowledge not normally held by the average person, the expert may be qualified to so testify. In the purest sense, the expert is invited into the courtroom to educate the trier of fact. As such, the expert is not bound to comment only on facts directly observed. The expert is allowed to testify regarding an opinion. This opinion is based on professional knowledge and experience, in light of information gathered both directly and indi­rectly about the accused.
8-2. Courtroom Procedure

The usual method of eliciting testimony is by question and answer. A strict procedure is fol­lowed. The lawyer for the party calling the witness asks the first questions. This procedure is called direct examination. Cross·examination fonows and allows the opposing attorney an opportunity to ask questions. The military judge ensures the process progresses smoothly and fairly. In addition, any disputes regarding admissibility of certain aspects of the expert’s testimony are resolved by the military judge. A court reporter will take a verba· tim account of the expert testimony. When not testifying, the expert witness mayor may not, at the discretion of the military judge, be allowed to sit in the audience. Attorneys often desire the expert to be present to comment on facts or opinions offered by the opposing case. This ex­pands the role of the expert witness to that of an on·site consultant. Such an expectation by the actual trial.
8-3. The Mechanics of Expert Testi­mony
u. Pretrzol Preparation.

0) The overall effectiveness of the expert’s testimony is directly proportional to the degree of preparation. It is the attorney’s responsibility to ensure that his or her witness is prepared. Aside from the thorough forensic evaluation itself, a pretrial conference with the attorney is essential. This meeting should clarify several issues such a,­
(0) The exact content of direct. testimony.

(b)
The potential cross·examination ques­tions and likely responses.

(c)
Any special requirements such as the attorney’s request that the expert be present in the courtroom.

(2)
The clinician, as initially stated, must be thoroughly familiar with the case. The expert is better prepared if he or she can testify entirely from memory. However, \vhenever there exists psychological test data from a wide array of instrumentation, a written report of findings should be constructed. This is advised even if it potentiates opposing counsel’s access to the data.

(3)
It is very useful to rehearse the questions and answers for the direct testimony. The initial part of the direct testimony involves a procedure known as “qualifying the expert.” Before the

expert can testify, the clinician must be certified by the military judge as particularly knowledge­able in the subject area. This generally involves questioning the proposed expert about professional training, a complete investigation of his or her experience, and may include questions related to certification, research and publications. For clini· cians, this public display of accomplishments may be embarrassing but, in the legal system, it serves to establish credibility. The clinician should prac· tice qualifying with his or her attorney. It is also advisable to have on hand a current, updated curriculum vitae which, during the qualification phase of the courtroom proceedings, becomes an exhibit.
1M 8-240
(4) Prior to trial, the expert should be reason­

bly available for interview by the opposing coun­sel. The expert should answer questions truthfully and frankly, keeping in mind the MRE 302 privi­leges and restrictions upon releasing information (ReM 706) discussed earlier.
(5) The proper uniform to wear when testify­ing varies and should be clarified in pretrial meetings. The clinicjan can discuss the possibility of bringing notes when testifying. In general, however, the expert presents more forcefully if not fumbling around looking for notes.
b. Presenting Effective Testimony_
(1) The most effective expert witness is thor­oughly familiar with the material and then presents it to the jury clearly, The expert must keep in mind the role of an educator. The exten· sive use of jargon will cause confusion. The clini­cian should reduce opinions to plain language. Substitute “mood” or “emotions” for the term “affect,” for example. Words like “psychosis” need to be defined. Complicated theories of human behavior should be avoided. An important point to remember is that once under oath, every effort should be made to be non-partisan. There is a ‘”>atural tendency to become emotionally invested
a long, difficult case. To portray this, however, .6 to erode credibility. In the final analysis, the clinician is rendering only an opinion. The trier of fact determines the verdict. Even if the clinician answers a question that would hurt counsel’s case, this must be done. In the course of testifying, the expert may be interrupted by an objection of opposing counsel. The witness should remain si· lent until the military judge rules on the objection. Also, the expert witness cannot be limited to simple yes or no answers unless such an answer is sufficient to respond to the question. If a more thorough answer would enlighten the court, the expert witness can request to fully explain the answer.
(2) Another important aspect of effective pre­sentation is to maintain good eye contact with the jury. Once a question has been asked by counsel, the expert witness should provide the answer to the jury. The witness should never joke, argue, or be afraid to indicate a lack of knowledge. Any written materials counsel refers to, or directs questions from, should be requested for review. In addition, texts and journals should not be cited by the expert witness because it is the opinion of the
‘pert concerning the specific case that the court
mts to hear. The expert is not a conduit of written science. In addition, the door is opened for a cross·examination on the merits of the literature cited. If the expert does not understand a question,
8-2
a simple request for clarification is in order. At the conclusion of testimony, unless arranged differ­ently, the expert witness should immediately leave the courtroom. It is proper for the clinician to request to be permanently excused by the military judge where there are other pressing duties and neither counsel has initiated such a request. A normal feeling after testifying is the sense that the testimony was incomplete. None the less, an objective, disinterested and impartial forensic eval­uation and an honest, dispassionate, complete, and clear presentation will be sufficient.
c. Cross-Examination.
0) A good cross-examination will explore in depth the clinician’s thoroughness. The expert witness should remember that credibility as a witness is being measured by total demeanor, not just intellectual capacity. Emotional displays such as anger, arguments, joking, and arrogance detract from the witness’ credibility. Alternately, compas­sion, concern, and appropriate indignation may enhance credibHity. The attorney is obligated to make searching inquiries into the methods and techniques employed by the clinician. It is the witness’ obligation to make this information un­derstandable to the court. It is wise to consider the attorney an expert at his or her craft. The attor· ney is in control in the courtroom. Much of the frustration clinicians feel results from their dimin­ished control.
(2) Certain techniques are useful in helping the witness to testify effectively. First and fore­most, the witness is an expert in his clinical field. The clinician has undergone years of training and clinical experience. The attorney who attempts to challenge the expert in this area has entered the expert’s domain. Usually then, this area is ceded to the witness. This leaves attempts to impeach the credibility of the expert as the dominant tactic. A typical question is, “How many times have you testified for the prosecution as opposed to the defense {or vice versa)?” This attempt is to imply that the expert is a “hired gun” for one side. It might also serve to show inexperience. One can usually preempt such inquiries by discussing the issues on direct examination. Generally, the expert should not quote or seek authority from the medi· cal literature. Instead, all opinions should be buttressed by the expert’s training, experience, and data generated from the specific case. The exception to the rule is the Diagnostic and Statisti­cal Manual. This is the standard authority of psychiatric nomenclature. A tactic of rapid fire questions is best countered with a pause, and then a thoughtful response. The witness can also re­quest clarification or repetition of questions. The
expert must never exaggerate positions, sometimes a consequence of a pushing, zealous cross· examination. The expert can indicate limits of knowledge, a situation that does not display igno· rance, but rather honesty. Conversely, a preten· tious witness may be challenged in a number of areas and be led to cite books or journals, without adequate familiarity with them. No one is ac­quainted with every written reference. The cross, examining attorney typically asks narrowly fo· cused questions. In addition, the attorney may ask leading questions. Remember, this is not an aim­less interrogatory but is intended to lead in a
certain direction,
(3)
The expert can analogize cross·examina· tion to a chess game; responses must always be planned one or two moves ahead. Self·contradic· tion is a most effective means of impeaching credibility. The good attorney preparing for cross­examination takes good notes during direct exami· nation. Weakness will be exploited in cross· examination. Approach such a situation with honesty and humility tempered with firmness.

d.
Hypothetical Questions. Generally, hypotheti· cal questions can only be asked of an expert witness. Hypothetical questions permit the expert to form conclusions based on a variety of alleged facts. The court determines which set of facts is true. In framing the hypothetical question, the attorney furnishes the clinician with a scenario, always on evidence presented in the case, The witness provides an expert opinion in response to questions asked about issues raised by the “hypo”

1M 8-240
thetical” scenario. ]f any facts are in dispute, each opposing attorney will adjust the hypothetical question. It is not required that an expert opinion be elicited by hypothetical questions. ]t may be used by an attorney to cause the expert to agree with part of his/her argument, which may in tUrn diminish the impact of an expert’s testimony. Hypothetical questions can also help clarify the expert witness’ testimony and indicate the as” sumptions upon which it is based.
€. Limitations of Expert Witnesses. The expert psychiatric witness is not allowed to express opin· ions of law. The expert cannot declare the accused “sane” or “insane.” The expert’s opinion must be framed in terms of the prevailing mental responsi· bility standard. Psychiatrists, non·psychiatric phy· siclans, and non-medical professionals such as psychologists and others may, depending on the jurisdictions and the issues involved, be qualified by the court as experts on human behavior. The degree of specialized training or experience in human behavior affects the weight of the testi· mony provided. The opinion is usually based on personal observation unless a hypothetical ques· tion is posed. In some cases, a narrowly defined focus of testimony does not require a personal examination of the accused. In some special cases, the clinician may be called upon to educate the court regarding certain mental health issues. For example, testimony may be sought clarifying diag· nostic terminology, theories of human behavior, and other similar issues. In such cases, the expert witness need not have performed a clinical evalua· tion or even a review of the evidence in a case.
1M 8-240

CHAPTER 9 DISPOSITION OF THE MENTAllY III ACCUSED

9-1. General
Currently, no regulation provides guidance on the disposition of cases where the mental state of the accused has resulted in dismissal of charges or actual acquittal at the conrt-martiaL Conse­quently, close cooperation between legal, medical, and administrative personnel is required to achieve a disposition which is appropriate to a given case.

9-2. Notification of Release
a. AR 40-3, paragraph 6-15, deals specifically with the reJease of mentally incompetent service members who have a history of involvement in major crimes or antisocial behavior and who are considered to have a significant potential for recur­rence of such behavior. The concern addressed is the potentially dangerous patient. Such an individ­ual, when medically stable, is reported by the Medical ActivitylMedical Center to Headquarters, Department of the Army, Office of the Surgeon General in Washington, DC. Included in the report are the following documents:
(1)
Applicable CID, MP or civilian police in­vestigations.

(2)
Investigations under the provisions of the UCMJ, Article 32(D.

(3)
SJA’s advice to the general court·martial.

(4)
Record of trial.

(5)
Sanity Board proceedings.

(6)
Medical Board proceeding, including narra­tive summary.

(7)
Indictments, complaints, other investiga· tive files, and court orders.

(8)
Proposed date, place, and basis of indivi­dual’s release from the Army MTF including identification of receiving facility.

b.
It must be noted that this regulation serves only notification purposes and offers no guidance regarding the mechanics of disposition. All docu­ments must be forwarded to HQDA no later than 72 hours prior to actual disposition.

9-3. Disposition of the Insanity Ac­quittee There are two issues involved in the disposition of the insanity acquittee: the presence or absence of current mental illness, and whether the acquiUee is dangerous as a result of conCllrrent mental illness. The acquitt.ee who remains severely men· tally ill usually receives a Medical Board, is medically retired, and transferred to a veterans’ medical facility for extended treatment. The ac· quittee who is not currently mentally ill may also be medjcally retired but may not need post-service hospitalization. This indivldual will be released as any other medical retiree. In all cases, the dis­charge planning should include a review of Fed· eral and State Government resources. Hospitals for the criminally insane in both jurisdictions can be avenues of disposition. Again, close cooperation between the medical, legal, and administrative sections is required in formulating these individu· alized dispositions.
9-4. Disposition of the Service Member Found Incompetent to Stond Trial If an accused, by virtue of mental illness, is
declared incompetent to stand trial, the proceed­ings will halt. The accused is remanded to medical authority for treatment. Once medically stabilized, the accused is returned to the court-martial. It is not common for an accused to become despondent

when charged with criminal activity. Frank sui­cidal ideation or even gestures may occur. Proper clinical intervention in concert with unit and detention facility awareness should be sufficient emotional support for the service member. In such an instance, a speedy return to court is the norm. In other cases, the mental disorder may not remit quickly. Where treatment either may not restore competency or may require months or years, the court should be so instructed. Again, protracted incompetency may require medical retirement and eventual transfer to a veterans’ medical facility. The fate of the legal charges will be determined judicially. The medical care of the accused is the first concern.
1M 8-240

CHAPTER 10 DANGEROUSNESS
mixture of both should quell immediate concerns.

10-1. Introduction
a. Introduction. Assessing the dangerous patient is an important skill, given the emphasis placed on accurate prognostication of fut.ure violence. There are a number of circumstances which re” quire thal the clinician evaluate dangerousness.
“Routine     release of a patient from inpatient psychi­atric wards, violence threatened by an inpatient, and disposition of the insanity acquittee Bre COill­man examples. An opinion about an accused’s future dangerousness may also be elicited during the pre-sentencing stage of a court-martiaL Accu­rate evaluation can also be of use in crisis man­agement where astute sensitivity to escalating behavior may forestall a serious incident.
b.
Landmark Legal DeCIsion. Medical responsi­bility for the dangerous patient was the issue in the 1974 case of Tarasoffv. Regents of the Univer­sity of Califorma, 829 P2d 553 CAL (1974). In this unfortunate incident, a student of the University of California came to the attention of the mental health clinic_ The student subsequently verbalized fantasies of injuring a girlfriend who had spurned his advances. The campus police were notified, the student denied any intent to harm his girlfriend, and the issue was dropped. Two mOl)ths later, the student killed his girlfriend. From the ensuing charge of negligence in not notifying the potential victim, subsequent litigation, and statutory action, the State of California adopted a rule requiring ” … reasonable efforts to communicate the threat to the victim or victims and to a Jaw enforcement agency.” Actuany, any act win suffice which less­ens the imminent dangerousness. The clinician can use commitment, adjust medication, seek con­sultation, notify command for active duty person­nel, or hospitalize a voluntary person. Although State law in this area remains unsettled, some cases expanding the scope of liability and other cases dismissing liability, the California rule is a good working model for the therapist.

c.
The Dangerous Military Patient. In the U.S. Army, the dangerous patient raises unique consid­erations given the worldwide deployment of troops as well as access to weapons and dangerous equip­ment, and the variety of local laws and social supports available. In general, to prevent potential violence, either containment or treatment or a

The first consideration by the clinician must be the evaluation of the mental status. The presence of a severe mental illness contributing to present instability would suggest the need for hospitaliza­tion. The lack of any mental disorder in the violent individual would argue for containment, either at the unit level or possibly at the installa­tion detention facility (IDF). The latter opinion is especially appropriate if there is a risk of the individual going AWOL or not showing up for trial, or if there is a high risk of violence. Recommendations for restriction at the unit level should be discussed with the company commander. If the IDF is considered, consultation with both the company commander and the local JAG office should occur.
d. Dangerousness in the Non-Mililary Popula­tion. The more difficult situation occurs when the dangerous patient is either a dependent or a civilian for which the avenues of containment for the active duty service member may not be avail­able. Again, however, if a mental illness is present, hospitalization is appropriate. If voluntary admission to the local MTF is refused, civil com­mitment must be considered. The military police should be involved to ensure a smooth transition from military to civilian control. They should contact local civilian authorities. The procedure will vary by jurisdiction and when in doubt, the local JAG’s office should be consulted. This is particularly difficult overseas where civilian com­mitment may be inappropriate. Close consultation with the local JAG’s office and the hospital com­mand is necessary. Strong consideration should be given to writing a standard operating procedure addr-essing this issue in advance to prevent confu­sion.
10-2. Assessing the Dangerous Patient
a. Reliability. Evaluating the potential for vio­lence requires a multifactorial analysis. No single variable has enough reliability to predict either imminent or future dangerousness. In this regard, a distinction should be made. Imminent danger. ousness, that behavior which, if not immediately modified, will probably result in an overt act of violence to self or other, is generally a more

TM 8-240
liable clinical prediction. The farther in the _LUre the forecast reaches, the less reliable predic· lion becomes.
b.
Demographics of the Dangerous Patient. The typical statistical profile of the violent individual is a non-white male less than 30 years of age who comes from a lower socioeconomic background and has a past history of violence. The best statistical correlate is a history of prior violence. Apparently, once the threshold is surpassed between controlled verbal anger and physical expression of violence, a barrier falls and promotes occurrence in the fu­ture. In addition, violence is often reinforced in the environment where control and submission in vic­tims is equated by the aggressor with a sense of power. Even so, caution should be expressed in using the past as a sole indicator as to future violence or dangerousness. To date, the use of formal psychological instruments and methods to predict violent behavior are replete with method­ological problems. Yet, there continues to develop a body of research designed to provide more useful and reliable procedures.

c.
Substance Abuse. The capacity for drugs/al· “ohol to distort cognition and judgment cannot be -nimized. The effects of both are to diminish

.ternal restraint mechanisms. If an individual is marginally compensating an aggressive drive, the effects of drugs and alcohol may result in the release of violent behavior. Expression of violence may be increased. The evaluation of dangerous· ness must include an assessment of the patient’s alcohol and drug use. Attention must be directed towards the specific effects of certain drugs, such as agitation and delusions induced by amphet­amines or cocaine. In addition, withdrawal states associated with substance abuse may increase psychological and physiological distress.
d. Mental Illness. The role of mental illness in the dangerous patient is a complex one. The individual who is paranoid, distrustful, suspicious, and defensive should be carefully evaluated. With psychosis, the content of the delusions and halluci· nations will provide some guidance in assessing dangerousness. Command hallucinations require special attention. Medical conditions contributing to mental instability such as dementia, delirium, organic personality disorder, and other organic syndromes hold the potential for reversibility in ongoing states of irritable, aggressive behavior.
e. Signs of Impending Violence. Imminent vio­
nce is often telegraphed by certain behavioral attributes. The clinician should be alert to changes in the patient’s speech, posture, motor activity, and degree of startle response. The picture of a
patient sitting on the edge of a chair, often tense and rigid, whose speech volume starts increasing is suggesting impending loss of control over ag· gressive drives. The patient who refuses to sit and paces about nervously cannot fully control his or her anxiety and may require little further provoca­tion. An easily evoked startle response is also an important clue to potential violence.
10-3. Management of the Dangerous Patient
a.
Conduct of the Evaluation. Management of the dangerous patient is an exercise in crisis intervention. Again, many variables are important in bringing the crisis to a safe resolution. The stance of the interviewer is an important first step towards stabilization. If the patient is already in a threatening posture, minimizing eye contact, low· ering one’s voice, and being firm but not confron­tational will help. There is debate concerning the position of the clinician when interviewing the dangerous patient. Some suggest that the patient be nearest the door to allow a quick egress. There are advantages for the clinician being nearest the door. Such a position allows the clinician to leave and summon assistance. A potential hostage situa­tion is also averted. Where possible, back-up should be available.

b.
Impact of Ihe Clinician’s Behavior. The over­all conduct of the clinician also will affect the crisis outcome. Obviously, no attempt should be made to disarm a dangerous patient. Similarly, the clinician should avoid the defensive reaction of becoming confrontational or argumentative with the patient. This may only increase the dangerolls patient’s anxiety.

c.
Advance Preparation. If the clinician receives advance information indicating a patient may be dangerous, a plan of action should be developed. This includes notifying other staff about the pa­tient, having restraints and appropriate medica· tions available, and even having a designated code word the clinician can telephonically transmit to alert his or her staff to intervene.

d.
Hospitalization. Once a determination is made to hospitalize the dangerous patient, an escort must be provided at all times to prevent elopement. The patient will often begin bargaining at this point, requesting to leave to go home, for example, to pick up a few things. If the patient is to be admitted, this should not be allowed. If emergency commitment is considered, the receiv­ing physician should be notified. All paperwork for emergency commitment must be carefully anno· tated to indicate the presence of imminent danger­ousness and a mental disorder.

1M 8-240

CHAPTER 11 TORT LIABILITY
physic13n “breached the duty”; that the patient

11-1. General

It is useful for the clinician who performs mental evaluations, admits patients to psychiatric facil­ities, and administers somatic treatments to un­derstand certain legal issues which are connected with medical care. Society imposes certain expecta­tions that essentially regulate types of interper­sonal contacts, such as the clinician-patient rela­tionship. These rules have evolved as a complex compromise to maximize good medical care, pri· vacy considerations, and public safety. Transgress­ing such established rules invites patient dissatis­faction at a minimum. Administrative and legal inquiry follow more serious infractions. Breaches which cause a person injury are known as torts and lead to liability, for which the aggrieved party, or pJaintiff, may seek redress. This is a continuously evolving area in the law. Only the most basic concepts are presented in this chapLer. The goal is to facilitate the clinician’s movement through this difficult and complex subject. Specific issues, detailed discussions, and current legal de­velopments fall within the purview of the local SJA’s office_
11-2. The Basics of Tort Law

a.
Definition_ A tort is a private civil wrong which can result in an award for damages. In most cases, tort law does not include either criminal or contract issues. Tort liability may be imposed for either intentional or negligent acts. For negligent acts, the military practitioner’s liability is sub­sumed by the Federal Government under the Federal Tort Claims Act (FTCA).

b.
Negligent Torts. A negligent tort is conduct (acts of omissions) where a failure to exercise that degree of care established by law to protect other persons against unreasonable risk of harm has been breached, and the other person has been injured.

(1) In bringing legal action for medical negli­gence, the plaintiff must prove, by a preponder­ance of the evidence, that the physician had a “duty” to conform to a specific “standard of care” to protect his or her patient from unreasonable risk of foreseeable harm (“foreseeable” is often more broadly interpreted than many physicians or other health care providers may realize); that the suffered “damage” or harm (that was “fore­seeable”); and that the breach of duty “proxi­mat.ely caused” the patient’s injury. The first element the plaintiff must prove is the existe11ce of a clinician-patient relationship from which flows cert.ain expectations, Or duties. “Breach” of a “duty” occurs when the practitioner does not meet the requisite standard of care. The standard of care is determined by comparing the care rendered the injured patient to care which a reasonable practitioner in good standing and in the same or similar circumstances would provide. The psychia­trist, for example, with specialized medical and human behavior expertise, will generally be heJd to a higher standard than a family physician when rendering care to a mentally ill patient. An excep­tion would be a family practitioner, for example, who holds himself or herself out as one who has spedal knowledge and skill regarding mental dis­orders and treats patients who seek his or her care
with the understanding that he or she possesses special knowledge. The family practitioner would be required to render care in this case in accord­ance with the same standard as a psychiatrist. 10 practical terms, the standard of care is attested to through expert witness testimony. In psychiatric neghgence, the plaintiff will offer expert psychiat­ric testimony claiming that the defendant did not meet the required standard of care. Based on the testimony, the judge or jury decides if the actions of the defendant were reasonable given the partic­ular circumstances_
(2) The plaintiff must prove that he suffered “damage,” what the damages are, and that the damages were proximately caused (often called “proximate causation”). “Proximate causation” is a legal mechanism for limiting liability of a defendant to certain acts or omissions rather than holding the defendant liable for all injuries “ac­tually” caused by himlher such as those which were “unforeseeable” or “unusual.” (Caveat·. Each case is decided on its own merits within the context of statutory, regulatory, and case law bearing on the issues raised in a case.) In order for an act (or omission) to have proximately caused an injury, the act must be the “cause in fact” of the injury and the injury must be the “direct result”
TM 8-240
of the act, or the result of the act and foreseeable
‘intervening forces” which are normal incidents
of, and within the increased risk caused by, the
act. “Caused in fact” generally means that, “but
for” the act, the injury would not have happened;
or, that the act was a “substantial factor” in
producing the injury. “Direct result” means that
there is an unbmken chain of events between the
negligent act and the injury, within limits. But
the clinician can also be responsible even if the
chain was broken in certain circumstances such as
medical malpractice of subsequent treaters, or
subsequent disease or accident produced by a
patient’s weakened condition, for example.
c. Intentional Torts. An intentional tort involves a volitional act along with the goal of bringing about the consequences of the act (specific intent), or a volitional act along with the substantially certain knowledge that certain consequences will result (general intent). The act invades the inter­ests of the other party illegally.
(1) In general, a person is presumed to intend the reasonably foreseeable consequences of his or her behavior. Unlike negligent torts in which actual harm or injury to the plaintiff’s person or property must be proved, damage in intentional
,rts is presumed by law. Furthermore, the person
/ho commits an intentional tort may be liable for an unintended injury which results from an act or acts which formes) the basis of the harm. For example, if A pushes Band B falis, breaking his or her leg, A will be responsible for the harm even if A did not “intend” that B break a leg. The intent of A to push B forms the basis of the tort (battery in this example). In most cases, the act need only be a “substantial factor” (not the only factor) in bringing about the harm. “Motive” is different from “intent” in that motive is what moves a person to act to achieve a result whereas intent is the selection of a particular means to bring about the result desired. For instance, Dr. A may have a “motive” to protect a suicidal patient from injury. Dr. A causes the patient to be reo strained in an isolated room, a result that Dr. A “intended” as a means of protecting the patient. Unless certain laws and factual circumstances exist, such an act violates the patient’s liberty interests (and possibly other interests) and consti­tutes the intentional tort of false imprisonment. (The latter tort does not apply to active duty members but DOES apply to retired service memo bers and their dependents as well as to dependents
, active duty personnel.)
(2) The clinician who touches, examines, or conducts a procedure upon a patient without the patient’s consent 1S subject to assault and battery charges. The only defense is an emergency (high likelihood of death or grave bodily harm) which precluded consent. In emergency cases, consent is implied through the notion that had the patient been able, he or she would surely have consented to a life or limb-saving treatment.
(3) The assessment of liability for an inten­tional tort is different from negligence. The stan­dard of care need not be debated. No expert witness testimony is needed. The potential sane· tions for some intentional torts such as battery may be criminal as well as civil. The clinician should be able to avoid liability for battery or false imprisonment by obtaining adequate informed con· sent.
11-3. Minimizing the Risk of Tort Lia­
bility
a.
Evaluation.<;. The clinician should always be diligent and careful in clinical evaluations. Thor· oughness in patient assessments, careful evalua· tion of suicide and homicide potential, and the use of appropriate diagnostic tests are critical.

b.
Maintenance of Knowledge and Skill. Medical education is an ongoing process. The clinician’s actions will be compared to the most recent, accepted developments.

c.
Good Records. The clinician should maintain good treatment records which fully document the diagnosis and treatment. The clinician is not expected to achieve perfection in care. Bad out­comes can result from the best of medical care and treatment. The best defense in this case, and all malpractice suits, is the treatment record. Without adequate substantiation of the clinician’s logic, the final judgment is suspect.

d.
Consultation. The clinician must know his or her own professional limits. This forms lhe founda· tion for appropriate consultation. Consultation for complex organic disorders or second opinions in refractory treatment cases may be necessary. Thor· ough documentation of such consultation helps rebut negligence charges.

e.
Report. The clinician must be sensitive to the climate of patient relationships. A lack of rapport obviously increases patient dissatisfaction. Any consequent problems in care enhance the prospect of legal action.

f Consent. In order to avoid baUery, informed consent should be obtained (also see para 11-4 below). Psychiatric admission and electroconvul­sive therapy both require that proper documents be completed. With respect to medications and other therapies/procedures, a peer-developed check­list defining areas requiring informed consent is helpful.
1M 8-240

11-4. Informed Consent
Q. Definition. Informed consent lS permisslOn voluntarily granted to a clinician by a competent patient (or legal substitute) to conduct an evalua­tion, procedure, treatment program, change of treatment, etc., after the patient has been mnde adequately knowledgeable of the risks, benefits, alternatives, and consequences of proposed actions, including the risks!consequences of no care at all.
b.
Competency. This requires the absence of any mental disorder of such a nature as to impair the cognitive task of weighing options and selecting one in a thoughtful, reasoned manner. That a patient chooses a treatment not in concert with the clinician’s wishes does not mean a patient is incompetent. The severely demented patient, how­ever, totally unable to integrate new information, could not render informed consent. The issue of competency in psychiatric patients is complex. Consultation with colleagues is often appropriate.

c.
Making the Patient Knowledgeable. Informed consent is a classic example of a legally imposed duty without clearly articulated guidelines for compliance, except in a few jurisdictions. A major dilemma is determining the risks to disclose to the patient. To disclose too much information, particu­larly rare complications, may unduly frighten the patient and preclude worthy treatment. Yet should the rare event occur, a claim or suits could follow alleging damage from failure to obtain informed consent. Because there are several legal standards for disclosure, the clinician should consult with the local JAG’s office for guidance regarding the rule in the jurisdiction of practice. For example, under one of the standards, the judge will decide whether a reasonable person in the plaintiff’s position would have consented given suitable communica­tion. In general, however, Jiability is assessed on the basis of whether the patient would have consented to the treatment given the knowledge of the complica!.ion. Ideally, the clinician·patient in­teraction represents an active dialogue with ex­change of information.

11-5. Federal Tor! Claims Act
a. General. Sovereign immunity precludes an individual from suing the Government for injury resulting from negligent acts or omissions of the sovereign’s agents. The FTCA waives this sover­eign immunity in certain circumstances. Since 1946, any claim resulting from the negligence of a Government employee, operating within the scope of employment, falls within the jurisdiction of the United States District Courts. The FTCA has a number of exclusions such as injuries received during military conflict. For military health care
professionals, intentional torts <Ire not covered. However, the Justice Department ,,,ill examine the case und might provide a legal defense. Theoreti­cally then, battery charges could be brought against the clinician as an individual. Circum­stances of each case can vary so much that specific guidance should be sought from the local SJA as far as liability exposure for the individual clini­cian.
b.
Landmark Legal Decision_ Feres v. United States is a 1950 United States Supreme Court decision that barred soldiers from suing the Gov­ernment or military personnel under the FTCA for injuries incident to service. The complexities arise in determining what is “incident to service.” The rationale for preventing such lawsuits pr.imarily rests on the extensive compensation package avail­able to those injured. Another consideration is the deleterious effect on military discipline should civil action be allowed against military supervi­sors.

c.
The Gonzales Act. Public Law 94-464, the so-called Gonzales Act, protects the Federal health care provider from personal liability for medical malpractice which occurs in the scope of employ­ment. Under the law, the Department of Defense health care practitioner cannot be sued as an individual for malpractice by any military health care beneficiary. The clinician’s care, however, may be the subject of a quality assurance review, administrative sanctions, or even lead to a court­martiai. The practitioner should not be luned by what appears to be blanket coverage. There are significant exemptions to this liability coverage. The clinician is not protected from intentional tort liability and may be sued personally. For example, clinicians engaging in sexual activities with a patient are not considered to be acting within the scope of employment. Military dependents, retired military, and civilians may properly pursne a malpractice claim. Finally, the FTCA does not extend to foreign assignments although the Mili­tary Claims Act provides similar protection. Be­cause this is an area of law which is in a state of flux, c1inicians should keep apprised of new devel­opments.

d.
Claims Procedure. All eligible claims are processed through the loca) JAG’s office. If a settlement cannot be reached, the claimant has 6 months, from receipt of notice from the JAG’s office of denial of the claim or of an unacceptable settlement and offer, to bring suit in Federal district court. A claimant may also file suit if no action has been taken on hislher claim within 6 months of filing.

TM 8-240
11-6. Confidentiality/Privilege
a. General. Confidential communications are pri· vate exchanges which are given with the under­standing that they will not be disclosed to third parties who are not authorized by law to have access to the communications, without permission of the original parties. Military health care in­volves confidential communications_ However, cli­nicians should be aware of current military regula­tions which authorize third party access to patient communications without specific permission of the patient. The JAG and patient administration divi­sions of MTF’s are sources of guidance. Privileged communications are confidential communications which are protected from disclosure even in legal proceedings unless an exception arises in the law. By acting as a shield to disclosure, thc privilege facilitates the free flow of information and protects relationships valued by society. Husband·wife, lawyer-client and in some jurisdictions, doctor­patient or therapist·patient enjoy such privilege. In the clinical realm, it is the patient-not the clinician-who owns or holds the privilege (which can be waived voluntarily by a competent patient).
b. Privilege in the Military. In the U. S. Army lere is no recognized doctor-patient privilege. The
,IeM, in fact, specificalIy denies the privilege. There is also no recognized psychotherapist-patient privilege. With a few exceptions then, the thera· pist can be compelled to testify regarding patient care.
c. Protected Communications. There are three areas where communications do receive some pro­tection. MRE 302 provides partial protection for an accused undergoing the forensic evaluation. State· ments made by the accused during Sanity Board proceedings are not disclosed unless: the material is released by the defense; or the issue of insanity is raised at trial, and the defense first presents the accused’s statements. Another area where all com· munication is considered privileged is when a clinician agrees to become part of the defense team. This requires the clinician be formally in· volved, usually by special order. The protection extended is actually under the attorney·client priv· ilege. One final area where a certain privilege exists is outlined in AR 600-85, the Alcohol and Drug Abuse Prevention and Control Program (ADAPCP). Recognizing the importance of confi· dentiality in this treatment area, AH 600-85 defines a limited therapist·patient privilege. No judicial action or adverse administrative action is allowed based on information derived from the clinical evaluation, after enrollment in ADAPCP. This same protection extends to emergency medi· cal care for drug and alcohol abuse, if not preceded by an apprehension. There are three exceptions: when criminal conduct occurs while under the influence of drugs or alcohol; if drug use persists after enrollment; and when non·disclosure could
negatively impact national security or the health and welfare of others.
11-7. Specific Problem Areas
a.
Involuntary Detention on Mental Wards. AR 600-20, paragraph 5-4, defines those circum­stances where the soldier is required to submit to necessary procedures, including psychiatric hospi· talization. If treatment is advisl;”!d and a soldier steadfastly refuses appropriate treatment, a Medi· cal Board is convened. If the Board concludes that a specific treatment is indicated, and the soldier persists in refusing, a report of the Medical Board is submitted to the Surgeon General. If the soldier does not accept the Surgeon General’s recommen· dation, the matter is referred to the appropriate commander who will order the treatment if deemed appropriate. Finally, administrative ac· tions or UCMJ discipline can be imposed for failure to obey an order. The reader, however, is strongly advised to remain current on the litera· ture and legislative language relevant to the issues of involuntary treatment and/or hospitaliza· tion. The whole matter is in a state of flux.

b.
Consent by Non-military Patients. AR 40-3 does not permit non-military individuals to receive medical treatment without their consent or con· sent from a person authorized to give such. Can· sent for admission to a psychiatric ward or proce· dures such as electroconvulsive therapy require that informed consent be obtained and a consent form (SF 522 (Medical Record-Request for Admin· istration of Anesthesia and for Performance of Operations and Other Procedures) or equivalent) be completed. SF 522 is available through normal publications channels. In cases where the non· military patient is dangerous, the civil commit, ment procedures of the local jurisdiction must be utilized.

TM 6-240

APPENDIX A REFERENCES
A-l. Army Regulations

AR 27-10  Military Justice
AR 40-3  Medical, Denial, and Veterinary Care
AR 40-66  Medical Record Administration
AR 40-501  Standards of Medical Fitness
AR 600-20  Army Command Policy
AR 600-85  Alcohol and Drug Abuse Prevention and Control Program
AR 635-200  Enlisted Personnel

A-2. Other Publications

Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders llI-R, American Psychiatric Association, Washing­
ton, DC.
Manual for Courts-Martial, U.s., 1984, Superintendent of Documents, U.s. Government Printing Office,
Washington, DC.
Monahan, J. The Clinical PredICtion of Violent Behavior, NationaJ Institute of Mental Health, 198].
Reisner, R’., and Slobogin, C. Law and the Mental Health System, 2nd Edition, American Casebook Series,
West Publishing Co.
Sourcebook of Criminal Justice Statistics, U.S. Department of Justice, Bureau of Justice Statistics.

A-3. Forms

SF 522     (Medical Record-Request for Administration of Anesthesia and for Performance of Operations and Other Procedures)
TM 8-240

INDEX

Abbreviations ………………………………….. . Article 32 ……….. . Assault and Battery Alcohol Amnesia….. . ……… . Collateral Data ….. . Dangerousness. Effects…… . Mitigating … . Responsibility. Amnesia Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . ……………. . Evaluation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . …….. . Responsibility……………………………… . Clinical Examples Competency…………………. . Drug Use…. . …….. . Malingering. . . . . . ………… . Non-Responsibility ……………… . Responsibility. . . . . . . . . . . . …………….. . Confessions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ……… . Confidentiality …………………………… . Competency Assumed ………………. . Clinical Examples………… . Elements …… . Evaluation………………………………….. . History……. . ……………….. . To Consent ………………………. . Commitment Military. . . . ………………….. . Non-military ……………………………….. . Consent Emergency ……………………………….. . Informed …. . Non-military .. Dangerousness
rn_…………………………………………….

Demographics……………………….. .
Hospitalization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ……. .
LegaL………………… ……… . …….. .
Management. ……………………………………. .
Military Personnel ……………………………….. .
Non-military Personnel. . . . . . . . ……………….. .
Discharges . . . . . …………………………….. .
Disposition
Incompetent Accused ………………………….. .
Insanity Acquittee …………………………… .
Notification ……………………………….. .

Paragraph Page
1-3 I-I
2-6e 2-5
11-2d2) 11-2

6-4d 6-3
6-2g 6-2
10-2b 10-2
6-2c 6-1
6-2b 6-1
6-2a,d 6-1

6-4a 6-2

6-4c 6-3

3-6e, 6-4b 3-4, 6-3

4-3 4-3

6-2( 6-2

3-6a 3-4

3-6e 3-4

3-6b 3-4

5-31 5-3
11-6 11-4

4-1a 4-1
4-3 4-3
4-lb(3) 4-1
4-2 4-1
4-1b(2) 4-1
11-4b 11-3

11-7a 11-4
11-7b 11-4

11-2d2) 11-2
11-3f, 11-4 11-2, 11-3
11-7b 11-4

10-2e 10-2
IO-2b 10-2
10-3d 10-2
1O-1b 10-1
10-3 10-2
10-Ie 10-1
1O-ld 10-1
2-6b,e 2-4,2-5

9-4 9-1

9-3 9-1

9-2a 9-1

Index-l

1M 8-240

Drugs Amnesia…. . ………… . Clinical Examples ……… . Dangerousness .. . Evaluation…. . Responsibility.. .
Federal Tort Claims Act Forseeability ……….. , Gonzales Act Hospitalization
Dangerousness ……. .
Evaluation….. .
Malingering

Impulse Disorders …….. .

Intelligence Impairment. .. Tests ..
Legal Cases Dusky v. United States .. Feres v. United States Q’Callahan u. Parker . …………….. . Relford v. Commandant .. Solorio v. United States….. Tarasaff v. Regents of the University of California . …….. .
-‘f.alingering Definition ……… . ….. . Detection … Example….. .
Malpractice……… _

Military Courts Appeliate .. Courts-Martial ………… .
Medical Tests. . . . . ….. .
Partial Mental Responsibility Clinical Example…………… . Description. . . . . . ……………… . Mitigation …………………. .
Personality Disorders Responsibility……….. . Mitigation ..
Psychosis………….. .

Psychological Testing Dangerousness. . . . ……. . Intelligence …………………… . Malingering …. Responsibi lity. Reports……. .
Reasonable Medical Certainty Reservists. . . ……. . Reports
lpinions.
Jtructure …
Submission ..
Terminology. _….. .

Index-2

Paragraph
6-4d
6-2! 10-2c
6-2e
6-2a

11-5
11-2bCI), 11-2,(1)

11-5c
10-3d 5-3j 6-11b(7Xc) 6-7a,b
6-3b
6-3c

4-lbC2J
11-5b 2-5a 2-4c 2-5a
10-1b
6-11a
6-11b
3-6a

11-2b
2-2e
2-6

5-3h
3-7e
3-7a
3-7c

6-8c
6-8d
6-10

1O-2b 6-3c,d
6-11b(7Xel
5-3i
7-21

7-2n
2-5b

7-2n
7-2a

7-3
7-1

Page
6-3
6-2
10-2
6-2
6-1

11-3
11-1, 11-2
11-3

10-2
5-3
6-6
6-3

6-2
6-2

4-1

11-3
2-3
2-3
2-3

10-1

6-5
6-5
3-3
11-1

2-1
2-4
5-3

3-4
3-4
3-4

6-4
6-4
6-5

10-2
6-2
6-6
5-3
7-2
7-2
2-3

7-2
7-1
7-3
7-1

Responsibility Clinical Examples.. Definition Mental State. Specific Defense..
Sanity Board Composition .. . Report. …….. .
Seizures ……… .

Sexual Disorders Child Abuse ….. . Evaluation…… .
Staff Judge Advocate Speedy Trjal.. Testimony
Cross·examination.
Hypothetical Questions ..
Limitations ………………………………………. .
Preparation ………. .
Process ….. .
Standard of Care..
Types

Torts Clinical Example….. . Definition ………. . Intentional ……………………………………….. . Minimizing ……………………………. . Negligence.. .
UCMJ
Authority………………………. .
History ……… .
Jurisdiction ……………………………………….. .

TM 8-240
Paragraph Page
3-6b,c,d 3-3
3-4 3-1
3-5a 3-2
5-1a 5-1

3-2a 3-1

3-2& 3-1

6-5 6-3

6-9( 6-5
6-ge 6-4
2-2( 2-1
5-3d,5-3k 5-2, 5-3

8-3c 8-2
8-3d 8-3
8-3e 8-3
8-3a,b 8-1,8-2
8-2 8-1

11-2bO) 11-1
8-1b 8-1

11-2ctl) 11-2
11-2a 11-1
11-2b 11-1
11-3 11-2
11-2b 11-1

2-2a,b 2-1
2-3 2-1
2-5 2-3

Index-3

TM 8-240
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
)RDON R. SULLIVAN .eneral, United States Army Chief of Staff
Official:
MILTON H. HAMILTON Administrative Assistant to the Secretary of the Army
Distribution: To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-34-E, block 0100, requirements for TM 8-240.
* u.s. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 1997 0 -418-292 (70775)

 

Military police internment resettlement operations

Military police internment resettlement operations

Military Police

Headquarters,
Department of the Army

This publication is available on the
General Dennis J. Reimer Training
and Doctrine Digital Library at

*FM 3-19.40 (FM 19-40)
Field Manual Headquarters NO. 3-19.40 Department of the Army Washington. DC. 1August 200.1

Military Police
InternmentlResettlement Operations

Contents
Page
PREFACE …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. v

PART ONE      FUNDAMENTALS OF INTERNMENTIRESETTLEMENT OPERATIONS
Chapter 1      INTRODUCTION………………………………………………………………………………………… 1-1
Procedures………………………………………………………………………………………………… 1-1
Definitions………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 1-2
Objectives …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 1-5
Agencies……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 1-6
Protection of Captives and Detainees ………………………………………………………….. 1-11
Protection of Enemy Prisoners of War and Civilian Internees …………………………. 1-12
Protection of Refugees ………………………………………………………………………………. 1-13

Chapter 2      COMMANDER AND STAFF RESPONSIBILITIES ………………………………………….2-1
Section I .Commanders……………………………………………………………………………. 2-1
Procedures………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2-1
Principles and Policies ………………………………………………………………………………… 2-2
Security …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2-5
Section I1-Staff Officers …………………………………………………………………………… 2-9

Adjutant General ………………………………………………………………………………………… 2-9
Finance Officer …………………………………………………………………………………………… 2-9
Civil-Military Operations Officer …………………………………………………………………….. 2-9
Chaplain ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2-10
Engineer Officer ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 2-10
Public Affairs Officer ………………………………………………………………………………….. 2-10
Signal Officer ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 2-10
Staff Judge Advocate ………………………………………………………………………………… 2-10
Medical Operations ………………………………………………………………………………….. 2-11

Distribution Restriction:Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited .
*This publication supersedes FM 19.40. 27 February 1976 and FM 19.60. 27 May 1986 .
Page
Movement Control Officer …………………………………………………………………………..2-1 2
Inspector General ……………………………………………………………………………………..2-1 2
Psychological Operations …………………………………………………………………………..2-12

Section Ill -Training ……………………………………………………………………………….. 2-1 3

PART TWO      ENEMY PRISONERS OF WAR AND CIVILIAN INTERNEES
Chapter 3      DIVISION COLLECTING POINTS AND CORPS HOLDING AREAS ……………….. 3-1
Overview………………………………………………………………………………………………….3-1
Processing Captives …………………………………………………………………………………… 3-2
Evacuating Captives ……………………………………………………………………………………3-8
Division Collecting Points ………………………………………………………………………….. 3-10
Corps Holding Areas …………………………………………………………………………………3-1 5
Collocated Screening Sites ………………………………………………………………………..3-17
Collecting Points in Other Operations …………………………………………………………. 3-1 8

Chapter 4      ENEMY PRISONERS OF WAR …………………………………………………………………… 4-1
Evacuation…………………………………………………………………………………………………4-1
Receiving and Processing Areas …………………………………………………………………..4-1
Assignment to Internment Facilities ……………………………………………………………….4-9
Control and Discipline ………………………………………………………………………………..4-1 2
Clothing …………………………………………………………………………………………………..4-1 5
Subsistence ……………………………………………………………………………………………..4-17
Medical and Sanitation Considerations ………………………………………………………..4-17
Correspondence ……………………………………………………………………………………….4-17
Canteens …………………………………………………………………………………………………4-1 8
Social Programs ……………………………………………………………………………………….4-1 8
Security…………………………………………………………………………………………………..4-21

Chapter 5      CIVILIAN INTERNEES ………………………………………………………………………………..5-1

General Protection ……………………………………………………………………………………..5-1
Administrative Responsibilities ……………………………………………………………………..5-2
Principles and Policies ……………………………………………………………………………5-3
Clothing …………………………………………………………………………………………………….5-5
Subsistence ………………………….;…………………………………………………………………..5-5
Receiving and Processing Areas …………………………………………………………………..5-6
. Control and Discipline ………………………………………………………………………………..5-10
Internee Committee …………………………………………………………………………………..5-1 2

Correspondence ……………………………………………………………………………………….5-1 3
Complaints and Requests ………………………………………………………………………….5-13
Medical Treatment …………………………………………………………………………………….5-1 3
Sanitation………………………………………………………………………………………………..5-1 3
Transfer …………………………………………………………………………………………………..

5-1 4
Release …………………………………………………………………………………………………..

5-1 5
Social Programs ……………………………………………………………………………………….

5-1 5
Employment……………………………………………………………………………………………..

5-1 6
Security……………………………………………………………………………………………………

5-17
Disturbances…………………………………………………………………………………………….

5-1 8
Facility Markings ………………………………………………………………………………………5-18

Page
Chapter 6      INTERNMENTIRESETTLEMENT FACILITIES ……………………………………………….6-1

Planning …………………………………………………………………………………………………..6-1
Security Requirements …………………………………………………………………………………6-2
Layout ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….6-3
Receiving and Processing Centers ………………………………………………………………..6-5
Medical and Sanitation Considerations …………………………………………………………..6-7
PART THREE UNITED STATES MILITARY PRISONERS
Chapter 7      ARMY CORRECTIONS SYSTEM …………………………………………………………………7-1

Levels of Confinement …………………………………………………………………………………7-1
Correctional Facilities …………………………………………………………………………………..7-3
Legal Rights and Requirements …………………………………………………………………….7-3
Segregation………………………………………………………………………………………………..7-4
Custody and Control ……………………………………………………………………………………7-5
Correctional-Treatment Programs ………………………………………………………………….7-8
Employment and Education ……………………………………………………………………….. 7-10
Recreation………………………………………………………………………………………………..7-10
Compensation, Clemency, and Parole ………………………………………………………….7-11
Correctional Staff ………………………………………………………………………………………7-12
Prisoner Services Branch ……………………………………………………………………………7-16
Personal Property and Funds ……………………………………………………………………..7-18
Mail and Correspondence …………………………………………………………………………..7-19
Support Personnel …………………………………………………………………………………….7-20
Transfer and Disposition Procedures …………………………………………………………… 7-21
Logistics …………………………………………………………………………………………………..7-22
Medical and Dental Treatment ……………………………………………………………………..7-23

Chapter 8      BATTLEFIELD CONFINEMENT OF UNITED STATES MILITARY PRISONERS . 8-1

Planning …………………………………………………………………………………………………….8-1
Field Detention Facility …………………………………………………………………………………

8-3
Field Confinement Facility …………………………………………………………………………….

8-3
Transfer and Disposition of Prisoners …………………………………………………………..

8-19

PART FOUR      MILITARY POLICE SUPPORT TO CIVIL-MILITARY OPERATIONS
Chapter 9      POPULACE AND RESOURCE CONTROL …………………………………………………… 9-1
Dislocated-Civilian Operations ……………………………………………………………………… 9-2
Planning Dislocated-Civilian Operations …………………………………………………………9-3
Military Police Support to Dislocated-Civilian Operations …………………………………. 9-7

Chapter 10 HUMANITARIAN ASSISTANCE AND EMERGENCY SERVICES ………………….. 10-1
Section I .Humanitarian Assistance …………………………………………………………10-1
Operational Environment …………………………………………………………………………… 10-1
Rules of Engagement ………………………………………………………………………………… 10-3
. Legal Considerations ………………………………………………………………………………… 10-3
Military Police Support ………………………………………………………………………………. 10-4

iii
Page
Section II .Emergency Services …………………………………………………………….10-14

In Continental United States ……………………………………………………………………..10-14

Outside Continental United States …………………………………………………………….10-17

Appendix A      METRIC CONVERSIONS ……………………………………………………………………………

A-1
Appendix B      USE OF FORCE AND RIOT CONTROL MEASURES ………………………………….B-1
Use of Force ………………………………………………………………………………………………

B-1
Deadly Force ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

B-1
Rules of Engagement ………………………………………………………………………………….8-2
Nonlethal Weapons …………………………………………………………………………………….B-3
Crowd Dynamics ………………………………………………………………………………………..9-6
Riot Control Measures …………………………………………………………………………………

B-9
Riot Control Agents …………………………………………………………………………………..8-11
Positions………………………………………………………………………………………………….

8-14
Formations……………………………………………………………………………………………….

B-16
Appendix C      EQUIPMENT GUIDE …………………………………………………………………………………..C-1

Appendix D      MILITARY POLICE INTERNMENTIRESETTLEMENT UNITS ………………………….D-1

GLOSSARY ……………………………………………………………………………………Glossary-1

BIBLIOGRAPHY ………………………………………………………………………..Bibliography-1

INDEX………………………………………………………………………………………………… Index-1
Preface
In 1996, the United States (US) Army Military Police (MP) Corps restructured its four combat support (CS) missions into the following five CS functions. These functions adequately describe MP capabilities in support of US forces deployed worldwide.
Maneuver and mobility support.
Area security.
Law and order (L&O).
Internmentjresettlement (I/R).
Police intelligence operations.
Field Manual (FM) 3-19.40 depicts the doctrinal foundation, principles, and processes that MP will employ when dealing with enemy prisoners of war (EPWs), civilian internees (CIS),US military prisoner operations, and MP support to civil-military operations (populace and resource control [PRCI,humanitarian assistance [HA], and emergency services [ESI). FM 3-19.40 is not a standalone manual, and it must be used in combination with other publications. These publications are pointed out throughout the manual, and a consolidated list is provided in the bibliography.
This manual provides guidance that can be used by US Army service schools, students, sister services, and federal agencies. It is fully compatible with current joint, multinational, and interagency doctrine.
The proponent of this publication is HQ TRADOC. Send comments and recommendations on Department of the Army (DA) Form 2028 directly to Commandant, US Army Military Police School, ATTN: ATSJ-MP-TD, 401 MANSCEN Loop, Suite 2060, Fort Leonard Wood, Missouri 65473-8926.
This publication implements Standardization Agreement (STANAG) 2044, Procedures for Dealing With Prisoners of War (PW) (Edition 5),28 June 1994. NOTE: The DA term EPW is interchangeable with the term PW used in STANAG 2044. The DA uses the term PW when referring to US soldiers who are prisoners of the enemy and uses the term EPW when referring to enemy soldiers who are prisoners of the US.
Appendix A contains a metric conversion chart.
Unless this publication states otherwise, masculine nouns and pronouns do not refer exclusively to men.
PART ONE

Fundamentals of InternmentlResettlement
Operations

Part One provides information that is critical in understanding the IIR function. Chapter 1 introduces the manual by providing key definitions, establishing the IIR objectives and principles, and providing a list of agencies concerned with IIR operations. Chapter 2 describes commander and staff responsibilities that are unique to IIR operations. Together, these chapters provide leaders and soldiers with the foundation necessary for successful implementation of national military objectives as thev relate to IIR o~erations.
Chapter 1
lntroduction
This chapter provides key definitions as set forth by the Geneva and Hague Conventions, Army regulations (ARs), and the Uniform Code of Military Justice (UCMJ). These definitions explain personnel categories that the MP commander may be tasked to handle, protect, and account for. He must ensure that personnel are treated according to established laws, regulations, and international agreements. The MP leaders and soldiers conducting IIR operations must maintain task proficiency for each category.
PROCEDURES

1-1.Unlike EPW/CI operations in the past, I/R operations include additional detained persons. The I/R operations include handling, protecting, and accounting for dislocated civilians (DCs) and conducting battlefield confinement of US military prisoners. With the alignment of these additional categories, leaders and soldiers must ensure that they understand and are prepared to apply the rules of engagement (ROE) and the rules of interaction (ROI) that applyto each category. The keys to a successful I/R operation are getting the mission accomplished and performing the mission under the correct mind-set. For example, the ROE that may apply to an EPW may not apply to a refugee or a US military prisoner. However, an MP may be tasked to handle each category during the course of an operation. This dimension is addressed throughout the manual to increase the MP commander’s situational awareness (SA) as it relates to this aspect of I/R operations.
lntroduction 1-1
DEFINITIONS
1-2. The following terms are defined below: Combat zone (CZ). EPW.
CI.
Retained person (RP).
Other detainee (OD).
DC.
. Displaced person (DP).
. Refugee.
. Evacuee.
. Stateless person.
. War victim.

Migrant. . Internally displaced person (IDP). . Expellee. US military prisoner.
COMBAT ZONE
1-3. The CZ is the area required by combat forces to conduct operations. It normally extends forward from the land force’s rear boundary. The communications zone (COMMZ) is the rear part of the theater of operations (TO). It is behind and contiguous to the CZ. The COMMZ contains lines of communication (LOC), supply and evacuation areas, and other agencies required for the immediate support and maintenance of field forces. It reaches to the continental United States (CONUS), to a supporting combatant command’s area of responsibility (AOR),or to both. An EPW must be moved as quickly as possible from the CZ to the COMMZ where an I/Runit interns him.
NOTE: For a complete discussion on the operational framework of a CZ, see FM 3-0.
ENEMYPRISONER OF WAR
1-4. As defined in the Geneva Convention Relative to the Treatment of Prisoners of War (GPW), 12 August 1949, an EPW is­
* A member of an enemy armed force or a member of a militia or a
volunteer corps forming part of an enemy armed force.
A member of a militia or a volunteer corps (including an organized
resistance movement) that (1)belongs to an enemy power, (2) operates
in or outside its own territory (even if the territory is occupied),and (3)
fulfills the following conditions:
The organization is commanded by a person responsible for his subordinates. . The organization has a fixed, distinctive sign that is recognizable at a distance. . The members are carrying arms openly.
1-2 Introduction
The organization is conducting operations according to the laws
and customs of war. A member of an enemy armed force who professes allegiance to a government or an authority not recognized by the detaining power (the US).
A person who accompanies an enemy armed force without actually being a member (a civilian member of a military aircraft crew, a war correspondent, a supply contractor, a member of a labor unit, or a member of a service that is responsible for enemy welfare) if he has authorization and an identification (ID) card from the armed force.
A crew member (a master, a pilot, or an apprentice of a merchant marine or a member of a civil aircraft under the enemy’s power) who does not benefit from more favorable treatment under other provisions of international law.
Inhabitants of an unoccupied territory who spontaneously take up arms to resist invading US armed forces (without having time to form themselves into a regular armed unit) if they carry arms openly and respect the laws and customs of war.
1-5.The following persons are treated as EPWs: A person who qualifies for EPW status under paragraph 1-4(if the US is a party to the conflict) and falls into the hands of the US as a neutral or nonbelligerent power. -A person belonging to or having belonged to an armed force of a country occupied by the US (if the US considers it necessary by reason of such allegiance to intern him) even though he may have been originally liberated from EPW status by the US while hostilities were going on outside the occupied territory. Particular application is made to a person who has made an unsuccessful attempt to join an armed force that is engaged in combat or who has failed to comply with a summons for internment.
1-6.Captured enemy personnel are presumed to be EPWs immediately upon capture if the circumstances are unmistakable (armed, uniformed enemy). If questions arise as to whether captured personnel belong in the EPW category, they receive the same treatment as EPWs until their status is determined by a competent military tribunal according to AR 190-8.
CIVILIAN INTERNEE
1-7.A CI is a person who is interned during armed conflict or occupation if he is considered a security risk or if he needs protection because he committed an offense (insurgent, criminal) against the detaining power. A CI is protected according to the Geneva Convention Relative to the Protection of Civilian Persons in Time of War (GC), 12August 1949.

RETAINED PERSON
1-8.An RP is an enemy who falls within one of the following categories: A person who is a member of the medical service of an enemy armed force.
Introduction 1-3
A medical person exclusively engaged in­
. Searching, collecting, transporting, or treating wounded or sick personnel. Preventing disease. Administering a medical unit or establishment.
A chaplain attached to an enemy armed force. A member of the International Federation of Red Cross and Red Crescent Societies (IFRC) or another voluntary aid organization. The organization must be duly recognized and authorized by its government. The staff may be employed in the same duties as medical personnel if the organization is subject to military laws and regulations.
1-9. An RP is a special category for medical personnel and chaplains because of their special skills and training. They may be retained by the detaining power (see FM 27-10) to aid EPWs, preferably those of the armed force to which the RP belongs. Per the Geneva Conventions, RPs receive the same benefits and protection as EPWs. The following privileges and considerations are extended to RPs due to their professions:
Correspondence privileges that are over and above those afforded to

EPWs.
Facilities to provide medical care, spiritual assistance, and welfare
services to EPWs.

Transportation for periodic visits to EPW branch yR facilities and
hospitals outside the EPW I/R facility to carry out medical, spiritual,
and welfare duties.

Work assignments that are restricted to medical and religious duties
they are qualified to perform.
Quarters that are separate from EPW quarters when practicable.

NOTE: For a complete discussionon RPs, see AR 190-8.
OTHER DETAINEE
1-10. A person in the custody of US armed forces who has not been classified as an EPW (Article 4, GPW), an RP (Article 33, GPW), or a CI (Article 78, GC) is treated as an EPW until a legal status is ascertained by competent authority.
DISLOCATED CIVILIAN
1-11.A DC is a civilian who left his home for various reasons. His movement and physical presence can hinder military operations. He most likely requires some degree of aid (medicine, food, shelter, or clothing). A DC may not be native to the area (local populace)or to the country where he resides. A DC is a generic term that is further subdivided into the following categories:
DP. A DP has been dislocated because of war, a natural disaster, or politicaVeconomic turmoil. Consequently, the motivation for civilians to flee and their status under international and domestic laws vary, as does the degree of assistance required and the location for relief
1-4 Introduction
operations. Likewise, the political, geographical, environmental, and
threat situations also vary. Refugee. The Geneva Convention Relative to the Status of Refugees (1951) states that a refugee is a person who “owing to a well-founded fear of being persecuted for reasons of race, religion, nationality, membership in a particular social group, or political opinion, is outside the country of his nationality, and is unable to or, owing to such fear, is unwilling to avail himself of the protection of that country.”
Evacuee. An evacuee is a civilian who is removed from his place of residence by military direction because of personal security or other requirements of the military situation.
Stateless person. A stateless person is a civilian who has been denationalized, whose country of origin cannot be determined, or who cannot establish his right to nationality claimed.
War victim. A war victim is a civilian who suffered an injury, a loss of a family member, or damage to or destruction of his home because of
war.
Migrant. A migrant is a worker who moves from one region to another by chance, instinct, or plan. IDP. An IDP may have been forced to flee his home for the same
reasons as a refugee, but he has not crossed an internationally
recognized border.
Expellee. An expellee is a civilian who is outside the boundaries of his
country of nationality or ethnic origin and is being forcibly repatriated
to that country or a third country for political or other purposes.

UNITED STATES MILITARY PRISONER
1-12. A US military prisoner is sentenced by a court-martial to confinement or death and ordered into confinement by competent authority, whether or not the sentence has been approved by the convening authority. A person placed into confinement by competent authority pending trial by court-martial is a pretrial prisoner or a pretrial detainee.
1-13. The objectives of I/R operations are to process, handle, care for, account for, and secure-EPWs. CIS. RPs. ODs DCs. US military prisoners.
1-14. The principles employed to achieve the objectives are according to the Hague Convention (1907), the Geneva Conventions (1949), the Geneva Convention Relative to the Status of Refugees (1951) and its protocol (1967), and current STANAGs. These principles include-
Introduction 1-5
Humane treatment and efficient care.
Prompt evacuation from the CZ.
Provisions for captive or detainee interrogation.
Procedures for evacuation, control, and administration of internees

with other CS and combat service support (CSS) operations.
NOTE: The principles employed for US military prisoners are outlined in AR 190-47 and Department of Defense (DOD) Directive 1325.4.

AGENCIES
1-15. The expanded MP functions of I/R involve certain international and domestic organizations not previously considered during MP operations. There are numerous private relief organizations, foreign and domestic, that are involved in humanitarian relief and I/R operations. Likewise, the media normally provides extensive coverage of I/R operations. In many instances, the DOD will not be the lead agency in IIR operations, which adds to the complexity. For instance, the DOD could be tasked in a supporting role, with the Department of State (DOS)or another agency in the lead.
DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE
1-16. Under the Geneva Conventions and subsequent protocols, a capturing power is responsible for proper and humane treatment of detainees from the moment of capture or other apprehension. The Secretary of the Army is the executive agent for DOD I/R operations and administration. He is responsible for plans, policy development, and operational coordination for persons captured and interned by US armed forces. Navy, Marine, and Air Force units that detain or capture persons turn them over to the Army at designated receiving points after initial classification and administrative processing.
1-17. Per DOD Directive 3025.1, the Secretary of the Army tasks DOD components to plan and commit DOD resources in response to requests for military support from civil authorities. The Director of Military Support (DOMS)provides leadership in this effort.
1-18. Examples of DOD decision makers are the Under Secretary of Defense (USD) for Policy and the Deputy Assistant Secretary of Defense (DASD) for Humanitarian and Refugee Mairs (H&RA). The USD for Policy develops and administers military policies and programs for international HA and foreign relief operations. The DASD for H&RA executes the policies and tasks the services accordingly.
DEPARTMENT OF STATE
1-19. The DOS is organized into functional and regional bureaus. It represents the US via embassies throughout the world.
FEDERAL EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT AGENCY
1-20. Per the Stafford Act, the federal government responds to disasters and emergencies to save lives and protect public health, safety, and property. The
1-6 Introduction
Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) is responsible for the nation’s emergency management system. Local and state programs are the heart of the nation’s emergency management system, and most disasters are handled by local and state governments. When devastations are especially serious and exceed local and state capabilities and resources, states turn to the federal government for help.
1-21.When the President declares a major disaster, FEMA coordinates response activities for federal agencies that may participate. The agencies help states and localities recover from disasters by providing services, resources, and personnel. They transport food and potable water, provide medical aid, assist with temporary housing, and furnish generators for hospitals and other essential facilities. The FEMA also works with states and territories during nondisaster periods to plan for disasters, develop mitigation programs, and anticipate requirements.
1-22.The Federal Response Plan addresses the consequencesof disasters and emergencies. It applies to natural disasters (earthquakes, hurricanes, typhoons, tornadoes, and volcanic eruptions), technological emergencies (radiologicaland hazardous material [HMI releases), and other incidents. The plan describes the basic mechanisms and structures to mobilize resources and conduct activities that augment state and local efforts. It uses a functional approach to group the types of federal assistance that a state is most likely to need under emergency support functions (ESFs). Each ESF is headed by a primary agency based on its authorities, resources, and capabilities in the functional area. The ESFs are the primary mechanismsthrough which federal assistance is provided. Federal assistance is provided to affected states under the overall coordination of a federal coordinating officer, who is appointed by the FEMA director on behalf of the President.
MISCELLANEOUSAGENCIES
1-23.Other federal agencies provide advice, assistance, and resources to plan, implement, and accomplish URoperations.They are the­
*
Department of Transportation (DOT). Its technical capabilities and expertise in public transportation are available to assist in specific operations.
United States Department of Agriculture (USDA).It has projects and activities ongoing in foreign countries and provides technical assistance and expertise.
United States Agency for International Development (USAID).
Although not directly under the control of DOS, USAID coordinates activities at the department and country levels within the federal government.
Office of Foreign Disaster Assistance (OFDA).It provides prompt nonmilitary assistance to alleviate death and suffering of foreign disaster victims. The OFDA may request DOD assistance for I/R operations. The coordination and determination of forces required is normally accomplished through DOD and the joint task force (JTF).
United States Information Agency (USIA). The USIA helps achieve US objectives by influencing public attitudes overseas. It
Introduction 1-7
advises the US government on the possible impacts of policies, programs, and official statements on foreign opinions. The USIA helps HA forces gain popular support and counters attempts to distort and frustrate US and JTF objectives.
Department of Justice (DOJ).The IiR forces may contact the DOJ Community Relations Service for assistance in domestic HA operations. It provides on-site resolution assistance through a field staff of mediators and negotiators.
Public Health Service (PHs). It promotes protection and advancement of the nation’s physical and mental health. The US forces work with the PHs during refugee operations in and near the US and its territories.
Immigration and Naturalization Service (INS).It provides information and services to the public while enforcing immigration control. The INS is essential for processing and settling migrants and refugees in the US and its territories.
CIVILIAN ORGANIZATIONS
1-24.Civilian organizations are responsible for a wide range of activities encompassing HA; human rights; the protection of minorities, refugees, and DPs; legal assistance; medical care; reconstruction; agriculture; education; arts; science; and project funding. The commander must understand the mandate, role, structure method, and principles of civilian organizations. Without this understanding, it is impossible to establish an effective relationship with them.
1-25.These organizations may already be in the area of operations (AO), providing HA or some type of relief when I/R operations are planned and implemented. The principle coordinating federal agency is the USAID, and civilian organizations are required to register with the USAID to operate under US auspices.
Types of Civilian Organizations
1-26.There are three principle types of civilian organizations: International organization (10). An I0 is established by
intergovernmental agreements and operates at the international
level. Examples of 10s include the­
. United Nations (UN).
. United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees (UNHCR).
. United Nations Development Program (UNDP).
. United Nations Office for the Coordination of Humanitarian

Affairs (UNOCHA).
. World Food Program (WFP).
. International Medical Corps (IMC).
Nongovernmental organization (NGO).An NGO is a voluntary organization that is not funded by a government. It is primarily a nonprofit organization that is independent of a government, an 10, or
1-8 Introduction
a commercial interest. It is legally different than an I0 because it
writes its own charter and mission. The NGOs are increasingly numerous and sophisticated, and they can number in the hundreds in any conflict. They remain strongly independent from political control to preserve their independence and effectiveness. In many cases, their impartiality has been of great benefit, forming the only available means of rebuilding relations when political dialog has broken down. They are often highly professional in their field and extremely well motivated and prepared to take physical risks in appalling conditions. Examples of NGOs include the-
Save the Children Foundation (SCF). . MBdecin Sans FrontiBres (DoctorsWithout Borders) (MSF). . Catholic Relief Services (CRS). . National Council of Catholic Bishops (NCCB). An NGO is mandated or nonmandated:
Mandated. A mandated NGO has been officially recognized by the lead I0 in a crisis and has been authorized to work in the affected area.
. Nonmandated. A nonmandated NGO has no official recognition or authorization and, therefore, works as a private concern. A nonmandated NGO can be subcontracted by an I0 or a mandated NGO. It can also obtain’funds from private enterprises or donors.
International humanitarian organization (IHO). An IHO is an impartial, neutral, and independent organization whose mandate is to assist and protect victims of conflict. It carefully guards its neutrality and does not desire to be associated with or dependent upon the military for fear of losing its special status in the international community that allows it to fulfill its mandate. Examples of IHOs include the-
International Organization for Migration (IOM). . International Committee of the Red Cross (ICRC). . IFRC.
Civilian Lead Agencies
1-27. A lead agency is mandated by the international community to initiate the cooperation of civilian organizations that volunteer to participate in an operation. The lead agency is normally a major UN agency, such as the UNHCR or the UNOCHA, and it
Acts as the point of contact (POC)for other agencies.
Coordinates field activities to avoid duplicating effort and wasting
resources.
Understanding Civilian Organizations
1-28. A good working relationship can be established with NGOs, IOs, and
IHOs through trust and understanding. The most effective way for military
forces to understand an organization’s knowledge, skills, and abilities is to
Introduction 1-9
establish and maintain a liaison with it. This understanding can also be gained through educating military leaders in military schools and courses.
UNITED NATIONS
1-29. The UN is involved in the entire spectrum of HA operations from prevention to relief. Typically, UN relief agencies establish independent networks to execute their humanitarian-relief operations. The UN system delegates as much as possible to agency elements located in the field, with supervisory and support networks traced from field officers back to UN headquarters. Military planners must be familiar with UN objectives to ensure compatibility with military plans and orders. The UN agencies include the United Nations Disaster Relieve Coordinator (UNDRC)and the UNHCR:
UNDRC. It coordinates assistance to persons compelled to leave their homes because of disasters.
UNCHR.It

. Provides international protection to refugees. It promotes the adoption of international standards for the treatment of refugees and supervises implementation of the standards.
. Seeks permanent solutions for refugee problems. It facilitates voluntary repatriation and reintegration of refugees into their country of origin. Where practical, it facilitates their integration into a country of asylum or a third country.
. Provides other activities that include emergency relief counseling, education, and legal assistance. These activities entail a very active role in monitoringhuman rights.
. Helps governments meet their obligations concerning refugees under various international statues.
INTERNATIONALRED CROSSAND RED CRESCENT MOVEMENTS
1-30. Three organizations make up the International Red Cross and Red Crescent Movement. They are the­
*     I=. It provides relief operations to help victims of natural and man-made disasters. It has a unique network of national societies throughout the world. The IFRC is the umbrella organization for the ICRC.
ICRC. It acts as a monitoring agent for the proper treatment of EPWs and other detained persons. It coordinates National Red Cross and Red Crescent Societies’ international relief operations for victims of conflict. The ICRC reports violations of international humanitarian laws and promotes awareness and development of humanitarian laws among nations.
National Red Cross and Red Crescent organizations.
NOTES:
1. These organizations are distinctly different and have separate mandates and staff organizations. Do not consider them to be one organization.
1-10 Introduction
2. Red Crescent organizations are found in predominately Muslim countries. They have the same goals and missions as Red Cross organizations.
1-31.Although the ICRC is essentially Swiss,it has worldwide operations and acts as a neutral intermediary in armed conflicts. The ICRC ensures that conflict victims receive appropriate protection and assistance within the scope of the Geneva Conventions,their protocols, and the ICRC mandate. The ICRC undertakes protection and assistance activities for the benefit of detainees and civilian populations by­
*     Visiting detainees and attempting, through confidential contacts, to ensure compliance with the Geneva Conventions.
Supervisingprisoner releases and exchanges.
Providing emergency relief to civilians who are affected by an armed
conflict or a natural disaster.

Tracing individuals who are displaced because of an armed conflict or
a natural disaster.
Organizingfamily contacts and reunions.

PROTECTION OF CAPTIVES AND DETAINEES
1-32.The provisions of the Geneva Conventions are applicable to captives and detainees from the time they are captured until they are released or repatriated. AR 190-8is the implementing regulation. When a person is captured during the heat of battle, he is entitled to protection as a detainee.
1-33.Detainees receive humane treatment without distinction of race, nationality, religious belief, political opinion, or similar criteria. Captives and detainees are not murdered, mutilated, tortured, or degraded. They are not punished for alleged criminal acts without previous judgment pronounced by a legally constituted court that has accorded them judicial guarantees which are recognized as indispensable to a fair trial. Individuals and capturing nations are responsible for acts committed against detainees if the acts violate the Geneva Conventions.
1-34.Captives and detainees are entitled to respect, and they are treated with honor and as human beings. They are protected against violence, insults, public curiosity, and reprisals. They are not subjected to physical mutilation or medical or scientific experimentation that is not required for normal medical, dental, or hospital treatment. Coercion is not inflicted on captives and detainees to obtain information. Those who refuse to answer are not threatened, insulted, or exposed to unpleasant or disadvantageous treatment. Female captives and detainees are treated with respect and accorded fair and equal treatment.
PROTECTING POWER
1-35.A neutral state or a humanitarian organization, such as the ICRC, is designated as a protecting power. The protecting power monitors whether detainees are receiving humane treatment as required by international law. Representatives or delegates of a protecting power are authorized to visit detainees where they are interned or confined and to interview them
Introduction 1-11
regarding their internment, welfare, and rights. The interview may be conducted without witnesses. Such visits cannot be prohibited except for imperative military necessity.
UNITED STATES POLICY TOWARDSDETAINEES
1-36. Basic US policy underlying the treatment of detainees and other captured or interned personnel during the course of a conflict requires and directs that all perso~elbe accorded humanitarian care and treatment from the moment of custody until their final release or repatriation. The US personnel are fully and equally bound to observe this policy whether capturing troops, custodial personnel, or anyone else, regardless of the capacity they may be serving. This policy is equally applicable for protecting detained and interned personnel whether they are known to have committed or are suspected of committing a serious offense that could be characterized as a war crime. The punishment of such persons is administered by the due process of law and under legally constituted authority. Inhumane treatment, even if committed under stress of combat and with deep provocation, is a serious and punishable violation under national law, international law, and the UCMJ.
PROTECTION OF ENEMY PRISONERS OF WAR AND CMLIAN INTERNEES
1-37. The Geneva Conventions, comprised of four treaties, form part of the
supreme law of the land and provide the internationally recognized
humanitarian standards for the treatment of war victims. The US ratified the
Geneva Conventions for the Protection of War Victims, 12 August 1949. It
recognizesthe spirit and intent of these treaties in its treatment of EPWs, CIS,
and detained and interned persons. The Geneva Conventions became effective
in 1956, and the US observes and enforces the terms of these conventions.
They are collectivelyreferred to as the Geneva Conventions and include the­
*     GPW. This convention provides humane treatment of EPWs. It regulates the treatment of internees (care, food, clothing, and housing),discipline and punishment, labor and pay, external relations, representation, the international exchange of information, and the termination of captivity.
GC. This convention deals with the protection for populations against the consequences of war, the status and treatment of protected persons, and the treatment of CIS.
Geneva Convention for the Amelioration of the Condition of the Wounded and Sick in Armed Forces in the Field, 12 August 1949 (GWS).This convention provides protection for members of the armed forces and other persons on the battlefield who are wounded or sick. Members in the conflict search for and collect wounded and sick persons, protect them against pillage and ill treatment, and ensure their adequate care. They also search for dead persons and prevent them from being despoiled.
Geneva Convention for the Amelioration of the Condition of Wounded, Sick, and Shipwrecked Members of Armed Forces at
1-12 Introduction
Sea, 12 August 1949 (GWS [SEA]). This convention provides humane treatment and protection for members of the armed forces and other persons at sea who are wounded, sick, or shipwrecked. It also protects hospital ships and burial at sea.
1-38. STANAG 2044 prescribes concepts and procedures for the control and administration of EPWs by US armed forces operating in Europe under operational control (OPCON) of the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO), in coordination with one or more NATO allies, and supported by the doctrine contained in this manual. STANAG 2044 provides-
Terms and definitions relating to EPWs.
Procedures for using EPW personnel record forms.
Procedures for handling EPWs, their personal property, and their

money.
PROTECTION OF REFUGEES
1-39. The Geneva Convention Relative to the Status of Refugees (1951) and its protocols (1967) provide a general, universally applicable definition of refugee. They address the minimum standards for the treatment of refugees, specifying the obligations of the host nation (HN) and the refugees to one another. Among the important provisions of the 1951 Convention is the principle of nonrefoulement (Article 33). The principle of nonrefoulement is often referred to as the cornerstone of international protection. This principle prohibits the return or expulsion of a refugee to the territory of a state where his life, freedom, or personal security would be in jeopardy. Through widespread practice, the principle is considered to be a rule of customary law, binding nations whether or not they are signatories.
1-40. The 1951 Convention also provides protection of refugees. A refugee has the right to safe asylum; however, international protection comprises more than physical safety. Refugees receive the same rights and help as any other foreigner who is a legal resident, including certain fundamental entitlements of every individual. Refugees have basic civil rights, including freedom of thought and movement and freedom from torture and degrading treatment. Similarly, refugees have economic and social rights. Every adult refugee has the right to work, and no child refugee is deprived of schooling. In certain circumstances, such as large-scale inflows of refugees, asylum states may feel obliged to restrict certain rights, such as freedoms of movement, work, and education. Such gaps should be filled by the international community when possible. When resources are unavailable from the government of the asylum country or other agencies, the UNHCR will assist.
NOTE: For further details,see the UNHCR Handbook for the Military on HumanitarianOperations, First Edition, 1995.
Introduction 1-13
Chapter 2
Commander and Staff Responsibilities
All MP commanders and staff members must be familiar with applicable ARs, Army directives, and international laws necessary for the successful operation of I/R and confinement facilities. This chapter discusses areas of greatest concern when performing the lC/R function.
2-1. An MP battalion commander tasked with operating an I/R facility is also the facility commander. As such, he is responsible for the safety and well-being of all personnel housed within the facility. Since an MP unit may be tasked to handle different categories of personnel (EPW, CI, OD, refugee, and US military prisoner), the commander, the cadre, and support personnel must be aware of the requirements for each category.
PROCEDURES

2-2. Commanders are familiar with applicable regulations, directives, international laws, and administrative procedures. The servicing staff judge advocate (SJA)provides legal advice and training on I/R matters. Regulations and other guidance relative to the administration, employment, and compensation of internees are prescribed in­
* AR 190-8.
Defense Finance and Accounting Service-Indianapolis (DFAS-IN)
37-1.
FM 14-100.
DA Pamphlet (Pam) 37-100-95.
FM 27-10.

2-3. Copies of the Geneva Conventions and compound regulations, orders, and notices relating to internee conduct and activities are posted in each facility,in the language of internees who are housed there. If internees do not have access to posted copies, the facility commander makes copies available to them.
2-4. The commander is responsible for the administrative processing of each internee. When processing is complete, he submits a DA Form 2674-R to the servicing internmentlresettlement information center (IRIC), which functions as the field operations agency for the national IRIC located in CONUS.
Commander and Staff Responsibilities 2-1
PRINCIPLES AND POLICIES
2-5. The followingprinciples apply to I/R facilities: Use housed personnel for internal maintenance and operation. Use captured supplies and equipment (excluding weapons and
ammunition). Maintain control.
2-6. An EPWICI has the right to­
*     Submit requests and complaints regarding the conditions of confinement.
Elect representatives.
Send and receive correspondence.

NOTE: The rights of US military prisoners are outlined in AR 190-47 and DOD Directive 1325.4.
STANDING ORDERS
2-7. Standing orders provide uniform, orderly administration of an IIR facility. The orders to be obeyed by housed personnel are published in their language and posted where they can read the orders and refer to them. Standing orders include rules, procedures, and instructions (see Figure 2-1) governing the following activities and other matters as deemed appropriate:
Scheduleof calls, including-Reveille. Morning roll. Readiness of quarters for inspection. Sick. Mess. Eveningroll. Lights out.
Housed personnel actions that support the emergency action plans of the internment facility, such as-Fire drills. Air raid drills. Emergency evacuations. Natural disaster drills. . Blackouts. Escapes. Hours for religious services, recreation activities, and so forth. Procedures for emergency sick call. Designated smoking areas.
2-2     Commander and Staff Responsibilities
1.
You must comply with rules, regulations, and orders. They are necessary for safety, good order, and
discipline.
2.
You must immediately obey all orders of US personnel. Deliberate disobedience, resistance, or conduct of a mutinous or riotous nature will be dealt with by force.

3.
You are subject to disciplinary or judicial punishment if you disobey a rule, a regulation, or an order or if you commit any act, conduct, disorder, or neglect that is prejudicial to good order or discipline.

4.
You will not receive disciplinary or judicial punishment until you have an opportunity to explain your conduct and to defend yourself. If you commit an offense for which judicial punishment may arise, investigation of the offense will be coordinated with the SJA before being undertaken to ensure that it is conducted according to the Geneva Conventions. You may call witnesses, and if necessary, you will be provided with the services of a qualified interpreter.

5.
You may receive disciplinary punishment that includes discontinuing privileges over and above the treatment provided for by the Geneva Conventions. You may receive a fine up to one half of your 30-day advance and working pay. Privates may be assigned fatigue (extra) duty up to 2 hours daily, noncommissioned officers (NCOs) may be required to perform supervisory duties only, and officers may not be compelled to work.

6.
You may not establish courts or administer punishment over other captives.

7.
You may not have knives, sticks, metal pieces, or other articles that can be used as weapons in your
possession at any time.
8.
You may not drill or march in military formation for any purpose except as authorized and directed by the
facility commander.
9.
You may not meet or issue propaganda for political purposes.

10.
You may not wear or display national political items.

11.
You may not gamble.

12.
You may not possess or consume alcoholic beverages.

13.
You may retain personal effects and property that are authorized by the facility commander.

14.
You may smoke at times and places specified by the facility commander.

15.
You will follow the required courtesies toward your army’s officers. If you are an enlisted captive, you will salute all US commissioned officers. If you are an officer captive, you will salute US commissioned officers of a higher grade and the facility commander, regardless of his grade.

Figure 2-1. Sample Standing Orders
NOTICE OF PROTECTION
2-8. To protect persons from acts of violence, bodily injury, and threats of reprisals at the hand of fellow internees, post a notice of protection (Figure 2-2)inthe internees’ language inevery compound.
NOTICE
A detainee who fears that his life is in danger, or fears that he may suffer physical injury at the hands of another
detainee, should immediately report to a US member of the facility without consulting his representative. The
facility commander ensures adequate protection for the victim by segregation, transfer, or other means. A
detainee who mistreats a fellow detainee will be punished.
(Signed by the Commanding Officer)
Figure 2-2. Sample Notice of Protection
Commander and Staff Responsibilities 2-3
RECORDS AND REPORTS
2-9. The commander establishes local records and reports necessary for the effective operation of the IIR facility, They provide information about the control, supervision, and disposition of personnel housed in the facility. He determines the type (administrative, operational, logistical, intelligence, and personnel) of reports and the frequency (routine or as required). Normal reports (duty officer logs, worksheets, and situation maps) are also required.
MEDICAL AND SANITATIONCONSIDERATIONS
2-10. Commanders consider the followingwhen establishing medical care (see
AR 190-8): A medical officer, a physician’s assistant (PA), or a nurse practitioner examines each internee monthly and-
Records his weight on DA Form 2664-R.
Monitors his general health, nutrition, and cleanliness.
Examines him for contagious diseases, especially tuberculosis

(TB), venereal disease, lice, louse-borne disease, and human

immunodeficiencyvirus (HIV). The medical treatment facility provides isolation of communicable diseases, disinfection, and inoculations. Use retained medical personnel and EPWs with medical training to the fullest extent possible when caring for sick and wounded EPWs. When medical care is inadequate, transfer housed personnel to military or civilian medical facilitieswhere the required treatment is available.
2-11. Certain sanitation standards must be met to prevent disease and ensure cleanliness.These standards include­
* Ensuring that internees receive as much water as US soldiers.
Providing adequate space within housing units to prevent
overcrowding.
Providing sufficient showers and latrines and ensuring that they are

cleaned and sanitized daily.

Teaching dining-facility workers the rules of good food sanitation and
ensuring that they are observed and practiced.
Disposing of human waste properly to protect the health of all

individuals associated with the facility according to the guidelines

established by preventive medicine (PVNTMED).
Providing sufficient potable water for drinking, bathing, laundry, and
food service.

Providing materials for personal hygiene.
Training personnel on proper garbage disposal to prevent insects and
vermin that can contribute to health hazards.

SOCIAL PROGRAMS
2-12. Encourage and support active education, religious, recreation, and employment programs when practical. If possible, provide adequate facilities, instruction material, and recreation equipment.
2-4 Commander and Staff Responsibilities
2-13.Accredited representatives of protecting powers and the ICRC are allowed full access to the IIR facility and internees. Representatives of approved religious organizations, relief societies, NGOs, IHOs, and other organizations assisting housed personnel are permitted to visit according to policies and procedures prescribed by the DA.
2-14.Advanced coordination is encouraged by representatives of NGOs, IOs, and IHOs who want access to internees. This avoids confusion when representatives arrive at the facility. Likewise, the facility staff coordinates in advance with organizations to establish an access roster of representatives and a means of verifying their identity.
Religion
2-15.Housed personnel are allowed freedom of worship, including attendance at services of their respective faith held within the facility. Retained chaplains and other EPW clergymen are permitted to devote their time to ministering to members of their faith. The MP commander may permit other ordained clergymen, theological students, or chaplains to conduct services within the compound. The US personnel will not attend services with EPWs, RPs, CIS, or ODs.
Recreation
2-16.Participation in recreation activities promotes general health and welfare and alleviates tension and boredom. In addition to athletic contests, group entertainment can be provided by concerts, plays, recorded music, and motion pictures.
SAFETYPROGRAM
2-17.Set up and administer a safety program for housed personnel in each I/R facility. Follow the procedures outlined in AR 385-10and associated circulars and pamphlets to establish the safety program. Maintain records and reports for the internee safety program separate from those for the Army safety program.
AGRICULTURAL PROGRAM
2-18.The EPWs are allowed to raise vegetables for their use. Subsequently, commanders must be aware of resources, procedures, and HN guidelines applicable to this program.
SECURITY
2-19.The MP commander establishes security measures that effectively control housed personnel with minimal use of force. The same use of force that is employed for one category of housed personnel may not be applicable to another. Commanders protect housed personnel from threats outside the facility. The physical construction of the facility and the presence of guard personnel create the most obvious means of providing internal and external security. Maintaining a high state of discipline, a system of routines, and
Commander and Staff Responsibilities 2-5
required standards of behavior are all measures that enhance effective security and control.
2-20. Many housed personnel will actively cooperate with US authorities or will assume a passive, compliant role. They will be composed, in part, of individuals with ideologiesfavorable to the US. Others, through resignation or apathy, will simply adapt themselves to the conditions of their internment.
2-21. Some housed personnel will engage in a campaign of embarrassing and harassing US personnel to create propaganda of value to their cause. The EPWs want to force the use of maximum US troops for other-than-combat missions. The leaders of the uncooperative faction may try to establish a united effort and blind obedience by all its members. They will not be content with merely planning and attempting to escape or using normal harassment tactics. The leaders will assign duties and missions to individuals so that resistance will not stop while they are interned. Any relaxation of security will be immediately detected and fully exploited.
2-22. Maintain firm control at all times. Adapt policies, tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP) to achieve this end state.
FACILITY GUARD FORCE
2-23. The facility guard force provides internal and external security. The force has a commander of the guard, one or more sergeants of the guard, a relief commander for each shift, and the necessary number of guards. There are two types of orders for guards:
General orders. All guards are required to know, understand, and
comply with the general orders outlined for sentinels in FM 22-6. Special orders. They apply to particular posts and duties. Special orders supplement general orders and are established by the commander.
2-24. The facility guard force is the primary source of security for the I/R facility. Its responsibilities include­
*     Internal. . Sally port. . Search teams. . Receiving and processing lines. . Escorts. . Facility gates. External. . Holding area. . Towers. . Transfer area.
Work site. Perimeter. . Brigade tactical operations center (BTOC).
2-6     Commander and Staff Responsibilities
Standby Guards
2-25. Standby guards are soldiers who are not on duty. The standby guard force is large enough to reinforce tower and sally port guards; however, it is not normally used as a quick-reaction force (QRF) to enter enclosures and quell disturbances or conduct searches.
Tower Guards
2-26. Tower guards are posted in towers and positioned so that they have overlapping fields of vision of the entire perimeter. This allows one or more guards to observe activities within enclosures. A tower guard’s primary duties are to prevent escape and to observe and report unauthorized or suspicious activities.
Walking Patrols
2-27. Walking patrols supplement the perimeter security when weather conditions or electrical failure prevents tower guards from clearly observing the entire perimeter. Gate guards are posted at perimeter gates and the sally port to­
*     Exercise control over personnel, vehicles, and work details.
Conduct shakedown searches according to facility standing operating
procedures (SOPS),special orders, and security regulations.
Prevent the smuggling of weapons or other contraband items into the
facility. Prevent escapes.
Military Working Dogs
2-28. Military working dogs (MWDs) offer a psychological and real deterrent against physical threats presented by housed personnel. However, they cannot be used as security measures against US military prisoners. The MWDs reinforce security measures against penetration and attack by small enemy forces that may be operating in the area. They also provide a positive, effective alternative to using firearms when preventing disturbances. The various techniques for employing MWDs are­
*     Demonstrations.Hold periodic demonstrations in full view of housed personnel to increase the psychological deterrent of MWDs. Emphasize how easily and quickly an MWD can overtake a fleeing individual, highlight his ability to attack and overcome physical resistance, and demonstrate his tracking ability. To ensure a successful demonstration, use only the best qualified MWD teams.
Perimeter security. Use an MWD team as an adjunct to perimeter security by making periodic, unscheduled patrols around the perimeter fence during periods of darkness. During inclement weather, a temporary blackout, or an electrical failure, increase the number and frequency of patrols. Ensure that housed personnel are aware of MWD presence by having dogs bark at infrequent intervals during the night.
Commander and Staff Responsibilities 2-7
Inspections.Walk an MWD team through living areas to search for contraband. Depending on the type of MWD team available, it can search for explosive devices and components andlor illegal drugs.
Work details.Position an MWD between the work detail and the area offering the greatest avenue of escape. The MWDs provide a valuable adjunct to work detail guards, particularly those employed in areas offering the greatest potential for escape.
USE OF FORCE AND RULES OF ENGAGEMENT
2-29. An MP commander ensures that soldiers understand use-of-force guidelines and the ROE established by higher headquarters for each mission. Because the use of force and the ROE vary depending on the category of housed personnel and the operational environment, the commander develops SOPSthat follow the guidance provided. He balances the physical security of forces with mission accomplishment and the protection of deployed forces.
NOTE: For more information on the use of force, see Appendix B.
2-30. The restrictions on combat operations and the use of force are clearly explained in the ROE and are understood and obeyed at all levels. Soldiers study and train on the use of the ROE and discuss them for their mission. The ROE address the distinctions between internee categories and the instruments of control available for each category. Use the followingissues to develop ROE guidelines:
What is considered lethal force?
Under what conditions is lethal force used?
Under what conditions is nonlethal force used?
What are the required warnings, if any, before using force (lethal or

nonlethal)?

TYPES OF DISTURBANCES
2-31. Housed personnel may organize a disturbance within the facility to weaken the guard force. At the beginning of a disturbance, initiate a record of events. Commanders must be concerned with two types of disturbances-riots and disorders:
Riots. . Organized. Leaders of housed personnel organize the internee population into quasi-military groups. . Unorganized. It is spontaneous in nature, although it can be exploited and diverted by leaders into an organized riot. . Multiple. When housed personnel in one compound start rioting, personnel in other compounds also riot. Disorders.
Organized.It can be a demonstration, a refusal to work or eat, a work slowdown, or the damage or destruction of property. Unorganized.It is spontaneous in nature.
NOTE: For more information on riots and disorders, see Appendix B.
2-8 Commander and Staff Responsibilities
2-32. Staff officers at tactical headquarters and CSS commands are normally responsible for the same functional areas inside an I/R or confinement facility. However, the emphasis on different aspects and the scope and magnitude of EPW, CI, and US military prisoner activities vary in CS and CSS commands. This section describes additional staff officers that may be found at different echelons of command (primarily IIR MP units) and their areas of responsibility. FM 101-5 describes the roles, relationships, organization, and responsibilities of staffs in the US Army.
ADJUTANT GENERAL
2-33. The adjutant general (AG) maintains personnel records for EPWs, CIS, and US military prisoners. The AG’s personnel and administrative section can inprocess eight persons per hour, depending on the category. It­
*     Provides accountability documents to the IRIC if applicable. Maintains labor records and time cards for prisoners. Submits the required reports on prisoners. Prepares documents for administrative court-martial charges for
EPWs, CIS, and US military prisoners.
FINANCE OFFICER
2-34. The finance officer­
*     Accounts for impounded financial assets (cash and negotiable
instruments) of housed personnel.
Records payflabor credits, canteen purchases/coupons, and other
transactions.

Prepares payrolls, makes disbursements, and processes repatriation
settlements.
Advises the commander on finance and accounting issues.

NOTE: SeeFM 14-100for more information.
CML-MILITARY OPERATIONS OFFICER
2-35. The civil-military operations (CMO)officer­
*     Provides technical advice and assistance on strategies for community
relations and information.
Plans community relations programs to gain and maintain public
understanding and goodwill and to support military operations.
Provides liaison and coordination with other US government agencies; HN civil and military authorities concerned with I/R operations; and NGOs, IOs, and IHOs in the AO.
Coordinates with the SJA on the ROE for dealing with housed personnel.
Commander and Staff Responsibilities 2-9
Provides technical advice and assistance on the reorientation of enemy defectors, EPWs, CIS, and detainees.
CHAPLAIN
2-36.The chaplain or the unit ministry team­
*     Provides religious support for assigned soldiers and internees. Advises the commander on the impact of faiths and practices of
indigenous religious groups in the A0 and internees within the
facility.
Provides religious support to the command and the community,
including confined and hospitalized personnel.
Exercises supervision and control over internee religious leaders
within the facility.

ENGINEER OFFICER
2-37.The engineer officer is a captain in a brigade and a lieutenant in a battalion. He trains and supervises internees who perform internal and external labor (construction and repair of facilities). The engineer officer is responsible for­
*     Construction, maintenance, repair, and operation of utilities (water, electricity, heat, and sanitation). Construction support.
Fire protection.
Insect and rodent control and fumigation.

PUBLIC AFFAIRS OFFICER
2-38.The public affairs officer (PA0)­Understands and fulfills the information needs of soldiers, the Army community, and the public in matters relating to internees and the I/R facility.
*     Serves as the command’s spokesman for all communication with the
external media.
Facilitates media efforts to cover operations by expediting the flow of
complete, accurate, and timely information.

SIGNAL OFFICER
2-39.The signal officer is located in the brigade. He is responsible for all matters concerning signal operations, automation management, network management, and information security.
STAFF JUDGE ADVOCATE
2-40. The SJA is located in the brigade and the brigade liaison detachment (BLD). He­
2-10 Commander and Staff Responsibilities
Provides operational law advice and support for US military prisoner
operations and resettlement operations, particularly the
interpretation of the Geneva Conventions.

Provides advice on the application of force to quell riots and other

disturbances.
Provides support and advice during investigations followingthe death
or injury of an internee during internment.

Serves as the recorder for Article 5 tribunals. (A tribunal determines
the status of a person who has committed a hostile act but whose
status is doubtful.)

Serves as the commander’s liaison to the ICRC.
Provides legal advice on­
. Military justice.
. Administrative law (investigations and command authority).

Civil law (contract, fiscal, and environmental laws).

International law (law of land warfare, Geneva Conventions,
status of forces, ROE, and treatment of detained persons).
Claims.
Legal assistance.

Provides technical advice and assistance on the internee labor policy as it relates to supporting local indigenous requirements not directly advancing the war effort.
Complieswith all treaties and conventions.
MEDICAL OPERATIONS
2-41.The surgeon section­
*     Is responsible for the combat health support (CHS) of the command and internees within the facility. Advises the commander.
Plans and directs echelon I CHS.
Arranges echelons I1 and I11 CHS (including airfground medical
evacuation and hospitalization)when required.

Provides disease prevention through PVNTMED programs.
2-42.The medical treatment squad­
*     Provides routine medical care (sick call) and advanced trauma management for duty soldiers and internees.
Supervisesqualified RPs who are providing medical care for internees. Performs initial medical exams to determine the physical fitness of arriving internees as stipulated by the Geneva Conventions.
Is capable of operating as two separate treatment teams.
2-43.The PVNTMED section­
*     Provides limited PVNTMED services for the facility. Performs sanitary inspections of housing, food service operations,
water supplies, waste disposal operations, and other operations that may present a medical nuisance or health hazard to personnel.
Commander and Staff Responsibilities 2-11
Provides training and guidance to the staff, unit personnel, and others.
MOVEMENT CONTROL OFFICER
2-44. The movement control officer (MC0)­Plans and coordinates the movement of internees and their property
with the Corps Support Command (US Army) (COSCOM) movement control center. Coordinates with brigade operations for daily transportation
requirements and evacuation and transfer of internees. This includes determining the transportation requirements for the evacuation of detainees from one level of internment to the next and coordinating the arrangements.
INSPECTOR GENERAL
2-45. The inspector general (IG)is located in the brigade. He­
* Advises the commander on the organization inspection policy (OIP).
Conducts inspections, surveys, and studies to comply with
international, state, and US laws.
Receives allegations and conducts investigations and inquiries based

on reports and information obtained from EPWs, CIS, DCs, US

military personnel, and multinational guard and police forces.
Consults with international and US agencies in matters pertaining to
the overall health and welfare of the protected population.

Determines the MP unit’s discipline, efficiency, morale, training, and

readiness and provides feedback to the chain of command.
Assists the protected population in coping with family issues and
resolving complaints consistent with military necessity.

Identifies trends to correct and improve I/R operations consistent with
current doctrine, military laws, international laws, UN mandates, and
foreign-nation (FN) and state laws.

Assists in the resolution of systemic issues pertaining to the

processing and administration of the protected population. Reports allegations of war crimes (from protected personnel or US soldiers) through the chain of command to the SJA or the United States Army Criminal Investigation Command (USACIC). The responsibility for investigating alleged war crimes rests with the SJA and the criminal investigation division (CID),not the 1G.
PSYCHOLOGICAL OPERATIONS
2-46. Psychological operations (PSYOP) are not part of the I/R structure; however, the PSYOP officer in charge (OIC) of the EPWICI PSYOP team supporting I/R operations serves as the special staff officer responsible for PSYOP. The PSYOP officer advises the MP commander on the psychological impact of actions to prevent misunderstandings and disturbances by EPWs and CIS. The EPW/CI PSYOP team­
2-12 Commander and Staff Responsibilities
Assists the MP force in controlling EPWs and CIS.
Exposes EPWs and CISto US and allied policies.
Develops and executes PSYOP programs to condition EPWs and CISto
accept facility authority and regulations.
Gains the cooperation of EPWs and CISto reduce guard needs.
Identifies malcontents, trained agitators, and political officers within
the facility who may try to organize a resistance or create a
disturbance.
Develops and executes indoctrination programs to reduce or remove
proenemy attitudes.
Recognizes political activists.
Helps the MP commander control EPWs and CISduring emergencies.
Plans and executes a PSYOP program that produces an
understanding and appreciation of US policies and actions.
Uses comprehensive information, reorientation, educational, and
vocational programs to prepare EPWs and CISfor repatriation.
NOTE:See FMs 3-05.30 and 33-1-1for additional information about PSYOP support to I/R operations.
2-47. The necessary care and control of housed personnel is best achieved with carefully selected and trained personnel. The specialized nature of duty at different facilities requires individuals who can be depended on to cope successfullywith behavior or incidents that call for calm, fair, and immediate decisive action. These personnel must possess the highest qualities of leadership and judgment. They are required to observe rigid self-discipline and maintain a professional attitude at all times.
2-48. Personnel assigned or attached to I/R facilities are trained on the care and control of housed personnel. They are fully cognizant of the provisions of the Geneva and UN Conventions and applicable regulations as they apply to the treatment of housed personnel. A formal training program should include­
*     Principles and laws of land warfare, specifically provisions of Geneva and UN Conventions and HN laws and customs. Supervisory and human relations techniques. Methods of self-defense. The use of force, the ROE, and the ROI. Firearms qualification and familiarization. Public relations, particularly CONUS operations. First aid. Stress management techniques. Facility regulations and SOPS.
Intelligence and counterintelligencetechniques.
Cultural customs and habits of internees.

Commander and Staff Responsibilities 2-13
The basic language of internees.
2-49. The guard force should receive additional training in­
*
Riot control measures, control agents, and dispersers.
QRF actions.

*
Searchingtechniques, includingthe use of electronic detection devices. Nonlethal equipment and weapons.

2-50. Medical soldiers assigned to the facility may be required to deliver babies and care for infants and small children. Their training should include­
*     Delivery procedures. Birthing techniques. Medical conditions associatedwith malnutrition and water-, food-, and
arthropod-bornediseases.
2-14 Commander and Staff Responsibilities
PART MI0
Enemy Prisoners of War and Civilian Internees
Part Two addresses handling, securing, and accounting for EPWs and CIS.The MP
performing EPWICI operations must follow specific ROE and ROI applicable to this
category of IIR operations. The EPWs and CISare not treated as DCs or US military
prisoners. Leaders and soldiers must be knowledgeable of the Geneva and Hague
Conventions, applicable protocols, ARs, and US laws. During war or military
operations other than war (MOOTW) involving US forces, the accountability and safe,
humane treatment of captives are essential. The US policy demands that all persons
who are captured, detained, or held by US forces during conflict be treated humanely.
This policy applies from the moment captives are taken until they are released,
repatriated, or transferred. Chapter 3 describes division collecting points (CPs) and
corps holding areas (CHAs) that may be established throughout the battlefield.
Chapter 4 addresses procedures for EPWs, and Chapter 5 describes procedures for
Cls. Chapter 6 addresses unique planning requirements to be considered when
operating an IIR facility.
Chapter 3
Division Collecting Points and Corps Holding Areas
Chapters 3 and 4 implement STANAG 2044.
A large number of captives on the battlefield hampers maneuver units as they move to engage and destroy an enemy. To assist maneuver units in performing their mission-
Division MP units operate CPs in the division AO. Corps MP units operate holding areas in the corps AO.
OVERVIEW
3-1. The MP units accept captives from capturing units as far forward as possible, and captives are held in CPs and CHAs until they are removed from the battlefield. Normally, CPs are operated in the division A0 and CHAs are operated in the corps AO; but they can be operated anywhere they are needed. The CPs and CHAs sustain and safeguard captives and ensure a minimum level of field processing and accountability. Wounded and sick captives receive medical treatment, and captives who require lifesaving medical attention are evacuated to the nearest medical facility.
Division Collecting Points and Corps Holding Areas 3-1
3-2. The MP establish listening posts (LPs), observation posts (OPs), guard posts, and fighting positions to protect captives and prevent their escape. Captured soldiers are trained to believe that escape from captivity is their duty; therefore, they must be closely guarded. Consider the morale and physical condition of captives when determining the number of guards needed. Guards must be prepared to use and maintain firm control and security.
3-3. The MP work closely with military intelligence (MI) interrogation teams at CPs and CHAs to determine if captives, their equipment, and their weapons have intelligence value. This process is accelerated when MI interrogation teams can observe captives during arrival and processing, and interrogators can also be used as interpreters during this phase. Before a captive is interviewed by MI personnel, he must have a Department of Defense (DD) Form 2745 (Figure 3-1) attached to him and be accounted for on DD Form 2708.
3-4. If the CP or the CHA comes under a nuclear, biological, or chemical (NBC) attack, remove captives from the contaminated area and decontaminate them to the same level as US forces. Request assistance for decontaminating captives through command channels. The supply officer issues NBC protective equipment and clothing to captives, using captured materials (when available) or US materials (if necessary).
PROCESSING CAPTIVES
3-5. Processing begins when US forces capture or detain an individual. The processing is accomplished in the CZ for security, control, intelligence, and the welfare of captives in evacuation channels. This is referred to as field processing. The capturing unit begins field processing by using the Five Ss and T procedure (search, segregate, silence, speed, safeguard, and tag). At the CP or the CHA, MP continue processing with the principles of STRESS
(search, tag, report, evacuate, segregate, and safeguard).
3-6. After receiving a captive from a capturing unit, MP are responsible for safeguarding and accounting for the captive at each stage of his removal from the battlefield. The processing procedure begins upon capture and continues until the captive reaches the IIR facility and is released. The process of identifying and tagging a captive helps US forces control and account for him as they move rearward from the battlefield. Before a captive is interned, repatriated, or released, MP at the IIR facility must provide full-scale processing.
3-2 Division Collecting Points and Corps Holding Areas
ENEMY PRISONER OF WAR IEPW)
CAPTURE TAG (PART A)

For use of thin tom nee AR 190-8.
The proponent agerky is DCSOPS.

I      I
Attach thb pat of tag to EPW. (Do not remove
from EM.)
1.
Wch -For weapons, military documents, or
special equipment.
2.
Silence -Prohikit talking among EPWs for ease
of control.
3.
Segregate -By rank, sex, and nati~lii.

4.
Safeguard -To prevent harm orescape.

5.
Speed -Evacuate from the combat zone.

6.
Tag -Prisoners and documents or special
equipment.
DD 2746 BACIO. MAY ## USABLE UNTIL EXHAUSTED. ‘
UNIT RECORD CARD (PART B)
Forward to Unit.
lCapturing unit retains for records.)
Use swing, wire, or other dureble materi
to attach the appropriate section of

form to the EPW’s equipment or pro      lo. WWTANCSS OF
DOCUMENWSPECIAL EQUIPMENT

I I
WEAPONS CARD (PART C)

I Attach thb pat of tag to property taken. /Do not
remove from property.)

As a minimum, the tag must lndude the fdlowhg Informdon:
I I Item 1. Date and time of capture (YYYYMMDDj. ltem 8. Capturhrg unit. Item 9. Place of capture (grid coordinatesj. Item 10. Circumstances of capture (how the EPW was capturedl. I I
WHWU~~WKI.MAY~ DD FOM 2746, MAY OI      REPLACES DA FORM 5976. JAN 91. USABLE UNTIL EXHAUSTED.
Figure 3-1. Sample DD Form 2745
Division Collecting Points and Corps Holding Areas 3-3
CAPTURING UNIT 3-7. The Five Ss and T procedure is performed by the capturing unit. The
basic principles are search, segregate, silence, speed, safeguard, and tag (see Table 3-1).
Table 3-1. Five Ss and T Procedure
Procedure Search  Description Search captives for weapons and ammunition, items of intelligencevalue, and other inappropriate items.
NOTE: Conduct same-gender searches when possible. If mixed-gender searches are necessary for speed or security, conduct them in a respectful manner and avoid any action that could be interpreted as sexual molestation or assault. To prevent allegations of sexual misconduct, the on-site supervisor carefully controls soldiers who perform

mixed-gendersearches. Segregate . Segregatecaptives by rank, gender, nationality, and status. Silence Do not allow captivesto speak or allow anyone to speak to them. Speak to captives only to give
orders. Speed Remove captives from the battlefield as quickly as possible. Safeguard Safeguard captives according to the Geneva Conventionsand the US policy. Provide medical
care as needed. Tag Tag captiveswith a DD Form 2745 or a field-expedient capture tag that includes the following information: Date of capture. Location of capture (gridcoordinates). Capturing unit. Special circumstances of capture (howthe person was captured,if he resisted, if he gave up, and so forth). NOTE: The capturing unit must complete a capture tag because failure to do so hinders further processing and disposition.
COLLECTING POINTS AND HOLDING AREAS
3-8. When a captive arrives at a division CP or a CHA, he is processed by the STRESS method. The basic principles are search, tag, report, evacuate, segregate, and safeguard (see STANAG 2044).
Search
3-9. Search and inspect each captive and his possessions. Conduct same-gender searches when possible. If mixed-gender searches are necessary for speed or security, conduct them in a respectful manner and avoid any action that could be interpreted as sexual molestation or assault. To prevent allegations of sexual misconduct, the on-site supervisor carefully controls soldiers who perform mixed-gender searches. Some items can be retained during captivity, some items are impounded and eventually returned, and certain items are confiscated and never returned, even if the captive is released or repatriated.
3-10. Retained Items.A captive is allowed to keep certain items during his captivity. They are generally divided into two groups. The first group consists
3-4 Division Collecting Points and Corps Holding Areas of items taken during the receiving portion of inprocessing and returned later in the process. The second group consists of items that the captive can keep at all times. NOTE: These lists are not all inclusive.
Group 1.
.     Military mess equipment (except knives and forks).
.     Helmet.
.     Protective clothing and equipment (NBC suits, helmets, and
protective masks) for use during evacuation from the CZ.
.     Personal clothing.
.     Badges of rank and nationality.
.     Military decorations.
.     ID cards and tags.
.     Rations (in the early stages of captivity).
Group 2.
.     Religious literature (within reason).
.     Personal items having no intelligence value (jewelry and pictures).
3-11. Impounded Items. A captive is not allowed to keep impounded items during his internment. They can make escape easier or can compromise US security interests. Impounded items normally include­
*     Cameras.
Radios.
Currency.
Negotiable instruments.

3-12. Confiscated Items. The following items are confiscated when searching a captive: Weapons. Ammunition. Items of intelligence value (maps and orders). Other inappropriate items.
3-13. The MP coordinate with MI interrogation teams to determine which confiscated items have intelligence value. Personal items (diaries, letters f?om home, and family pictures) can be taken by MI teams for review and then returned to the proper owner via MP.
NOTES:
1.
Currency is only confiscated on a commissioned officer’s order (see AR 190-8),and it must be accountedfor on DA Form 4137.

2.
For an in-depth discussion on impounded and confiscated property, see AR 190-8and DFAS-IN 37-1.

3-14. PropertyAccountability.When seizing property from a captive­
*     Bundle it or place it in a bag to keep it intact and separate from other captives’ possessions. Prepare DA Form 4137 for confiscated and impounded property.
Division Collecting Points and Corps HoldingAreas 3-5
Prepare a receipt for currency and negotiable instruments to be signed
by the captive and the receiver. Use cash collection vouchers so that
the value can be credited to each captive’s account. List currency and
negotiable instruments on the captive’s personal-property list, but
treat them as impounded property.

Keep the original receipt with the property during evacuation. Give

the captive a copy of the receipt, and tell him to keep it to expedite the

return of his property.

Have MI sign for property on DA Form 4137 and for captives on DD

Form 2708.
Return confiscated property to supply after it is cleared by MI teams.
Items kept by MI because of intelligence value are forwarded through
MI channels.

Evacuate retained items with the captive when he moves to the next
level of internment.
Maintain controlled access to confiscated and impounded property.

3-15. Tag each captive with a DD Form 2745. The MP at CPs and CHAs check each tag for the­
*     Date and time of capture. Capturing unit. Place of capture. Circumstances of the capture.
The remaining information on the tag is included as it becomes available.
3-16. A DD Form 2745 is a perforated, three-part form that is individually serial-numbered. It is constructed of durable, waterproof, tear-resistant material with reinforced eyeholes on Parts A and C. Part A is attached to the captive with wire or string, Part B is maintained by the capturing unit for their records, and Part C is attached to confiscated property so that the owner can be identified later.
3-17. The MP at division CPs ensure that a DD Form 2745 is placed on each
captive who arrives at the CP without one. They may direct the capturing unit
to complete a capture tag before accepting the prisoner into the CP. The MP-
Make a statement on the tag if the captive arrived without it.
Instruct the captive not to remove or alter the tag.
Annotate the tag’s serial number and the captive’s name on a locally
developed manifest.
NOTE: See Soldier Training Publication (STP) 21-24-SMCT for more information on DD Form 2745.
Report
3-18. Report the number of captives at each CP through MP channels. This aids in the transportation and security planning processes.
3-6     Division Collecting Pointsand Corps Holding Areas
FM 3-19.40
Evacuate
3-19. Evacuate captives from the CZ through appropriate channels as humanely and quickly as possible. Do not delay movement to obtain names, ranks, service numbers, or dates of birth. When moving captives, give them clear, brief instructions in their own language when possible. Military necessity may require a delay in movement beyond a reasonable time. When this occurs, ensure that there is an adequate supply of food, potable water, appropriate clothing, shelter, and medical attention available.
3-20. The MP ensure that the proper paperwork (DA Form 4137, DD Form 515, and DD Form 2708) is complete before captives are evacuated. If necessary, a DD Form 2708 (annotated with the number of prisoners) and a manifest will suffice. Do not expose captives to unnecessary danger, and protect them while they are awaiting evacuation. For seriously wounded or sick captives, medical personnel determine if prompt evacuation is more dangerous than retaining them in the CZ.
Segregate
3-21. The OIC or the noncommissioned officer in charge (NCOIC) is responsible for the custody of captives. He designates segregation procedures and levels to ensure their security, health, and welfare. Segregate captives into the following categories:
Officers, NCOs, and enlisted members (male and female).
Deserters and those who gave up without a fight may be further segregated for their protection. Nationally recognized ideologies and ethnic groups can also be segregated.
CISand refugees.They are separated from EPWs. US military prisoners. They are separated from all other prisonersldetainees (EPWs, CIS, ODs, and refugees). (See Chapter 8 for a complete discussion on the confinement of US military prisoners.)
3-22. Ultimately, all captives are classified as an EPW, a CI, or an OD. However, it may be impossible to readily classify all captives. If there is any doubt about a captive’s status, protect him under the rules of the Geneva Conventions and the US policy until a competent tribunal can determine his status. (See AR 190-8for further information.)
3-23. Do not use coercion to obtain information from captives. This includes basic information such as name, rank, service number, and date of birth that captives are required to provide under the Geneva Conventions. Coercion or inhumane treatment of captives is prohibited and is not justified by the stress of combat or deep provocation. Inhumane treatment is a serious violation of international law and the UCMJ.
3-24. Do not speak to captives except to give orders or directions. Do not let captives talk to or signal each other. This prevents them from plotting ways to counter security and plan escapes. An uncooperative captive can be gagged in certain tactical situations; however, only use a gag for as long as needed and ensure that it does not harm the captive.
Division Collecting Points and Corps Holding Areas 3-7
FM 3-19.40
Safeguard
3-25. To safeguard captives according to the Geneva Conventions and the US policy­
*     Provide first aid and medical treatment for wounded and sick captives. Evacuate them through medical channels, using the assets available to evacuate US and allied forces.
Provide food and water. These supplies must be commensurate to those for US and allied forces (see FM 27-10 and STANAG 2044).
Provide firm, humane treatment.
Allow captives to use protective equipment in case of hostile fire or
NBC threat.
Protect captives from abuse by other captives and local civilians.
Report acts and allegations of inhumane treatment through MP channels (see AR 190-40). Do not locate captives near obvious targets (ammunition sites, fuel
facilities, and communications equipment).
EVACUATING CAPTrVES
3-26. Remove captives from the CZ as quickly as possible. The intent is to move them from division CPs to an I/R facility. The goal is for higher echelons to go forward to lower echelons and evacuate captives to the rear as follows:
Division MP move forward to the forward CP to escort captives to the
central CP.
Corps MP move forward to the central CP to escort captives to the
CHA.
Echelons above corps (EAC) MP move forward to the CHA to escort
captives to the I/R facility.

3-27. If escort guard companies are available in the TO, they are placed under OPCON of the MP commander. They­
*     Provide supervisory and security personnel during evacuation andfor
movement.
Go forward to the corps and the division to escort captives to the I/R
facility.

Escort captives from the division forward CP to the corps or the EAC (in coordination with the respective echelon provost marshal [PMI).
SICK ANDWOUNDEDCAPTIVES
3-28. Medical personnel decide which captives must be medically evacuated or moved within MP channels, while MP or other command-directed nonmedical personnel provide prisoner security. Generally, walking wounded are moved through MP channels and litter patients are moved through medical channels. The US provides the same medical care for wounded and sick captives as it does for its own forces and allied soldiers. The degree of medical care, not status (such as EPW or CI), determines the disposition of wounded soldiers.
3-8Division Collecting Points and Corps Holding Areas
3-29. Seriously wounded or ill captives are stabilized and evacuated through medical channels to the rear area as quickly as possible. If the captive requires medical evacuation-
Report the captive’s medical condition through medical channels to

the next higher echelon.
Request disposition instructions from the corps medical regulating
officer (MRO).

3-30. The MRO coordinates transportation and identifies the treatment facility where wounded and sick captives are taken. Accountability for captives within medical channels is the responsibility of the MRO and the hospital commander. They coordinate their efforts with the IRIC.
3-31. The MP determine if there is a security risk during medical evacuation of wounded and sick captives. Ordinarily, captives who require medical evacuation are less likely to be a security risk. However, captives well enough to be a security risk are treated and returned to MP control.
3-32. If medical personnel request MP to guard captives at a medical facility in the corps area and the corps commander chooses to delegate that responsibility to the MP, the PM allocates support on a case-by-case basis. The MP structure is not designed to provide MP to guard hospitalized captives on a continuous, uninterrupted basis.
ABLE-BODIED CAPTIVES
3-33. The MP guard able-bodied captives during movement to prevent escape, liberation, or injury. A general planning consideration when determining the number of MP necessary is one for every five to ten captives. An MP unit tasked to escort captives considers the following information when determining the number of guards needed:
The mission, enemy, terrain, troops, time available, and civilian
considerations (METT-TC).

The number of captives being moved.
The condition and morale of the captives. Fatigued and/or cooperative
individuals require fewer guards then fresh, motivated individuals.

The type of transportation and its scheduled arrival.
The type of terrain along the evacuation route. Routes where dense

vegetation is close to the road often require more guards then open,

clear terrain.

The threat level along the route. As the threat level increases, so does

the need to increase security. Consider the anticipated presence of
suspected sympathizers and hostile, local nationals along the route.

The location of MP units or baseshase clusters along the route.
The location and number of rest stops. This is based on the
transportation, the distance, and the terrain.

3-34. When moving forward to escort captives to the rear area, MP responsibilities begin at the CP or the CHA where custody is accepted. Verify the method of moving captives, the location and time of pickup, and the number of captives contained in orders from higher headquarters. The MP units cannot transport captives with organic assets.
Division Collecting Points and Corps Holding Areas 3-9
3-35. The preferred method for moving captives through a battlefield is the backhaul system. This transportation system relies on assets that have delivered their primary cargo and are available to move personnel and materials to another location. The availability of vehicles will vary, depending on the cargo delivered to the area. The command and control (c2) element of the MP unit tasked with evacuation arranges transportation through the local MCO.
3-36. If the backhaul system cannot be employed, the MP unit guarding the captives requests an alternate means of transportation. Captives are moved on foot only as a last resort and upon approval of the MP unit commander.
DMSION COLLECTING POINTS
3-37. A division operates two types of CPs-forward and central. A division MP company operates forward CPs in each maneuver brigade A0 and a central CP in the division rear area. Both CPs are temporary areas designed to hold captives until they are removed from the battlefield. Forward CPs are positioned as far forward as possible to accept captives from maneuver elements. Central CPs accept captives from forward CPs and local units.
FORWARD COLLECTING POINTS
3-38. Forward CPs (Figure 3-2) are needed when a brigade conducts an offensive operation and is likely to take captives. When a maneuver brigade has an MP platoon in direct support (DS), MP teams set up and operate forward CPs. A brigade without an MP platoon in DS sets up and operates its own forward CPs.
3-39. The number of MP teams needed to operate a forward CP is based on the number of captives expected and METT-TC. The projected number of captives is based on mission analysis and intelligence estimates conducted by the brigade Intelligence Officer (US Army) (S2). Division forward CPs are mobile; they can be set up, expanded, and relocated quickly as the tactical situation warrants.
Location
3-40. The brigade operation plan (OPLAN) or operation order (OPORD) provides the general location of forward CPs. They are located near or in the brigade support area (BSA), in an area that prevents captives from observing activities within the BSA. They are also located near main supply routes (MSRs) to make delivery, evacuation, and resupply easier.
Medical Support
3-41. Medical support is provided by the MP company medical section. Additional medical support can be requested through the forward support battalion (FSB) to the brigade medical officer. The brigade OPORD includes specific actions and support (operational requirements) needed from non-MP units.
3-10 Division Collecting Points and Corps Holding Areas
\
\
\
\ \ \ \
\
\\\fl
0
0 0
0 0)
Concertina 0 0Trench or cover
/// @ Water can or lister bag
0
@ Latrine
NOTES:
1.
The size of the enclosure and the placement of internal facilities, water, latrines, trenches, and cover vary based on the situation.

2.
Construction supplies are concertina, barbed wire, long and short pickets, staples, anchors, and water cans. See FM 5-34 for a complete list of supplies and instructions on components.

Figure 3-2.Forward CP
Planning Considerations
3-42. When a division MP company commander is tasked with planning and operating a forward CP, he-Coordinates with the unit responsible for the area.
Conducts a recon of the area before selecting a location.
Locates it far enough from the fighting to avoid minor shifts in the
main battle area (MBA) (normally 5 to 10 kilometers).

Notifies the BSA tactical operations center (TOC) and the PM
operations section of the selected location (grid coordinates). The BSA
TOC reports the location to the brigade TOC, and the brigade TOC
notifies subordinate units.

Coordinates with MI on collocating an MI interrogation team at the
CP.
Provides potable water and, if required, food for captives.

3-43. A forward CP is seldom located near the indigenous population to prevent problems caused by the presence of captives in the area. A forward CP is usually a guarded, roped-off area (concertina or razor tape) or a secure, fixed facility. The capture rate and the captive categories determine the size of
Division Collecting Points and Corps HoldingAreas 3-11
the forward CP. If possible, use existing structures (vacant schools, apartments, and warehouses)to conserve resources and provide protection for captives. When selectinga location, consider­
*
Security.
Medical support.

*
Food and potable water. Field sanitation (latrine facilities).

*
Shelter.

Cover. (Captives can dig or build cover to protect themselves from
direct and indirect fire.)
Access routes.

Accountability
3-44. ~ccountfor each captive and his equipment when they arrive at the forward CP.
3-45. Captives should not remain at a forward CP more than 12 hours before being escorted to the central CP. When they have been processed and are ready for evacuation, MP leaders­
*
Report the status to the BSA TOC and the PM (through MP channels).

Request transportation, rations, and water from the FSB Supply Officer (USArmy) 64).

*
Ensure that receipts are ready for signature. Ensure that property is properly tagged and given to escort guards.

CENTRALCOLLECTINGPOINTS
3-46. A central CP (Figure 3-3) is larger than a forward CP, but it has a similar setup and operation. The larger holding capacity of a central CP requires additional MP. If sufficient MP are unavailable, it is augmented by a division, corps, or EAC band to assist with perimeter security. Captives are provided food, water, first aid, and medical attention as required.
Location
3-47. As stated in the division OPLAN or OPORD, a central CP is located near the division support area (DSA) in an area that prevents captives from observing activities within the DSA. It is also located near MSRs to make delivery, evacuation, and resupply easier.
Medical Support
3-48. Prevent captives from incurring disease and nonbattle injuries (DNBI)
(heat and cold injuries or communicable diseases) while in captivity. Isolate
captives who exhibit obvious signs of disease (diarrhea, vomiting, or fever)
until medical personnel make an evaluation. If a large number of captives
appear ill, notify medical and command channels for immediate
actionltreatment.
3-12 Division Collecting Points and Corps Holding Areas
Not to scale
__LC—­
-_——­
NOTES:
1.The MP use existing structures when possible to reduceconstruction requirements.

2.
The size and configuration of compoundsand the placement of internal facilities, field-processing sites, MI screening sites, PSYOP areas, close-confinementareas for disruptive captives, and medical areas vary based on the situation.

3.
Construction supplies are GP medium tents (20 captives per tent), concertina, barbedwire, long and short pickets, staples, anchors, and water cans. See FM 5-34 for the use of triple-standardconcertina wire.

Figure 3-3. Central CP
3-49. The division PVNTMED section supports the central CP by­
*     Monitoring drinking water and advising on disinfection procedures. Controlling animals and insects that carry disease. Ensuring that captives help prevent illness by­. Drinking enough water. . Wearing clothingthat is suited for the weather and the situation. . Handling heating fuels carefully. . Avoiding contact of exposed skin to cold metal. . Using insect repellent, netting, and insecticides.
Taking approved preventive medication. . Using purification tablets when water quality is uncertain. . Disposing of bodily wastes properly.
Practicing personal hygiene.
Division Collecting Points and Corps Holding Areas 3-13
Planning Considerations
3-50. When a division MP company commander is tasked with establishing and operating a central CP, he­
*     Coordinates with the unit responsible for the area. Conducts a recon of the area before selecting a location. Notifies the PM of the exact location (grid coordinates). The PM
notifies the division rear CP operations cell, who notifies area units.
Coordinates with MI on collocating an MI interrogation team at the CP. Ensures that the location is accessible to units escortingcaptives from
forward CPs.
3-51. Like a forward CP, a central CP is seldom located near the indigenous population. Use existing structures, when available, to conserve resources. If structures are unavailable, construct the central CP from similar material as forward CPs. However, a central CP is larger and must contain some type of tentage or shelter to protect captives from the elements. A bunker in each compound or free access to a bunker is needed to protect captives from direct and indirect fire. Enlisted captives can be tasked to help construct a central CP (especiallybunkers); however, officer captives cannot be used.
3-52. A central CP is as mobile as a forward CP. It must also be set up, expanded, and relocated quickly as the tactical situation dictates. Units within the DSA provide support as stated in the division OPORD. The MP company medical section provides medical support to personnel in the central CP, and additional medical support can be requested from the command surgeon.
Accountability
3-53. Account for each captive and his equipment when they arrive at the central CP. Use the STRESS method to process captives who are brought directly to the central CP by a capturing unit (seeparagraph 3-8).
Evacuation of Captives
3-54. Captives should not remain at the central CP more than 24 hours before
being evacuated to the CHA. When all captives are accounted for, processed,
and ready for evacuation to the CHA, MP leaders­
*     Report the status to the division rear CP and to the PM (through MP
channels).
Request transportation, rations, and water through logistics channels
in the division rear.
Ensure that receipts are ready for signature.
Ensure that property is tagged with Part C of DD Form 2745 and
given to the escort guards.

3-14 Division Collecting Points and Corps Holding Areas
CORPS HOLDING AREAS
3-55. A CHA (Figure 3-4) can hold more captives for longer periods of times than a central CP. Depending on the availability of MP units to establish LJR facilities, corps MP units must be prepared to hold captives at the CHA more than 72 hours. If the CHA keeps captives more than 72 hours, MP must plan and coordinate for the increased logistics and personnel required to operate a long-term facility. The decision to hold captives longer is based on METT-TC and the availability of forces. Captives remain in the CHA until they are evacuated to an IR facility or until hostilities end.
315
5 GP medium tent
arS0 Concertina
-Barbed wire
B
10′ wooden gate
b-372′
NOTES:
1.
Construction supplies include concertina, barbed wire, long and short pickets, staples, and
anchors.

2.
See FM 5-34 for instructionson the use of triple-standard concertina wire.

Figure 3-4. Corps Holding Area
3-56. A CHA receives captives from CPs and units that capture them in the
rear area. Usually, one CHA is established to support each division conducting
operations. However, additional CHAs may be required based on the-
Size of the corps area.
Type of terrain.
Length of the LOC between the CHA and the division central CPs.
Number of captives being moved.
Division Collecting Points and Corps Holding Areas 3-15
LOCATION
3-57. A CHA is usually located near a base or a base cluster in the corps rear
area. When selectinga site-Coordinate with the unit responsible for the area (terrain) and the corps rear CP.
Conduct a recon to select a location. Is it adjacent to an MSR, a railroad, or an airfield? Are existingbuildings available? Is it close to supply facilities? Is it easily protected from enemy activities?
Ensure that the location allows division of the site into two or more
compounds for segregation, security, and ease of control.
Report the exact location (grid coordinates) through MP channels to
the unit responsible for the area. The MI coordinates with MP on
collocating an MI interrogation team at the CP. However, MP may
have to contact MI to initiate the action.
0
Ensure that the site is accessible to units escorting captives from division central CPs.
CONSTRUCTION
3-58. A CHA is more permanent than CPs. Existing structures may be used and are preferred. The capture rate and the captive categories determine the size of the CHA. A multistory building has a smaller perimeter to guard; however, it requires using guards on each floor and may present a security risk for the guards. Depending on the tactical situation, perimeter lighting can be used.
3-59. When constructing a CHA, divide it into two or more compounds for segregation, security, and ease of control. Consider providing more than one entrance into the CHA. Include a reception area for further processing, searching, and examining of selected captives by MI. Include sanitary facilities (showers and latrines) and shelter (tentage and existing buildings) from the elements and direct and indirect fire.
GUARD FORCE
3-60. The exact CHA setup and design depend on many factors, including construction materials, terrain, and forces. An MP platoon or company from a corps MP battalion usually operates a CHA. A platoon can guard 500 captives, while a company can guard 2,000. During mass captures, a guard force augmentation may be required to handle unexpected workload. The corps band can augment MP guards to aid in security.As the population of the CHA increases, evacuations to the I/R facility also increase.
LOGISTICS
3-61. Request supplies through logistic channels for construction, maintenance, and day-to-dayoperations of a CHA. Support agreements can be arranged between MP headquarters and a base or base cluster where the CHA is located. Plan ahead to provide food and water.
3-16 Division Collecting Points and Corps Holding Areas
MEDICALAND SANITATION CONSIDERATIONS
3-62. The CHA guards isolate wounded captives and captives suspected of having a communicable disease until medical personnel can examine them (see Chapter 2). Take necessary sanitary measures to ensure a clean, healthy CHA and to prevent epidemics. Request PVNTMED units to assist and advise unit field sanitation teams on­
*     The survey and control of disease-carrying insects and rodents. Sanitary engineering (water treatment and waste disposal).
EVACUATION
3-63. The procedures used to escort captives from division forward and central CPs to a CHA are also used to escort captives from a CHA to an I/R facility.
COLLOCATED SCREENING SITES
3-64. To facilitate collecting enemy tactical information, MI may collocate interrogation teams at CPs and CHAs. This provides MI with direct access to captives and their equipment and documents. Coordination is made between MP and MI to establish operating procedures that include accountability. An interrogation area is established away from the receivinglprocessing line so that MI personnel can interrogate captives and examine their equipment and documents. If a captive or his equipment or documents are removed from the receiving/processing line, account for them on DD Form 2708 and DA Form
4137.
INTERROGATIONTEAMS
3-65. The MI interrogation teams screen captives at CPs and CHAs, looking for anyone who is a potential source of information. Screeners observe captives from an area close to the dismount point or processing area. As each captive passes, MI personnel examine the capture tag and look for branch insignias that indicate a captive with information to support command priority intelligence requirements (PIR) and information requirements (IR). They also look for captives who are willing or attempting to talk to guards; joining the wrong group intentionally; or displaying signs of nervousness, anxiety, or fear.
3-66. The MP assist MI screeners by identifying captives who may have answers that support PIR and IR. Because MP are in constant contact with captives, they see how certain captives respond to orders and see the type of requests they make. The MP ensure that searches requested by MI are conducted out of sight of other captives and that guards conduct same-gender searches.
3-67. The MI screeners examine captured documents, equipment and, in some cases, personal papers (journals, diaries, and letters from home). They are looking for information that identifies a captive and his organization, mission, and personal background (family, knowledge, and experience). Knowledge of a captive’s physical and emotional status or other information helps screeners determine his willingness to cooperate.
Division Collecting Pointsand Corps Holding Areas 3-17
LOCATION
3-68. Consider the following when planning an MI screening site: The site is located where screeners can observe captives as they are segregated and processed. It is shielded from the direct view of
captives and is far enough away that captives cannot overhear
screeners’ conversations.
The site has an operation, administrative, and interrogation area. The

interrogation area accommodates an interrogator, a captive, a guard,
and an interpreter as well as furniture. Lights are available for night
operations.

Procedures are implemented to verify that sick and wounded captives

have been treated and released by authorized medical personnel.
Guards are available and procedures are implemented for escorting
captives to the interrogation site.

Procedures are published to inform screeners who will be moved and
when they will be moved.
Accountability procedures are implemented and required forms are
available.

COLLECTING POINTS IN OTHER OPERATIONS
3-69. The CPs can also be operated during river crossing, amphibious,
airborne, armored, and air assault operations: River crossing operations. Establish temporary CPs on entry and exit sides of the river (corps MP often take control of CPs). Return from the exit bank and evacuate captives to the rear, preventing interference with tactical operations and protecting captives from hostile fire. Coordinate with traffic control personnel at the crossing site to prevent interference with assault forces who are moving forward. Use a secondary crossing site if available.
Amphibious operations.The assault force initially operates CPs in the beachhead and then escorts captives to designated ships. The MP coordinate with the support force for handling captives after they are escorted from the beachhead. When facilities, supplies, and personnel permit, retain captives in the objective area if they can be protected from enemy fire.
Airborne operations. The METT-TC considerations for collecting captives include the geographical location of the airhead, the tactical plan, the availability of transportation, and plans for linking up with ground forces. Captives are primarily moved by air during the early stages of the operation, which requires CPs to be established near landing zones (LZs). Consider attaching additional MP elements from area EAC to guard captives during evacuation.
Armored operations.Armored units can penetrate deep into hostile territory, bypassing pockets of enemy resistance on their way to the objective. This leaves isolated enemy units on the battlefield, which may hinder the normal evacuation of captives to the rear area. Hold captives at the CP until they can be safely evacuated from the battlefield.
3-18 Division Collecting Points and Corps Holding Areas
Air assault operations. Organic MP elements accompany assault elements to the objective. Establish CPs near LZs and airfields where the evacuation process begins. If necessary, attach nondivisional MP elements to guard captives during evacuation.
Division Collecting Points and Corps Holding Areas 3-19
Chapter 4
Enemy Prisoners of War
Chapters 3 and 4 implement STANAG 2044.
The MP are responsible for evacuating EPWs from division CPs to CHAs and then to internment facilities (normally located in the COMMZ). This chapter addresses procedures for properly handling, processing, and safeguarding EPWs. The procedures outlined in this chapter are also applicable to RPs. (See Chapter 1 for complete definitions and AR 190-8for more details.)
EVACUATION
4-1.Corps MP commanders evacuate EPWs from CHAs to internment facilities promptly and safely. Their responsibilities include security, accountability, and support. They also account for equipment and documents and provide escort guards if an escort guard company is unavailable.
4-2.Escort guard companies are responsible for EPW operations in the TO, and they escort EPWs from CHAs to internment facilities. They are assigned to MP I/R battalions and brigades. However, if they arrive before MP I/Runits, they are attached to MP CS brigades. To expedite prompt, full evacuation of EPWs, escort guards can be pre-positioned in CHAs so that they are continuously available.
4-3.The evacuation chain normally moves EPWs from a division forward CP to a division central CP, to a CHA, and then to an internment facility. When circumstances permit, such as taking advantage of available transportation, evacuation procedures may bypass one or more echelons below corps (EBC) facilities.
RECEIVING AND PROCESSING AREAS
4-4. Receiving and processing begin when EPWs arrive. However, due to limited manning, these functions are not operational 24 hours a day. An internment facility receives, secures, houses, and feeds EPWs until receiving and processing lines are operational. The EPWs are then brought forward, and the internment process begins.
4-5. Use a controlled-flow format to escort EPWs through the processing line. Normally, four EPWs are processed at a time and the average is eight per hour. These numbers may increase or decrease based on the capture rate and the nature of the operation. Secure unprocessed EPWs in a holding area.
Enemy Prisoners of War 4-1
4-6.Request interpreters from MI, PSYOP, allied forces, or local authorities as necessary. This may require identifying and clearing trusted EPWs or local nationals to interpret. Interpreters are usually necessary when entering data into the Internment/Resettlement Information System (IRIS).
4-7.The preparation and dispatch of DA Forms 2674-Rare governed by AR 190-8,and they are prepared at each internment facility. Brigade or internment facility commanders may require feeder reports from various compounds to facilitate the preparation of internee strength reports.
NOTE: See STANAG 2044 for more information on reports and accountability as they apply to NATO TOs.
4-8.Table 4-1outlines the internment process for EPWs. It shows who is responsible for each step and what actions they must accomplish. Based on METT-TC, the commander may tailor stations to meet the situation. Stations 1 through 4 are in the receiving line, and Stations 5 through 9are in the processing line.
Table 4-1. Processing Actions at the EPW Processing Area
Escort EPWs and their property.
Strip-search EPWs (by MP of the same sex) before entering the processing area unless prohibited by conditions.
Remove and examine property, place it in a container or a tray, mark it with a control number, and take it to a temporary
4-2 Enemy Prisoners of War
Table 4-1. Processing Actions at the EPW Processing Area (continued)
I
Station Purpose Responsible Actions
Individuals,
3 I Medical I Medical I Inspect EPWs for signs of illness or injury.
and

Evacuate EPWs who needtreatment at a medical facility.
I 1 I
MP Give immunizations or request immunizationsupport from the supporting medical unit before internmentor evacuation.
Initiatetreatment and immunization records.
I I I
Place control numbers on medical records to reduce linguist support. (Names, service numbers, and lSNs are entered at Station 1 with the aid of an interpreter.)
Annotate medical records with the date and place EPWs were I I I inspected, immunized, and disinfected.
Weigh EPWs and establish a weight register.
Supervise the movement of EPWs to the next station. 4 Personal items MP Issue personal-comfort items (toilet paper, soap, toothbrush, and toothpaste).
lssue clothing (clean and distinctive, like brightly colored jumpsuits if available) that is­*
Taken from EPWs at Station 1.
Obtained from captured enemy supplies.
Obtained through normalsupply channels.
I I I Ensure that clothing is marked ‘PW” as required. I 1 ­
I Escort EPWs to the ~rocessinaarea (Station5).
I I I
ProcessingLine
5 1 Administrative I Processing I Ensurethat lSNs are assigned to EPWs. Note the capture tag I accountability 1 clerk (assisted I numbers that lSNs are replacing so that late-arrivingproperty 1 by an ( can be matched to its owner.
MI’ Initiate personnelrecords, ID documents, and property
or others) and receipts.
I I I Use digital equipment to generate forms and records.
Prepare forms and records to maintain the accountability of EPWs and their property (STANAG 2044).
Prepare forms for repatriationor internationaltransfer as specified in local regulations or SOPS.
Supervise the movement of EPWs to the next station. *The number of people used to perform tasks depends on the number of EPWs and the amount of time 1 available. Other soldiers assigned to the unit may perform non-MP-specifictasks if necessary.
Enemy Prisonersof War 4-3
FM 3-19.40
Table 4-1. Processing Actions at the EPW Processing Area (continued)
Station Purpose      Responsible Individuals~
6      Photography MP
and
fingerprinting

7      Personal MP
Property

8      Records MP
review

9      Accountability MP
transfer

*The number of people used to perform tasks
-Actions
Fingerprint EPWs. Identify and record the information on
fingerprint cards.

Take two photographs (with instant film or digital technology).
Have EPWs look straight ahead, and fill the frame with their
face.

Use photograph name boards (black background with white
characters). List ISNs and names (translated into English) at
the bottom center.
Attach one photograph to the EPW’s personnel record.
Give a completed, laminated ID card (which contains the
second photograph) to the EPW.
Supervise the movement of EPWs to the next station.
Inventory and record property (in the presence of EPWs)
brought from temporary property storage areas.
Make separate lists for returned, stored, impounded, and
confiscated property. List property to be returned to EPWs or
stored during internment on a separate list.
Provide receipts for property placed in temporary storage.
Provide receipts for money placed in EPW accounts (AR
190-8and DFAS-IN 37-1).
Return retained property that was taken from the EPW at
Station 1.
Supervise the movement of EPWs to the next station.
Review processed records for completeness and accuracy.
Escort EPWs back to processing stations to correct errors if
necessary.
Let EPWs prepare notification-of-capture cards. If being
interned at the same place as processing, let EPWs prepare
notification-of-address cards. If EPWs are unable to write their
own cards, have someone authorized by the commander to do
it for them.
Prepare and maintain an accountability roster of all EPWs.
Sign for and take custody of EPWs (can use movement
manifest), their records, and their impounded property if
moving to another facility.
Evacuate or ship impounded property separately according to
JTRs.

depends on the number of EPWs and the amount of time
available. Other soldiers assigned to the unit may perform non-MP-specific tasks if necessary.
4-4 Enemy Prisoners of War
RECEIVING LIN’E
4-9. When EPWs arrive at the internment facility, segregate them from those who arrived earlier and those who are partially processed. Count the EPWs and match them against the manifest and the receipts for them and their equipment.
4-10. Field-process each EPW if the capturing unit or the CP did not field-process him (Chapter 3).Ensure that he receives the serial number from his capture tag (DD Form 2745). (The number is used to track him until he receives an internment serial number [ISN]).
4-11. Record his capture tag serial number and last name on an ID band. Use a banding kit to attach the band to his left wrist. Match his capture tag serial number with the number on his personal property, or if necessary, mark his capture tag serial number on his personal property.
4-12. Store personal property in a temporary storage area until EPWs are fully processed, and control access to the storage area. Ensure that EPWs receive food and water and, if necessary, first aid and medical treatment. Take them to the proc’essing area as soon as the receiving process is complete. If they cannot be processed immediately, hold them in the receiving area.
PROCESSINGLINE
4-13. After EPWs have completed the receiving portion of their processing, move them to the processing line, where they are formally processed into the facility. They are entered into the IRIS database, and the IRIC forwards the information to the national.IRIC for dissemination to the protecting power. The processing element
Keeps segregated EPWs apart as much as possible during processing.
Conducts administrative processing.
Expedites the processing of EPWs selected by MI teams for

interrogation.

Assigns each EPW an ISN.
Replaces the control number on each EPW’s wrist with his ISN.
PERSONNELm
4-14. Ensure that the following forms are included in each EPW’s personnel
file: DA Form 1131-R.Use this voucher to verify the balance of funds.
DA Form 1132-R.List the EPW’s personal property on this form.

DA Form 2662-R. Issue this card if the EPW does not hold one from

his country.

DA Form 2663-R. Prepare this card for each EPW upon processing

into the facility.
DA Form 2664-R. Initiate this form upon inprocessing and update it
monthly.

DA Form 4137. Record confiscated currency on this form.
DA Form 4237-R. Prepare this form for each EPW processed into the
facility.

Enemy Prisoners of War 4-5
DD Form 2708. Use this form to account for evacuated EPWs,
regardless of the evacuation channel.
DD Form 2745. File Part B of this tag in the personnel record.

INTERNlMENT SERIAL NUMBER
4-15. The national IRIC forwards blocks of ISNs to designated IRICs in the TO and CONUS as required. The ISNs are used to identify EPWs in US custody. Each ISN is a unique, individual number; no two are alike. An ISN consists of two parts:
The first part contains the letters “US,” a number indicating the TO where the EPW came into US custody, and two letters representing the EPW’s country of origin.
The second part is a series of six numbers that are assigned (in sequential order) to each EPW processed in the command. The numbers are followed by the letters “EPW,” “CI,” “RP,” or “OD” to denote the EPW’s category.
For example, the first EPW processed by the US Army in TO 9, whose country designation is AB, is assigned ISN US9AB000001EPW.
4-16. If the situation permits, the IRIC processes EPWs at division CPs and CHAs. Assign ISNs as early as possible. However, if an ISN is not assigned until Station 1(see Table 4-1, page 4-3), use the capture tag number, the manifest number, or another control number until an ISN is assigned.
NOTE: See STANAG 2044 and AR 190;8 for additional information on ISNs.
IDENTIFICATION BAND
4-17. The EPW ID bands are used to­
*     Verify EPW rosters against the compound population. Identify compound work details. Match EPWs with their medical records. Check identities of EPWs being transferred or repatriated against
transfer rosters.
Permit rapid, reliable ID of EPWs.
Enhance facility administration and operation.

4-18. An EPW can remove his ID band, but doing so destroys the band so that someone else cannot use it without being detected. The MP cannot prevent EPWs from destroying bands; however, most EPWs accept the use of the band for ID purposes.
4-19. Record the EPW’s ISN and last name on his ID band, and secure it to
his left wrist. To enhance facility administration and operation, use various
colored bands to further identify EPWs by category. For example, use­
*     Blue for officers. Red for NCOs. Yellow for enlisted soldiers. Black for RPs.
4-6 Enemy Prisoners of War
Green for CIS.
White for ODs.

If EPW ID bands are unavailable, use a medical wristband or something similar.
4-20. When serious deterioration is detected or the ISN and name is obscured, replace the ID band with a new one. Conduct periodic, random checks to detect wear and tear and efforts to destroy the band. In addition, look for efforts to exchange bands between EPWs (removing the ID ba.nd results in damage that is easily detected). When firm ID is needed, such as transfer or hospitalization, carefully examine the ID band for evidence of having been removed. Conduct periodic, routine inspections of randomly selected ID bands in dining-facility lines, during compound inspections, and at other opportune times.
FLOW OF INFORMATION
4-21. Regard the information collected from EPWs as sensitive to protect them and the soldiers who are guarding them. If belligerent nations discover how many EPWs are in a facility or discover the location of a facility,it may be targeted to silence the sources of information. Maintain proper security throughout the information flow, and disseminate information through proper channels. The IRIC acts as a hub for information that CHAs and internment facilities produce. Report personnel records electronically on the IRIS or, if necessary, as a paper file.
4-22. The information flow begins when the EPW is captured and a DD Form 2745 is initiated. The ISN, which is assigned upon arrival at a CHA or an internment facility, is the key to tracking EPWs throughout the I/R system.
4-23, Information collected during processing (initial and full) and entered into the IRIS (CHA or internment facility) is sent to the IRIC. The IRIC collects the entire personnel file; it is normally electronic with a hard-copy backup. The internment facility reports the information to the IRIC, who disseminates it as appropriate. The strength report (DA Form 2674-R) is the only information passed up the internment facility’s chain of command. Questions regarding the information or EPW flow in the TO are directed to the IRIC.
NOTE: Hasty processing can be initiated if normal processing cannot
be done in a reasonable amount of time (normal processing is
completed later).
Initial Processing
4-24. During initial processing (at the point of capture), gather critical information from EPWs and assign ISNs. The minimum information needed during initial processing is the­
*     Complete name (first, middle, and last). Service number. Rank. Capturing unit.
Enemy Prisoners of War 4-7
Date of capture.
Place of capture (grid coordinates).
Circumstances of capture.

4-25. The above information (along with the capturing country, the TO, the power served, the sequence number, and the EPW category) is enough to move the EPW into an internment facility where additional information is gathered. Much of the information is gleaned from the capture tag. The IRIC provides block ISNs, and other information is theater-and situation-driven. The initial processing is quick and effective.
Intermediate Processing
4-26. Per AR 190-8, the national IRIC is responsible for collecting the following items to complete the intermediate processing: The date of birth. The city of birth. The country of birth. The name and address of next of kin (NOK) (fatherlmother). The location of confiscated property.
0
The nationality.
A general statement of health.
The nation in whose armed services the individual is serving.
The name and address of a person to be notified of the individual’s

capture.
The address to which correspondence may be sent.
Certificates of death or authenticated lists of the dead.
The location of war graves (grid coordinates) and particulars of the

dead.
The notification of capture (including the date sent).
The list of personal articles of value not restored upon repatriation.

Full Processing
4-27. Remember, an EPW is only required to give his name, rank, and service number. However, collect additional information if possible. An EPW is considered fully processed when the personnel file is complete. This includes the fields completed during initial and intermediate processing and those listed below:
Education.
Religion.
Marital status.
Internment facility unit identification code (UIC).
Sex.
Languages spoken.
Internment facility location.
Enemy unit.
Arm of service.

4-8 Enemy Prisoners of War
Military occupational specialty (MOS).
Civilian occupational specialty (COS).
Corps area of capture.
Mother’s maiden name.
Permanent home address.
Other particulars from the ID card.
Distinguishing marks.
Impounded personal property and money.
Photograph.
Prepared by, date prepared, place prepared, and signature.
Immunizations.
Internment employment compensation.
Serious offenses, punishments, and escapes (including dates).
Transfers.
Financial status at the time of first and second international

transfers.
Repatriation.
Financial status at the time of repatriation.
Remarks.

ASSIGNMENT TO INTERNMENTFACILITIES
4-28. Selectively assign EPWs to internment facilities that best meet their needs and the needs of the detaining power. To prevent problems, isolate EPWs from the general population if they hold violent, opposing ideologies. After EPWs are assigned to a facility, they may be further segregated due to nationality, language, and so forth. Normally, EPWs are segregated into the following categories:
Officer.
NCO.

Enlisted.
CI.
RP.
Male.
Female.

4-29. The EPWs may be further assigned to separate compounds. Always intern females in compounds that are separate from males. Further separation of EPWs may be necessary depending on security issues. (See Chapter 6 for further information on I/R facilities.)
CLASSIFICATIONAND REASSIGNMENT
4-30. The initial classification of an EPW is based on unsupported statements or documentation provided by them. Assignment to a specific compound within the internment facility is based on the assumption that the identity provided by the EPW is correct.
Enemy Prisoners of War 4-9
4-31. After an EPW is assigned to a facility, expect a continuing need for further reclassification and reassignment. Because the identity of the EPW was based on unsupported statements or documentation supplied by him, it may be necessary to reclassify him a second time as his identity becomes apparent. Agitators, enemy plants, or EPW leaders are eventually uncovered by their activities. They may be reclassified according to their new identity or ideology and reassigned to a more appropriate facility.
4-32. Anticipate the reclassification and reassignment of EPWs within the facility or to other facilities. The initial classification may be challenged by the EPW or MP assets. An individual may provide statements or documents that indicate he should be reclassified, or observations made by MP or MI may determine that an individual was incorrectly classified.
TRIBUNAL
4-33. A tribunal is held accordingto Article 5, GPW. It determines the status of an individual who does not appear to be entitled to EPW status but-Commits a belligerent act to aid enemy armed forces. Engages in a hostile activity to aid enemy armed forces. Asserts that he or she is entitled to treatment as an EPW.
TRANSFER BETWEEN FACILITIES
4-34. A transfer may be a result of reclassification or another situation requiring the movement of an EPW. Transfer an EPW from one facility to another under conditionsthat are comparable to those for a member of the US armed forces when possible. Security measures are determined by MP and are influenced by the type of EPW being transferred, the mode of transportation used, and other pertinent conditions.
4-35. The facility commander-
Publishes a transfer order and informs EPWs of their new postal
addresses in time for them to notify their NOK and the IRIC.
Verifies the accuracy and completeness of EPW personnel records and

provides records (in a sealed envelope) to MP accompanying the
movement.

Verifies that EPWs possess their authorized clothing and equipment.
Prepares impounded personal property for shipment with escorting
MP or separate shipment as appropriate.

Briefs escort MP on their duties and responsibilities, including
procedures to be followed in case of an escape, a death, or another
emergency.

Provides or arranges for rations, transportation, and notifications

accordingto prescribed procedures.
Ensures that EPWs are manifested by name, ranklstatus, ISN, power
served, nationality, and physical condition. Attach the manifest to the
original receipt and forward it to the IRIC.

Prepares paperwork in English and other languages (if required)
before transferring EPWs.

4-10 Enemy Prisoners of War
4-36. Each EPW can transfer personal property not exceeding 55 pounds. Chaplains and EPWs who have been serving as clergymen are permitted to transfer an additional 110 pounds to cover communion sets, theological books, and other religious material. If an EPW7spersonal property exceeds 55 pounds, he selects the items he is going to transfer and disposes of the rest according to established policies.
TRANSFER TO HOST NATION OR ALLIED FACILITLESAND INTERSERVICE
4-37. The permanent transfer of an EPW from the custody of US forces to the HN or other allied forces requires the approval of the Secretary of Defens.e (SECDEF). The permanent transfer of an EPW to FN control is governed by bilateral national agreements. An EPW can only be transferred from US custody to a power that is a party to the Geneva Conventions. A US representative visits the power’s internment facilities and ensures that the power is willing and able to comply with the Geneva Conventions.
4-38. The temporary transfer of EPWs is authorized to accommodate surges in EPW population beyond US capacity. The TO commander develops measures to ensure accountability and humane treatment of EPWs who are temporarily transferred.
4-39. An EPW who is captured or detained by the US Marine Corps, Navy, Air Force, or Coast Guard is turned over to the US Army at receiving points designated by the TO commander. Interservice transfers are effected as soon as possible following initial classification and administrative processing.
REPATRIATION
4-40. Repatriation is the process of returning an EPW to his country of birth or citizenship. An EPW who is not sick or wounded is repatriated or released at the end of hostilities as directed by the Office of the Secretary of Defense (OSD). The keys to a successful repatriation process are control and accountability. Table 4-2, page 4-12, outlines repatriation procedures.
4-41. To complete the transfer, the escort guard company forwards the official receipt of transfer to the IRIC. Upon notification from the IRIC that the transfer is complete, the losing internment facility forwards official records and unreleased confiscated property to the IRIC for final disposition. The IRIC-
Notifies the national IRIC of the final status of released and repatriated EPWs.
Forwards EPW records and reports according to AR 25-400-2. Disposes of confiscated property according to the national IRIC and applicable regulations.
4-42. The eligibility for repatriation or accommodation of sick and wounded EPWs is determined in a neutral country by a mixed medical commission.The commission is established by Headquarters, Department of the Army (HQDA) according to AR 190-8 and the GPW. Sick and wounded EPWs are not repatriated against their will during hostilities.
Enemy Prisonersof War 4-11
Table 4-2. Repatriation Procedures
Step     Actions
Control and Maintain control and accountabilityuntil EPWs are received by the servingpower or accountability the designated protecting power.
Maintain a manifest that contains the­
*     Name. RanWstatus. ISN. Power servedlnationality. Physical condition.
NOTE: A manifest is used as an official receipt of transfer and becomes a permanent record to ensure accountability of each EPW until his final
release. Records Ensure that copies of appropriate personnel, finance,and medical records accompany released and repatriated EPWs. Transfer the records to the designated official receiving EPWs. Personal property Ensure that confiscated personal property (that can be released)accompanies released and repatriatedEPWs.
Conduct an inventory and identify discrepancies.
Ensure that EPWs sign property receipts.
CONTROL ANDDISCIPLINE
4-43. Treat EPWs fairly and firmly. Ensure that orders are decisive, clear, concise, reasonable, capable of being obeyed, and given in an understood language. Promptly report refusals and failures to obey orders, and take appropriate disciplinary action.
CONTROL
4-44. Maintain humane, firm control of EPWs. To control EPWs-Observe rigorous self-discipline. Maintain a professional, impersonal attitude. Cope with hostile or unruly behavior and incidents calmly. Take judicious, immediate, and decisive action.
4-45. The MP establish daily and periodic routines and responses that are
conducive to good EPW discipline and control. They-Require compliance with policies and procedures. Use techniques that provide firm control of EPWs.
Give reasonable, decisive orders in a language that EPWs understand. Post copies of the Geneva Conventions in the compound where EPWs can read them in their own language.
Post rules, regulations, instructions, notices, orders, and other announcements that EPWs are expected to obey. Ensure that posted information is printed in a language that EPWs understand. Provide copies to EPWs who do not have access to posted copies.
Ensure that EPWs obey rules, orders, and directives.
4-12 Enemy Prisoners of War FM 3-19.40
Report refusals and failures to obey orders and regulations.
Treatment
4-46. Equitable treatment enhances the control of EPWs. According to the Geneva Conventions, all EPWs are treated humanely and are protected against violence, intimidation, insults, and public curiosity. Treat all EPWs alike, regardless of rank, sex, and privileged treatment (which may be accorded due to their health, age, or professional qualifications).
4-47.An EPW officer is afforded the followingprivileges and considerations: Quarters and facilitiesthat are commensurate with his grade. The privilege of not being compelledto work. Enlisted orderlies. They are assigned at a ratio of 1for each general
officer (GO) and 1for every 12officers of a lower grade.
4-48.An RP is extended additional privileges and considerations due to his
profession and special skills: Correspondence privileges for chaplains and senior medical officers that are over and above those afforded EPW officers.
Facilities necessary to provide EPWs with medical care, spiritual

assistance, and welfare service.

Authority and transportation for periodic visits to hospitals and other

internment facilities.

Work assignments that are restricted to medical or religious duties he
is qualified to perform.
Quarters that are separate from those of other EPWs when practical.

Representation
4-49. A limited system of representation improves communication between US forces and EPWs, thus improving control. According to AR 190-8 and the Geneva Conventions, the senior EPW officer assigned to each facility is recognized as the senior EPW representative, unless he is declared incompetent or incapacitated by US authorities. Enlisted EPWs may elect an enlisted representative if there is no officer representation at the facility. In officer facilities, EPWs choose one or more advisors to assist the senior representative. In officerlenlisted facilities, EPWs elect one or more enlisted advisors to assist the officer representative.
4-50. Elected and appointed representatives have the same nationality, customs, and language as those they represent. Each group of EPWs interned in separate facilities due to language, customs, or ideology is permitted to have an elected representative.
4-51.The primary duties of elected representatives are to promote spiritual, physical, and intellectual well-being of EPWs. Representatives are given freedom of movement within security requirements. They do not have the authority to discipline EPWs, but they are allowed to­
*     Inspect labor detachments. Receive supplies. Communicate with-
Enemy Prisonersof War 4-13
. US military authorities. . Protecting powers. (Protecting powers periodically inspect the internment facility and interview EPWs regarding the conditions of their internment, their welfare, and their rights under
international law.) . The ICRC and its delegates. . Medical commissions. . Other organizations authorized to assist EPWs. Use postal and other appropriate facilities.
4-52.Representatives do not perform any other work if it interferes with their representative duties. Each representative is elected by secret ballot and serves a 6-month term. The EPWs are permitted to consult freely with their representatives, and representatives are allowed to represent EPWs before­
*     The ICRC. Protecting powers. US military authorities. Other relief or aid organizations (NGOs and 10s).
4-53.The facility commander is the final approving authority for each elected EPW representative. After the approval process is complete, a representative assumes his duties. When the commander denies, approves, or dismisses an elected representative, he sends a notice through channels to HQDA, the national IRIC (forwarded to the IRIC), or the protecting power. The notice includes the reason(s) for refusal if applicable. The EPWs are then permitted to elect another representative. Each elected representative can appoint assistants, as approved by the facility commander.
4-54.Medical and chaplain personnel are classified as RPs and are not considered EPWs. They receive, at a minimum, the benefits and protection afforded EPWs by the Geneva Conventions. However, EPW representatives do not represent them. The senior US or FN medical officer at each internment facility is responsible for the activities of retained medical personnel. The senior retained medical officer and the chaplain have the right to correspond and consult with the facility commander on all questions concerning their duties.
RULES OF INTERACTION AND ENGAGEMENT
4-55.The ROI provide soldiers with a guide for interacting with the EPW population. The following directives may be included in the ROI: Speak to EPWs only when giving orders. Treat all EPWs equally and with respect. Respect religious articles and materials. Treat all medical problems seriously. Do not discuss politics or the conflict with EPWs. Do not make promises.
Do not make obscene gestures.
Do not make derogatory remarks or political comments about EPWs
and their cause.

4-14 Enemy Prisoners of War
Do not engage in commerce with EPWs.
4-56. Commanders balance the physical security of forces with mission accomplishment and the ROE. The basic guidelines on ROE (Chapter 2) apply to EPWs. The employment of nonlethal weapons (NLWs) is clearly stated in the ROE (see Appendix B and FM 90-40).
4-57. The ROE vary from operation to operation. The commander in chief (CINC) establishes ROE in coordination with the SJA and the joint staff. Special ROE can be developed for use in internment facilities, but they must have CINC approval. Specific ROE may evolve to fit the changing environment and to ensure continued protection and safety for US personnel and EPWs. As a general principle, the ROE should remain simple and understandable.
DISCIPLINE
4-58. The facility commander establishes and enforces the rules needed to maintain discipline and security. The EPWs may not establish their own court system. The following actions are not permitted between EPWs and US military or civilian personnel:
Fraternization.
Favoritism.

Donation or receipt of gifts.
Engagement in commerce.
4-59. If necessary, the MP commander or his appointed officer initiates general court-martial proceedings against EPWs using Miscellaneous Publication (MiscPub) 27-7; the UCMJ; and US laws, regulations, and orders. Do not deliver an EPW to civil authorities for an offense unless a member of the US armed forces would be delivered for committing a similar offense.
4-60. Do not discipline an EPW until he is given precise information regarding the offense(s).Allow the accused to explain his conduct and defend himself. Permit him to call witnesses, and use an interpreter if necessary. Maintain a record (on a locally produced form if available) of disciplinary punishment administered to EPWs. Disciplinary measures include­
*     Discontinuance of privileges that are granted over and above those allowed by the Geneva Conventions (not to exceed 30 days).
Confinement (not to exceed 30 days).
A fine (not to exceed one-half of the advance and working pay that an
EPW receives during a 30-day period).
Fatigue duty (extra duty) (not to exceed 2 hours per day for 30 days). Fatigue duty does not apply to officers, and NCOs are only required to supervise.
CLOTHING

4-61. Supply EPWs with sufficient clothing, underwear, and footwear; and allow for the climate where EPWs are housed. Use captured uniforms of enemy armed forces if they are suitable for the climate. Ensure that clothing is replaced and repaired as necessary. Working EPWs receive clothing that is
Enemy Prisoners of War 4-15
appropriate to the nature and location of the work. Clothing worn by EPWs at the time of capture is worn until it is no longer serviceable, and then it is exchanged. (Appendix C provides a synopsis of clothing and equipment that can be issued to EPWs.)
4-62. Mark outer garments with the letters “PW.”Use black letters, about 4 inches high; if the clothing is a dark color, use white letters. Mark shirts, coats, and similar items across. the back and on the front of each sleeve (between the elbow and the shoulder). Mark trousers, walking shorts, and similar items across the back (slightly below the belt) and on the front of each leg (slightly above the knee). Do not mark hats and other accessories. Sample EPW clothing markings are shown in Figure 4-1.
Front Back
Figure 4-1. EPW Clothing Markings
4-63. An RP wears a water-resistant armband on his left sleeve bearing a distinctive emblem (such as Red Cross or Red Crescent). It is issued and stamped by the military authority of the power with which he has served. An authorized person who does not have an armband in his possession is provided a Geneva Convention brassard (see AR 670-1).
4-16 Enemy Prisoners of War
SUBSISTENCE
4-64. The detaining power feeds EPWs a basic, daily food ration that is sufficient in quantity, quality, and variety to keep them in good health and to prevent weight loss and nutritional deficiencies. A medical officer, a PA, or a nurse practitioner keeps the commander apprised of situational needs and the nutritional health of EPWs. Supply working EPWs with extra rations to compensate for their labor. Sustain the health of EPWs at a level that is equal to that of the US forces guarding them.
4-65. If dining facilities are unavailable, feed EPWs meals, ready-to-eat (MREs). These rations are easily stored and require no additional dietary supplements. However, when perishable food supplies (fresh vegetables, hit, and meat) are available, substitute them for nonperishable items. Always provide sufficient drinking water. Do not issue extra rations because EPWs can stockpile food and use it for escapes. The commander may authorize EPWs to prepare their own meals under the supervision of US personnel.
4-66. During the early stages of captivity (in brigade and division areas), allow EPWs to retain their own rations. However, arrange for collective feeding of EPWs according to the terms of the Geneva Conventions at the earliest opportunity.
MEDICAL AND SANITATION CONSIDERATIONS
4-67. Ensure that adequate medical and sanitation standards are met. Chapters 2 and 6 contain additional information on these responsibilities.
CORRESPONDENCE
4-68. Within one week of arrival at the internment facility, an EPW completes a DA Form 2665-R. When an EPW is transferred from one internment facility to another, he completes a DA Form 2666-R.
OUTGOINGCORRESPONDENCE

4-69. Outgoing correspondence is allowed as follows:
May mail two letters (DA Form 2667-R) and four postcards (DA Form 2668-R) free of charge as prescribed in AR 190-8. May address complaints in writing to US military authorities and the
protecting power. Complaints are not limited in length or in number,
and they are not charged against an EPW’s correspondence allotment.
All complaints are transmitted immediately.
Cannot write letters for other EPWs. If an EPW is unable to write, the facility commander appoints someone to write and countersign the letter.
Cannot send parcels.
4-70. The facility commander or his designated representative examines and
reads letters and postcards. The facility commander requisitions, reproduces,
and supplies correspondence forms. If EPWs are prevented from writing
Enemy Prisoners of War 4-17
monthly letters due to the lack of forms, allow them to make up their allotment when forms become available.
INCOMING CORRESPONDENCE
4-71. An EPW can receive unlimited letters, cards, and parcels. Censors thoroughly inspect all parcels for unauthorized items and concealed or coded messages. If deemed necessary, the facility commander can request that censors also examine incoming correspondence. Parcels are forwarded to EPWs who have been transferred.
TELEGRAMSAND TELEPHONE CALLS
4-72. The EPWs may send and receive telegrams as determined by the facility commander, and the cost of sending telegrams is deducted from the EPW’s account. The EPWs cannot make telephone calls.
CANTEENS
4-73. Provide EPWs with sundry, health, and comfort packs. The packs can be supplemented with items tailored to EPWs’ cultural needs as a temporary substitute for establishing canteen operations.
4-74. Canteens are operated according to the GPW and are installed as directed by the TO PM or senior MP officer. The EPWs can procure foodstuffs, soap, tobacco, and other items in canteens. The tariff for items available for EPWs never exceeds local market price, and payment procedures are outlined in DFAS-IN 37-1.
4-75. Profits made by the facility canteen are used to benefit the EPWs, and a special fund is created for this purpose. When an internment facility closes, transfer the credit balance of the special fund to another US internment facility in the TO. When all facilities are closed, transfer funds to an international welfare organization. The special fund is employed for the benefit of EPWs of the same nationality as those who have contributed to the fund. In case of a general repatriation, profits are kept by the US.
NOTE: The EPW representatives can make suggestions regarding the management of canteens and special funds.
SOCIAL PROGRAMS
4-76. Encourage and support active education, employment, and agriculture programs for EPWs. Like other internees, EPWs have active programs for religious worship, recreation, protecting-power visits, and safety. These programs are discussed in Chapter 2. Provide adequate facilities, instruction materials, and agriculture equipment for these activities.
EDUCATION
4-77. Develop education programs according to DA policy. Within the framework of DA guidance and directives issued by other headquarters, develop a separate education program for each EPW facility. Each program reflects the individual attitudes and political orientations of those interned in
4-18 Enemy Prisoners of War
the facility. The following factors and considerations may influence an education program: Levels of education throughout the EPW population. Attitudes toward education and the education program.
Requirements for essential and necessary EPW work details.
The availability of qualified instructors (may include EPWs,
indigenous personnel, and US Army military and civilian personnel).

Security considerations that may restrict or prohibit the use of EPWs
or indigenouspersonnel.

4-78. In addition to an academic program, ensure that vocational training is an integral part of the education program. The immediate objective of vocational training is to develop skills that are useful during internment. The long-range goal is for EPWs to learn trades that are useful in civilian life.
EMPLOYMENT
4-79. The EPW population constitutes a significant labor force of skilled and unskilled workers. Employ EPWs to construct, administer, manage, and maintain the facility. The EPWs will be employed in other essential work permitted by AR 190-8only when qualified civilian labor is unavailable.
4-80. The commander organizes and manages the EPW population in a manner that permits proper, ready employment of each EPW. He­
* Establishes and maintains a current occupational-skill record for each
EPW and includes new skills as they are acquired.
Assigns individual EPWs to a work detail or a job on a regular or
permanent basis.

Establishes vocational-training projects. Encourages EPWs to study and develop skills.
4-81. The EPW labor that is external to DOD is regulated through contract. (See AR 190-8for more information on the employment of and compensation for EPWs.)
Labor Considerations
4-82. The following restrictions apply when employing EPWs: An officer cannot be compelled to work. An NCO can only be required to supervise the work of enlisted
personnel.
An EPW cannot be compelled to engage in work that is purely military in nature and purpose. An EPW cannot be employed on a work detail that is unhealthy or
dangerous because of the work’s nature or the individual’s lack of physical fitness or technical skill. (See the GPW and AR 190-8 for guidance on this type of employment.)
An EPW/RP cannot be assigned to labor that is considered humiliating or degrading for members of the US armed forces. This prohibition does not include unpleasant, necessary tasks that are connected to administering and maintaining the facility.
Enemy Prisoners of War 4-19
An EPW cannot be employed or retained in an area where he may be exposed to direct or indirect fire.
4-83. If in doubt as to whether work is authorized, request that the SJA review the proposed tasks. This review assures compliance with AR 190-8 and the law of land warfare.
Paid Work
4-84. The EPWs are compensated when they perform work for which pay is authorized. The rate of pay is not less than that prescribed in the GPW. Compensation for work is authorized from US Army appropriated funds, canteen funds, or EPW funds. The EPWs are paid for various types of authorized work, such as­
*     Labor performed for a contract employer or a federal agency. Services as orderlies and cooks for officer EPWs. Services to construct, administer, manage, and maintain EPW
facilities, branch facilities, and hospitals when such services are
performed by EPWs permanently assigned to certain duties or
occupations.

Labor performed by RPs.
Spiritual or medical duties.
Services as EPW representatives or assistants. These individuals are

paid from the EPW fund. If an EPW fund does not exist, they are paid
from US Army appropriated funds.
Services as detail leaders or interpreters.

Advance Pay
4-85. The Geneva Conventions state that the detaining power shall grant EPWs a monthly advance of pay, the amount of which shall be fixed by conversion into the currency of the said power, of the following amounts:
Category I (EPWs below the rank of sergeant [SGTI):8 Swiss francs.

Category I1 (SGTs, other NCOs, and EPWs of equivalent rank): 12
Swiss francs.
Category I11 (warrant officers [WOs], commissioned officers below the

rank of major [MAJI, and EPWs of equivalent rank): 50 Swiss francs.

Category IV: (MAJs, lieutenant colonels [LTCsl,colonels [COLsl,and
EPWs of equivalent rank): 60 Swiss francs.
Category V (GOs and EPWs of equivalent rank): 75 Swiss francs.

NOTE: The facility commander consults with the SJA and the finance office when setting up EPW advance-pay accounts.
AGRICULTURE
4-86. When practical, EPWs should raise vegetables for their use; the labor is classified as paid work. Do not overlook the importance of developing an agriculture program. Agriculture and gardening projects are particularly desirable because they provide gainful employment for several individuals. The food produced by gardening projects provides a valuable supplement to
4-20 Enemy Prisoners of War
diets at minimal expense. The produce from gardens operated with EPW labor is US property. It is used for the benefit of EPWs and US armed forces personnel, and it is not sold or traded in civilian markets.
4-87. The types and quantities of agriculture supplies required (seeds, fertilizers, and implements) are procured through local purchase or Army supply channels. Ensure that necessary supplies are ordered in a timely manner.
SECURITY
4-88. The commander is responsible for security measures that effectively control EPWs with minimal use of force. A general discussion of the commander’s security responsibilities is found in Chapter 2. The information contained in this chapter applies specifically to EPW security.
ADVERSE ACTIONS
4-89. Dissident actions by EPWs vary from acts of harassment to acts of violence. Enemy forces may support resistance activities, such as EPWs-Refusingto eat, work, or attend formations. Working in an unsatisfactory manner. Malingering. Sabotagingequipment or facilities. Assaulting other EPWs or guard personnel. Taking hostages to secure concessions. Escaping or participating in mass breakouts. Intimidating other EPWs. Fabricating weapons or other illegal items.
Printing or circulating propaganda material.
Creating embarrassing situations or making false accusations to
influence international inspection teams or members of the protecting
power or the ICRC.

Instigating disturbances and riots to place the facility staff in
unfavorable positions (this allows EPWs to gain concessions and
influence custodial policies).

4-90. Enemy forces may­
* Establish communications with EPWs by using agents, smuggled
radios, and foreign-language newspapers.
Order membersto submit to capture so that they can become agitators
in the internment facility.

Liberate EPWs through direct military action by regular or irregular forces.
PLANNING
4-91. Ensure that security planning is continuous and complete and that it reflects current intelligence information on uprisings, outbreaks, and escapes.
Enemy Prisonersof War 4-21
Provide an immediate-response plan that is capable of meeting all internal and external threats to security.
4-92. The EPWs may try to communicate with EPWs from other compounds
and facilities. The most common places for communication are-Dispensary and food distribution points. Messages can be hidden where EPWs from neighboring compounds can find them. Alert observations and periodic searches minimize the possibility of communication in these areas.
Hospitals. If an EPW is sick or injured, examine him carefully to ensure that hospitalization is required. Do not inform the EPW patient of his discharge until the last possible moment. Conduct a complete search of each EPW and his personal effects upon admission and discharge from a hospital.
Work details. Maintain an adequate distance between work details to prevent EPWs from exchanging information.
INTELLIGENCE INFORRIATION
4-93. The first objective of MI is observing activities to accurately classify EPWs as cooperative or uncooperative. This minimizes security and control problems by allowing early segregation of hard-core, uncooperative EPWs to maximum-security internment facilities.
4-94. Timely information relative to attitudes and activities enables the facility commander to forecast disturbances and other clandestine activities. This information is an important means of countering resistance movements, minimizing the use of force, and maintaining control. An effective information-gathering system identifies dissident elements, including leaders, plans, and methods.
4-95. All facility personnel must detect and report significant information. They can acquire important information through observation and insight, even though they are not trained intelligence specialists.
4-96. In compounds that house cooperative EPWs, a special intelligence organization is not needed. Tap ordinary sources of information continually and assess them sensitively. These sources include communications, observations, and reports of military, administrative, and security personnel; criminal investigation data; disciplinary reports; and grievance statements.
4-97. Intelligence requirements incorporate information required by the commander to ensure the continued control of EPWs and information requested by higher headquarters and other agencies. The S2 prepares PIR and coordinates intelligence requirements to maintain a constant flow of intelligence to the commander.
4-98. Identify the following essential elements of information (EEI): EPW agitators and leaders and their followers. Clandestine EPW organizations, including their strength, objectives,
and members.
Underground communications systems and overt attempts to
communicate­
4-22 Enemy Prisoners of War
Between EPW compounds and internment facilities. With indigenous civilian personnel.
Suspicious activities by local people near the internment facility
(photographingor’sketchingthe facility).
Fabricated weapons, stores of food, and clothing supplies in the

compound.
Plans to conduct demonstrations, including-

D  The date and time.
The number of EPWs involved (by compound).
D  The nature of the demonstration (passive, harassing, or violent
act).

. Objectives (distributing propaganda, weakening or testing authority and security, establishing control, or planning mass escapes or outbreaks).
4-99.Use the following methods to obtain information on clandestine EPW activities:
Provide opportunities for EPWs to volunteer information of
intelligence value and offer protection from reprisal by removal or
transfer to safe facilities.

Conduct periodic, unannounced searches and patrols.
Search EPWs on departure from and return to the facility.
Train personnel on the techniques and importance of observing,

recognizing, and reporting information that may have intelligence
value, such as-

Unusual activities, especially before holidays or celebrations.
Messages being passed between groups of EPWs on work details. Messages being passed to or from local civilians while EPWs are on work details.
Messages being signaled from one compound to another.
4-100.Developing an EPW intelligence network that extends to each compound is invaluable. The reliability of the network depends on the information provided and the verification of that information. Establishing an informant system is subject to local considerationof special hazards that may be involved. Take every precaution to provide safety for EPW informants.
WORK DETAIL GUARDS
4-101.Keep work detail guards to the minimum number necessary to assure reasonable security and prevent EPW escape. Guards maintain a reasonable distance from work details and properly position themselves to provide the best observation of the area. Rest breaks for guards are taken separately while EPWs are working.
MILITARY WORKING DOGS
4-102.The MWDs offer a viable deterrent against EPW escapes, because their tracking capabilities can be used to recapture escapees. Chapter 2 provides more information on MWDs and their use in internment facilities.
Enemy Prisoners of War 4-23
ESCAPE PREVENTION
Minimize escapes by-Conducting periodic, unannounced, and systematic searches to detect
tunneling, caches of food or clothing, weapons, maps, and money or
other valuables.
Maintaining strict accountability for tools and equipment that EPWs

can access or use.
Examining perimeter fencing daily to detect cuts or other weaknesses.
Examining the lighting system during darkness to detect poorly

lighted areas along the perimeter. (Replace burned out or broken light

bulbs immediately.)
Conducting training and refresher training to ensure that all security
and guard personnel are familiar with security precautions,
techniques, and procedures.

Searching vehicles and containers taken into or out of the internment

facility.
Supervising the disposition of unconsumed rations (in the internment
facility and on work details) to prevent caching of food.

Early Detection of Escape Attempts
4-104. To detect escape attempts, conduct­
*     Roll calls and head counts on regular and unannounced bases. Roll calls twice daily, preferably early morning and late evening. Head counts immediately after witnessing a mass disturbance,
discovering an open tunnel, or detecting a hole or break in a fence. Head counts frequently while on work details and when en route to another facility.
Escape Prevention and the Use of Force
4-105. The facility commander ensures that US soldiers understand the ROE, including the use of the term halt, the use of deadly force, and the ban on physical or imaginary deadlines. Per AR 190-8, he also ensures that EPWs understand the use of the English word halt and its implications.
4-106. When an EPW tries to escape, a guard shouts HALT three times; thereafter, the guard uses the least amount of force necessary to halt the EPW. If there is no other effective means of preventing escape, deadly force can be used. If an EPW tries to escape from a fenced enclosure, do not fire unless he clears the outside fence (barrier, concertina wire, or razor tape) and makes further effort to escape. If an EPW tries to escape outside a fenced enclosure, fire if he does not halt after the third command.
4-107. An escape is successful if an EPW-Reaches the lines of his forces or the allies of that power. Leaves the territory that the US or its allied powers control.
Per the unit SOP, notify commands and interested agencies of escapes and recaptures.
4-24 Enemy Prisoners of War
Chapter 5
Civilian lnternees
A civilian whose status cannot be determined is treated as an OD. All rules, regulations, and privileges applicable to an EPW apply to an OD. When an OD is adjudicated by a military tribunal and determined to be a CI, he is removed from the EPW facility and treated as a CI. This chapter discusses the internment process after a military tribunal adjudicates a civilian and determines that he should be interned. A CI internment facility runs parallel to an EPW internment facility, with some differences. A CI-
Is protected under the provisions of the GC.
Does not meet the criteria for classification as an EPW or an RP.
Is considered a security risk.
Needs protection because he committed an offense against the

detaining power (insurgents, criminals, or other persons). NOTE: AR 190-8 provides detailed information on the administration of a CI internment facility and the treatment of CIS.
GENERAL PROTECTION
5-1. Do not physically torture or use moral coercion against CIS.This does not prevent the use of minimum force necessary to enforce measures authorized or directed by AR 190-8. Ensure that CIS are treated with respect and protected against­
*     Violence. Insult. Public curiosity. Bodily injury. Reprisal. Sexual attack (molestation, prostitution, or any form of indecent
assault).
5-2. Treat CIS considerately, without adverse distinction based on race, religion, political opinion, sex, or age. The following are prohibited: Measures that may cause physical suffering or death. Intimidation. Terrorism. Reprisal. Hostage acts.
Civilian lnternees 5-1
Deportation from the occupied territory to the territory of the occupying power or any other country (occupied or not).
5-3. The CIS can apply for assistance from protecting powers, the ICRC, approved religious organizations, relief societies, and others. Within the limits of military and security considerations, these organizations are allowed access and facilities to assist CIS.
AUTHORIZATION TO INTERN
5-4. The internment of protected civilians is authorized and directed if the
following requirements are met: Internment is necessary (as determined by competent US military authority) for the security of US armed forces in the occupied territory.
Internment is directed (by a properly constituted US military court in the occupied territory) as the sentence for an offense that violates penal provisions issued by the occupyingUS armed forces.
5-5. A protected civilian in the occupied territory is accepted for internment
upon receipt of one of the following: An internment order for imperative security reasons authenticated by a commissioned officer who is delegated authority by the TO commander.
An order of an authorized commander, approving and ordering into
execution, a sentence to internment pronounced by a properly
constituted US military court in the occupied territory.
5-6. A CI can request compassionate internment of his dependent children who are without parental care in the occupied territory. This is normally granted after coordination with SJA when both parents or the only surviving parent is interned.
SAFETY

5-7. Establish and administer a safety program for CIS according to pertinent safety directives. (See AR 385-10 for more information.)
ADMINISTRATIVE RESPONSIBILITIES
5-8. An I/R facility housing CIS is commanded by a commissioned officer of the US armed forces, and he is responsible for the safety and well-being of all housed personnel. He ensures that copies of the Geneva Conventions and facility regulations, orders, and notices relating to the conduct and activities of internees are posted in each facility,in the language of internees housed there. He provides copies to internees who do not have access to posted copies.
5-9. Regulations and other guidance relative to the administration, employment, and compensation of internees are prescribed in detail in AR 190-8 and DFAS-IN 37-1. The commander ensures that all members of his staff and command are familiar with applicable ARs, directives, international laws, and administrative procedures.
5-10. The commander is responsible for administratively processing each internee. When processing is complete, a strength report (DA Form 2674-R)is
5-2 Civilian Internees
transmitted to the IRIC, which functions as the field operations agency for the national IRIC located in the TO.
PRINCIPLES AND POLICIES
5-11. The following principles apply to CI internment facilities: Use housed personnel for internal maintenance and operation. Use captured supplies and equipment (excluding weapons and
ammunition). Maintain control.
5-12. A CI has the right to­
*     Submit requests and complaints regarding the conditions of his confinement to detaining and protecting powers.
Elect representatives to the internee committee. Send and receive correspondence.
NOTE:Commanders are authorized to impose disciplinary punishment accordingto the Geneva Conventions and AR 190-8.
STANDING ORDERS
5-13. Standing orders are used to provide uniform, orderly administration of the I/R facility.The orders to be obeyed by housed personnel are published in their language and posted where they can read and refer to them. Standing orders include rules, procedures, and instructions governing the following activities and other matters as deemed appropriate:
Schedule of calls, including­
. Reveille.
. Morning roll.
. Readiness of quarters for inspection.

Sick.
Mess. . Evening roll. . Lights out. Housed-personnel actions that support emergency action plans of the
internment facility, such as­
. Fire drills.
. Air raid drills.
. Emergency evacuations.
. Natural-disaster drills.
. Blackouts.
. Escapes.
Hours for religious services, recreation activities, and so forth.
Procedures for emergency sick call.
Designated smoking areas.

Civilian Internees 5-3
RECORDSANDREPORTS
5-14. The commander establishes local records and reports necessary to operate the facility effectively. The reports provide information concerning control, supervision, and disposition of the CI population. The commander determines the type (administrative, operational, logistical, intelligence, and personnel) of reports and the frequency (routine or as required). Normal command records and reports, such as duty officer logs, worksheets, and situation maps, are also required.
Processing
5-15. Internees who meet the requirements in the Geneva Conventions and
AR 190-8 are entitled to the protected CI status. Process them as follows: Issue an ISN to each processed CI using the procedures in Chapter 4 for EPWs. Ensure that the letters “CISfollow the last number of the ISN.
Complete DA Form 2663-R in duplicate for each CI and each dependent child. Place one copy in the C17spersonnel file, which is transferred with him; and forward the other copy to the IRIC.
Prepare DA Form 2674-R for each facility housing CIS and for each hospital where CIS are assigned. Account for all captives classified as CIS, captives who had a DA Form 4237-R prepared, and dependent children who received compassionate internment.
Issue DA Form 2677-R to each processed CI. Direct him to retain the
card at all times.
Complete DA Form 2678-R in duplicate. Forward one copy to the CI
information agency and the other copy to a relative.
Prepare DA Form 4237-R for each protected civilian processed in the occupied territory as a CI or a dependent child. Stamp the letters “CI” on the top and bottom of each form.
Dependent Children
5-16. Dependent children who are interned with their CI parents are not classified as CIS or processed, except as required on DA Forms 2663-R, 2674-R, and 4237-R. When dependent children reside in the facility with their parents, they are cared for, accounted for, and managed like their parents. House children and parents together in facilities that allow them to lead a normal family life. Children under the age of 12 are identified by wearing an ID badge or wristband. Ensure that children under the age of 15, who are orphaned or separated from their families as a result of the war, are not left to their own resources.
Assignments
5-17. Assign CIS to appropriate internment facilities, and intern those with violently opposed ideologies in separate facilities. When possible, assign CIS according to their nationality, language, and customs. Do not separate CIS who are nationals of the same country merely because they speak different languages; however, consider political and cultural differences as grounds for
5-4 Civilian Internees
separation. Maintain segregation of males and females, with the following
exceptions: House members of the same family together (particularly parents and children), allowing them to lead a near-normal family life.
Provide quarters to a parent (if single or interned without a spouse) and children that are separate from those for single persons.
Identification
5-18. The reasons for identifying CISare many and varied; among them are­
*     Verifying facility rosters against the actual population. Identifying family members to allow timely reunification. Matching CIS with their medical records in case of a medical
emergency or an evacuation.
Checking identities of CIS being transferred against the transfer
roster.

5-19. An ID band (see Chapter 4) permits rapid, reliable ID of CIS. Assign each CI an ISN according to the procedures in Chapter 4 and AR 190-8. Substitute the letters “CI” for “EPW;” for example, US9AB-000001CI. The ID card contains the CI’s name, photograph, and ISN. When serious deterioration of an ID band or card occurs, replace it immediately. Use a DA Form 2677-R to facilitate ID.
CLOTHING
5-20. Allow CIS to retain their clothing and footwear. Provide clothing, equipment, supplies, subsistence, and fuel as necessary. Issue work clothing and, as required by circumstances and climatic conditions, replacement clothing. Account for health and comfort items, such as razors and toothbrushes, with a direct-exchange program.
5-21. Mark outer garments with the letters “CI.” Use black letters, about 4 inches high; if the clothing is a dark color, use white letters. Mark shirts, coats, and similar items across the back and on the front of each sleeve (between the elbow and the shoulder). Mark trousers, walking shorts, and similar items across the back (slightly below the belt) and on the front of each leg (slightly above the knee). Do not mark hats and other accessories. The commander can also direct that a CI’s ISN be placed on the inside of his clothing. (See Figure 4-1, page 4-16.)
SUBSISTENCE
5-22. Issue food items based on the master CI menu prepared by the TO commander. The CI menu includes a daily food ration that is sufficient in quantity, quality, and variety to maintain good health and to prevent nutritional deficiencies. Consider the customary diet when developing a CI menu. Ensure that­
*     Facilities are available to CISfor preparing additional food received or procured from authorized sources.
Civilian Internees 5-5
CIS performing labor receive increased rations based on the type of

work performed.
Expectant and nursing mothers and children under the age of 15
years receive additional food in proportion to their needs.

5-23. If CISreceive MREs as the main source of nourishment, provide them with at least one hot meal per day. Supplement MREs with fruit, milk, and bread.
RECENING AND PROCESSING AREAS
5-24. Use a controlled-flow format to escort CISthrough the processing line. Normally, four CISare processed at a time and the average is eight per hour. Secure unprocessed CISin a holding area.
5-25. Request interpreters (linguists)from MI, PSYOP, allied forces, or local authorities as necessary. This may require identifying and clearing trusted internees or local nationals to interpret. Interpreters are particularly helpful when entering required data into the IRIS.
5-26. The preparation and dispatch of internee strength reports (DA Form 2674-R) are governed by AR 190-8,and they are prepared at each internment facility. Brigade or facility commanders may require feeder reports from various compounds to facilitate the preparation of internee strength reports.
5-27. Escort internees to the receiving area where the internment process begins. Table 5-1 outlines the internment process for CIS.It shows who is responsible for each step and what actions they must accomplish. Based on MEW-TC, the commander may tailor stations to meet the situation. Stations 1through 4 are in the receiving line, and Stations 5 through 9 are in the processing line.
RECEIVING AREA
5-28. When CISarrive at the facility-
Segregate them from those who arrived earlier and those who are
partially processed.
Ensure that a valid internment order was issued and accompanies

each CI.

Verify that receipts for each CI and his equipment match the CI’s

control number.

Secure personal property in a temporary storage area until CIS are

fully processed. Issue a DA Form 4137 for temporarily and

permanently stored property. Do not allow CISaccess to storage areas.
Ensures that CIS receive food, water, access to sanitation facilities
and, if needed, first aid.

Escort CIS to the processing area as soon as the receiving process is
complete.
Hold CISin the receiving area until they can be processed.

5-6 Civilian Internees
Table 5-1. Processing Actions at the CI Processing Area
Follow accountability procedures.
Escort CIS and their property.
Conduct a same-gender search of CIS before entering the processing area unless prohibited by conditions. NOTE: Upon initial apprehension, a mixed-gender search can be conducted; but it is discouraged due to possible negative repercussions. The same-gender search restrictions are based on the detainee being officially adjudicated and declared a CI.
Remove and examine property, place it in a container or a tray, mark it with a control number, and take it to a temporary storage area. lssue a DA Form 41 37 for stored property.
Allow CIS access to sanitation facilities.
Provide medical and dental care according to AR 40-3.
Give initial radioscopic chest examinations to look for active
Perform a TB skin test on children up to 14 years of age.
Weigh CIS and establish a weight register.
Immunize and reimmunize CIS as prescribed by TO policy.
Place control numbers on medical records to reduce linguist support. (Names, service numbers, and lSNs are entered at Station 1 with the aid of an interpreter.)
Disinfect CIS as prescribed by TO policy.
Annotate medical records with the date and place of inspection, immunization, and disinfection.
lssue personal-comfort items (toilet paper, soap, toothbrush,
Ensure that clothing is marked “CI.” NOTE: The CIS must provide their own clothing and footwear.
Civilian internees 5-7
Table 5-1. Processing Actions at the CI Processing Area (continued)
Initiate personnel records (DA Form 4237-R), ID documents
(DA Form 2677-R), and property receipts.
Prepare forms and records to maintain the accountability of CIS, their families, and their property (see STANAGs 2033,
Take two photographs (with instant film or digital technology). Have captives look straight ahead, and fill the frame with their
Use photograph name boards (black background with white characters). List lSNs and names (translated into English) at the bottom center.
Attach one photograph to the Cl’s personnel record.
Give a completed, laminated ID card (which contains the second photograph) to the CI.
Make separate lists for returned, stored, impounded, and confiscated property. List property to be returned to CIS or stored during internment on a separate list.
Escort CIS back to processing stations to correct errors if
Allow CIS to prepare DA Form 26784. If CIS are unable to write their own cards, have someone authorized by the commander to do it for them.
5-8 Civilian Internees
5-29. A medical officer­
*     Examines CISupon arrival at the facility and monthly thereafter. Determines medical fitness, state of health, nutrition, and cleanliness. Checks for communicable diseases (vermin infestations, TB, malaria,
sexually transmitted diseases [STDs],and HIV), and isolates CISwith
communicable diseases.
Records weight on DA Form 2664-R. This process monitors abrupt
changes in weight that may affect health.

NOTE: When possible, use qualified CI personnel for the medical and hygiene work necessary for the well-beingof CIS.
PROCESSINGAREA
5-30. After CIShave completed the receiving portion of their processing, move them to the processing area where they are formally processed into the internment facility. They are entered into the IRIS database, and the IRIC forwards the information to the national IRIC for dissemination to protecting powers. The processing element
Keeps CISsegregated as much as possible during processing.
Conducts administrative processing.
Expedites the processing of CIS (suspected spies and saboteurs)

selected by MI teams for interrogation.

Assigns each CI an ISN.

Replaces the control number on each CI’s wrist with the ISN.

FLOW OF INFORMATION
5-31. Regard the information collected from CIS as sensitive to protect them and the soldiers who are guarding them. If belligerent nations discover how many internees are in a facility or discover the location of a facility, it may be targeted to silence the sources of information. Maintain proper security throughout the-information flow, and disseminate information through proper channels. The IRIC acts as a hub for information that CHAs and I/R facilities produce. Report personnel records electronically on the IRIS or, if necessary, as a paper file.
5-32. The information flow begins when the prisoner is captured and a DD Form 2745 is ihitiated. The ISN, which is assigned upon arrival at a CHA or an I/R facility, is the key to tracking CISthroughout the I/R system.
5-33. A CI was initially processed as an EPW (see Chapter 4), and the information gleaned during that process is used to process him as a CI. Once an individual is adjudicated by a military tribunal as a CI, specific information must be electronically entered on DA Forms 2674-R and 4237-R:
DA Form 2674-R.Enter the following information in Section B:
. The first and last names of the CI and his dependent children who are given compassionate internment.
. The ISN. Assign an ISN if the individual does not have one. (Dependent children are not assigned an ISN.)
.     The grade, the civilian capacity, and/or the title.
Civilian Internees 5-9
. The sex of the CI and his dependent children.
. The nationality. This is the name of the country that the CI claims

for citizenship. . The occupational skill. . The name of the person who approved the internment order, the
headquarters, and the date. DA Form 4237-R.Prepare a DA Form 4237-R for each protected civilian processed in an occupied territory as a CI or a dependent child. Enter all available pertinent information and information that the CI is willing to give. Note information that the CI is unable or unwilling to give.
5-34. Information collected during processing (initial and full) and entered into the IRIS (CHA or I/R facility) is sent to the IRIC. The IRIC collects the entire personnel file (it is normally electronic with a hard-copy backup). The IIR facility reports the information to the IRIC, who disseminates it as appropriate. The strength report (DA Form 2674-R) is the only information passed up the I/R facility’s chain of command. Information also flows to the ICRC, the state department, and other federal agencies as required. Questionsregarding the information or internee flow in the TO are directed to the IRIC.
CONTROL AND DISCIPLINE
5-35. Treat all CISfairly. Ensure that directions are reasonable, capable of being obeyed, and given in an understood language. Promptly report refusals and failures to obey facility rules through the chain of command.
CONTROL
5-36. The MP maintain control of CISand efficiently administer internment facilities. This includes reducing waste and avoiding duplication of effort. Facility personnel quickly and fairly establish and maintain discipline. For example, they­
*     Observe rigorous self-discipline. Maintain a professional, impersonal attitude. Follow the guidelines established in the ROI and the ROE. Cope with hostile or unruly behavior or incidents calmly. Take fair, immediate, and decisive action.
5-37. Guards take positive action to establish daily and periodic routines and responses that are conducive to good discipline and control. They­
*     Enforce policies and procedures. Give reasonable, decisive orders in a language that CISunderstand. Post copies of the Geneva and UN Conventions in a language that CIS
understand and ensure that copies are easily accessed. The internee committee provides copies to CISwho do not have access to posted copies.
Post rules, regulations, instructions, notices, orders, and announcements that CIS are expected to obey. They ensure that the
5-10 Civilian Internees
information is easily accessed and is in a language that CIS
understand. The internee committee provides copies to CISwho do not
have access to posted copies.

Ensure that CISobey orders, rules, and directives.
Report refusals and failures to obey orders and regulations.

NOTE:Per AR 190-8, single CI females are directly supervised or guarded by female personnel. A parent with children, if single or interned without a spouse, is provided quarters that are separate from those for single persons.
5-38. The CIScan be searched for security purposes, but only same-gender searches are allowed. A strip search can be conducted to recover contraband and to report injuries and signs of drug use.
5-39. To protect CISfrom violence, bodily injury, and threats of reprisal at the hand of fellow internees, post a notice of protection (Figure 5-1) in every compound. Ensure that the notice is posted in a language that internees understand.
NOTICE
An internee (regardlessof faith or political belief) who fears that his life is in danger or that he may suffer physical injury at the hands of another internee,should immediately report the fact to a US Army officer of this facility without consulting the internee committee. The facility commander provides adequate protection to the internee (such as segregationor transfer).An internee who mistreats a fellow internee will be punished.
(Signedby the Commanding Officer)
Figure 5-1. Sample Notice of Protection
DISCIPLINE
5-40. Maintain and enforce discipline and security, and deal with offensive acts promptly. Maintain a record of disciplinary actions, which may be inspected by protecting powers. The internee committee does not have disciplinary power over and cannot administer punishment to fellow internees. The following actions are not permitted between CIS and US military or civilian personnel:
Fraternization.
Donation or receipt of gifts.
Engagement in commercial activity.
5-41. The facility commander is authorized to order disciplinary punishment
for a CI under the provisions of AR 190-8 and the Geneva Conventions.Before
imposing disciplinarypunishment, provide an interpreter if necessary and-
Provide the CI with precise information regarding the offense.
Give the CI an opportunity to defend the allegation.
Permit the CI to call witnesses.

5-42. The following disciplinary actions are authorized:
Civilian Internees 5-11
Discontinuance of privileges that are beyond those granted by AR
190-8 and the Geneva Conventions.

Confinement.
A he (not to exceed one-half of the wages received during a 30-day
period).
Extfa fatigue duty to maintain the internment facility (not to exceed 2
hours per day).

5-43. The duration of a single disciplinary punishment will not exceed 30 consecutive days-even if the CI is answerable for several breaches of discipline (related or not) at the time punishment is imposed. The period lapsing between pronouncing the disciplinary punishment and completing its
,execution w’ill not exceed 30 days. After a disciplinary action has been executed, another disciplinary action cannot be imposed on the same CI until 3 days has lapsed between the execution of any two punishments, if the duration of one of the two punishments is 10 days or more.
5-44. A CI accused of an offense for which disciplinary punishment is contemplated will not be confined unless it is essential to facility order and discipline. If a CI does spend time in confinement awaiting a hearing, it will not exceed 14days and it will be deducted from his sentence.
5-45. A CI who is subject to confinement serves the time in a facility stockade. Females and males are confined in separate quarters, and females are supervised by females. While undergoing confinement for pretrial, for posttrial, or in connection with disciplinary or judicial proceedings, a CI is­
* Allowed to exercise and stay in the open air at least 2 hours a day.
Allowed to attend daily sick call, receive medical attention and, if
necessary, be transferred to a hospital.
Given enough food to maintain health.
Permitted to confer with visiting representatives of the protecting

powers and the ICRC.
Permitted to receive spiritual assistance.
Treated with proper regard.
Provided hygienic living conditions.
Provided adequate bedding, supplies, and facilities necessary for

personal cleanliness.
Allowed to send and receive letters, cards, and telegrams. (Parcels and
remittance of money can be withheld from a CI until his punishment

is complete.)
INTERNEE COMMITTEE
5-46. One of the best ways to ensure cooperation within a facility is to establish a form of self-government. This minimizes the impression that CIS are prisoners under the control of a foreign government and allows them to feel a sense of control over their lives. The internee committee represents the local CI population to the detaining power, protecting powers, the ICRC, and
5-12 Civilian Internees
other authorized relief and aid organizations. The committee’s communications with these organizations are unlimited.
5-47. The internee committee has two or three elected members, and each member can have an assistant who acts as an interpreter. The facility commander approves each elected member and assistant. Members are elected by secret ballot every 6 months, and they can be elected to more than one term. When the commander disapproves an election, it is submitted in writing and states the reason for disapproval. He forwards the disapproval through channels to the IRIC, who forwards it to the national IRIC and protecting powers.
5-48. Duties of a internee committee include­
* Furthering spiritual, physical, and intellectual well-being.
Being responsible for and having jurisdiction over mutual assistance
organizations set up by CIS.
Visiting outside labor details.
Checking the management of the canteen and the canteen fund.
Presenting and transmitting petitions and complaints to appropriate
authorities.
Distributing and disposing of collective relief shipments.
Receivingbriefings about ongoing and final judicial proceedings.

CORRESPONDENCE
5-49. The correspondence system for CISparallels that for EPWs (Chapter 4). The exceptions are that DA Form 2679-R is used for letters and DA Form 2680-R is used for postcards.
COMPLAINTS AND REQUESTS
5-50. A CI can make a complaint or a request to the facility commander, who tries to resolve the issue. If the CI is not satisfied with the resolution, he may address it to HQDA. A CI can make a complaint by mail, in person to a visiting representative of protecting powers, or through the internee committee.
MEDICAL TREATMENT
5-51. Provide personnel, material, and facilities for routine and emergency medical treatment. Ideally, transfer patients requiring inpatient care to a civilian hospital. If a civilian hospital is unavailable or if its use is infeasible due to security considerations, transfer patients to a US military hospital. Ensure that the treatment they receive is as good as that provided for the general population, and provide guards as necessary.
SANITATION
5-52. Proper sanitation and cleanliness of a facility prevents the spread of disease among the CI population and the US forces guarding them. The facility commander-
Civilian Internees 5-13
Conducts periodic, detailed sanitary inspections.
Publishes a detailed sanitary order in a language that CISunderstand and posts it in each compound. Provides sanitary supplies, services, and facilities necessary for
personal cleanliness and sanitation. Ensures that­. Hygiene and sanitation measures conform to AR 40-5 and related
regulations. . Latrines are available 24 hours a day. . Separate showers and latrines are available for males and
females. . Adequate space is allocated to prevent overcrowding within housing units, while maintaining proper segregation and family integrity. . Good food sanitation and personal hygiene is observed by food
service personnel. . Waste is disposed of properly. . Sufficient potable water is available for drinking, bathing, doing
laundry, and preparing food. . Materials are available for personal hygiene, including products for female hygiene and infant care.
TRANSFER
5-53. The CISmay be transferred, subject to the following conditions: They cannot be transferred outside the borders of the occupied country
where they are interned, except when material reasons prevent displacement. They will be transferred if they are exposed to greater risk by
remaining at the facility if the CZ moves closer to the location. Sick, wounded, infirmed, or maternity cases are not transferred if the transfer would be detrimental to their health.
5-54. The facility commander­
* Informs CIS of their impending transfer and new postal address so
that they have enough time to pack and notify NOK.
Verifies the accuracy and completeness of personnel records and
provides records (in a sealed envelope)to escort guards.

Verifies that CIShave authorized clothing and equipment.

Prepares impounded personal effects and property for forwardingwith
escort guards or by separate shipment as appropriate.
Instructs escort guards on their duties and responsibilities, including

procedures to be followed in case of an attack, an escape, a death, or

another emergency.
Provides or arranges for rations, transportation, and notifications
according to prescribed procedures.

Ensures that CIS are manifested by name, ISN or ID number, nationality, and physical condition.
5-14 Civilian Internees
Notifies the IRIC and the national IRIC of CI transfers immediately.
5-55. The transfer of personal effects and property parallels that of EPWs (Chapter 4), except­
*     Belongings that exceed the 55-pound limit are shipped separately. Parcels and mail are forwarded to the new facility. Items donated by welfare agencies and items used in religious services
are forwarded as community property.
RELEASE
5-56. A CI can be released to a representative of his country of residence or a designated protecting power if control and accountability are maintained. He can be released after hostilities cease (subject to pending judicial proceedings) if the reasons for his internment no longer exist as determined by the TO commander. A CI who is eligible for release but has judicial proceedings pending for offenses not exclusively subject to disciplinary punishment is detained until the close of proceedings. The TO commander may decide that a CI must serve his penalty before being released, and a CI already serving a penalty may be similarly detained. Rosters of detained CIS are forwarded to the IRIC and the national IRIC for transmittal to protecting powers.
SOCIAL PROGRAMS
5-57. The commander coordinates social programs. He provides premises and facilities for these activities and procures needed materials and supplies through normal supply channels. The CIS are encouraged to participate, but they are not required to do so.
5-58. Carefully selected and qualified civilian nationals and CIS (supervised by US military personnel) can be used to guide social activities. The selected individuals will not introduce political overtones or further enemy propaganda objectives while conducting these activities.
EDUCATION
5-59. Encourage and support an active, intellectual education program for CIS. Coordinate adequate facilities and instruction material through local agencies. Consider the following when developing an education program:
Levels of education throughout the CI population.
Basic courses of education, including­
.     Reading.
.     Writing.
Geography.
.     Mathematics.
.     Language.
.     Literature.
.     History.
.     Music.
.     Art.
Civilian Internees 5-15
The education of dependents who reside with their CI parents.
Vocational training to develop skills that may be useful during
internment.
RELIGION
5-60. Allow CIS the freedom of worship, including attendance at services of their faith held within the internment facility. Permit chaplains and other clergy to minister freely to those who request their help. The facility commander may permit ordained clergy or theological students to conduct services.
VISITS
5-61. Permit close relatives and other persons authorized by the TO commander to visit CISaccording to TO regulations. All visitors are subject to security precautions. Under emergency conditions and subject to the TO commander’s policy, a CI may visit a close relative who is seriously or terminally ill and may attend the funeral of a close relative.
5-62. Allow accredited representatives of protecting powers and the ICRC full access to the internment facility and the internees. Per DA policies and procedures, permit visits of approved religious organizations, relief societies, NGOs, 10s IHOs, and other organizations who assist housed personnel. Organizations who want access to internees should coordinate visits in advance to avoid confusion upon arrival at the facility. The facility staff establishes an access roster of representatives and develops a method to verify their identity.
RECREATION
5-63. Encourage and support active participation in recreation activities to promote general health and welfare and to alleviate tension and boredom. In addition, provide athletic contests and group entertainment (concerts, plays, music, and motion pictures). Provide playgrounds for dependent children of CIS.
AGRICULTURE
5-64. When practical, CISshould raise vegetables to supplement their diet. Do not overlook the importance of developing an agriculture program. Gardening projects are particularly desirable because they provide gainful employment for large numbers of individuals. The food produced is used for the benefit of the CI population, and it provides a valuable supplement to diets at minimal expense.
5-65. Procure the types and quantities of agriculture supplies required (seeds,
fertilizers, and implements) through local purchase. Ensure that the supplies
are procured in a timely manner.
EMPLOYMENT

5-66. The TO commander may issue instructions governing the employment and compensation of CIS for labor. The CIS can be employed to construct,
5-16 Civilian Internees
administer, manage, and maintain the facility; and they are compensated according to DFAS-IN 37-1. The CIS are required to work if the labor is consistent with their age and physical condition. Their fitness for work is determined in the same manner as EPWs (Chapter 4). The CIS cannot be compelled to work if they are under the age of 18. They can be compelled to perform the following types of work and may volunteer to perform other types of work:
Administrative, maintenance, and domestic work within the

compound.
Duties relative to protecting CIS against aerial attack or other war
risks.

Medical duties if they are professionally and technically qualified.

SECURITY
5-67. The facility commander is responsible for security measures that effectively control CIS with minimal use of force. The physical construction of the facility and the presence of guard personnel (Chapter 2) constitute the most obvious means of providing security. Maintaining a high state of discipline, a system of routines, and required standards of behavior enhance effective security and control.
5-68. Most CIS actively cooperate with US internment facility authorities or assume a passive, compliant role. Cooperative CIS are composed, in part, of individuals with ideologiesfavorable to the US. Others, through resignation or apathy, will simply adapt themselves to the conditions of their internment.
5-69. Some CISwill engage in a campaign of embarrassing and harassing US personnel to create propaganda of value to their cause that would have negative ramifications on the US. The leaders of the uncooperative faction may try to establish a united effort and blind obedience by all its members. Any relaxation of security is immediately detected and fully exploited.
ADVERSE ACTIONS
5-70. Dissident actions by CIS vary from acts of harassment to acts of violence. Such actions may include­
*     Sabotaging equipment or facilities. Assaulting other CISor custodial personnel. Taking hostages to secure concessions. Intimidating other CIS. Fabricating weapons or other illegal items. Creating embarrassing situations or making false accusations to
influence international inspection teams or members of protecting
powers.
Instigating disturbances or riots to place the facility staff in
unfavorable positions (this allows CIS to gain concessions and
influence custodial policies).

Civilian Internees 5-17
5-71. Paramilitary forces may­
* Establish communications with internees by using agents, smuggled
radios, or foreign-languagenewspapers.
Order members of its armed forces to infiltrate the facility and become
agitators. ,

PLANNING
5-72. Ensure that security planning is continuous and complete and that it reflects current intelligence information on CIS. Implement an immediate-response plan that is capable of meeting all internal and external threats to security. Security planning for a CI compound is similar to that for an EPW compound (Chapter 4). (See Chapter 2 for more information on security planning.)
RULES OF ENGAGEMENT
5-73. The CINC establishes the ROE in coordination with the SJA and the
joint staff. Special ROE can be developed for use in I/R facilities, but they
must have CINC approval.
MILITARY WORKING DOGS
5-74. The MWDs enhance the security and safety of an I/R facility. They can be used for patrolling and detecting explosives and narcotics. (See Chapter 2 and AR 190-12for more information.)
DISTURBANCES
5-75. Disturbances within the compound may range from riots to less violent disorders, and they can be organized or unorganized. (See Chapter 3 and Appendix B for more information.)
FACILITY lMGRKINGS
5-76. When military considerationspermit, mark CI facilities with the letters “CI.” Place the letters so that they are clearly visible in the daytime from the air.
5-18 Civilian Internees
Chapter 6
InternmentIResettlementFacilities
The TO commander is responsible for EPWICI operations, and he provides engineer and logistical support for the MP commander to establish and maintain I/R facilities. Facility construction is included in the planning phase of an operation, and MP leaders take part in the planning process. Planning, coordinating, and establishing facilities begins during the build-up phase of an operation. Each facility provides appropriate segregation, accountability, security, and support of internees. An IIR facility is semipermanent in nature and normally consists of one to eight compounds, each capable of interning 500 people. (Appendix D provides a synopsis of the various MP l;/R units that may be assigned to a TO.)
PLANNING
6-1. Planning for the construction of I/R facilities must be projected into the future. This provides timely notification of engineers, selection and development of facility sites, and procurement of construction materials.
LOCATION
6-2. The MP coordinate the location with engineers, logistical units, higher headquarters, and the HN. The failure to properly consider and correctly evaluate all factors may increase the logistical and personnel efforts required to support operations. If an IIR facility is improperly located, the entire internee population may require movement when resources are scarce. When selectinga site for an facility, consider the following:
Will the interned population pose a serious threat to logistical

operationsif the tactical situation becomes critical?

Is there a threat of guerrilla activity in the area?

What is the attitude of the local population?

What classificationof internees will be housed at the site?
What type of terrain surrounds the site, and will it help or hinder
escapes?

What is the distance from the MSR to the source of logistical support?
What transportation methods are required and available to move
internees, supplies, and equipment?

6-3. In addition, consider the­
*     METT-TC. Proximity to probable target areas. Availability of suitable existing facilities (avoids unnecessary
construction).
InternrnentlResettlement Facilities 6-1
Presence of swamps, mosquitoes, and other factors (including water
drainage) that affect human health.
Existence of an adequate, satisfactory source of potable water. The
supply should meet the demands for consumption, food sanitation,
personal hygiene, and sewage disposal.
Availability of electricity. Portable generators can be used as standby
and emergency sources of electricity.
Distance to work if internees are employed outside the facility.
Availability of construction material.
Soil drainage.
CONSTRUCTION

6-4. The type of construction necessary depends on the­
*     Climate. Anticipated permanency of the facility. Number of facilities to be established. Availability of labor and materials. Conditions under which the detaining power billets its forces in the
same area.
6-5. Use local, vacant buildings to reduce the requirements for engineer construction materials and personnel. Use internees and local sources of materials to modify and construct structures. In the absence of existing structures, tents are the most practical means for housing internees.
6-6. The Engineer Corps’ Theater Construction Management System (TCMS) contains basic plans, specifications, and material requirements for IIR facilities based on the anticipated internee population. The plans can be easily modified for temperate, frigid, tropic, and desert climates. The TCMS also provides specifications and material requirements for the facilities when dimension andlor population requirements are supplied.
SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
6-7. Separate the compounds from each other to prevent communication between internees. Take advantage of irregular terrain features as obstacles to communication. Locating compounds in close proximity increases efficiency and security; however, distances of a mile may be required between compounds on level terrain. Minimal security requirements include­
*     Clear zones. A 12-foot clear zone surrounds each facility housing EPWs or CIS. The clear zone is free of vegetation and shrubbery between the inside and outside perimeter fences, and it is constructed around the circumference of the facility.
Guard towers. Locate guard towers on the perimeter of each facility. Place them immediately outside the wall or, in case of double fencing, where they permit an unobstructed view of the lane between the fences. The space between towers must allow overlapping observation and fields of fire. During adverse weather, it may be necessary to augment security by placing fixed guard posts between towers on the
6-2     InternmentIResettlementFacilities
outside of the fence. Ensure that towers are high enough to permit an
unobstructed view of the compound and low enough to permit an
adequate field of fire. Tower platforms should have retractable ladders
and be wide enough to mount crew-servedweapons.

Lights. Provide adequate lighting, especially around compound
perimeters. Illuminating walls and fences discourages escapes, and
illuminating inner strategic points expedites the handling of problems
caused by internees. Protect lights from breakage with an
unbreakable-glass shield or a wire mesh screen. Ensure that lights on
walls and fences do not interfere with guards’ vision. Provide
secondary emergency lighting.

Patrol roads. Construct patrol roads for vehicle and foot patrols.

They should be adjacent to outside perimeter fences or walls.
Sally ports. A sally port (a series of gates) is required to search
vehicles and personnel entering or leaving the main compound.
Consider placing a sally port at the back entrance to the facility.

Communications.Ensure that communication between towers and
operation headquarters is reliable. Telephones are the preferred
method; however, ensure that alternate forms of communication(radio
and visual or sound signals) are available in case telephones are
inoperable.

6-8. The facility layout depends on the nature of the operation, the terrain, building materials, and HN support. A standard 4,000-man IIR facility consists of eight 500-man compounds. A sample 500-man compound is shown in Figure 6-1, page 6-4. Each compound has-
Barracks (may be general purpose [GPI medium tents in the early

stages of an operation).
Kitchen facilities (may include providing internees with culinary
equipment and provisions or using military cooks).

Bath houses.
Latrines.
A recreation area.

6-9. The administrative area of each facility has-A command post. An administrative building. Religious and educational buildings. A dispensary and an infirmary to treat minor illnesses and injuries. A supply building for storage and issue of expendable supplies. Latrines. Parking areas. Trash collection points. Potable-waterpoints. Storage areas (open and covered). Generator and fuel areas.
InternmentlResettlement Facilities 6-3
Exercise area
MP unit
Figure 6-1. Sample 500-Man Enclosure With One Compound
6-4 Internment/Resettlement Facilities
RECEIVING AND PROCESSING CENTERS
6-10. Captives must be fully processed before being interned, evacuated, or repatriated. The size of a processing center depends on the anticipated number of internees. It may be set up near overseas terminals, international transfer points, and medical facilities. There is no set design for a processing center (Figure 6-2), and a processing center may also have minimal internment capabilities (Figure 6-3, page 6-6).
@ Waterllister bag aCtrine shield Re~eivinglprocessingstation
Figure 6-2. Sample Processing Center (Theater)
6-11. When establishing a processing center, coordinate with engineers for construction. If structures are available, use them; otherwise, use tents. Ensure that shelter, water, and latrines are available and that the processing center is equal in quality to facilities used by US forces. Arrange the processing center so that internees are not aware of what is taking place in the next station.
6-12. The prescribed standards of treatment and care place a great demand on the logistical system. When possible, use captured supplies and equipment and ensure that internees wear captured clothing. Properly secure and account for all supplies and equipment to avoid exploitation by internees.
SUBSISTENCE
6-13. Ensure that daily food rations are sufficient in quantity, quality, and variety to maintain good health and prevent weight loss and nutritional
Internrnent/ResettlernentFacilities 6-5
Enlisted Enlisted
DD

EPWholding area for new arrivals
other obsurant)
Figure6-3. Sample Processing Center with Internment Capability
deficiencies. Medical personnel apprise the commander of situational needs and the nutritional health of the internee population. Provide working internees with additional rations when required. Ensure that internees have sufficient drinking water and latrine facilities. Sustain the health of internees at a level that is equal to that of guarding US forces.
6-14. If dining facilities are unavailable, feed internees MREs. They can be stored easily and require no additional dietary supplements. If fresh fruits and vegetables are available, substitute them for nonperishable items. Consider the habitual diet of internees, and allow them to prepare their own meals under the supervision of US personnel (see AR 190-8).Ensure that internees do not stockpile rations to use for escapes.
6-15. Food service equipment requirements vary depending on internees’ habitual diets and customs. The commander may authorize local procurement of cooking equipment instead of requiring internees to use standard-issue kitchen equipment. One food operations sergeant and one first cook will be assigned to each 19547AB MP detachment (IIR) (EPWICI). Food service personnel train and supervise selected internees to perform food service operations.
6-6 InternmentIResettlement Facilities
CHAPEL FACILITIES
6-16. Provide chapels and religious materials in I/R facilities.Allow internees to make chapel fixtures from available material or, if necessary, obtain material through supply channels.
RECREATIONEQUIPMENT
6-17. Obtain recreation equipment through supply channels if possible. If necessary, secure equipment through local purchase.
CLEANING SUPPLIES
6-18. Each I/R facility requires housekeeping supplies. The types and quantities required vary depending on the environment, the housing, and the food service facility. Common Table of Allowance (CTA) 50-970 contains an extensive list of housekeeping supplies. Use it as a guide to develop allowances for janitorial and cleaning supplies. Ensure that there is plenty of potable water available in each compound.
MEDICAL AND SANITATION CONSIDERATIONS
6-19. Ensure that medical treatment is available for all internees. Each I/R facility has an infirmary where internees with contagious diseases, mental conditions, or other illnesses can be isolated from other patients. Internees have 24-hour access to latrines, which are clean and conform to the rules of hygiene. Provide separate latrines for male and female internees. Provide internees with facilities, soap, and water for their personal needs and laundry. Consider the following sanitation standards to prevent disease and ensure cleanliness of the facility:
Distributing information to internees (in their language) on the
importance of proper hygiene, sanitation, and food sanitation.
Teaching food sanitation procedures and ensuring that they are
observed and practiced.
Disposing of human waste properly to protect the health of everyone
associated with the facility according to the guidelines established by
PVNTMED.
Providing-Adequate space to prevent overcrowding.
. Sufficient showers and latrines and ensuring that they are cleaned and sanitized daily. Enough potable water for drinking, bathing, doing laundry, and
conductingfood service operations.
Personal-hygiene materials.
InternmentIResettlement Facilities 6-7
PART THREE
United States Military Prisoners
The US military prisoner operations are conducted under the umbrella of the Army Corrections System (ACS). The ACS is an integral part of the military justice system, which provides incarceration and correctional services for US military personnel. The ACS provides custody and control of military offenders, while providing access to basic education, offense-related counseling, selected academic courses, and training necessary for return to military duty or the civilian community. Specific use-of-force guidelines and the ROI apply to US military prisoner operations. On the battlefield, US military prisoner operations parallel the internment and evacuation systems for EPWs, Cls, RPs, ODs, and DCs. However, US military prisoners are not treated as or confined with them.
Chapter 7 contains information on the ACS and provides the foundation and guidance for conducting US military prisoner operations during wartime. Chapter 8 discusses the short-term confinement of US military prisoners abroad during wartime, the field detention facility (FDF), and the field confinement facility (FCF).
Chapter 7
Army Corrections System
The ACS provides confinement and correctional treatment for US military prisoners. It operates on a corrective basis, rather than a punitive basis, and its goal is to help prisoners become responsible, productive citizens. The ACS facilities are staffed with carefully selected, well-trained, professional personnel. Prisoners have access to programs that provide education and rehabilitation. The staff and the programs are dedicated to helping prisoners recognize and resolve their problems, correct their behavior, and improve their attitudes.
LEVELS OF CONFINEMENT
7-1. The Army maintains a three-tiered correctional system to meet the needs of prisoners. Although the mission at all levels is to confine and provide correctional treatment, the mission emphasis differs at each level. These differences are based on the length of time prisoners are confined and the facilities and services required by the confinement.
Army Corrections System 7-1
LEVEL I-CONFINEMENT FACILITIES
7-2. Confinement facilities provide­
*     Pretrial confinement. Short-term posttrial confinement (normally 90 days or less). Custody. Control. Administrative support. Limited counseling.
7-3. Installations without ACS facilities can contract to incarcerate pretrial prisoners in federally approved civilian jails. Agreements must provide for segregation of prisoners by rank (officer,NCO, and enlisted), sex, and posttrial status. Forward copies of agreements with civilian jurisdictions to HQDA (DAMO-ODL-C). A sentenced prisoner who is pending transfer to an ACS facility cannot be confined in a civilian jail for more than 10 days. However, an installation commander can notify HQDA (DAML-ODL-C) and authorize exceptions for prisoners sentenced to 30 days or less.
LEVEL 11-REGIONAL CORRECTIONSFACILITIES
7-4. Regional corrections facilities (RCFs)provide­
*     Pretrial confinement support. Multifaceted correctional-treatment programs. Vocational and military training to prepare prisoners for return to
duty or, if determined suitable, return to civilian society.
Administrative support.
Basic educational opportunities.
Employment.
Selected mental-health programs.
Custody.
Control.

LEVEL 111-UNITED STATES DISCIPLINARY BARRACKS
7-5. The United States Disciplinary Barracks (USDB)is a maximum-custody facility that provides long-term incarceration for prisoners. It is the only ACS facility authorized to permanently incarcerate posttrial prisoners who are sentenced to death.
7-6. Although federal civilian penal institutions are not a part of the ACS, they may be used to confine prisoners. The Federal Bureau of Prisons administers and operates the federal penal system. Military prisoners whose disciplinary and adjustment records indicate a need for treatment that is available in a federal penal institution may be transferred to that system. Those scheduled for incarceration in a federal institution are first confined at the USDB and then transferred to the federal institution. (See AR 190-47for more information.)
7-2     Army Corrections System
CORRECTIONALFACILITIES
7-7. Based on operational requirements and programs, HQDA (DAMO-ODL-C) determines where prisoners are incarcerated if they are sentenced to more than 30 days. The RCF provides short-and medium-term confinements, and the USDB provides long-term confinement.
7-8. The facility commander is responsible for the administration and operation of specialized correctional programs. The programs provide the professional evaluation, counseling, education, and administration needed to prepare prisoners for return to military or civilian life. Chapter 8 discusses procedures and guidelines for establishing FDFs and FCFs.
LEGAL RIGHTS AND REQUIREMENTS
7-9. The UCMJ and local and service regulations govern the restraint and confinement of military personnel. The ACS provides legal, humane, and just treatment of prisoners throughout the confinement process, from pretrial confinement to sentence expiration.
PRISONERS’ RIGHTS
7-10. Soldiers do not automatically forfeit all of their rights upon confinement. Prisoners retain most of the rights guaranteed by the US Constitution, although perhaps to a lesser degree. The most important constitutional rights for prisoners are:
First Amendment (freedom of speech and religion).
Fourth Amendment (freedom against unreasonable search and
seizure).
Fifth Amendment (right against self-incrimination [Miranda Rights]).
Sixth Amendment (right to counsel).
Eighth Amendment (prohibition of cruel and unusual punishment).

CONFINEMENTREQUIREMENTS
7-11. Prisoners in pretrial confinement are informed of the charges causing their confinement. Within 48 hours of their confinement (via their chain of command), a US magistrate reviews the circumstances of the confinement and determines whether continued pretrial confinement is necessary.
7-12. Individuals are accepted for confinement only on receipt of a court-martial order, a report of the trial results, or a confinement order. The convening authority ordering the execution of the sentence must issue the court-martial order. If a commissioned or warrant officer is placed in pretrial confinement, the confinement order originates with his commander. The confinement order is read to the soldier by a commissioned officer. An enlisted soldier may be pretrial confined by order of his commanding officer or any commissioned officer who has personal knowledge of the offense or has made inquiry into it.
7-13. Specific procedures for pretrial confinement are contained in local SOPS
and local supplements to AR 27-10. A new confinement order is not needed to
reconfine a soldier who is convicted at trial by court-martial following pretrial
Army Corrections System 7-3
confinement. A commander or the trial counsel, if such authority is delegated to him, can order the soldier into posttrial confinement with a report of the trial results.
PRISONER STATUS
7-14. A prisoner or a pretrial detainee is informed of his status upon arrival at a confinement facility. His status is necessary in response to judicial proceedings and other actions. The following statuses pertain to US military prisoners:
Casual.A casual prisoner is confined awaiting-Further instructions from another command or military service. Transfer to another facility. Return to his unit.
Detained. A detained prisoner (pretrial detainee) is an enlisted service member who is confined awaiting-Charges to be filed. The disposition of charges. A trial by court-martial.
A trial by a foreign court. Adjudged. An adjudged prisoner has been sentenced in open court, but the convening authority has not approved the sentence.
Approved-adjudged.An approved-adjudged prisoner’s sentence has been approved and adjudged, but it has not been ordered into execution. Sentenced.A sentenced prisoner is serving a sentence that has been ordered into execution. Officer. An officer prisoner or an officer pretrial detainee is a commissioned or warrant officer on active duty who has been placed in confinement, but his sentence has not been ordered into execution.
SEGREGATION
7-15. Segregate prisoners as follows: Pretrial detainee. A pretrial detainee is not treated the same as a posttrial prisoner whose status is adjudged, approved-adjudged, or sentenced. He has not been proven guilty of an offense. His confinement is not a punishment, but it ensures his presence for trial
and prevents further misconduct. If possible, segregate his living and working areas from all other prisoners. Officer.An officer prisoner whose sentence has not been ordered into
execution is entitled to certain rights and privileges. These privileges end when an officer’s sentence begins and his status changes from an officer prisoner to a sentenced prisoner. House a posttrial officer prisoner in the general prisoner population.
Female.A female prisoner or a female pretrial detainee is confined in a facility that is approved for housing women. If an on-post facility is unavailable, coordinate confinement with local officials who have a federally approved detention facility for women. A civilian facility may
7-4 Army Corrections System
only be used for pretrial or short-term, posttrial confinement. Segregate female prisoners from male prisoners except when they are participating in supervised classes, vocational education, or group counseling. Female correctional personnel supervise and control female prisoners in administration or disciplinary segregation. If two female guards are unavailable, use precautions when escorting a female prisoner. For example, use two male guards or one male guard and one female guard. Female prisoners are incarcerated in ACS facilities when directed by HQDA (DAMO-ODL-C).
CUSTODY AND CONTROL
7-16. Custody and control are basic functions for every confinement or correctional facility. Facility personnel achieve and maintain custody and control by subjecting prisoners to a structured schedule of calls 24 hours a day.
CUSTODYMEASURES
7-17. Custody is restricting a prisoner’s freedom of movement by placing physical barriers on or around him. It is maintained within a facility by the presence of guards, walls, fences, protective lighting, alarms, and locking devices. Outside a facility, custody is maintained by the presence of supervisors and guards. Prisoners designated as trustees are afforded custody and control by the conditions placed on their parole agreement.
CUSTODY GRADES
7-18. Each prisoner is assigned a custody grade (trustee, minimum, medium, or maximum) that designates the degree of supervision required to control his movements. The facility commander assigns custody grades to prisoners based on signs of emotional disturbance and instability, history of escape, drug addiction, violence, and access to sensitive material.
7-19. Custody grades are assigned based on the minimum level of control necessary. A custody grade can be changed at any time, and reclassification is based on continual observation and evaluation of the prisoner. Each prisoner is promptly advised of his custody grade.
7-20. For example, each incoming RCF prisoner is assigned a maximum custody grade for the first 72 hours of confinement. During that time, the correctional staff observes and evaluates the prisoner’s behavior. At the end of the evaluation period, the staff reviews the prisoner’s behavior and assigns the appropriate custody grade.
ADMINISTRATIVE SEGREGATION
7-21. Sometimes, prisoners must be separated from the larger population for more intense custodial supervision. Facility commanders may authorize the segregation of prisoners individually or by groups. Administrative segregation is imposed for the benefit of the segregated prisonerts) or the prisoner population. Prisoners may be placed in administrative segregation while awaiting the results of an investigation or for protective measures, medical reasons, or homosexual behavior.
Army Corrections System 7-5
7-22. Segregated prisoners requiring increased supervision are placed in close confinement and are escorted when they leave their cells. Privileges for administratively segregated prisoners are the same as those of prisoners not in close confinement. However, exceptions to this requirement are suicidal and disciplinary segregated prisoners (see the facility SOP for details).
7-23. Prisoners placed in administrative segregation can be kept in close confinement 24 hours a day or only at night. They must receive at least 60 minutes of exercise daily and can be employed if the work is consistent with the pui-pose of the segregation. A qualified mental-health professional interviews and prepares a written report on each inmate who is segregated more than 30days.
CONTROL MEASURES
7-24. Control is placing limitations on a prisoner’s actions and behaviors. It is invoked by the correctional staff’s insistence on a state of order and military discipline among the prisoners. Control is sustained by a consistent routine in daily lives. For example, prisoners are routinely required to provide a daily display of their clothing, equipment, and health and comfort supplies. Control is reflected in the disciplined appearance, bearing, and conduct of the prisoners and by their prompt obedience to rules, regulations, and orders.
DISCIPLINARYMEASURES
7-25. Disciplinary measures are imposed on prisoners to correct deviant behavior and to protect other prisoners, the staff, and government property. Abusive measures are not imposed in the ACS. Prisoners are medically cleared before being placed in disciplinary segregation, which may not exceed 60consecutive days. Prisoners undergoing disciplinary measures are not employed, except to clean their own quarters. They must receive at least 30 minutes of exercise each day if their behavior is manageable. Hand and leg irons or other restraining devices are used during movement outside the cell. Guards inspect prisoners in close confinement according to the facility SOP.
7-26. The imposition of disciplinary measures often begins with an objective disciplinary report. The report presents a detailed summary that addresses the who, what, when, where, why, and how of an incident. The facility commander has several options when he receives a disciplinary report. He may reduce the report to a memorandum of record, refer the prisoner for counseling, refer the case to a discipline and adjustment board, or recommend action under the UCMJ.
PROHIBITED PUNITIVE MEASURES
7-27. The following punitive measures are prohibited: Clipping a prisoner’s hair excessively close. Ordering the lockstep. Requiring silence at meals. Requiring a prisoner to break rocks.
7-6 Army Corrections System
Using hand or leg irons, restraining straps or jackets, or shackles as punishment. (The FCF SOP gives authority for the use of these devices and specifies the circumstanceswarranting their use.)
Removing a prisoner’s underclothing or clothing or using other
debasing practices.
Flogging, branding, tattooing, or using any other cruel or unusual
punishment.
Requiring domicile in a tent as punishment.
Ordering strenuous physical activity or body positions designed to place undue stress on a prisoner. Using hand or leg irons or belly chains that give the appearance of a
chain gang.
EMERGENCIES
7-28. Confinement facilities provide custody and control of prisoners during emergencies (fires, escape attempts, and other disturbances). Develop a formal emergency action plan and periodically review it to ensure that it is complete and current. Properly training custodial personnel and reviewing facilities and restraints can prevent or greatly reduce the possibility of escapes. Escapes result in emergency actions being executed and guards and prisoners taking immediate action accordingto the facility SOP.
7-29. Disturbances among prisoners may be a minor disorder, a major disorder, or a full-scale riot. Disorders and riots may be spontaneous disturbances or organized diversions for escape attempts. How a facility staff handles a minor disorder determines whether it is brought under control or escalates to major proportions. Disperse prisoners who are involved in a disturbance so that they cannot organize as a cohesive group. Once dispersed, prevent participants from rejoining the disturbance. Identify, isolate, and remove ringleaders from the disturbance as soon as possible.
MOVEMENT
7-30. Prisoners have the best opportunity for escape while being moved from one place to another (outside the facility). Established and stringent custody and control measures reduce the likelihood of escapes. Procedures and techniques for moving prisoners can be modified as needed by the facility commander or the commander directing the movement.
7-31. When a prisoner is in pretrial confinement, his unit is responsible for escorting him to the confinement facility unless custody and control become integrity issues. The unit coordinates with the RCF for a briefing on custody and control procedures, future escort requirements, and the use of force.
7-32. Frisk each prisoner before he leaves the facility. Complete a DD Form 2708 (hard copy or electronic) for each prisoner escorted out of the facility. Move prisoners by motor vehicle, rail, air, or foot (if the distance is short enough to justify it and when other means of transportation are unavailable) (see STP 19-95C14-SM-TG).
Army Corrections System 7-7
CORRECTIONAL-TREATMENTPROGRAMS

7-33. Correctional-treatment programs are based on and tailored to the custody, employment, education, and treatment needs of prisoners. Each prisoner and his treatment is professionally monitored. The goal of correctional-treatment programs is to return prisoners to civilian life as productive citizens or to the Army as productive soldiers.
7-34. Correctional-treatment programs provide a professional evaluation and study of each prisoner and his background. They provide for prisoners’ health and welfare, include constructive work that teaches work skills, and administer individual and group counseling and therapy.
7-35. Each program specifies the custody grade and disciplinaryrequirements needed to achieve goals. The goals can be achieved by receiving no disciplinary reports, being involved in an established correctional-treatment plan, or obtaining other program objectives.
EVALUATION
7-36. The facility commander, in conjunction with an evaluation board, determines a prisoner’s custody grade and treatment program by a two-phase system. The first phase is to identify the needs that require immediate intervention, and the second phase is an ongoing evaluation of the prisoner while he is in confinement.
7-37. The board uses the following tools to begin its initial evaluation: The guard’s observation report. The mental health’s evaluation. The chaplain’s evaluation. The medical officer’s evaluation. The prisoner’s personnel file.
7-38. The prisoner’s custody grade and treatment program may change as additional information becomes available during his incarceration. The following aspects are considered and closely monitored during his entire confinement period:
Employment.
Education.
Medical condition.
Religious participation.
Family and financial problems.
COUNSELING
7-39. Counseling is a process in which behavioral problems are observed and guidance is provided to induce productive, useful behavior. Counseling programs are based on the type, size, and mission of a confinement facility, its staffing abilities, and AR 190-47.At a minimum, counseling is available for problem solving and crisis intervention. The ACS regional facilities and the USDB provide the following:
Chemical abuse treatment.
7-8 Army Corrections System
Anger management.
Stress management.
Adjunct therapy (such as Alcoholics Anonymous [AAI and Narcotics
Anonymous [NAI1.
The impact of crimes on victims.
Other programs consistent with staffing, professional support, and
prisoner needs.
7-40. The RCFprimarily relies on counseling/treatment programs available to all soldiers. Installations unable to provide basic regional counseling services request a waiver from HQDA (DAMO-ODL).
7-41. The counseling program in a correctional facility has two goals:
Help prisoners set realistic goals and adjust to the confinement
environment.
Help prisoners gain problem-solving techniques and develop
acceptable behavior.
7-42. The facility commander can choose counselors from assigned cadre. When possible, he selects experienced, mature NCOs who do not have a corrections background. He ensures that counselors are oriented to the missions, objectives, and operational procedures of the facility before they begin their counseling duties. Counselors must understand and be able to apply certain principles and concepts of human behavior and social values. They-
Believe in the dignity and worth of an individual.
Recognize that individuals are different.
Understand that all behavior has meaning.
Understand that individuals are the result of their environment and
life experiences.
Understand that attitude and behavior are related.
Understand that there are always reasons or causes for changes in
behavior.
Believe that people have the capacity to change.
Believe that people have a right to participate in decisions affecting
their welfare.
Understand that judging individuals in terms of right and wrong is
not within their purview.
Are objective and unbiased.
Are alert for situations that exceed their capabilities and
responsibilities, and if necessary, refer the prisoner for specialized
counseling or problem solving.
7-43. St& members identify and report prisoners who are-
Escape-minded.
Dangerous.
Alcoholic.
Drug-addicted.
Sexually deviant.
Army Corrections System 7-9
Suicidal.
Emotionally disturbed (refer prisoners to mental health for
evaluation).
7-44. Continuity is essential to a successful counseling program. Ideally, a counselor is assigned to a prisoner and continuesto work with him throughout his confinement. The counselor makes contact with the prisoner within 48 hours of his inprocessing. The counselor completes necessary records Qournal and worksheet) and initiates a follow-up plan. He maintains a case file on each prisoner that contains a record of counseling sessions, a personal-data sheet, observation reports, or other correspondence.High prisoner morale and the lack of disciplinaryproblems reflect a successful counseling program. The final test is a prisoner’s satisfactory adjustment on his return to society. (See FMs 8-51and 22-100 for more information on counseling.)
EMPLOYRlENTAND EDUCATION
7-45. Prisoners can be employed in tasks that benefit them and meet the needs of the facility. Education activities take priority over work projects. The USDB employment and education programs are key correctional tools for preparing prisoners to return to civilian life. The programs provide prisoners with marketable skills and self-confidence, and they teach the value of self-discipline.Job training opportunities range from unskilled, manual labor to highly skilled trades.
7-46. Close coordination between the facility commander and the garrison commander or his equivalent is maintained to establish worthwhile work projects for prisoners. The facility commander approves work projects and the assignment of prisoners to work projects. The employment section determines the best type of employment for each prisoner. The needs of the facility are considered along with the prisoner’s­
*     Education. Aptitude and achievement scores. MOS. Attitude and interests.
RECREATION
7-47. Nonduty activities fill gaps between work and education activities and take up idle time that might otherwise be used for undesirable activities. Encourage prisoners to develop nonduty time interests, and when possible, set up a program to guide and direct nonduty activities. A prisoner’s involvement in nonduty activities indicates that he is adjusting to confinement. Note and report soldiers who are not participating in nonduty activities.
7-48. Ensure that prisoners have access to a library and recreation facilities. Based on the commander’s approval, prisoner recreation programs may include sporting events, hobbies, motion pictures, videotapes, and religious activities. Encourage prisoners to further their academic education by taking part in the facility’s education program or through self-study courses offered by the Army Correspondence Course Program (ACCP).
7-10 Army Corrections System
COMPENSATION, CLEMENCY, AND PAROLE
7-49. Prisoners who respond well to correctional treatment can be rewarded in several ways. The severity of their sentences may be lessened, their sentences may be reduced, or they may be granted greater freedom and more privileges. These rewards help maintain morale, discipline, and welfare.
7-50. An inmate who is serving a sentence to confinement (other than a life sentence) can earn time off the sentence term by taking part in selected activities for which extra good-conducttime (EGCT)is authorized. The EGCT is an additional incentive to prisoners who demonstrate excellence in work, education, or vocation. It is awarded at the rate shown in Table 7-1. Only those prisoners who demonstrate ability, initiative, and productivity and meet the eligibility criteria for their assigned duties are recommended for EGCT.
Table 7-1. Rates for EGCT
Level I Description EGCT 1 I Prisoners continuously employed 1 to 5 months 1 1 day per month
1) 2 1 Prisoners continuouslv employed 6 to 10 months 1 2 days per month 11
3 Prisoners continuously employed 11 to 15months 3days per month
4 Prisoners continuously employed 16to 20 months 4 days per month
11 5 1 Prisoners continuously employed 21 to 25 months 1 5 days per month 11
6 Prisoners serving as assistant instructors or supervisor 6 days per month

II I II
assistants (followingattainment of Level 5)’ 7 1 Trusteeswho have maintained Level 6for 6 months2 1 7 days per month ‘A prisoner (includinga trustee)who loses his position as an assistant instructor or a supervisor assistant is reduced to Level 5 or the earning level held prior to elevation, whichever is less.
11 2~heLevel 7 increase is removed if a prisoner is removed from trustee status. He is ( reduced to Level 6 or the earning level held prior to elevation,whichever is less.
7-51. Additional EGCT can be authorized for participation in community service programs and special projects that support institutional goals or missions. It is awarded in a lump sum and does not exceed 3 days for any event or 5 days in any month.
CLEMENCY
7-52. Clemency modifies the severity of a court-martial sentence and can be achieved through mitigation, suspension, or remission as follows. The facility commander makes recommendations concerning each prisoner’s sentence if he has responded in a positive manner to correctional programs.
Mitigation.Mitigation lessens the severity of a sentence.
Suspension.Suspension is the granting of a probationary period that results in remission if it is completed successfully. Remission. Remission cancels the unexecuted part of a sentence to
which the remission applies.
Army Corrections System 7-11
FM 3-19.40
PAROLE
7-53. A parole is based on conduct during confinement or on special circumstances. There are three types of paroles that a prisoner may be awarded-a parole, a temporary home parole (THP), and an emergency home parole (EHP): .
Parole. A parole serves as a transition between the strict supervision of confinement and the conditions most likely to ensure a prisoner’s earliest assumption of responsibilities as a productive, law-abiding citizen.
THP. A THP is a temporary release from confinement granted to
strengthen family relationships, and it provides incentive and
reinforcement to positive behavior and morale.
EHP. An EHP is a temporary release from confmement due to an
emergency, such as the death or critical illness of an immediate family
member or a disaster.
7-54. The facility commander notifies victims and witnesses who are identified in the prisoner’s correctional-treatment file (CTF) that a prisoner is being released from confinement (see AR 190-47, DOD Directive 1030.1, and DOD Instruction 1030.2). Notify victims and witnesses by the most direct means practicable before releasing a prisoner on THP or EHP. This allows the victim or witness the opportunity to respond, favorably or negatively, to the proposed release.
CLEMENCYAND PAROLE BOARD
7-55. The facility commander appoints a permanent board that consists of at least three voting members (one officer and two enlisted). He may also assign nonvoting members to the board. The board considers factors involved in a prisoner’s request for clemency or parole and recommends acceptance or rejection of the request to the Army Clemency and Parole Board.
CORRECTIONAL STAFF
7-56. The ACS correctional staff consists of dedicated professionals who serve as positive role models for prisoners. Staff members include corrections NCOs and specialists (MP who have entered the corrections career program and received resident training in MOS 95C at the US Army Military Police School). Due to their close contact with prisoners, corrections NCOs and specialists must be firm, fair, and decisive. Their behavior and attitude form an integral part of the correctional-treatment process. Support personnel are experts in areas other than corrections, but their expertise plays an important role in the facility.
CORRECTIONAL-SUPERVISIONBRANCH
7-57. The chief, correctional-supervision branch (CSB) (senior corrections NC0)­Assists in the custodial operations of the facility. Supervises correctional and custodial personnel within the facility.
7-12 Army Corrections System
Informs the facility commander of matters that affect the custody,
control, and security of the facility.
Ensures that rules, regulations, and SOPSare followed and enforced.

Guard Commander
7-58. The guard commander­
*     Supervises custodial personnel. Is responsible for prisoner activities during his tour of duty. Monitors custody, control, and security measures. Ensures compliance with the schedule of calls. Initiates emergency control measures. Maintains the facility blotter. Deals with situations involving prisoner admission in the absence of
the chief, CSB, and the chief, prisoner services branch (PSB).
Prisoner Control Team
7-59. The prisoner control team NCOIC performs many of the same duties in an I/R battalion module as in a garrison confinement facility. This specialized environment requires the same corrections background to respond to behavioral incidents requiring calm, decisive action. During I/R operations, the NCOIC is responsible for­
*     Security. Accountability. Intelligence. Intelligence is information obtained through observation
and reports submitted by guards who are in daily contact with prisoners. The best source of intelligence gathering for the CSB is the guard force.
The guard force. There are two types of orders for the guard force-general and special. General orders apply to all guards, and special orders apply to particular posts and duties.
Escape prevention. The MWDs can be used to track an escapee, but they cannot be used to apprehend him.
Cellblock Guards
7-60. Cellblock guards­
*     Maintain custody, control, and discipline of prisoners under their supervision. Supervise all activities according to the schedule of calls.
Supervise the response to emergency action plans.
Conduct periodic inspections, searches, head counts, roll calls, and bed
checks.

Close-ConfinementGuards
7-61. Close-confinement guards-
Army Corrections System 7-13
Maintain custody and control of prisoners who are segregated from
the general population due to inprocessing or administrative or
disciplinaryreasons.

Accomplish activities within the schedule of calls, as applicable to the

close-confinement area.
Conduct 30-minute checks (or 15-minute checks for special-status
prisoners) when a DD Form 509 is required.

Ensure that all required signatures on DD Form 509 are obtained on a
daily basis.

Dining-FacilityGuards
7-62. Dining-facilityguards­
*     Maintain custody and control of prisoners during mealtime. Ensure that the dining-facility traffic plan is followed. Prevent congestion at condiment and juice areas. Account for silverware before and after a meal. Search prisoners before they leave the dining facility.
Employment Detail Guards
7-63. Employment detail guards­
*     Maintain custody, control, and supervision of prisoners while on
details.
Ensure that work details are accomplished and safety precautions are
observed.

Maintain strict accountability of equipment and tools.

Assist with frisks and strip searches of prisoners returning from
details.
Account for prisoners on details accordingto the schedule of calls.
Track prisoners’ locations at all times while on details.

Escort and Absent-Without-LeaveApprehensionGuards
7-64. Escort and absent-without-leave(AWOL) apprehension guards­
*     Maintain custody and control of prisoners while moving them to and
from designated places.
May be armed with a pistol if required and authorized by the facility
commander.

Are qualified with a pistol and trained in the use of force and the ROE. Are trained in firearms safety procedures necessary to transpo~-t prisoners by land, air, and sea.
Main Gate and Sally Port Guards
7-65. Main gate and sally port guards­
*     Maintain custody and control of prisoners. Ensure that only authorized persons enter the facility. Inspect vehicles entering and exiting the facility.
7-14 Army Corrections System
Inspect packages.
Conduct inventories of items entering and exitingthe facility.
Require noncustodial personnel to register on sign-in logs.

Visitor Room Guards
7-66. Visitor room guards­
*     Maintain custody and control of prisoners during visits by family
members and other authorized persons.
Detect violations of rules and regulations, improper behavior, and
contraband.

Position themselves in inconspicuous places and observe
conversations rather than listening to them.
Identify and report infractions, which may be grounds for terminating
visits.

Hospital Guards
7-67. Hospital guards­
*     Maintain custody and control of prisoners while escortingthem to and from medical appointments and during hospitalization.
Ensure that rooms are clear of contraband. Prevent unauthorized communications.
Tower Guards
7-68. Tower guards­
*     Maintain custody and control by observing specific sectors of the
perimeter.
Are briefed on the use of force and are familiar with a 12-gauge
shotgun.

Ensure that contraband is not passed through the fence. Provide protection for compound guards.
TRAINING
7-69. Personnel assigned to a confinement facility are oriented and trained in the procedures of custody and control. The formal training program includes­
*     Supervisoryand interpersonal communications skills. Self-defensetechniques. Use of force (priorities of force). Weapons qualification (see DA Pam 350-38). First aid. Emergency action plans. Facility regulations. Riot control techniques.
Army Corrections System 7-15
SUPPORT PERSONNEL
7-70. Support personnel in a confinement facility include chaplains, medical personnel, the SJA, and the IG. They perform the same functions as support personnel in a garrison.
PRISONER SERVICES BRANCH
7-71. The chief, PSB-Supervises the administrative concerns of the facility. Maintains records and forms. Computes sentences. Manages property and funds. Processes prisoners for transfer or release. Monitors admissions, services, THPs, EHPs, and the victim/witness
program.
Advises the facility commander of administrative concerns involving
prisoners.

7-72. Some administrative procedures at ACS facilities are unique to confinement and corrections operations. Key procedures include inprocessing prisoners, maintaining records and forms, computing sentences, managing property and fund accounts, and transferring and releasing prisoners. In addition to ensuring the day-to-day functioning of facilities, these procedures have a direct impact on prisoner discipline and morale. A prisoner’s first contact with the facility staff is during admissions processing, when he is briefed on the facility rules and his legal rights.
ADMISSION PROCEDURES
7-73. Prisoners begin their confinement by inprocessing. Segregate newly confined prisoners from the main prisoner population until they are processed according to the following guidelines:
*     Check the DD Form 2707 for accuracy. Search and segregate authorized and unauthorized property. Strip-search each prisoner. Issue appropriate health and comfort supplies to each prisoner, and
complete DD Form 504.
Photograph and fingerprint each prisoner.
Complete individual prisoner forms.
Inform prisoners of their visitation rights.
Arrange for a medical officer to examine each prisoner within 24 hours

of confinement, and complete DD Form 503.
CORRECTIONAL-REPORTINGSYSTEM
7-74. The Correctional-Reporting System (CRS) is the primary means of information management within the ACS. (See AR 190-47 for more information.)
7-16 Army Corrections System
REQUIRED REGULATIONS AND FORMS
7-75. Each facility must have a complete, current set of regulations covering
correctional administration. The facility commander ensures that the facility
is part of the publications distribution system. The following regulations and
publications must be available:
AR 15-130.
AR 190-14.
AR 190-47.
AR 210-174.
AR 633-30.
Misc Pub 27-7.
UCMJ.
7-76. Confinement facilities use a variety of forms to maintain records and reports. The following forms must be available: DA Form 1124. DA Form 1125-R. DA Form 1128. DAForm 1129-R. DAForm 1130-R. DA Form 1131-R. DAForm1132-R. DA Form 1134-R. DA Form 1135-R. DA Form 3078. DA Form 3955.. DA Form 3997. DD Form 2 (ACT). DD Form 499. DD Form 503. DD Form 504. DD Form 506. DD Form 509. DD Form 515. DD Form 2707. DDForm2710. DDForm2718. Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI) Form FD-249.
CORRECTIONAL-TREATMENTFILE
7-77. Establish a CTF within the first 72 hours of confinement, and maintain it throughout the confinement period. (See AR 190-47 for more information.)
Army Corrections System 7-17
SENTENCE COMPUTATION
7-78. Compute sentences according to AR 633-30 and DOD Directive 1325.4. The facility commander ensures that selected corrections NCOs working in the PSB are properly trained to compute sentences. Incorrect computations result in incorrect release dates and can violate a prisoner’s legal rights. The rate of earnings for good-conduct time is calculated based on the prisoner’s length of confinement, including pretrial time (see Table 7-2).
Table 7-2. Rates for Good-Conduct Time

Length of Sentence  Good-Conduct Time
Less than 1 year  5 days for each month of the sentence
1 year to less than 3 years  6 days for each month of the sentence
3 years to less than 5 years  7 days for each month of the sentence
5years to less than 10years  8 days for each month of the sentence
10years or more, excluding life  10days for each month of the sentence

NOTE: If the term of confinement is reduced or if an additionalsentence increases the term of confinement, recompute the good-conduct time at the abatement appropriate to the new term of confinement.
PERSONAL PROPERTY AND FUNDS
7-79. Prisoners are permitted to place personal property in safekeeping if it is not authorized for retention by the facility commander. Without an exception, the number of items stored cannot exceed the capacity of a 12-by 16-inch envelope. Account for personal property and funds according to AR 210-174, and place the funds in the prisoners’ deposit fund. The facility commander appoints (in writing) a commissioned officer, a warrant officer, or a DA civilian as the custodian of the prisoners’ property and funds. The appointee must be bonded as outlined in AR 600-13.
7-80. The custodian safeguards prisoners’ property and funds in trust. With few exceptions, any action involving property or funds requires the prisoner’s authority and consent. The exceptions to this rule are as follows:
The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) can levy a prisoner’s personal
deposit fund to satisfy delinquent federal income taxes. Property that has evidentiary value is subject to impounding. When the property is taken from a prisoner, disposition is made only by instructions received from a competent authority. (See AR 190-22 for more information.)
Property of an escapee is disposed of according to DOD 4160.21-M.
PROCEDURES
7-81. A system of internal controls is used to protect prisoners’ property and funds, to ensure the accuracy of records, and to promote efficiency in operations. The custodian and the correctional staff must ensure that prisoners are denied access to property and funds (their own and other prisoners’). Staff members inventory the prisoners’ property and list the items
7-18 Army Corrections System
on DA Form 1132-R (five copies). (See ARs 190-47 and 210-174 for detailed procedures.)
7-82. Dispose of an escapee’s or a deceased prisoner’s personal property according to ARs 630-10 and 700-84. The facility commander or the installation commander appoints a disinterested officer to audit the prisoner’s personal property. When the audit is complete, the officer signs a DA Form 1132-Rin lieu of and for the prisoner.
7-83. A prisoner’s sentence determines if and how much he is paid. Prisoners are not allowed to have money in their possession. All money received while in confinement is deposited in the prisoners’ deposit fund, which is a trust fund. It contains the personal funds of all the prisoners in the facility. The fund’s balance equals the total of the individual accounts on the ledger.
7-84. Take all money from each prisoner during processing. Deposit US currency and US government paychecks in his deposit fund. Prepare a DA Form 1124 (in triplicate) that lists all the money received for deposit, and issue a receipt for personal checks surrendered by the prisoner.
7-85. Deposit all cash receipts in the name of the fund, and make daily deposits when practical. Ensure that checks received by prisoners while in confinement are endorsed immediately for deposit to the fund, and promptly deposit the checks in the bank for collection.
7-86. When a prisoner is transferred from one confinement facility to another, transfer his personal deposit fund to the receiving facility. When a prisoner is released and his personal deposit fund is $50 or less, pay the entire amount to him in cash. If the balance is more than $50, issue the balance of his personal deposit fund in the form of a check.
PETTY-CASH FUND
7-87. The USDB commandant and the RCF commander are authorized to set up a petty-cash fund, which provides prisoners with cash to make minor purchases. The commandant or the commander determine each prisoner’s contribution to the petty-cash fund, and the amount is drawn from each prisoner’s personal deposit fund. The commandant or the commander sets the limit, in writing, on the amount of money in the petty-cash fund.
7-88. Expenditures from the petty-cash fund may not exceed $50 for anyone authorized expenditures except when the prisoner is released from confinement. When a petty-cash disbursement is made to a prisoner, he submits a DA Form 1128 to the cashier of the petty-cash fund.
MAILANDCORRESPONDENCE

7-89. The correctional staff keeps a record of each prisoner’s mail, correspondence, and authorized correspondents on DD Form 499. They conduct inspections to control trafficking of contraband, money, and valuables. Incoming and outgoing mail is normally inspected but not read. However, it can be read, rejected, or censored if the facility commander has probable cause to believe that it contains plans for criminal activities or escapes, codes or plans for activities in violation of facility rules, requests for prohibited gifts or
Army Corrections System 7-19
money, or obscenity. If a prisoner’s mail is being censored or rejected, notify him of the decision and provide the author of the letter a reasonable opportunity to appeal the decision. An official, other than the person who originally disapproved the correspondence, decides appeals, and the appellate official’s decision is final. (See AR 190-47for more information.)
7-90. Different rules apply to inspecting and reading privileged mail. Privileged mail can be opened and inspected to control contraband, money, and valuables and to verify authenticity; but it cannot be read. If a letter qualifies as privileged mail, it is usually delivered to the prisoner unopened. If privileged mail is opened, it must be opened in the presence of the prisoner and a commissioned officer, an NCO (E7 and above), or a civilian (GS7 and above). Privileged mail consists of correspondence between prisoners and­
*     The President or his representative. The Vice President or his representative. A member of Congress or his representative. The US Attorney General or his representative. The Judge Advocate General or his representative. The prisoner’s defense counsel or an attorney of record. A chaplain or a clergy when recommended by the installation

chaplain.
SUPPORT PERSONNEL
7-91. Support personnel aid the correctional process in numerous areas as
follows: Chaplain. The chaplain promotes the spiritual and moral welfare of prisoners through worship services; special religious activities; counseling; and emphasis on moral, ethical, spiritual, and social values.
Medical activity. The commander of the local medical activity provides medical services for prisoners. Medical services include the services of psychiatrists, psychologists, and social workers. They provide professional evaluations of prisoners and help develop correctional-treatment programs. The medical-activity commander coordinates with the PM and the facility commander to ensure that custody and control measures conform to medical requirements.
IG. The IG may assist the facility commander by investigating complaints, allegations, and charges. These actions frequently provide a basis for corrective action and discourage unfounded allegations by prisoners. The PM and the facility commander establish and maintain close liaison with the IG.
SJA. The SJA serves as the legal advisor to the commander and the staff. The SJA plays a major role in correctional treatment and administrative activities. He provides legal advice and assistance to the PM and the facility commander, legal assistance to prisoners when consistent with professional responsibility requirements, and official information to prisoners about the status of cases and sentences as prescribed by law and regulation. The SJA coordinates with the US
7-20 Army Corrections System
Trial Defense Service, an independent legal organization, to ensure
that prisoners have independent legal advice relating to military
justice.
AG. The AG processes recommendations for administrative elimination of prisoners without a punitive discharge from the service. He advises the facility commander and unit commanders on processes and procedures.
Technical service. Technical service provides support to education and employment programs. Work programs permit on-the-job training for prisoners in carpentry, mechanics, painting, and masonry. They may also include skilled tasks required to maintain and operate the installation.
TRANSFER AND DISPOSITION PROCEDURES
7-92. The transfer of a prisoner or a pretrial detainee refers to his relocation from one confinement facility to another to continue a sentence. AR 190-47 provides detailed guidance on the administrative and operational processing required for a prisoner transfer.
7-93. A prisoner or a pretrial detainee is released from confinement only with the proper authorization. At the USDB and the RCF, the installation commander can authorize the facility commander to authenticate DD Form 2718. A prisoner or a pretrial detainee is released for the following reasons:
A causal prisoner is returned to his unit. The charge is dismissed.
Parole or clemency is granted.
Pretrial confinement is no longer deemed necessary.
The sentence expires.
The sentence is mitigated, suspended, or remitted.
7-94. A confined prisoner-
Can be kept in confinement and a new confinement order can be
issued if he completes a sentence and has additional charges pending.
Is released from confinement if he is adjudged and completes a

sentence before determination is made to punitively discharge him.
However, he remains subject to military jurisdiction until the sentence
is approved and the discharge is executed.

Is released from confinement when he completes a sentence that

includes a punitive discharge or a dismissal.
Is released from confinement if his sentence is mitigated or remitted
by the convening authority or another competent authority.
Cannot be released from confinement until a release order is executed
if a court-martial renders a decision of not guilty while he is confined.

Cannot be released from confinement until a release order is executed
if the charges are withdrawn.
Can be retained under military jurisdiction after release for treatment
of an illness or an injury that occurred or was aggravated during
military service or confinement.

Army Corrections System 7-21 FM 3-19.40
LOGISTICS
7-95. Confinement facilities provide supplies for prisoners during their incarceration and for the correctional staff during their daily tour of duty. The quality of treatment programs and the morale of prisoners and staff are directly affected by the availability of supplies.
7-96. Unit commanders ensure that soldiers in pretrial status have the necessary clothing when they enter confinement. Prisoners confined in outside continental United States (OCONUS) confinement facilities wear a battle dress uniform (BDU), and those confined in CONUS facilities wear a distinctive prisoner uniform as prescribed in CTA 50-900. Prisoners are also issued two blankets, two sheets, one pillow, and one pillowcase.
7-97. The supply branch issues general and janitorial items to prisoners and staff as needed. Items include mops, buckets, brooms, cleansers, and office supplies.
FOOD SERVICE SUPPLIES
7-98. Food service operations are important for maintaining morale and discipline. Provide prisoners wholesome, sufficient food that is prepared from the Army master menu. Supply them with a full complement of eating utensils (fork, knife, and spoon). Prisoners in close confinement and those who have lost privileges can be denied supplemental rations as described in the Army master menu.
HEALTH AND COMFORT SUPPLIES
7-99. The facility commander ensures that basic supplies are available for prisoners to maintain personal hygiene and comfort. Health and comfort supplies are issued to new prisoners during inprocessing and regularly thereafter. Prisoners request additional supplies on DD Form 504, and they receive the supplies gratuitously if they are in a nonpay status. Basic supplies include haircuts, postage stamps, safety razors, bath soap, toothbrushes, toothpaste, and shoe polish.
7-100. A physical inventory is reconciled and balanced monthly (minimum) with the previous inventory, supplies received, and supplies issued to prisoners. The facility commander or a designated representative verifies the inventory in writing.
SUPPLY SERVICES
7-101. Supply functions in a confinement facility are the same as those in other military units. However, stronger security measures are necessary to prevent certain supplies and equipment from falling into the hands of prisoners.
7-102. Weapons, ammunition, and emergency equipment (protective masks and hand and leg irons) must be stored in maximum-security, locked racks or cabinets in a room that is located away from prisoner areas. Guards draw weapons and ammunition as needed, and the staff keeps records of all transactions. To reduce hazards, set up an area for loading and unloading weapons outside the facility.
7-22 Army Corrections System
MEDICAL AND DENTAL TREATMENT
7-103. The facility commander establishes a close liaison with commanders of local medical and dental facilities to ensure their full support of the confinement facility. He ensures that prisoners receive the same medical and dental care as other soldiers.
7-104. Medical officers or other medically trained personnel conduct sick call, perform emergency medical treatment, and dispense medication. Hold sick call daily at a time that does not interfere with duties and training of prisoners. Medical examinations and treatment usually require using instruments and medications that can cause custody and control problems. Secure medications and equipment when they are not in use, and inventory them frequently.
7-105. Corrections NCOs dispense medication to prisoners in cellblocks, supervise the ingestion or application of the medication, and maintain a medication issue register. When possible, use qualified medical personnel to dispense prescription medication.
Army Corrections System 7-23
Chapter 8
Battlefield Confinement of United States Military Prisoners
In a mature TO, MP may operate FDFs and FCFs to hold US military prisoners and pretrial detainees in short-term pretrial or posttrial confinement. Posttrial confinement includes temporary custody of prisoners until they are evacuated to permanent facilities and custody of prisoners with short-term sentences as determined by the combatant commander. Leaders tasked with performing US military prisoner operations must be familiar with the doctrine in this chapter and Chapter 7, the policies outlined in AR 190-47, the ACS, and the tasks described in STP 19-95C14-SM-TG.
PLANNING
8-1. There are two types of battlefield facilities-FDF and FCF. When the combatant commander makes the decision to retain prisoners in the TO, FDFs are set up in the CZ and an FCF is set up in the COMMZ. Prisoners are evacuated from one facility to another according to established guidelines and available facilities(seeFigure 8-1,page 8-2).
8-2. The MP plan US military prisoner operations to meet the needs of the combatant commander. The commander may decide to establish facilities throughout the TO if he encounters any of the following:
The projected or actual amount of prisoners exceeds the unit’s
handling capability and may interfere with military operations. The distance between the TO and the CONUSIOCONUSfacility is too great and makes evacuation impractical.
Transportation assets are unavailable for expeditious evacuation to
other facilities.
The length of military operations and the maturity of the TO enable
facilitiesto be established.
The facilities are necessary to meet other operational needs.
8-3. The PM is a key player and assumes an important role by keeping the combatant commander informed throughout the planning process. The PM coordinates with the SJA, civil affairs (CA), the HN, the appropriate echelon coordinating staff, and the major subordinate commands before recommending that US military prisoner facilities be established. During the planning process, the PM must determine­
*     The date a facility is required. The location of an FCF in the COMMZ. The resources and logistical support needed to construct and operate a facility.
Battlefield Confinement of United States Military Prisoners 8-1
Provides detention
of soldiers awaiting
courts-martial and
posttrial prisoners x
awaiting evacuation x
from the CZ to the
FCF in the COMMZ.

0 0 0
Provides confinement
of restorable prisoners
in the TO to be
returned to duty and
nonrestorable

8 prisoners awaiting
0 evacuation.
Evacuates nonrestorable prisoners from theater (1,500 capacity) to CONUS facilities for correctional treatment.
Figure 8-1. TO Confinement Evacuation Flow
8-2 Battlefield Confinement of United States Military Prisoners
The availability of MP forces (CS MP forces in the TO or an I/R MP
unit deployed from CONUS).
The type of prisoners to be interned (pretrial, posttrial, and
multiservice).

The evacuation requirements and other prisoner-specific

considerations.
The requirements of division and corps FDFs and other requirements
that may impact on the operation.

FIELD DETENTION FACILITY
8-4. In the CZ, division and corps PMs are responsible for the location, setup, and operation of FDFs for as long as necessary. The MP use FDFs to detain soldiers until they can be tried, sentenced to confinement, and evacuated from the area. Soldiers awaiting trial remain in their units if possible. When the UCMJ requirements of Rules for Courts-Martial (RCM) 305 are met, soldiers are placed in pretrial confinement and retained by MP. Per RCM 305, no one can be ordered into pretrial confinement except for probable cause. Probable cause to order pretrial confinement exists when there is a reasonable belief that­
*     An offense triable by court-martial has been committed. The person confined committed it. Confinement is required by the circumstances. For example, less
severe forms of restraint are inadequate or it is foreseeable that the prisoner will engage in serious criminal misconduct or will not appear at trial, pretrial hearing, or investigation.
8-5. When operating an FDF, MP sign a receipt for each prisoner (DD Form 2708) and his property (DA Form 4137). Use existing structures for FDFs if possible. If tents are used, they should be as large as a GP medium tent. Plans for establishing an FDF should include the following list of equipment and supplies:
Barbed wire and concertina.
Fence posts.
Gates and doors.
Floodlights and spotlights.
A generator.
Food service and cleaning equipment.
Water cans or lister bags.
First aid equipment and supplies.
Clothing and bedding.
FIELD CONFINEMENTFACILITY
8-6. The MP establish an FCF in the COMMZ to detain soldiers placed in short-term custody during pretrial or posttrial or while in transit to another facility. An FCF can be a semipermanent or permanent facility, and it is more complex and elaborate than an FDF. A CS MP unit or an I/R MP unit can be tasked with operating an FCF. The respective unit commander uses the
Battlefield Confinement of United States Military Prisoners 8-3
military decision-making process (MDMP) to determine tasks that are necessary to accomplish the mission. Some considerations are­
*     Location. Construction. Setup. Processing. Classification. Identification. Clothing. Subsistence. Dining facilities. Medical facilities. Sanitation. Discipline. Control. Administration. Emergency planning and investigations. ROI. Use of force. Escape. Transportation. Transfer and disposition of prisoners.
LOCATION
8-7. The PM coordinates with engineers, the SJA, the HN, and the coordinating staff before selecting an FCF site. He ensures that the FCFis located away from perimeter fences, public thoroughfares, gates, headquarters, troop areas, foliage, and wooded areas. The location depends on several factors, such as­
*     The availability of logistical assets (transportation and medical facilities). The availability of terrain and preexisting structures.
The enemy situation.
The battlefield layout.
LOC.
METT-TC.

CONSTRUCTION
8-8. The construction of an FCF depends on the availability of existing structures, the work force, and materiel. Use preexisting facilities to the maximum extent possible. If they are unavailable, coordinate with engineers to construct a facility that meets security and safety requirements. Ifa CSMP unit is tasked to construct an FCF, request supplies and materiel through the established supply channels. An I/R MP unit requires engineer support to
8-4     Battlefield Confinement of United States Military Prisoners
construct guard towers, fences, and perimeter roads and to repair unimproved roads.
SETUP
8-9. The FCF setup corresponds with established standards as outlined in AR 190-47. The physical layout includes facilities for administration, housing, and training (if required) as well as recreation and work areas (if available). The facilities and areas are secure against escape. Figure 8-2 shows a sample FCF setup.
Tower
0

Postrial males
Tower
0

Figure 8-2. Sample FCF Setup
PROCESSING
8-10. Processing begins when the control of a prisoner is transferred from a non-MP unit to an MP unit or from an MP unit to another MP unit. Each time control is transferred, the receiving organization signs a receipt for each prisoner (DD Form 2708) and his property (DA Form 4137).
Battlefield Confinement of United States Military Prisoners 8-5
8-11. Prisoners begin their confinement by inprocessing into the facility. Ifa confinement detachment is available, it performs all tasks related to inprocessing prisoners. Otherwise, the MP unit commander performs inprocessing with organic assets. Part of the inprocessing procedure is to help prisoners integrate into the confinement environment. Process each newly confined prisoner according to the guidelines inTable 8-1.
Responsible
Table 8-1. Processing a US Military Prisoner

Station  Purpose  Individuals*  Actions
1  Search  MP  Escort prisoner and property.
Conduct same-gender strip search. Accomplish this before
he enters the processing area unless conditions prohibit it.
Su~ervisehis movement to the next station.
Inventory personal property.
List items on DA Form 11324.
Place items in a container or on a tray.
Mark items with his name and SSN.
Secure items in a storage area.
Confiscate his money, and record it on DA Form 1124.
Supervise his movement to the next station.
Administrative  Processing  Initiate a CTF.
processing  clerk and MP  Complete individual prisoner forms (see Chapter 7).
Supervise his movement to the next station.
Photography  Fingerprint and identify him, and record the information on a
and  fingerprint card.
fingerprinting  Photograph him with instant film. Use a photographic name
board (black background with white characters). List his
SSN and name at the bottom center.
Attach the photograph to his CTF.
Supervise his movement to the next station.
Personal  Allow him to shower, shave, and get a haircut.
hygiene  Supervise his movement to the next station.
~edical  Medical  Examine him within 24 hours of arrival at the confinement
evaluation  personnel and  facility.
MP  Complete DD Form 503.
Supervise his movement to the next station.
Review processed records for completeness.
Escort him back to processing stations as needed.
Prepare and maintain an accountability roster.
Supervise his movement to the next station.

‘The number of people used to perform tasks dc pends on the number of prisoners and the time available.
8-6 Battlefield Confinement of United States Military Prisoners
FM 3-19.40
Table 8-1. Processinga US Military Prisoner (continued)

Station  Purpose  Responsible Individuals*  Actions
8  Briefing  MP  Brief him on rules and regulationsand visitation and
correspondence rights.
Supervise his movement to the next station.
9  Movement  MP  Move him to a secure area.

*Thenumber ofpeople used to perform tasks depends on the number of prisoners and the time available.
8-12. Ensure that all newly assigned prisoners complete training, as soon as possible, that explains the­
*     Facility rules and regulations. Counseling procedures. UCMJ. Disciplinary authority and procedures. Work assignments. Complaint and grievance procedures per AR 20-1.
8-13. Orient pretrial prisoners and officers on their status, rights, and
privileges, includingthe following: They are required to participate in correctional orientation and treatment programs that ensure their control, custody, employment, training, health, and welfare as determined by the facility commander.
Officer and NCO prisoners will not exercise command or supervisory authority over others. They will comply with facility rules and regulations to the same extent as other prisoners. They are not permitted special privileges normally associated with their rank.
CLASSIFICATION
8-14. Prisoners are classified into two categories-pretrial and posttrial. Separate pretrial prisoners (males and females) from posttrial prisoners. Posttrial prisoners include those retained during short-term sentences and in-transit prisoners who are being evacuated to another facility.
IDENTIFICATION
8-15. Take two front and two profile photographs of each prisoner. Use a name board, if available, and place his last name, first name, and middle initial on the first line and his social security number (SSN)on the second line. Add a prisoner registration number on the third line if desired. (See AR 190-47for fingerprint card requirements.)
CLOTHING
8-16. Prisoners wear a BDU without rank insignia during incarceration. Return personal clothing and other articles to prisoners per AR 700-84 as determined by the facility commander. Issue clothing to prisoners, except officers, according to AR 700-84 and CTA 50-900. Maintain a DA Form 3078 on prisoners with less than 6 months active-duty service and prisoners who
Battlefield Confinement of United States Military Prisoners 8-7
receive clothing on an issue-in-kind basis. Provide organizational clothing within the allowances prescribed in AR 710-2 and CTA 50-900. Launder and dry-clean clothing for prisoners (except officers on pay status) without charge per AR 210-130. Dispose of clothing and personal property according to AR 190-47.
SUBSISTENCE
8-17. Provide prisoners with wholesome, sufficient food that is prepared from the Army master menu, and supply them with a full complement of eating utensils. The facility commander can deny eating utensils for security or other reasons. Prisoners in close confinement and those who lost privileges associated with approved disciplinary action can be denied supplemental rations as described on the Army master menu. The facility commander can authorize alternate meal control procedures to prevent injury when a prisoner abuses food. The procedures require documentation in the facility blotter and concurrence of a medical officer, and they will not exceed 7 days.
DINING FACILITIES
8-18. Dining facilities can be organic to the unit operating the FCF, or they can be set up through the appropriate contracting procedure. The facility commander decides the best feeding method to sustain prisoners based on the available dining facilities and the logistical and HN support.
MEDICAL TREATMENT
8-19. Medical personnel in support of the FCF provide medical, dental, and mental-health care or referral; limited counseling; and social services. Except in matters requiring protection of medical information, the facility commander provides medical observations and recommendations concerning correctional-treatment requirements. Medical officers, nurse clinicians, or PAS­
*     Conduct a daily examination of each prisoner in close confinement. Perform a medical examination to determine the fitness of a newly confined prisoner or a prisoner who has been outside military control
for more than 24 hours. Complete the examination within 24 hours of
a prisoner’s arrival or return to confinement.
Test each prisoner for HIV and TB within 3 duty days after initial
incarceration. Record test results on DD Form 503.
SANITATION
8-20. An Army Medical Department (AMEDD)representative, a PVNTMED NCO or officer, an environmental-science officer, a sanitary engineer, or a medical entomologist inspects the facility monthly. This inspection ensures that the operation meets PVNTMED standards. The inspector provides a copy of the inspection results to the facility commander. (SeeAR 190-47for further guidance.)
8-21. Ensure that all prisoners bathe and follow basic personal-hygiene practices to prevent communicable diseases. Enforce high sanitation standards in facilities where prisoners share latrines and showers.
8-8     Battlefield Confinement of United States Military Prisoners
FM 3-19.40
DISCIPLINE
8-22. Public law and AR 190-47 authorize facility commanders to­
*     Restrict the movement and action of prisoners. Take action to maintain control as required. Protect the safety and welfare of prisoners and other personnel. Ensure orderly operation and administration of the FCF.
8-23. A prisoner is considered in an on-duty status except during mandatory sleeping hours, mealtimes, and reasonable periods of voluntary religious observations (as determined by the facility commander in coordination with the facility chaplain). A prisoner who is denied recreation time as part of an administrative disciplinary action may be required to perform recreation time duties as deemed necessary by the appropriate authority. Recreation time duties are not considered extra duty. Privileges are withheld from prisoners on an individual basis, without regard to custody requirements or grade and only as an administrative disciplinary measure authorized by AR 190-47. The attractiveness of living quarters and the type and amount of material items that can be possessed by prisoners may differ by custody grade to provide incentives for custody elevation. Prisoners are denied the privilege of rendering the military salute. Pretrial prisoners will salute when they are in the appropriate service uniform.
8-24. Authorized forms of administrative disciplinary action and punishment are described in AR 190-47 and the UCMJ. Constantly review procedures, rules, regulations, living conditions, and similar factors affecting discipline for violations and disciplinary problems. Physical and mental punishments are strictly prohibited. Authorized administrative disciplinary actions (listed in ascending order) and are as follows:
A written or oral reprimand or warning. Deprivation of one or more privileges. Visits can be deprived or restricted as a disciplinary action only when the offense involves a
violation of visitation privileges. Restrictions on mail cannot be imposed as a disciplinarymeasure. Extra duty. Extra duty on work projects cannot exceed 2 hours per day
for 14 consecutive days. It cannot conflict with regular meals, sleeping hours, or attendance at regularly scheduled religious services.
Reduction of custody grade or classification. Segregation. Segregation can be imposed for an indefinite period, but it normally should not exceed 60 consecutive days. Tell prisoners why they are being segregated and that they will be released when the segregation has served its intended purpose. Segregated prisoners receive the same diet as other prisoners. Withhold nonessential food items, such as soft drinks and candies, that are in addition to the diet stipulated by the Army master menu.
Forfeiture of all or part of earned good-conduct time or EGCT according to AR 633-30. The forfeiture need not specify whether it is good-conduct time or EGCT. Both forms of abatement satisfy forfeiture;however, take good-conducttime before taking EGCT.
Battlefield Confinement of United States Military Prisoners 8-9
8-25. The facility commander is authorized to administer punishment, and he can delegate the authority to a subordinate officer (captain [CPTI or above) for minor punishments. The first field grade commander in the chain of command can impose major punishment when delegated authority by the first general officer in the chain of command. The following are prohibited punitive measures:
Clipping a prisoner’s hair excessively close.
Ordering the lock-step.
Requiring silence at meals.
Requiring a prisoner to break rocks.
Using hand or leg irons, restraining straps or jackets, or shackles as

punishment. (The FCF SOP gives authority for the use of these
devices and specifies the circumstances warranting their use.)

Fastening a prisoner to a fixed or stationary object.
Removing a prisoner’s underclothing or clothing or using other
debasing practices.

Flogging, branding, tattooing, or using any other cruel or unusual
punishment.

Requiring domicile in a tent as punishment.
Ordering strenuous physical activity or body positions designed to
place undue stress on a prisoner.

Using hand or leg irons or belly chains that give the appearance of a
chain gang.

8-26. The following are prohibited security measures:
Using dogs to guard prisoners. Dogs can be used to track escaped
prisoners.
Using chemicals except as riot control agents.
Using machine guns, rifles, or automatic weapons at guard towers

except to protect the facility from enemy or hostile fire by a belligerent
power. Selected marksmen who are equipped with rifles can be used
when directed as part of a disorder plan and when specifically
authorized by a higher echelon commander other than the facility
commander.

Using an electrically charged wire.
Securing a prisoner to a fixed object except in emergencies or when
specifically approved by the facility commander to prevent potential
danger to the facility staff or the outside community. Consult medical
authorities to assess the health risk to prisoners.

NOTE:See AR 190-47 for additional guidance and procedures on disciplinary measures.
CONTROL
8-27. The facility commander follows control and custody guidelines as outlined in AR 190-47. The inspecting officer’s report includes the verification of prisoner strength. He conducts a physical count of prisoners daily that includes a­
8-10 Battlefield Confinement of United States Military Prisoners
Roll call or a similar accounting method during morning, noon, and

evening formations.
Head count immediately upon the return of prisoners from work
detail.

Bed check between 2300 and 2400 and again between 2400 and 0600.

8-28. The degree of custodial supervision necessary for an individual prisoner is based on a review his records, the Army Inmate Correction System (AICS), and the recommendations of correctional supervisors and professional-services support personnel. Prisoners are not assigned a permanent custody grade based solely on the offenses for which they were incarcerated. Classification is the minimum custody grade necessary based on security requirements and the AICS. Custody grades include trustee and minimum, medium, and maximum security. Facility commanders can subdivide the custody grades as required to facilitate additional security controls.
ADMINISTRATION
8-29. The FCF is administered by a CS MP unit or an I/R MP unit with an MP I/R confinement detachment if available. The facility commander appoints a guard commander who­
* Supervises facility guards and correctional and custodial personnel
within the facility.
Monitors custody, control, and security measures and informs the
facility commander on matters that affect the facility.

Ensures that rules, regulations, and SOPSare followed and enforced.
Is responsible for prisoners’ activities and the facility blotter.
Ensures compliance with the schedule of calls.
Initiates emergency control measures.

NOTE: CSB personnel assigned to the FCF may also perform these duties.
8-30. Facility guards are responsible for the custody, control, and discipline of prisoners under their supervision. See Table 8-2, page 8-12, for a complete list of their duties.
NOTE: Control team guards assigned to the FCF may also perform these duties.
BattlefieldConfinement of United States Military Prisoners 8-11
Table 8-2. Guard Duties
Position      Actions
Close-confinement I Maintain custody and control of prisoners who are segregated from the general 11 guards I population due to inprocessing or administrative or disciplinary reasons. II
Accomplish activities within the schedule of calls, as applicable to the close-confinement area.
II
Conduct 30-minute checks (or 15-minute checks for special-status prisoners) when a DD Form 509 is required.
II
I      Ensure that all required signatures on DD Form 509 are obtained on a daily basis. .I1 Maintain custody and control of prisoners during mealtime. Ensure that the dining-facility traffic plan is followed. Prevent congestion at condiment and juice areas.
Account for silverware before and after a meal.
Search prisoners before they leave the dining facility.
Maintain custody, control, and supervision of prisoners while on details.

guards      Ensure that work details are accomplished and safety precautions are observed.
Maintain strict accountability of equipment and tools.
Assist with frisk and strip searches of prisoners returning from details.
Account for prisoners on details according to the schedule of calls.
Track prisoners’ locations at all times while on details.

Escort and AWOL Maintain custody and control of prisoners while moving them to and from
apprehension guards designated places.
May be armed with a pistol if required and authorized by the facility commander.

Are qualified with a pistol and trained in the use of force and the ROE.
Are trained in firearms safety procedures for transporting prisoners by land, air, and
sea.

NOTE: If available, an escort guard MP company may perform these duties.
Main gate and sally port Maintain custody and control of prisoners.
guards Ensure that only authorized persons enter the facility.

Inspect vehicles entering and exiting the facility.
Inspect packages.
Conduct inventories of items entering and exiting the facility.
Require noncustodial personnel to register on sign-in logs.
NOTE: If available, an MP guard company may perform these duties.

NOTE: The facility commander adjusts the number and type of guards based on the available
personnel.

8-12 Battlefield Confinement of United States Military Prisoners
Position Visitor room guards
Hospitalguards
Tower guards
FM 3-19.40
Table 8-2. Guard Duties (continued)
Actions Maintain custody and control of prisoners duringvisits by family membersand other authorized persons. Detect violations of rules and regulations, improper behavior, and contraband. Maintain positions in inconspicuous places and observe conversations rather than
listeningto them.
Identifyand report infractions,which may be grounds for terminating visits.
Maintain custody and control of prisonerswhile escorting them to and from medical

appointments and during hospitalization.
Ensure that rooms are clear of contraband.
Prevent unauthorized communications.

Maintain custody and control by observing specific sectors of the perimeter.

Are briefed on the use of force and are qualified with a 12-gaugeshotgun or their
assigned weapon.
Ensure that contraband is not passedthrough the fence.
Provide protectionfor compound guards.

NOTE: The facility commander adjusts the number and type of guards based on the available
personnel.

Required Regulations and Forms
8-31.Each facility must have a complete, current set of regulations covering correctional administration. The facility commander ensures that the facility is part of the publications distribution system. The following regulations and publications must be available:
AR 15-130. AR 190-14. AR 190-47. AR 210-174. AR 633-30. Misc Pub 27-7. UCMJ.
8-32.Confinement facilities use a variety of forms to maintain records and reports. The following forms must be available: DA Form 1124. DA Form 1125-R. DA Form 1128. DA Form 1129-R. DA Form 1130-R. DAForm 1131-R. DA Form 1132-R. DA Form 1134-R. DAForm 1135-R.
Battlefield Confinement of United States Military Prisoners 8-13
DA Form 3078.
DA Form 3955.
DA Form 3997.
DD Form 2 (ACT).
DD Form 499.
DD Form 503.
DD Form 504.
DD Form 506.
DD Form 509.
DD Form 515.
DD Form 2707.
DD Form 2710.
DD Form 2718.
FBI Form FD-249.

Correctional-Treatment File
8-33. Establish a CTF within the first 72 hours of confinement, maintain it throughout the confinement period, and transfer it with the prisoner when he is evacuated to another facility. (See AR 190-47 for more information.)
Sentence Computation
8-34. Based on the type of operation and its projected duration, the theater commander may determine that certain sentences will be served in the TO. The FCF commander computes sentences according to AR 633-30 and DOD Directive 1325.4. He ensures that NCOs working in the personnel section are properly trained to compute sentences. Incorrect computations result in incorrect release dates and can violate a prisoner’s legal rights. The rate of earnings for good-conduct time is calculated based on the prisoner’s length of confinement, including pretrial time (see Table 8-3).
Table 8-3. Rates for Good-Conduct Time

Length of Sentence  Good-Conduct Time
Less than 1 vear  1 5 days for each month of the sentence
1 year to less than 3 yearsp­~ ~  6 days for each month of the sentence
3 years to less than 5 years  7 days for each month of the sentence
5 years to less than 10 years  8 days for each month of the sentence
10 years or more, excluding life  10 days for each month of the sentence

NOTE: If the term of confinement is reduced or if an additional sentence increases the term of confinement, recompute the good-conduct time at the abatement I appropriate to the new term of confinement.
Mail and Correspondence
8-35. The FCF staff keeps a record of inspection of each prisoner’s mail, correspondence, and authorized correspondents on DD Form 499. The
8-14 Battlefield Confinement of United States Military Prisoners
guidance outlined in Chapter 7 and AR 190-47 also applies to the battlefield confinement of US military prisoners.
Prisoner Personal Property and Funds
8-36. Prisoners in the FCF are permitted to place personal property in safekeepingif it is not authorized for retention by the facility commander. The guidance outlined in Chapter 7 and AR 190-47 also applies to the battlefield confinement of US military prisoners.
Support Personnel
8-37. Support personnel organic to a CS MP unit or an I/R MP unit provide support to the FCF. Support personnel include medical officers, chaplains, and social-serviceworkers. They may help administer the facility and are oriented and trained in custody and control procedures. Establish a formal training program that includes­
*     Supervisory and interpersonal communications skills. Self-defensetechniques. The use of force. Weapons qualification(seeDA Pam 350-38). First aid. Emergency action plans. Facility regulations. Riot control techniques.
Supply Services
8-38. Supply functions in an FCF are the same as in other military operations. However, stronger security measures and accountability procedures are necessary to prevent certain supplies and equipment from falling into the hands of prisoners. Weapons, ammunition, and emergency equipment, such as hand and leg irons, must be stored in maximum-security, locked racks or cabinets in a room that is located away from prisoner areas.
8-39. The unit logistics officer ensures that a sufficient amount of general and janitorial items are available to keep the facility sanitary and free of potential diseases. Issue the items under strict control procedures and on an as-needed basis to prisoners and staff. Items include mops, buckets, brooms, cleansers, and office supplies.
8-40. Issue health and comfort items to new prisoners during inprocessing and regularly thereafter. Prisoners request additional supplies on DD Form 504, and they receive the supplies gratuitously if they are in a nonpay status. Basic supplies include safety razors, bath soap, toothbrushes, toothpaste, and shoe polish.
8-41. Conduct a physical inventory monthly to reconcile and balance the records of the previous inventory, supplies received, and supplies issued to prisoners. The facility commander or his designated representative verifies the inventory in writing.
Battlefield Confinement of United States Military Prisoners 8-15
EMERGENCY PLANNING AND INVESTIGATIONS
8-42. The facility commander publishes formal plans for the apprehension of escaped prisoners, fire prevention, facility evacuation, prisoner riots and disorders, NBC evacuation, mass casualty, quarantine, special confinements, and prisoner processing. The plans must form part of the unit’s SOP and be tailored to the operational environment where the FCF is located. Test the plans at least every six months, and record tests of emergency action plans in the facility blotter. The EEI are as follows:
Alarm, notification, and escape validation procedures.
The manning of critical points outside the facility; for example, crowd

control procedures, likely escape routes, observation points, and
defensive positions.
Procedures to secure the prisoner population while executing an

emergency action plan.

Prisoner and cadre recall procedures and a means for organizing
forces; for example, search parties and riot control teams.
Procedures to terminate the plan and follow-up actions.
The mass casualty plan, including how to secure prisoners.

8-43. The facility commander organizes a reactionary force that is trained in the use of force, riot control procedures, and other emergency actions. The size of the reactionary force depends on the personnel assets available and the nature of the emergency.
8-44. Where appropriate or legally required, use AR 15-6to investigate reported incidents of misconduct, breaches of discipline, or violations of the UCMJ. Before interviewing prisoners suspected or accused of violations, advise them of their rights under Article 31, UCMJ, against self-incrimination. Any statement made may be used as evidence against them in a criminal trial or disciplinary-and-adjustment board proceeding. They have the right to consult with counsel and to have counsel present during questioning. A request to consult with counsel at this point does not automatically result in the case being referred to a three-member board. If requested, make arrangements for the prisoner to meet with an attorney as soon as practical. Interview relevant witnesses, including those identified by the prisoner, as deemed appropriate; and obtain written, sworn statements when possible. Complete the investigation expeditiously, and submit a disciplinary report to the facility commander.
8-45. Upon receipt of the disciplinary-and-adjustment board report, the facility commander reduces the report to a memorandum for record. He refers the case for’ counseling or reprimand, refers it to the disciplinary-and-adjustment board, or takes other appropriate action. (See AR 190-47for more information.)
RULES OF INTERACTION
8-46. The facility commander establishes and enforces the ROI that allow humane treatment and care of prisoners, despite the reason they are incarcerated. The ROI are established by the facility commander, and some include­
8-16 BattlefieldConfinement of United States Military Prisoners
Remaining professional and senring as positive role models for
prisoners.
Being firm, fair, and decisive in actions concerning prisoners.
Refraining from being too familiar or too belligerent with prisoners.

Avoiding becoming emotionally or personally involved.with prisoners.
Not gambling, fraternizing, or engaging in any commercial activities
with prisoners.

Not showing favoritism to any prisoners.

USE OF FORCE
8-47. Guidance on the use of force is incorporated in orders, plans, SOPs, and instructions at FDFs and FCFs. Using firearms or other means of deadly force is justified only under conditions of extreme necessity and as a last resort. Do not use physical force against a prisoner except in self-defense, to prevent escape, to prevent injury to others, to prevent damage to property, to quell a disturbance, to move an unruly prisoner, or as otherwise authorized in AR 190-47.
8-48. In the event of an imminelit group or mass breakout from the FCF or another general disorder, ensure that prisoners know authority prevails, order will be restored, and means are available to restore order by force if necessary. Before applying force, try to reason with prisoners if the situation permits. If reasoning fails or if the existing situation does not permit reasoning, issue prisoners a direct order to terminate the disorder. Do not give the order until it can be enforced effectively by applying force as the situation requires. Before escalating beyond a show of force, allow uninvolved prisoners to voluntarily assemble in a controlled area away from the disturbance.
8-49. When force is necessary, apply it according to the priorities of force and limit it to the minimum degree necessary. The use of deadly force is prescribed by AR 190-14. The application of the priorities of force, or the application of a higher numbered priority without first employing a lower numbered one, depends on and is consistent with the situation encountered during any particular disorder. The priorities of force for an FCF are as follows:
First: Verbal persuasion.

Second: Show of force.

Third: Chemical aerosol irritant projectors (subject to local and HN

restrictions).
Fourth: Use of physical force other than weapons fire.
Fifth: Presentation of deadly force capability.
Sixth: Deadly force.

8-50. The facility commander coordinates with the higher echelon commander and the SJA. He designates representatives who are authorized to direct the use of firearms and riot control agents in the event of a riot or other disturbance. Orders, plans, SOPs, and instructions include use-of-force rules and specify the types of weapons to be used.
BattlefieldConfinement of United States Military Prisoners 8-17
FM 3-19.40
ESCAPE

8-51. Provide each guard with a whistle or other suitable alarm. Per AR 190-14,using firearms to prevent an escape is justified only when there is no other reasonable means available. If a prisoner tries to escape from the facility, the guard­
*     Alerts other guards of the attempted escape by blowing three short blasts on a whistle or deliveringthe signal with another alarm.
Orders the prisoner to halt three times in a loud voice. Fires only when the prisoner has passed all barriers of the facility and is continuingto escape. (The location of a barrier is determined by the physical arrangement of the facility. It normally includes fences or walls enclosing athletic, drill, recreation, housing, and administrative areas.)
8-52. Do not fire on an escapee if it endangers others. When firing is necessary, aim shots to disable the prisoner rather than kill him. Guidance for the use of firearms by guards escorting prisoners outside the facility are the same as those for using firearms in the facility. (See AR 190-47 for more information.)
8-53. The facility commander ensures that guards are trained in the use of their assigned weapons. Orient all personnel on policies regarding the use of force and the provisions of AR 190-14.Issue 12-gauge shotguns with cylinder (unchoked)barrels to facility guards, and ensure that barrels do not exceed 20 inches in length. Authorized ammunition for armed guards (perimeter and escort) is number 9 shot in trap loads of 2 314 grams of powder and 1118 ounces of shot. Tower guards use number 00 buckshot ammunition.
8-54. Instruct tower and escort guards not to fire at less than 20 meters to
prevent prisoner escapes. Ensure that these instructions appear in training
programs and special instructions for guards.
8-55. Guards use a 9-millimeter pistol when escorting prisoners. Do not use rifles, machine guns, or submachine guns when guarding prisoners. Do not take weapons inside the controlled areas of an FCF except as directed by the facility commander.
TRANSPORTATION
8-56. The facility commander maintains safety and security for prisoners under his control. He is also responsible for transportation requirements when prisoners are in his custody. Ensure that guard and escort personnel are familiar with the use-of-force guidelines above and the movement tasks outlined in STP 19-95C14-SM-TG.Some of the tasks are as follows:
Motor vehicle transport. Escort guards­
. Know the type of vehicle, the departure time, the number of prisoners and their status, the number of assigned escorts,and the
type of weapon and restraint (if applicable), and the release procedures at the final destination. Know the actions to take in case of a disorder or an escape
attempt.
8-18 Battlefield Confinement of United States Military Prisoners
. Conduct a thorough vehicle search and remove or secure all items that can be used as weapons. . Do not handcuff two escape risk prisoners together or handcuff prisoners to any part of the vehicle. . Sign DD Form 2708 for each prisoner escorted out of the facility and frisk him before he enters the vehicle. . Follow the loadingprocedures for the vehicle.
Aircraft transport. Escort guards-Know the type of aircraft, the departure time, the number of prisoners and their status, the number of assigned escorts, and the type of weapon and restraint (if applicable), and the release procedures at the ha1 destination.
. Follow the procedures outlined in AR 190-47 for transporting
prisoners via a commercial aircraft.
. Sign for each prisoner on DD Form 2708.
. Do not secure prisoners to any part of the aircraft.
. Know latrine, beverage, meal, loading, and unloading procedures
as outlined in AR 190-47. Rail transport. Use two escort guards (one armed and one unarmed) when transporting prisoners by rail. If possible, transport prisoners in enclosed accommodations or compartments (day and night). If they are unavailable, use coach class or standard sleeping cars. Escort guards seat themselves in such a way that they block avenues of escape. The unarmed guard accompanies prisoners who use latrine facilities and remains in visual contact with them.
TRANSFER AND DISPOSITION OF PRISONERS
8-57. The FCF commander is prepared to transfer US military prisoners from his facility to other confinement facilities outside the TO or back to their units. He releases prisoners from confinement with proper authorization. He coordinates with the SJA and the next higher commander to determine release authority and for authentication of DD Form 2718. (See Chapter 7 and AR 190-47for detailed guidance on transferring prisoners.)
Battlefield Confinement of United States Military Prisoners 8-19
PART FOUR
Military Police Support to Civil-Military Operations
The CMO establish, maintain, influence, or exploit relations between the civilian populace and military forces or government and nongovernment civilian organizations and authorities. Operations are conducted in friendly, neutral, and hostile AOs to facilitate military operations and to consolidate and achieve US objectives. Military forces may perform activities and functions that a local, regional, or national government normally performs. Activities may occur before, during, or after military operations or, if directed, in the absence of military operations. The CMO may be performed by designated CA forces and/or other military forces.
The CA forces help plan, coordinate, and supervise CA activities to support CMO. The activities are mission-dependent and are determined after careful evaluation of mission requirements and the force mix and time available. Under the umbrella of CMO, CA forces perform FN support, civil-administration support, PRC, HA, and ES.
If required, I/R units are deployed and employed to support CMO in CONUS and OCONUS. The I/R units provide an array of significant capabilities by performing their wartime mission in peace and during conflicts. The MP must understand the intent of CMO because SA and the correct mind-set are critical. Since forces may be called upon to relieve human suffering, such as that encountered after a natural disaster, strict discipline measures and control may not be appropriate.
In Parts Two and Three, this manual addressed MP units’ capabilities during
internment and confinement operations. Part Four expands on these capabilities and
addresses resettlement operations in support CMO.
Chapter 9
Populace and Resource Control
Civilian and military authorities exercise PRC to provide security for the populace, deny personnel and materiel to an enemy, mobilize population and materiel resources, and detect and reduce the effectiveness of enemy agents. Populace control includes curfews, movement restrictions, travel permits, registration cards, and resettlement operations. Resource control includes licenses, regulations, guidelines, checkpoints, ration controls, amnesty programs, and facility inspections. This chapter addresses MP support to DC operations conducted under the umbrella of PRC operations.
Populace and Resource Control 9-1
DISLOCATED-CMLIAN OPERATIONS
9-1. The DC operations are a special category of PRC, and they are the most basic collective tasks performed by CA personnel. The DC operations minimize civilian interference with military operations and protect civilians from combat operations. They are normally performed with minimal military resources. Nonmilitary international-aid organizations, NGOs, and IHOs are the primary resources used by CA forces. However, CA forces may depend on other military units, such as I/R MP units, to assist with a particular category of civilians.
9-2. Controlling civilians is essential during military operations because uncontrolled masses of people can seriously impair the military mission. Commanders plan measures to protect civilians in the A0 and to prevent their interference with the mission.
CATEGORIES
9-3. During military operations, US forces must consider two distinct categories of civilians-those who remained in place and those who are dislocated. The first category includes civilians who are indigenous to the area and the local populace, including civilians from other countries. They may or may not need help; and if they can take care of themselves, they should remain in place.
9-4. The second category includes civilians who leave their homes for various reasons. They are categorized as DCs, and their movement and physical presence can hinder military operations. They probably require some degree of aid (medicine, food, clothing, water, and shelter) and may not be native to the area or the country. The term DC is generic, and it is further subdivided into categories (see Chapter 1).
LEGAL OBLIGATIONS
9-5. All commanders are under the legal obligation imposed by international law, including the Geneva Conventions and other applicable international humanitarian laws. In particular, commanders must comply with the principles and spirit of the law of land warfare during armed conflicts (and other operations unless directed otherwise by competent authorities), regardless of how they are characterized. (See FM 27-10 and the SJA for additional information.)
OBJECTIVES AND PRINCIPLES
9-6. The primary objective of DC operations is to minimize civilian interference with military operations. They also­
*     Protect DCs from combat operations. Prevent and control the outbreak of disease. Relieve human suffering. Centralize masses of DCs.
9-7. Although the Assistant Chief of Staff, G5 (Civil Affairs) (G5) or the Civil Affairs Officer (US Army) (S5) is the primary planner of DC operations, all
9-2     Populaceand Resource Control
military planners consider DC operations. The G5 or the S5, in conjunction with supporting CA units, assesses the needs of DCs to ensure that they receive adequate and proper help. He considers the cultural background of DCs and the cultural background of the country where DCs are located. The planning of DC operations differs at each level of command. All commands and national and international agencies involved in DC operations have clearly defined responsibilities within a single overall program. The following principles apply to DC operations:
Coordinate with the DOS, the UNOCHA, and FN civil and military
authorities to determine the appropriate levels and types of aid
required and available.

Minimize outside contributions to meet basic needs as DCs become
self-sufficient, and encourage DCs to become as independent as
possible.

Review the effectiveness of humanitarian responses, and adjust relief

activities as necessary.
Coordinate with CA units to use US, HN, international, and
third-nation organizations such as the United Nations Children’s
Fund (UNICEF)and the Cooperativefor American Relief Everywhere,
Incorporated (CARE).Their use not only capitalizes on experience but
also reduces requirements placed on US military forces.

Restrict the rights of DCs as required. Under international law, DCs

have the right to freedom of movement; but in the event of a mass

influx, security considerationsmay require restrictions.

PLANNING DISLOCATED-CMLIAN OPERATIONS
9-8. The planning scope for DC operations and the actual task implementation differ, depending on the command level and the TO. Before describing how MP units support DC operations, MP leaders must have a basic understanding of how CA forces plan DC operations. Except as specifically noted, planning considerations discussed in this manual are applicable to all tactical scenarios, including logistics operations for units in the COMMZ.
POLICES AND PROCEDURES
9-9. Based on national policy directives and other political efforts, the theater commander provides directives on the care, control, and disposition of DCs. The corps commander integrates the theater commander’s guidance with the corps ground tactical plan. The driving force for DC planning must be generated at corps level. At division, COSCOM, and other subordinate command levels, the DC plan must­
*     Allow the accomplishment of tasks assigned by higher command echelons. Be within the restrictions imposed by higher headquarters.
Guide subordinate commands in handling and routing DCs.
Ensure that all concerned parties-including the fire support
coordination center and the Assistant Chief of Staff, G3 (Operations
and Plans) (G3),or the Operations and Training Officer (US Army)

Populace and Resource Control 9-3
(S3breceive information on DC plans, routes, and areas of

concentration.
Help DCs by alleviating their suffering while awaiting status
determination.
Provide security and safety for DCs and soldiers by maintaining
proper order and discipline within the facility.

Provide an aggressive information program by using support agencies
and DC leadership.

9-10. The DC plans support the OPLAN. As a minimum, DC plans must address the­
*     Authorized extent of migration and evacuation. Minimum standards of care. Status and disposition of DCs. Designation of routes and movement control measures. Cultural and dietary considerations. Designation and delegation of responsibilities.
HANDLING CONSJDERATIONS
9-11. The care and control of DCs fulfill a dual purpose-to ensure that DCs receive the minimum essentials to subsist (food, water, clothing, shelter, and emergency medical aid) and to maximize the mobility of tactical forces and minimize civilian interference with military operations.The CA and MP forces coordinate and establish movement control early. Major considerations include a stay-put policy, collection points, and assembly areas (see Figure 9-1):
Stay-put policy. Civilians remain near their homes and under controlled movement. The policy assumes the capability for enforcement, information dissemination, and ES. The HN may have a policy that US forces support, but US forces do not have the authority or the right to enforce the policy. It is not within the authoritative capability of US forces.
Collection points. A collection point establishes control and direction over the movement of the civilian populace, and it is the primary measure for gaining initial control over DCs. It is a temporary area for small numbers of DCs until they can return to their homes or move to a safer area. It is as far forward as possible during the flow of battle. Because a collectionpoint is temporary, screeningby CA forces, MI, or MP is quick and may include screening for intelligence information and emergency assistance. Screening takes place to segregate EPWs, CIS,and allied soldiers from DCs. Local civilians or civilian agencies can operate collection points under the supervision of tactical or support troops or CA personnel. The MP become involved in DC operations when civilian congestion along MSRs threatens the mobility of the maneuver force. They may be the first US elements to address DC problems and initiate actions to restore force mobility.
Assembly areas. Assembly areas are temporary holding areas for
civilians before they return to their homes or move to a more secure
area. Detailed screeningor segregation of DC categories takes place at
9-4     Populace and Resource Control 78
m” QQDC cotlection points 2-12
Checkpoints
facility@ DC assembly area
m
@ Emergency rest area (as required) Not to scale % Objective
Figure 9-1. Sample DC Overlay
assembly areas. They are usually located in a secure, stable environment and may include schools, churches, hotels, and warehouses. When selecting a specific area, consider the ability to provide overnight accommodations for several days. Local civilians can operate assembly areas under the supervision of tactical or support troops or CA personnel.
EVACUATION
9-12. Evacuation creates serious problems and is only considered as a last resort. Per US doctrine, a division or higher commander can order an evacuation. When the decision is made to evacuate a community, CA and MP make detailed plans to prevent uncontrolled groups from disrupting the movement of military units and supplies. Consider the following when planning a mass evacuation:
Transportation. The CA plans for the maximum use of civilian
transportation. Security.The CA helps the Assistant Chief of Staff, G2 (Intelligence) (G2)with security screening and documentation of evacuees. Since the civilians are being removed from the area where they can best take care of themselves, the military provides security for them after
Populace and Resource Control 9-5
evacuation. They also provide security for property left behind,
including farm animals and pets.
Documentation. Evacuees may need ID documents showing their
name and the locality from which they were evacuated. As a control ,
technique, CA personnel prepare a manifest that lists evacuees for
movement.

Briefing. The MCO briefs evacuees before movement. He uses leaflets, loudspeakers, posters, and other means available. The briefing explains details of the move, such as restrictions on personal belongings and the organization and schedule for the movement.
Rations. For a movement lasting no more than 2 days, supply personnel issue rations to each evacuee at the time of departure or at designated points en route.
Health care.The public health team makes maximum use of civilian medical personnel, equipment, and supplies to provide health care to evacuees. Use military medical personnel, equipment, and supplies as supplements if necessary. Take proper steps to prevent the spread of infectious diseases before movement.
Return. Evacuation plans provide for evacuees’ return and the criteria for determining the duration of their absence.
MOVEMENT
9-13. Directing and controlling movement are vital when handling masses of DCs. The G5 and HN authorities are responsible for mass DC operations, and the MP may help direct DCs to alternate routes. If possible, incorporate HN assets in planning and implementation. Consider the following:
Route selection. When selecting routes for civilian movement, CA personnel consider the types of transportation common to the area. They coordinate the proposed traffic circulation plan with the transportation officer and the PM. All DC movements take place on designated civilian evacuation routes.
Route ID. After designating movement routes, CA personnel mark them in languages and symbols that civilians, US forces, and allied forces understand. The PSYOP units, MP, HN military forces, and other allied military units can help mark routes.
Control and assembly points. After selecting and marking movement routes, CA and HN authorities establish control and assembly points at selected key intersections. The G5 or S5 coordinates locations with the PM, the movement control center, and the Assistant Chief of Staff, G4 (Logistics) (G4) to include control and assembly points in the traffic circulation plan.
Emergency rest areas. The CA personnel set up emergency rest areas at congested points to provide immediate needs (water, food, fuel, maintenance, and medical services). Notify the PM to ensure that these areas are included in MP area security operations.
Local and national agencies. Using local and national agencies conserves military resources and reduces the need for interpreters and translators. Civilian authorities normally have legal status and are best equipped to handle their own people.
9-6 Populaceand Resource Control
FACILITIES
9-14. When large groups of civilians are quartered temporarily (less than 6 months) or semipermanently (more than 6 months), the commander may task CA units to establish a DC facility. If existing facilities (HN, NGO, IHO, or 10) are suitable for DC facilities and HN personnel are available to administer and operate the facility, MP units may not be required to establish I/R facilities. Under this scenario, CA units provide the HN with technical advice, support, and assistance, depending on the requirements. They may also furnish additional detachments and functional teams or specialists to resolve public health, welfare, and safety problems at the facility.
9-15. If the commander deploys MP units to the TO or tasks them to support DC operations, MP help set up, administer, and operate facilities in close coordination with CA forces, the HN, PSYOP units, NGOs, IHO, IOs, and other interested agencies. The MP unit commander becomes the I/R facility commander.
MILITARY POLICE SUPPORT TO DISLOCATED-CMLIAN OPERATIONS
9-16. The support of DC operations begins before an MP unit arrives in the TO or is tasked with the mission. The I/R facility commander has a thorough understanding of international law, the concept of DC operations, and how they apply to the mission. If time permits, he contacts the in-country G5/S5, CA units, and other organizations that may have a role in DC operations (see Chapter 1). The CA forces provide MP leaders and soldiers with expertise on factors that directly affect DC operations. Some of the factors include­
*
The availability of HN agencies and the status of infrastructure.

*
Ethnic differences and resentments. Social structures (family and regional). Religious and symbolic systems (beliefs and behaviors). Political structures (distribution of power). Economic systems (sources and distribution of wealth). Links among social, religious, political, and economic dynamics. The cultural history of the area. Attitudes toward US military forces. Logistical requirements.

9-17. When deployed to the TO, MP leaders coordinate with higher headquarters G5lS5, CA, PSYOP, HN, NGOs, IHO, and 10s before setting up and operating the I/R facility. After a clear understanding of the mission, the concept of operations, and other available information, the IIR facility commander uses the MDMP to determine specific tasks the MP unit performs to accomplish the mission. Some considerations include­
*     Location.
Construction.
Setup.
Processing.
Screening.

Populace and Resource Control 9-7
Classification.
ID.
Clothing and equipment.
Subsistence.
Dining facilities.
Medical and sanitation.
Self-government.
Discipline.
Control.
Administration.
L&O.
ROI.
ROE.
Transportation.
Disposition.
LOCATION
9-18. The I/R facility commander coordinates with CA, the G5IS5, and other military and nonmilitary organizations when selecting a site for DC operations. The location depends on the availability of supply routes, food, water, power, and waste disposal. Avoid sites near vital communications centers, large military installations, or other potential military targets. Also consider the susceptibility of the area to natural and man-made disasters (floods,pollution, and fire) and the use of facility personnel as a source of local labor support.
CONSTRUCTION
9-19. The DCs, local agencies, or government employees construct facilities when possible. The supporting command’s logistics and transportation assets acquire and transport materials to build or modify existing facilities. Local sources may provide materials within legal limitations. The supporting command also furnishes medical, subsistence, and other supporting assets to establish DC facilities. Engineer support and military construction materials may be necessary when I/R facilities are set up in areas where local facilities are unavailable; for example, hotels, schools, halls, theaters, vacant warehouses, and unused factories.
9-20. The TCMS contains basic plans, specifications, and material requirements for building EPWICI facilities based on population. The plans can be easily modified for DC operations in temperate, frigid, tropic, and desert climates.
9-21. If necessary, CS MP units and I/R MP units set up the facility using acquisitioned tentage and additional materials. The I/R facility commander considers the type of construction necessary to satisfy the needs of the DC operation. Some considerations are the­
*     Local climate. Anticipated permanency of the facility.
9-8     Populaceand Resource Control
Number of facilities to be constructed.
Availability of local materials.
Extent of available military resources and assistance.

9-22. Subdivide the facility into sections or separate compounds to ease administration and DC tension. Each section can serve as an administrative subunit for transacting facility business. Major sections normally include facility headquarters, hospital, dining facility, and sleeping areas. Subdivide sleeping areas for families, unaccompanied children, unattached females, and unattached males. Consider cultural and religious practices, and try to keep families together. Figure 9-2, page 9-10, shows a sample DC I/R facility. Additional facilities, fencing, and other requirements are based on the-
Number of civilians.
Diversity of the population.
Resources available.
Need for a reactionary force.
Need to establish an animal compound.
Need to establish a vehicle-parking area.
PROCESSING
9-23. The initial reception of DCs begins with their transport from the assembly area to the inprocessing center of the I/R facility. Conduct processing in a positive manner because DCs are fearful. Ensure that DCs clearly understand why they are being processed and know what to expect at each station. The facility commander, a HN representative, or another official conducts an entrance briefing to DCs upon their arrival.
9-24. While the EPWICI processing procedures discussed in previous chapters provide a foundation, IIR personnel must be aware of unique aspects when processing DCs. Military personnel provide training and support, while NGOs, IHOs, and 10s actually process DCs. The number and type of processing stations vary from operation to operation. Table 9-1, page 9-11, shows stations that may be required during DC operations.
9-25. The I/R facility commander determines the accountability procedures and requirements necessary for DC operations. Translators are present throughout processing. A senior person greets new arrivals and makes them feel welcome. Brief DCs on facility policies and procedures and screen them to identify security and medical concerns. Offer them the use of personal-hygiene facilities, and always maintain family integrity.
9-26. Conduct pat-down searches to ensure that weapons are not introduced
into the compound. Conduct same-gender searches when possible, and do not
conduct strip searches. Speed and security considerations may require
mixed-gender searches. If so, perform them in a respectful manner, using all
possible measures to prevent any action that could be interpreted as sexual .
molestation or assault. The on-site supervisor carefully controls soldiers doing
mixed-gender searches to prevent allegations of sexual misconduct. Using
HN, NGO, or IHO assets to conduct searches may prevent an intense
situation from developing.
Populace and ResourceControl 9-9
V
A

v
4
9

4
Meeting hall for information dissemination
v
4
Billets for Recreation families Dining facility
n
Billets for
unescorted
children

I

compound
Gate entrance1
NOTE: The animal compound exit point Security fencing can be located outside the facility.
Figure 9-2. Sample DC I/R Facility
9-10 Populace and Resource Control
FM 3-1 9.40
Table 9-1. Actions During lnprocessing

Station  Purpose  Responsible Individuals*  Actions
1  Search and  IIR staff, MI, NGOs, IHOs,  Conduct a pat-down search to ensure that
screening  and 10s  weapons are not introduced into the
facility.
Ensure that the facility is not infiltrated by
insurgents.
2  Accountability  IIR staff  Prepare forms and records to maintain
accountability of DCs. Use forms and
records provided by HN, CA, or those
used for EPWICI operations that may
apply to DCs.
3  ID card or band  IIR staff  Issue an ID card or band to each DC if
required to ease facility administration and
control.
4  Medical evaluation  Medical personnel  Evaluate DCs for signs of illness or injury,
and treat them as necessary,
5  Assignment  I/R staff  Assign a sleeping area to each DC.
6  Personal items  IIR staff  Issue personal-comfort items and clothing
if available.

*The number of people performing these tasks depends on the number of DCs and the time available. When possible, allow HN authorities to conduct most of the inprocessing.
SCREENING
9-27. Screening may be necessary to prevent infiltration by insurgents, enemy agents, or escaped members of hostile armed forces. Although intelligence and other units may screen DCs, friendly and reliable local civilians can perform this function under the supervision of MP and CA personnel. Screeners carefully apply administrative controls to prevent infiltration and preclude alienation of people who are sympathetic to US objectives. The screening process also identifies technicians and professionals to help administer the facility; for example, policemen, schoolteachers, doctors, dentists, nurses, lawyers, mechanics, carpenters, and cooks.
CLASSIFICATION
9-28. The MP classify DCs during processing. They coordinate with CA, NGOs, IHOs, and 10s to determine proper classifications. Expect a continuing need for reclassification and reassignment of DCs. Statements made by a DC and the information on his ID papers determine his initial classification. Agitators, enemy plants, and individuals who should be classified as EPWs or CIS will be identified by their activities. Reclassify them according to their identity or ideology.
IDENTIFICATION
9-29. Identifying DCs may or may not be necessary; it depends on guidance from higher headquarters, CA, the HN, and other agencies. The need for ID varies from operation to operation, and it is used to-
*
Verify rosters against the actual population.
Populace and Resource Control 9-11
Provide timely reunification of family members.
Match DCs with their medical records in case of a medical emergency
or evacuation.
Check identities of DCs against the transfer roster.

9-30. An ID card can be used to facilitate ID. It contains the DC7sname, photograph, and control number. The control number may be an ISN or a sequenced control number specific to the DC. Color-coded IDS permit ID by categories (see Chapter 1).An ID band permits rapid, reliable ID of an individual and may also be used in DC operations. While DCs cannot be prevented from removing or destroying ID bands, most will accept their use for ID purposes. When ID bands or cards deteriorate, replace them immediately.
CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT
9-31. Supply DCs with adequate, suitable clothing and sleeping equipment if they do not have supplies with them. Requisition clothing and equipment through NGOs, IHOs, IOs, and HN sources when possible. In a combat environment, use available captured clothing and equipment. Ensure that DCs wear clothing until it is unse~iceable,and replace it as necessary.
SUBSISTENCE
9-32. Ensure that food rations are sufficient in quantity, quality, and variety to maintain health and prevent weight loss and nutritional deficiencies. Consider the habitual diet of the DC population, and be aware that DCs may bring their own rations and cooking utensils. Allow DCs to prepare their own meals after coordination with CA, the HN; and NGOs, IHOs, 10s who support the facility.
9-33. Ensure that expectant and nursing mothers and children under the age of 15receive additional food in proportion to their needs. Increase the rations of workers based on the type of labor performed. Provide plenty of fresh water. A good planning factor is 20 gallons per individual per day.
9-34. Make minimal menu and feeding-schedule changes to prevent unrest among the DC population. Inform the DC leadership when changes must be made.
DINING FACILITIES
9-35. Dining-facilityrequirements vary depending on the number of DCs and the availability of equipment. If deemed necessary, the VR facility commander can authorize local procurement of cooking equipment. Consult with SJA to determine the purchasing mechanism and the legality of items being purchased. Coordinate with NGOs, IHOs, and 10s for food service support. Train selected DCs to perform food service operations, and ensure that they are constantly supervised by US food service personnel.
MEDICAL AND SANITATION CONSIDERATIONS
9-36. Due to the temporary nature of an VR facility, the need for medical care and sanitation intensifies. If possible, locate a sick call tent adjacent to each
9-12 Populace and Resource Control
major compound inside the facility to ensure prompt medical screening and treatment. Enforcement and education measures ensure that the facility population complies with basic sanitation measures. Provide medical care via organic L/R medical personnel or coordinate with the appropriate HN medical authorities. To prevent communicable diseases, follow the guidance in FM 21-10 and other applicable publications. Conduct routine, preplanned hehlth, comfort, and welfare inspections that appear to be random. Inspections ensure that the facility is safe, sanitary, and hazard-free. When conducting inspections­
*
Ensure that their purpose is conveyed and emphasized to DC leaders. Respect cultural beliefs such as religious tenets and shrines. The INS,
international support groups, community leaders, CA, and DC leaders are good sources for information regarding cultural sensitivities. Treat DCs and their possessions with respect.
SELF-GOVERNMENT
9-37. One of the best ways to ensure DC cooperation in a facility is to establish a form of self-government. It minimizes the impression that DCs are under the control of a foreign government and allows them to feel a degree of control over their lives. Chapter 5 and AR 190-8 contain procedures for establishing a CI committee. Use the procedures as a model for establishing a DC self-government, and coordinate with CA for assistance.
9-38. Self-government leaders can help solve problems before they become major events. The infrastructure of self-government promotes a stable environment where rapport is built between the facility commander, the DC leadership, and the DC population. This, in turn, reduces tension and provides an effective means of communicating reliable information to the facility population.
9-39. The DCs can submit complaints and requests to the IIR facility commander via­
*     An elected DC internment committee. A written complaint. A visiting representative of the UNHRC or a similar agency.
DISCIPLINE
9-40. Facility commanders establish and strictly enforce measures to maintain discipline and security. Establish rules that can be easily followed by everyone, and coordinate the rules with SJA and HN authorities. Determine how to enforce rules and how to deal with DCs who violate noncriminal rules. Establish daily or periodic routines and responses that are conducive to good discipline and control. Ensure that facility personnel­
* Enforce policies and procedures to control DCs.
Give reasonable orders decisively and in a language that DCs understand. Post copies of the UN mandate relating to the situation in every
compound where DCs can easily read them.
Populace and Resource Control 9-13
Post facility rules, regulations, instructions, notices, orders, and
announcements that DCs are expected to obey in an easily accessed
area. Ensure that the information is printed in a language that DCs
understand, and provide a copy to DCs who do not have access to
posted copies.

Ensure that DCs obey orders, rules, and directives.

Report DCs who refuse or fail to obey an order or a regulation to DC
leaders and HN authorities.
Do not fraternize with DCs.
Do not donate or receive gifts or engage in any commercial activity

with DCs.

9-41. Discipline and control also apply to I/R facility personnel. They­
*     Observe rigorous self-discipline. Maintain a professional, impersonal attitude. Follow ROI and ROE guidelines. Cope with hostile or unruly behavior and incidents calmly. Take fair, immediate, decisive action.
CONTROL
9-42. Controllingpersonnel is the key to successful facility operations.The I/R facility commander ensures efficient, effective control that meets US obligations under international law. Facility control includes measures to reduce waste and avoid duplication of effort. The commander­
* Establishes and maintains discipline quickly and fairly.
Publishes and enforces rules of conduct and updates them as
necessary.
Serves as the single POC, coordinating all matters within the facility
and with outside organizations and agencies.
Establishes and posts barracks rules such as those shown in Figure

9-3.
9-43. Use HN civilians as cadre for facility administration, and encourage DCs to become involved in facility administration. Past experience shows that about 6 percent of DCs should be employed on a full-time basis. If possible, I/R facility and CA personnel organize and train cadre before the facility opens. The HN civilians come from public and private welfare organizations and are under military supervision.
9-44. Problems might stem from DCs’ state of mind. The difficulties they experienced may affect their acceptance of authority. They may have little initiative or may be uncooperative because of an uncertain future. They may be angry because of their losses, or they may resort to looting and general lawlessness because of their destitution. The IIR facility commander can minimize difficulties through careful administration and­
*     Maintaining different national and cultural groups in separate
facilities or sections. Keeping families together.
9-14 Populace and Resource Control
Barracks Rules
1.
Do not move from assigned barracks without permission.

2.
Maintain the sanitary and physical condition of barracks.

3.
Empty and wash trash cans daily.

4.
Do not bring food or cooking utensils in barracks.

5.
Do not take food, except baby food and fruit, from the dining facility.

6.
Do not have weapons in barracks or surrounding facilities.

7.
Do not have pets in the dining facility.

8.
Turn off indoor lights in barracks by 2300.

9.
Do not play radios, record players, or tape recorders in barracks after 2300.

10.
Do not allow children to play on fire escapes.

11.
Watch children carefully, and do not allow them to wander out of residential areas.

12.
Do not throw diapers or sanitary napkins in toilets. Place these items in trash cans.

13.
Do not allow children to chase or play with wild animals because they bite and carry diseases.

14.
Obtain barracks suppliesfrom the barracks chief.

15.
Do not smoke, use electrical appliancesfor heating or cooking, or have open fires in barracks.

Figure 9-3. Sample Barracks Rules
Separating unaccompanied males, females, and children under the
age of 18(based on HN laws as to when a child becomes an adult).
Furnishing DCs with information about their status and future.
Allowing DCs to speak freely to facility officials.
Involving DCs in facility administration, work, and recreation. Establishing quick contact with agencies for aid and family reunification.
ADMINISTRATION
9-45. Disseminating instructions and information to the facility population is vital. Communications may be in the form of notices on bulletin boards, posters, public address systems, loudspeakers, facility meetings and assemblies, or a facility radio station. The CA teams and area PSYOP units can help disseminate information.
9-46. Another tool for effective administration is using liaison personnel. Liaison involves coordination with all interested agencies. The US government and military authorities, allied liaison officers, and representatives of local governments and international agencies can provide assistance. Implement the following standards related to DC treatment:
Do not penalize or expose them to unfavorable treatment because their presence in the country is considered unlawful.
Populace and Resource Control 9-15 Do not restrict their movement except when necessary for public health and order.
Allow them to enjoy their fundamental rights.
Treat them as persons whose plight requires special understanding
and sympathy. Provide necessary assistance; and do not subject them
to cruel, inhumane, or degrading treatment.
Do not discriminate because of race, religion, political opinion,
nationality, or country of origin.
Recognize that they are persons before the law who enjoy free access
to the courts of law and other competent administrative authorities.

Base the I/Rfacility’s location on the safety needs and well-being of
DCs and the security needs of the receiving state.
Provide them with necessities (food, shelter, and basic sanitary and
health facilities).

Maintain family units when possible.
Provide assistance for tracing relatives.
Protect minors and unaccompanied children.
Allow them to send and receive mail.
LAW AND ORDER
9-47. The I/R facility commander is also the safety and security officer. He deals with crimes against persons and property, performs security patrols, and conducts reaction team operations. If an L&O team is attached to the organization, it performs L&O-related functions. Otherwise, the commander uses organic resources, such as an MP guard company, to establish an hlP desk and blotter and perform other specific functions. The location of the MP station depends on the facility’s layout and the commander’s needs.
9-48. Some other sources for security officers include local police forces, HN paramilitary and military forces, and the facility population. Police personnel within the population can supplement security teams or constitute a facility police force if necessary. Internal and external patrols are necessary; however, ensure that security does not give the impression that the facility is a prison. Base patrol areas and distribution plans on the size of the facility and the number of DCs in each subdivision. If a DC is apprehended for committing a crime, coordinate with SJA and HN authorities to determine the disposition and the status of the subject and the disposition of the case paperwork, evidence (including crime lab analysis results), and recovered property. Also obtain information on items, procedures, and agreements unique to the supported HN.
9-49. Be prepared to perform civil-disturbance operations to restore L&O. Identify a reactionary force that can be immediately deployed and employed inside the facility to control a disturbance. The size of the reactionary force depends on the facility population and the available military forces. The reactionary force is well trained, well organized, and knowledgeable of applicable ROE, the use-of-force policy, and the use of NLWs and civil-disturbance measures. (See Appendix B and FM 19-15 for more information.)
9-16 Populaceand Resource Control
9-50. Basic guidelines and the foundation for I/R facility L&O are provided in FMs 19-10 and 19-20. The I/R facility commander tailors the forms and procedures to his specific mission.
RULES OF INTERACTION
9-51. The ROI provide soldiers with a guide for interacting with the DC population. The following points may be included in the ROI:
Avoid discussingpolitics or immigration policies with DCs.

Avoid making promises to DCs. If cornered, reply with, “I will see

what I can do.”

Refrain from making obscene gestures at DCs because they may

understand the meaning.
Avoid making derogatory remarks or political comments about DCs.
Local linguists understand English, and DCs might understand it.

Treat DCs equally. They may become offended if they do not receive
the same treatment or resources others receive.
Respect religious articles and materials.

Treat medical problems seriously.

Treat DCs with respect.

Greet DCs in their own language.

Clear phrases that DCs teach to soldiers through a linguist to ensure
that they do not contain obscene language.

RULES OF ENGAGEMENT
9-52. The DC ROE vary from operation to operation. The CINC establishes ROE in conjunction with SJA and upon joint staff approval. The CINC approves special ROE developed for use in DC facilities that are controlled and secured by MP. The ROE may evolve to fit the changing environment, ensuring continued protection and safety for the DC population and US personnel. Ensure that ROE remain simple and understandable so that soldiers are not confused and do not have to memorize extensive checklists. Key definitions are­
*     Deadly force. Force that is likely to cause death or serious bodily harm. An attack with an edged weapon and the use of a firearm are examples of deadly force.
Hostile act. An attack or the use of deadly force against a person. Hostile intent. A threat of deadly force against a person, This term is used to anti-cipate a hostile act or to react to a threat before it occurs by applying graduated levels of nondeadly force.
9-53. Design ROE around escalating use of force. Resolve a conflict with the minimum force necessary, but allow leaders and soldiers to escalate the level of force as necessary to retain control. For example­
*     First: Give a verbal warning.
Second: Present a show of force, such as pepper spray, a stun gun,or a
shotgun.
Third Use pepper spray or a stun gun.

Populaceand Resource Control 9-17
Fourth: Use a riot baton.
Fifth: Fire a shotgun using nonlethal rounds or bird shot.

9-54. Nonlethal measures can be authorized by the ROE anytime during an operation to protect soldiers and DCs from injury. The NLWs include riot batons, pepper spray, stun guns, and shotguns loaded with nonlethal munitions or bird shot. The ROE may include nondeadly force to protect mission-essential equipment from damage or destruction. Mission-essential equipment includes tactical and nontactical vehicles, communications equipment, weapons, computers,and office and personal equipment.
9-55. The ROE normally authorize the use of deadly force only in extreme situations, such as­
*     When there is an immediate or imminent threat of death or serious bodily harm to US personnel, civilians, or DCs. When its use would not significantly increase the risk of death or serious bodily harm to innocent persons.
When lesser, nondeadly force fails or is impractical. When it is a last resort.
TRANSPORTATION
9-56. The DC facility requires adequate transportation assets. Since MP units have limited organic transportation assets, the unit MCO or the CA transportation specialist coordinates and determines the types and numbers of vehicles required and makes provisions to have them on hand. The I/R facility commander uses civilian or captured enemy vehicles when possible.
DISPOSITION
9-57. The final step in DC operations is the disposition of DCs. Allowing DCs to return to their homes as quickly as tactical considerations permit lessens the burden on military and civilian economies. It also reduces the danger of diseases that are common among people in confined areas. When DCs return home, they can help restore their towns and can better contribute to their own support. If DCs cannot return home, they may resettle elsewhere in their country or in a country that accepts them. Guidance on the disposition of DCs comes from higher authority upon coordination with US forces, national authorities, and international agencies.
9-58. The most important step in the disposition of DCs is the final handling of personnel and property. Before the DC operation is terminated, the I/R facility commander consults with higher headquarters, the SJA, and other pertinent agencies to determine the proper disposition of records.
9-18 Populace and Resource Control
Chapter 10
Humanitarian Assistance and Emergency Services
The HA operations encompass short-range programs aimed at ending or alleviating human suffering. They are usually conducted in response to natural or man-made disasters. The HA operations are designed to supplement or complement the efforts of HN civil authorities or agencies that have primary responsibility to provide relief. This type of assistance must not duplicate other forms of assistance provided by the US government. Government agencies are primarily responsible for ES operations (police, fire, rescue, and disaster preparedness). The effectiveness of ES plans and organization has a direct impact on CMO, and support to ES agencies can be provided as civil-military assistance. Although HA and ES operations can be conducted OCONUS, they are primarily conducted in CONUS.
10-1. Military forces provide a secure environment for humanitarian-relief efforts. The HA mission covers a broad range of tasks, and specific requirements are situation-dependent. The HA operations have different meanings to different people, based on their perspective. The operation can encompass reactive programs (disaster relief) and proactive programs (humanitarian and civic assistance [WCAI).
10-2. The HA operations present a different set of challenges to US military forces. While civilian and military authorities exercise PRC, they may not know the magnitude of the situation requiring HA. In addition, US forces may be tasked to perform HA operations in numerous and complex environments. As with MP support to PRC operations, the MP commander has a clear understanding of the operational environment, the ROE, and legal considerations before setting up an I/R facility to support HA operations.
OPERATIONAL ENVIRONMENT
10-3. The US force commander coordinates with other responding organizations and assesses the environment where US forces will conduct HA operations. The operational environment includes the political situation, physical boundaries, the potential threat to forces, global visibility, and the media interest climate.
10-4. After the US force commander confirms the operational environment, he determines the types and numbers of forces required to meet the mission.
Humanitarian Assistance and Emergency Services 10-1
The operational environment also determines the ROE to be used within the AO. The more permissive the environment, the more predictable the outcome of the mission. The HA operational environments are categorized as permissive, uncertain, and hostile. The distinction between HA conducted in a permissive environment versus a hostile environment is clear. Failure to make this distinction results in inadequate planning and unrealistic expectations.
PERMISSIVE ENVIRONMENT
10-5. A permissive environment is normally associated with relief operations following a natural disaster or an economic collapse. Assistance is provided at the request of the host government. A permissive environment is conducive to HA operations, and little or no opposition or resistance to military forces is expected. Nonhostile, anti-US interests may try to disrupt US military activities. The physical-security environment may be permissive; however, other nonthreatening means (demonstrations) may be employed to impair credibility or to reduce the effectiveness of US military activities. A permissive environment is characterized by­
*     A commonality of purpose for all parties. A quantifiable problem (often a single, natural disaster). Clear objectives (providing support until normalcy returns). HN cooperation.
UNCERTAIN ENVIRONMENT
10-6. In an uncertain environment, FN forces do not have effective control of the territory and population in the intended AO. They may or may not be receptive to HA operations.
HOSTILE ENVIRONMENT
10-7. A hostile environment includes conditions, circumstances, and influences ranging from a civil disorder or a terrorist act to full-scale combat. Forces conducting HA must be prepared for a full range of contingencies. Commanders can employ forces to safeguard the populace, defend the perimeter, provide escort convoys, screen the local populace, and assist in personnel recovery operations. A hostile environment is characterized by­
*     Multiple conflicting parties. Imminent danger to all parties. Relief as a weapon manipulated by combatants for political gain.
10-8. The more hostile the environment, the less predictable the outcome of the mission. The HA forces must be prepared to counter actions by hostile forces attempting to disrupt the HA mission and to counter actions by a previously friendly populace. Commanders do not depend on their humanitarian mission to shield them from hostile acts. The joint forces commander (JFC) coordinates with higher authorities and determines the appropriateness of the use of force. The effects of the environment on HA activities are shown in Figure 10-1.As the environment becomes more hostile, the requirement for security increases and the capability for HA (such as food distribution and medical assistance) decreases. (See FM 100-23-1for more information on HA operations.)
10-2 Humanitarian Assistance and Emergency Services
Figure 10-1. HA Environment
RULES OF ENGAGEMENT
10-9. The sensitive political and international nature of HA operations means that the CINC must coordinate the ROEdetails (which may change as the operation evolves) with the JFC. Under normal circumstances, the joint chief of staff’s (JCS’s) standing ROE apply to all military operations. The CINC requests supplemental measures to deal with the specifics of the mission. Actual ROE established for each HA mission depend on the individual situation and the operational environment.
10-10. The ROE development for forces participating in HA operations is essential to mission success and is characterized by restraint. The levels of force, tactics, and weaponry are evaluated and addressed. For multinational operations, all participating military forces establish common HA ROEto provide consistency within the force. Individual nations using separate ROE respond differently to the same situation. The following precepts are essential to the ROEfor US military forces:
The right of self-defense is never prohibited. The two elements of
self-defense are necessity and proportionality.
A unit commander defends against a hostile act or intent. A hostile act
must occur or a hostile intent must be apparent. The use of force must
be reasonable in intensity, duration, and magnitude to ensure the
safety of forces.
LEGAL CONSIDERATIONS
10-11. Regardless of the circumstances under which US forces are employed, international law obligates the commander with respect to civilians, governments, and economics. Agreements or the law of land warfare usually specify the requirements. The Hague and Geneva Conventions and similar
Humanitarian Assistance and Emergency Services 10-3
documents set forth treaty obligations, and FM 27-10 and other service publications explain the commander’s legal obligations.
10-12. The JFC must be aware of existing international agreements that may limit the flexibility of the HA mission. Existing agreements may not be shaped to support HA operations. Military HA commanders dealing with HNs and . 10s should anticipate the difficulties that international agreements can impose on HA operations.
10-13. Normally, the law of land warfare does not apply to HA operations. However, it is used in conjunction with the Geneva and Hague Conventions, protocols, and custom laws that may provide guidance to the JFC. Commanders, unless otherwise directed by competent authorities, comply with the principles and spirit of the law of land warfare during HA operations. Mission imperatives and tasks must have a sound legal basis, and commanders ensure that personnel conform to internationally accepted standards of behavior and actions-especially as they relate to the humane treatment of civilians, the respect for private property, and the use of force.
MILITARY POLICE SUPPORT
10-14. There are some key differences between MP support to DC operations and MP support to HA. Since HA operations are usually conducted in response to a disaster, the level of property devastation and human suffering may require special attention and planning considerations. One of the special considerations may be the need for temporary shelter. If the JFC determines that the availability of HN shelters or other semices is inadequate, he may request the assistance and deployment of CS or I/R units to accomplish the HA mission. When the decision is made to employ an MP unit, the MP commander becomes the I/R facility commander.
10-15. The MP support to HA operations begins before the unit arrives in the TO or is tasked with the mission. The I/Rfacility commander has a thorough understanding of the legal considerations and the concept of operations, including how they apply to the MP mission. If time permits, the I/R facility commander contacts the JFC G51S5, SJA, CA, and other organizations that may have a role in HA operations. The CA forces can provide expertise on factors that affect HA operations, such as-
The availability of HN agencies and the status of infrastructure.
Ethnic differences and resentments.
Social structures (family and regional).
Religious and symbolic systems (beliefs and behaviors).
Political structures (distribution of power).
Economic systems (sources and distribution of wealth).
Links among social, religious, political, and economic dynamics.
The cultural history of the area.
Attitudes toward US military forces.
10-16. When deployed to the TO, an I/R facility commander coordinates with
and receives updated information from higher headquarters G51S5, CA, and
PSYOP; the HN; and applicable NGOs, IHOs, and 10s before setting up and
10-4 Humanitarian Assistance and Emergency Services
operating an I/R facility. He uses the MDMP to determine the specific tasks the MP unit performs to accomplish the HA mission. Some considerations include­
*     Location. Construction. Setup. Processing. Screening. ID. Clothing and equipment. Subsistence. Dining facilities. Medical and sanitation. Self-government. Control and discipline. Administration. L&O. ROI. Transportation. Disposition.
LOCATION
10-17. The location of the I/R facility is extremely important, especially when responding to a disaster. Consider METT-TC, the susceptibility of the area to natural or man-made disasters (flood, pollution, and fire), and the use of HN personnel as a source of local labor support. The location also depends on the availability of supply routes, food, water, power, and waste disposal. The I/R facility commander selects the location of the facility after coordinating with JFC, CA, G5lS5, the HN, and other military and nonmilitary organizations.
CONSTRUCTION
10-18. Try to construct the facility using local agencies or government employees. The goal is to have the facility fully constructed and operational before accepting any civilians. This is important because the civilian population may have suffered total family or property loss and may not be in the best psychological or physical condition to help with construction efforts. Within legal limitations, use local sources and materials if they are available. Otherwise, use the supporting command’s logistics and transportation assets to acquire and transport the resources required to build or modify existing facilities for HA operations. The supporting command and the HN also furnish medical, subsistence, and other supporting assets to establish I/R facilities. Engineer support and military construction materials may be necessary when I/R facilities are set up in areas where local facilities are unavailable or destroyed; for example, hotels, schools, halls, theaters, vacant warehouses, unused factories, or workers’ camps. The TCMS can be used for HA operations. If necessary, MP units set up a facility using acquisitioned tentage and additional materials. The I/R facility commander considers the type of
Humanitarian Assistance and Emergency Services 10-5
construction necessary to satisfy the needs of the HA operation. Some considerations are-The local climate. The anticipated permanency of the facility. The number of facilities to be constructed. Local materials available. Military resources and assistance available.
SETUP
10-19. Subdivide the facility into sections or separate compounds to ease administration and alleviate stress among civilians. Each section can serve as an administrative subunit for transacting facility business. Major sections normally include facility headquarters, a hospital, a dining facility, and sleeping areas. Subdivide sleeping areas for families, unaccompanied children, unattached females, and unattached males. Consider cultural and religious practices, and try to keep families together. Figure 10-2 shows a sample HA I/R facility. Additional facilities, fencing, and other requirements are based on­
*     The number of civilians. The diversity of the population. Resources available. The need for a reactionary force. Guidance from higher headquarters, CA, and the HN. The need for temporary storage. The duration of the operation. The number of animals to be housed. The number of vehicles.
PROCESSING
10-20. Processing may or may not be required. Coordinate the decision to process civilians with NGOs, IHOs, IOs, the HN, CA, and other interested agencies. The initial reception begins with the transport of civilians from their neighborhoods or other places to the inprocessing center of the I/R facility. The HN (in coordination with NGOs, IHOs and 10s) normally arranges transportation. Civilians may be fearful and in a state of shock, so conduct processing in a positive manner. In most situations, they should clearly understand why they are being processed and know what to expect at each station. The facility commander, an HN representative, or another official conducts an entrance briefing to civilians upon their arrival.
10-6 Humanitarian Assistance and Emergency Services
Meeting hall
for information
dissemination
Billets
for Recreation
families      Dining
facility

!I
Billets for
unescorted
children

compound
Humanitarian Assistance and Emergency Services 10-7
10-21. While DC processing procedures in Chapter 9 provide a foundation, I/R facility personnel must be aware of unique aspects when conducting HA operations. Military personnel normally provide training and support, and HN authorities do the actual processing. The number and type of processing stations vary from operation to operation. Table 10-1 shows stations that are required for HA operations.
Table 10-1. Actions During lnprocessing

Station  Purpose  Responsible Individuals*  Actions
1  Accountability  HN and IIR staff  Prepare forms and records to maintain
accountability of civilians. Use forms and records
provided by the HN, CA, or those used for EPWICI
operations that may apply to HA operations.
2  ID card or  HN and IIR staff  Issue ID cards or bands to facilitate administration
band  and control of the facility if necessary.
3  Medical  HN, I/R staff, and medical  Evaluate civilians for signs of illness or injury.
evaluation  personnel
4  Assignment  HN and I/R staff  Assign each civilian a sleeping area.
5  Personal items  HN and I/R staff  Issue personal-comfort items and, if available,
clothing.

*The number of people performing these tasks depends on the number of civilians and the time available. Allow HN authorities to conduct most of the inprocessing.
10-22. The L/R facility commander determines the accountability procedures and requirements necessary for HA operations. Translators are present throughout processing. A senior person greets new arrivals and makes them feel welcome. Brief civilians on facility policies and procedures and screen them to identify security and medical concerns. Offer them the use of personal-hygiene facilities, and always maintain family integrity.
10-23. Conduct pat-down searches to ensure that weapons are not introduced into the compound. Conduct same-gender searches when possible, and do not conduct strip searches. Speed and security considerations may require mixed-gender searches. If so, perform them in a respectful manner, using all possible measures to prevent any action that could be interpreted as sexual molestation or assault. The on-site supervisor carefully controls soldiers doing mixed-gender searches to prevent allegations of sexual misconduct.
SCREENING
10-24. Depending on the environment, screening may or may not be necessary. The screening process also identifies technicians and professionals to help administer the facility; for example, policemen, schoolteachers, doctors, dentists, nurses, lawyers, mechanics, carpenters, and cooks.
IDENTWICATION
10-25. Identifying DCs may or may not be necessary; and it depends on guidance from higher headquarters, CA, and the HN. The need for ID varies from operation to operation, and it is used to-
Verify rosters against the actual population.
10-8 Humanitarian Assistance and Emergency Services Provide timely reunification of family members.
Match civilians with their medical records in case of a medical
emergency or evacuation.
Check identities of civilians against the transfer roster.

10-26. An ID card can be used to facilitate ID. It contains the civilian’s name, photograph, and control number. The control number may be an ISN or a sequenced control number specific to the civilian. Color-coded IDS may be necessary to permit ID. An ID band permits rapid, reliable ID of an individual and may also be used in HA operations. While civilians cannot be prevented from removing or destroying bands, most will accept their use for ID purposes. When ID bands or cards deteriorate, replace them immediately.
CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT
10-27. Supply civilians with adequate, suitable clothing and sleeping equipment if they do not have supplies with them. Requisition clothing and equipment through NGOs, IHOs, and 10s when possible. 1n.a hostile environment, use available captured clothing and equipment. Ensure that civilians wear clothing until it is unserviceable, and replace it as necessary.
SUBSISTENCE
10-28. Ensure that food rations are sufficient in quantity, quality, and variety to maintain health and prevent weight loss and nutritional deficiencies. Consider the habitual diet of the civilian population. Ensure that expectant and nursing mothers and children under the age of 15receive additional food in proportion to their needs. Increase the rations of workers based on the type of labor performed. Provide plenty of fresh potable water. Make minimal menu and feeding-schedule changes to prevent unrest among the population, and inform civilians when changes must be made.
DINING FACILITIES
10-29. Dining-facility requirements for HA operations are similar to those for DC operations. If deemed necessary, the I/R facility commander can authorize local procurement of cooking equipment. Consult with SJA to determine the purchasing mechanism and the legality of items being purchased. Coordinate with NGOs, IHOs, and 10s for food service support. A qualified food service person is authorized in each 19547AB URdetachment, and a food operations sergeant and a first cook provide food service support for each compound. Train selected civilians to perform food service operations, and ensure that they are constantly supervised by US food service personnel.
MEDICAL AND SANITATION CONSIDERATIONS
10-30. The need for medical care and sanitation intensifies in an I/R
environment due to its temporary nature, the lack of proper sanitation
facilities, and the lack of basic community services (potable water and sewer).
Enforcement and education measures ensure that the facility population
complies with basic sanitation measures. Provide medical care via organic UR
medical personnel or coordinate with the appropriate HN medical authorities.
To prevent communicable diseases, follow the guidance in FM 21-10 and other
Humanitarian Assistance and Emergency Services 10-9
applicable publications. Conduct routine, preplanned health, comfort, and welfare inspections that appear to be random. Ensure that inspections cause minimal disruption of space and privacy. Inspections ensure that the facility is safe,,sanitary,and hazard-free. When conducting inspections­
*     Ensure that their purpose is conveyed and emphasized to the civilian population. Respect cultural beliefs such as religious tenets and shrines. The INS, international support groups, community leaders, CA, and HN authorities are good sources for information regarding cultural sensitivities.
Treat civilians and their possessions with respect.
10-31. The I/R facility commander determines whether self-government is required and appropriate. If responding to a natural disaster, such as an earthquake, the civilian government may not be affected and the I/R facility may be used as shelter only. However, if the civilian government cannot be established or is nonoperational, self-government may be appropriate. Chapter 5 and AR 190-8 contain procedures for establishing a CI committee. Use the procedures as a model for establishing a CA self-government, and coordinate with CA for assistance.
10-32. Self-government leaders can help solve problems before they become major events. The infrastructure of self-government promotes a stable environment where rapport is built between the facility commander, the civilian leadership, and the civilian population. This, in turn, reduces tension and provides an effective means of communicating reliable information to the facility population.
10-33. Civilians can submit complai.nts and requests to the IIR facility commander via­
*
An elected civilian internment committee.
A written complaint.
A visiting representative of the UNHRC or a similar agency.
CONTROL AND DISCIPLINE
10-34. Controlling people is the key to successful facility operations. Civilians housed in I/R facilities during HA are not prisoners. Consider this fact when drafting rules and guidelines. Establish, maintain, and enforce discipline and security to avoid unstable conditions that may further affect civilians during HA operations. Establish and explain rules that can be easily followed by everyone in the facility. Coordinate with SJA and HN authorities to determine how to enforce rules and how to deal with civilians who violate noncriminal rules. Publish and enforce rules of conduct and update them as necessary. The I/R facility commander serves as the single POC and coordinates all matters with outside organizations or agencies. Keep barracks rules brief and to a minimum (see Figure 9-3, page 9-15).
10-35. Discipline and control also apply to I/R facility personnel. They­
*     Observe rigorous self-discipline.
10-10 HumanitarianAssistance and Emergency Services
Maintain a professional, impersonal attitude.
Follow the ROI and the ROE.
Cope with hostile or unruly behavior and incidents calmly.

*     Take fair, immediate, decisive action.
10-36. The I/R facility commander takes positive action to establish daily or periodic routines and responses that are conducive to good discipline and control. He ensures that IiR facility personnel­
*     Enforce policies and procedures.
Give reasonable orders decisively and in a language that residents
understand.
Post facility rules, regulations, instructions, notices, orders, and

announcements that residents are expected to obey in an easily
accessed area. Ensure that the information is printed in a language
that residents understand, and provide a copy to residents who do not
have access to posted copies.

Ensure that residents obey orders, rules, and directives.
Report residents who refuse or fail to obey an order or a regulation.
Do not fraternize with residents.
Do not donate or receive gifts or engage in any commercial activity

with residents.
ADMINISTRATION
10-37. Due to the large number of civilians requiring control and care, use HN civilians as cadre for facility administration when possible. The HN civilians should come from public and private welfare organizations and be under military supervision. Also encourage residents to become involved in facility administration. If possible, CA and I/R facility personnel organize and train cadre before the facility opens.
10-38. Problems might stem from civilians’ state of mind. The difficulties they experienced may affect their acceptance of authority. They may have little initiative or may be uncooperative because of an uncertain future. They may be angry because of their losses, or they may resort to looting and general lawlessness because of their condition. The IIR facility commander can minimize difficulties through careful administration and­
*     Maintaining different national and cultural groups in separate facilities or sections.
Keeping families together.
Separating unaccompanied males, females, and children under the
age of 18(based on HN laws as to when a child becomes an adult).

Mowing civilians to speak freely to facility officials.
Involving civilians in facility administration, work, and recreation.
Establishing quick contact with agencies for aid and family

reunification.
10-39. The IIR facility commander administers the facility to ensure that civilians are treated according to the following basic standards:
Humanitarian Assistance and Emergency Services 10-11
Do not restrict their movement except when necessary for public
health and order.

Allow them to enjoy their fundamental rights.
Treat them as persons whose plight requires special understanding
and sympathy. Provide necessary assistance, and do not subject them
to cruel, inhumane, or degrading treatment.

Do not discriminate because of race, religion, political opinion,

nationality, or country of origin.
Recognize that they are persons before the law who enjoy free access
to the courts of law and other competent administrative authorities.

Provide them with necessities (food, shelter, and basic sanitary and
health facilities).
Maintain family units when possible.
Provide assistance for tracing relatives.
Protect minors and unaccompanied children.
Allow them to send and receive mail.

Permit material assistance from friends and relatives.
Arrange for the registration of births, deaths, and marriages if
possible.

Grant them the means necessary to obtain a satisfactory, durable

solution.
Permit them to transfer assets to the country where they obtain a
durable solution.

Take steps to facilitate voluntary repatriation.
Provide humane treatment and protect them against violence,
intimidation, insults, and public curiosity.

10-40. Disseminating instructions and information to the facility population is vital. Communications may be in the form of notices on bulletin boards, posters, public address systems, loudspeakers, camp meetings and assemblies, or a facility radio station. The CA teams and area PSYOP units can help disseminate information.
10-41. Another tool for effective administration is using liaison personnel. Liaison involves coordination with all interested agencies. The US government and military authorities, allied liaison officers, and representatives of local governments and international agencies can provide assistance.
LAW AND ORDER
10-42. The I/R facility commander is also the safety and security officer. He deals with crimes against persons and property, performs security patrols, and conducts reaction team operations. If an L&O team is attached to the organization, it performs L&O-related functions. Otherwise, the commander uses organic resources, such as an MP guard company, to establish an MP desk and blotter and perform other specific functions. The location of the MP station depends on the facility’s layout and the commander’s needs.
10-12 Humanitarian Assistance and Emergency Services
10-43. Some other sources for security officers include local police forces, HN paramilitary and military forces, and the facility population. Police personnel within the population can supplement security teams or constitute a facility police force if necessary. Internal and external patrols are necessary; however, ensure that security does not give the impression that the facility is a prison. Base patrol areas and distribution plans on the size of the facility and the number of civilians in each subdivision. Before apprehending a civilian, the commander coordinates with SJA and HN authorities to determine his jurisdiction and authority. He determines the disposition and the status of the subject and the disposition of the case paperwork, evidence (including crime lab analysis results), and recovered property. The commander also obtains information on items, procedures, and agreements unique to the supported HN.
10-44. Be prepared to perform civil-disturbance operations to restore L&O if HN reactionary forces are unavailable. Identify a reactionary force that can be immediately deployed and employed inside the facility to control a disturbance. The size of the reactionary force depends on the facility population and the available military forces. The reactionary force is well trained, well organized, and knowledgeable of applicable ROE, the use-of-force policy, and the use of NLWs and civil-disturbance measures. (See Appendix B and FM 19-15for more information.)
10-45. Basic guidelines and the foundation for I/R facility L&O are provided in FMs 19-10 and 19-20. The I/R facility commander tailors the forms and procedures to his specific mission.
RULES OF INTERACTION
10-46. The ROI provide soldiers with a guide for interacting with the civilian population. The following points may be included in the ROI:
Avoid discussing politics or other policies with civilians.
Avoid making promises. If cornered, reply with, “I will see what I can
do.”

Refrain from making obscene gestures because civilians may
understand the meaning.
Avoid making derogatory remarks. Local linguists understand English
and civilians might.
Treat civilians equally. They may become offended if they do not
receive the same treatment or resources others receive.
Respect religious articles and materials.
Treat medical problems seriously.
Treat civilians with respect.
Greet civilians in their own language.
Clear phrases that civilians teach to soldiers through a linguist to
ensure that they do not contain obscene language.

TRANSPORTATION
10-47. The IIR facility requires adequate transportation assets. Since MP units have limited organic transportation assets, the unit MCO, the CA
Humanitarian Assistance and Emergency Services 10-13
transportation specialist, the HN, NGOs, and IHOs coordinate and determine the types and numbers of vehicles required and make provisions to have them on hand.
DISPOSITION
10-48. The final step in HA operations is the disposition of civilians. Allowing civilians to return to their homes as quickly as conditions permit lessens the burden on military and civilian economies. It also reduces the danger of diseases that are common among people in confined areas. When civilians return home, they can help restore their towns and can better contribute to their own support. If civilians cannot return home, they may resettle elsewhere in their country. Guidance on the disposition of civilians comes from higher authority upon coordination with US forces, national authorities, and international agencies.
10-49. Government agencies are primarily responsible for ES (police, fire, rescue, and disaster preparedness). Military support to ES agencies can be provided as civil-military assistance. The ES operations are normally conducted in CONUS, but they can be conducted OCONUS.
IN CONTINENTAL UNITED STATES
10-50. In the US, the federal government is responsible for ES at all levels. It provides planning advice and coordinates research, equipment, and financial aid. State and local governments determine the allocation of these resources. In the event of an emergency, US forces are prepared to help civil authorities restore essential services, repair essential facilities and, if necessary, ensure national survival. Federal statutes and military regulations govern conditions for employing active component (AC) and United States Army Reserve (USAR) military forces. (See FM 100-19 for more information.)
10-51. The DOD components develop appropriate contingency plans for disaster assistance and ensure coordination with the appropriate federal, state, and local civil authorities. When a disaster is so serious that waiting for instructions from higher authority causes unwarranted delays, a military commander can take action under DOD Directive 3025.1. The directive authorizes military forces to respond immediately to save lives, prevent human suffering, and mitigate great property damage. This support cannot exceed 72 hours without DOD approval. The commander promptly reports the action to higher authority and requests guidance if continued support is necessary or beyond his capability.
10-52. The AC and USAR forces used in disaster relief are under the command of their military superiors. Other military participation and the use of military resources occur on a mission-by-mission basis and end at the earliest practicable time. Commanders ensure that personnel participating in domestic assistance are not in violation of the Posse Comitatus Act. This act prohibits the use of federal military personnel to enforce federal, state, or local
10-14 Humanitarian Assistance and Emergency Services
laws unless expressly authorized by the Constitution or by an act of Congress. The act does not apply to state national guard (NG) forces unless they have been federalized. When placed on state active duty, NG forces (Army and Air) are under the c2of state authorities, not federal forces.
10-53. Measures to ensure the continuity of operations, troop survival, and the rehabilitation of essential military bases take precedence over military support of local communities. Consider requests for support on a mission-by-mission basis. With the exception of support directed in response to a nationally declared emergency, the military commander decides the necessity, amount, duration, and employment method of support rendered.
10-54. When committing USAR units or individual reservists to disaster relief operations, ensure that­
*     The President’s reserve call-up allows CONUS deployment of USAR
troops.
The commitment of USAR volunteers is consistent with Army policy
for military assistance and is coordinated with the proper Corps of
Engineer district or division to avoid duplication of effort. (The
authority to commit USAR volunteers can be delegated no lower than
CONUS Army.)
Civil authorities make a firm commitment to repay active-duty tour
(ADT) costs.
State and local assets (including the NG) are committed if the
requested assistance is within their capabilities.

10-55. A USAR commander can approve immediate-response, voluntary USAR participation during imminently serious conditions in a nondrill, nonpay status per DOD Directive 3025.1. The USAR members taking part in such support are performing official duty. The USAR commander­
*     Does not order members to participate.
Approves voluntary participation only when time or conditions do not permit seeking guidance from higher headquarters. Ensures that state and local assets are fully committed if the
requested assistance is within their capabilities.
Provides support on a mission-by-mission basis.
Discontinues support when adequate state and local assets become
available.

10-56. The MP units assisting ES operations in CONUS involve DOD-sponsored military programs that support the people and the government at all levels within the US and its territories. These programs and operations are classified as domestic support, and civil law and military regulations closely regulate a commander’s authority and responsibilities.
10-57. Protecting life and property within the territorial jurisdiction of a community is the primary responsibility of state and local governments and civil authorities. Federal armed forces can be employed when­
*     The situation is beyond state and local capabilities.
State and local authorities do not take appropriate action.

Humanitarian Assistance and Emergency Services 10-15
FEDERAL EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT AGENCY
10-58. The FEMA serves as the single POC within the US government for all emergency planning and management. It establishes and maintains a comprehensive, coordinated emergency management capability in the US. The FEMA plans and prepares for, responds and recovers from, and most importantly, mitigates the effects of emergencies, disasters, and hazards that range from safety and protection in the home to a nuclear attack. Within FEMA, two primary departments provide civil-defenseplans and guidance.
Plans and Preparedness Department
10-59. The Plans and Preparedness Department develops and implements overall concepts and policy guidance. It directs activities for nationwide plans and preparedness for emergencies during peace and war. The department develops guidance for federal emergency plans and state and local response capabilities, including tests and exercises for communications, warning, and damage assessment systems. It also develops policy guidance for stockpiling strategic materiel and develops plans, systems, and capabilities­
* To protect the US populace, government, and industry.
For resource management and stabilization of the economy during emergencies.
Disaster Response and Recovery Department
10-60. The Disaster Response and Recovery Department provides direction and overall policy coordination for federal disaster assistance programs. It advises the FEMA director on the mission, organization, and operation of the agency’s disaster assistance program and the federal response and recovery capabilities. It administers federal disaster assistance and provides overall direction and management of federal response and recovery activities. The department develops summaries of existing situations to support the director’s recommendation to the President on a state governor’s request for a Presidential declaration of a major disaster or an emergency.
MILITARY POLICE SUPPORT
10-61. The MP can be extremely valuable to civil authorities during ES. The CS and IIR MP units can operate an IIR-type facility that may become essential during ES. The MP units may be called upon to provide shelter to people whose community has been struck by a powerful disaster, such as a tornado or a hurricane. When civil authorities request assistance, MP units may be deployed and employed as part of a JTF anywhere in CONUS or its territories.
10-62. The MP support to ES in CONUS varies significantly from other I/R operations. The basic difference is that local and state governments and the federal government and its agencies have a greater impact and role in supporting and meeting the needs of an affected community. In CMO for disaster relief, MP receive missions from the FEMA through the DOMS and the chain of command. The MP commander uses the MDMP to determine the specific tasks necessary to accomplish the mission. Using the same format as
10-16 HumanitarianAssistance and Emergency Services
used in HA operations, the commander modifies and tailors the tasks as necessary.
10-63. If tasked to set up and operate an IIR facility, the MP commander retains control of military forces under his command. Depending on the situation, overall control of the facility may or may not be maintained by FEMA or the DOJ. Coordinate the location of the IIR facility with local authorities. The city chief of police, mayor, or ES director may have already selected a site that has easy access, is located on high ground, or is adjacent to other services.
10-64. The I/R facility commander may or may not be able to depend on local labor to help set up the facility. The victims’ state of mind and their physical conditions may prevent them from participating in construction efforts. However, assistance may not be required if the Engineer Corps uses the TCMS to build shelters or if other shelters are available. Discuss the facility’s setup with local, state, and federal relief agencies. Although the basic setup for HA operations may be adequate, the I/R facility commander can modify the setup to meet local needs. As a minimum, the facility should have stations for processing, medical screening, and distribution of personal-hygiene items.
10-65. Screening, classification, and ID requirements may not be needed in CONUS ES operations. Discuss these capabilities with local authorities to determine the need for them. As with HA operations, clothing requirements may exceed supply. This will be the case during destructive disasters such as tornadoes, fires, and hurricanes. Coordinate clothing, subsistence, medical, and dining-facility requirements with local, state, and federal relief agencies responding to the disaster.
10-66. Since the Posse Comitatus Act prohibits MP from enforcing civilian laws, local, state, and federal law enforcement officials perform discipline, control, and L&O of the facility. The MP can be used in conjunction with local, state, and federal law enforcement officials; but they cannot be directly involved in law enforcement functions such as search, seizure, and arrest. A facility staff member who observes a violation of criminal law reports the incident to civilian law enforcement officials. The ROI, if applicable, are provided by the JFC.
OUTSIDE CONTINENTAL UNITED STATES
10-67. The FNs are responsible for providing ES for their citizens. When requirements exceed their capabilities, they may request assistance through the US Embassy.
10-68. The DOD components support or participate in foreign disaster relief operations when the DOS determines that disaster relief will be provided to the requesting country. Military commanders at the immediate scene of a foreign disaster may provide prompt relief operations to preserve lives and prevent injuries when time is of the essence and when humanitarian considerations make it advisable. Commanders taking such action immediately report operations according to the provisions of DOD Directive 5100.46.
Humanitarian Assistance and Emergency Services 10-17
10-69. The Assistant Secretary of Defense (ASD) for Democracy and Peacekeeping is the approval authority for committing DOD resources or services to foreign disaster relief operations. The DASD for H&RA (Global Affairs) is the DOD coordinator for foreign disaster relief operations. The Logistics Directorate (54) is the joint staff’s POC for the DOD Foreign Disaster Relief and Humanitarian Assistance Program.
10-70. The ASD for International Security Affairs approves DOD supplies and services for disaster and humanitarian purposes. He provides supplies and services from the most expedient source, which is normally the geographic command from whose theater the request emanates.
10-71. The geographic CINC assumes the primary coordinating role for providing DOD supplies and services. The military departments and the joint staff support the designated commander of a unified command as required, primarily by coordinating interdepartmental approval and funding processes through the DASD for H&RA (GlobalMairs).
10-72. When a request emanates from a country not assigned to a geographic CINC under the Unified Command Plan, the joint staff or the 54 assumes the primary coordinating role in conjunction with the DASD for H&RA. Requests for DOD assistance are received from the DOS or the USAID through the OFDA.
UNITED STATES AGENCY FOR NER.NATI0NA.L DEVELOPMENT
10-73. The USAID administers the President’s authority to coordinate assistance in response to disasters, as declared by the ambassador within the country or a higher DOS authority. The USAID is authorized to provide assistance, notwithstanding any other provision of law. This authority allows the USAID to expedite interventions at the operational and tactical levels using NGOs and other relief sources. The USAID-
Organizes and coordinates the US disaster relief response.
Responds to requests for disaster assistance.
Initiates procurement of supplies, services, and transportation.
10-74. The Foreign Assistance Act is the authority for providing disaster relief to­
* Preserve life and minimize suffering by providing sufficient warning
of natural events that cause disasters.
Preserve life and minimize suffering by responding to natural and
man-made disasters.

Foster self-sufficiency among disaster-prone nations by helping them
achieve some measure of preparedness.
Alleviate suffering by providing rapid, appropriate responses to
requests for aid.
Enhance recovery through rehabilitation programs.
10-75. The USAID coordinates with the DOD on matters concerning defense equipment and personnel provided to the affected nation and to arrange DOD transportation. DOD Directive 5100.46 establishes the relationship between the DOD and the USAID. The DASD for H&RA is the primary POC. When the
10-18 Humanitarian Assistance and Emergency Services
USAID requests specific services from the DOD, typically airlift, it pays for the services. The CINC coordinates with the OFDA to arrange military and civilian assistance efforts. The USAID provides an excellent means for military and civilian operational-level coordination.
10-76. The USAID has operational links and grants relationships with many NGOs and 10s that have relief programs outside the US. These include the ICRC, the IFRC, the UNICEF, and the WFP. The USAID also coordinates with other governments responding to disasters through donor country coordination meetings to solve operational and political problems. The USAID can deploy a disaster assistance response team (DART) into the AOR to manage US relief efforts.
DISASTER ASSISTANCE RESPONSE TEAM
10-77. The DART concept was developed to provide rapid response to international disasters. A DART provides specialists trained in a variety of disaster relief skills who assist US Embassies and the USAID in managing the US government’s response to disasters.
10-78. The activities of a DART vary depending on the type, size, and complexity of the disaster. The DARTs coordinate with the affected country, other assisting countries, NGOs, IOs, and US military assets deployed to the disaster. During rapid-onset disasters, DARTs-
Coordinate the needs assessment.
Recommend US government response actions.
Manage US government on-site relief activities.
During long-term, complex disasters, DARTs-Gather information on the disaster situation. Monitor the effectiveness of current US government-funded relief activities. Review proposals of relief activities for future funding. Recommend follow-onstrategies and actions to the OFDA.
10-79. The number of people assigned to a DART depends on the activities
needed to meet the strategic objectives. A DART consists of five functional
areas-management, operations, planning, logistics, and administration:
Management. It includes the oversight of DART activities, NGOs, IOs, other assisting countries, and the US military. It also involves the development and implementation of plans to meet strategic objectives.
Operations. It includes all operational activities carried out by a DART, such as search, rescue, and aerial operations; technical support; and medical response. This function is most active during rapid-onset disasters.
Planning. It includes collecting, evaluating, tracking, and disseminating information on the disaster. It also includes reviewing activities, recommending future actions, and developing operational (tactical) plans.
Logistics. It includes providing support to the OFDA and DARTs by managing supplies, equipment, and services and by ordering,
Humanitarian Assistance and Emergency Services 10-19
receiving, distributing, and tracking people and US
government-provided relief supplies.
Administration. It includes the management of contracts, the
procurement of goods and services required by the OFDA and DARTs,
and the fiscal activities of DARTs.
10-80. The DART team leader organizes and supervises the DART. He is delegated authority from and works for the Assistant Director for Disaster Response or his designee. The delegation lists the objectives, priorities, constraints, and reporting requirements for the DART.
10-81. Before the DART departs, the team leader contacts the USAID or the US Embassy (if present in the affected country) to discuss the situation; review the structure, size, objectives, and capabilities of the DART; and identify the areas of support needed by the DART. Upon arriving in the affected country, he reports to the senior US official or the appropriate country official to discuss DART objectives and capabilities and to receive additional instructions and authority.
10-82. While in the affected country, the team leader advises the USAID or the US Embassy and receives periodic instructions from the agency. The DART follows instructions unless they conflict with OFDA policies, authorities, and procedures. Throughout the operation, the team leader maintains direct LOC with the OFDA.
10-83. The USAID or the US Embassy and the OFDA determine the duration of a DART operation after reviewing the disaster situation and the progress in meeting operational objectives. The DART is a highly flexible, mobile organization that is capable of adjusting its size and mission to satisfy the changing needs of the disaster situation.
10-84. A DART normally tailors its capabilities to the particular situation. It assesses the damage to the civil infrastructure, helps operate temporary shelters, and manages a CMO center. The CA units serve as liaison between military and local relief organizations, NGOs, IOs, and DARTs.
MILITARY POLICE SUPPORT
10-85. The I/R unit support to ES OCONUS is similar to MP support during
HA operations. The location, setup, construction, and tasks are based on the
nature of the emergency and the needs of the HN.
10-20 Humanltarian Assistance and Emergency Services
Appendix A
Metric Conversions
This appendix complies with current Army directives which state that the metric system will be incorporated into all new publications. Table A-1is a conversion chart.
Table A-1. Metric Conversion Chart
Metric Conversions A-1
Appendix B
Use of Force and Riot Control Measures
The I/R facility commander provides guidance to all MP.guard forces in the appropriate use of force to protect internees and internment facilities and to control unruly and rebellious internee populations. This includes establishing uniform procedures that govern the use of force, weapons, and restraining devices. He ensures that a QRF is organized and trained to respond to disturbances inside and outside the facility-whether prisoners are creating a disturbance or there is a Level I threat against the facility. Supporting MP units train squad-to platoon-sized QRFs and squad-sized elements for extraction and apprehension teams. (See FM 19-15for more information on civil disturbances.)
USE OF FORCE
B-1. When force is necessary, use it according to the priorities of force and limit it to the minimum degree necessary. (SeeAR 190-14for the use of deadly force.) The application of any or all of the priorities of force, or the application of a higher numbered priority without first employing a lower numbered one, depends on and will be consistent with the situation encountered. Per AR 190-47,the priorities of force are­
*     First: Verbal persuasion. Second: Show of force. Third: Chemical aerosol irritant projectors (subject to local and HN

restrictions).
Fourth: Use of physical force (other than weapons fire).
Fifth: Presentation of deadly force.
Sixth: Deadly force.

B-2. The I/R commander coordinates with the higher echelon commander and the SJA. He designates representatives who are authorized to direct the use of firearms and riot control agents during riots or disturbances. He includes the rules for using these means in appropriate plans, orders, SOPS, and instructions. He specifies the types of weapons to be used, which are not limited to shotguns and pistols for guarding prisoners.
DEADLY FORCE
B-3. Deadly force causes death or serious bodily harm. It is a destructive physical force against a person using a weapon or equipment that exerts deadly force. Use deadly force in extreme situations, when all lesser means have failed or cannot be used reasonably. Deadly force is authorized for the followingreasons:
Use of Force and Riot Control Measures B-1
Self-defenseand the defense of others. Deadly force is authorized to protect an MP, a guard, or any person who believes he or others are in imminent danger of death or serious bodily harm.
Protection of assets involving national security.Deadly force is authorized to prevent the theft or sabotage of assets vital to national security.
Protection of assets inherently dangerous to others. Deadly force is authorized to prevent the theft or sabotage of resources, such as operable weapons or ammunition, that are inherently dangerous to others.
Serious offenses against persons. Deadly force is authorized to prevent a serious offense involving violence or a threat of death or serious bodily harm.
Arrests and apprehensions. Deadly force is authorized to arrest or
apprehend a person who has committed an offense as specified in
bullets 2 through 4 above.
Escapes. The law of land warfare permits deadly force to prevent an EPW or an RP from escaping if he poses a threat of serious bodily harm to security personnel or others. If a CI tries to escape, force can only be used when the ROE authorizes it (see AR 190-8).
NOTE:See AR 190-14for more information on the use of deadly force.
B-4. The I/R facility commander ensures that soldiers understand the ROE, including the use of the term halt, the use of deadly force, and the ban on using physical or imaginary deadlines. He also ensures that EPWs and RPs understand the meaning of the English word halt.
B-5. When a prisoner tries to escape, the guard shouts HALT three times. He then uses the least amount of force necessary to stop the escape. If there is no other effective means of preventing escape, deadly force can be used. Do not fire on a prisoner unless he has cleared the outside fence (barrier, concertina wire, or razor tape) and is making a further effort to escape. Do not fire on a prisoner attempting to escape outside a fenced enclosure unless he does not halt after the third command. An escape is successful if a prisoner­
*     Reaches the lines of a force of which he is a member or the allies of that power. Leaves a territory that is not controlled by the US or its allies.
RULES OF ENGAGEMENT
B-6.Commanders balance the physical security of forces with mission accomplishment and the ROE issued for the mission. The unified commander develops ROE for his forces. They are based on guidance from the national command authority; operational, political, diplomatic, and legal considerations; mission requirements; threat assessments; the law of land warfare; and HN or third-country constraints on deployed forces.
B-7. The political situation may influence the ROE and conflict with physical-security needs. In these cases, commanders weigh the political gains against the risk to the force. They clearly state their objectives with defined
8-2     Use of Force and Riot Control Measures
operational limits that allow mission accomplishment and protect deployed forces.
B-8. Restrictions on combat operations and the use of force are clearly explained in the ROE and understood and obeyed at all levels. Soldiers study and train in the use of the ROE and discuss the ROE for their mission. Misunderstandings and actions, no matter how minor, may have far-reaching repercussions because friendly and enemy media can exploit incidents rapidly.
B-9.The ROE address specific distinctions between internee categories and the instruments of control available for each. Use the following issues to develop guidelines:
What is considered deadly force?
Under what conditions­
= Will deadly force be used?
Will nonlethal technology be used? What are the required warnings (see ARs 190-8 and 190-14) before using force (nonlethal or lethal)?
NONLETHAL WEAPONS
B-10. The DOD defines NLWs as weapons that are explicitly designed and primarily employed to incapacitate personnel or material, while minimizing fatalities, permanent injury to personnel, and undesired damage to property and the environment. Unlike conventional weapons that destroy their targets through blast, penetration, and fragmentation, NLWs employ other means to prevent the target from functioning.
B-11. The NLW doctrine and concepts of operation are designed to reinforce deterrence and expand the range of options available to commanders. They enhance the capability of US forces to accomplish the following objectives:
Discourage, delay, and prevent hostile actions.
Limit escalation.
Take military action in situations where the use of lethal force is not

the preferred option.
Protect US forces.
Disable equipment, facilities, and personnel.
B-12. The zero probability of producing fatalities or permanent injuries is not a requirement of NLWs. Complete avoidance of these effects is not guaranteed or expected; however, NLWs significantly reduce them as compared to lethal weapons. When drafting the ROE, clearly articulate that using NLWs is an additional means of employing force for the particular purpose of limiting the probability of death or serious injury to noncombatants or belligerents. However, the use of deadly force is an inherent right of individuals when they, their fellow soldiers, or personnel in their charge are threatened with death or serious bodily harm. The use of NLWs adds flexibility when controlling disturbances in an IIR facility by providing an environment where guard forces can permissively engage threatening targets with limited risk of noncombatant casualties and collateral damage (see FM 90-40). Table B-1, page B-4, shows lethal, nonlethal, and ineffective zones of NLWs.
Use of Force and Riot Control Measures B-3 FM 3-19.40
Table B-1. Range of NLWs
7  1  Nonlethal zone
1  1  Ineffective zone
B-13.The use of lethal force under the standing ROE is never denied. Never
deploy forces without giving them the ability to defend themselves against a
lethal threat. Ensure that they are trained, armed, and equipped for combat.
Nonlethal force is a complement to, not a replacement for, lethal force. Expand
a proactive response across the range of military operations. Delegate the
decision to use NLWs against an adversary during a confrontation to the
lowest possible level, preferably to the platoon or the squad. Ensure that all
personnel, not just leaders, have a clear understanding of the ROE and the
commander’s intent (see FM 90-40).
B-14.Facility commanders consider the use-of-force options discussed in this
appendix and AR 190-14when dealing with disruptions. They substitute
nonlethal devices for firearms when they are adequate for MP to safely
perform their duties. Currently, MP have the following nonlethal options
available for crowd control:
Riot control agents.
. 0-chlorobenzylidinemalonitrile (CS).
. Oleoresin capsicum (OC).
MWDs.
MP clubs.
Riot batons.
B-15.Commanders and public affairs officers are prepared to address media
questions and concerns regarding the use and role of NLWs. They make it
clear that the presence of NLWs in no way indicates abandoning the option to
employ deadly force in appropriate circumstances.

8-4 Use of Force and Riot Control Measures
FM 3-19.40
ADVANTAGES
B-16. The NLWs provide the flexibility to favorably influence a situation with reduced risk of noncombatant fatalities and collateral damage. They are more humane, which is consistent with the political and social intent of humanitarian and peacekeeping missions. The force that properly employs NLWs gains an advantage over forces who rely on lethal options alone because the degree of provocation required to employ these options is substantially less. This advantage provides a proactive posture and a quicker response. It also diminishes the likelihood of a situation escalating to a point where deadly force is required.
B-17. The NLWs are less likely to provoke others; however, they may provoke a negative response. Demonstrated restraint greatly diminishes feelings of anger and remorse when deadly force is required after nonlethal options fail. The NLWs facilitate postincident stabilization by reducing internee alienation and collateral damage.
B-18. Soldiers and leaders are trained in the correct employment of NLWs. They understand the limited use of these systems in environments with restrictive ROE. Their training is continuous at all levels so that they understand when and how to effectively and properly employ NLWs. The incorrect application of NLWs can have significant operational and political ramifications. Well-trained MP leaders who provide timely, clear guidance to soldiers ensure mission accomplishment.
B-19. Many NLWs have maximum-effective and minimum-safety ranges. Individuals struck short of the minimum safety range often suffer severe injuries or death, while the effects of most nonlethal devices are greatly mitigated at longer ranges. Engage the threat within the nonlethal zone, which is beyond the lethal zone and short of the ineffective zone (see Table B-1).
B-20. When training with and planning for the use of NLWs-Never apply them in situations where deadly force is appropriate. Never apply them in situations that will place troops in undue danger. Always cover them with deadly force.
TACTICS
B-21. Establish riot control teams that have a minimum response time. Due to the physical nature of riot control, individuals in riot control formations do not carry long rifles. Lethal attachments follow closely behind riot control formations to provide lethal coverage for the entire formation.
B-22. During a nonlethal engagement, a designated marksman supplies lethal overwatch to provide confidence and safety to those facing a riot. The marksman is in an overwatch position and armed with a standard infantry rifle, mounted with a high-powered scope. If a lethal threat is presented, he can scan the crowd to identify agitators and riot leaders for apprehension. He can also fire lethal rounds if warranted. Designated marksmen are ideally suited for flank security and countersniper operations.
Use of Force and Riot Control Measures 6-5
NOTE: See FM 90-40 for an in-depth discussion on the tactics associated with employing NLWs.
CROWD DYNAMICS
B-23.A commanders considers crowd control and the dynamics caused by several people living in close quarters. Generally, he is concerned with two types of disturbances-riots and disorders. Prisoners may organize disturbances within an YR facility to wear down the guard force.
B-24.Simply being a part of a crowd affects a person. Each person is open to actions that are different from his usual behavior. For example, crowds provide a sense of anonymity because they are large, often temporary, congregations. Crowd members often feel that their moral responsibility has shifted from themselves to the crowd as a whole. Large numbers of people discourage individual behavior, and the urge to imitate is strong in humans. People look to others for cues and disregard their own background and training. Only well-disciplined persons with strong convictions can resist conforming to crowd behavior. Crowd behavior influences the actions of disorderly participants and the authorities tasked to control them.
B-25.Under normal circumstances, a crowd is orderly and does not present a problem to authorities. However, when crowd behavior violates laws or threatens life or property, a disturbance ensues.
CROWD BEHAVIOR
B-26.The presence or absence of social factors (leadership, moral attitudes, and social uniformity) may influence crowd behavior. Leadership has a profound effect on the intensity and direction of crowd behavior. When blocked from expressing its emotions in one direction, a crowd’s frustration and hostility may be redirected elsewhere. The first person to give clear orders in an authoritative manner may become the leader. Agitators can exploit the crowd’s mood and convert a group of frustrated, resentful people into a vengeful mob. Skillful agitators, using clandestine communications within an I/R facility, can reach large portions of the population and incite them to unlawful acts without having direct personal contact. In an I/R environment, any crowd can be a threat to L&O because it is open to manipulation.
B-27.Crowd behavior may be affected by panic or emotional contagion, which provides psychological unity. The unity is usually temporary, but it may be long enough to push a crowd to mob action. When emotional contagion prevails, normal L&O are suppressed, increasing the potential for violence. Panic can occur during a disturbance when­
* Crowd members perceive that their safety is at risk and they attempt
to flee the area.
Crowd members cannot disperse quickly after exposure to riot control
agents.
Escape routes are limited, blocked, or congested.
B-28.Members of the control force are also susceptible to crowd behavior. They may become emotionally stimulated during a tense confrontation and must exercise individual and collective restraint. Rigorous training, firm and
B-6 Use of Force and Riot Control Measures
effective leadership, and complete awareness and understanding of the ROE and the ROI are necessary to offset the effect of crowd contagion on the control force.
CROWD TACTICS
B-29. In disturbances, crowds employ any number of tactics to resist control and achieve their goals. Tactics may be planned or unplanned and violent or nonviolent. The more purposeful the disturbance, the more likely the possibility of well-planned tactics.
Nonviolent Tactics (Disorders)
B-30. Nonviolent tactics include name calling, conducting demonstrations, refusing to work or eat, participating in a work slowdown, damaging or destroying property, and building barricades. Demonstrators may converse with control force members to distract them or gain their sympathy. They may use verbal abuse such as obscene remarks, taunts, ridicules, and jeers. Crowd members want to anger and demoralize the opposition, and they want authorities to take actions that can later be exploited as acts of brutality.
B-31. In compounds where women, children, and elders are interned, they may be placed in the front ranks of the demonstration to discourage countermeasures by the control force. When countermeasures are taken, agitators try to stir public displeasure and embarrass the control force through the media. Internees may form human blockades to impede movement by sitting down in footpaths or entrances to buildings within the compound. This disrupts normal activity and forces control personnel to remove demonstrators physically. Demonstrators may lock arms, making it hard for the control force to separate and remove them, so that it appears the control force is using excessive force.
B-32. Nonviolent tactics include the followingtypes of disorders: Demonstrations. Demonstrations are actions by groups of people whose behavior, while not violent, is in conflictwith those in authority. They are characterized by unruliness and vocal expressiveness without violence. Demonstrations may be organized in celebration of
national holidays or as protests against food, clothing, living
conditions, or treatment.
Refusal to work or eat.Housed personnel may refuse to work or eat,

collectively or individually, as a means of harassing the detaining power or in an attempt to gain concessions from the detaining power. This type of disorder can normally be controlled by promptly isolating and segregating offenders and ringleaders.
Work slowdown. Housed personnel may initiate a deliberate work slowdown to delay the completion of projects, thereby harassing the detaining power. Disorders of this nature can also be controlled by promptly isolating and segregating offenders and ringleaders.
Damage or destruction of property. Housed personnel often damage or destroy property to harass the detaining power, to impede or prevent normal operation of the facility, or for tactical purposes.
Use of Force and Riot Control Measures 8-7
This type of disorder can normally be controlled by identifying,
isolating, and segregating offenders.
Unorganized disorders. Unorganized disorders are spontaneous
and are started by the actions of a single individual. Like all
disturbances, their prompt control is essential.

Violent Tactics (Riots)
B-33. Violent crowd tactics can be extremely destructive. They include attacking other internees, guards, or government property and setting fires or bombings for escape, grievance, tactical, or political advantages. The attitude and ingenuity of crowd members, the training of their leaders, and the materials available are the only limits to violent crowd tactics. Crowd or mob members may commit violence with crude, homemade weapons or anything else that is available. If violence is planned, crowd members conceal makeshift weapons or tools for vandalism.
B-34. Crowd members can erect barricades to impede movement or to prevent the control force from entering an area or a building. They may use vehicles, trees, furniture, fences, or other material to build barricades. In an effort to breach barriers, rioters may throw grapples into wire barricades and drag them. They may use grapples, chains, wires, or ropes to pull down gates or fences to effect a mass escape. They may use long poles or homemade spears (tent poles) to keep control forces back while removing barricades or to prevent the use of bayonets.
B-35. Rioters can be expected to vent their emotions on individuals, troop formations, and control force equipment. They may throw rotten fruits and vegetables, rocks, bricks, bottles, or improvised bombs. They may direct dangerous objects (vehicles, carts, barrels, or liquids) at troops located on or at the bottom of a slope. They may drive commandeered vehicles toward troops to scatter the control force formation and jump out of vehicles before reaching roadblocks and barricades. Rioters may set fire to buildings or vehicles to block the advance of the control force formation, create confusion and diversion, destroy property, and mask escapes. Types of riots include­
*     Organized riots. Leaders of housed personnel reorganize the internee population into quasi-military groups. The groups are capable of developing plans and tactics for riots and disorders. Riots can be instigated for­
m     Escapes. Leaders organize a riot as a diversion for an escape attempt by selected individuals or small groups or for a mass escape attempt.
Political purposes. Riots are often organized for propaganda or to embarrass the detaining power in its relations with protecting powers and other nations. They may also be organized to intimidate individuals or groups that may have been cooperative with the detaining power.
Grievance protests. A grievance protest can be organized as a riot. Under normal circumstances, this type of riot is not extremely violent in nature. It may turn violent when leaders try
B-8     Use of Force and Riot Control Measures
to exploit the successes of the riot or the weaknesses of the

detaining power.
Tactical purposes. Riots are often organized for the sole purpose
of diverting the detaining power, thereby limiting its ability to
perform the mission.

Unorganized riots. Unorganized riots are spontaneous, although they can be exploited and diverted by leaders into different types of riots. They may begin as a holiday celebration, a group singing, or a religious gathering. Under determined leadership, the pattern of these gatherings can change to an organized riot.
Multiple riots. When housed personnel in one compound start rioting, personnel in other compounds may also riot. To meet this situation with only one riot control force available, the force commander first subdues the most riotous compound. He also employs riot control teams to contain the other compounds where rioting is taking place until the riot control force is free to subdue offenders. If another alert force is available, it channels additional rioters to a different area than the original rioters.
RECORD OF EVENTS
B-36. Initiate a record of events to provide a basis for preparing and submitting a formal report to higher headquarters. Include the­
*     Time the incident was reported and by whom. Time the enclosure commander reported to his commander. Time the riot control force was alerted. Time the riot control force commander reported to the affected
enclosure.
Time the riot control force entered the enclosure.
Weather conditions as they relate to the use of riot control munitions,
the types and amounts used, and their results and effects.
Number of US personnel injured or killed, a description of how they
were injured or killed, and the medical attention they received.
Number of housed personnel injured or killed, a description of how
they were injured or killed, and the medical attention they received.
Time the operation was completed and when the riot control force
cleared the enclosure.

RIOT CONTROL RlEASURES
B-37. The commander exercises effective control of internees by quickly restoring order. Have a well-developed,well-rehearsed plan for defusing tense situations, handling unruly captives, and quelling riots. Because of the differences in I/R facilities, consider the­
*     Terrain features.
Types of structures.
Number of internees.
Size of control forces.

Use of Force and Riot Control Measures B-9
B-38.Restore order using the least amount of force possible. The PSYOP resources often play an effective role in restoring order to the compound. If necessary, use riot control agents (CS and OC) and NLWs to incapacitate rioters.
B-39.Preplan riot control measures before a crisis occurs. Control forces will be prepared to react in an emergency and can successfully contain and neutralize the situation. The preplanning process includes training, planning, and intelligencegathering.
TRAINING
B-40.Train the QRF and associated teams in the five basic riot control formations-line, wedge, echelon, diamond, and circle-on a regular basis. Establish a continuoustraining program that includes­
*     Law of land warfare principles, specifically the provisions of the Geneva Conventions.
Supervisoryand human relations techniques.
Self-defensemethods.
The use of force (riot batons, M16 with and without bayonet, and fatal
areas of the body to avoid when using them).

Weapons familiarization and qualification.
Public relations.
First aid.
Emergency plans.
Compound regulations.
Intelligence and counterintelligencetechniques.
Cultural customs, habits, and religious practices.
Simple training in internees’ language.
The use of riot control agents and the various methods of dispersing

them.
The use of NLWs.

B-41.Ensure that personnel assigned or attached to I/R facilities are oriented and specially trained in the custody and control of EPWs and CIS. Everyone working in the compound must be fully cognizant of the provisions of the Geneva Conventions as they apply to EPWs, CIS, and soldiers who are guardingprisoners.
B-42.The planning process begins during the preplanning process. When the QRF is alerted of a riot situation, leaders and members further develop preplans to fit the situation. This planning process is essential to successfully contain and neutralize a riot. When using riot control agents, ensure that plans are flexible enough to accommodate changes in the situation and weather. Consider the strict accountability and control required when employing riot control agents. They can be employed only when the commander specificallyauthorizes their use, and their use must be reported.
510 Uw of Forceand Riot Control Measures
B-43. Other planning factors to consider are the weather; the cause, nature, and extent of the disturbance; and the demeanor and intent of the gathered EPWs. Based on an analysis of these factors, the commander makes an estimate (as thorough as time permits) of the situation. He considers a course of action, selects riot control agents, and determines munition needs.
B-44. Plans also address the security of riot control agents during storage, transportation, and employment. The wind direction, the size of the area, and the proximity of civilian communities may preclude the use of large quantities of riot control agents. In such cases, it may be necessary to use low

concentrations to break up a crowd into smaller groups. , ,
B-45. When dealing with a large group of rioting EPWs, plans should indicate how the control force channels and controls EPW movement in a specific direction. This is usually to an area where another force is waiting to receive, hold, and search them. Include information on how riot control agents are employed to cover the target area with a cloud of sufficient strength to produce desired results. Once the proper concentration is reached, the control force maintains the concentration until rioters are channeled into the predetermined area. When dispersers are used, the dispersal team maintains the concentration by moving along the release line at an even rate and repeating the application as necessary.
B-46. During a riot, another riot may start in a neighboring compound, so ensure that contingency plans are in place to subdue it also. Quell the most riotous compound first, and then move to the next. Employ riot control teams to contain other compounds where rioting is taking place until a riot control force is free to subdue them.
B-47. Include serious-incident reporting procedures in riot control plans. Initiate a record of events to provide a basis for preparing and submitting a formal report to higher headquarters. (See paragraph B-36.)
INTELLIGENCE GArnRING
B-48. The preplanning process also includes intelligence gathering. It includes maintaining updated drawings of the I/R compound and identifying potential threats from within the EPW population. (See Chapter 3.)
RIOT CONTROL AGENTS
B-49. There are two riot control agents used to quell riots and disperse crowds. They are CS and OC. . ,
B-50. The CS is effective in very small quantities, and its effect on eyes and respiratory systems are realized within seconds. It causes an extreme burning sensation in eyes, an abundant flow of tears, coughing, breathing difficulty, tightness in chest, involuntary closing of eyes, stinging sensation on moist-skin areas, and sinus and nasal drip. High concentrations also cause nausea and vomiting, especially when ingested. The effects last 5 to 10 minutes after individuals are removed from the contaminated area and placed
Use of Force and Riot Control Measures 6-1.1
in a clean area. Exposure to CS makes individuals incapable of executing organized or concerted actions.
B-51. Administer first aid to victims by moving them to uncontaminated areas and facing them into the wind. Caution them not to rubtheir eyes, and keep affected people well apart. Have victims shower with cool water for 3to 5 minutes and then proceed with normal showering. For gross contamination, flush victims’ bodies with large amounts of cool water, wash them with a 5 percent sodium bisulfite solution (except in and around their eyes), and flush them again with water. (A 1percent sodium carbonate or sodium bicarbonate solution can be substituted for the sodium bisulfite solution.)
B-52. The CS is delivered by a variety means-bursting, aerosol, 37-millimeter and 12-gauge projectiles, and fogging. It has the greatest effect when there is little or no wind, and effectiveness is greatly diminished by rain. The persistency of CS varies according to wind conditions. The powder form persists longer in still air and in wooded terrain, and it should not be used in areas where lingering contamination could cause problems.
OLEORESIN CAPSICUM
B-53. The OC provides a safe, effective alternative to traditionally employed riot control agents. When used properly, it turns the most violent offender into a docile, cooperative individual who no longer poses a threat to others. It diverts the threat’s attention from making or continuing an assault. NOTE: HN laws may prohibit or restrict the use of certain chemical compounds, such as OC.
B-54. The OC is not a chemical agent, but it is 750 times more powerfbl than CS. It is an organic, naturally occurring, inflammatory compound that is derived from a blend of 300 varieties of pepper plants. As an inflammatory agent, OC causes swelling of eyes and breathing passages almost immediately. When inhaled, the respiratory tract is inflamed and breathing is restricted to short, shallow breaths. However, it does not shut down the respiratory system. The physiological response increases OC’s effectiveness, regardless of the subject’s emotional or physical state. It is effective against emotionally disturbed individuals, persons under the influence of drugs or alcohol, and domestic and wild animals.
B-55. The OC causes intense burning of exposed skin, dilation of capillaries, swelling of eyelids, burning and involuntary closing of eyes, uncontrollable coughing, gagging, gasping for air, temporary loss of strength and coordination, and a change in skin color (slight to bright red). The effects of OC last 30 to 40 minutes after removal to fresh air. There is no permanent damage to the respiratory system, eyes, or skin.
B-56. There is a risk of fatalities in persons with preexisting respiratory or cardiac conditions. Ensure that medical support is readily available when using OC in a civilianlrefugee situation to prevent injury or death if an individual fails to recover.
B-57. Disadvantages of OC include­
*     Canisters will depressurize over time if they are not checked regularly. Criminals have access to OC and may use it against the control force.
8-12 Use of Force and Riot Control Measures
Canisters must be shaken on a regular basis.

Individuals from cultures that use cayenne pepper on a regular basis
may become immune to OC.
Rain decreasesthe effectivenessand requires a longer spray duration.
Strong winds decrease effectiveness and can result in blowback that
might contaminate control forces.

DISSEMINATION OF CHEMICALIRRITANTS
B-58.There are five methods of dissemination for chemicalirritants. They are pyrotechnic, bursting, aerosol, fogging, and a multipurpose grenade.
Pyrotechnic
B-59.The irritant and an inert material are placed in a canister that is ignited when the device is activated. The irritant is carried into the air on smoke particles of the inert material. This method of dissemination has the followingdisadvantages:
May cause a fire.
Has a very slow saturation time.
Takes 40to 45 seconds to completely burn.
Can be thrown back even while burning.

Bursting
B-60.The irritant and an inert powder are contained in a serrated canister. After a small detonation, the canister splits and expelsthe irritant in the form of a cloud. This method of dissemination has the following advantages and disadvantages:
Advantages.
Has no risk of fire.
Cannot be thrown back. . Disseminates quickly. . Is very effective, easy to carry, and easy to control.
Disadvantages.
. The canister may fragment when detonated. The fuse head may separate from the canister. The percentage of irritant disseminated is 50to 90percent. The direction of the cloud formation depends on where the device
is detonated.
Aerosol
B-61. The irritant is suspended in an inert liquid located in the rear of a projectile. When the projectile strikes a structure and penetrates, the rear portion splits open and the irritant is disseminated in the form of a mist. The aerosol device is the most appropriate for tactical operations when chemical irritants are used before entry. This method of dissemination has the following advantages and disadvantages:
Advantages.
Use of Forceand Riot Control Measures 8-13
. Is easy to carry and control.
. Can be deployed with 40-millimeter, 37-millimeter, or 12-gauge

ammunition. . Disperses contents quickly. . Is accurate (fin-stabilized),but practice firing is necessary. Disadvantages. . May cause injury if fwed from close range. . May strike a weak portion of a structure.
B-62. The irritant is suspended in a fogging solution and dispersed with a fogging machine. It is used for riot control and crowd dispersal. This method of dissemination has the following advantages and disadvantages:
Advantages. Is capable of producing enough irritant to cover 100,000cubic feet
of an enclosed area in 26 seconds. . Disseminates very quickly. . Has high-volume capabilities. Disadvantages. . Is too noisy for a close-in tactical situation. . Is cumbersome and not recommended for tactical operations.
Multipurpose Grenade
B-63. A multipurpose grenade can be hand-thrown or launched from a shotgun with an adapter. It has an extended shelf life of 6 years and an adjustable fuse delay of 2 to 5 seconds. The irritant is located in the cylinder portion of the device and is forced out the bottom of the grenade upon detonation.
WARNING Injury to your hand may result if a multipurpose grenade is deployed incorrectly. Observe all safety rules.
POSITIONS
B-64. Riot control formations are usually equipped with riot batons, rifles (with or without bayonets), or shotguns. All personnel use the right hand grip when holding a baton or a weapon. This presents a uniform, formidable appearance to rioters, eliminates weak spots in the formation caused by inconsistent weapon positions, and is safer for soldiers in close movements. (See STP 19-95B1-SMfor more information on individual movements and positions.)
8-14 Use of Forceand Riot Control Measures
BATONS
B-65. Three steps are necessary to obtain a secure grip on the riot baton. This method of gripping the baton provides a secure grasp, and the baton can be released quickly by simply relaxing your hand.

Step 1. Place the thong of the baton around your right thumb.
Step 2. Hold the baton so that the thong hangs over the back of your hand. Step 3. Roll your hand into the baton handle so that the thong is pressed
against the back of your hand.
B-66. There are three baton positions used in riot control. They are parade
rest, port, and on guard: Parade rest position. The parade rest position is a relaxed, ready position. Your feet are shoulder width apart, both arms hang naturally in front of your body, and the baton is horizontal. Your left palm is facing out, and your right palm is facing in toward your body. Your hands are about 6 inches from the ends of the baton.
Port position. The port position is a ready position. It is particularly well suited for individual defense. Your right hand and forearm are parallel to the ground, and your left hand is level with your left shoulder. The striking end of the baton bisects the angle between your neck and left shoulder. The baton is held about 8 inches from your body, and your feet are shoulder width apart.
On-guardposition.The on-guard position is a ready position. Do not maintain it for long periods of time, because it is tiring. Your left foot is placed forward of your right foot. Your feet are spread apart, and your knees are slightly bent. Your right hand and the butt end of the baton are placed snugly against your hip. Your body is bent slightly forward at your waist. Your left arm is bent so that your forearm protects your throat area, yet allows a thrust to be made. From the on-guard position, soldiers can execute a­. Short thrust. Rapidly step forward with your left foot, and drive
the striking end of the baton into a vulnerable point of the opponent’s body. Return to the on-guard position after delivery.
. Long thrust. Rapidly step forward with your right foot, and thrust the striking end of the baton into a vulnerable point of the opponent’s body. Return to the on-guard position after delivery.
. Butt stroke. Advance your body rapidly off your right foot, and snap the butt end of the baton to the left, striking the opponent’s shoulder or jaw. Return to the on-guard position after delivery.
Baton Smash
B-67. A baton smash can be delivered from a parade rest, port, or on-guard position. Hold the baton horizontal to the ground, about chest height. Advance your left foot rapidly, snap both arms straight, and smash the length of the baton across the opponent’s chest. Return to the on-guard position after delivery.
Use of Forceand Riot Control Measures B-15
FM 3-19.40
Fatal Areas
B-68. Do not use a riot baton to strike a fatal area (the head, the side of the neck, the throat, the heart area, or the armpit). Do not raise a riot baton above your head to strike an adversary in club fashion. It is likely to cause permanent injury and also projects an unfavorable image of the control force.
B-69. Soldiers use riot batons to defend themselves against armed and unarmed attackers. Use the baton to block or deflect an opponent’s blow; then counter with a thrust, a butt stroke, or a baton smash. These defensive techniques can be performed from any position.
NOTE: See FM 19-15 for detailed information on using a riot baton.
WEAPONS
B-70. There are three weapon positions used in riot control-safe-port,
safeguard, and on-guardpositions. Safe-port position. The safe-port position is quite effective when making a show of force. It is similar to the port arms position in FM 22-5, except the weapon is raised until your leR, upper arm is parallel with the ground. In this elevated position, participants in the rear of the crowd can see bayonets. The sight of bayonets creates an impression of strength and numerical superiority. Do not keep troops in this position long because it is very tiring. The control force moves into and assembles from all riot control formations with weapons in the safe-port position. Upon receiving the preparatory command to move into or assemble from a riot control formation, soldiers assume the safe-port position.
Safeguard position. This is a position of semireadiness. It is less tiring than the on-guard position and is used to rest troops when circumstancespermit. As troops advance, they maintain the safeguard position until contact is made or resistance is expected. The safeguard position is also used when troops are pursuing a crowd that is withdrawing without resistance. In the safeguard position, your right hand is against the right side of your waist, and the weapon is pivoted forward until the bayonet is at the crowd’s throat level.
On-guard position. This is a position of complete readiness. It is used when troops are in contact with a group that is showing resistance or hesitance to withdraw. Assume the on-guard position from the safeguard position. Place your feet a comfortable distance apart, and align your left heel with your right toe. Bend your knees slightly and lean forward at your waist, keeping the bayonet at throat level. Do not keep troops in this position long because it is very tiring. Rest troops when circumstances permit.
FORMATIONS
B-71. The five basic formations for riot control operations are line, wedge, echelon, diamond, and circle. Apprehension teams normally use diamond and circle formations. Small teams, squad-sized elements, and augmented squads
B-16 Use of Force and Riot Control Measures
are not used for crowds, but they are used by larger riot control forces to snatch or protect.
B-72. Line, wedge, and echelon formations are trained at squad level and above; but they are normally used by platoon- and company-sized units. Squad line, echelon left, echelon right, and wedge formations are the basis for platoon and company formations. Each squad must be adept in the basic formations before practicing in platoon-sized or larger formations. Any size unit can be employed, and a riot control formation can be adapted to fit a unit’s organization. (See STP 19-95B1-SM for more information on formations.)
B-73. The platoon headquarters for riot control formations consists of a platoon leader, a platoon sergeant, a selected marksman, and a radio operator or messenger. Figure B-1 shows symbols for a formation element. When directed by the platoon leader, disperser operators, firefighters, and others may augment the platoon headquarters.
Platoon leader Selected marksman
&IPlatoon sergeant
Disperser

[XISquad leader
[71Assistant squad leader radiooperator
Figure 6-1. Symbols for a Formation Element
B-74. The coptrol force moves to the site of a disturbance in a column formation and then executes a riot control formation on site. To form a riot control formation from a column formation, the platoon leader moves to the right of the platoon and faces troops when giving commands. He gives the arm-and-hand signal and the preparatory command. On the execution command MOVE, he points to the approximate location where he wants the platoon to form. The platoon leader pauses between the preparatory command and the execution command to allow each squad leader to issue a preparatory command to his squad.
B-75. In a three-squad platoon, the first and third squads are usually the lead elements in formations when one squad provides general or lateral support. The support squad, when held in general support, may be in a single column or a column of twos. The following examples presume that the second squad is the support squad.
B-76. When the support squad moves from general support to lateral support or to extend the existing formation, the even-numbered members move to the right and the odd-numbered members move to the left. The squad leader
Use of Force and Riot Control Measures 8-17
usually controls the even-numberedmembers, and the assistant squad leader controlsthe odd-numberedmembers. To assemble the support squad from any position to general support, the platoon leader commands SECOND SQUAD IN SUPPORT, MOVE. The second squad then returns to a column behind the line formed by the other two squads.
LINE FO~TION
B-77. The line formation (Figure B-2) is used the most because of its offensive and defensive applications. As an offensive formation, it is used to push or drive crowds straight back, across an open area, or up a city street. As a defensive formation, it is used to hold crowds or deny access to restricted streets or areas.
1stsquad 2d squad

1-14
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@W@@@

IXI mm mm w

6

Eldm
Figure B-2. Line Formation
B-78. The command for forming a platoon line is PLATOON AS SKIRMISHERS, MOVE. The second squad moves forward to the point designated by the platoon leader. The number two man of the second squad is the baseman for the platoon formation.The­
*     Second squad forms a squad line to the right of the baseman. First squad forms a squad line to the left of the second squad. Third squad forms a squad line to the right of the second squad. First and third squads dress on the second squad.
B-79. When assembling a platoon from the line formation, the platoon leader and headquarters personnel take a position to the rear of the platoon. The platoon leader gives the command PLATOON ASSEMBLE, MOVE. He raises his right arm and makes a circular motion above his head. The squad leader of the second squad commands FOLLOW ME and double-times to the designated spot. Other squad members follow the squad leader. As the second squad clears the line formation, the first and third squad leaders command FOLLOW ME and double-time toward the platoon leader, dressing on either
B-18 Use of Forceand Riot Control Measures
side of the second squad. All squads halt automatically behind the platoon headquarters and dress.
WEDGEFORMATION
B-80.The wedge formation (Figure B-3) is an offensive formation that is used to penetrate and split crowds. The command for forming the platoon wedge is PLATOON WEDGE, MOVE. The second squad executes a squad wedge at the point designated by the platoon leader. The squad wedge consists of an echelon left of the odd-numbered members and an echelon right of the even-numbered members, with the baseman at the apex of the wedge. The first and third squads form echelons left and right, respectively, of the second squad.
2d squad

Figure B-3. Wedge Formation
B-81. Assembling from a wedge formation is similar to assembling from a platoon echelon. The second squad assembles first. On the command PLATOON ASSEMBLE, MOVE, the second squad leader moves to the point designated by the platoon leader. The second squad assembles behind the squad leader in numerical order. The first and third squads move into column formation to the lea and right of the second squad, respectively, and dress on the second squad.
ECHELON FORMATION
B-82.The echelon formation (Figure B-4,page B-20)is an offensive formation. It is used to turn or divert groups in open or built-up areas and to move crowds away from buildings, fences, and walls. An echelon formation can be an echelon right or an echelon left, depending on the direction in which the crowd is to be moved.
Use of Force and Riot Control Measures 8-19
Figure 8-4. Echelon Left Formation
Platoon Echelon Left
B-83.The command for forming a platoon echelon left is PLATOON ECHELON LEFT, MOVE. The third squad baseman posts himself at the location designated by the platoon leader. Remaining squad members position themselves one step back and one step to the left of the preceding soldier. As each squad clears the column, the next successive squad moves out and extends the echelon that has been formed.
B-84.To assemble the platoon from an echelon left, the commander takes his position to the rear of the formation with the platoon headquarters. On the command PLATOON ASSEMBLE, MOVE, the third squad moves and forms a column at the point designated by the platoon leader. The first and second squads assemble in column formation to the left of and dressed on the third squad.
Platoon Echelon Right
B-85.The command for forming a platoon echelon right is PLATOON ECHELON RIGHT, MOVE. The first squad baseman posts himself at the location designated by the platoon leader. Remaining squad members position themselves one step back and one step to the right of the preceding soldier. As each squad clears the column, the next successive squad moves out and extends the echelon that has been formed.
B-86.To assemble a platoon from an echelon right, the commander takes his position to the rear of the formation with the platoon headquarters. On the command PLATOON ASSEMBLE, MOVE, the first squad moves and forms a column at the point designated by the platoon leader. The second and third squads assemble in column formation to the right of and dressed on the first squad.
8-20 Use of Force and Riot Control Measures
DIAMOND FORMATION
B-87. The diamond formation (Figure B-5)can be used as an offensive formation or a defensive formation. It is used by riot control forces when they enter a crowd to apprehend ringleaders. The diamond formation is also useful when 360-degree security is needed.
Figure B-5. Diamond Formation
CIRCLE FORMATION
B-88. The circle formation (Figure B-6) is used for the same purposes as a diamond formation. It is used for dispersed and nonviolent crowds, where the diamond formation is used when the formation must break into or out of a crowd.
Figure B-6. Circle Formation
VARIATIONS
B-89. Many suitable variations of riot control formations can be employed. Ensure that appropriate commands and signals are devised to execute the formations. Due to their complicated nature and the coordination required, practice the formations extensively before actually using them in a riot.
B-90. Riot control formations may require enhancement. They can be very tiring and stressful for troops on line, especially when faced with a hostile crowd. The crowd may try to break through the control force to reach a protected facility or to disrupt the efforts of the control force. Likewise, a
Use of Forceand Riot Control Measures 8-21
determined crowd may refuse to give way to an advancing control force if they believe the line is not solid. Other elements of the control force can be positioned in general, lateral, or close support of the main line as needed. When all the troops in the unit are not required on line at the same time, the remaining elements can be kept in general support. Elements in general support are immediately available to provide lateral or close support as the situation changes.
Platoon Formation With General Support
B-91.The command for forming a platoon formation with a squad in general support (Figure B-7) is PLATOON AS SKIRMISHERS (ECHELON LEFT, ECHELON RIGHT, WEDGE), SECOND SQUAD IN SUPPORT, MOVE. The first and third squads execute the formation, and the second squad remains in column formation. The number two man of the third squad is the baseman for the formation.
1st squad 3d squad
+ @@@@@@@@@@om
El m W
6
mI.Im

Figure B-7. Platoon Line, 2d Squad in General Support
B-92.The command for forming a platoon formation with one squad in general support in a column of twos is PLATOON AS SKIRMISHERS (ECHELON LEFT, ECHELON RIGHT, WEDGE), SECOND SQUAD IN SUPPORT IN COLUMN OF TWOS, MOVE. The first and third squads execute the formation. The second squad, at the command of its squad leader, executes a column of twos to the right.
8-22 Use of Force and Riot Control Measures
B-93. To assemble a platoon with a squad in general support, the procedure is the same as for a formation without support, except the second squad does a countercolumn. The third squad then dresses on the right of the second squad, and the first squad dresses on the left of the second squad.
Platoon Formation With Lateral Support
B-94. Troops deployed in lateral support (Figure B-8) extend the sides of a. formation and prevent access to the rear of the formation. The command for forming a platoon formation with lateral support is PLATOON AS SKIRMISHERS (ECHELON LEFT, ECHELON RIGHT, WEDGE), SECOND SQUAD IN LATERAL SUPPORT, MOVE. The first and third squads execute the formation, while the second squad stands fast. When the formation is formed, the odd-numbered members of the second squad form in column formation behind the last man of the first squad and the even-numbered members form in column formation behind the last man of the third squad.
I
/
2d squad
(odd numbers)
2d squad (even numbers)
Figure 6-8. Platoon Echelon Right, 2d Squad in Lateral Support
B-95. To move the second squad from general support to lateral support, the platoon leader commands SECOND SQUAD, LATERAL SUPPORT, MOVE. To have the second squad join the formation from general or lateral support, the platoon leader commands SECOND SQUAD, EXTEND THE LINE (WEDGE), MOVE. The second squad moves out–odd-numbered members to the left and even-numbered members to the rightto extend the formation of the first and third squads.
Use of Force and Riot Control Measures 8-23
B-96. To assemble the platoon from a platoon formation with lateral support is nearly the same as for the platoon line. However, the number two men of the second and third squads do a right face and a left face, respectively, toward their squad leaders. On the execution command, the first and third squads move to the point designated by the platoon leader. As the first and third squads clear the formation, the second squad moves.
Platoon Formation With Close Support
33-97. Troops in close support (Figure B-9)reinforce the line to prevent the crowd from breaking through the control force. This is done by putting a second line of soldiers at a close interval behind the lead element, covering the interval between the soldiers in the lead formation.
I
2d squad
odm

Figure 6-9. Platoon Wedge, 2nd Squad in Close Support
B-98. The command for forming a platoon formation with a squad in close support is PLATOON AS SKIRMISHERS (ECHELON LEFT, ECHELON RIGHT, WEDGE), SECOND SQUAD IN CLOSE SUPPORT, MOVE. The first and third squads execute the primary formation. After the first and third squads are in position, the second squad executes the same formation to the rear of the first formation and closes in on it. The soldiers in the supporting formation shiR to cover the intervals between soldiers in the first formation.
8-24 Use of Force and Riot Control Measures
Vehicles
B-99. When a control force encounters large riot groups, they can employ vehicles and troops on foot in riot control formations. Employ armored vehicles when practical because they have a strong psychological effect and offer protection for occupants. Consider the following when using vehicles in riot control formations:
A windshield with safety glass offers some protection in the upright position and minimizes the danger of injury from glass fragments. However, if paint or other obscurants strike the glass, the operator may be unable to see well enough to operate the vehicle safely.
A wooden or metal frame strung with razor wire and mounted across the front of a vehicle enhances the vehicle’s usefulness as a mobile barrier and increases its psychological impact.
A dismounted formation walking alongside the vehicle may be needed to keep rioters from reaching the sides and rear of the vehicle.
FormationVariations
B-100. During riot control operations, the platoon leader may rotate squads in the lead elements of the formation to give them a rest. He is not limited to using only the squads specified in the preceding examples as the lead elements. By changing the preparatory command, he can choose other squads to lead the unit. For example, if he wants the first and second squads to lead a platoon wedge, he issues the command PLATOON WEDGE, THIRD SQUAD IN SUPPORT, MOVE. By designating the support squad in the preparatory command, the platoon leader tells the remaining squads that they will lead the formation.
B-101. The platoon leader may also relieve squads in the lead element by forming the same formation with support squads. The support element then passes through the lead element. This procedure is often necessary when soldiers don protective masks to employ riot control agents.
COMMANDS
B-102. Commands can be given to riot control units in formation orally or with hand signals. Normally, both verbal and nonverbal commands are given. All formation commands are given in two counts-a preparatory command followed by an execution command. All movements into or recovering from riot control formations are performed at the halt.
B-103. The formation commander faces the troops and gives the preparatory oral command, accompanied by the appropriate visual command. On the execution command, the leader drops both arms and points to the position where he wants the element to form. The formation commander gives the following visual commands:
Echelon left.Extends left arm upward at a 45-degree angle and right arm downward at a 45-degree angle, simulating the intended formation.
Use of Force and Riot Control Measures 6-25
Echelon right. Extends right arm upward at a 45-degree angle and
left arm downward at a 45-degree angle, simulating the intended
formation.
Line formation.Extends both arms parallel to the ground.
Wedge formation. Extends both arms downward at a 45-degree
angle, forming a wedge.
Diamond formation. Extends both arms above his head, bending
elbows slightly and touching fingertips together.
Circle formation. Extends both arms above his head, bending
elbows slightly and touching fingertips together, then makes a circular
motion with his right hand.
Assemble from a riot control formation. Extends right arm
upward and makes a circular motion.
B-104. The oral rifle commands for safe port, safeguard, and on guard and the baton commands for parade rest, port, and on guard are given in one count. Do not rely on oral commands completely, especially with the added noise from vehicles, helicopters, and crowds. Plan to use alternate methods for relaying commands.
B-105. While in the assembly area, each squad leader has his squad count off. The squad leader is always number 1, and the baseman for the formation is number 2. The number each soldier is assigned during the count off determines his position in his unit’s control formation. The unit marches in column formation from the assembly area to the disturbance site. It halts a reasonably safe distance from the crowd, within plain view of it. The on-site commander decides the riot control formation to use and the size of the element to commit.
B-106. On the preparatory command, troops assume the safe-port position. On the execution command, troops form the formation with the baseman posting himself at the location pointed to by the element leader. As troops reach their proper positions, they face the direction of the unit’s intended advance and come to a halt. They remain halted in the safe-port position and await further orders. Once the troops are in the riot control formation, the commander commands SAFEGUARD and issues the proclamation. Following the proclamation, the commander informs disturbance participants that they have a specific time in which to comply with the order to disperse. If participants fail to disperse within the given time, the commander employs measures needed to disperse the crowd.
B-107. When a rifle-equipped formation is commanded to safeguard or on guard, the commands are for the lead element only and the support elements come to port arms. Similarly, when a baton-equipped formation is commanded to port or on guard, the general or lateral support elements assume the port position. Members of support elements give a resounding stomp with their left feet when the lead element goes to on guard. On the command FORWARD, MARCH, the support element maintains the same half step as the lead element.
B-26 Use of Force and Riot Control Measures
FM 3-19.40
CADENCE
B-108. The usual cadence for moving troops is as follows: Into and out of a riot control formation. Double time (180 steps
per minute). Troops are at safe port with a rifle or at port with a baton
when performing these maneuvers.
Safeguard position.Quick time (120 steps per minute).
On-guard position. Cadence is 60 steps per minute. For

psychological effect, troops usually accentuate each left step with a stomp.
B-109. The commander may increase or decrease cadence depending on the situation. For example, he may order quick time to keep pressure on a crowd that is withdrawing. He halts a formation moving in the on-guard position by commanding PLATOON (SQUADICOMPANY), HALT. The command of execution is given on the left foot. On the command HALT each soldier in the formation brings his right foot forward, even with his left foot, then takes one more half step with his left foot. He stomps his left foot as he comes to a halt and remains in the on-guard position.
INTERVALDISTANCE
B-110. The usual interval distance between soldiersin riot control formations is one pace or 30 inches but it can be adjusted for particular situations. A 30-inch interval may not be sufficient in some situations and may have to be lengthened. Some police forces have found that a greater interval makes formation members less vulnerable to thrown objects.
COMMANDERAND LEADER POSITIONS
B-111. When a unit is in a column formation, each echelon commander usually takes a position at the head of the column. In riot control formations, the element leader takes a position where he can best direct and control the unit. The senior formation commander normally centers himself and his staff behind the formation. Subordinate leaders position themselves where they can best control their soldiers within the formation. For diamond and circle formations, the squad leader and the assistant squad leader place themselves in the center of the formation. These are only guidelines, and leaders can adjust positions with respect to their units as they see fit.
B-112. In column formations, messengers, radio operators, marksmen, disperser operators, and other platoon headquarters members usually take positions at the front of the column. In riot control formations, headquarters personnel can be positioned near the commander at his discretion. If the situation does not allow this, headquarters personnel can be positioned behind the control element.
Use of Force and Riot Control Measures 8-27
Appendix C
Equipment Guide
Table C-1 lists equipment that may be issued to EPWs when their clothing becomes unserviceable. (See CTA50-900 when determining what clothing to issue EPWs.) Sundry packs and recreation equipment are also needed, and the facility commander arranges for them through supply or local purchase.
Table C-1. Individual Equipment
Equipment Guide C-1
FM 3-19.40
Table C-1.Individual Equipment (continued)
Zone ll-Warm or hot summers, mild winters.
Zone Ill-Warm or hot summers, cold winters.
Zone IV–Mild summers, cool winters.
Zone V-Warm or hot summers, cold or vety cold winters.
Zone VI–Mild summers, cold winters.

G2Equipment Guide
Appendix D
Military Police Internment/Resettlement Units .
Table D-1 provides a synopsis of the various MP I/R units that may be assigned to the TO.
Table D-1. MP VR Units
Unit HHC, MP command (I/R)
HHC, MP brigade (I/R)
MP detachment, I/R team (C2)
MP detachment, I/R team (I/R brigade liaison team)
MP detachment, I/R information center
TOE Assigned To 19641LO00 FORSCOM in CONUS and TSC OCONUS 19762L000 TSC
19543LH     I/R brigade
19543LD     MP brigade (I/R)
19643LOOO     I/R command, I/R brigade, or MP brigade
Duties Provides C”, staff planning, and supervisionof I/R
operations performedby assignedand attached
MP elements.
Provides command, staff planning, andsupervision

of I/R operations performedby assigned and

attached I/R MP elements.
Provides c2,staff planning, and supervisionof two
or three I/R battalionsthat process and intern
12,000 or fewer people.

Provides the following when the brigade’sspan of

control is exceeded: Extendsthe capability of the MP brigade (I/R) to plan and supervise collection, internment, and evacuation operations of EPWs, Cls, DCs, and US military prisoners. Acts as a coordination link to allied and indigenousorganizationsto ensurethat they are complyingwith the GenevaConventions concerning EPWs and Cls. Ensures that EPW operations in the TO follow US policies and directives, internationalagreements, and US policies implementing internationallaw. Is an essential link with HN forces securing EPWs, Cls, and DCs. Ensuresthat policies favorably consider the intent of the US to comply with internationaltreaties pertaining to the care and handlingof EPWs, Cls, and DCs.
Receives,processes, maintains, disseminates,and transmits requiredinformationand data relatingto EPWs, American PWs, Cls, and DCswithin the TO.
Military Police Internrnent/ResettlernentUnits D-1
Table D-1. MP VR Units (continued)
Unit MP detachment, I/R team (EPWICI branch camp liaison)
MP detachment, I/R team (EPWICI processing liaison team)
MP detachment I/R team (I/R processing squad)
HHC, MP battalion (I/R) (EPWICIIDC)
HHC, MP battalion (I/R)
HHC, MP battalion (confinement)
MP detachment (I/R) (confinement)
TOE 19543LE
19543LG
19543LC
19646L400 or 19546A and 19547AB(4)
19546A000
19656L000
19547AA00 Assigned To
One per camp (northeast Asia only)
MP detachment, team (ItR brigade liaison team)
MP detachment, I/R team (I/R brigade liaison team) (for c2)
I/R brigade in an A0
MP brigade
MP brigade
HHC, MP battalion (I/R)
Duties Provides a coordination link to allied and indigenous I/R facilities.
Helps maintain proper custody and control of
internees.

Ensures that the provisions of US policies,
publications, and directives; international
agreements; US policies implementing international
law; and the Geneva Conventions are fulfilled.

Provides a coordination link to allied and
indigenous forces.

Establishes, organizes, and operates an I/R
processing element within an I/R facility or, with an
I/R battalion support team, at a location other than
an I/R facility.

Provides processing capabilities for 8 internees per

hour. One squad is assigned for every 200
internees requiring processing per day within a
separatetindependent corps, division, or brigade
force as required.

Provides c2,administrative, and logistics support to
operate an I/R facility.

Provides OPCON of attached units.

Is capable of interning and supporting 4,000 EPWs

and CIS or 8,000 DCs.
Provides command, staff planning, administration,
and logistical support to operate an I/R facility for
EPWs, Cls, or US military prisoners.

Provides OPCON of assigned and attached units.

Supervises battalion functions (personnel, medical,

supply, and food services).
Provides command, staff planning, administration,
and logistical support for a confinement facility for
US military prisoners.

Provides supervision, administration, health
services, and logistical support for US military
prisoners.

D-2 Military Police InternmentlResettlement Units
Table D-1. MP VR Units (continued)
Unlt
MP company  prisoners, DCs, and installations and facilities at an I/R facility.
Is capable of securing 500 US military prisoners, 2,000 EPWs, 2,000 Cls, or 4,000 DCs in an I/R facility.
Provides static guards at rail terminals and sensitive-material facilities (maximum 240,000 square yards).
Provides food support for assigned personnel and collocated units.
MP company (escort guard)  19647LOOO  I/R MP brigade  Provides supervision and security for evacuating and moving EPWs, Cls, DCs, US military prisoners, and other detained persons via vehicles, trains, ~lanes, and road marches.

Military Police InternrnentlResettlementUnits D-3
AA
AC
ACCP
ACCP
ACS
ACT

admin
ADT

AFJI
AFR
AG
AICS
AMEDD
AMS
A0

AOR
AR
ASD

Am
attention
Glossary
Alcoholics Anonymous active component Army contingency communications package Army Correspondence Course Program Army Corrections System active duty
administrative
active-duty tour
Armed Forces Journal International Air Force regulation
adjutant general Army Inmate Correction Syetem
Army Medical Department Army management structure
area of operations
area of responsibility
Army regulation
Assistant Secretary of Defense
AWOL
BDU
BLD
BSA

BTOC
c2
CA

absent without leave battle dress uniform brigade liaison detachment brigade support area brigade tactical operations center command and control
civil affairs
CARE CHA CHS CI CID
cmc
CMO
CO
COL COMMZ CONUS
cos
COSCOM
CP CPT CRS CRS
cs cs
CSB
css
CTA CTF
cz
D D DA DART DASD DC
Cooperative for American Relief Everywhere, Incorporated corps holding area combat health support civilian internee criminal investigation division commander in chief civil-military operations company colonel communications zone continental United States civilian occupational specialty Corps Support Command (USArmy) collecting point captain Catholic Relief Services Correctional-Reporting System o-chlorobenzylidine malonitrile combat support correctional-supervision branch combat service support common table of allowance correctional-treatment file combat zone disperser
day Department of the Army disaster assistance response team Deputy Assistant Secretary of Defense District of Columbia
DC DCAA DCSOPS DD DFAS-IN DNBI DOD DOJ DOMS DOS DOT
DP
DS
DSA

ea EAC EBC EEI EGA EGCT EHP EPW ERA ES ESF
eval

FBI FCF FDF
FEMA
dislocated civilian
dislocated-civilian assembly area
Deputy Chief of Staff for Operations and Plans
Department of Defense
Defense Finance and Accounting Service-Indianapolis
disease and nonbattle injuries
Department of Defense
Department of Justice
Director of Military Support
Department of State
Department of Transportation
displaced person
direct support
division support area
each echelons above corps
echelons below corps
essential elements of information electronically generated form extra good-conduct time
emergency home patrol
enemy prisoner of war
emergency rest area
emergency services
emergency support function
evaluation
Federal Bureau of Investigation
field confinement facility
field detention facility
Federal Emergency Management Agency
FiveSs and T FM
FMFM
FMFRP

FN

FORSCOM FSB ft 62 63
64
65
gal
GC

gd

GO GP GPW
GWS
GWS (SEA)
H&RA WCA HA HHC
Hrv
HM
EN
search, segregate, silence, speed, safeguard, and tag field manual Fleet Marine Force manual Fleet Marine Force reference publication foreign nation United States Army Forces Command forward support battalion foot, feet Assistant Chief of St&, G2 (Intelligence) Assistant Chief of Staff, G3 (Operations and Plans) Assistant Chief of Staff, G4 (Logistics) Assistant Chief of Staff, G5 (Civil Affairs)
Geneva Convention Relative to the Protection of Civilian Persons in Time of War, 12 August 1949 guard general officer
general purpose Geneva Convention Relative to the Treatment of Prisoners of War, 12 August 1949
Geneva Convention for the Amelioration of the Condition of the
Wounded and Sick in Armed Forces in the Field, 12 August 1949 Geneva Convention for the Amelioration of the Condition of Wounded, Sick, and Shipwrecked Members of Armed Forces at Sea, 12 August 1949
Humanitarian and Refugee Mairs humanitarian and civic assistance humanitarian assistance headquarters and headquarters company human immunodeficiency virus hazardous material host nation
HQ
HQDA

ht
I/R
ICRC
ID

IDP
IFRC

IG
mo
IMC
INS

I0 IOM IR
IRIC

IRIS
IRS

ISN
54

Jan
JCS

JFC

JTF JTR L&O
LOC

LP
LRA
LTC

headquarters Headquarters, Department of the Army height internment/resettlement International Committee of the Red Cross identification internally displaced person International Federation of Red Cross and Red Crescent Societies inspector general international humanitarian organization International Medical Corps Immigration and Naturalization Service international organization International Organization for Migration information requirements internment/resettlement information center Internment/Resettlement Information System Internal Revenue Service internment serial number Logistics Directorate January joint chief of staff joint forces commander joint task force joint travel regulation law and order lines of communication listening post local reproduction authorized lieutenant colonel
LZ M MAJ MANSCEN MARKS MBA MCCM MCO MCO MCRP MDMP METT-TC
MI misc MOOTW MOS
MP
MRE MRO MSCA MSF MSR
MWD
NA
NA NATL NATO
NBC
NCCB
NCO

landing zone
month
major
Maneuver Support Center
Modern Army Recordkeeping System
main battle area
modular crowd control munition
Marine Corps order
movement control officer
Marine Corps reference publication
military decision-making process
mission, enemy, terrain, troops, time available, and civilian
considerations
military intelligence
miscellaneous military operations other than war military occupational specialty military police meal, ready-to-eat medical regulating officer military support to civil authorities MBdecin Sans Frontikres (Doctors Without Borders) main supply route military working dog not applicable Narcotics Anonymous national North Atlantic Treaty Organization nuclear, biological, or chemical National Council of Catholic Bishops noncommissioned officer
NCOIC NDC TACNOTE NG NGO NLW No. NOK
NWP

obj

OC OCONUS OD OFDA OG OIC OIP OP OPCON OPLAN OPNAVINST OPORD OSD PA PACAFP
Pam
PA0
PHs
PIR
PM

POC
noncommissioned officer in charge
National Disaster Coalition tactical note
national guard
nongovernmental organization
nonlethal weapon
number
next of kin
Naval warfare publication
objective
oleoresin capsicum outside continental United States
other detainee
Office of Foreign Disaster Assistance
olive green
officer in charge
organization inspection policy
observation post
operational control
operation plan
Office of the Chief of Naval Operations instruction
operation order
Office of the Secretary of Defense
physician’s assistant
Pacific Air Forces pamphlet
pamphlet
public affairs officer
Public Health Service
priority intelligence requirements
provost marshal
point of contact
Pr PRC PSB PSYOP pub PVNTMED PW QW
qty

RCF RCM
reg ROE ROI RP 52 53 54 55 SA SCF SECDEF SGT SJA
SM SOP SSN
STANAG STD STP
pair populace and resource control prisoner services branch psychological operations publication preventive medicine prisoners of war quick-reaction force quantity regional corrections facility rules for courts-martial regimental rules of engagement rules of interaction retained person Intelligence Officer (US Army) Operations and Training Officer (US hy) Supply Officer (US Army) Civil Affairs Officer (US Army) situational awareness Save the Children Foundation Secretary of Defense sergeant staffjudge advocate selected marksman standing operating procedure social security number Standardization Agreement sexually transmitted disease soldier testing program
STP STRESS TI3 TCMS THP TO TOC TOE TRADOC TSC ‘rrP UCMJ UIC UN UNDP UNDRC
UNaCR

UNICEF
UNOCHA
US
USACIC
USAFEP
USAID
USAR
USCG
USD
USDA
USDB
USIA
WFP

soldier training publication
search, tag, report, evacuate, segregate, and safeguard
tuberculosis
Theater Construction Management System
temporary home patrol
theater of operations
tactical operations center
table(s) of organization and equipment
United States Army Training and Doctrine Command
Theater Support Command
tactics, techniques, and procedures
Uniform Code of Military Justice
unit identification code
United Nations United Nations Development Program United Nations Disaster Relief Coordinator
United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees
United Nations Children’s Fund
United Nations Office for the Coordination of Humanitarian Affairs
United States United States Army Criminal Investigation Command United States Air Forces Europe pamphlet United States Agency for International Development United States Army Reserve Unites States Coast Guard Under Secretary of Defense United States Department of Agriculture United States Disciplinary Barracks United States Information Agency
World Food Program
WO  warrant officer
wt  weight
Y  year

Bibliography
AR 15-6.Procedures for Investigating Oficers and Boards of Officers. 11May 1988.
AR 15-130.Army Clemency and Parole Board. 23 October 1998.
AR 20-1.Inspector General Activities and Procedures. 15March 1994.
AR25-400-2.The Modern Army Recordkeeping System (MARKS). 26February 1993.
AR 27-10.Legal Services: Military Justice. 24June 1996.
AR 40-3.Medical, Dental, and Veterinary Care. 30July 1999.
AR40-5.Preventive Medicine. 15October 1990.
AR 190-8.Enemy Prisoners of War, Retained Personnel, Civilian Internees, and Other Detainees

IOPNAVINST 3461.6;AFJI 31-304;MCO 3461.1). 1October 1997.
AR 190-12.Military Police Working Dogs. 30September 1993.
AR 190-14.Carrying of Firearms and Use of Force for Law Enforcement and Security Duties.
12March 1993.
AR 190-22.Searches, Seizures, and Disposition of Property. 1January 1983.
AR 190-40.Serious Incident Report. 30November 1993.
AR 190-47.The Army Corrections System. 15August 1996.
Ak 210-130.Laundry and Dry Cleaning Operations. 15April 1993.
AR 210-174.Accounting Procedures for PrisonersJ Personal Property und Funds.
17September 1986.
AR 385-10.The Army Safety Program. 23 May 1988.
AR 600-13.Army Policy for the Assignment of Female Soldiers. 27March 1992.
AR 630-10.Absence Without Leave, Desertion, and Administration of Personnel Involved in
Civilian Court Proceedings. 10June 1992.
AR 633-30.Military Sentences to Confinement {AFR125-30).6November 1964.
AR 670-1.Wear and Appearance ofArmy Uniforms and Insignia. 1 September 1992.
AR 700-84.Issue and Sale of Personal Clothing. 15May 1983.
AR 710-2.Inventory Management Supply Policy Below the Wholesale Level. 31 October 1997.
CTA 50-900.Clothing and Individual Equipment. 1September 1994.
CTA 50-970.Common Items of Nonexpendable Material. 21September 1990.
DA Form 1124.Individual Receipt Voucher Personal Deposit Fund. October 1952.
DA Form 1125-R.Summary Receipt and Disbursement Voucher Personal Fund. April 1986.
DA Form 1128.Petty Cash Voucher-Personal Deposit Fund. 1September 1960.
DA Form 1129-R.Record of Prisoners’ Personal Deposit Fund (LRA). April 1986.
DA Form 1130-R.Statement of PrisonerJs Personal Deposit Fund and Request for Withdrawalof
Personal Funds (LRA). April 1986.
DA Form 1131-R.Prisoner’s Cash Account-Personal Deposit Fund 0.

April 1986 DA Form 1132-R.Prisoner’s Personal Property List-Personal Deposit Fund 0.
April 1986. DA Form 1134-R.Request for Withdrawal of Personal Property (LRA).April 1986. DA Form 1135-R.Personal Property Permit (LRA). April 1986. DA Form 2028.Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms. 1February 1974. DA Form 2662-R.United States Army EPW Identity Card (LRA). May 1982. DA Form 2663-R.Fingerprint Card (LRA). May 1982. DA Form 2664-R.Weight Register (Prisoner of War) (LRA). May 1982. DA Form 2665-R.Capture Card for Prisoner of War (LRA). May 1982. DA Form 2666-R.Prisoner of War Notification of Address G?.RA).May 1982. DA Form 2667-R.Prisoner of War Mail (Letter) (LRA). May 1982. DA Form 2668-R.Prisoner of War (Post Card) (LRA). May 1982. DA Form 2674-R.Enemy Prisoner of War1 Civilian Internee Strength Report 0.May 1982. DA Form 2677-R.United States Army Civilian Internee Identity Card 0.November 1986. DA Form 2678-R.Civilian Internee NATL-Internment Card (LRA). November 1986. DA Form 2679-R.Civilian Internee Letter W).November 1986. DA Form 2680-R.Civilian Internee NATL-Post Card'(LRA). November 1986. DA Form 3078.Personal Clothing Request. May 1993. DA Form 3955.Change ofAddress and Directory Card. 1 February 1979. DA Form 3997.Military Police Desk Blotter. 1December 1998. DA Form 4137.EvidencelProperty Custody Document. 1July 1976. DA Form 4237-R.Detainee Personnel Record (LRA). August 1995. DA Pam 27-1.Treaties Governing Land Warfare. 7December 1956. DA Pam 37-100-95.The Army Management Structure (AMS), Fiscal Year 1995.1July 1994. DA Pam 350-38.Standards in Weapons Training. 3July 1997.
DD Form 2 (ACT).Armed Forces of the United States Geneva Convention Identification Card
(Active) (EGA). October 1993.
DD Form 499. Prisoner’s Mail and Correspondence Record. 1 October 1967.
DD Form 503. Medical Examiner’s Report. 1 December 1955.
DD Form 504. Request and Receipt for Health and Comfort Supplies. 1 April 1976.
DD Form 506. Daily Strength Record of Prisoners. 1 February 1968.
DD Form 509. Inspection Record of Prisoners in Segregation. 1 July 1970.
DD Form 515. Roster of Prisoners. December 1955.
DD Form 2707. Confinement Order. November 1999.
DD Form 2708. Receipt for Inmate or Detained Person. November 1999.
DD Form 2710. Inmate Background Summary. November 1999.
DD Form 2718. Inmate’s Release Order. November 1999.
DD Form 2745. Enemy Prisoner ofWar (EPW) Capture Tag. May 1996.
DFAS-IN 37-1. Finance and Accounting Policy Implementation. January 2000.
DOD 4160.21-M. Defense Reutilization and Marketing Manual. August 1997.
DOD Directive 1030.1. Victim and Witness Assistance. 23 November 1994.
DOD Directive 1325.4. Confinement of Military Prisoners and Administration of Military
Correctional Programs and Facilities. 28 September 1999.
DOD Directive 3025.1. Military Support to Civil Authorities WCA). 15 January 1993.
DOD Directive 5100.46. Foreign Disaster Relief. 4 December 1975.
DOD Instruction 1030.2. Victim and Witness Assistance Procedures. 23 December 1974.
FBI Form FD-249. Arrest and Institutional Fingerprint Card. 11 May 1999.
FM3-0. Operations. To be published within 6 months.
FM 3-05.30. Psychological Operations. 19 June 2000.
FM5-34. Engineer Field Data. 30 August 1999.
FM8-51. Combat Stress Control in a Theater of Operations Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures.
29 September 1994.
FM 14-100. Financial Management Operations. 7 May 1997.
FM 19-10. The Military Police Law and Order Operations. 30 September 1987.
FM 19-15. Civil Disturbances. 25 November 1985.
FM 19-20.Law Enforcement Investigations. 25 November 1985.
FM 21-10. Field Hygiene and Sanitation. 11June 2000.
FM 22-5. Drill and Ceremonies. 8 December 1986.
FM 22-6. Guard Duty. 17 September 1971.
FM 22-100. Army Leadership. 31 August 1999.
FM 27-10. The Law of Land Warfare. 18July 1956.
FM 33-1-1. Psychological Operations Techniques and Procedures. 5 May 1994.
FM 90-40. Multiservice Procedures for the Tactical Employment of Nonlethal Weapons (NLW)

{MCRP 3-15.8; NWP 3-07-31; USCG Pub 3-07.31/. 6 October 1998.
FM 100-5. Engineer Operations. 27 February 1996.
FM 100-19. Domestic Support Operations {FMFM 7-10]. 1July 1993.
FM 100-23-1. Multiservice Procedures for Humanitarian Assistance Operations (FMFRP 7-16;

NDC TACNOTE 3-0% 6; ACCP 50-56; PACAFP 50-56; USAFEP 50-56/. 31October 1994.
FM 101-5. Staff Organization and Operations. 31 May 1997.
Foreign Assistance Act, US Code (1994).
Geneva Convention for the Amelioration of the Condition of the Wounded and Sick in Armed

Forces in the Field (GWS), 12 August 1949.
Geneva Convention for the Amelioration of the Condition of Wounded, Sick, and Shipwrecked
Members of Armed Forces at Sea (GWS [SEA]), 12 August 1949.
Geneva Convention Protocol Relative to the Status ofRefigees. 1967.
Geneva Convention Relative to the Protection of Civilian Persons in Time of War (GC),

12 August 1949.
Geneva Convention Relative to the Status of Refugees. 1951.
Geneva Convention Relative to the Treatment of Prisoners of War (GPW), 12 August 1949.
Geneva Conventions for the Protection of War Victims, 12 August 1949.
Misc Pub 27-7. Manual for Courts-Martial, United States, 2000 Edition.

Posse Cornitatus Act, US Code (1994).
STANAG 2033. Interrogation of Prisoners of War (PW)(Edition 6). 6 December 1994.
STANAG 2044. Procedures for Dealing With Prisoners of War (PW) (Edition 5). 28 June 1994.
STANAG 2084. Handling and Reporting of Captured Equipment and Documents (Edition 6).

6 April 1999.
STP 19-95B1-SM. Soldier’s Manual, MOS 95B, Military Police, Skill Leuel 1.21 February 1997.
STP 19-95C14-SM-TG. Soldier’s Manual and Trainer’s Guide for MOS 95C Internment1 Resettlement Specialist, Skill Levels 1121314. 26 March 1999.
STP 21-24-SMCT.Soldier Testing Program (STP). 1 October 1992.
TC 27-10-1.Selected Problems in the Law of War. 26June 1979.
UCMJ
UNHCR Handbook for the Military on Humanitarian Operations, First Edition. 1995.

A
ACS. See Army Corrections
System (ACS).
adjudged prisoner, 7-4
adjutant general (AG), 2-9
administration

CI facility, 5-2
DC facility, 9-1 5
FCF, 8-1 1
HA facility, 10-1 1

administrative segregation, 7-5
AG. See adjutant general (AG).
agencies involved in I/R

operations, 1-6
agitators, 4-10
agriculture program

CIS, 5-1 6

EPWS, 4-20
air assault operations, 3-19
airborne operations, 3-1 8
aircraft transport, 8-1 9
amphibious operations, 3-1 8
apprehension of escaped

prisoners, 8-1 6
approved-adjudged prisoner, 7-4
armored operations, 3-1 8
Army Corrections System (ACS),

7- 1
assembly area, DC, 9-4
assignment to internment facility

CIS, 5-4
EPWS, 4-9

B
backhaul system, 3-10
barracks rules, 9-1 5
baton positions, 8-1 4
battlefield confinement, US military

prisoners, 8-1
briefing DCs, 9-6

C
cadence, 8-27
canteens, 4-1 8
captives, 1-1 1
capture tag, 3-2
captured supplies and equipment,
6-5
capturing power, 1-6
casual prisoner, 7-4

Index
categories of civilians, 9-2
central CP, 3-12
CHA. See corps holding area

(CHA).
chapels, 6-7
chaplain, 2-1 0
chaplain captive, 4-1 4
chemical irritants, B-13

CI. See civilian internee (CI).
circle formation, 8-21
civil rights, 1-13
civilian interference, 9-2
civilian internee (CI), 1-3, 5-1
civilian lead agency, 1-9
civilian organizations, 1-8
civil-military operations (CMO), 9-1
clandestine activities, 4-23
classification

captives, 3-7
DCS, 9-1 1
EPWS, 4-9
US military prisoners, 8-7

classification reduction, 8-9
clear zones, 6-2
clemency, 7-1 1
close confinement, 7-6
close support, 8-24
clothing

CIS, 5-5
civilians, 10-9
DCS, 9-1 2
EPWS, 4-1 5
US military prisoners, 8-7

CMO officer, 2-9
CMO. See civil-military operations

(CMO).
:oercion, 3-7
:ollecting point (CP), 3-1, 3-1 0
:ollection point, DCs, 9-4
:ombat zone (CZ), 1-2
:ommander responsibilities, 2-1
:ommands, 8-25
:ommunications, 6-3
:ompensation

CIS, 5-16
EPWS, 4-20
US military prisoners, 7-1 1

:omplaints, 5-1 3
:onfinernent

CIS, 5-12

US military prisoners, 7-1
confiscated items, 3-5
constitutional rights, US military

prisoners, 7-3
constructing I/R facilities, 6-1
control

CIS, 5-1 0, 5-1 7
civilians, 10-1 0
DCS, 9-2, 9-1 4
EPWS, 4-12
US military prisoners, 7-5,

8-10
control force, 8-6
controlled flow, 4-1
corps holding area (CHA), 3-1,

3-1 5
correctional facilities, 7-3
correctional staff, 7-12
correctional system, 7-1
correctional treatment programs,

7-8
correctional treatment, US military
prisoners, 7-1

correspondence
CIS, 5-13
EPWS, 4-1 7
US military prisoners, 7-1 9,

8-1 4
counseling, 7-8
CP. See collecting point (CP).
crowd

behavior, 8-6
control, 8-6
tactics, 8-8

currency, 3-5
custody grade, US military
prisoners, 7-5, 8-9
custody, US military prisoners, 7-5,
8-1 0
CZ. See combat zone (CZ).

D
)ART. See disaster assistance
reponse team (DART).
jatabase, 4-5
IC facility, 9-7
IC operations, 9-1, 9-2
IC. See dislocated civilian (DC).
ieadly force, 9-1 7, 8-1

definitions, 1-2
dependent children of Cls, 5-4
deprivation, 8-9
detained prisoner, 7-4
detainees, 1-1 1
detaining power, 5-1 2
diamond formation, B-21
disaster assistance response team

(DART), 10-19

disciplinary
action, 8-9
measures, 7-6
punishment, 5-3

disciplinary-and-adjustment board,
8-1 6

discipline
CIS, 5-1 1
civilians, 10-10
DCS, 9-14
EPWS, 4-1 5
US military prisoners, 8-9

dislocated civilian (DC), 1-4
disorder, 2-8, 6-7
displaced person (DP), 1-4
disposition of DCs, 9-18
dissident actions, 4-21, 5-1 7
disturbance, 2-8, 5-17, 5-18
documentation, DCs, 9-6
DP. See displaced person (DP).

E
echelon formation, 8-19

education program
CIS, 5-15
EPWS, 4-18
US military prisoners, 7-10

EGCT. See extra good-conduct
time (EGCT).
emergency action plan, 2-2, 7-7
emergency services (ES), 10-14

CONUS, 10-14
OCONUS, 10-17

employment
CIS, 5-16
EPWS, 4-19
US military prisoners, 7-1 0

enemy plants, 4-1 0
enemy prisoner of war (EPW), 1-2,

4- 1
engineer officer, 2-1 0
EPW leaders, 4-1 0
EPW. See enemy prisoner of war

(EPW).
equipment guide, C-1
ES. See emergency services (ES).
escapes

CIS, 5-1 4
EPWS, 4-24
US military prisoners, 7-7

escapes, preventing, 8-1 8
escort guard company, 4-1 1
evacuation

captives, 3-7
DCS, 9-5
EPWS, 4-1

evacuee, 1-5
evacuees, return of, 9-6
evaluation board, 7-8
expellee, 1-5
extra duty, 8-9
extra good-conduct time (EGCT),

7-11

. ..
F
facility guard force, 2-6
FCF. See field confinement facility
(FCF).
FDF. See field detention facility

(FDF).
Federal Response Plan, 1-7
female

CIS, 5-1 1
EPWs, 4-9
field confinement facility (FCF),
7-1, 8-3
field detention facility (FDF), 7-1,

8-3
field processing captives, 3-2
finance officer, 2-9
Five S and T procedure (search,

segregate, silence, speed,
safeguard, and tag), 3-4
forfeiture, US military prisoners,

8-9
formation enhancement, 8-21
formations, B-16
forms

ACS, 7-1 7

FCF, 8-13
forward CP, 3-1 0
fraternization

CIS, 5-1 1

EPWs, 4-1 5
frisking US military prisoners, 7-7
full processing, 4-8

G
general orders, 2-6
general support, 8-22
Geneva Conventions, 1-1 2, 1-1 3
good-conduct time, 7-1 8, 8-9
guard towers, 6-2

guards, 7-1 3, 8-1 1
H
I HA. See humanitarian assistance
(HA).
halt, 8-2
hostile
act, 9-1 7
environment, 10-2
intent, 9-17
housed personnel, care and
control, 2-13
housekeeping supplies, 6-7
humanitarian assistance (HA),
10-1

I

ID band
CIS, 5-4
EPWs, 4-6

identifying
CIS, 5-5
DCS, 9-1 1, 10-8
US military prisoners, 8-7

IDP. See internally displaced
person (IDP).
IG. See inspector general (IG).
IHO. See international
humanitarian organization
(IHO).
impounded items, 3-5
information flow, 4-7
initial processing, 4-7
inspections, 2-8
inspector general (IG), 2-12
intelligence gathering, 4-22, 8-1 1
intermediate processing, 4-8
internally displaced person (IDP),
1-5
international humanitarian
organization (IHO), 1-9
international organization (lo), 1-8
internee committee, 5-12
internment
dependent children, 5-2
protected civilians, 5-2
internment serial number (ISN),
4-6
interpreters, 4-2, 5-6
interrogation, 3-1 7
interservice transfer, 4-1 1
10.See international organization
(10).
ISN. See internment serial number
(ISN).
isolation, 4-9

L&O. See law and order (L&O).
lateral support, 8-23
law and order (L&O), 9-1 6, 10-1 2
layout

central CP, 3-13
CHA, 3-1 5
DC facility, 9-1 0
DC overlay, 9-5
FCF, 8-5
forward CP, 3-1 1
HA facility, 10-7
IIR facility, 6-3
processing center, 6-5

legal considerations, 10-3
legal obligations, 9-2
lethal force, 8-4
lights, 6-3
line formation, 8-1 8
location of IIR facilities, 6-1

M
mandated organization, 1-9
marking CI facilities, 5-18
marking outer garments

CIS, 5-5

EPWS, 4-1 6
marksman, 6-5
MCO. See movement control

officer (MCO).
medical captive, 4-1 4
medical care

captives, 2-4
CIS, 5-13
civilians, 10-9
DCS, 9-6,9-12
EPWS, 4-17
internees, 6-7
US military prisoners, 7-23,

8-8
medical evacuation, 3-8
medical officer, 4-1 7, 5-9
medical operations, 2-1 1
medical support, 3-1 0, 3-1 2
metric conversions, A-1
MI interrogation team, 3-2, 3-17
migrant, 1-5
military working dog (MWD), 2-7,

4-23, 5-1 8
misconduct, 8-1 6
mitigation, 7-1 1
motor vehicle transport, 8-1 8
movement control officer (MCO),

2-1 2
movement of captives, 3-9

MP support
DC operations, 9-7
ES operations, 10-20

MWD. See military working dog
(MWD).

N
NGO. See nongovernmental
organization (NGO).
NLW. See nonlethal weapon

(NLW).
nongovernmental organization

(NGO), 1-8
nonlethal measures, 9-18
nonlethal weapon (NLW), B-3
nonmandated organization, 1-9
nonviolent tactics, 8-7
notice of protection, 2-3, 5-1 1

0
objectives, IIR operations, 1-5
OD. See other detainee (OD).
officer prisoner, 7-4
operational environment, 10-2
other detainee (OD), 1-4, 5-1

P
PAO. See public affairs officer

(PAO).
parole, 7-12
patrol roads, 6-3
perimeter security, 2-7
permanent transfer, 4-1 1
permissive environment, 10-2
personal property

CIS, 5-14
EPWS, 4-1 1
US military prisoners, 7-1 8

personnel file
CIS, 5-4
EPWS, 4-5
US military prisoners, 7-8

petty-cash fund, 7-1 9

photographs
CIS, 5-8
EPWS, 4-4
US military prisoners, 8-7

planning considerations, central

CP, 3-14
platoon echelon left, 8-20
platoon echelon right, 8-20
policies, DCs, 9-3
populace and resource control

(PRC), 9-1
positions, 8-27
1 PRC. See populace and resource

control (PRC).
pretrial confinement, 7-3
principles

CI facilities, 5-3
IIR facilities, 2-2
I/R operations, 1-5

priorities of force, 8-1 7, 8-1
prisoner status, 7-4
privileged mail, 7-20
privileges, US military prisoners,

8-9
proactive programs, 10-1
procedures

DC operations, 9-3
IIR facility operations, 2-1

processing
captives, 3-2
CIS, 5-6
civilians, 10-6, 10-8
DCS, 9-9
EPWS, 4-1
US military prisoners, 8-5

processing centers, 6-5

processing stations
CIS, 5-7
DCS, 9-1 1
EPWS, 4-2
US military prisoners, 8-6

property accountability, 3-5
protected CI status, 5-4
protected civilian, 5-2
protecting power, 1-1 1, 4-1 4, 5-12
protection

captives and detainees, 1-1 1
EPWs and Cls, 1-12
refugees, 1 -1 3

psychological operations
(PSYOP), 2-1 2
PSYOP. See psychological

operations (PSYOP).
public affairs officer (PAO), 2-10
punishment, 8-9, 8-1 0
punitive measures, prohibited, 7-6

R
rail transport, 8-1 9

rations
DCS, 9-6
EPWS, 4-17

reactionary force, 8-1 6
reactive programs, 10-1
reassignment, EPWs, 4-1 0
receipts, 3-6
receiving

CIS, 5-6

EPWS, 4-1
receiving centers, 6-5
reclassification

DCS, 9-1 1

EPWS, 4-1 0
record of events, B-9
records

CI facility, 5-4
I/R facility, 2-4
recreation program
captives, 2-5

‘CIS, 5-16
I/R facility, 6-7
US military prisoners, 7-1 0

refugee, 1-5, 1-1 3

regulations
ACS, 7-17
FCF, 8-13

releasing Cls, 5-1 5
relief agencies, 1-1 0
religious materials, I/R facilities,

6-7
remission, 7-1 1
repatriating EPWs, 4-1 1
reports

captives, 3-6
CI facility, 5-4
EPWS, 4-1 1
I/R facility, 2-4

representatives, EPW, 4-1 3
reprimand, 8-9
requests, 5-1 3
responsibilities

commander, 2-1

staff officers, 2-9
restraining devices, 7-6
restrictions, employing EPWs, 4-19
retained items, 3-4
retained person (RP), 1-3
riot, 2-8,5-17, B-8
riot control agents, B-11
riot control measures, B-9
river-crossing operations, 3-1 8
ROE. See rules of engagement

(ROE).
ROI. See rules of interaction (ROI).
RP. See retained person (RP).
rules of engagement (ROE), 2-8,

4-15, 5-18, 9-17, 10-3, 8-2
rules of interaction (ROI), 4-14,
8-16,9-17, 10-13

S
safeguard, 3-8
safety, 2-5, 5-2
sally ports, 6-3
sanitation, 2-4,4-17,5-13,6-7,8-8,

9-12, 10-9
schedule of calls, 2-2
screening, 3-1 7,9-11, 10-8
searches, 3-4, 5-1 1, 9-9, 10-8
security, 2-5,3-9,4-7,4-15, 4-21,

5-1 1,5-17, 9-5, 9-1 3, 10-2,
B-1 1
security measures, prohibited,
8-1 0
security requirements, I/R facilities,
6-2

segregation
at CPs and CHAs, 3-7
EPWS, 4-9
US military prisoners, 7-4, 8-9

self-government
civilians, 10-1 0
DCS, 9-13

sentence computation, 7-1 8, 8-1 4
signal officer, 2-1 0
SJA. See staff judge advocate

(S JA).

social programs, 2-4
CIS, 5-15
EPWS, 4-1 8

special orders, 2-6
staff judge advocate (SJA), 2-1 0
staff responsibilities, 2-9
standby guards, 2-7
standing orders, 2-2, 5-3
stateless person, 1-5
stay-put policy, 9-4
strength report, 4-7
STRESS (search, tag, report,

evacuate, segregate, and
safeguard), 3-2

subsistence
at I/R facilities, 6-5
CIS, 5-5
civilians, 10-9
DCS, 9-12
EPWS, 4-1 7
US military prisoners, 8-8

supplies, 7-22
supply services, 8-1 5
support personnel

ACS, 7-1 6, 7-20
MP pnit, 8-15
suspension,,7-1 1

.
(”
T
tactics, 8-5
tagging captives, 3-6
temporary custody, 8-1
temporary transfer, 4-1 1
tower guards, 2-7

training
ACS, 7-1 5
I/R personnel, 2-1 3
NLWS, 8-5
.riot contiol, B-10 . ”

transfer
CIS, 5-14
EPWS, 4-1 0
US military prisoners, 7-21,

8-1 9

transporting
civilians, 10-1 3
DCS, 9-5,9-6, 9-1 8
US military prisoners, 7-7,

8-18

treatment
CIS, 5-1
detainees, 1 -12
EPWS, 4-13

tribunal. 4-10

uncertain environment, 10-2
, units in a TO, D-1

‘US military prisoner, 1-5
US policy, 1-12
use of force, 2-8, 8-1 7, 9-1 7, 10-2

v

violations of the UCMJ, 8-16
visits, 5-1 6

W
walking patrols, 2-7
war victim, 1-5
warning, 8-9
weapon positions, B-16
wedge formation, B-19
work detail guards, 4-23
worship

captives, 2-5
CIS, 5-1 6
EPWS, 4-1 8
US military prisoners, 7-20

FM 3-19.40 (FM 19-40)
IAUGUST 2001
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
ERIC K. SHlNSEKl
General, United States Amy
Chief of Staff
Official:
JOEL B. HUDSON
Administrative Assistant to the
Secretary of the Army
01 20505

DISTRIBUTION:
Active Amy, Army National Guard, and US Army Reserve: To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number 11 5851 requirements for FM 3-19.40.

 

US fighting code 1955

US fighting code  1955

COVER PAGE
THE U. S.
FIGHTING MAN’S

CODE
Published by the
OFFICE OF ARMED FORCES
INFORMATION and EDUCATION
Department of Defense

November 1955
This publication includes the report of the Secretary of Defense’s Advisory Committee on Prisoners of War
PROPERTY OF u.s. ARMY THE JUDGE,ADVOCATE GENERAL’S SCHOOl
LIBRARY
EXECUTIVE ORDER 10631
CODE OF CONDUCT FOR MEMBERS OF THE ARMED FORCES OF THE UNITED STATES
By virtue of the authority vested in me as President of the United States, and as Com­mander-in-Chief of the Armed Forces of the United States, I hereby prescribe the Code of Conduct for Members of the Armed Forces of the United States which is attached to this ·order and hereby made a part thereof.
Every member of the Armed Forces of the United States is expected to measure up to the standards embodied in this Code of Conduct while he is in combat or in captivity. To ensure achievement of these standards, each member of the Armed Forces liable to
.     capture shall be provided with specific training and instruction designed to better equip him to counter and withstand all enemy efforts against him, and shall be fully instructed as to the behavior and obligations expected of him during combat or captivity.
The Secretary of Defense (and the Secretary of the Treasury with respect to the Coast Guard except when it is serving as part of the Navy) shall take such action as is deemed necessary to implement this order and to disseminate and make the said Code known to all members of the Armed Forces of the United States.
THE WHITE HOUSE,
August 17, 1955.
In signing this order, the President said: “No American prisoner of war will be forgotten by the United States. Every available means will be employed by our government to establish contact with, to support and to obtain the release of all our prisoners of war. Furthermore, the laws of the United States provide for the support and care of dependents of members of the Armed Forces including those who become prisoners of war. I assure dependents of such prisoners that these laws will continue to provide for their welfare.”

CONTENTS
Letter of Transmittal
I. Background
II. A Brief Look at History ill. The American Fighting Man and Korea
IV.
A Code of Conduct for the Future

V.
Korean Summary

VI.     The Road Ahead for America and the Armed Forces Addenda
THE DEFENSE ADVISORY COMMITTEE ON
PRISONERS OF WAR

MEMBERS
Mr. Carter L. Burgess, Assistant Secretary of Defense (Man­
power, Personnel and Reserve)-Chairman. General John E. Hull, USA (Retired)-Vice Chairman. Dr. Frank B. Berry, Assista~t Secretary of Defense (Health
and Medical). Mr. Hugh M. Milton, II, Assistant Secretary of the Army (Manpower and Reserve Forces). . Mr. Albert Pratt, Assistant Secretary of the Navy (Personnel and Reserve Forces). Mr. David S. Smith, Assistant Secretary of the Air Force (Manpower and Personnel).
Lt. General Frank W. Milburn, USA (Retired).
Vice Admiral C. A. Lockwood, USN (Retired).
Lt. General Idwal H. Edwards, USAF (Retired).
Major General Merritt A. Edson, USMC (Retired).*
Mr. Stephen S. Jackson-Committee Counsel.
Mr. Theodore Roscoe-Special Advisor.
Mr. Edward Wetter-Office of the Assistant Secretary of Defense (Research’and Development).
STAFF
Colonel Horace E. Townsend, USA-8tafl’ Director.
Colonel John C. Steele, USA-Deputy Staff Director.
Lt. Colonel Robert B. Rigg, USA-Member.
Commander Fred W. Frank, Jr., USN-Member.
Lt. Colonel Robert E. Work, USAF-Member.
Lt. Colonel F. B. Nihart, USMC-Member.
Major Donald B. Churchman, USA-Administration.

*Died 14 August 1955
Iv
OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY OF DEFENSE
WASHINGTON 25, D. C.
July S9, 1955
Defense Advisory Committee on Prisoners of War
Dear Mr. Secretary:
Your Defense Advisory Committee on Prisoners of War has been in constant session for the past two months and is pleased to submit this report of its deliberations and findings.
We are certain that many persons have expected this Com­mittee to recommend courses of action which would be as ‘ revolutionar.yas the speed and techniques of the latest guided missile or jet aircraft.
However, our task deals with human beings and the Nation. We can find no basis for making recommendations other than on the principles and foundations which have made America free and strong and on the qualities which we associate with men of integrity and character. It is in, this common belief that we have determined on courses of proposed action which we are convinced are best for the United States and fo~ its position among free nations.
The Code of Conduct we recommend sets a high standard and a reasonable course for members of the Armed Forces of the future. The conscience and heart of all America are needed in the support of this Code, and ‘the best of training that can be provided in our homes, by our schools and churches and by the Armed Forc~ will be required for all who undertake ‘to
, live by this Code. ‘
America no longer can afford to think in terms of a limited
number of our fighting men becoming prisoners of war and in
the hands of an enemy in some distant land. Modern warfare
has brought the challenge to the doorstep of every citizen, and
so the Code we propose may well be a Code for all Americans
if the problem of survival should ever come to our own main

streets.
.And then too the United States must constantly be aware
of her high position of world leadership, and the Code we
propose must consider the standard of the Ten Commandments
and of our Constitution, as well as our pledge to the United

Nations.
y
No Code should overlook the watermarks of America’s
greatness or bow to the easier courses which might entrap
more easily our men as alleged war criminals and weaken
their fiber for the many ordeals they may face. We must
bear in mind the past and future significance of the reserva­
tion made by Soviet Russia and other Communist nations to
Article 85 of the· Geneva Conventions of 1949 on prisoners
of war.
Past history, the story of Korea and the crises which faced
our prisoners of war in that conflict from capture through
Operation Big Switch and after, were all carefully considered
and are presented in our report. The prisoner of war situa­
tion resulting from the Korean War has received a great deal
of adverse publicity. As is stated in our account, much of
that adverse publicity was due to lack of information and
consequent misconceptions in regard to the problem.
A few statistics may prove reassuring to anyone who thinks
the Armed Forces were undermined by Communist propa­
ganda in Korea.
A total of about 1,600,000 Americans served in the Korean War. Of the 4,428 Americans who survived Communist im­prisonment, only a maximum of 192 were found chargeable with serious offenses against comrades or the United States. Or put it another way. Only lout of 23 American POWs was suspected of serious misconduct.
The contrast with civilian figures tells an interesting story. According to the lat’e8t F. B. I. statistics, 1 in 15 persons in the United States has been mested and fingerprinted for the commission, or the alleged commission, of criminal acts.
When one realizes that the Armed Forces come from a croSB­section of the national population, the record seems fine indeed. It seems better than that when one weighs in the balance the tremendous pressures the American POWs were under. Weighed in that balance, they cannot be found wanting.
We examined the publicly alleged divergent action taken by the Services toward prisoners repatriated from Korea. The disposition of all cases was governed by the facts and circum­stances surrounding each case, and was as consistent, equitable and uniform as could be achieved by any two boards·or courts. As legal steps, including appeals, are completed and in light of the uniqueness of the Korean War and the particular conditions
‘Ii surrounding American prisoners of war, the appropriate Service Secretaries should make thorough reviews of all punishments a.warded. This continuing review should make certain that any excessive sentences, if found to exist, are carefully con­sidered and mitigated. This review should also take into account a comparison with sentences meted out to other prison­ers for similar offenses.
In concluding, the Committee unanimously agreed that Americans require a unified and purposeful standard of con­duct for our prisoners of war backed up by a first class training program. This position is also wholeheartedly supported by the concensus of opinion of all those who consulted with the Committee. From no one did we receive stronger recommenda­tions on this point than from the former American prisoners of war in Korea~fficersand enlisted men.
In taking this position and recommending this Code, it was pointed out to the Committee, and the Committee agr-ees, that in return America must always stand behind every American upon whom befalls prisoner of war status and spare no reason­able effort in obtaining their earliest possible release back to our
side.  /
Sincerely,
~.’lJs””,. _.~.~

~1fE; C/;fG”

~
The Honorable Charles E. Wilson The Secretary of Defense
BLANK PAGE
I
BACKGROUND

The Fortunes of War
Fighting men declare it is neither dishonorable nor heroic to
be taken prisoner. In the sense that the victim does not covet
it, but finds himself unable to avoid it, capture is an accident.
Often, like a motor crash, it comes as complete surprise. Often,
too, it is accompanied by injury. Nearly always the upshot is
painful and in the end it may prove fatal. And, as is the case
with many accidents, it is “bad luck.”
Fighting men speak of “the fortunes of war.” In combat,
luck cannot smile on aU participants. Some.are bound to
lose. The man taken captive is one of the unlucky-a Soldier
of Misfortune. That can be one definition for war-prisoner.
But the prisoner is always a soldier, adversity despite. For­
tune can change. In theU. S. Submarine Service there is the
maxim: “Luck is where you find it.” The POW must keep on
searching. It may come by way of chance for rescue or chance
for escape. Opportunity or luck may favor him through pris­
oner exchange. They also serve who only stand and wait. The
Lord helps those who hustle in the meantime.
These are the views of fighting men. And of men who have been prisoners of war-those who have “had it.” Their con­victions, derived from experience, serve to dispel a popular fallacy-the misconception that a prisoner of war is, perforce, a hero. Conversely, they do not chalk his capture down to in­ferior performance. Everything depends on the individual and the circumstances involved.
Public Interests and Misconceptions Clearly one shoUld not generalize about POWs, lump them all into a single slot, or jump from “some to all” conclusions. Public opinion tends to settle for generalities because they are convenient. The “single slot” is easy to handle. The some­equals-all deduction, quickly arrived at, does not entail bother­some thinking. But these handy and quick devices serve to
distort factuality. Misconceptions result. If, in addition, there has been misinformation or lack of information, public opinion may go far askew.
In the case of American POWs-in particular, those taken prisoner in Korea-misconceptions are abundant, For the most part they are based on erroneous generalities and some­equals-all deductions. Too, for· reasons which will become clear, the public has heretofore not been fully informed on the details necessary for balanced judgment.
Definitions were and are unclear or lacking. To begin with, just what is a prisoner of war? The man and his situation may be readily visualized. But what is his military status? What conduct is required of,the prisoner in regard to enemy interroga­tion? What rules and regulations must he follow during con­finement? What are his rights and privileges as codified by various international conventions and protocols?
What treatment may the .prisoner of war expect from the “detaining power,” his captors? What conditions are imposed by the so-called “laws of war?” Can a POW be tried as a war criminal? What is a war criminal?
Did the American POW in Korea face some novel and alarming menace from his Communist captors? Were nearly all prisoners tortured or “brain washed?” Did many POWs in Korea adopt Marxist doctrine? Were there hundreds of subverted turncoats, traitors, voluntary collaborators? In punishing such malefactors was there divergence in the military Semces-some lenient; others “Spartan?”
On many of these and similar questions the citizen on the home front has remained largely uninformed. Too often the POW, himself, has not known the answers.
Appointment of the Defense Advisory Committee Every war has its disturbing aftermath. There is always another side to the Victory coin. If the victory is not clearly imprinted and the war has ended in what seems a stalemate, the coin becomes suspect. In any event, there is usually a post-war inventory. If losses have been heavy and objectives obscure, the coin may seem debased. The inventory after the War of 1812 was unpleasant. There were some rude reactions after the Spanish-American War. In a great war, some battles are inevitably lost. Military leaders study these battles, determined to uncover .mistakes, if any were made, 80 that errors in kind may be avoided in the future. Correction of possible errors and the need for a unified plan for the future led the Department of Defense to examine closely the prisoner-or-war situation in Korea. The Defense Advisory Committee on Prisoners of War was organized to study the problem.
A BRIEF LOOK AT HISTORY
From the Beginning of Time For a full understanding of today’s prisoner of war problem, background knowledge of the past is essential. History has established precedents which provide the knowledge necessary to shed light on preparation for the future. Primitive man and his barbarian descendant annihilated or enslaved all foemen who were captured. In time it occurred to the conqueror to hold a captured headman or leader as hostage. Such a victim was Lot. According to Scripture he was freed by the forces of Abraham-perhaps the earliest prisoner-rescue on record. But the vanquished of the ancient world usually faced exter­mination. One finds in Samuel: “thus saith the Lord of Hosts . . . go and smite Amalek and utterly destroy all they have, and spare them not.” Saul was considered disobedient because he took a few Amalekite prisoners. Six cen~uries later Hemocritus of Syracuse was exiled for refusing to slaughter all Athenian captives. But it seemed mankind had a conscience. In respect to humane treatment of captives, it found voice in India in the ancient. Code of Manu (about 200 B. C.). The Hindu warrior was enjoined to do no injury to the defenseless or to the subdued enemy. Less humane, the Romans sported with their war-prisoners, often using them for target practice or gladiatorial shows. Captives were tortured for public amusement. Enslaved war­riors rowed Caesar’s naval galleys to North Africa and Britain, and were killed when they could no longer pull an oar. “Slay, and slay on!” Germanicus ordered his Rhineland invaders. “Do not take prisoners! We will have no peace until all are destroyed.” Thumbs sometimes went up for the valiant for­eign gladiator or the stalwart warrior who begged no quarter. But mercy to the conquered foe was usually a whim.
Medieval Concepts Chivalry developed in the Western World with the rise of Christian civilization, the concept of “Do Unto Others.” In the Dark Ages, soldiering remained savage, but the codes of knighthood served to ten:per the “Yarrior’s steel. The true
knight refused to slay for slaughter’s sake. Conquering, he
could be merciful to a gallant opponent. His prisoner was not
a plaything for sadistic ente,tainment.
If the chivalric code was sometimes more honored in breach
than in observance, the ideal-the Golden Rule-was there.
It was threatened by intolerant ideologies and the fanaticism
which fosters atrocities. Cruel pogroms and religious wars
bloodied Medieval Europe. The Islamic conquests were
savagery untrammeled. Woe to the Unbeliever captured by
the stepsons of Abu Bekrl But even as it clashed with the
sword, the scimitar acquired tempering. Possessed of his own
code, the Moslem warrior could appreciate gallantry.
The knight was called upon to assume the obligations of noblesse oblige. Warrior or liegeman, facing battle, was pledged to remain true to his king or cause, even if captured. Under any circumstance treason would merit retributive punishment. Treachery, the disclosure of a trust or the deliverance of a friend to the enemy, was perfidious-the mark of Judas the Betrayer.
Thus rules for the fighting man in combat or in captivity were linked to knightly concepts of duty, honor, loyalty to friend, and gallantry to foe.
Some time during the Crusades a rule evolved in regard to prisoner interrogation. The captive knight was permitted to divulge his name and rank-admissions necessitated by the game of ransom. A necessity for prisoner identification, the rule holds today, as iInposed by the modern Geneva Conven~ tions:
“Every prisoner of war, when questioned on the subject, is bound to give only his name, rank, date of birth, and army, regimental, personal or serial number.”
In Europe during the 17th Century the concept emerged that prisoners of war were in custody of the capturing sovereign or state. No rules for their treatment had yet been formulated, but they were protected from servitude and personal revenge. Later, during the 18th Century, captivity was considered ‘& means of preventing return to friendly forces. This was a step forward. Military prisoners were no longer considered guilty of crimes against the state.
The American Revolution To discourage desertions during the Revolution, the United States established the death penalty for those. prisoners who, after capture, took up arms in the service of the enemy. Am­
nesty was granted to deserters but not those who deserted to the enemy. Duress or coercion was’recognized as mitigating only in event of threatened immediate death. This was the first American definition of requir¢”,prisoner conduct. In the Treaty of 1785 no standa.rd of conduct was prescribed but conditions of confinement, care and parole were define<J.
The American Civil War During the Civil War there was some regression in the treat­ment afforded prisoners. About 3,170 Federal prisoners joined the Southern forces and about 5,452 prisoners of the Southern armies joined the Federal army. Prisoner conduct after capture was mentioned in War Depart­ment General Or.der No. 207, 3 July 1863. Among other things, the order provided that it was the duty of a prisoner of war to escape. This order apparently was intended to curb wide­spread practices of surrender and subsequent parole to escape further combatant service. Prosecution for misconduct was based on three criteria: -misconduct where there was no duress or coercion. -active participation in combat against Federal forces. -failure to return voluntarily. Nine years after the Civil War a declaration establishing the rights of prisoners was drafted by the Congress of Brussels (1874). Itwas signed by fifteen nations, none of which ratified the agreement.
World War. I C1nd II In 1907 the Hague Regulations established rules pertaining to captivity in war. These regulations led to the Geneva Con­ventions of 1929 and 1949. The United States signed all three, and it recently ratified the Geneva Conventions of 1949. The Conventions set forth in detail the rights and protections which should be afforded prisoners, but they do not.specifically pre­scribe the conduct which a nation may require of its personnel who may become prisoners. This is rightfully left for prescrip­tion by sovereign powers. There are, however, several provisions of the Conventions which do require specific conduct. Prisoners are subject to the laws, regulations and orders in force within the armed forces of the detaining power. They may be punished for infractions of rules. They must divulge name, rank, service number and date of birth.
A Code of Conduct Although all the Services had regulations, the U. S. Armed Forces have never had a clearly defined code of conduct appli­cable to American prisoners after capture. There are piece­meal legal restrictions and regulations but no comprehensive codification. However, despite this lack of a code, American troops have demonstrated through all wars that they do not surrender easily, they have never surrendered in large bodies and they have in general performed admirably in their country’s cause as prisoners of war.
THE AMERICAN FIGHTING MAN AND KOREA
THE KOREAN BATTLE .Our cause was simple and just, but our objectives in the Korean War were frequently confused in the public mind~ The Korean War had three aspects. There was the Civil War aspectr–Notth Koreans fighting South Koreans for con­trol of a dhided country. There was the collective aspect-the first United Nations’ attempt to stop a treaty breaking aggres­sor. And there was the Cold War aspect-the Western powers blocking the expansion of Communist imperialism. The causes of the war, United Nations’· objectives and the need for American ·intervention were not clearly delineated in the public mind. This lack of understanding prevailed among citizens and American.fighting men. The Communists attempted to exploit to the fullest this condition in both international propaganda and in dealing with our prisoners of war. Armed with Soviet weapons, North Korean Communist forces invl\ded South Korea on June 25, 1950. Six days later a battalion of. the U. S. 24th Infantry Division was rushed to Korea from Japan. The division was soon in action against the enemy on the outskirts of Seoul. The United States began a piecemeal build-up of the fighting forces in Korea. The firs~ units to reach Korea were not well prepared for combat. Thousands of reserves were ·flown to Korea. Many were veterans of World War II, but five years· at a factory or office job can slow up a man’s trigger finger. However, by Novem,ber 1950, the North Koreans had been completely beaten, their capital was in Allied hands, and their remnant forceS were scattered and disorganized. The ‘victory was ahnost at its climax when the Chinese Red avalanche crashed over the Yalu. That was on October 25th. A month later the Chinese opened a massive counter-offensive hurling our forces into retreat. Early in December, American and Allied Forces were trapped at the Chang-Jin Reservoir. By fierce fighting they broke the trap and fought their way to Htu;lgnam where they were evacuated. There ensued a winter of back-to-wall
battling in subzero cold. It was during this gruelling period that most of the American POWs were captured.
Jmprisonment, North Korea
During the Korean War a total ot 7,190 Americans were
captured by the enemy. Of these, 6,656 were Army troops’
263 wer.e Air Force men; 231 were Marines; 40 were Navy men:
‘fhe Army bore the heaviest burden of prisoner losses.
The captives were marched off to various prison camps in the
North Korean interior. Altogether there were 20 of these
camps.
“Death Marches”
The first ordeal the prisoner had to suffer-and·often the
worst-was the march to one of these camps. The North
Koreans frequently tied a prisoner’s hands behind his back or
bound his arms with wire. Wounded prisoners were jammed
into trucks that jolted, dripping blood, along broken roads.
Many of the wounded received no medical attention until they
reached the camp. Some were not attended to until days
thereafter.
The marching prisoners were liable to be beaten or kicked to their feet if they fell. A number of the North Korean officers were bullwhip barbarians, products of a semi-primitive en­vironment. Probably they had neTer heard of the Geneva Conventions or any other code of war. The worst of this breed were responsible for the murder of men who staggered out of line or collapsed at roadside. They were particularly brutal to South Korean captives. Evidence indicates that many ROK prisoners were forced to dig their own graves before they were shot (an old Oriental custom applied to the execution of eriminals). Some Amencans, with hands tied behind back, were shot by the enemy.
So the journeys to the prison camps were “death marches.” EspeciaJIy in the winter of. 1950-1951 when the trails were knee-deep in snow and polar winds flogged the toiling column. On one of these marches, 700 men were headed north. Before the camp was reached, 500 men had perished.
Facilities, Food, and Care Were Poor
The camps were what might be expected in a remote corner of Asia. Prisoner rations were scanty-a basic diet of rice occasionally leavened with Bome foul kind of soup. The Red

Chinese and Korean authorities pointed out that this larder conformed with the rules of the Geneva Conventions-the prisaner received the same food as the soldiery holding him captive. 01 course, the Chinese were inured to a rice diet. The average American could not stomach such fare. Sickness broke out in the camps. Many of the men suffered long sieges of dysentery.
The men suffered much from cold in winter and heat in summer. Water was often scarce; bathing became difficult. Barracks were foul and unsanitary.
In the best of the camps the men behind the barbed wire ~ere som?times gi~en tobacco, a few morsels of candy, occa­SIOnal mail. As will be noted, such items were usually offered as rewards for “cooperative conduct.”
; ,
A few R:ed Cross paclP,iges got through. However, the enemy consIStently refused to permit the International Red Cross to inspect prisoner of war camps. There was good reason.
Camps Varied from Bad to Wone In the worst of the camps, the prisoners existed by the skin of their teeth and raw courage. Men in the “bad” camps were knoWn to lose 50 pounds weight in a matter of weeks. The “bad” camps included the so-called “Bean Camp” near Suan, a camp known as “Dea.th Valley” near Pukchin, another camp called “The Valley,” apparently in the vicinity of Kanggye. Among the worst camps were the “Interrogation Center” near Pukchin and a neighboring disciplinary center called “The Caves.” This l~t was literally composed of caverns in which the men were confined. Here they were forced to sleep without blankets. Their food was thrown at them. There were no latrine facilities. In “The Caves” the prisoners were reduced to a degree of misery and,degradation almost unbelievable. Those sent to “The Caves” were pris­oners accused of insubordination, breaking camp rules, attempt­ing to escape, or committing some other crime (so-called). The testimony of survivors suggests that the “crime” was seldom fitted by the punishment. Some mEm who refused tG· talk to military interrogaters were threatened with, or sent to “The Caves.”
“Pak’s” Was No Palace Possibly the worst camp endured by American POWs in Korea was the one knoWn as “Pak’s Palace.” This was a highly
specialized interrogation center located near the city of Pyong­yang. The place was a brickyard flanked by Korean h6uses. It waS a North Korean establishment dominated by a chief interrogator, Colonel Pak. Pak was ably assisted by a hench­man who came to be called “Dirty Pictures” Wong by the POWs.
The camp was under the administration of a Colonel Lee, and there were several other interrogators on the team. But Pak and Wong were symbolic of the institution. Pak was a sadist, an animal who should have been in a cage. The team employed the usual questionnaires, the carrot-alid-prod tech­niques to induce answers. .Failing to induce them, they con­trived to compel them. The “Palace” wanted military infor­mation. Coercion was used as the ultimate resort. And for Pak, coercion began soon after a prisoner refused to talk. Then Pak would use violence. Abusive language would .be followed by threats, kicks, cigarette burns, and promises of further torture.
Several U. S. Army and Navy officers were questioned at “Pak’s Palace.” A few Army enlisted men went through this brickyard mill. The great majority of POWs held there were Air Force officers. They took a bad beating from Colonell’ak.
But the prisoners found ways to get around the beating. One way was to convince the captors’ that you were dumb, stupid, the low man in your class. Undergoing interrogation, one officer convinced his inquisitors that he was the stupidest officer in the service.. He was awarded a contemptuous slap, and that was about all.
To the surprise of some prisoners at the “Palace,” the inter­rogation team would sometimes open up with a wild political harangue. Then came the word that the enemy had established a system of indoctrination cours~s. The prisoner might start the hard way-and be punisheqrby restricted rations and other
.privations. If he began to show the “proper spirit”-to co­operate with his captors-he was lectured and handed Com­munist literature. A docile prisoner who read the literature and listened politely to the lectures, was graduated to a better class. Finally he might be sent to “Peaceful Valley.” In this lenient camp the food was relatively good. Prisoners might even have tobacco. And here they were given all sorts of Marxian propaganda. .The graduates from “Peaceful Valley” and others who accepted Communist schooling were called “Progressives'” Prisoners who refused to go along with the
program often remained in tougher circumstances. They were
considered “Reactionaries.”
But the enemy followed no rigid system. Rather, his treat­
ment of prisoners was capricious. Sometimes he showed
contempt for the man who readily submitted to bullying.
The prisoner who stood up to the bluster, threats and blows of
an interrogator might be dismissed with a shrug and sent to
quarters as mild as any-if any prison barracks in North Korea
could be described as mild.
All in all, the docile prisoner did not gain much by his
docility-and sometimes he gained nothing. The prisoner who
defied Pak and his breed might take a beating, but again he
might not. The ordeal was never easy. But things weren’t
easy either for the combat troops battling out there in the
trenches.
Progressives and Reactionaries
The POW “political” schools in North Korea were, of course,
patterned after the Soviet Russian design. They were part of a
mass program to spread Marxian ideology and gain converts for
International Communism. The Progressives were called upon
to deliver lectures, write pamphlets, and make propaganda
broadcasts. Progressive leaders were sent among Reactionary
groups to harangue the men. They wrote speeches condemning
Capitalism and uAmerican aggression in Korea.” Theyorgan­
ized e. group known as IlPeace Fighters.”
Fortunately, only a few officers were Progressives. How­ever, their in:fluence was unfortunately strong on the enlisted men. If the Captain can do it, why can’t I? If the Colonel signs a peace petition and orders the rest of us to do it, we have to follow orders, don’t we? Altogether the enlisted men were on a spot. That many of them refused to join the Progressives (and rejected a promise, sometimes unfulfilled, of better food, minor luxuries, and mail call) says something for the spirit of privates and non-corns. The men who gave the Progressives an argu­ment-the active Reactionaries-were a rugged group.
Breakdown of leadership was exactly what the enemy de­sired. Officers were usually segregated. Then as soon as a natural leader stepped forward in a camp, he was removed. Progressives were usually placed in leadership positions. And if they weren’t obeyed by the other POWs, punishments were in store for the “insubordinate prisoners.”
By design and because some officers refused to assume leadership “responsibility, organization in some of the POW camps deteriorated to an every-man-for-himself situation. Some of the camps became indescribably filthy. The men scuffied for their food. Ho~ders grabbed all the tobacco. Morale decayed to the vanishing point. Each man mistrusted the next. Bullies persecuted the weak and sick. Filth bred disease and contagion swept the camp. So men died for lack of leadership and discipline.
Ordeal by Indoctrination When plunged into a Communist indoctrination mill, the average American POW was under a serious handicap. Enemy political officers forced him to read Marxian literature. He was compelled to participate in debates. He had to tell what he knew about American politics and American history. And many times the Chinese or Korean instructors knew more about these .subjects than he did. This brainstorming caught many” American prisoners off guard. To most of them it came as a complete surprise and they were unprepared. Lec­” tures-study “groups~iscussion groups-a blizzard of prop­aganda and hurricanes of violent oratory were” all a part of the enemy technique. A large number of American POWs did not lmow what the Communist program was all about. Some were confused by it. Self-seekers accepted it as an easy out. A few may have believed the business. They signed peace petitions and peddled Communist literature.’ It was not an inspiring spectacle. It set loyal groups against cooperative groups aild broke up camp organization and discipline. It made fools of some men and tools of others. And it provided the enemy with stooges for propaganda shows. Ignorance lay behind much of this trouble. A great many servicemen were ‘teen-agers. At home they had thought of politics as dry editorials or uninteresting speeches, dull as ditchwater. They were unprepared to give the commissars an argument. Some of the POWs-among them men who became defec­tors-had heard of Communism only as a name. Many had never before heard of Karl Marx. And here was Communism held up as the salvation of the world and Marx as mankind’s benefactor. The Committee heard evidence which revealed that many
of the POWs knew too little about the United States and its
ideals and traditions. So the Chinese indoctrinators had the
advantage.
The uninformed POWs were up against it. They couldn’t answer arguments in favor of Communism with arguments in favor of Americanism, because they knew very little. about their America. The Committee heard a number of ex-POWs who stated that a knowledge of Communism would have enabled them to expose its fallacies to their camp-mates. The Red indoctrinators tried hard to win the support of factory workers. But as one of them put it, “We’d heard all that guff before. Back home. We knew their line.” Knowledge was a defense weapon.
While it might be argued that few·of the men became sincere converts to Communism-indeed, the percentage seems to have been infinitesimal-the inability of many to speak up for Democracy distressed loyal POWs. Active collaborators aside, there were other passive prisoners that “went along.” They lacked sufficient patriotism because of their limited knowl­edge oi~American Democracy.
It seemed that these POWs in question had lost their battle before they entered the Service. Good citizens-loyal Ameri­cans-the responsibility for their building lies with the home, the school, the church, the community. When men enter t~e Armed Forces, the Military Services must carryon with thIS development.
The Committee, stressing the need for spiritual and educa­tional bulwarks against enemy political indoctrination, recom­mends that the Assistant Secretary of Defens.e (Manpower and Personnel) be directed to initiate exploratory conferences with the Department of Health, Education, and WelCare, and other agencies and institutions on pre-service training.
Brainwashing and Indoctrination
The Committee made a thorough investigation of the “brain­washing” question. In some cases this time consuming and coercive technique was used to obtain confessions. In these. cases American prisoners of war were subjected to mental and physical torture, psychiatric pressures or “Pavlov Dogs” treat­ment.
Most of the prisoners, however, were not subjected to brain­washing, but were given a high-powered indoctrination for propaganda purposes.
In either’ case the members of our Armed Forces should be given the best education and training possible in the future so that t.hey can resist and cope with these practices.
The Committee also learned that POWs in Korea were not drugged. Other methods such as denial of food or sleep were equally effective and more practical.
Behind the Barbed-Wire Curtain
Perhaps the Red enemy worked harder on the Americans than he did on the other prisoners. An American who signed &. propaganda leaflet, a peace petition, or a germ warfare con­fession, was a big feather in the enemy’s hat. Many Americans in.Communist POW camps signed something or wrote some­thing. Out of 78 m~n under various forms of duress~ 38 signed germ warfare confesslOns. Forty others did not. Both groups were under coercion. Why did some men break, and some refuse to bend?
Many servicemen exhibited pride in themselves and their units. This was particularly pronounced where they had be­l?nged to the same unit for years. They stood»y one another like t~at u~and of brothers” inspired by NelSon. If a soldier ~as sIck, hIS fellow soldiers took care of him. They ,vllsh~d ~s .clothes, bathed him, and pulled him through. They ex­hibIted true fraternal spirit comradeship, military pride. These soldiers did not let each other down. Nor could the Korean Reds win much cooperation from them.
!nterrogation went’ hand in glove with indoctrination. A prIsoner was questioned for military information. He was also ~ueried on his home life and educational background. The mterrogator made him put it in writing-a biographical sketch. Se~dom did the brief autobiography prove sufficient. The prls~ner w~ u~ually. compelled to write more, and in greater detail. If his lIterary efforts were painful, the d.iscomfort was only a. beginni~g. His autobiography was used against him. T~e slI~htest dIscrepancy, and he was accused of lying. He mIght discover thp,t he had written a confession of some kind ~d in any case, the information supplied theinterrogato~ WIth a useful leverage for more pressure. The author’s mistake was in taking pen in hand.
Only a handful of the POWs in Korea were able to maintain absolute silence under military interrogation. Nearly all of the
American prisoners went beyond the “absolute” name, rank,
number, date of birth restriction.
Reviewing the inteITogation matter, the Defense Advisory
Committee felt that the steps taken up to now by the Armed
Forces had been decidedly inadequate.
The Committee recommends that the Department of Defense
devise a special training program to teach American service­
men the ways and means of resisting enemy interrogators.
What Can Be Done?
In a war for the minds of men, the enemy’s methods can be successfully combatted by military training and civilian educa­tion. In battle and in captivity the fighting Ameriean is no better than his training and education. Military schooling can teach him combat skills. Such know-how is a t’must.”
The Committee recommends that the Military Services initiate a coordinated training program including-
First, general training. This is motivational and informa­tional training to he conducted throughout the career of all servicemen during active and reserve duty. Second, specific training. This is designed for and applied to combat-ready troops. Acode ofconductmustapplywiiformlyto all Services, arid training must be uniform among the Services to the great­est degree practicable.
In all Services training should be adapted to cover the needs of all ranks from the enlisted man to the commander. It must be realistic as well as idealistic. Above all, it must be presented with understanding, skill and devotion sufficient to implant a conviction in the heart, conscience, and mind of the service­man that full and loyal support of the code is to the best interests of his country, his comrades, and himself.
But skill must be reinforced by will-by moral character and by basic beliefs instilled in home and classroom long before a lad enters the Military Service. Pride in a country and respect for its principles-a sense ot honor-a sense of responsibility­such basics should be established long before ubasic training,” and further developed after he enters the Armed Forces.
The Committee recommends that the Services find an effective means of coordinating with civilian educational institutions, churches and other patriotic organizations to ~rovide better understanding of American ideals.
War has been defined as “a contest’ of wills.” A trained hand holds the weapon. But the will, the character, the spirit More than ever,
of the individual-these control the hand. in the war .for the ininds of men moral character, will, spirit are important.As a serviceman thinketh so is he.
16
A CODE OF CONDUCT FOR THE FUTURE
The Services Voice Their Opinions
The leaders of the American Armed Forces-the Joint Chiefs
of Staff-The Department of Defense Committees-the various
planning and policy-making boards-reach decisions through
discussion and debate based on facts. In striving to design
a Code of Conduct for United States fighting men, the Defense
Advisory Committee weighed opposing points of view in regard
to the “name, rank, serial number and date of birth'” provision
embodied in the Geneva Conventions.
The traditional view is that the POW stockade is only an
extension of the battlefield where the prisoners must be taught
to carry on the struggle with the only weapons remaining­
faith and courage.
The absolute restliction-name, rank, number, date of birth,
and nothing more, has been called the “Spartan Code.”
To some persons, such a restrictive code seemed unrealistic. Especially in the light of modern interrogation methods. Authorities on the subject of interrogation insisted that the iron-bound “nothing more” of the Spartan Code was impossible. They pointed out that Communist interrogators had bent such men of steel as Cardinal Mindszenty. Doctors and psychiatrists generally conceded that “every man has a breaking point.” Many prisoners in World War II were forced beyond “name, rank and serial number.” And nearly every prisoner in Korea divulged something. Why, then, the dissenters asked, should a man endure purgatory when his “breaking” was inevitable? This view was publicized in an article in a popular magazine. It was the author’s opinion that American servicemen should be told that “they may sign any document the Communists want them to, or appear on TV and deliver any script the Reds hand them.”
Referring to the case of a Marine colonel, the author pointed to a fine officer who had been coerced into signing a germ war­fare confession. Why not let American captives sign anything at all? The United States could announce that all such con­fessions were obtained under duress, and therefore invalid.
3654;88100-55-4
In addition to the “Spartan view” and the “let them talk
view” there were numerous advocates of in-between measures­
talk, but don’t say anything.
In Axis cainps and in Korea many prisoners had stood up
against interrogation. Many had refused to sign on any dotted
line. The idea that an officer or enlisted man might stand up
to a microphone and denounce his country, his President, or
his faith, remained repellent. Moreover, the man who signed
a germ warfare or some other confession let himself in for a
“war criminal” charge. Having obtained such a confession
the unscrupulous enemy labeled him a war criminal and claimed
that he was beyond the protecting Geneva Convention.
The Committee believes that this practice is another strong
reason for our prisoners of war adhering to a wen defined
code of conduct in any future conflict.
Pro and Con. There was much to be said on both sides. And
there was something to be said by experienced officers who felt
that a man could be taught to hold his own in the battle of wits
against enemy inteITogators. Authorities pointed out that the
Geneva Conventions did not impose “absolute silence” on the
interrogated war,,:,prisoner. There were clauses indicating that
he might discuss his employment, his finances, or his state
of health, or “conditions of captivity” if necessity demanded.
In short, he did not have to remain mute.
The Committee agreed that a line of resistance must be drawn somewhere and initially as far forward as possible. The llame, rank and service number provision of the Geneva Conventions is accepted as this line of resistance.
However, in the face of experience, it is recognized that the POW may be subjected to an extreme of coercion beyond his ability to resist. If in his battle with .the interrogator he is driven from his first line of resistance he must be trained for resistance in successive positions. And, to stand on the. final line to the end-no disclosure of vital military information and above all no disloyalty in word or deed to his country, his service or his comrades.
Throughout, the serviceman must be responsible for all of his actions. This in brief is the spirit and intent of the Code of Conduct which the Defense Advisory Committee recommends.
Prominent Civilians Stated Their View5
. The Committee discussed sociological and educational prob­lems with leading educators. It consulted with labor leaders. The religious problem .was discussed with leaders of various faiths. The Comr.nittee also sought and received the in­valuable views of the leaders of the nation’s veterans organiza­tions. All contrib.uted worthwhile suggestions. All helped to select a code compatible-with American precepts of honor and justice.
The Recommended Code of Conduct (See Addenda 2) After long study and earnest deliberation, the Committee came to its decision. That decision is found in the Code of Conduct now proposed ·for all members of the Armed Forces. The Committee recommends that the proposed Code of Conduct be promulgated in the form of an Executive Order. The Code demands high standards. To ensure achievement of these, each member of the Armed Forces liable to capture must be provided with specific .training designed to equip him better to cope with all enemy efforts against him. He will be fully instructed as to his behavior and obligations in combat and in the event of capture. No prisoner of war will be forgotten by the United States. The support and care of dependents of prisoners of war is pre­scribed by law. Every practical means will be employed to establish contact with, to support and to gain the release of all prisoners of war.
I
The United States serviceman, by his service is protecting his nation. Any shirking of this responsibility or any unwilling­ness to do his full part weakens this defense and invites disaster.
I am an American fighting man. I serve in the forces which guard my country and our way of life. I am prepared to give my life in their defense.
A member of the Armed Forces is always a fighting man. As such, it is his duty to oppose the enemies of the United States regardless of the circumstances in which he may find himself, whether in active participation in combat, or as a prisoner of war.
II
If individuals and commanders were permitted to surrender wh.enever a situation seems to be desperate it would become an open invitation to all weak of will or depressed in spirit.
I will never surrender of my own free will. Ifin command I will never surrender my men while they still have the means to resist.
As an individual, a member of the Armed Forces may never
voluntarily surrender himself..When isolated and he can no
longer inflict casualties on the enemy, it is his duty to evade
capture and rejoin the nearest friendly forces.
The responsibility and authority of· a commander never
extends to the surrender of his command to the enemy while it
has power to resist or evade. When isolated, cut off or sur­
rounded, a unit must continue to fight until relieved, or able to
rejoin friendly forces by breaking out or by evading the enemy.
III
The fight is everywhere. Even in the prison camp. When
the use of physical weapons is denied, the mental and moral
“will to resist” must be kept alive in every prisoner.
H I am captured I will continue to resist by aU means avail­
able. I will make every effort to escape and aid others to
escape. i will accept neither parole nor special favors from
the enemy.
The duty of a member of the Armed Forces to continue
resistance by all means at his disposal is not lessened by the
misfortune of capture. Article 82 of the Geneva Conventions
Relative to the Treatment of Prisoners of War of August 12,
1949, pertains, must be explained, and covered in the training
programs to be carried out by the Services.
Article 82 provides as follows:
“A prisoner of war shall be subject to the laws, regulations
and orders in force in the armed forces of the Detaining
Power; the Detaining Power shall be justified in taking
j~dicial or discip~ary measures ~ respect of any off~nce
committed by a pnsoner of war agamst such laws, regulatIOns
or orders. However, no proceedings or punishments contrary
to the provisions of this Chapter shall be allowed.
IIIf any law, regulation or order of the Detaining Power
shall .declare acts committed by a prisoner of war to be
punishable, whereas the same acts would not be punishable
if committed by a member of the forces of the Detaining
Power, such acts shall entail disciplinary punishments only.”
He will escape if able to do so, and will assist others to escape. Parole agreements are promises given the captor by a prisoner of war upon his faith and ~onor, to fulfill stated conditions, such as not to bear arms or not to escape, in consideration of special privileges-usually release from captivity or lessened restraint. He will never sign or enter into a parole agreement.
to
IV

The most despicable act an American can commit is to give
aid and comfort to the enemy by informing or otherwise
harming fellow prisoners. Failure to assume responsibilities
commensurate with rank is equally reprehensible.
If I become a prisoner of war, I will keep faith with my
fellow prisoners. I will give no information nor take part in
any action which might be harmful to .my comrades. If I am
senior, I will take command. It not, I will obey the lawful
orders of those appointed over me and will back them up in
every way.
Informing, or any other action to the detriment of a fellow
prisoner, is despicable and is expressly f?rbidden. ~risoners of
war must avoid helping ihe enemy identIfy fellow pnsoners who
may have Ioiowledge of particular Y’ah~e to the e~emy, ahd may
therefore be made to suffer eoerClve mterrogatlOn., ,
Strong’ leadership is essential to discipline. Wit~out dis­cipline, camp organization, resistance and ~ve? survIval may be impossible. Personal hygiene, camp samtatlOn, and care .of sick and wounded are imperative. Officers and non-comUllS­sioned officers of the United States will continue to carry out their responsibilities and exercise their al!thorit~ s~bsequent to capture. The senior line officer or non-comm18S1~ned offic~r within the prisoner of war camp or group of pnsonex:s will assume command according to rank (or precedence) WIthout regard to Service. This responsibility and acco~~ability may not be evaded. Ifthe senior officer or non-comm18S10ned officer is incapacitated or unable to act for any reaso?, commS?d ‘Y’ill be assumed by the next senior. If the foregomg orgamz~tlon cannot be effected an organization of elected representatIves, as provided for in Articles 79-81 Geneva Conven.tion Rela~ive to Treatment of Prisoners of War, or a clandestme organIZa­tion, or both, will be formed.
V Every serviceman possesses some import~t ~itary in­formation of value to the enemy. By revealing It they may cause the death of comrades or disaster to’ their unit, or even the defeat of major forces of the nation. When questioned, sholild I become a prisoner of war, I am bound to give only name, rank, service number, and date of birth. I will evade answering further questions to the utmost of my ability. I will make no oral or written statements dis­
loyal to my country and its allies or harmful to their cause.
When questioned, a prisoner of war is required by the Geneva Conventions and permitted by this Code to disclose his name, rank, service number, and date of birth. A prisoner .of war may also communicate with the enemy regarding his individual health or welfare as a prisoner of war and, when appropriate, on routine matters of camp administration. Oral or written confessions true or false, questionnaires, personal history state­ments, propaganda recordings and broadcasts, appeals to other prisoners of war, signatures to peace or surrender appeals self criticisms or any other oral or written communication on b~half of the enemy or critical or harmful to the United States its allies, the Armed Forces or other prisoners are forbidden. ‘
It is a violation of the Geneva Conventions to place a prisoner of war under physical or mental torture or any other form of coercion to secure from him information of any kind. If however, a prisoner is subjected to such treatment he will endeavor to avoid by every means the disclosure. of any in­formation, or the making of any statement or the performance of any action harmful to the interests of the United States or its allies or which will provide aid or comfort to the enemy.
. Russia and t~e Communist Bloc nations have made a sig­nificant reservatIOn to Article 85 of the Geneva Conventions of 1949: Under this reservation a prisoner of war who may be conVlcted of an alleged war crime under the laws of the captors, loses the protection afforded a prisoner of war by these Con­ventions. Therefore the signing of a confession or the making of a statement by a prisoner is likely to be used·to convict him as a “war criminal” and thus, according to this Communist Bloc device, deny to him any protection under the ~rms of the Geneva Conventions, including repatriation until his sentence is served.
VI
An American is responsible and accountable for his actions. Prisoner of war status doesn’t change this nor does it change the obligation to remain faithful to the United States and to the principles for~ which it stands. Throughout his captivity a prisoner should look to his God for strength to endure whate~er may befall. He should remember that the United States of ~erica wi}! neither forget, nor forsake him, apd that it will WID the ultlIDate victory.
I will never forget that I am an American fighting man, responsible for my actions, and dedicated to the principles which made my country free. I will trust in my God and in the United States of America.
The provisions of the Uniform Code of Military Justice whenever appropriate continue to apply to members of the Armed Forces while they are prisoners of war. The conduct of prisoners is subject to examination as to the Circumstances of capture and through the period of detention with due regard for the rights of the individual and consideration for the conditions of captivity.
A member of the Armed Forces who becomes a prisoner of war has a continuing obligation to remain loyal to his country, his Service and his unit.
The life of a prisoner of war is hard. He must never give up hope. He must resist enemy indoctrination. Prisoners of war who stand firm and united against the enemy will aid one another in surviving this ordeal.
BLANK PAGE
V
KOREAN SUMMARY

Misconduct by a Minority A total of 4,428 American fighting men were recovered from enemy prison camps in Korea. The prisoner exchanges began with Operation “Little Switch” in April 1953-significantly enough, the ~onth after Stalin died and Malenkov assumed Soviet leadership.. The war was almost over. Some 600 Allied prisoners were returned in exchange for ten times that many Communist Chinese and North Koreans. During sub­sequent Operation “Big Switch” most of the American prisoners were recovered. At this time it was learned that 2,730 Ameri­cans had died in Korean prison camps. This ghastly death­toll-38%-was the worst since the Revolutionary War. . By joint actIon of the services, all of the prisoners recovered were screened by military intelligence agencies. Of the 565 whose conduct was questioned, 373 were cleared or dropped after investigation. Of the remaining 192 suspects, 68 were separated from the services; 3 resigned; 1 received reprimand; 2 were given restricted assignmen~s; 6 were cOllvicted by courts­martial. As· of July 20, 1955, 112 cases are pending. The cases pending are in various stages of investigation. Many may never come to trial for various reasons. Others will “be disposed of by miMr disciplinary action or may be· clear~d. However, it is fairly certain that thenwnber brought to trial will be substantially less than the 112 pending, perhaps less than half that many. Some of these last are men who were discharged soon after war’s end and now have a civili”an status. Information which came to light after their separation made further action indicated. The Committee feels that justice must be done in these cases-the men who kept faith with their coUntry· and fellow prisoners need have no fear-:”‘but those who did not should be brought 19 trial. The Committee recommends that separated servicemen be brought to trial if.they are charged with crimes .similar to those which brought about the prosecution of other servicemen. Obviously a change from uniform to civilian clothes does not divest a guilty wrong-doer of responsibility for a crime.. A
365488m r-55-5 25
civilian criminal would not be permitted to wear Army uniform as protective coloration. If action is indicated, the dischargees should be prosecuted in civil courts. When they cannot be tried in civili8in courts and the evidence warrants it, they can be brought to trial under the Uniform Code of Military Justice.
The Committee finds the Uniform Code of Military Justice adequate for the prosecution of misconduct cases of prisoners of war in Korea. The Committee recommends that the Uniform Code of Military Justice should govern the final, adjudication of cases stilI pending.
None Were Tried Unjustly Establishing fscts in the case against a prisoner charged with misconduct is a lengthy process. Evidence must be studied and assessed. Witnesses must be produced. Depositions must be obtained. In the Armed Forces this amounts to the equivalent of the work a District Attorney’s office must do before it presents a case to a Grand Jury. Consequently, there may seem to be a long delay before an accused service man is brought to formal trial. The Army has not been dila­tory in trying the present cases. Rather it has been thorough and exacting in its research and investigation. The Committee finds that those servicemen who have been prosecuted and those who are facing trial were charged with serious crimes. Charges included homicide, and treasonable collaboration with the enemy, combined with informing on fellow prisoners. No man of any service-Army, Air Force, Navy or Marines-who might have .been charged with such crimes would have escaped disciplinary action. As in the past, the crimes enumerated are major offenses in the Armed Forces~ (Of course, such alleged misconduct must be substantiated by evidence before disciplinary action is taken.) While the six thus far tried and sentenced to prison have been enlisted men, one officer was also disciplined; one was tried and acquitted; and other cases’ coming up involve officers. They do not make pleasant r,eading. A typical case involves an officer who is accused by 180 POWs of delivering anti-D. S. speeches, informing on fellow prisoners,hoarding food, teaching’ classes in Communism, and ordering men to sign peace petitions. There is no evidence he suffered duress. Another case involves a sergeant accused by many witnesses , of “ratting” on his prison-mates, beating a sick prisoner, stealillg
a wallet from a dying man, forcing a fellow prisoner out into the snow and leaving him there to die, and drowning three
U. N. prisoners crossing a stream. There was an officer who allegedly courted favors of his cap· tors as soon as he reached prison camp. He is charged with confiscating the small tobacco ration dealt to the other men and eating more than his share of the food. It is recorded that he made the heartless remark, “The more men who die here, the more food for the rest of us.” He signed peace petitions, made propaganda broadcasts, and evidently “ratted” on other prisoners. There is no evidence that he was coerced. There is evidence that an enlisted man informed on fellow
prisoners planning to escape. He wrote Red literature for his
captors. He was put in charge of a spy system which resulted
in the punishment of “Reactionaries” in his camp. He asked
for the job. No “brainwashing” here.
Many of the accused informed on their prison-mates, some· times with dire consequences for the victims who were usually severely punished. The man who tried to “escape and was victimized by “ratting” was indeed a Soldier of Misfortune. Illvariably he was accused of breaking camp rules-a violation . which “entitled” his captors to punish him. He might be placed in a hole in the ground and forced to endure an animal existence. He might be sent to “The Caves.” He might be
compelled to stand for hours in a latrine.
To the combat veterans, “ratting” was a crime as unforgiv. able as treason.
The Turncoats The 21 turncoats who decided to stay with the Communists­here was another group of “exceptions.” Their number in· eluded men accused of informing-which suggests a good reason for electing to remain in the enemy’s country. Evidence iridic cates that few of these 21 were “sincere” converts to Com~ munism. Expediency, opportunism, and fear of reprisal doubt· less influenced some of the group.
Promises Were Not Broken It has been stated that men were Illured” back to the Ameri· can side by promises of clemency. This misconception, like
many others concerning the POWs, is far from the truth. The
Army possesses a tape recording of the broadcast made to the
men in question. No promise to the effect that they would not
be prosel;uted was offered. What the broadcast said in.sub­
stance was this: Ifthe men returned they would not be charged
with -desertion. “Ratting” was another matter entirely. Also
other crimes which were subsequently revealed by investigation.
Finally the Uniform Code of Military Justice is devised for
defense as well as prosecution. A military court often bends
over backward in the interest of the accused. The man is
assured a conscientious defense. If he cares to, he may pro­
cure civilian lawyers. There is nothing “star chamber” about
a modern military trial. After witnessing the~rial of a con­
fessed “Progressive” charged with collaborating (and confessing
to the charge), a reporter for the Christian Science Monitor
wrote: /c • ••• perhaps a word of advice is not amiss; make a
trip to one of your local, federal, state, or municipal courts;
watch the procedures, then look in at a general court-martial.”
The reporter went on to observe: “The (military) code pro­vides for post-trial procedure, including automatic reviews by the Staff Judge Advocate of the First Army and a special board of review in the Pentagon. If this does not satisfy the prisoner-and he can show good cause-the conviction and sentence can go to the Court of Military Appeals, composed of three civilian judges appointed by the President.” And clemency is possible through the Executive branch of our government.
Service Action Not Divergent The public has been under the misapprehension that some of the men court-martialed and sentenced for misconduct while in POW camps “had the book thrown at them” while others went free. Each of the Services thoroughly investigated all alleged cases oj­misconduct. They used generally identical criteria in determin­ing the disposition of each case. Criteria considered tYl~e of misconduct, duress, and indications of informing or “ratting.” The Department of Defense :maintaiped, surveillance over cases brought to trial. The disposition of all cases was governed by the facts and circumstances surrounding each case. and was as consistent, equitable, and uniform as could be achieved by any two or :more boards or courts.
, No case was brought for court-martial actlonin which there was evidence of duress, brainwashing or any other type of coercion.
The Committee Onds that there was no divergent action among the services. The relatively large number of Army POWs naturally shifted the largest number of misconduct cases into the Army’s column. All services employed the same screening procedures in examining repatriated POWs. All services applied the same standards in weighing alleged charges of misconduct. Resultant service actions were based on the evidence in each case.
Prisoners Unrecovered
The Korean Annistice Agreement contained a proviso that “each side would directly repatriate all those prisoners of war who desired repatriation.” The Communists did not honor this agreement. After repatriation operations were concluded, the U. N. command listed 944 servicemen as “missing” and presumably in enemy hands. Nineteen of this number were finally accounted for by the Communists. By our own U. S. efforts this list has been reduced to 470, some of whom we have reason to believe were at some time in the hands of the enemy. In the United Nations, the United States has consistently demanded an accounting for t.hem.
The Committee believes that the Communists should be held strictly accountable for the 470 men still missing in action. Information indicates they were at one time or another in Communist hands.
All have been declared legally dead. Nevertheless, the Com­munists should account for them in accor(l.ance with a signed agreement with the United States.
The Communists admitted holdtng 15 Air Force men and two Department of Defense civilian employees. Their detainment was in direct violation of the Armistice Agreement and the Geneva Conventions.
Concern of Ex-Prisoners
The Committee also concerned itself with the question of service men who were discharged at the close of the Korean War-men who have been returned to civilian status. Also repatriated POWs who may have remained in uniform.
Because of the misconduct charges brought against a small number of POWs, and the accusations of misconduct levelled at a slightly larger number, some of the former POWs may have grown uneasy about the matter. The Committee considers that no man with a clear conscience need worry about a possible charge.
The repatriated POW has been entitled to special com­pensation for the period of his confinement. Every repatri­ated POW,could receive this money by applying for it, with this exception:· The war-prisoners who voluntarily, knowingly, and without duress gave aid to, collaborated with, or in any manner served the enemy, are excluded. All repatriated prisoners who receive this compensation have been cleared of any such misconduct charge.
THE ROAD AHEAD FOR AMERICA AND THE
ARMED FORCES

Total War for the Minds of Men
America must view the Communist treatment of captives as
but another weapon in the world-wide war for the minds of
men. The nation must recognize the duplicity of an enemy
which pays no more than lip service to the Geneva Conventions.
However, the United States cannot oppose duplicity with a
similar policy. To do so might be fighting fire with fire. But
the United States refuses to saerifice principle for expediency.
Such a justification of means for end would mean the abandon­
ment of the cause for which America fights. The national
conscience would revolt at such a sohltion.
The nation must continue to oppose Communism, or any other threat to Democracy, with American weapons and prin­ciples. The machines of war are assured by American enter­prise, science and industry. The principles, home-forged by America’s founders, are more than an heirloom heritage for .showcase display. They are precepts which must be practiced if the nation is to remain the guardian of man’s liberties that
it is.
The responsibility for the maintenance and preservation of the United States and all it stands for is one which must be shared by every citizen. Every American is in the front line in the war for the minds of men.
Code of American Conduct
The battlefield of modern warfare is all inclusive. Today there are no distant front lines, remote no man’s lands, far-off rear areas. The home front is but an extension of the fighting front. In the dreaded event of another all-out war-a thermo­nuclear war-the doorstep may become the Nation’s first line of defense. Under such circumstances, the new code of con­duct for the American serviceman might well serve the American citizen.
The Code’s high standards will serve as guides for Americans in uniform. Backed by adequate training and educatioll, they will support the assurance of Armed Forces leaders that Amer­ican fighting men will be fully prepared to meet the enemy on any front.
The Korean story must never be permitted to happen again.
1

ADDENDA
1.
Terms of Reference

2.
Code of Conduct

3.
Citizens, Former Prisoners of War, and Government Representatives Who Consulted with the Defense Advisory Committee on Prisoners of War

4.
The Mind and the Spirit in National Security

5.
Prisoners of War in History

6.
Bibliography

7.
Charts

BLANK PAGE
ADDENDA NO.1
TERMS OF REFERENCE
BLANK PAGE
THE SECRETARY OF DEFENSE WASHINGTON May 17, 1955
MEMORANDUM FOR THE CHAIRMAN, DEFENSE ADVISORY COMMITTEE ON PRISONERS OF WAR
I
SUBJECT: Terms of Reference I am deeply concerned with the importance to our national security of providing Americans who serve their country in battle with every means we can devise to defeat the enemy’s techniques. To assum the success of our Armed Forces it is equally as essential to arm them with the best weapons of the mind and body as it is to provide them with the machines of war. Our national military needs must be met. This requires that each member of the Armed Forces be thoroughly indoctrinated with a simple, easily understood code to govern his conduct while a prisoner of war. However, this military need must be met in a manner compatible with the principles and precepts basic to our form of government. Enforce­ment must be accomplished with justice and understanding. I have appointed this Committee to advise me on this matter. I request that you consider the methods we may expect our potential enemy to em­ploy, the obligation which national military needs impose on members of the Armed Forces and the obligation of the United States to afford pro­tection to its citizens in the custody of a foreign power. I direct your deliberation tow~rd the development of suitable recommendations for a Code of Conduct and indoctrination and training on preparation for future conflict. You will also consider certain other related Prisoner of War Problem areas which I will make known. Staff support will be supplied in the form of a Secretariat, with the Staff Director from the Office of the Assistant Secretary of Defense (M&P), the Deputy Staff Director from the Office of the Joint Chiefs. of Staff, and one officer each from the Army, Navy, Air Force and Marine Corps for full-time staff duty. Legal counsel will be provided by the Office of the General Counsel (OSD), and research”assistance will be supplied through the Office of the Assistant Secretary of Defense (R&D). Liaison between this Committee and government agencies outside the
Department of Defense will be conducted with the help of the appro­priate office in the Office of the Secretary of Defense as coordinated by the Office of the Assistant Secretary of Defense (M&P).
It is desired that this Committee submit. its recommendations within t.wo months after its first meeting.
BLANK PAGE
ADDENDA NO.2
CODE OF CONDUCT

BLANK PAGE
CODE OF CONDUCT
For f,’lembm of the Armed Forces of the United Slales.
By virtue of the authority vested in me as
President of the United Statel’, and as Com­
mander in Chief of the Armed Forces of the
United States, I’hereby prescribe the Code
of Conduct for Members of the Armed ForceI’
of the United States which is attached to
this order and hereby made a part thereof.
Every member of the Armed Forces of the United States is expected to measure lip to the standards embodied in this Code of Conduct while he is in combat or in captivity. To ensure achievement of these standard”, each member of the Armed Forces liable to eapture shall be provided with specific training and instruction designed to better equip him to counter and withstand all enemy efforts against him, and shall be fully instructed as to the behavior and obligations expected of him during combat or captivity.
The Secretary of Defense (and the Seere­tary of the Treasury with respect to the Coast Guard except when it is serving as part of the Navy) shall.. take such action as is deemed necessary to implement this order and to disseminate and make the said code known to all members of the Armed Forces of the United States.
I am an American fighting man. I serve in the forces which guard my country and our way of life. I am prepared to give my life in their defense.
II
I will never surrender of my own free will. If in command, I will never surrender my men while they still have the means to resist.
III
If I am captured I will .continue to r.esist by all means available. I will make every effort to escape and aid others to escape. I will accept neither parole nor special’ favors from the enemy.
IV
If I become a prisoner of war, I will keep faith with my fellow prisoners. I will give no informa­tion nor take part in a’ny action which might be harmful to my’ comrades. If I am senior, I will take command. . If not, I will obey the lawful orders of those appointed over me and will back them up in every way.
42
INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIAL
A member of the Armed Forces is always a fighting man. As such, it is his duty to oppose the enemies of the United States regardless of the circumstances in which he may find himself, whether in active participation in combat, or as a prisoner of war.
As an individual, a member of the Armed Forces may never voluntarilv surrender himself. When isolated and he can no longer inflict casualties on the enemy, it is his duty to evade capture and rejoin the nearest friendly. forces.
The responsibility and authority of a commander never extends to the sur­render of his command to the enemv while it has power to resist or evade. When isolated, cut off or surrounded, a unit must continue to fight until relieved, or able to rejoin friendly forces, by break­ing out or by evading the enemy. .
The duty of a member of the Armed Forces to continue resistance bv all means at his disposal is not lessened by the mis­fortune of capture. Article 82 of the Geneva Convention pertains and must be explained. He will escape if able to do so, and will .assist others to escape. Parole agreement,s are promises given the captor by a prisoner of war upon his faith and honor, to fulfill stated conditions, such as not to bear arms or not to escape, in consideration of special privileges, usually release from captivity or lessened· restraint. He will never sign or enter into a parole agreement.
Informing or any other action to the detriment of a fellow prisoner is despicable and is expressly forbidden. Prisoners of war must avoid helping the enemy identify fellow prisoners who may have knowledge of particular value to the enemy, and may therefore be made to suffer coercive interrogation.
Strong leadership is essential to disci­pline. Without discipline, camp organiza­tion, resistance and even survival may be impossible. .Personal hygiene, cafnp sani­tation, and care of sick and wounded are imperative. Officers and noncommis­sioned officers of the United States will continue to carry out their responsibjlities and exercise their authority subsequent to capture. The senior line officer or non­
IV (continued)
When questioned, shoulO: I be. come a prisoner of war, I am bound to give only name, rank. service number and date of birth. I will evade answering further questions to the utmost of my ability. I will make no oral or written statements dis­loyal to my country and its allies or hal’inful to their cause.
INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIAL
commissioned officer within the prisoner” of war camp or group of prisoners will assume command according to rank (or precedence) without regard to Service. This responsibility and accountability mav not be evaded. If the senior officer or -nonco’mmissioned officer is incapaci­tated or unable to act for any reason, com­mand will be assumed by the next senior. If the foregoing organization cannot be effected, an organization of elected repre­sentatives, as provided for in Articles 79-81 Geneva Convention Relative to Treatment of Prisoners of War, or a covert organization, or both, will be formed.
When questioned, a prisoner of war is required by the Geneva Convention and permitted by this Code to disclose his name, rank, service number and date of birth. A prisoner ‘of war may also com­municate with the enemy regarding his individual health or welfare as a prisoner of war and, when appropriate, on rontine matters of camp administration. Oral or written confessions true or false, ques­tionnaires, personal history statements, propaganda recordings and broadcasts, appeals to other prisoners of war, signa­tures to peace or surrender appeals,. self criticisms or any other oral or written communication on behalf of the enemy or critical or harmful to the United States, its allies, the Armed Forces or other prisoners are forbidden.
It is a violation of the Geneva Conven­tion to place a. prisoner of war under physical or mental torture or any other form of coercion to secure from him infor­mation of any kind. If, however, a prisoner is subjected to such treatment, he will endeavor to avoid by every means the disclosure of any information, or the making of any statement or the perform­ance of any action harm~ul to ~he intere;ots of the United States or Its allles or WhICh
. will provide aid or comfort to the enemy.
Under Communist Bloc reservations to the Geneva Convention, the signing of a confession or the making of a statement by a prisoner is likely to be used to convict him as a war criminal under the laws of his captors. This conviction ha~ the effect of removing him from the prisoner of war status and according to this Communist Bloc device denying him any protection under terms .of. the Ge~eva Convention and repatriatIOn untIl a prison sentence is served.
VI
I will never forget that I am. an American fighting man, responsi­ble for my actions, and dedicated to the principles which made my country free. I will trust in my God and in the United States of
America.
INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIAL
The provisions of the Uniform Code of Military Justice, whenever appropriate, continue to apply. to members of the Armed Forces while prisoners of war. Upon repatriation, the conduct of pris­oners will be examined as to the circum­stances of capture and through the period of detention with due regard for the rights of the individual and consideration for the conditions of captivity.
A member of the Armed Forces who becomes a prisoner of war has a continuing obligation to remain loyal to his country, his Service and his unit.
The life of a prisoner of war is hard. He must never give up hope. He must resist enemy indoctrination. Prisoners of war who stand firm and united against the enemy, will aid one another in surviving this ordeal.
ADDENDA NO.3
CITIZENS, FORMER PRISONERS OF WAR, AND GOVERN· MENT REPRESENTATIVES WHO CONSULTED WITH THE DEFENSE ADVISORY COMMITTEE ON PRISONERS OF WAR
BLANK PAGE
CITIZENS, FORMER PRISONERS OF WAR, AND GOVERN· MENT REPRESENTAliVES WHO CONSULTED WITH THE DEFENSE ADVISORY COMMITTEE ON PRISONERS OF
, WAR DR. ARTHUR S. ADAMS
Pre8ident, American Council on Education
and
Chairman, Re8erve Force8 Policy Board

HONORABLE ROBERT B. ANDERSON
Deputy Secretary of Defen8e MAJOR CLARENCE L. ANDERSON, U. S. Army Medical Corp8
MR. MAC ASBELL, JR.
Chairman, Subcommittee for Military Affair8-Peace and PreparedMI8
Committee American Veteran8 of World War II COMMANDER RALPH M. BAGWELL, U. S. Navy
DR. A. BIEDERMAN
Ojficer8 Education and Re8earch Laboratory Air Research and Development Command
U. S. Air Force
MR. GEORGE BROWN
A88i8tant to the President American Federation of Labor
HONORABLE HERBERT BROWNELL, JR.
The Attorney General of the United Statell
HONORABLE WILBER M. BRUCKER
then General Coun8el, Department of Defense, now Secretary of the Army
DR. LEONARD CARMICHAEL
Secretary, Smithsonian Institution COLONEL A. P. CLARK, U. S. Air Force
Chief, Promotions & Separations Division Director of Military .Per80nnel ST-AFF SERGEA.NT RODERICK G. CONN, U. S. Air ForC4
GENERAL ORVAL R. COOK, U. S. Air Force Deputy Commander in Chief-Burope DR. MEREDITH P. CRAWFORD
Director, Human Re80urce8 Rellearch Oifiu George Washington Univer&ity CAPTAIN BIlRT CUMBY, U. S. Army
MAJOR GENERAL WILLIAM F. DEAN, U. S. Army
DR. HAROLD W. DODDS
President, Princeton UniverBity
MR. ALLYN DONALDSON
Director, Office of Special Counselor Services
Department of State
CAPTAIN RAY M. DOWE, JR., U. S. Army

ADMIRAL DONALD B. DUNCAN, U. S. Navy
Vice ChieFof Naval Operations LIEUTENANT GENERAL G. B. ERSKINE, U. S. Marine Corps (Ret.) Director, Special Operations Office of the Secretary of Defense
CAPTAIN J. S. F AHY, U. S. Navy
Officer Personnel Branch
Bureau of Naval Personnel

MR. CHARLES E. FOSTER
Assistant Director of Legislatioo
Disabled American Veterans REAR ADMIRAL D. V. GALLERY, U. S. Navy Chief, Air Reserve Training
REAR ADMIRAL ELTON W. GRENFELL, U. S. Navy Assistant Chief for Personnel Control and ACNO for Military Personnel Security Bureau of Naval Personnel
LIEUTENANT COLONEL MONROE J. HAGOOD, U. S. Arnw Chief, Returnees Section G-2 Intelligence, General Staff
CORPORAL JAMES L. HALE, U. S. Marine Corps
FATHER THEODORE HESBURGH
President, Notre Dame University
DR. LAWRENCE HINKLE
New York Hospital BRIGADIER GENERAL S. W. JONES, U. S. Army Assistant Judge Advocate General for Military Justice
MR. MILES KENNEDY
Director, National Legislative Commission The American Legion
MR. OMAR B. KETCHUM
Director; National Legislative Service
Veterans of Foreign Wars MAJOR GENERAL A. M. KUHFIELD, U. S. Air Force The Assistant Judge Advocate General
COLONEL H. S. LEViE, U. S. Army Chief, International Affairs DiviBion Office of the Judge Advocate General
AMBASSADOR HENRY CABOT LODGE, JR.
United States Representative to the United Nations
COI.ONEL K. K. LOUTHER, U. S. Marine Corps­
Assistant Director of Personnel
Personnel Division

LIEUTENANT COLONEL DAVID F. MACGHEE, U. S. Air Force
MR. S. L. A. MA.RSHALL
Chief Editorial Writer
The Detroit News

REVEREI’D WILLIAM MARTIN
Presiding Bishop of Methodist Churches, Dallas, Texas
DR. CHARLES MAYO
The Mayo Clinic
Rochester, Minnesota
LIEUTENANT COLONEL JAMES L. MONROE, U. S. Air Force
Defense Prisoner Officer
Office of the Director of Plans

REAR ADMIRAL 1. H. NUNN, U. S. Navy
The Judge Advocate General LIEUTENANT GENERAL EMMETT O’DONNELL, JR., U. S. Air Force Deputy Chief of Staff, Personnel
CAPTAIN PAUL T. O’DOWD, U. S. Army
DR. WINFRED OVERHOLSER, M. D.
Superintendent, St. Elizabeths Hospital Washington, D. C. HOSPITALMAN 3D CLASS TED PAILLETTE,’ U. S. Navy
GENERAL W. B. P.\LMER, U. S. Army
Vice Chief of Staff MAJOR MARION R. P ANELL, U. S. Army G-S Operations, General Staff
RABBI DAVID DE SOLA POOL
National Jewish Welfare Board ADMIRAL ARTHUR W. RADFORD, U. S. Navy Chairman, Joint Chiefs of Staff
MR. VICTOR REUTHER
Assistant to the President Congress of Industrial Organizations
DR. SCOVEL RICHARDSON
Chairman, U. S. Board ·of Pa.role Department of Justice
HONORABLE ROBERT TRIPP Ross
Assistant Secretary of Defense (Legislative and Public Affairs)
DR. H. J. SANDER
Officers Education and Research Laboratory Air Research and Development Command
U. S. Air Force
DR. CARLETON F. SCOFIELD
Human Resources Research Office George Washington University
DR. JULIU8 SEQAL
Human Resources Research OfficI
George Washington University MAJOR HENRY A. SEGAL, U. S.-Army Medical Corps
GENERAL LEMUEL C. SHEPHERD, JR.
Commandant, U. S. Marine Corps
DR. FRANK STANTON
President, Columbia Broadca!lting System
HONORABLE ROBERT T. STEVENIl
then Secretary oj the Army SERGEANT MARVIN E. TALBERT, U. S. Army HONORABLE HAROLD E; TALBOTT
Secretary oj the Air Force LIEUTENANT COLONEL WILLIAM G. THRA8H, U. S. Marine Corps
HONORABLE CHARLES S. THOMAS
Secretary oj the Navy
LIEUTENANT COLONEL C. H. THURSTON, U. S. Armv G-l Personnel, General Staff GENERAL NATHAN F. TWINING, U. S. Air Foree
ChieJ oj Staff
MR. BERNARD WEITZER
National Legislative Dir.ctor Jewish War Veterans oj U. S. A.
DB. HAROLD WOLF
Department oj Medicine CorneU University
ADDENDA NO. 4

THE MIND AND THE SPIRIT
IN NATIONAL SECURITY

BLANK PAGE
THE MIND AND THE SPIRIT IN NATIONAL SECURITY
(An address by Admiral Arthur Radford, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, before the Sccond National Conference on Spiritual Founda­tions, Washingt,on, D. C., 25 October 1955.)
President Eisenhower recently issued a widely publicized executive order to announce a Code of Conduct for the members of the Armed Forces.
In brief, pointed t.crtIis, the first article of this Code said:
“I am fin American fighting man. I serve ill the forces which guard my country and our way of life. I am prepared to give my life in trrBr defense.”
I believe most of ~’ou realize this is written in the form of a. creed. Possibly some of you feel that it is written mostly for thof’e of us in uni­form. If so, you are not wrong. It is written as a guiding precept to be followed by the men in our Armed Forces.
I would suggest, however, that this creed could very well be a part of every American’s attitude. There is no hidden meaning, nor is there lack of meaning, when yotI pledge: “I serve in the forces which guard my country and our way of life.” These )Vords are the key to the part played by the mind and the spirit in our national security. They signify: Militant Liberty.
Ladies and gentlemen: Every American should be dedicated to this mission. It is not sufficient for only a relatively few to defend the United States. In our present peril, people everywhere must unite in the fight against militant international Communism, or any other threat to our American way of life.
What is this “American way of life” of which I speak?  You know it and
I know it.  We have lived it and enjoyed its benefits.  But how can we
define something so nebulous?

Language is sometimes a peculiar thing; Sometimes it plays tricks on us.” The word “Freedom” has far different meaning when spoken from ·Comn;;.unist lips. And in American speech, that word may become so loosely used that its meaning begins to wear thin and to become vague.
Ithas become increasingly apparent to me since WorId War II that men and nations who want to remain free must understand Freedom and be able to explain it-by their example as well as in their own words.

“It is obvious the Communists have made amazing gains, largely because ‘they know what” they believe, why they believe it, and can explain it. They are educated in it and completely versed in it.
On the other hand, we who are free have many times been incoherent or have lacked the verbal ability to explain or defend completely what our way of life really is. We must know what we mean by it. We must be convinced that it presents the very best way of life in today’s world-and I think we are. But we must be able to explain this conviction to others.
Freedom My own understanding of the American way of life is many-foid. First it is Freedom and Liberty. Freedom began with a belief in human dignity, and it grew with the history of the world. Often it came in conflict with tyranny and despo­tism. Often it was knocked down, but always it arose to fight again. It would fight, and lose, and then fight again. We learned this in history when Moses stood beforePharaoh and said: “Let my people go.” We read it again when the barons stood before King John and the Magna Carta was embodied into laws. We lived it still again in the epic of Valley Forge. Our Founding Fathers were adept at choosing the right words to explain the meaning of our way of life. Thomas Jefferson called it “Life, Liberty and the Pursuit of Happiness.” .Patrick Henry summed it up when he said: “Give me liberty or give me death.” All of you know well the other meanings of our four freedoms: They are all part of the American way of life:-freedom of religion, freedom of press, freedom of assembly; freedom of speech, and many more. We have lived with these freedoms so long, and have enjoyed them so much, that we are prone to take them for granted.
Faith
A second primary ingredient in our American way of life is faith. Faith is essential. We must have it.
The New Testament calls faith “the substance of things hoped for, the evidence of things not seen.” (Hebrews 11:1.) Let me repeat that. Faith is “the substance of things hoped for, the evidence of things not seen.”
Faith is our belief in the equality of man in the sight of God. It is our belief in what Alexander Hamilton referred to as “the Sacred Rights of Mankind.” Far beyond the point of lip-service, we must all believe that each and every human is entitled to “Life, Liberty, and the Pursuit of Happiness.” These are the “substance of things hoped for.”
That cold winter at Valley Forge was truly an ordeal. The suffering from freezing and starvation almost led American troops to abandon their cause. Faith in their God; faith in their great leader, George Washington; and faith in the righteousness of their cause inspired the courage with which these men were victorious in their hour of trial. Thesc are the “evidence of things not seen,” to return again to the words of the New Testament.
Without such faith, we could not be ready, as written in the Code of Conduct, “to give my life in their defense.” But with it, we can meet successfully any future hour of trial.
Responsibilities
Now, faith in the principles upon which this nation was founded auto­maticall)’ implies a third important element of “the American way oflife”; namely, the individual acceptance ofresportsibility to defend these principles against any threat;
To the young person growing up in a country such as ours, it is too
easy to consider the rights of man as accepted facts rather than as prizes
to be won. The world can too easily seem his for the taking, without
personal effort.
The lessons of history, however, teach us otherwise. History is replete
with instances to prove that nations who take their liberty for granted are.
apt to fall prey to tyrannical forces, from within as well as from without.
For every freedom there is a corresponding responsibility. If a person
denies his responsibility, he runs the risk of losing his freedom. If he ac­
cepts his responsibility, he C’ln do much to perpetuate freedom for gencra­
tiom! to follow.
In this same vein, teaching a person to recite the Declaration of Inde­
pendence and the Bill of Rights by memory, line by line, word for word, is
not enough, for you could teach a parrot to do that.
Instead, teaching him to understand the meaning of liberty is much
better. Itis all important. We should always give him a “Bill of Respon­
sibilities” to go along with his “Bill of Rights,” and at the same time, instill
in him, a spirit of service to God and country.
Spreading the Word
Having established Faith, Responsibility, and Freedom as the three elem~nts of “the American way of life,” I am concerned with relating the whole to the concept of the mind and the spirit in national security. How do we go about perpetuating this “American’way of life,” for us today and for our children tomorrow?
An important feature in the multi-faced Soviet threat has been their conviction and complete command of their doctrine. Their successes have been achieved in great part by the subversive appeal of an artful logic, effectively spread by organized zealots. They have denied spiritual values and pretended to show that following the Communist l;lystem is the dynamic way to economic security for the masses. They have associated the United States with status quo powers whose only motivation is to hold onto the bounties they already possess;
Thus, the Free World, in spite of its greater resources and spiritual values, has been sometimes outmaneuvered. Too many times we who are free have seemingly lacked the understanding conviction with which to defend our way of life.
The answer lies in the heart, the mind, and in the spirit of all Americans. We must teach a better understanding and appreciation of “the American way of life”; we must rebuild the conviction that our path is the closest to’th~t which God would have us follow, that it is truly worth;)’ of personal sacrifices.
We must spread the word, both at home and abroad. We must call on the good offices and influence of the h~me, church, school, and Armed Forces, to. develop the sound minds and dedicated spirits upon which our national security is fundamentally based. We can take our cue from Nathan Hale, who, when asked by his· captors if he’ had any last words, simply said: “I only regret that I have but one life to give for my country.”
You, laclie'” and gentlemen, are among the teachers. By virtue of the great wisdom you possess, you are able to wield your power and influence on people everywhere. Therefore, you have perhaps a greater responsi­
bility to Freedom. Yes, you are accountable. You are accountable for your use of Freedom and, your powers to teach. Through your patriotic dedication, you can rekindle the fires of understanding conviction so that all Americans will proudl}’ dedicate themselves to the words of our Founding Fathers in the Declaration of Independence:
“Alld for the support of this Declaration, with a firm reliance 011 the protection of Divine Providence, we mutually.pledge to _~ach other our Lives, our Fortunes, and our sacred Honor.”
This; ladies and gentlemen, is the Mind and Spirit in our National Security.
ADDENDA NO. 5
PRISONERS OF WAR IN HISTORY

BLANK PAGE
PRISONERS OF WAR IN HISTORY
Dungeon, Cell and Stockade The captive knight languished in a “donjon.” The languishing was usually rugged. Facing “durance vile,” many Medieval warriors pre­ferred death to capture, refusing to !lurrender and battling until they feU. The Medieval foot Boldier continued to risk death or enslavement at the hands of a conquering enemy. But in the 17th Century he found flo notable spokesman in Hugo Grotius-Dutch lawyer, humanist, one of the world’s great democratic thinkers. At one time, Grotius himself was imprisoned. He contrived a remarkable escape. Thereafter, he dedi­cated himself to a study of international law, attempting to devise a set of rules which combatant nations could follow to mutual advantage. His efforts to humanize warfare by legal means did not meet with immediate­success. But they did publicize the problem and place it on humanity’s conscience. The concurrent rise of nationalism aggravated t~e prisoner problem: As national armies grew, so did the complexities of war and soldiering. Usually the conquering army had few facilities for confining a mass of captives. Castle dungeons were few and far between. Great bastilles were built to hold prisoners. The British constructed Dartmoor as a prison for soldiers captured during the Napoleonic Wars. As cells overflowed, the captives were crowded into miserable stockades. They were packed into sirless prison ships or bleak compounds. Because guards were shorthanded, prisoners were frequently chained in droves. Fortunately for the war-prisoner two lenitives eventually developed. One came in the device of the prisoner exchange. The second stemmed from the concept that the soldier In a national army was a servant of his government. As such he could not be held personally responsible for the’ actions of that government. Hence, he was not subject to punishment for going to war. The prisoner had right ofreparation, and it was due from the “detaining state” and not from individual captors. The point bears on the problem of the “war criminal”-one of the serious questions involving the modern POW. The issue arose during the American Revolution. So did qther issues pertinent to the POW problem of today-questions involving treatment of captive by captor; prisoner conduct and allegiance; prison break and escape; truce exchange or prisoner rescue. The American patriot’s first experience with these issues was not a happy one.
The First American POW’i George III decreed that all Americans who revolted against Crown authority were war criminals subject to hanging. Doughty Abraham Whipple of Rhode Island reminded the king, “Always catch a man before you hang himl” But every Revolutionary soldier and sailor went to war under shadow of the gallows. The noose was relaxed only because it proved impractical and English liberals deplored such high-handed
tyranny; Soon after the outbreak of hostilities prisoner exchanges were begun and paroles arranged. Whipple himself was eventually captured. The Red Coats considered the “Informal Commodore” worth more as hostage than hangee.
Captive American seamen were’lodged in the worst of England’s Daval prisons, the “Old Mill” at Plymouth. Early in the war Dr. Franklin informed Lord Stormont in Paris, “The United States are not unac­quainted with the barbarous treatment their people receive. when they hP.ve the misfortune of being your prisoners in Europe.” Lord Stormont’s answer was blunt. “The King’s Ambassador receives no applications from rebels unlesathey come to implore His Majesty’s mercy.” Mal­treatment of captured Yankees led Paul Jones to raid Nova Scotia in a daring rescue effort. “Justly indignant at the suffering of these Ameri-‘ cans, I resolved to make the greatest efforts to succor them.” His sensa­tional raid on England featured an attempt to kidnap the Earl of Selkirk to force a prisoner exchange.
A vie~ of Red Coat prisons in America comes from the pen of Ethan ~lIen, hImself made captive. “The prisoners who were brought to New
1: ork were crowded into churches by the slavish Hessian guards . . . .. I have seen sundry of the prisoner.:! in the agonies of death, in consequence of very hunger; and others speechless and near death, biting pieces of chIps; others pleading for God’s sake for something to eat and at the sa~e ,time shivering with cold…. The filth was almost’ beyond de­scriptIOn…. I have seen in one of the churches seven dead at the same time, lying among the excrement of their bodies…. I saw some sucking bones after they were speechlesd. . . . I was persuaded that it was a premeditated and systematized plan of the British Council to destroy the youth of our land.”
From Bunce’s Romance oj the Revolution comes an equally harrowing account. “Of all the atrocities committed, those in the prison ships of New York am the most execrable …. there is nothing in history to excel the barbarities there inflicted. Twelve thousand (American pris­oners) suffered death .•.• on board the filthy and malignant ships. The scenes enacted in these prisons almost exceed belief.” Worst of the prison ships was the hulk “Old Jersey” anchored in Wallabout Bay, Brooklyn. The many dead, thrown overside, silted the bay with skele­tons. A poet patriot engraved the picture in verse:
“Let the dark Scorpion’s hulk narrate,
“The dismal tale of Red Coat hate;
“Her horrid scenes let Jersey tell,
“And mock the shades where demons dwell ..

The Red Coat leaders countered that the Yankees taned and feathered Tory loyalists and that captive British soldiers were worked in brutal !Dines. The claim was made (in some instances substantiated) that Con­tiI!ental Navy captains slew naval prisoners. But “Old Jersey” remained a blot on the record.
!n the “Old Mill” at Plymouth, England, some of the Revolution’s greatest sea warriors were imprisoned. The prisoners were chained and placed under heavy guard. Yet the “Mill” featured two of the most remarkable.escapes in ?istory-exploits which inspire American fighting men to thiS day. With almost superhuman determination, Captain ,Gustavus Conyngham and agrO\lp orfcll0V{ pri~oners tunneled out and made a get-away. Thereby, as Conyngham dryly put it, “committing treason through His Majesty’s earth.” .Aided by friends in the English underground, the intrepid Joshua Barney contrived ~n over-the-wall escape. Eluding pursuers, he bluffed his way across England, and l’eached Holland in disguise-an exploit to ·rival anything in Dumas. So was born· the tradition that the American POW does not meekly accept captivity.
“The Meaning of Treason”
Laws affecting military discipline were evolving. Of course, the basio
codes prevailed. Treason was punishable by death. Treachery could
not be countenanced. The question of treasonable collaboration while a
prisoner of the enemy came up during the Revolution. The case l!-nd
its decision-a precedent–wasrecorded in 1781. Respublica vs. M’Car,ty.
The accused faced trial for serving in enemy uniform after capture. He
claimed he was forced to do so under compulsion of .duress. The court
held that the duress was insufficient, only the threat of imminent death
would constitute adequate excuse.
Clearer cases of treason were made against enlisted men who deserted
their postsand went over to the enemy. Paul Jones had such a traitor in
his raider, the Ranger. The man, a David Freeman, fled ship at Whi~e­
haven and tried to alarm the town. If Jones had caught him-I
During the Civil \Var many prisoners of war changed unif.orm. /Some
3,170 Union captives exchanged blue for gJ:ay. About 5,452 Confederates
went over to the Federal side. One famous company of “reconstructed
Rebs” was sent \,yest to man a frontier outpost and relieve a Union garrison
needed on the front.
In cases involving disloyal prisoners of war, the question of duress­or degree of duress-was weighed in the balance. Tlte Union Judge Advocate General· recognized coercion as a defense. It was held that “extreme suffering and privation which endangered the prisoner’s life” might justify his enlistment with the enemy. However, if the prisoner made no effort to escape when opportunity offered, he was liable to a desertion charge. War Department General Order No. 207 (July 1863) provided that it was the duty of a prisoner of war to eseape. The order was designed to curb wholesale surrenders by men eager to obtain parole and evade further military service.
The war was opposed by Northern “Copperheads.” Lincoln was inclined to be lenient. Referring to””Copperhead” leaders, he asked, “Should I hang a young soldier, and free a wily politician who induces him to desert?”
Lieber’s Code
Civil War prison camps were harsh. In Southern camps, particularly Andersonville and Florence, men suffered greatly from malnutrition and lack of medication. The Union prison on Johnson’s Island in Lake Erie was. a bleak Alcatraz, and Union stockades at Point Lookout on the Potomac were described as “hell holes.”
Humane citizens, North and South, appealed for lenient treatment of captive soldiery. In 1863 President Lincoln requested Professor Francis Lieber to prepare a set of rules for immediate promulgation. Lieber’s
Instruction8for the Government of Armies of the United States were probably
the first comprehensive codification of international law issued by a
government. Based on moral precepts which recognized the enemy as a
fellow human with lawful rights, they embodied the first code pertaining
to prisoners of war. Lieber’s code contained the following injunctions:
No, belligerent has the right to declare that he will treat every captured
man In arms . • • . as a brigand or a bandit.
A prisoner of war Is subject to no punishment for being a public enemy,
nor Is any revenge wreaked upon him by the Intentional Infliction of any
sutrering, or disgrace, by cruel Imprisonment, want of food, by mutila­
tIOIl, death, or any other barbarity.
A prisoner of war remaIns answerable ror his crimes commItted before
the captor’s army or people, (for crimes) committed before be was cap­
tured, and for which he has not been punished by his own authorities.
A prisoner of war . . . • Is the prisoner of the government and not ot
the captor.
Prisoners of war are subject to confinement or imprisonment such as
may be deemed necessary on account of safety, but they are to be sub­
jected to no other Intentional suffering or indignity.
A prisoner of war who escapes may be shot, or otherwise killed In
mght; but neither death nor any other punishment shall be inflicted on
Idm for his attempt to escape, which the law of order does not consider
a crime. Stricter means of security shall be used after an unsuccessful
attempt at escape. ‘
Every captured wounded man shall be medically treated according to
the ability of the medical staff.
Lieber’s code was a milepost on civilization’s highroad. But its commandments were easier to publish than practice. For example, the code stipulated that prisoners should receive rations similar to those issued bis captors. Military and economic stringency often negated the inten­tion of this rule. The Confederacy agreed to recognize and apply the code. But under pressure of ,blockade, the South was slowly starving and Souther~ soldiers and their prisoners showed the effects of the scarcity of food.
Lieber reoognized that war was a harsh taskmaster. Prisoners would have to obey various prison-rules. They would be punished for infrac­tions. During the Civil War, prisoners were sometimes chained together, placed in brutal irons or “bagged” (a suffocating canvas Back tied over the head). They were placed in solitary confinement, and denied wster. These vicious measures were seldom used as disciplinary punishments. More often they were employed to wring information from a captive. Such “third degrees” were sub rosa and usually applied by military police or Secret Service agents.
Interrogation and Information
In the American Civil War, espionage, military intelligence, and counterintelligence were important features of the conflict. In the two previous wars fought by the United States few trained intelligence opera­tors had served the American forces. Efforts to gather military informa-­tion had been haphazard and disorganized. The advent of the Pinker­
ton Service which operated with McClellan, the Federal Secret Service
under Colonel Lafayette Baker, and a well-organized ‘Confederate Secret
Service put intelligence-gathering (and defenl;live counter-intelligence) on
a modernized basis.
Spies were called “scouts.” As old as war was the rule that the enemy
spy, caught in disguise, faced death. They were beyond the pale of
prisoner-of-war exemptions. The Civil War featured many heroic spy
exploits. It also featured daring raids on enemy lines to capture troopers
for interrogation. In every war thereafter, military intelli~nce would
be closely linked with prisoner interrogation.
The officer or man who gave his captors military information was as
dangerous to country and cause as the deliberate traitor. So soldiers were
enjoined “not to talk.” Lieber set down the rule:
Honorable men, when captured, will abstain from giving to the enemy
information concerning their own army, and the modern law of war per­
mits no longer the use of any violence against prisoners, in order to
extort the desired information, or to punish them for having given false
information.
Again the rule was easier to recite than observe. On the one hand,
there was the interrogator ordered by his chiefs to acquire vital informa­
tion-intelligence which might win a battle and save many lives. On the
other hand there was the prisoner, sworn to withhold information which
might cost ~ battle and the lives of his countrymen. Here are the opposing
forces for a cruel contest. By virtue of the fact that he is a captive, the
odds are all against the prisoner. His refusal to’ talk inevitably invites
some form of duress. Accordingly, Lieber’s Code outlawed violence by
the captor.
Civilized men did their best to follow the precepts of the Golden Rule
and Christian doctrine.
So another significant effort was made to regulate warfare by ethics. The going was slow but the steps were in the right direction. A promise of something better for the POW was coming from Geneva.
The International Red Cross
In 1864, the Swiss philanthropist Henri Dunant wrote a book which set the stage for a conference at Geneva and the’ founding of the Inter­national Red Cross. The Red Cross offered relief to all combatants, regardless of the flag they served. All participants agreed that “the sanitary personnel might continue its duty in the presence of the enemy.” Through the determined campaigning of Clara Barton the United States joined the convention in 1882, and th~ American Red. Cross w~ orga?iz~d.
Dunant’s work inspired the founding of other prlsoner-rehef sOCIeties. In 1874 a conference was held in Brussels at the instigation of the Russian Government. Delegates of all the major European nations attended. A ‘code, based on Lieber’s, was projected. The Brussels code was ~oht ratified. But it strongly influenced· the first Hague Conference whic met at the turnof· the centUI:Y. ,
The devoted men at Geneva and Brussels worked overtime to ttevise international laws which would be effective•. They were confronted with race prejudice, ancie~t gnidges, super nAtionalism, and mistrust.
Czar Nicholas II sponsored the Hague Conference of 1899 which broadened the scope of Red Cross operations. Representatives of 26 nations attended the Conference. Discussed WP,t8 disarmament proposals and the possibility of establishing a world court. The delegates negotiated various agreements relating to warfare arid war-prisoners.
The prlsoner-of-war code adopted at the Hague was based on the one proposed at Brussels. Itembodied many of Ueber’s original stituplations. Prisoners of war were to be considered as lawful and disarmed enemies” They were captives of the hostile government (and not in the power of thE! individual captors or jailol’ll). Humare treatment of prisoners was obligatory. And it was agreed that unruly prisoners could be punished for insubordination. .
Twenty-four of the attending powers ratified the Hague Convention. Signers included the United States, Germany, France, England and Rus­sia. A hopeful generation called the Conference the “First Parliament of Man.”
Acting on a Russian proposal, the Netherlands called a second Hague Conference in 1907. During this conference, the powers affirmed their adherence to the principles previously adopted.
So the Red Cross raised its flag in the capitol of every modern nation including Russia. Eventually the Soviet Union agreed to follow the rules laid down by Hague and Geneva Conventions. At the outbreak of the Korean War, the North Koreans and subsequently the Red Chinese announced an intention to observe the rules. While the Red Cross was conspicuous by its absence in North Korea, a few of the POWs did receive mail and packages. And some of the Cbinese held their fire when medical troops were recovering wounded. The Red Cross was there in shadow, if not in substance.
The First Total War Another conference was in the making when the First World War exploded. The German intentions seemed only too clear when the Kaiser’s spokesman described a treaty with Belgium as a “scrap of paper.” The concept of total war-mustering an entire nation and its forces for the conflict-waB not new. But in the modern sense it was first advocated by the elder Von Moltke. If rules and codcs abetted the war effort, observe them. If they didn’t, they were unrealistic and to be dispensed with. Total war was no gentleman’s game. Any expedient that IIpel1ed victory was justifiable. Von Moltke’s concept was not entirelyacceptcd by the High Command, but the Prussian school generally endorsed a policy of Schreklichkeit (planned terror or “Frightfulness”) to subdue defiant enemy peoples. Prussian “Frightfulliass” was amateurish, and not very effective. But it did represent a 20th Century development in psychological warfare. Its usefulness was countered because. it backfired in another area-propar­ganda warfare. Organized propaganda was an innovation., The practice of propar­ganda .was as· old as preaching, electioneering or salesmanship. Early .American war propaganda was written by Thomas Paine whose book Common Sens8 was the sensation of ’76. Washington urged his troops to read it. And the phrases “summer soldier”and “sunshine patriot” scathed the faint-hearted of the Revolution.
Captain David Dixon Porter, U. S. N., pioneered with propaganda during the Civil War. Past the Vicksburg forts he floated a dummy gun­boat bearing a huge sign advising: “Deluded Rebels, Cave Inl” Porter was probably the originator of the leaflet barrage. From one of his gun­boats he flew kites over Vicksburg. A cut string would drop a bag of letters on the besieged city. “Think of chicken and biscuitsI”
But organized propaganda.,.-contrivedpress releases, editorial campaigns, leaflet barrages-the use of all kinds of mass media to reach a national audience or influence the enemy populace or army-this was something new. From the outset Germans and Allies saw it as a tremendously powerful weapon. Offensively and defensively, both sides employed it to the utmost. Again the Germans went wide of the mark. Their propa­ganda “threatened.” Basically, propaganda is advertising. Force it, and it becomes repellent.
The Germans introduced another innovation during World War I. This new element could be called “Political Warfare.” As distinguished from propaganda, it involved the process known today as political indoc­trination. In 1914 this came as an extraordinary (and an alarming) machination. The Germans did not employ it successfully or on a large’ scale. They were pioneering. But they set the pattern for the future.
At Limburg and Zossen, the Germans set up what were known as “politi­cal camps.” To these camps were sent prisoners who seemed likely sub­jects for subversion. The inmates were quartered in comfortable barracks. Instead of the normal prisoner ration they were fed the best viands avail­able. Tobacco and candy were plentiful. During the first eighteen months of the war, Irish prisoners were selected for these segregated camps.
As reported by Major H. C. Fooks in his book Pri80ners of War: “One comfuandant talked to his men and stated that the emperor was aware of the downtrodden state of Ireland, and wished that the Irish captives be placed in a separate camp, where they would be better fed and treated better than the English captives. • . . • Sir Roger Casement was sent to the Limburg Camp to give a series of lectures.”
Casement was a famous Irish rebel-in British eyes an arch-traitor. He had slipped into Germany to organize an anti-British brigade. His attempts with the Irish prisoners of war were a pathetic failure. From Fook one learns: “The lectures were poorly attended and as soon as the real purpose of them was disclosed serious trouble developed in the camp wherever Casement appearedjin fact a lPlard had to be Bent with him to protect him from the indignant Irishmen. Mter every inducement had been held out for a long time, including freedom of the prison camps, and especially the privilege of having an Irish regiment of their own with green uniforms and a harp embroidered on the coat, only thirty-two men volunteered for the new. regiment from four thousand captivel5. The thirty-two were despised by their compatriots.”
Fook tells of a Roman Catholic priest, an Irishman, -who was sent to the Limburg camp by special arrangement with tlle Vatican. ‘.rhis clergy­man, Father Corotty, refused to cooperate with Casement and the Ger­mans. He denounced them both to the prisoners and urged the captive soldiers to remain loyal to their oaths and their king. Father Corotty at Limburg was a valiant pleader. He would have his counterpart in Father Emil. Kapaun-a brave priest who died in a prison camp in North Korea.
One may find another parallel in the 32 Irish converts who joined the
German side in World War I and the 23 defectors who turned the coat
in Korea. A final parallel comes from the World War I account. “After
the failure of such methods the Irish captives were subjected to rigid
discipline and limitation of liberty. The leaders in this antagonism
to German diplomacy were removed from the main camp to • . . . •
working camps where they were forced to live on the camp foods without
receiving their packages and letters which would normally haVll been for­
warded to them. Bitter complaints were made to the effect that men
too ill to get out of bed were ordered to leave in violation of the orders
of the medical officers . • .. Reprisals by the Germans were not un­
common.”
As a footnote to this political indoctrination program, Roger Casement
was captured by British agents when a U-boat landed him in Ireland.
Summarily tried as a traitor, he was found guilty and executed.
At war’s end approximately 2,200,000 prisoners were in the hands of
the Central (Germanic) Powers. The Allies were holding 615,900. The
Americans had captured some 49,000 Germans.· The Germans captured
4,120 Americans. A total of 147 Americans died in the enemy’s prison
camps. Few Americans escaped from Germany, but daring attempts
were made. .
By and large, the American prisoners had been well treated. Undoubt­
edly the Klaiser’s military leaders foresaw the results of America’s entry
into the conflict. With the handwriting on the wall it was only expedient
to treat captured Doughboys with lenience.
In reviewing World War I-the First Total War–one may note four major developments:
Scientific intelligence warfare.
Psychological warfare.
Propaganda warfare.
Political warfare.
All dealt with the human mind, and all would be brought to bear on future prisoners of war–in World War II and in Kor~.
Star Chamber Confessions
Intelligence warfare, psychological warfare, propaganda warfare and political warfare did not end with the signing of the Armistice. World War II began almost as soon as the First World War was terminated. Out of Europe’s ruins crawled Fascism and Nazism. CoIilmunism had already taken root in the wreckage of Imperial Russia.
Began a war for the minds of Europe’s people-those millions con­temptuously looked upon by War Lord and dictator as “the masses.” While spies and subversives swarmed across the Continent, the “masses” were deluged with propaganda appeals. Salute with upraised hand, with clenched fist and cocked elbow-here comes the Millenniuml The Rebirth of the Roman EmpireI The Thousand Year Reichl International Com­munisml The democratic nations looked on in helpless alarm.
The Fascist Terror seemed mostly bugaboo. But Nazi Germany pro­duced a horror of pogroms. Concentration camps. Torture chambers. Finally, in the early 30’s, Hitler’s Blood Purge.
Then, from the murk of Communist Russia, came a startling series of
headlines.
In 1937, the Kremlin staged a whoiesaIe purge of Bolshevik traitors and
defectors. Among the number brought to trial were some of Russia’s
toughest Red commissars and no less a figure than Marshal Tukhachevsky,
one of the ablest military strategists in Europe. Western observers were
astounded to hear the accused stand up in court and openly confess to
treason. A number of them read or recited long speeches, admitting to
designs against the Soviet Union and the regime in power, and voicing
penitence for their deeds. With fantastic self-abnegation, some of the
confessors condemned themselves and recommended jud~ment without
mercy. AJJtheymarchedoft tofacefiringsquads ortheoblivionofSiberia,
the world stared after them in astonishment.
The techniques used in the cases of the Russian political prisoners dem­
onstrated that they had a very’ effective means of forcing individuals to
make false confessions. To some extent this special intensive and pro­
tractive technique, sometimes referred to as “brainwashing”, was em­
ployed on American prisoners of war in Korea. It was used to elicit false
confessions and other statements for propaganda purposes.
Threats. Blows. Days in solitary confinement. Driblets of food and
sips of water Then questioning, hour after hour, a brilliant light in the
eyes. Exhaustion, then, perhaps, sudden leniency. An abrupt shift from
brutality to smiling kindness. Anything to throw the victim of! balance.
And if the “kindness” fails, another resort to remorseless punishment.
The simple carrot-and-prod procedure. Months of such treatment could,
and evidently did, crack the Btaunchcommissars. A sensitive man
would succumb sooner. A Dutch doctor coined the term for this type of
psychological and physical pressuring-“menticide.”
The Geneva conventions outlawed duress and physical torture. But a cynical and ruthless enemy would hardly balk at the breakage of humane rules. Moreover, he might claim that·mental torture did not constitute physical torture. In any event, the question seemed academic as far as the Nazi S. S. were concerned. But as.Germany marched toward war there was some hope that the professional Wehrmacht commanders would abide by the Geneva Code. It would appear that many of them did.
The Second To.al War
Seen as an extension of World War I, the global war exploded by the Axis Powers produced nothing new in the way of warfare until its atomio ending. Unless it could be stated that air raids and buzz bombs extended the battle front to the home front and put every civilian-man, woman, child-on So potential firing line. And for the first time in modem history, thousands of civilians were taken prisoner and impounded in concentration camps.
The conflict that would leave millions of dead was an anthology of atrocities. The civilians suffe.red most. Rotterdam blasted. Coventry blasted. Lidice destroyed. Thousands of peasants herded to the wall and shot. Victims beaten and tortured by their S. S. captors. Resisters starved, flogged, mutilated, slain in endurance tests and medical experi­ments behind the w8lls of Oranienburg and other “special prisons.”
The horrors endured by captive civiIianll in Nazi.hands defy assessment.
Their sum may never be totaled. The authors of the Blood Purge silenced many of their captives and saw to it the records were destroyed.
Prisoner Interrogation-A Battle of Wits
During World War II a total of 129,701 Americans were .captured by
the Axis enemy.
Perhaps fearing reprisal more than public opinion, the German military
were fairly.punctilious in handling American POWs. Americans captured
in Italy were awarded similarly “correct” treatment. The prisoners were
usually allowed to organize in groups. Captured officers assumed com­
mand according to rank. The POWs often ran their own work details.
In lenient camps sports and shows were permitted. Red Cross packages
were distributed, and mail call was the happiest moment of the month.
But the men were behind barbed wire, and Americans behind barbed wire
are never happy men.
In the matter of prisoner interrogation the German military seem to
have been punctilious enough. At least toward the Americans. There
was none of the brutalizing that was evident in such Japanese camps as
Ofuna and Asbio, where American submariners were tortured. .
The Americans captured by General Homma’s forces on the Bataan
Peninsula and at Corregidor counted themselves fortunate if they reached
a prison camp alive. In the “Bataan Death March” General Wainwright’s
surrendered troops endured one of the most excruciating ordeals of the war.
Britons and Australians caught at Singapore were similarly brutalized.
The veneer of civilization was thin on the Emperor’s soldiery. It peeled
off like varnish as the Rising Sun blazed in triumph over the Southwest
Pacific.
Airmen and submariners bore the brunt of interrogation ordeals. Reason: they usually possessed information of more value to the enemy than an infantryman’s. They may have flown from a carrier or perhaps from some hidden island base. The name of the flattop, the location of the base-this was vital intelligence. The submariner knew a dozen secrets: his sub’s cruising range, its radar and sonar devices, its torpedo gear. One of the best kept secrets of the war (and one of the most im­portant) was the depth at which a U. S. submarine could operate.
So pilots and submarine sailors who were captured “got the works.” The Japanese did not employ subtle interrogation methods. Nor did they employ the methods associated with “menticide.” Prisoners were flogged and tortured. They were treated to such Oriental punishments as judo experts and hatchet men could devise. One submarine captain who took it was a skipper whose vessel had been battered into surrender. Cigarette burning, bamboo splinters under the fingernails-this officer’s ordeal hardly bears recital. But the Japanese did not extract from him the diving depth of U. S. submarines.
In the South Pacifio after the war, Americans found the graves of captured destroyermen. Several of the bluejackets had been beheaded. And on Palawan Island was found -a trench containing the bodies of American prisoners who had been drenched with gasoline and burned alive. Their story was told by a survivor who had escaped this horror.
These grim reports from the PaoifIo may be detailed as the exception. Late in the war Japanese prison camps were on a par with those in some
backward country at century’s turn. The blockaded Japanese were reo
duced to meager rations. The Philippines and the Home Islands were
undergoing non-stop bombardment. Consequently food and medical
supplies were at barrel-bottom. The POW’s received the leftovers.
But beheadings, torture, Palawan massacre and “Bataan Death March”
were on the record. Like the Malmedy massacre in the Belgian Bulge,
like Buchenwald and Belsen, they awaited an accounting. The outraged
people of the United Nations demanded retributive justice.
The Germans applied other and seemingly more effective interrogation methods. Consider the testimony of Hanns Joachim Scharff. Scharff was an interrogator stationed at Auswerstelle West, Oberursel, Germany. This was the camp where all capt!Jred aviators (except Russian) were brought for questioning. Every American fighter pilot made prisoner by the Germans was sent to OberurseI. Scharff questioned 500 of them. From “all but a handful” he obtained the information he was after. His work was so successful that he came to the notice of the Department of Justice. After the war he was brought to America to explain his remark­able methods.
As it evolved, Scharff’s methods were not so remarkable. It might be said that he “killed his victims with kindness.” Expecting to face a Nazi terrorist or an B. S. savage, the captured pilot found himself con­fronting a genial English-speaking German who seemed as polite and friendly as a new acquaintance on the college campus. Scharff would open the interview by offering the prisoner a chair and a cigarette. “Lieu­tenant, it is my duty to ask you certain questions. May I have your name,rank and serial number?”
The prisoner would cheerfully comply. At that date U. S. Army r~gu­lations required him to “maintain silence” after he had spoken the reqUIred identification.
“Now then” Scharff would go on amiably. “That number of yours. Are you’ a bo:Uber? Or a fighter pilot?”-No answer.-“What is your home address, Lieutenant?”-No answer.-“What type of plane do you fly?”-:-The Lieutenant grins and shakes his head. Scharff chuckles. “I see I can’t get anything out of you. Here take a look at the latest Stars and Stripes. I’ll be back in a few minutes.”
The chair the cigarette, the Stars and Stripes-these are stage props cunningly c~ntrived to set the prisoner at ease. The interrogator’s brief retirement gives the prisoner a chance to relax. A relaxed man may be caught off guard. The next move by the interrogator (and in all the moves in this game he has the advantage and maintains what chess players call the initiative) puts him in touch with BUNA. The initials stand for Beute una Nachrichten Abteilung, which tl’anslates roughly into “Booty and Information.” At this BUNA center the Germans assembled every­thing recovered from downed pilots. The booty included things as innoc­uous as mess-hall tickets, book matches, bits of maps, lucky pieces, and anything else scavanged from pilots shot down over the. li~es. More informative items were letters, snapshots, or newspaper ohppmgs found on the dead or taken from prisoners. Needless to say, wrecked aircraft were salvaged whenever possible. If the planes were blown to pieces, the pieces were recovered and shipped to an assemblage base similar to BUNA.
The BUNA center also contained thousands of dossiers on prisoners.
And thousands of dossiers on offioers who had not been taken prisoner. Suppose the captured Lieutenant were a football hero. Doubtless when he enlisted the old home town published his name in the paper and his photograph with it. The chancel! were that BUNA had his name, his address, his picture, and the names of his uncles, his cousins and his aunts. Also his nickname-“Bud.” Perhaps even the fact that his father was president of the local bank. If “Bud” graduated from college or military school or academy, his picture would be in the classbook along with those of his fraternity brothers. All of which made it easier for Interrogator Scharff. (The Germanll were not the only ones who assem­bled suoh information. It was said that when the war broke out the British knew the name and address of every officer and man in the Nazi Navy.)
Now, the game beoame relatively simple for Soharff. Armed with background information from BUNA, he would return smiling to the contest. “Well, Bud, you see I have found you out. You flew over here in a P-38. Your squadron commander, Jack Williams, is in prison down the line. He’s a nice guy. I couldn’t get anything out of him, but my intelligence boys came across a’news clipping. You fellows flew in here from Tunbridge Wells. Nice going. By the way, how’s your little sister Peggy? We’ve got a chap in my outfit who used to live in Oak Park. I understand your father is president of the First National Bank.”
What could be more disarming than this routine? Of course, it wasn’t always that easy. The Lieutenant might refuse to rise to the bait. BUNA might have more trouble acquiring biographical information. But the illustration suffices. Nine times out of ten a prisoner would be completely “beaten” when the interrogator came up with his nickname, the name of his squadron leader, and intimate details of his home. Not to mention the type of plane he flew, the armament carried by the plane, its rate of climb, and so on.
So Scharff was able to report that he “broke” almost 500 American pilots. After the opening breach, the follow-through was usually easy. The prisoner would be invited out for a stroll in the park. . Scharff would take him to some quiet beer garden for a friendly Bock. A few aimless remarks about nothing at all. Then Scharff would slip in the trick question, shrouding it with indirection-an indifferent tone, an offhand manner, or a yawn. That was the way it was done. A game of words. A battle of wits,
And what if the prisoner proved obdurate and buttoned up into absolute silence? Then would come the glass-of-water trick. Or one of its many variations. There were ways to slip a pill into the prisoner’s glass. ·Ten minutes after drinking, he might become a very sick man. Nothing fatal or injurious. Nothing worse than something that felt like acute indiges­tion.
As the prisoner doubles up, sweating, the interrogator is most solicitous. “Lieutenant! You are sick! It may be peritonitis! You’ must go to the hospital immediately. Surely you have a family. You will want us to notify your next of kin if-!”
No prisoner wants to be buried in an unknown grave. Even so, a man might remain defiant. And Scharff would then encourage such defiance. “Hal You won’t tell me the name of your squadron com­mander. What is the name of your commanding genera!?” The defiant prisomer refuses to speak. 8ehr gut, he goes back. to his cell. There he is locked up with his cellmate-a pleasant fellow from Ohio who was captured early in the war. “Huhl Did they sweat you out?” And ”Bud” nods grimly, “Yeah, but .they couldn’t get General Jones’ name out of me.” And at that moment they’ve got it. Perhaps by concealed microphone. Perhaps from the pleasant cellmate who lived ten years in Ohio before he returned to his home Germany.
So most of Scharff’s victims were tricked. They were not tortured with thumbscrews and cigarette burns. They were baffled by stage­craft, misleading geniality, glib queries that were as fast as the jabs and feints of a boxer. The average prisoner who faced Scharff was at almost hopeless disadvantage. He was somewhat in the position of a civilian who might be compelled to improvise his own defense against a skilled and wily District Attorney.
In the war .there were many Scharffs. Not all of them were on the German side. Adept Allied interrogators pumped information from case-hardened Luftwaffe pilots and U-boat skippers. In the closing days of “he war they pumped their rivals-captured Nazi interrogators­among them Joachim Scharff. In this duel among experts the Germans found themselves hoist on their own petards.
The prisoner in an interrogation center is a fly in a web. The enemy has all the say. At the end of World War II the consensus of the experts was this: It i8 virtually impos8ible Jor anyone to resist a determined interrogator.
But the experts came up with another consensus: AUhough a determined . interrogator cannot be resi8ted, he may be evaded by the pri80ner. The prisoner may dodge loaded questions.
Treason Trials, World War II
As in World War I, and, indeed, every previous major war, the Second World War disgorged a number of indigestible traitors. Among the first arrested by the United Nations powers were the Quislings who had willingly cooperated with the Nazis.
In Holland, Belgium, Norway, Denmark and other occupied countries treasonable collaborators were summarily dealt with. Those who had their heads shaved by angry partisans got off easily. Some were tried by kangaroo court and shot.
Some British servicemen were court-martialed for treasonable col­laboration with the enemy while they were prisoners of war. The accusp.d pleaded coercion as a defense. As had the Federal judges of the Civil War, the British military judges took into account “degree of coercion.” They seem to have been severely exacting in the case of Henry Rose, a Navy stoker. Rose had been captured, beaten, threatened with death, and shown two terrifying corpses. (An example of German interrogation at its worst.) The sailor then blurted out the information his captors wanted. The British found him guilty of “aiding the enemy,” and sentenced him to 16 years hard lab<,>r (subsequently reduced). On the other hand, Major Cecil Boon, charged with writing a propaganda letter for the Japanese in Hong Kong, and informing them of a prisoner escape plot, was acquitted on the score that they had threatened him with the “punishment of death.”
American prisoners of war charged with treasonable conduct included
Sergeant John Provoo of theU. S.Army, and Chief Signalman Hirshberg
of the Navy. Another case involved an Army sergeant who wrote to a
Japanese surgeon, offering to aid the, enemy.
Altogether it would seem that the Americans taken prisoner in World
War II established a remarkably fine record for courage, endurance, and
unyielding loyalty. Like their fathers itl the A. E. F. of World War I,
they stood up to a ruthless enemy, and stood up better than well. For
the most part, the soldiers or the aviators who talked to German inter­
rogators were tricked into talking by experts at the game.
The troops went to Normandy and Guadalcanal knowing Why We
Fight and The Nature of the Enemy. The American soldier and his sailor
team-mate were well informed on Hitler and Tojo.
So American POWs of World War II knew pretty much what it was all
about. There were no Arnolds, but many Wainwrights.
Of the 129,701 American prisoners in Axis captivity, 14,090 died in the
enemy’s prison camps. The percentage–l0.9o/’cr-was cruel. -But un­
questionably it would have been higher had morale been as low as it was
in the subsequent Korean War.
Geneva Conventions of 1949
Troubled by the terrible death-toll of prisoners in World War II, dele­gates of the many countries met at Geneva in 1949 to formulate and define higher standards of treatment for POWs. The articles of the earlier Geneva Convention were clarified and strengthened. Fifty-seven nations signed the new Geneva Treaties.
Although the Russians had not participated in the Geneva (POW) Conventions of 1929, the Soviet Union signed the 1949 Convention. So did eight other nations in the Communist bloc. The U. S. S. R. and its satellites held out, however, on certain points. One of their reservations concerned Article 85, Relative To The Treatment’ of Prisoners of War. The Article reads:
Prisoners of War prosecuted under the laws oC the Detaining Power for acts committed prior to capture shall retain, even if convicted, the benefits of the present Convention.
The Soviet delegate entered the following reservation:
The Union oC Soviet Socialist Republics does not consider itself bound by’the obligation, which follows from Article 85, to extend the application oC the Convention to prisoners of war who have been convicted under the law oC ‘the Detaining Power, in accordance with the principles oC the Nuremberg trial, Cor war crimes and crImes against humanity, it being understood that persons convicted oC such crimes must be subjected to the-conditions obtaining in the country in question Cor those who undergo their punishment.
This reservation is a disturbing indication of Soviet intention so far as applying the conventions is concerned.
The Americ:an Way The Russians held thousands of German soldiers in captivity at the close of World War II. Brutality breeds brutality. Hitler’s legions had murderedthousands of Russian and Ukrainian peasants. And the patriotlo
Slavic soldiers sought reprisal. But the men in the Kremlin had other
designs. Doubtlees to the surprise of many Russian Army veterans, the
captured invaders were herded into “political camps.” Instead of shoot­
ing Panzer officers and Stuka pilots for outrages committed, the Red com­
missars shoved them into coloseal indoctrination mills. From dawn to
dark, week in, week out, the prisoners were besieged with Marxian doctrine.
It would seem that their crime, after all, was not invading Russia. They
had been guilty of anti-CommunismI
The Soviet campaign to indoctrinate masses of German prisoners with Communist ideology emerges as one of the strangest war-moves in history. The Reds, of course, were copying the tactics employed by the Germans in World War I when they tried to indoctrinate Irish prisoners with KUltUT. But the early German attempt was picayune compared with the Soviet program. The German attempt failed. The Red indoctrination pro-‘ gram gained hundreds of German converts. Prize of the lot was no less a figure than General Von Paulus, captured at Stalingrad.
While Soviet Communists were haranguing German war-prisoners, the Chinese Reds, waging civil war, adopted similar tactics. Nationalist prisoners were herded into “political camps” and barraged with the Red Chinese version of Marxian doctrine. But the reindootrination of a Nazi-indoctrinated German demanded a high-powered approach akin to evangelism.
It was nothing more tha~ a high-gear recruiting campaign. It did not involve “menticidal” pressuring or anything akin to so-called “brain­washing.” Boiled down, it amounted to a~vertising.
In America there were some who took fright at Communist adver­tising. Alarmists thought the way to combat it was to hilJc it. Taboo the subject. Push it out of sight. The fear of l\’larxist literature, for example, caused the banning of DaB Kapital from a number of school and public libraries. Such censorship gave Marx and his writings a stature far beyond their value.
The way to combat such a subject as Communism is not to hide it­or hide from it. The way to combat it is to explode it. Americans have the means at hand-The Bill of Rights. Or call it Democracy, or Republican Government, or the American Way. Armed with a know­ledge of American principles-and a knowledge of the cnemy’s–the American fighting man possesses a sword and shield which cannot be wrested from him in combat or in captivity.
As in the interrogation battle, the war for the minds of men is a war of wits. It will not be lost by the serviceman who is equipped with the necessary education.
BLANK PAGE
ADDENDA NO.6
BIBLIOGRAPHY
The research bibliography used by the Committee con­tains primarily classified material. For the interested reader the following unclassified articles are suggested.
BLANK PAGE
PRISONER OF WAR DOCUMENTS FROM OFFICIAL·
SOURCES

Department of the Navy
NM 001-056.06 NMRI, Bethesda, Md. CDR S. V. Thompson (MC)
Evaluation of the effects of certain drugs on the performance of personnel involved in tlying. 1952 NR 143-06o-University of Rochester, G. R. Wendt STUDIES OF MOTION 8ICKNESS, 30 June 1954
Vestibular functions .and psychological and physiological effects of drugs. NR 173-071-Indiana University, Douglas ElIson DETECTION OF DECEPTION, Sept. 1952
Determination of reliable indicators for deception measurements through graphic recordings of physiological and motor responses. NR 173-181-John E. Reid & Associates, Chicago RESEARCH ON SIDE-TONE DELAY
Interrogation devices and procedures. Project to develop novel and easily used methods of causing lying subjects to think they have betrayed themselves. Completed May 1953.
Office of the Surgeon General, Department of the Army
A paper written by the five surviving Medical Corps officers who were repatriated prisoners from Korea. Medical experiences in Communist prisoner of war camps in Korea. Undated. Presented to the American Medical Association 24 June 1954.
Office of the Assistant Secretary of Defense (R & D) Publications
Arntzen, F. I., “Psychological Observations of Prisoners of War.” American
Journal oj Psychiatry, 104, 1948,446-447. (German PWs in U. 8.)
Book, F. and Godin, W., Russian Purge and the Extraction oj Confession.

Viking Press, New York, 1950 Bettelheim, Bruno, “Individual and Mass Behavior in Extreme Situa­tions,” Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology; XXXVIII 1943, 417-452.
Brill, N. Q., “Neuropsychiatric Examination of Military Personnel Recovered from Japanese Prison Camps,” Bulletin of the U. S. Army Medical Department.
Jeffrey, Manfred, and Bradford, E. J. G., “Neurosis in Escaped Prisoners of War,” British Journal oj Medical PSllchologll,20, 1945-46,422-435 Kinnan, B. H. “Mental Disorder in Released PriBOners of War,” Journal
oj Mental Science, 92, 1946,803-813 Newman, P. H. “The Prisoner-of-War Meiltality,” British Medical Journal 1; January 1, 1944, 8ff
Legal
Geneva Conventions of 12 Aug. 1949 for the Protection of War Victims, DA Pamphlet No. 20-150, Oct. 1950. Vol. 55, 80th Congress, Public Law 810, Laws Relating to the Department
of the Army, 1948.
Manual for Court Martial, 1951.
Title 18, U. S. Code.

Documents Pertaining to Conduct in Event of Capture
War Dept., FM 27-10, 1947, “Rules of Land Warfare”
Department of State
“Chinese Communist Methods of Extracting Confessions for Political Ends” IR-6198, dated 19 Feb 53
Operations Research Office, Johns Hoplcins Univenity
“Study of Combat Stress in Korea,” ORo-T-41 (FEC), dated Dec 52,
Department of the Air Force
“Psychiatric Report,” AF-RDB Report Control Symbol, DD-RDS (A) 48 ARDCD3, Project 7732, “Unclassified Intelligence Methodology” Article: Col. John J. Driscoll, Air Force Magazine, Nov 1952, Subj:
It Could Have Been You.
Far East Command
“Communist Utilization of Prisoners of War,” Hq. USA, Far East, Ad­vanced, OACofS, G-2.
Department of the Air Force
Memorandum: For Secy of Air Force, Commandant U. S. Marine Corps, by General Erskine, Asst. to the Secy of Defense, Subj: Statements Regarding Biological Warfare by Members of USAF and USMC.
-RAND Corporation
“Are the Cominform Countries Using Hypnotic Techniques to Elicit Confession in Public Trials?”, Irving L. Janis, RM-161, dated 25 April 49
-Miscellaneous
“Technique of Communist ‘Confession’ “, Edward Crankshaw, New York Herald Tribune, dated 10 Dec 52.
“The Policy of the Soviet Union in Regard to Prisoners of War Prior to
and at the Start of World War II”, Anthony S; Kawczynski, Undated
“New Facts on U. S. Germ WarCare in Korea and China” (Supplement
to “People’s China”), 15 Mar 53, (No.6, Issue) (re Schwable and Bley)
Selected Articles, 1952-1953, “High Level U. S. Denials of Germ Warfare.”

Department of State
Foreign Service Despatch 2543, Paris, May 19, 1953
American University Field Staff Study
Department of the Army
HQ, 500th Military Intelligence Group, item 9-204752, Mimeographed instructions in Chinese dated 25 September 1951, titled “PW Policy and the Handling of PWs,” issued by the Political Section, 422dRegt, CCF. 3 PP. no date.
Newspapers
Washington Evening Star, ” ‘Brain Wash’ Possibility,” April 17, 1953 Washington Evening Star, “20 Exposed to Propaganda Reach Valley Forge Hospital,” May 2, 1953 Washington Evening Star, “Returned POW Says He Signed Petition After ‘Brain Washing’,” May 4 (or 5), 1953 The Washington Post, “,Freed AF Captain Tells of Forced Red Study,” . April 27, 1953 The Washington Post, “All Released POWs To Be Treated Alike,” May 25, 1953 The Washington Post, “Teaching Gi’s to Withstand Communist Brain­Washing,” July 11, 1954, by Lloyd Shearer Washington Daily News, “US Fears ‘Confessions’ of POWs,” by Charles Lucey, April 4, 1953 The New York Times, “Some GI Captives’May Seem Pro-Red,” April 13, 1953 The New York Times, In The Nation, “Allen W. Dulles Describes ‘War­fare for the Brain’ ” by Arthur Krock, April 16, 1953 The New York Times, “Some Prisoners Report Poor Care,” April 21, 1953 The New York Times, “Ex-Captive Says 17 Took Red Lessons,” April 27, 1953 The New York Times, “Red Lecturers Bored Most P. W.s,” by Mac R. Johnson, May 3, 1953 The New York Times, “Red Torture Cited by Chinese Bishop,” May 18, 1953 The New York Times, “US Calls on UN to Scan Atrocities by Reds in Korea,” October 29 (or 30), 1953 New York Journal American, On The Line, “Red Torture Techniques,” by Bob Considine, February 25, 1953 New York Journal American, “Tell of Red Propaganda Pressure,” April 20, 1953 ‘ New York Mirror, “UN POWs May Get ‘Brain Washings’,” March 31, 1953
New York Mirror, Inside Labor, by Vict.or Riesel, M~y 1, 1953
Christian Science Monitor, “Returning GIs Report Indoctrination by Reds,” April 20, 1953
Christian Science Monitor, “Chinese-Soviet Divergences on Korea Re­solved in Favor of China,” by William R. Frye, April 18, 1953
Christian Soience Monitor, “LeGay Tells How Reds Aimed to Confuse PWs,” by Cpl. Donald LeGay, May 5, 1953 Information and “Reference Section, Radio Free Asia (Source: Interna­tional Free Trade Union News, 3-53), “Chinese Observer Says He Saw Reds Torture UN POW’s, Push Indoctrination Program,” March 13, 1953 Sources: RfJaders Guide to Periodical Literatur6, May 1945 through 18 December 1953.
America
“Caution at Panmunjon”, Apr 1953, 89: 65 “PWs: A Red Sop?”, May 2, 1953, 89: 99 “Pros on Trial”, Aug 29, 1953, 89: 511 “Wind-up of Operation Big Switch”, Sep 19, 1953,89: 585 “Resistance to The Death by PWs”, Oct 3, 1953, 98: 1 “Pro-Communist 23”, Oct 10, 1953, 90: 35 “Conflict Over POWs”, Oct 17, 1953, 90: 63 “Operation Persuader Backfires”, Oct 31, 1953, 90: 115 “India Learns About Reds; Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission,” Nov 1, 1953, 90; 167 “Puzzlement in the Pentagon”, Nov 14, 1953, 90: 102-3 “Atrocities in Korea”, Dec 12, 1953, 90: 283
Business Week
“Nor Prison Bars A Cage”, Nov 14, 1953, p. 157
Christian Century
‘Djang, R., “What Do They Confess”, Aug 20, 1952,69: 946-8 Stockwell, F. G., “What Is Brainwashing?”, Jan 28, 1953,70: 104-5 “Back to The Days of Hostages”, Mar 18, 1953, 70: 308 Foreman, K. J., Jr., “What Is Brainwashing?”, (Reply and Rejoinder), May 6, 1953, 70: 537-8 ‘ “Korean Missionary Prisoners Freed”, May 6, 1953, 70: 531 “Prisoners Describe Reality of War”, Aug 12, 1953,70: 907 “Prisoner of War”, Nov 4, 1953, 70: 1254-6
Colliers
Spellman, F., “How Red China Tortures Protestant and Catholic Mis­sionaries”, May 10, 1952, 129: 15-17 Victoria, Sister Mary, “I Was A Prisoner of The Chinese Reds”, May 9, 1953, 131: 68-73 Fay, B., “It’s Easy To Bluff Americans”, May 16, 1953, 131: 20-3
B. Stapleton and T. D. Harrison, “Why Didn’t Some GIs Tum Commu­nist?” Nov 27, 1953, 132: 25-8
Commonwealth
“BraiI;lwashed”, May 15, 1953, 58: 138 Hock, S., “Heresy, Yes: Conspiracy, No”, May IS, 1953, 58: 155-6 “Exchange of Prisoners”, Aug 21, 1953, 58: 479 “Prisoners; Perversion of Loyalties”, Oct 16, 1953, 59: 26-9
“Indian Village; Prisoner Exchange”, Oct 30, 1953, 59: 75
Current History
“Disposition of POWs; Complete Tex~”, Sept 1953, 25: 181-4
Department of State Bulletin
“Thought Control in The Soviet Union,” Nov 5,1951,25: 719-2:1: Nov 26,
1951, 844-51: Dec 3, 1951, 895-903 “Communist War In POW Camps,” Feb 16, 1953, 28: 273 “Release of Anti-Communist Prisoners From UN Camps and Corre­spondence”, June 29, 1953, 28: 905-8
“Communist Charges Regarding Release of Korean Prisoners”; Text of Letter Sent On June 29, 1953, July 13, 1953, 29: 46-7 “Communist Retention of U. S. POWs”, July 20, 1953,29: 73-4 Dulles, J. F., “Report of POWs: Witnessing the Return of U. S. POWs
in Korea”, Aug 24, 1953,29: 235-6
Mayo, C. W., “Role of Forced Confessions In The Communist Germ Warfare Propaganda Campaign; Statement Oct 26, 1953”, Nov 9, 1953, 29: 641-7
Fortune
“Germ Warfare: The Lie That Won”, Nov 1953, 48: 92
International Conciliation “Issues Before The 8th General Assembly”, Sep 1953, 493: 6
Life
“Back Mter Eight Years,” Apr 6, 1953, 34: 30-1
“Photos Reveal Some GIs Not On Exchange List,” May 11, 1953, ~7-31
“Into Eager Arms A Few Come Home,” May.ll, 1953,36-40
Brinkley, William, “Valley Forge GIs Tell of Brainwashing Ordeal,” May 25, 1953, 108–124 Heiden, K., “Why They Confess,” June 20, 1949, 92-4 Fahy, E. E., “Burial Above Ground,” Sep8, 1952, 33: 126-130 “Big Switch Is Open,” Aug 17, 1953,35: 22-3 Lee, Kyoo Hyun, “Heroism of General Dean Is Revealed When Most Famous POW Is Set Free,” Sept 14, 1953,35: 45
“Prisoners of ?ardon,” Oct 5, 1953,35: 26
“POWs of the Reds Do Not Want To Come Home To America; Photographs’,” Oct 19, 1953 “We Got Everything You Wanted,” Oct 19, 1953, 35: 45 “Panmunjon Dilemma,” Oct 19,1953,35: 45 “Prisoner’s Door To Freedom,” Oct 26, 1953,35: 44-5 “Prodigal and His Kin,” Nov 2, 1953,35: 45 “Big Lie; How Reds Got Germ Confessions,” Nov 9; 1953, 35: 51 Martin, D., “Iron Empire of PanmunjoD,” Nov 30, 1953, 31S: 137-8
look
Wilson, Richard, “How U. S. Prisoners Broke lTnder Red ‘Brainwashing’ “, June 2, 1953, 8~83
Nation
“Brainwashing At Valley Forge,” May 23, 1953, 176: 425-6 Oct 10, 1953, 177: 281 New Republic
“New Dangers Ahead In Korea; Chinese and North Korean Soldiers Under Indian Custody,” Oct 12, 1953, 129: 3 “Dogs, Rats and Now, Men, Germ Warfare Tortures,” Nov 9, 1953, 129: 8
New York Times Magazine
Lawrance, W. H., “Why Do They Confess!,” May 8, 1949, 7 Palmer, C. R, “War For The POW’s Mind,” Sept 13, 1953, 13
Newsweek
“How The Reds Treat American paws and How The UN Cares For
Communist paWs,” Dec 17, 1951, 38: 36-7 “Communist Trial,” May 12, 1952, 39: 106 (Robert A. Vogler) “Snafu At Valley Forge,” May 18, 1953,44-46 “And Buddy-Buddy; Washed Brains of POWs: Can They Be Rewashed?,”
May 4, 1953,41: 35-7 “UN Tells Panmunion Reds: ‘Time, Patience Running Out'” May 11
1953, 37-38 ‘ , “Without Honor,” July 13, 1953, 42: 30 “What About Reds Among Freed U. S. Prisoners?,” Aug 17, 1953, 42: 21 “Terror And Torture: 5 Prisoners’ Stories,” Aug 17, 1953, 42: 32 “Sick paws,” Aug 17, 1953,42: 58 “Propaganda and Reality; Photographs,” Aug 17, 1953, 42: 30 “Back From Red Death Camps, paws Rediscover Freedom” Aug 17
1953, 42: 29 ‘ , “Rats,” Aug 24, 1953, 42: 30 “VN Reds Move Into New Phase,” Sept 21, 1953, 42: 40
“Op. Big Switch,” Sept.21, 1953, 42: 90 . “Riots And Repatriation Rules,” Oct 12, 1953, 42: 36 “Lo, The Poor Indian Troops, Berated and Belabored By All” Oct 19
1953, 42: 58 ‘ , “Father Mao Thrown For Loss But POW Came Far From Over,” Oct 26
1953, 42: 60 ‘ “There’s Joy in Crackers Neck,” Nov 2, 1953, 42: 22-3 “Captive Sales Audience,” Nov 2, 1953, 42: 81
“Stalled Truce,” Nov 2, 1953,42: 42 . “Son Of A Dog,” Nov 9, 1953, 42: 38 “Thimayya of India and ·Korea,” Nov 16, 1953,42: 40 “Fear In No Crime,” Nov 16, 1953, 42:.47 “It Is Inhuman,” Nov 16, 1953, 62: 32 “Korea Bunkers: Winter Watch,” Nov 23, 1953, 42: 38 . “July 4 on January 22,” Nov 30, 1953, 42: 47 “Patriot’s Tears,” Dec 14, 1953, 42: 24
Reeder’s Digest Swift, S. K., “How They Broke Cardinal Mindszenty”, Nov 1949, 55: 1-10
Reporter
“Sent To The Cleaners”, May 26, 1953, 8: 2
“Indians Test”, Oct 27, 1953, 9: 2
“Panmunjon-Out”, Nov 24, 1953, 9: 31-2

Saturday Review
Wolfe, H. C., “Story Of A Shock”, May 10, 1952, 35: 14-15
Saturday Evening Posl
Gallery, D. V., “We Can Baffle the Brainwashers”, 22 Jan. 1955. Martin, H. H., “They Tried To Make Our Marines Love Stalin”, Aug 25, 1951, 224: 25
White, L., “I Was Stalin’s Prisoner” (R. A. Vogler), Oct 27, 1951, 224: 17-19; Nov 10,1951,29,; Nov 3,1951,36-37; Nov 17, 1951,29; Nov 24, 1951, 30; Dec 1, 1951, 30.
Bryan, Robert T., Jr., “I Came Back From A Red Death Cell”, Jan 17, 1953, 28: 116-118; Jan 24, 1953, 34: 58-63; Jan 31, 1953, 27: 83-86; Feb 7, 1953, 28: 114-118
“GIs Outshine Eggheads In Resisting Reds”, Oct 31, 1953, 226: 10
“What Price UN Pledge To The Anti-Red POWs?”, Oct 31, 1953, 226:10
“Asiatic POWs Throw The Book At Reds”, Nov 14, 1953,226: 10
“Red Murder of 6,000 GIs Finally Angers Us”, Nov 28, 1953, 226: 10
Science Digest Keempffert, W. “Pres.cription For Our POWs”, Dec 1953, 34: 29-30
Science News Le”er
“Forced Confessions; Menticide”, July 21, 1951, flO: 43 Vogler, R. A. “Analyze Mind Washing”, May 16, 1953,310-311 “Not Necessarily Commie”, Oct 11, 1953, 64: 230
Scholastic
“Tortur~ Techniques of Communist Prosecutors In Iron. Curtain Coun­tries”, Mar 15, 1950, 56: 22 “Lie Detector: Message Claimed To Have Been Signed By 38 American Officers Who Are POWs”, Sept 27, 1950, 57: 13
“Freedom For A Few,” Apr 29, 1953, 62: 14
“They Refuse To Go Home”, Oct 7,1953,63: 17
“They Chose Freedom”, Oct 28,1953,63: 12
“Prisoner Talks Stalled”, Nov 4, 1953,63: 19-20
“Red’s War Crimes Bared; Red Explainers Fail”, Nov 11, 1953, 63: 33
Dean, W. R., “American Hero; Interview”; Nov 18, 1953, 63: 6
Time
“Brainwaahing”, Oct. 8, 1951, 58: 39-40
“Brainwashing At Work”, May 26,1953,59: 41
“Welcome To Freedom”, Apr 27, 1953,32
“Prisoners: Anly 149 American”, May 4, 1953,33
“The Boys Come Home”, May 11, 1953, 30
“Big Switch”, Aug 17, 1953,62: 20
“Ugly Story”, Aug 24, 1953, 62: 18
“Reactionaries”, Sept 7, 1953, 62: 32
“Blackmail Scheme”, Sept 21, 1953, 62: 33
“Tough Prisoners”, Sept 21, 1953,62: 28-9
“Just A Stone’s Throw; Anti-Communist North Korean and Chinese
Prisoners”, Sept 28, 1952, 62: 19
“23 American”, Oct 5, 1953,62: 33
“Sin ~f Omission”, Oct 12, 1953,62: 26
“To A Young Progressive”, Oct 19, 1953,62: 32
“Frustration At Panmunjon”, Oct 19, 1953, 62: 42
“One Who Won’t Return”, Oct 26, 1953,62: 27
“Door to Taiwan”, Oct 26, 1953, 62: 32
“Story of Blood”, Nov 2, 1953,62: 27
“Stymied”, Nov 2, 1953, 62: 28
“One Changed His Mind”, Nov 2, 1953, 62: 25-6
“Cowardice In Korea”, Nov 2, 1953,62: 31
“Germ Warfare: Forged Evidence”, Nov 9, 1953,62: 22
“2nd Humiliation; The Explainers”, Nov 9, 1953,62: 26
“Go Slow”, Nov 16, 1953, 62: 24
“Towards Disenchantment In India”, Nov 23, 1953, 62: 35
“Towards January 22”, Nov 30, 1953, 62: 41
“Soldier’s Soldier”, Dec 7, 1953, 62: 27
“Other Side”, Dec 14, 1953, ~2: 40
U. N. Bulletin
“Prison Breaks Threaten Armistice”, July I, 1953, 16: 8-10

U. N. World
Domaitre, E., “Why Do They Confess”, Dec 1949, 3: 22-4

U. S. News and World Report
Hayes, John D. “I Saw Red China From Inside”, Mar 13, 1953,26-32
Dulles, Allan W., “Brain Warfare-Russia’s Secret Weapon”, May 8,
. 1953, 54-58 (It Explains The “Confessions” of Captured Americans)
“Real Story of Returned Prisonera”, May 29, 1953, 54-63 (Tape Record­
ings of GIa Back From Korea) “Korean War Prisoners-It’ll Be a Long Trail Home”, June 5, 1953, 22 .i’Prisoners Who Broke”, Aug 1, 1953, 36: 30 “Report of POWs’ Text of Agreement and Supplementary Agreement”,
Aug 7, 1953, 35: 92-4 “Missing In Action: 8,000 Now Known To Be Dead”, Aug 7, 1953,35: 28 “Truth VB Promises In Korea”, Aug 14, 1953, 35: 35
“General Clark Reports on Korea; Text of Dieeul!sion at The Pentagon, Aug 6, 1953”, Aug 14, 1953, 35: 8~5 Peterson, C. B., “Prisoners Swayed; Didn’t Fall, Interview”, Aug 28, 1953,35: 28 “Back To The Germ Warfare Hoax, Tortures; U. S. Officers’ Own Story”,
Sept 18, 1953, 35: 20-4, Sept 4, 1953, 35: 24 “Korean Puzzle: Americans Who Stay”, Oct 9, 1953, 35: 3HO Russell, R. B., “For The Prisoners Who Broke, Kindness or Punishment?
Letter to Defense Secretary Wilson With Statement by Mr. Wilson”, Oct 16, 1953, 35: 5l-3 “Articles From The Macon (Ga.) Telegraph: Fliers Ready to Die Rather
Than Confess Germ Warfare”, Oct 16, 1953, 35 “Big Ftop At Panmunjon”, Oct 30, 1953, 35: 30-2 Mayo, G. W., “Destroying American Minds; Russians Made It a Science;
Text of Report To Political Committee, UN”, Nov 6, 1953,35: 97-101 Dickenson, 8. S. “Why Some GIs Stay With Reds: Interview”, Nov 13,
1953,35: 33 “Where are 944 Missing GIs?”, Dec 18, 1953, 35: 77-8 Lawrence, D., “To Th.e Unreturned Prisoners”, 35: 100
Vital Speeches
Lew, D. H. “Brainwashing In Stalinist China”, June 1, 1952, 18: 497-501 Douglas,P. E., “Korean POW Issue”, July 1, 1953, 19: 568-70. Sokolzky, O. X. “Where Are Our Bons?”, Sept 1, 1953, 19: 678-9 Sheen,Fulton, “Changed Concept of Man”, Nov 15, 1953, 20: 83-5
-…
BLANK PAGE
ADDENDA NO. 7 CHARTS NO.1 POW BREAKDOWN NO. 2 BREAKDOWN BY SERVICE NO.3 HOW POW’S WERE PROCESSED NO• .4 HOW SUSPECTS WERE INVESTIGATED
BLANK PAGE
OUT OF 1.6 MILLION IN KOREAN CONFLICT 20 JULY 1955
7,190 WERE CAPTURED NO I

2,730
DEAD
AN ADDITIONAL 470 WERE MISSING
• 21     Refused Repatriation
•     II Retained by the Communists AQainst Their Will (Subsequently Released)
7,190 CAPTURED· KOREA 20 JULY 1955 NO -2
ARMY
t t t t t t t tt 1
t
AIR FORCE , 3% MARINE CORPS
1
I
NAVY ,
~ HOW THE 4,428 POW’s WERE PROCESSED 20 JULY 1955
NO 3
JOINT SERVICE
ACTION SCREENING

I,
3,973
ARMY ,I G2 426–t
II
I

II
NAVY 31 I ONI 0

~
565
II
REQUIRED
I ,,I
FURTHER
MARINE
200 INVESTIGATION
52–+
CORPS I G2 II
AIR “,I OSI
224
II 81-,+ /
FORCE I
BIG &
,863
lITTLE SWITCH
INTERROGATION CLEARED

HOW THE 565 WERE INVESTIGATED STATUS
CLEARED AS OF 2 NOV. 1955
SEPARATED 63
ARMY
G2 CONVICTED 9 126
SPECIAL COUNCIL (Court Martial)
426
PENDING 54*
NAVY ONI
o
(Relnlerv)ew)
o
M.C.
MARINE ~-“BOARD OF INQUIRY r—… REPRIMAND
CORPS I—e >-…..1 RESTRICTED 3
M.C.
ASSIGNMENT 2
52 COURT OF INQUIRY
AIR
SEPARATED 4
BOARD
FORCE 10
GEN’L, OFFICERS RESIGNED 6
87
MAXIMUM
* (54 Arm,> .tlil und”I.I’1 OIlon,l” I.”,tll.tlon. 139 POSSIBLE Possibly Ius Ulan hall will ultimately rlcelu MISBEHAVIOR
same form or punishment. CASES

THE SECRETARY OF DEFENSE
November 1955 •
This official Department of Defense publication is for the use of personnel in the Military Services.
Charles E. Wilson
By ORDER OF THE SECRETARIES OF THE ARMY AND THE
AIR FORCE:
MAXWELL D. TAYLOR,
General, [“nite.d States Army, OFFICIAL: Ohief of Staff·
JOHN A. KLEIN,
Major General, United States A7’1n,ll, The Adjutant General.
N. F. TWINING,
OFFICIAL: Chief of Staff, United States Air Force.
E. E. TORO,
Colonel, United States Air Force, Air Adjutant General.
DISTRIBUTION:
Active Army: Three copies per 100 Officers and Enlisted Men PLUS:
Gen Staff, DA (2)
SS,DA (2).
Tee Svc, DA (2)
Hq CONARC (15)
Army AA Comd (15)
OS Maj Comd (15)
MDW (15)
Armies (15)
Corps (5)
Div (.5)
Tng Div t5)

Brig (5)
Regt (5)
Bn (5)
Instl (5)
USMA (75)
PMST (2)
CrtIit Dist (2)
Cruit Main Sta (2)
MAAG (2)
Mil Msn (2)
ARMA (2)

NG and USAR: Div (3); Brig (3); Regt (3); Bn (3); Co (1). For explanation of abbreviations used, see SR 320-50-1.
U. 5. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1955

 

A Guide to the Army

A Guide to the Army

What is the United States Army?
 
 
The United States Army is classified as the ground forces overseen by the United States Department of Defense. The United States Army may be subject to a wide variety of military deployment, ranging from both domestic and international in nature. Martial Law is the instatement of Military rule over specific jurisdictions within a country or nation; in many cases with regard to the implementation of heightened security measures, the United States Army may be appointed in the event that the acting body of civil law enforcement is unable to maintain sufficient order.
 
Military Law vs. Federal Law
 
The United States Department of Defense operates under Federal Law as per the guidelines expressed within the disbursement of a triune governmental oversight system, which allows for the United States Army to exist under the jurisdiction of the Executive branch of the government; this results in the appointment of the President of the United States as the Commander in Chief of the entirety of the Armed Forces. However, Military Law – a legal field classified as a subgenre of Federal Law – typically addresses the activity and behavior of military personnel; this can include:
Judge Advocate General (JAG Corps): The JAG Corps – or Judge Advocate General Corps – are classified as the acting legal body within the United states Army. JAG Corps not only oversee the court martial process, but also are responsible for upholding the maintenance of the protocols and parameters expressed within the UCMJ; in many cases, the legal issues addressed by the acting JAG Corps are specific – these include: war crimes, treason, sedition, refusal to obey orders, undue violence, and offenses directed against military personnel.
The United States Army Court System
 
 
As a service member, an individual will typically undergo circumstances that are unique to military service. On one hand, military law is similar to civil law in the manner that applicable legal codes specify any or all punitive recourse with regard to crimes and offenses; military law offers a specific framework for conducting, trying, and sentencing. On the other hand, military law differs from civil law – specifically with regard to matters concerning Army – as such matters are neither standard nor applicable to civilian legislative parameters. As a result, legality specific to military service may be subject to military judicial review, as well as military court-mandated classification and punishment(s).
The United States Army and the Uniform Code of Military Justice (UCMJ)
 
 
Individuals in the service of the United States Military are typically subject to their respective adherence to the Uniform Code of Military Justice (UCMJ); the UCMJ is considered to be a code of legislative protocol with regard to legal matters applicable to service members – service members may be subject to be tried under military court in lieu of civil court. Those serving in the United States Military do so under the implicit understanding service members may be subject to Military Court hearings in lieu of Civil Court hearings. Matters undertaken under the jurisdiction of the military, such as the United States Army, will be assessed by court officials appointed for the oversight of such matters.